FCR MB201 Ru - 01e
Uploaded by
jorgeFCR MB201 Ru - 01e
Uploaded by
jorgeTo CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE
GUIDE PAGE To Table of Contents of Service Manual
How to Use PDF Manual
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Installation
Search the error code. Installation Specifications
The Operation Panel does not transition to its default screen. Preparation for Installation
Connection is not established between RU and Console Installation Procedures (Mechanical)
Distinguish between abnormal images. Installation Procedures (Software Setup)
Abnormal image occurs. Registering the Master CL
Gather log data.
Documents and References to be Used When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Preventive Maintenance
Software Control (relationship with Console) Preventive Maintenance Programs
System Block Diagrams List of Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts:
Electrical Block Diagrams/Short-Circuit Detection 2nd-Year / 3rd-Year / 4th-Year
Circuit Diagrams (Disconnection check) Procedures
I/O Locations and Their Functional Overview
Unit Locations Software Related Checkpoints
Roller Locations/Conveyance Paths
Install/version update software and applications.
Voltage check
Gather log data.
Image Related Checkpoints Back up/restore machine shipment control data.
Back up/restore configuration data.
Sensitivity/Shading Correction
Machine Maintenance Utility
Parts Related Checkpoints RU PC-TOOL
MUTL
Parts List (INDEX)
-1-
To GUIDE PAGE
CLIENT PC - GUIDE PAGE
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Features of the Client PC Outline of ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations
Features and Operations Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations
List of CLIENT PC-TOOL Commands Operation in ON-LINE Mode
Operation in OFF-LINE Mode
Precautions in Using the Client PC
Precautions in Using a Notebook PC without CD Drive Data Flow of Commands
UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
Precautions in Setting the “Windows Firewall”
in Console READ and WRITE
Precautions in Setting the “Internet Options” Import and Export
in Client PC
Maintenance
Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL
Acquisition of Log Information
Check/Acquisition of History Data
Check/Acquisition of Configuration Data
MUTL
Version Update
-2-
How to Use PDF Manual
Hyperlinks
A hyperlinks is inserted at the blue-colored mark in this manual.
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference chapter or section.
-Example of Hyperlink-
{MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit}
Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section.
-3-
BLANK PAGE
-4-
Portable Digital X-ray System / FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY
FCR Go 2
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the
unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram),
which is the SI derived unit of radiation, is as follows.
1 mR = 0.258μC/kg
FCR is a trademark or a registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation.
<No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted.>
Copyright © 2010 FUJIFILM Corporation. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form or by means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 014-237-01E
1st Edition - Aug. 20, 2010
Printed in Japan
BLANK PAGE
0.1
1. Handling of This Manual 1.3 About Notation in the Manual
n Notation of cautions, warnings, etc.
1.1 About This Manual The notation formats of "warning", "caution", "Instruction", "note", and "reference" are shown
below.
n Scope
This Service Manual is applicable to Fuji Computed Radiography FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit.
WARNING
The machine is categorized as Class 1 according to IEC classification. Used when death or serious injury may occur if the instruction is not observed.
n Notation of Unit Symbols
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units (SI) CAUTION
are used, as a rule. However, metric units that are allowed in the Measurement Law, not in Used when minor or medium levels of physical injury may be incurred if the instruction
the SI, are used in some cases. is not observed.
Also used when the machine may suffer serious trouble (such as unrecoverable or
1.2 Precautions for Handling of This Manual difficult-to-recover trouble).
1. FUJIFILM Corporation reserves all rights related to this manual. u INSTRUCTION u
Used when the machine may suffer damage, or any failure or malfunction may occur, if the
2. This manual should be accessible only to technical service personnel instruction is not observed.
authorized by FUJIFILM Corporation.
3. Since this manual contains confidential information of FUJIFILM Corporation, u NOTE u
such as the internal structure of the product, appropriate measures should Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure.
be taken to prevent illegal or inappropriate disclosure and/or use of this
manual. REFERENCE
Used to indicate terminology or supplemental explanations.
4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of
FUJIFILM Corporation:
- Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual n Indication of Refer To
- Disclose, furnish, lend, and/or transfer a whole or part of the contents of The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
this manual to persons other than the afore-described technical service Its format is as indicated below.
personnel. {MC:5.1_Cassette Set Unit}
- Use a whole or part of the contents of this manual for purposes other than
n Notation in the Manual
technical servicing of the product.
In this Service Manual, the FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit is sometimes denoted simply as the
5. Portions of the descriptions in this manual may be revised due to RU.
improvements on the product.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.1
0.2
n Notation of Symbols
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
installation location when the part or component
removed is to be reinstalled.
CHECK1 This indicator is placed in the illustration that depicts
the procedures for removing the parts and components.
When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
" Check/Adjustment Procedures."
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches
when installing the parts or components.
However, it is not indicated for the half-punches for
improving ease of assembly or preventing erroneous
assembly procedures.
1.4 Servicing Instruments and Tools That Require Inspection/
Calibration
The machine should be installed and serviced by use of servicing instruments and tools that
have been regularly inspected and calibrated as appropriate.
If the machine were serviced using servicing instruments and tools that have not been
inspected and calibrated, proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed.
Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration are as listed below.
The inspection/calibration should be planned and performed in accordance with the
specifications and instruction manuals of the applicable servicing instruments and tools.
n Instruments and tools that require inspection/calibration
Name Inspection Calibration
Dosimeter -
Steel rule (150mm) -
Steel rule (300mm) -
Digital multimeter
Calipers () -
: A block gauge for use in inspection requires calibration.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.2
Contents Safety Precautions 0.3
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual - Contents
Safety Precaution
1. Safety Precautions ........................................... Safety-1
1.1 General Precautions ............................................................... Safety-1
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation ....................................... Safety-2
1.3 Definition of Patient Environment or the Like ........................... Safety-2
2. Labels ................................................................ Safety-3
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels and Rating Indication Label ............... Safety-3
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Labels and Rating Indication Label Attachment Locations
Safety-3
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels and Rating Indication Label ..........Safety-4
2.2 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations ............ Safety-5
2.2.1 Housing Unit ....................................................................................Safety-5
2.2.2 Cassette Set Unit ............................................................................Safety-5
2.2.3 Erasure Unit ....................................................................................Safety-5
2.2.4 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit .......................................................Safety-6
2.2.5 Subscanning Unit ............................................................................Safety-6
2.2.6 Light-Collecting Guide .....................................................................Safety-7
2.2.7 Scanning Optics Unit .......................................................................Safety-7
2.2.8 Cassette Insertion Operation Label, Cassette Right-Justifying Label ..........
Safety-7
2.2.9 Lead Precaution Label ....................................................................Safety-8
3. Protective Housings Against Laser ExposureSafety-9
4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves ........... Safety-10
4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .................................... Safety-10
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.3
Contents Product Specifications 0.4
Product Specifications
1. Specifications of FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit ......Spec-1
1.1 Available IP Sizes and Types .................................................... Spec-1
1.2 Available Cassette Types and Sizes.......................................... Spec-1
1.3 List of Optional Items ................................................................ Spec-1
1.4 Product Specifications............................................................... Spec-1
1.5 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity ............................... Spec-2
1.6 Environmental Conditions.......................................................... Spec-2
1.7 Electrical Specifications ............................................................. Spec-3
1.8 Servicing Space ........................................................................ Spec-3
1.9 Disposal .................................................................................... Spec-3
1.9.1 Disposal of IP ....................................................................................Spec-3
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.4
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.5
Machine Description (MD)
1. Machine Overview ..................................................MD-1 2. Descriptions of Software Control .......................MD-17
1.1 Features ...................................................................................... MD-1 2.1 Network Settings ........................................................................ MD-17
1.2 System Configuration ................................................................... MD-1 2.2 Data Flow between RU and CL .................................................. MD-17
1.3 Overall RU Configuration and Component Names........................MD-2 2.2.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing ............................................... MD-17
1.3.1 External View of RU ............................................................................ MD-2 2.2.2 INSTALL Operation and Data Flow ............................................... MD-18
1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions .............................................................. MD-2 2.2.3 "VERSION UP" Operation and Data Flow ......................................... MD-20
1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents .......................................... MD-3 2.2.4 Flow of BACKUP Data....................................................................... MD-21
1.4 Machine Components ..................................................................MD-4 2.2.5 Data Flow during Restore .................................................................. MD-21
1.4.1 Unit Locations ...................................................................................... MD-4 2.3 Master CL Switching Function ....................................................MD-22
1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths ............................................ MD-4 2.4 Error Handling ............................................................................MD-23
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions ....................................MD-5 2.4.1 Error Handling ................................................................................... MD-23
1.5.1 Cassette Set Unit - 1 ........................................................................... MD-5 2.4.2 Cases where Retry is Impossible (FATAL Error) ............................... MD-23
1.5.2 Cassette Set Unit - 2 ........................................................................... MD-6 2.5 HIBERNATION Mode .................................................................MD-24
1.5.3 Cassette Set Unit - 3 ........................................................................... MD-7 2.5.1 Operation in HIBERNATION Mode.................................................... MD-24
1.5.4 Erasure Unit ........................................................................................ MD-8 2.5.2 Transition to the HIBERNATION Mode ............................................. MD-24
1.5.5 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit - 1 ..................................................... MD-9 2.5.3 Recovery from HIBERNATION Mode ................................................ MD-24
1.5.6 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit - 2 ................................................... MD-10 2.6 Bootup Processing .....................................................................MD-25
1.5.7 Subscanning Unit ...............................................................................MD-11 2.7 RU Shutdown Processing ..........................................................MD-26
1.5.8 Housing ............................................................................................. MD-12
1.6 Board Locations ......................................................................... MD-13
1.6.1 Housing ............................................................................................. MD-13
1.6.2 Cassette Set Unit .............................................................................. MD-13
1.6.3 Erasure Unit ...................................................................................... MD-13
1.6.4 Scanning Optics Unit ......................................................................... MD-14
1.6.5 Light-Collecting Unit .......................................................................... MD-14
1.6.6 Subscanning Unit .............................................................................. MD-14
1.7 System Block Diagram ............................................................... MD-15
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.5
Contents Machine Description (MD) 0.6
3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations ................MD-27
3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function.......................MD-27
3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection Circuit and
the Components to Be Protected ...................................................... MD-27
3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected .................................... MD-27
3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram ................................... MD-28
3.2 Erasure Unit Control...................................................................MD-30
3.2.1 Overview of the Erasure Unit Control ................................................ MD-30
3.2.2 Components of Erasure Unit Control ................................................ MD-31
3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and Board Configurations .......................................... MD-32
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.6
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.7
Troubleshooting (MT)
1. Overview of Troubleshooting ................................ MT-1 4.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 7 .................................... MT-72
1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting ............................................................... MT-2 4.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 8 .................................... MT-73
1.2 Analysis and Check Flow Marks................................................... MT-3 4.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 9 .................................... MT-74
1.3 How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting from Error Log" ....................... MT-4 4.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 10 .................................. MT-75
1.4 Troubleshooting from Error Log .................................................... MT-5 4.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 11 ................................... MT-76
1.4.1 Checking the Error Log ........................................................................ MT-5 4.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 12 .................................. MT-77
1.4.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble ..................... MT-6 4.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 13 .................................. MT-78
1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the Associated Analysis Flow .. MT-7 4.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 14 .................................. MT-79
1.4.4 Viewing the Check Flows in Accordance with an Analysis Flow........... MT-8 4.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 15 .................................. MT-80
1.5 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch..........................................MT-10 4.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 16 ...................................MT-81
4.17 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 17 .................................. MT-82
2. Error Code Table .................................................. MT-11 4.18 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 18 .................................. MT-83
3. Detail Code............................................................ MT-64 4.19 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 19 .................................. MT-84
3.1 How to Understand Detail Code ................................................. MT-64 4.20 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 20 .................................. MT-85
3.1.1 Display of Detail Code ........................................................................ MT-64 4.21 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 21 .................................. MT-86
3.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors................................................. MT-65 4.22 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 22 .................................. MT-87
3.2.1 Display of Detail Code ........................................................................ MT-65 4.23 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 23 .................................. MT-88
3.2.2 Meaning of Six-Digit Detail Code ....................................................... MT-65 4.24 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 24 .................................. MT-89
4.25 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 25 .................................. MT-90
4. Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism ............. MT-66 4.26 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 26 ...................................MT-91
4.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 1 .................................... MT-66 4.27 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 27 .................................. MT-92
4.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 2 .................................... MT-67 4.28 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 28 .................................. MT-93
4.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 3 .................................... MT-68 4.29 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 29 .................................. MT-95
4.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 4 .................................... MT-69 4.30 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 30 .................................. MT-96
4.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 5 .................................... MT-70
4.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 6 .....................................MT-71
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.7
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.8
5. Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner .................. MT-97 7. Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the
5.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 1 ........................................ MT-97 Inability to Update the Software Version or
5.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 2 ......................................... MT-98
Back Up the Machine Shipment Control Data .. MT-120
5.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 3 ......................................... MT-99
7.1 Checking the IIS ........................................................................MT-121
5.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 4 ........................................MT-100
7.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server .....................MT-121
5.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 5 ........................................MT-101
7.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL ............................................MT-122
5.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 6 ........................................MT-102
7.4 Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU" ...........................................MT-123
5.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 7 ........................................MT-103
7.5 Checking the FTP Server Address of the RU ............................MT-124
5.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 8 ........................................MT-104
5.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 9 ........................................MT-105 8. Procedures for Checking the Voltage .............. MT-125
5.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 10 ......................................MT-106 8.1 Checking the Board Locations...................................................MT-125
5.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 11.......................................MT-107 8.2 Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins (CN5)..........MT-126
5.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 12 ......................................MT-108 8.2.1 Check Procedures ............................................................................MT-126
5.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 13 ......................................MT-109 8.2.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins ...................................................MT-126
5.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 14 ...................................... MT-110 8.3 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board (PSU29B)
5.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 15 ...................................... MT-111 Test Pins (TP1) .........................................................................MT-127
5.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 16 ...................................... MT-112 8.3.1 Check Procedures ............................................................................MT-127
8.3.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins ...................................................MT-128
6. Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical ............... MT-113
6.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 1 ....................................... MT-113 9. Procedures for Checking the Fuses ................. MT-129
6.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 2 ....................................... MT-114 9.1 Checking the Fuse Locations ....................................................MT-129
6.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 3 ....................................... MT-115 9.1.1 Checking the Board Locations .........................................................MT-129
6.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 4 ....................................... MT-116 9.1.2 List of Reference Sections ...............................................................MT-130
6.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 5 ....................................... MT-117 9.2 SND23A Board .........................................................................MT-131
6.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 6 ....................................... MT-118 9.2.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-131
6.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 7 ....................................... MT-119 9.2.2 Procedures for Checking the SND23A Board Fuses........................MT-132
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.8
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.9
9.3 SND23B Board .........................................................................MT-133 10.4.1 Check Flow 2....................................................................................MT-147
9.3.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-133 10.4.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2) ................................MT-148
9.3.2 Procedures for Checking the SND23B Board Fuses .......................MT-134 10.5 Sensor Check Flow 3: SA3, SA7, and SA10 .............................MT-149
9.4 SCN Board ...............................................................................MT-135 10.5.1 Check Flow 3....................................................................................MT-149
9.4.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-135 10.5.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3) ................................MT-150
9.4.2 Procedures for Checking the SCN Board Fuses ..............................MT-136 10.6 Sensor Check Flow 4: SA5 .......................................................MT-151
9.5 CPU23B Board .........................................................................MT-137 10.6.1 Check Flow 4....................................................................................MT-151
9.5.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-137 10.6.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4) ................................MT-152
9.5.2 Procedures for Checking the CPU23B Board Fuses .......................MT-138 10.7 Sensor Check Flow 5: SA4 and SA6.........................................MT-153
9.6 ERS23A Board .........................................................................MT-139 10.7.1 Check Flow 5....................................................................................MT-153
9.6.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-139 10.7.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5) ................................MT-154
9.6.2 Procedures for Checking the ERS23A Board Fuses ........................MT-140 10.8 Sensor Check Flow 6: SA8 and SA12 .......................................MT-155
9.7 Checking the Fuse ....................................................................MT-141 10.8.1 Check Flow 6....................................................................................MT-155
9.8 Checking the Cable ...................................................................MT-141 10.8.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6) ................................MT-156
10.9 Sensor Check Flow 7: SA9 .......................................................MT-157
10. Procedures for Checking the Sensors ............. MT-142 10.9.1 Check Flow 7....................................................................................MT-157
10.1 Checking the Sensors ...............................................................MT-142 10.9.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7) ................................MT-158
10.2 Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function ..............................MT-143 10.10 Sensor Check Flow 8: SA11......................................................MT-159
10.2.1 Starting to Exercise the Monitoring Function from
10.10.1 Check Flow 8....................................................................................MT-159
the RU PC-TOOL .............................................................................MT-143
10.10.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8) ................................MT-160
10.2.2 Starting to Exercise the Monitoring Function from
the CLIENT PC-TOOL ......................................................................MT-143 10.11 Sensor Check Flow 9: SA14 and SA15 .....................................MT-161
10.2.3 Exiting the Monitoring Function ........................................................MT-144 10.11.1 Check Flow 9....................................................................................MT-161
10.3 Sensor Check Flow 1: SA1 .......................................................MT-145 10.11.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9) ................................MT-162
10.3.1 Check Flow 1....................................................................................MT-145 10.12 Sensor Check Flow 10: SC1 and SC2 .......................................MT-163
10.3.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (1) ................................MT-146 10.12.1 Check Flow 10..................................................................................MT-163
10.4 Sensor Check Flow 2: SA2 .......................................................MT-147 10.12.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10) ..............................MT-164
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.9
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.10
10.13 Sensor Check Flow 11: SC3, SC9, and SG1 .............................MT-165 10.21.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (18) ..............................MT-183
10.13.1 Check Flow 11 ..................................................................................MT-165
11. Procedures for Checking the Motors ............... MT-184
10.13.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11) ..............................MT-166
11.1 Motor Check Flow .....................................................................MT-184
10.14 Sensor Check Flow 12: SC6 and SC10 .....................................MT-167
11.2 Checking the MA1 Operation ....................................................MT-185
10.14.1 Check Flow 12..................................................................................MT-167
11.3 Checking the MA2 Operation ....................................................MT-185
10.14.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12) ..............................MT-168
11.4 Checking the MA3 Operation ....................................................MT-186
10.15 Sensor Check Flow 13: SC7 .....................................................MT-169
11.5 Checking the MA4 Operation ....................................................MT-186
10.15.1 Check Flow 13..................................................................................MT-169
11.6 Checking the MC1 Operation ....................................................MT-187
10.15.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13) ..............................MT-170
11.7 Checking the MC2 Operation ....................................................MT-187
10.16 Sensor Check Flow 14: SC8 .....................................................MT-171
11.8 Checking the MC3 Operation ....................................................MT-188
10.16.1 Check Flow 14..................................................................................MT-171
11.9 Checking the MC4 Operation ....................................................MT-188
10.16.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (14) ..............................MT-172
11.10 Checking the MZ1 Operation.....................................................MT-189
10.17 Sensor Check Flow 15: SZ2 and SZ3 .......................................MT-173
11.11 Checking the MZ2 Operation ....................................................MT-190
10.17.1 Check Flow 15..................................................................................MT-173
11.12 Checking the MZ3 Operation ....................................................MT-190
10.17.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (15) ..............................MT-174
10.18 Sensor Check Flow 16: SZ5......................................................MT-175 11.13 Checking the Motor Resistance Values .....................................MT-191
10.18.1 Check Flow 16..................................................................................MT-175 12. Procedures for Checking the Actuators........... MT-192
10.18.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (16) ..............................MT-176 12.1 Actuator Check Flow .................................................................MT-192
10.19 Sensor Check Flow 17: SZ1......................................................MT-177 12.2 Checking the SOLA1 Operation ................................................MT-193
10.19.1 Check Flow 17..................................................................................MT-177 12.2.1 Solenoid Check Flow ........................................................................MT-193
10.19.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SCN Board (17) .......................MT-178 12.2.2 Visual Check Procedures .................................................................MT-194
10.20 Barcode Reader Check Flow: BCRC1.......................................MT-179 12.2.3 Procedures for Checking the Cassette Hold Solenoid .....................MT-195
10.20.1 Check Flow 18..................................................................................MT-179 12.3 Checking the PA1 Operation .....................................................MT-196
10.20.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (18) ..............................MT-180 12.4 Checking the SVA1 Operation ...................................................MT-196
10.21 Sensor Check Flow 18: SA16 ...................................................MT-182 12.5 Checking the SVA2 Operation ...................................................MT-197
10.21.1 Check Flow 18..................................................................................MT-182 12.6 Checking the Actuator Resistance Values .................................MT-197
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.10
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.11
13. Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O ....... MT-198 15.2.2 Troubleshooting Image Abnormalities Considered to be
Caused by IP ....................................................................................MT-213
13.1 Scanner I/O Check Flow ...........................................................MT-198
15.2.3 Analyzing Pale Nonuniformity at the Leading Edge or
13.2 Checking Laser ON in MUTL.....................................................MT-199 Trailing Edge of the IP ......................................................................MT-214
13.3 Checking the PMT.................................................................... MT-200 15.2.4 Analyzing Thin, Distinct Nonuniformity .............................................MT-216
13.4 Checking the Cable ...................................................................MT-201 15.2.5 Procedures for Checking the Grip Roller (Upper) ............................MT-216
14. Line Error between CL and RU ......................... MT-202 15.2.6 Procedures for Checking the Grounding of the Photomultiplier (PMT)....MT-217
15.2.7 Procedures for Checking the FFM Motor .........................................MT-218
14.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU ..................... MT-202
15.3 Other Abnormal Images ............................................................MT-219
14.2 Checking Connection from the CL ............................................ MT-203
15.3.1 Peculiar Events ................................................................................MT-219
14.3 Checking Configuration Information of the CL........................... MT-204
15.3.2 Analysis Flow ...................................................................................MT-219
14.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL ........................................... MT-205
14.5 Checking the IP Address of the Master CL ............................... MT-206 16. Removing the IP ................................................. MT-221
14.6 Checking the IP Address of the RU .......................................... MT-207 16.1 If an IP Is Jammed in the Cassette Set Unit/Erasure Unit ......... MT-222
14.7 Loopback Test.......................................................................... MT-208 16.2 If an IP Is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit/
14.7.1 Loopback Test Flow ..........................................................................MT-208 Subscanning Unit ..................................................................... MT-223
14.7.2 Loopback Test-1 ...............................................................................MT-209
14.7.3 Loopback Test-2 ...............................................................................MT-209
17. Block Diagrams .................................................. MT-225
14.7.4 Loopback Test Procedure .................................................................MT-210
17.1 Motors (MA1 to MA4) and Actuators (SOLA1, PA1, SVA1,
and SVA2) ............................................................................... MT-225
15. Troubleshooting Procedures for Image 17.2 Motors (MC1 to MC4, MZ1 to MZ3) .......................................... MT-226
Abnormalities ..................................................... MT-211 17.3 Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16) .................................... MT-227
15.1 Vertical Streaks ......................................................................... MT-211 17.4 Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
15.1.1 Peculiar Events ................................................................................ MT-211 and SZ5) .................................................................................. MT-228
15.1.2 Analysis Flow ................................................................................... MT-211 17.5 Sensor (SZ1), Scanning Optics Unit (LDD23A, PDA23A,
15.2 Horizontal Streaks.....................................................................MT-213 LDA23A, SYN23A, and POL23A) ............................................ MT-229
15.2.1 Analysis Flow for Horizontal Streaks ................................................MT-213
17.6 PNL23B, FANG1, FANG3, and BCRC1 .................................... MT-230
17.7 Erasure Assembly .....................................................................MT-231
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.11
Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 0.12
18. Board Tests in MUTL .......................................... MT-232 20.7.3 Checking for Continuity of the Cables 1 ...........................................MT-258
20.7.4 Checking for Continuity of the Cables 2 ...........................................MT-259
18.1 Analysis Flow ........................................................................... MT-232
18.2 Board Test ............................................................................... MT-233 21. Checking the Status of Each Parts ................... MT-260
18.2.1 Testing All Boards .............................................................................MT-233 21.1 Checking the Connector on the SCN Board ............................. MT-260
18.2.2 Testing the CPU23B Board ..............................................................MT-235 21.2 Checking the Connector on the Scanning Optics Unit ............... MT-260
18.2.3 Testing the SCN Board .....................................................................MT-236 21.3 Checking the Connector on the PMT Board ..............................MT-261
18.2.4 Testing the SND23A Board...............................................................MT-237 21.4 Checking the Board-to-Board Connectors ................................MT-261
18.2.5 Testing the SND23B Board ..............................................................MT-238 21.5 Checking the Parts for the End of Their Life ............................. MT-262
18.2.6 Testing the ERS23A Board ...............................................................MT-239
21.5.1 Air Filter ............................................................................................MT-262
18.2.7 Testing the PNL Board......................................................................MT-240
21.5.2 Brush Roller ......................................................................................MT-262
19. Collecting Various Data for Troubleshooting .. MT-241 21.5.3 Lamp Filter .......................................................................................MT-263
19.1 Collecting Various Data from the RU PC-TOOL........................ MT-242 21.5.4 IP Suction Pump ...............................................................................MT-263
19.2 Collecting Various Data from the CLIENT PC-TOOL................. MT-242 21.5.5 Laser ................................................................................................MT-263
21.7 Checking the INV Board Mounting Position .............................. MT-264
20. Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code Is 21.8 Checking the Erasure Lamp Assembly for the End of Its Life .... MT-264
Undetectable and Machine does not Boot Up .. MT-243
20.1 Analysis Flow for Bootup Failure .............................................. MT-243
Appendix 1. Procedure for Restoring an
20.2 Checking the LEDs on the CPU23B Board ............................... MT-244 Application with DIP Switch
20.3 Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU23B Board ............... MT-245 No. 7 on the CPU23B
20.4 Procedures for Restoring the RU Application ............................ MT-246 Board ...............................Appx_MT-1
20.5 Checking the Connector Connections ...................................... MT-256
20.6 Checking the Operation Panel .................................................. MT-256
20.7 Check of Cable Connection and Continuity .............................. MT-257
20.7.1 Check Flow .......................................................................................MT-257
20.7.2 Checking Connection of the CPU23B Board Connector ..................MT-258
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.12
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.13
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment
of Parts (MC)
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit......MC-1 4.2 Fan Assembly ............................................................................ MC-11
1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment ................. MC-1 4.2.1 Removal Procedures ..........................................................................MC-11
1.2 Types of Screws .......................................................................... MC-1 4.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ..................................................................MC-11
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding .............................................. MC-1 4.3 Fan (FANG1).............................................................................. MC-12
1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance......................... MC-1 4.3.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-12
1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image .............................. MC-1 4.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-13
4.4 Fan (FANG3) ............................................................................. MC-15
2. Table of Contents ...................................................MC-2 4.4.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-15
4.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-15
3. Pulling Out the RU / Cover ....................................MC-6
4.5 Antistatic Member ...................................................................... MC-17
3.1 Pulling Out the RU .......................................................................MC-6
4.5.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-17
3.1.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................... MC-6
4.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-17
3.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................... MC-6
4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) ......................................................................... MC-18
3.2 Front Cover Plate .........................................................................MC-7
4.6.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-18
3.2.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................... MC-7
4.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-19
3.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................... MC-7
4.7 Board Box Cover ....................................................................... MC-21
3.3 Rear Cover Plate .........................................................................MC-7
4.7.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-21
3.3.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................... MC-7
4.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-23
3.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................... MC-7
3.4 Left-Hand Cover Plate..................................................................MC-8 5. Cassette Set Unit ..................................................MC-24
3.4.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................... MC-8 5.1 Cassette Set Unit .......................................................................MC-24
3.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................... MC-8 5.1.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-24
5.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-28
4. Housing Unit ...........................................................MC-9
5.2 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly ........................................................MC-32
4.1 Operation Panel Assembly ...........................................................MC-9
5.2.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-32
4.1.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................... MC-9
5.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-34
4.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................... MC-9
5.3 Opening/Closing the Board Box .................................................MC-37
4.1.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures .......................................................... MC-10
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.13
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.14
5.3.1 Opening the Board Box .................................................................... MC-37 5.12 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft .......................MC-65
5.3.2 Closing the Board Box ....................................................................... MC-39 5.12.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-65
5.4 Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side) ............................ MC-41 5.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-68
5.4.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-41 5.13 Cable Junction Bracket (B) ......................................................... MC-71
5.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-42 5.13.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-71
5.5 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) .........MC-43 5.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-72
5.5.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-43 5.14 Antistatic Member ......................................................................MC-73
5.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-44 5.14.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-73
5.6 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) ........................................MC-45 5.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-73
5.6.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-45 5.15 Shutter Assembly .......................................................................MC-74
5.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-46 5.15.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-74
5.7 Cable Junction Bracket (A).........................................................MC-48 5.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-75
5.7.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-48 5.16 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) .............................MC-78
5.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-50 5.16.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-78
5.8 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Sensor (SA3) ..............................MC-52 5.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-79
5.8.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-52 5.17 Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side) ..............................MC-80
5.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-52 5.17.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-80
5.9 Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side) ...........................................MC-53 5.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-80
5.9.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-53 5.18 Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)................ MC-81
5.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-54 5.18.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-81
5.10 Spur Gear (Reference Side).......................................................MC-55 5.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-81
5.10.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-55 5.19 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear ......................MC-82
5.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-57 5.19.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-82
5.11 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly ............................................MC-59 5.19.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-83
5.11.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-59 5.20 Cassette Hold Release Arm .......................................................MC-84
5.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-62 5.20.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-84
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.14
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.15
5.20.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-84 5.29 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) ............................................. MC-106
5.21 Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly ............................................MC-86 5.29.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-106
5.21.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-86 5.29.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-107
5.21.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-88 5.30 Cable Junction Bracket (D)....................................................... MC-108
5.22 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly ...................................................MC-89 5.30.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-108
5.22.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-89 5.30.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-109
5.22.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-90 5.31 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft....................... MC-110
5.23 Cassette Insertion Error Sensor (SA14) ..................................... MC-91 5.31.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................MC-110
5.23.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-91 5.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................MC-112
5.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-91 5.32 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly ........................................... MC-115
5.24 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) ...............................................MC-92 5.32.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................MC-115
5.24.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-92 5.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................MC-117
5.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-94 5.33 Cassette Cover Closing Roller ................................................. MC-118
5.25 Cable Junction Bracket (C).........................................................MC-96 5.33.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................MC-118
5.25.1 Removal Procedures ......................................................................... MC-96 5.33.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-122
5.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................. MC-98 5.34 Hose ........................................................................................MC-126
5.26 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) ........ MC-100 5.34.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-126
5.26.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-100 5.34.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-127
5.26.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-100 5.35 Hose Joints .............................................................................. MC-129
5.27 IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism 5.35.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-129
(Opposite Reference Side Gear) .............................................. MC-101 5.35.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-129
5.27.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-101 5.36 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) ................................ MC-130
5.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-102 5.36.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-130
5.28 IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear) ......... MC-104 5.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-131
5.28.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-104 5.37 IP Suction Pump (PA1) ............................................................. MC-133
5.28.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-105 5.37.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-133
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.15
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.16
5.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-134 5.46.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-155
5.38 IP Suction Sensor (SA5) .......................................................... MC-136 5.46.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-158
5.38.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-136 5.47 Suction Cup (Left-Hand)........................................................... MC-160
5.38.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-137 5.47.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-160
5.39 IP Dropping Sensor Assembly .................................................. MC-138 5.47.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-161
5.39.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-138 5.48 IP Transport Motor (MA4) ......................................................... MC-162
5.39.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-139 5.48.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-162
5.40 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4, Light Emitting Side) ......................... MC-140 5.48.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-163
5.40.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-140 5.49 Cable Junction Bracket (E) ....................................................... MC-165
5.40.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-140 5.49.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-165
5.41 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4, Light Receiving Side) ...................... MC-141 5.49.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-165
5.41.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-141 5.50 Rubber Roller Driving Gear ...................................................... MC-166
5.41.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-142 5.50.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-166
5.42 Guide (Right-Hand) ..................................................................MC-143 5.50.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-166
5.42.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-143 5.51 Spring and Wire (Reference Side) ............................................ MC-168
5.42.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-145 5.51.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-168
5.43 Guide (Left-Hand) .................................................................... MC-147 5.51.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-169
5.43.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-147 5.52 Rubber Roller Protection Bracket ............................................. MC-170
5.43.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-149 5.52.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-170
5.44 Suction Cup Assembly (Right-Hand) ........................................ MC-150 5.52.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-171
5.44.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-150 5.53 Rubber Rollers (A) and (B) ....................................................... MC-172
5.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-151 5.53.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-172
5.45 Suction Cup (Right-Hand) ........................................................ MC-153 5.53.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-178
5.45.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-153 5.54 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1) ........................................................ MC-185
5.45.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-154 5.54.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-185
5.46 Suction Cup (Left-Hand)........................................................... MC-155 5.54.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-185
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.16
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.17
5.55 Actuator Assembly ................................................................... MC-186 5.63.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-208
5.55.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-186 5.64 "15x30 Cassette" Movable Guide Assembly ............................. MC-210
5.55.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-186 5.64.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-210
5.56 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6).................................................. MC-188 5.64.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................MC-211
5.56.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-188 5.65 IP Removal Arm ....................................................................... MC-212
5.56.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-189 5.65.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-212
5.57 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP Sensor (SA7) ........... MC-190 5.65.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-214
5.57.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-190 5.66 Removal Link Shaft .................................................................. MC-217
5.57.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-191 5.66.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-217
5.58 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) .............................. MC-192 5.66.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-218
5.58.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-192 5.67 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly .................................. MC-219
5.58.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-193 5.67.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-219
5.59 Solenoid Assembly ...................................................................MC-194 5.67.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-221
5.59.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-194 5.68 Antistatic Member Assembly ....................................................MC-225
5.59.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-196 5.68.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-225
5.60 Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) ................ MC-198 5.68.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-225
5.60.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-198 5.69 Guide Plate (Reference Side)...................................................MC-226
5.60.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-199 5.69.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-226
5.61 Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15) .........................................MC-200 5.69.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-227
5.61.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-200 5.70 Guide Plate (Opposite Reference Side) ....................................MC-228
5.61.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-201 5.70.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-228
5.62 Movable Guide Driving Assembly .............................................MC-202 5.70.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-229
5.62.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-202 5.71 Guide Plate (Inch/Metric) ..........................................................MC-230
5.62.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-204 5.71.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-230
5.63 Movable Guide Assembly .........................................................MC-207 5.71.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-230
5.63.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-207 5.72 Stopper (Reference Side)......................................................... MC-231
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.17
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.18
5.72.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-231 6.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-249
5.72.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-231 6.3 Duct (Air-Intake Side) ...............................................................MC-250
5.73 Stopper (Opposite Reference Side)..........................................MC-232 6.3.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-250
5.73.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-232 6.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-250
5.73.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-232 6.4 Duct (Exhaust Side) ................................................................. MC-251
5.74 Stopper (Inch/Metric) ................................................................MC-233 6.4.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-251
5.74.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-233 6.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-251
5.74.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-233 6.5 Reflection Plate ........................................................................MC-252
5.75 Cassette Cover Opening Pin (Inch/Metric) ................................MC-234 6.5.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-252
5.75.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-234 6.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-252
5.75.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-235 6.5.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures ........................................................ MC-253
5.76 Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16) .......................................................MC-237 6.6 Cover Bracket ..........................................................................MC-255
5.76.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-237 6.6.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-255
5.76.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-238 6.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-255
5.77 Inch/Metric Sensor Actuator .....................................................MC-239 6.7 Brush Roller Assembly .............................................................MC-256
5.77.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-239 6.7.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-256
5.77.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-240 6.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-257
5.78 Cable Junction Bracket (E) .......................................................MC-243 6.8 Brush Roller .............................................................................MC-259
5.78.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-243 6.8.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-259
5.78.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-243 6.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-260
6.9 Filter ........................................................................................MC-263
6. Erasure Unit ........................................................MC-244
6.9.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-263
6.1 Erasure Unit .............................................................................MC-244
6.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-265
6.1.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-244
6.10 Spur Gear ................................................................................MC-267
6.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-245
6.10.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-267
6.2 Fan (FANB1) ............................................................................MC-248
6.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-267
6.2.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-248
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.18
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.19
6.11 Thermal Switch (TSWB1) .........................................................MC-268 7.3 Side-Positioning Grip HP Sensor (SC1) and
6.11.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-268 Side-Positioning Grip Release Position Sensor (SC2)...............MC-302
6.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-269 7.3.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-302
6.12 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1) ........................................... MC-271 7.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-302
6.12.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-271 7.4 Timing Belt ...............................................................................MC-303
6.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-273 7.4.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-303
6.13 Erasure Assembly ....................................................................MC-275 7.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-304
6.14 INV Board (A) ..........................................................................MC-276 7.5 Tensioner Assembly .................................................................MC-305
6.14.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-276 7.5.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-305
6.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-277 7.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-305
6.15 INV Board (B) ..........................................................................MC-279 7.6 Guide (A) .................................................................................MC-306
6.15.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-279 7.6.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-306
6.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-280 7.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-306
6.16 ERS23A Board ........................................................................MC-282 7.7 Guide (B) .................................................................................MC-307
6.16.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-282 7.7.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-307
6.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-283 7.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-307
6.17 Lamp Assembly .......................................................................MC-284 7.8 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly............................................MC-308
6.17.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-284 7.8.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-308
6.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-288 7.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-308
7.9 Leaf Spring (Reference Side) ...................................................MC-309
7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit .......................MC-293 7.9.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-309
7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit ................................................MC-293 7.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-309
7.1.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-293
7.10 Leaf Spring (Opposite Reference Side) .................................... MC-310
7.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-296
7.10.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-310
7.2 Sensor Assembly .....................................................................MC-300 7.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-310
7.2.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-300
7.11 Planetary Gear Assembly ......................................................... MC-311
7.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-301
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.19
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.20
7.11.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................MC-311 7.19.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-326
7.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures ................................................................MC-311 7.19.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-328
7.12 Spur Gear (Reference Side)..................................................... MC-312 7.20 Cable Junction Bracket ............................................................ MC-331
7.12.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-312 7.20.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-331
7.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-312 7.20.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-332
7.13 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) ...................................... MC-313 7.21 Side-Positioning Conveyor Roller Grip Release Motor (MC2) ...MC-333
7.13.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-313 7.21.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-333
7.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-313 7.21.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-335
7.14 Grip Arm (Reference Side) ....................................................... MC-314 7.22 Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7) .................MC-337
7.14.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-314 7.22.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-337
7.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-315 7.22.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-338
7.14.3 Check/Adjustment Procedure .......................................................... MC-316 7.23 Side-Positioning Latch Stroke Sensor (SC10)...........................MC-339
7.15 Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side) ........................................ MC-318 7.23.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-339
7.15.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-318 7.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-340
7.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-319 7.24 Claw Driving Unit......................................................................MC-341
7.16 Grip Shaft ................................................................................MC-320 7.24.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-341
7.16.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-320 7.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-345
7.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-321 7.25 Reference Block Driving Mechanism ........................................MC-349
7.17 IP Sensor (SC3) .......................................................................MC-323 7.25.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-349
7.17.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-323 7.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-350
7.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-323 7.26 Side-Positioning Reference Block Driving Motor (MC4) ............MC-353
7.18 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor (SC9) ....................MC-324 7.26.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-353
7.18.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-324 7.26.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-354
7.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-325 7.27 Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit) ..................................MC-356
7.19 Reference Block Assembly ......................................................MC-326 7.27.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-356
7.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-356
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.20
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.21
7.28 Arm..........................................................................................MC-357 7.36.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-379
7.28.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-357 7.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-380
7.28.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-358 7.37 Half Clutch Assembly ............................................................... MC-381
7.29 Shaft Driving Assembly ............................................................MC-360 7.37.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-381
7.29.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-360 7.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-383
7.29.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-361 7.38 Barcode Reader (BCRC1)........................................................MC-387
7.30 Housing ...................................................................................MC-363 7.38.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-387
7.30.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-363 7.38.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-388
7.30.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-364 7.39 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1) ...............................MC-389
7.31 Side-Positioning HP Sensor (SC6) ...........................................MC-365 7.39.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-389
7.31.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-365 7.39.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-390
7.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-366 7.40 Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs ....................................... MC-391
7.32 Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8) ..........................MC-367 7.40.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-391
7.32.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-367 7.40.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-392
7.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-368 7.41 Rubber Roller (A) .....................................................................MC-394
7.33 Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly............................................MC-369 7.41.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-394
7.33.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-369 7.41.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-396
7.33.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-370 7.42 Rubber Roller (B) .....................................................................MC-399
7.34 Shaft Assemblies .....................................................................MC-372 7.42.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-399
7.34.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-372 7.42.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-401
7.34.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-372 7.43 Rubber Roller (C) .....................................................................MC-404
7.34.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures ........................................................ MC-374 7.43.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-404
7.35 Shafts and Claws .....................................................................MC-376 7.43.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-406
7.35.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-376 7.44 Rubber Roller (D) .....................................................................MC-409
7.35.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-377 7.44.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-409
7.36 Side-Positioning Latch Mechanism Driving Motor (MC3) ...........MC-379 7.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-412
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.21
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.22
7.45 Rubber Roller (E) .....................................................................MC-415 8.3.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-454
7.45.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-415 8.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-455
7.45.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-417
9. Scanning Optics Unit .........................................MC-456
7.46 Rubber Roller (F) .....................................................................MC-420
9.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-457
7.46.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-420
9.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-460
7.46.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-423
9.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures ........................................................ MC-464
7.47 Guide (C) .................................................................................MC-426
7.47.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-426 10. Subscanning Unit ...............................................MC-465
7.47.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-427 10.1 Subscanning Unit .....................................................................MC-465
7.48 Guide (D) .................................................................................MC-429 10.1.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-465
7.48.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-429 10.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-470
7.48.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-431 10.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly .................................MC-475
7.49 Reinforcement Bracket.............................................................MC-434 10.2.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-475
7.49.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-434 10.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-476
7.49.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-435 10.3 Rubber Belt ..............................................................................MC-478
10.3.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-478
8. Light-Collecting Unit ..........................................MC-436
10.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-479
8.1 Light-Collecting Guide ..............................................................MC-436
10.4 Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side) ..................... MC-481
8.1.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-436
10.4.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-481
8.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-440
10.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-481
8.1.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures ........................................................ MC-445
10.5 Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)......................MC-482
8.2 PMT Board ..............................................................................MC-446
10.5.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-482
8.2.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-446
10.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-482
8.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-448
10.6 Kapton® Belt ...........................................................................MC-483
8.2.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures ........................................................ MC-452
10.6.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-483
8.3 Shield Member .........................................................................MC-454
10.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-484
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.22
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.23
10.7 Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) ........................................MC-486 10.15 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) ..............................................MC-503
10.7.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-486 10.15.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-503
10.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-486 10.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-504
10.8 Tensioner Assembly .................................................................MC-487 10.16 Guide (A) .................................................................................MC-507
10.8.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-487 10.16.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-507
10.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-487 10.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-508
10.9 FFM Motor (MZ1) .....................................................................MC-488 10.17 Guide (B) ................................................................................. MC-511
10.9.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-488 10.17.1 Removal Procedures ........................................................................MC-511
10.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-490 10.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-513
10.9.3 Subscan Length Check ................................................................... MC-492 10.18 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) .............................................. MC-515
10.9.4 Subscan Length Adjustment ............................................................ MC-493 10.18.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-515
10.10 Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side).............................MC-495 10.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-517
10.10.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-495 10.19 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)...............................................MC-520
10.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-495 10.19.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-520
10.11 Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side) .............................MC-496 10.19.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-522
10.11.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-496 10.20 Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear ...........................................MC-525
10.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-496 10.20.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-525
10.12 Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)..............MC-497 10.20.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-526
10.12.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-497 10.21 Light-Collecting Mirror Assembly ..............................................MC-528
10.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-497 10.21.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-528
10.13 Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side) ..............MC-498 10.21.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-530
10.13.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-498 10.22 Light-Collecting Mirror ..............................................................MC-534
10.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-498 10.22.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-534
10.14 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) ...............................................MC-499 10.22.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-534
10.14.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-499 10.23 Antistatic Member ....................................................................MC-535
10.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-501 10.23.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-535
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.23
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.24
10.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-535 10.32 Antistatic Member ....................................................................MC-565
10.24 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) .................................................MC-536 10.32.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-565
10.24.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-536 10.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-565
10.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-537 10.33 Vibration-Proof Rubber Assembly.............................................MC-566
10.25 Center Roller............................................................................MC-538 10.33.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-566
10.25.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-538 10.33.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-568
10.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-539 10.34 Toothed Washer (Driving Shaft)................................................MC-569
10.26 Motor Assembly .......................................................................MC-542 10.34.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-569
10.26.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-542 10.34.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-570
10.26.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-545 10.35 Toothed Washer (Driven Shaft) ................................................MC-572
10.27 Driven-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor (SZ2) ...................MC-549 10.35.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-572
10.27.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-549 10.35.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-573
10.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-550 10.36 Auxiliary Bracket ......................................................................MC-575
10.28 Driving-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor (SZ3), 10.36.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-575
Driven/Driving Grip Roller Driving Motor (MZ2) ......................... MC-551 10.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-575
10.28.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-551 10.37 Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket ...........................................MC-576
10.28.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-553 10.37.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-576
10.29 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ5), Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)...MC-555 10.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-576
10.29.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-555
10.29.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-556
11. PC Boards ...........................................................MC-577
10.30 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm................................................MC-558 11.1 Board Assembly .......................................................................MC-577
10.30.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-558 11.1.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-577
10.30.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-560 11.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-579
10.31 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm ................................................MC-562 11.2 CPU23B Board ........................................................................MC-582
10.31.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-562 11.2.1 Replacement Procedures ................................................................ MC-582
10.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-563 11.2.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU .................. MC-582
11.2.3 Machine Data Backup ..................................................................... MC-584
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.24
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.25
11.2.4 Replacing the CPU23B Board ......................................................... MC-585 12.3 SND23B Board Fuses ..............................................................MC-620
11.2.5 Setting the IP Address of the RU ..................................................... MC-588 12.3.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-620
11.2.6 Updating the RU Software Version .................................................. MC-592 12.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-621
11.2.7 Restoring the Machine Data ............................................................ MC-596 12.4 SCN Board Fuses ....................................................................MC-622
11.3 SCN Board ..............................................................................MC-597 12.4.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-622
11.3.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-597 12.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-622
11.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-598 12.5 CPU23B Board Fuses ..............................................................MC-623
11.4 LAN23A Board .........................................................................MC-599 12.5.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-623
11.4.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-599 12.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-623
11.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-600 12.6 ERS23A Board Fuses ..............................................................MC-624
11.5 SND23A Board ........................................................................MC-602 12.6.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-624
11.5.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-602 12.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-624
11.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-605
11.6 SND23B Board ........................................................................MC-609
13. Updating the Software .......................................MC-625
13.1 Updating the Software from the CL ..........................................MC-625
11.6.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-609
11.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-612
13.2 Updating the Software from the Client PC ................................ MC-631
11.7 PSU29B Board ........................................................................ MC-615 14. Format Adjustment ..................................................MC-638
11.7.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-615 14.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment .................................................MC-638
11.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-616 14.1.1 Main Scan Length Adjustment ......................................................... MC-638
12. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations........MC-617 14.1.2 Main Scan Position Adjustment ....................................................... MC-640
12.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures .................... MC-617 15. Shading/Sensitivity Correction ..............................MC-642
12.1.1 Fuse Classification .......................................................................... MC-617 15.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction ..................................................MC-642
12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures ....................................................... MC-617 15.2 Shading Speed Correction .......................................................MC-644
12.2 SND23A Board Fuses .............................................................. MC-618 15.3 Sensitivity Correction ...............................................................MC-646
12.2.1 Removal Procedures ....................................................................... MC-618
12.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures ............................................................... MC-619
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.25
Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 0.26
16. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure .........................MC-648
16.1 Backup Procedure ...................................................................MC-648
16.2 Restore Procedure ...................................................................MC-650
16.3 Backing Up the Scanner Data ..................................................MC-652
17. Image/Conveyance Checks ...............................MC-653
17.1 Check Before Procedures ........................................................MC-653
17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks .....................................................MC-653
17.3 Detailed Description of the Image Output Procedure ................MC-655
18. Confirming the S Value ......................................MC-656
19. Installing the Software .......................................MC-658
19.1 Installing the RU Software ........................................................MC-658
19.2 Installing the RU PC-TOOL ......................................................MC-658
19.3 Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL ...............................................MC-658
20. List of Jigs and Tools .........................................MC-659
20.1 Jigs and Tools ..........................................................................MC-659
Appendix 1. Parts Removal/Installation .........Appx_MC-1
1. Sensor (5 mm type) ...........................................................Appx_MC-2
1.1 Removal Procedure ................................................................... Appx_MC-2
1.2 Reinstallation Procedure ........................................................... Appx_MC-2
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.26
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.27
Maintenance Utility (MU)
1. Overview of RU Service Utility ..............................MU-1 3.4 FTP Server IP Address .............................................................. MU-12
1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility ............................................................. MU-1 3.4.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-12
1.2 RU Operation Panel ..................................................................... MU-1 3.4.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-12
1.3 Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes ..........................MU-2 3.5 Default Gateway ........................................................................ MU-13
1.3.1 Description of Buttons ......................................................................... MU-2 3.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-13
1.3.2 Procedures for Menu Selection ........................................................... MU-3 3.5.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-13
1.4 Method of Setting the Addresses..................................................MU-4 3.6 Secure Host ............................................................................... MU-14
1.4.1 Description of Buttons ......................................................................... MU-4 3.6.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-14
1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the Address ................................................ MU-5 3.6.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-14
3.7 Secure Net................................................................................. MU-15
2. User Utility ..............................................................MU-6 3.7.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-15
2.1 Overview of User Utility ................................................................MU-6 3.7.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-15
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility...............................................MU-8 3.8 Network Check .......................................................................... MU-16
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility ........................................................................ MU-8 3.8.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-16
2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility ......................................................................... MU-8 3.8.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-16
2.3 Master CL Setting ........................................................................MU-8 3.9 Loop Back Test .......................................................................... MU-17
2.3.1 Function ............................................................................................... MU-8 3.9.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-17
2.3.2 Procedures .......................................................................................... MU-8 3.9.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-17
3. Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU ................MU-9 3.10 HV On/Off .................................................................................. MU-18
3.10.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-18
3.1 Tree of RU's Machine Maintenance Utility ....................................MU-9
3.10.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-18
3.2 Reader Unit IP Address .............................................................. MU-10
3.11 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU .. MU-19
3.2.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-10
3.11.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during
3.2.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-10
Initialization ........................................................................................ MU-19
3.3 Subnet Mask .............................................................................. MU-11
3.11.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during
3.3.1 Function ..............................................................................................MU-11 READY State ..................................................................................... MU-20
3.3.2 Procedures .........................................................................................MU-11 3.11.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU ........................... MU-20
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.27
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.28
3.11.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU when 4.9 FTP............................................................................................MU-30
Error Occurred ................................................................................... MU-21 4.9.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-30
4. RU PC-TOOL .........................................................MU-22 4.9.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-30
4.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree ........................................MU-22 4.10 INSTALL .................................................................................... MU-31
4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window .............................................................. MU-22 4.10.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-31
4.1.2 Tree Diagram..................................................................................... MU-22 4.10.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-31
4.2 Outline of RU PC-TOOL .............................................................MU-23 4.10.3 Message on the Error Window .......................................................... MU-31
4.2.1 Display of Under Maintenance on the Operation Panel................. MU-23 4.11 VERSION UP.............................................................................MU-32
4.2.2 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display .................................................. MU-24 4.11.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-32
4.3 LIST OF EXISTING RU ..............................................................MU-25 4.11.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-32
4.3.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-25 4.12 EDIT HISTORY ..........................................................................MU-33
4.4 NEW ..........................................................................................MU-25 4.12.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-33
4.4.1 Function ............................................................................................ MU-25 4.12.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-33
4.4.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-25 4.12.3 Details of USE ................................................................................... MU-34
4.12.4 Details of IP ....................................................................................... MU-35
4.5 DELETE.....................................................................................MU-26
4.12.5 Details of BARCODE ......................................................................... MU-36
4.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-26
4.12.6 Details of LASER ............................................................................... MU-36
4.5.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-26
4.12.7 Details of LAMP ................................................................................. MU-37
4.6 MUTL.........................................................................................MU-26
4.6.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-26
4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION ............................................................MU-38
4.13.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-38
4.6.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-26
4.13.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-38
4.7 PING ..........................................................................................MU-27
4.7.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-27
4.14 EDIT CL NAME ..........................................................................MU-42
4.14.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-42
4.7.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-27
4.14.2 Editing/Adding the CL as Image Transfer Destination ....................... MU-42
4.8 MON ..........................................................................................MU-28
4.14.3 Editing the List of Master CL's ........................................................... MU-43
4.8.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-28
4.14.4 Switching the Master CL.................................................................... MU-44
4.8.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-29
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.28
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.29
4.15 BACKUP ....................................................................................MU-45 4.22.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-59
4.15.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-45 4.22.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-59
4.15.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-45 4.23 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL..............................................MU-59
4.15.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable 4.23.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL ....................................................................... MU-59
Causes .............................................................................................. MU-46 4.23.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL......................................................................... MU-60
4.16 RESTORE .................................................................................MU-47
4.16.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-47
5. Client PC ...............................................................MU-61
4.16.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-47
5.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC .................................. MU-61
4.16.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable 5.1.1 Features of the Client PC .................................................................. MU-61
Causes .............................................................................................. MU-48 5.1.2 Operations of the Client PC ............................................................... MU-62
4.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT ..................................................................MU-49 5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC .................................................. MU-63
4.17.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-49 5.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD Drive ................ MU-63
4.17.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-50 5.1.5 Precautions in Setting the CL ............................................................ MU-63
4.18 ERROR DB................................................................................ MU-51 5.2 Setting Up the Client PC ............................................................MU-64
4.18.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-51 5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD ........................... MU-65
4.18.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-52 5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD Drive .......................... MU-66
4.19 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs ................................................................MU-53 5.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL.........................................................MU-68
4.19.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-53 5.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification ................MU-69
4.19.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-53 5.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List .............................................. MU-71
4.20 VERSION UP: ALL RUs .............................................................MU-55 5.5.1 Registering an RU in the Hospital List ............................................... MU-71
4.20.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-55 5.5.2 Adding an RU to the Hospital List ..................................................... MU-72
4.20.2 Procedures ........................................................................................ MU-55 5.5.3 Deleting a Hospital List Entry ............................................................ MU-73
4.21 CDPath ......................................................................................MU-57 5.5.4 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Indications .................................................. MU-74
4.21.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-57 5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE.............................................................MU-75
4.21.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"....................................................... MU-57 5.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations ................. MU-75
4.21.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" .................................................. MU-58 5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode ............................................................. MU-76
4.22 Initialize APL...............................................................................MU-59 5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode ........................................................... MU-77
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.29
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.30
5.7 Data Flow of Each Command ....................................................MU-78 6.4.4 Registering an RU with a Registered FTP Server ............................. MU-96
5.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD .............................................................. MU-78 6.5 DELETE.....................................................................................MU-98
5.7.2 READ and WRITE ............................................................................. MU-78 6.5.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-98
5.7.3 Import and Export .............................................................................. MU-78 6.5.2 Deleting an RU Only .......................................................................... MU-98
5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper 6.5.3 Deleting an FTP Server ..................................................................... MU-99
CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation ....................................................MU-79 6.5.4 Deleting a Site ................................................................................... MU-99
5.8.1 Solution-1 .......................................................................................... MU-79 6.5.5 Deleting the Entire Tree Information ................................................ MU-100
5.8.2 Solution-2 .......................................................................................... MU-80 6.6 COPY ...................................................................................... MU-101
5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL....................................................... MU-81 6.6.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-101
5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD ........................... MU-81 6.6.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-101
5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD Drive ............. MU-83 6.7 RENAME ................................................................................. MU-103
5.10 Checking the CL Setup when Using the Client PC ......................MU-86 6.7.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-103
5.11 Checking the Internet Options Setting of the Client PC............MU-87 6.7.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-103
6.8 GET VERSION ........................................................................ MU-104
6. CLIENT PC-TOOL .................................................MU-88
6.8.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-104
6.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree .................................MU-88
6.8.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-104
6.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window ...................................................... MU-88
6.9 MUTL....................................................................................... MU-105
6.1.2 Tree Diagram..................................................................................... MU-88
6.9.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-105
6.2 Outline of the CLIENT PC-TOOL ................................................MU-89
6.9.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-105
6.2.1 Display of Under Maintenance on the Operation Panel................. MU-89
6.10 PING ........................................................................................ MU-106
6.2.2 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Screen Display ........................................... MU-90
6.10.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-106
6.3 Hospital List ............................................................................... MU-91
6.10.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-106
6.3.1 Function ............................................................................................. MU-91
6.11 MON ........................................................................................ MU-107
6.4 NEW RU ....................................................................................MU-92
6.11.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-107
6.4.1 Function ............................................................................................ MU-92
6.11.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-108
6.4.2 Registering an RU in the Hospital List ............................................... MU-92
6.12 FTP.......................................................................................... MU-110
6.4.3 Registering an FTP Server and RU with a Registered Site Name .... MU-94
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.30
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.31
6.12.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-110 6.20.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-126
6.12.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-110 6.20.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-126
6.13 VERSION UP............................................................................MU-111 6.21 UPLOAD .................................................................................. MU-128
6.13.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-111 6.21.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-128
6.13.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-111 6.21.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-128
6.14 EDIT HISTORY ........................................................................ MU-112 6.21.3 Errors that may Occur during UPLOAD and their Probable
6.14.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-112 Causes ............................................................................................ MU-129
6.14.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-112 6.22 DOWNLOAD ........................................................................... MU-130
6.15 EDIT CONFIGURATION .......................................................... MU-114 6.22.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-130
6.15.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-114 6.22.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-130
6.15.2 Procedures .......................................................................................MU-114 6.22.3 Errors that may Occur during DOWNLOAD and their Probable
Causes ............................................................................................ MU-131
6.16 EDIT CL NAME ........................................................................ MU-116
6.23 CDPath .................................................................................... MU-132
6.16.1 Function ............................................................................................MU-116
6.23.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-132
6.16.2 Editing/Adding the CL as Image Transfer Destination ......................MU-116
6.23.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"..................................................... MU-132
6.16.3 Editing the List of Master CL's ..........................................................MU-118
6.23.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" ................................................ MU-133
6.16.4 Switching the Master CL...................................................................MU-119
6.23.4 Verifying the "CDPath" Setting ........................................................ MU-134
6.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT ................................................................ MU-120
6.24 Export ...................................................................................... MU-135
6.17.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-120
6.24.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-135
6.17.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-121
6.24.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-135
6.18 ERROR DB.............................................................................. MU-122
6.25 Import ...................................................................................... MU-136
6.18.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-122
6.25.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-136
6.18.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-123
6.25.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-136
6.19 READ ...................................................................................... MU-124
6.26 OnLine ..................................................................................... MU-137
6.19.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-124
6.26.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-137
6.19.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-124
6.26.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-137
6.20 WRITE ..................................................................................... MU-126
6.27 Network ................................................................................... MU-138
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.31
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.32
6.27.1 Function ........................................................................................... MU-138 [2-9] IP Sensor Check.............................................................................. MU-154
6.27.2 Procedures ...................................................................................... MU-138 [3] Software Check ............................................................................... MU-155
6.28 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL .................................... MU-139 [3-1] Ver. Display (FLASH) ...................................................................... MU-155
6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD (Setup PC-TOOL) ........... MU-139 [3-2] Ver. Display (FTP SERV)................................................................. MU-155
6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window .................... MU-140 [3-3] MAC Address Display ...................................................................... MU-156
6.28.3 Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL ............................................................... MU-140 [4] Virtual Image Check ........................................................................ MU-157
[4-1] Virtual Image Test ............................................................................ MU-157
7. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions .................MU-141
[4-1-1] LED Virtual Read ............................................................................. MU-157
7.1 Tree of MUTL........................................................................... MU-141
[4-1-2] PMT Virtual Read ............................................................................ MU-158
7.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL .................................................. MU-144
[4-1-3] SCN Board Virtual Read.................................................................. MU-160
7.2.1 Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL ................................. MU-144
[5] Scanner Check ................................................................................ MU-162
7.2.2 Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL.......................... MU-145
[5-1] Diagnostic ........................................................................................ MU-162
7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL ............................................................................. MU-146
[5-2] Polygon Mortor ................................................................................ MU-162
7.3 Details of MUTL ....................................................................... MU-147
[5-3] Laser ............................................................................................... MU-163
[1] Conveyance Check ......................................................................... MU-147
[5-4] HV Diagnostic .................................................................................. MU-164
[1-1] Conveyance Setting ........................................................................ MU-149
[5-4-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic ..................................................................... MU-164
[1-2] Processing Mode Setting ................................................................ MU-149
[5-5] Format Adjustment .......................................................................... MU-164
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting ...................................................... MU-149
[5-5-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) ............................................................ MU-165
[2] Board Check .................................................................................... MU-150
[5-5-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel) ............................................................... MU-165
[2-1] All Board .......................................................................................... MU-150
[5-5-3] Default Setting (FREQ) ................................................................... MU-166
[2-2] CPU Board ...................................................................................... MU-151
[5-5-4] Default Setting (Pixel) ...................................................................... MU-166
[2-3] SCN Board ...................................................................................... MU-151
[5-5-5] Optic Setting (FREQ) ...................................................................... MU-166
[2-4] SNS/DRV-A Board ........................................................................... MU-152
[5-5-6] Optic Setting (Pixel) ......................................................................... MU-166
[2-5] SNS/DRV-B Board........................................................................... MU-152
[5-6] Correction ........................................................................................ MU-167
[2-6] ERS Board ...................................................................................... MU-153
[5-6-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction ........................................................ MU-167
[2-7] PNL Board ....................................................................................... MU-153
[5-6-2] Shading Speed Correction .............................................................. MU-168
[2-8] CPU Board Setting Display ............................................................. MU-154
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.32
Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 0.33
[5-6-3] Sensitivity Correction ....................................................................... MU-168 [6-3-2] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Hook HP ................................... MU-180
[5-6-4] Sensitivity S-Value Correction ......................................................... MU-169 [6-3-3] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Base Pin HP ............................. MU-180
[5-7] Trouble Shooting ............................................................................. MU-170 [6-3-4] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Grip HP ..................................... MU-181
[5-7-1] Shading Correction .......................................................................... MU-170 [6-3-5] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Size Selection ........................... MU-181
[5-8] HV ON/OFF ..................................................................................... MU-170 [6-3-6] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Operation .................................. MU-182
[5-9] S Value ............................................................................................ MU-171 [6-3-7] Barcode-Reader: Barcode-Reader On ............................................ MU-182
[5-9-1] S value now ..................................................................................... MU-171 [6-3-8] Barcode-Reader: Show Barcode ..................................................... MU-183
[5-9-2] S value calculate ............................................................................. MU-171 [6-3-9] Post-Conveyance (FFM/MC1)......................................................... MU-183
[5-9-3] PMT/LightGuide change: LED initialize ........................................... MU-172 [6-4] Sub Scanning .................................................................................. MU-184
[6] Mechanical Check ........................................................................... MU-173 [6-4-1] Sub-Scanning Grip : Sub-Scanning Grip HP ................................... MU-184
[6-1] IP Removal Unit 1 ........................................................................... MU-173 [6-4-2] Dust Removal: Dust Removal HP ................................................... MU-184
[6-1-1] Removal Mechanism: Removal HP ................................................. MU-173 [6-4-3] Dust Removal: Dust Removal Operation ........................................ MU-185
[6-1-2] Removal Mechanism: Removal Diagnostic ..................................... MU-174 [6-4-4] Conveyance Motor: Conveyance Motor Speed Selection ............... MU-185
[6-1-3] Open Lid Mechanism: Open Lid HP ................................................ MU-174 [6-4-5] Conveyance Motor : Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive ....................... MU-186
[6-1-4] Open Lid Mechanism: Open Lid Diagnostic .................................... MU-175 [6-4-6] FAN (G1) Diagnostic ....................................................................... MU-187
[6-1-5] Close Lid Mechanism: Close Lid HP ............................................... MU-175 [7] For Design ....................................................................................... MU-187
[6-1-6] Close Lid Mechanism: Close Lid Diagnostic ................................... MU-176
[6-2] IP Removal Unit 2 ........................................................................... MU-176
[6-2-1] Pump ............................................................................................... MU-176
[6-2-2] Valve 1 (SVA1) ................................................................................ MU-177
[6-2-3] Valve 2 (SVA2) ................................................................................ MU-177
[6-2-4] Solenoid .......................................................................................... MU-178
[6-2-5] Feed Conveyance (MA4/MC1) ........................................................ MU-178
[6-2-6] Erasure Conveyance (MA4/MC1) ................................................... MU-179
[6-3] Side-Positioning Conveyor .............................................................. MU-179
[6-3-1] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning HP............................................. MU-179
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.33
Contents Service Parts List (SP) 0.34
Service Parts List (SP)
How to Use Service Parts List .................................................................SP-1 05C SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 ...........................................SP-27
INDEX ....................................................................................................SP-2 05D SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 ...........................................SP-28
01A COVER 1......................................................................................SP-3 05E SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 ...........................................SP-29
01B COVER 2......................................................................................SP-4 05F SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 6 ...........................................SP-30
02A FRAME 1 ......................................................................................SP-5 05G SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 7 ...........................................SP-31
02B FRAME 2 ......................................................................................SP-6 05H SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 8 ...........................................SP-32
02C FRAME 3 ......................................................................................SP-7 06 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ..........................................................SP-33
03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 ...............................................................SP-8 07 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT .........................................................SP-34
03B CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 ...............................................................SP-9 08A SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 .............................................................SP-35
03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 .............................................................SP-10 08B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 .............................................................SP-36
03D CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 ............................................................. SP-11 08C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 .............................................................SP-37
03E CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 .............................................................SP-12 08D SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 .............................................................SP-38
03F CASSETTE SET UNIT 6 .............................................................SP-13 08E SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 .............................................................SP-39
03G CASSETTE SET UNIT 7 .............................................................SP-14 08F SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 .............................................................SP-40
03H CASSETTE SET UNIT 8 .............................................................SP-15 08G SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 .............................................................SP-41
03I CASSETTE SET UNIT 9 .............................................................SP-16 09A CONTROLLER 1 ........................................................................SP-42
03J CASSETTE SET UNIT 10 ...........................................................SP-17 09B CONTROLLER 2 ........................................................................SP-43
03K CASSETTE SET UNIT 11 ...........................................................SP-18 09C CONTROLLER 3 ........................................................................SP-44
03L CASSETTE SET UNIT 12 ...........................................................SP-19 10 CABLE........................................................................................SP-45
03M CASSETTE SET UNIT 13 ...........................................................SP-20 11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ....................................................................SP-46
03N CASSETTE SET UNIT 14 ...........................................................SP-21 12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ...................................................SP-55
04A ERASURE UNIT 1 ......................................................................SP-22 13 JIG ..............................................................................................SP-58
04B ERASURE UNIT 2 ......................................................................SP-23 14 Other Service Parts.....................................................................SP-59
04C ERASURE UNIT 3 ......................................................................SP-24 15 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring...............................SP-60
05A SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 ...........................................SP-25
05B SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 ...........................................SP-26
014-237-01E
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.34
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.35
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
1. Preventive Maintenance Program..........................PM-1 7. Cassette Set Unit...................................................PM-24
1.1 How To Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume.......................PM-1 7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit...................................................... PM-24
1.2 Notations of Intervals..................................................................PM-1 7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit.............................................. PM-25
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List....................................... PM-2 7.3 Preparation for Cleaning of Suction Cups................................ PM-29
1.3.1 Maintenance Programs for the First Year.......................................... PM-2 7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Left-Hand).................................... PM-32
1.3.2 Maintenance Programs for the Second Year.................................... PM-3 7.5 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Right-Hand).................................. PM-35
1.3.3 Maintenance Programs for the Third Year........................................ PM-5 7.6 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers (Small)........................................ PM-38
1.3.4 Maintenance Programs for the Fourth Year...................................... PM-6 7.7 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers.................................................... PM-39
1.3.5 Maintenance Programs for the Fifth Year.......................................... PM-8 7.8 Installing the Components........................................................ PM-40
7.9 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter............................ PM-42
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures.......................PM-9
7.10 Cleaning inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member........... PM-43
2.1 Backing Up the Log................................................................... PM-9
7.11 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit............................................ PM-44
2.2 Checking the Error Log............................................................. PM-11
7.12 Cleaning the Dust-Tight Cover Assembly................................. PM-47
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time................................PM-12
7.13 Replacing the IP Suction Pump................................................ PM-49
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance........................PM-13
8. Erasure Unit...........................................................PM-55
3.1 Check Before Procedures........................................................PM-13
8.1 Removing the Filter................................................................. PM-55
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance.............................................PM-13
8.2 Cleaning the Filter.................................................................... PM-58
3.3 Checking the Output Characters...............................................PM-15
8.3 Replacing the Filter.................................................................. PM-58
4. Pulling Out the Machine.......................................PM-16 8.4 Reinstalling the Filter............................................................... PM-59
8.5 Cleaning the Brush Roller.........................................................PM-61
5. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch.................PM-17
8.6 Reinstalling the Brush Roller Assembly.................................... PM-64
6. Removing the Covers...........................................PM-18 8.7 Cleaning the Reflection Plate................................................... PM-65
6.1 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Year)........................................PM-18 8.8 Reinstalling the Reflection Plate............................................... PM-66
8.9 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit.................................................... PM-67
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.35
Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 0.36
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit..........................PM-69 12. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit......................... PM-69 Louvers................................................................ PM-119
9.2 Cleaning the Guide.................................................................. PM-72 12.1 Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers
9.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers.................................................... PM-73 (2nd/4th Year)......................................................................... PM-119
9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Rollers, Antistatic Members, and
Guide...................................................................................... PM-74 13. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch.................PM-124
10. Subscanning Unit..................................................PM-76 14. Securing the Machine.........................................PM-125
10.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly.......... PM-76 15. Cleaning the Mechanical Filter...........................PM-126
10.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Guide....................................... PM-77
10.3 Removing the Scanning Optics Unit..........................................PM-81 16. Checking the Image/Conveyance......................PM-127
10.4 Removing the Subscanning Unit.............................................. PM-84 17. Confirming the S Value.......................................PM-128
10.5 Cleaning the Guides, Center Rollers, and Rubber Rollers........ PM-89
10.6 Cleaning the Flywheel (Large) and Kapton® Belt..................... PM-94 18. Checking the Error Log......................................PM-130
10.7 Cleaning the Flywheel (Small) and Rubber Belt....................... PM-96
10.8 Cleaning Inside the Machine.................................................... PM-98
10.9 Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit............................................ PM-99
10.10 Reinstalling the Scanning Optics Unit......................................PM-104
11. Light-Collecting Guide........................................PM-108
11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Light-Collecting Guide...............PM-108
11.2 Cleaning the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly........... PM-112
11.3 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly....... PM-114
11.4 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit...................... PM-116
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.36
Contents Installation (IN) 0.37
Installation (IN)
1. Installation Work Flowchart ....................................IN-1 7. Confirming the S Value ..........................................IN-17
2. Preparation for Installation......................................IN-2 8. Powering OFF the FCR-MB 201 ............................IN-19
2.1 Precautions Regarding Installation .................................................IN-2
9. Cleaning the FCR-MB 201......................................IN-19
2.1.1 Definition of Patient Environment or the Like ........................................ IN-2
2.1.2 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical Unit ........ IN-2 10. Lead Precaution Label ...........................................IN-19
2.1.3 Precautions for System Connection ...................................................... IN-2
2.2 Checking the Items Supplied ..........................................................IN-2
Appendix 1.Setting the Master CL ......................Appx IN-1
1. Additionally Registering the Master CL
3. Installation Procedures............................................IN-3 (Procedures on the CL1) ....................................................... Appx IN-1
3.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member ...........................IN-3 2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2).........................Appx IN-4
3. Registering the Machine Information
4. Console Installation Procedures ............................IN-3
(CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) ..............................................Appx IN-5
5. Installing RU Software .............................................IN-4 4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility .....................Appx IN-5
5.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU ........................IN-4 5. Verifying Switching of Master CL ...........................................Appx IN-6
5.2 Setting the RU IP Address ..............................................................IN-5 Appendix 2.Changing the RU's IP Address .......Appx IN-8
5.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address .................................................IN-6
1. Starting the machine Maintenance Utility of the RU ...............Appx IN-8
5.4 Checking the Connection with the Console.....................................IN-8
2. Setting the RU's IP address...................................................Appx IN-8
5.5 Installing RU Software ....................................................................IN-9
3. Setting the FTP server IP address .........................................Appx IN-8
6. Image/Conveyance Checks ...................................IN-14 Appendix 3.Reinstalling the RU Software ..........Appx IN-9
6.1 Check Before Procedures ............................................................ IN-14
1. Deleting an Installed RU ........................................................Appx IN-9
6.2 Image/Conveyance Checks ......................................................... IN-15
2. Reinstalling the RU Software.................................................Appx IN-9
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.37
Contents Installation (IN) 0.38
Appendix 4.Installing the RU Software.............Appx IN-10
1. Verifying the connection to the Console............................... Appx IN-10
2. Installing the RU PC-TOOL ................................................. Appx IN-10
3. Installing the RU Software ................................................... Appx IN-11
Appendix 5.Corrective Procedure to be
Performed after Improper
RU PC-TOOL Installation ...............Appx IN-12
1. Corrective Procedure 1 ....................................................... Appx IN-12
2. Corrective Procedure 2 ....................................................... Appx IN-13
Appendix 6.Installing the Protective Member ..Appx IN-14
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.38
Contents Performance Check (PC) 0.39
Performance Check (PC)
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Performance Check List ... PC-1
Installation Information ............................................................................PC-1
Checklist .................................................................................................PC-1
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.39
0.40
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.40
0.41
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.41
0.42
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual 0.42
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Safety Precaution
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
Safety-1
1. Safety Precautions n Optical Parts
l When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure
to turn OFF the power switch.
Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid possible
l Never remove the scanning optics unit covers.
physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and servicing. l For dust removal procedures, observe the instructions described in the service
Labels that describe relevant precautions are attached on the machine. manual.
The instructions on such labels should also be observed during procedures. l Some high-voltage parts, such as the photomultiplier, may not be sufficiently
discharged even after power is turned OFF. When servicing such parts, exercise
due care to avoid electric shock hazards (not to touch the connector and terminal
1.1 General Precautions carelessly).
l Before removing the protective housings, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage
switch (HV switch). If the machine is powered ON with any of the protective
n Power Supply housings removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.
Unless otherwise instructed in the Service Manual, be sure to turn OFF the power of the
n Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
machine and unplug the power plug before servicing. With the power plug still plugged, you
When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the operation panel,
may experience electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit even when
the photomultiplier and the erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous
the machine is powered OFF. It should be noted, however, that some servicing procedures, substance may leak from the inside of a broken part.
such as voltage measurement, cannot be performed under power-OFF condition. In such
cases, use due care to avoid electric shock, burn, or secondary damage due to short circuit, n Other Working Precautions
as instructed in this manual. l When performing servicing procedures with the protective housings removed
under the powered condition, turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV switch).
Carefully proceed with the procedures while checking the instructions described
n Drive Mechanism in the service manual, and, when the procedures are completed, put the removed
protective housings back exactly where they were.
Be sure to turn OFF the power before servicing the gears, cams, belts, and other drive l Do not remove or install any part or component while the machine is powered,
mechanism parts. Otherwise, your body or clothing may be entangled. because of possible electric shock hazards.
However, there may be cases where the procedures cannot be performed under power-OFF l When performing checks or adjustments under the powered condition, exercise
condition. In such cases, use due care to avoid entanglement of your hand, foot, hairs, and due care against electric shock or other hazards.
clothing with any rotating mechanism, as instructed in this manual. l Do not touch the parts (such as erasure lamps) that remain at high temperature
because you may suffer burns.
l When servicing the scanning optics unit and printed circuit boards, be sure to
wear an antistatic wristband to remove static electricity built on the human body.
n Heavy Objects Static electricity may cause damage to the printed circuit boards.
Exercise due care regarding your working posture to avoid back pain during removal and l Keep clean the product labels, safety standards labels, product serial number
installation of heavy objects. indications, and so forth attached on the machine, and do not peel them or put
another label over them.
l Before powering ON the machine after completion of the servicing procedures,
n Safety Devices make sure that all the parts, screws, connectors, and so forth that were removed
have been reinstalled as appropriate, and that no tool is left in the machine.
Safety devices (such as fuses, circuit breakers, panels, and covers) should always be
enabled. Never attempt to make any alteration or modification that may impair their safety n Grounding
features. Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-1
Safety-2
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation 1.3 Definition of Patient Environment or the Like
As indicated in the certification and indication label attached on the right-hand side cover of The machine is incorporated into the “mobile digital multi-purpose integral X-ray diagnosis
the machine, the machine complies with “Laser Products - IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825- equipment". This machine is not installed alone in a patient environment.
1:2007.” The image reader incorporates a laser with a maximum output of 50 mW (Class 3B,
l Patient Environment
semiconductor laser wavelength of 660 nm, red visible light), but you will not be exposed to
any hazard if you perform tasks as instructed in the service manual. Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
n Precautions Against Laser Exposure in height from the area of the patient’s body.
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
l Procedures that require precautions against laser exposure l Medically-Used Room
When performing the following procedures, observe the instructions exactly as described in Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding
this manual to avoid laser exposure. After the procedures are completed, put the removed terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside
protective housings and screws back exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-used
a laser beam out of the machine. room is equipotential to that in the other medicallyused room. Generally, a portion of the
- Removal and reinstallation of the scanning optics unit. medically-used room is the patient environment.
- Replacement and cleaning of subscanning unit parts. l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
l Preventive maintenance for keeping the machine in compliance
In order to keep the machine in compliance, perform preventive maintenance programs
described in "Preventive Maintenance Volume" at intervals specified.
l Things that should not be done to avoid laser exposure
Observe the following precautions to avoid laser exposure.
- Never attempt to perform procedures other than instructed in this manual because you may
be exposed to laser beam radiation.
- Do not reflect a laser beam by placing a mirror or the like in the laser beam path.
- Do not alter the light path of a laser beam.
- Do not replace optical parts while the laser is energized.
- Do not attempt to make optical axis adjustment in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is red visible light, field adjustment of the optical axis cannot be done.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-2
Safety-3
2. Labels
2.1 Laser Precaution Labels and Rating Indication Label
2.1.1 Laser Precaution Labels and Rating Indication Label
Attachment Locations
- Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser precaution
labels, as specified in “Laser Products - Laser Products - IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-
1:2007” issued by the FDA of the U.S
- Below is illustrated the attachment location of Rating Indication Label
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-3
Safety-4
2.1.2 List of Laser Precaution Labels and Rating Indication Label n IEC 60825-1:2007 / EN 60825-1:2007 Class 3B Panel Label
n HHS Certification and Identification Label
REFERENCE
The HHS Certification and Identification Label is attached on the external cover of FCR-MB
201 Machine.
n Ratings Indication Label
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-4
Safety-5
2.2 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment Locations 2.2.2 Cassette Set Unit
2.2.1 Housing Unit
Hold the portions of the green labels to pull out/mount the RU from/on the Machine.
2.2.3 Erasure Unit
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-5
Safety-6
2.2.4 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 2.2.5 Subscanning Unit
Hold the portions of the green labels to dismount/mount the subscanning unit from/on the
housing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-6
Safety-7
2.2.6 Light-Collecting Guide 2.2.8 Cassette Insertion Operation Label, Cassette Right-Justifying
Label
2.2.7 Scanning Optics Unit
Hold the portions of the green labels to dismount/mount the scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-7
Safety-8
2.2.9 Lead Precaution Label
Apply the lead precaution label suitable for the local language.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-8
Safety-9
3. Protective Housings Against Laser
Exposure
Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, a laser beam will never leak
out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if the optical
path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service engineer or other
people around the machine may be possibly exposed to laser radiation.
During optics-related procedures, carefully perform the procedures while checking the
instructions described in this manual, and after the procedures are completed, restore the
protective housings removed back exactly where they were.
n Protective Housing of the Machine
The removable protective housings of the machine are illustrated below. The three covers
marked by in the illustration below are protective housings against laser exposure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-9
Safety-10
4. Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves
4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
For details on the Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), see the FCR-MB 201 Operation
Manual.
{FCR-MB 201 Operation Manual}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-10
Safety-11
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Safety-11
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.10.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Product Specifications
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
Spec-1
1. Specifications of FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit 1.3 List of Optional Items
Abbreviated product name Description Qty Remarks
1.1 Available IP Sizes and Types –
n Available IP types 1.4 Product Specifications
- ST-VI type
- ST-VN type
n Warm-up Time
n Available IP sizes
l Power non-interlinked setting (when RU is started up alone)
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10
42 seconds or less
- Metric (cm): 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30
l Power interlinked setting (when RU is started up by Console)
98 seconds or less
1.2 Available Cassette Types and Sizes
n Cassette CC (ST Cassette)
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17, 14 x 14, 10 x 12, 8 x 10
- Metric (cm): 35 x 43, 35 x 35, 24 x 30, 18 x 24, 15 x 30
n Cassette LC (Long Cassette)
l Twin cassette
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17-twin, 10 x 12-twin
- Metric (cm): 24 x 30-twin
l Triple cassette
- Inch (inch): 14 x 17-triple, 14 x 14-triple
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Spec-1
Spec-2
1.5 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity 1.6 Environmental Conditions
n Dimensions n Climate Conditions (Whole machine of FCR-MB 201)
W551 × D358 × H768 (mm) (except protrusions)
l Operating
Temperature: 15 °C to 30 °C
Relative humidity: 30 % RH to 80 % RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa
l Non-operating
Temperature: 0 °C to 45 °C (Should not freeze)
Relative humidity: 10% RH to 90% RH (without moisture condensation)
Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa
l Transit/storage
Temperature: -10 °C to 50 °C (Should not freeze)
n Weight Relative humidity: 30 % RH to 90 % RH (without moisture condensation)
86 kg approx. Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1,060 hPa
n Center of Gravity n Variable Magnetic Field
Height: 325.0 mm approx. DC 0.3 Gauss or less
From left-hand side: 272.8 mm approx.
From front: 194.2 mm approx.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Spec-2
Spec-3
1.7 Electrical Specifications 1.9 Disposal
n Rated Amperage 1.9.1 Disposal of IP
+ 5V = 10.0A
+12V = 5.0A Regarding the IP disposal, follow the instructions to dispose as laws are provided in each
+15V = 2.5A country and region. We will provide the product safety information as needed.
- 15V = 2.5A
+24V = 14.0A
+12V = 0.1A
n Overload Protection
10 A
1.8 Servicing Space
When servicing the machine, the space indicated below should be secured.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Spec-3
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Machine Description (MD)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
MD-1
1. Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration
The RU may be connected to a network to achieve various system configurations.
Basic system configuration examples are described here.
1.1 Features
n System Configuration Example (1)
n Features of the Machine The RU is connected to the CL via a network.
A connection with the CL is established over Ethernet (100Base-TX).
l The machine is network connectable via TCP/IP (100BASE-TX). u NOTE u
l An input power source is provided in the mobile X-ray equipment. Wired and wireless LAN cannot be used at the same time.
l Improved facility in inserting/removing cassettes
The cassette inserting entrance is slantly positioned, to improve facility in inserting/removing l For Wired LAN
the cassette. FCR-MB 201
l Removal of IP static electricity FCR-MB 201
X-ray Unit Controller
IP static electricity is removed by the electrically-conductive ball bearing and bearing for each
conveyance roller, as well as by the antistatic brush.
DC RS232C (X-CON)
RU CL
HUB Printer
MBRU1010001.ai
l For Wireless LAN
FCR-MB 201
FCR-MB 201
X-ray Unit Controller
DC RS232C (X-CON)
RU CL
HUB Printer
PACS
Wireless LAN MBRU1010002.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
1.3 Overall RU Configuration and Component Names 1.3.2 Nomenclature and Functions
Name Function
1.3.1 External View of RU Operation Panel Operation panel for the RU main body.
System power switch Power switch for the RU. When this switch is pressed with the system
power switch in the RU setting and the circuit breaker in the ON state,
the RU is powered ON.
Power lamp It is lit (in green) when the circuit breaker is pushed in the "I" position
and power is turned ON. Since the circuit breaker remains in the ON
state, the POWER lamp is always lit.
Cassette loading lamp It is lit (in green) when the RU starts up normally, indicating that
cassette loading is ready. While it is not lit, a cassette cannot be
loaded.
Cassette processing lamp It is lit (in green) while the cassette loaded into the RU is being
processed. It blinks when the IP erasure is complete and goes out
when the IP is ejected to the cassette.
Cassette removal lamp It is lit (in blue) when removal of a processed cassette is ready.
Backlight OFF lamp It blinks (in green) when the RU comes into the HIBERNATION mode.
CALL lamp It is lit (in yellow) when an error of level 0 or level 1 occurs.
Circuit breaker ON (1): Main power ON
OFF (0): Main power OFF
Keep ON for usual operation.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-2
MD-3
1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents
The language to be displayed on the operation panel and the window vary as shown below
depending on the “LANGUAGE” and “SCREEN TYPE” selected at the time of installation of
RU software.
u NOTE u
The Configuration setting on the CL need be changed according to the “SCREEN TYPE” of
the RU. The connection between the RU and the CL is not assured if different selection is
made.
- When SCREEN TYPE is “CLINIC”, only “1:1 connection” is available.
- When SCREEN TYPE is “HOSPITAL”, only “N:N connection” is available.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-3
MD-4
1.4 Machine Components
1.4.1 Unit Locations 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-4
MD-5
1.5 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions
Symbol Name Type Function Remarks
1.5.1 Cassette Set Unit - 1 SA1 Cassette IN sensor PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the cassette
is loaded, and is in CLOSE state
when the cassette is loaded.
SA2 Cassette hold sensor PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the cassette
is held, and is in CLOSE state when
the cassette is held.
SA9 "15x30 cassette" PI (5mm) The sensor determines a 15x30
identifying sensor cassette.
It is in OPEN state when the 15x30
cassette is inserted, and in CLOSE
state when a cassette of another
size is inserted.
SA11 Cassette ejection PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the cassette
sensor is ejected, is in CLOSE state when
the cassette is inserted, and in
OPEN state when the cassette is
ejected.
SA14 Cassette insertion error PI (5mm) The sensor is in OPEN state when
sensor a small-size cassette is loaded. It is
in CLOSE state together with SA15
when a large-size cassette is loaded.
Wrong insertion of the cassette
is indicated when the SA14 is in
CLOSE and the SA15 is in OPEN.
SA15 Large cassette size PI (5mm) The sensor detects that a large-size
sensor cassette is loaded, and is in CLOSE
state when the large-size cassette is
loaded.
SA16 Inch/metric sensor PI (5mm) The sensor detects the type (inch/
metric) of a small-sized cassette.
The sensor is in CLOSE state when
a small-sized metric cassette is
loaded, and is in OPEN state when a
small-sized inch cassette is loaded.
SOLA1 Cassette hold pin Power down Holds/releases the cassette hold
solenoid solenoid pin. The sensor is in OFF state
when holding and in ON state when
releasing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-5
MD-6
1.5.2 Cassette Set Unit - 2
Symbol Name Type Function Remarks
SA3 Debris fall prevention PI (5mm) The sensor detects whether the
shutter sensor anti-foreign-matter shutter opens or
closes, is in CLOSE state when the
anti-foreign-matter shutter opens,
and in OPEN state when the shutter
closes.
SA7 Cassette cover opening PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the IP
mechanism HP sensor retaining arm, the cassette cover-
open mechanism and the anti-
foreign-matter shutter are at the
home position (HP), and is in
CLOSE state when they are at the
home position.
SA8 Cassette cover closing PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the cover-
mechanism HP sensor close mechanism is at the home
position, and is in CLOSE state
when the mechanism is at the home
position.
SA10 Cassette IP holding PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the IP in the
sensor cassette is pressed, and is in OPEN
state when the IP is pressed.
It also detects whether a new
cassette or an old cassette is
inserted, is in OPEN state when
the new cassette is inserted, and
stays in CLOSE state when the old
cassette is inserted.
SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the cassette
position sensor cover-close mechanism is at a
close-cover position, and comes into
CLOSE state.
MA1 Cassette cover opening Two-phase Drives the IP retaining arm, the
mechanism driving pulse motor cassette cover-open mechanism and
motor the anti-foreign-matter shutter.
MA2 Cassette cover closing DC motor Drives the cassette cover-close
mechanism driving mechanism.
motor
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-6
MD-7
1.5.3 Cassette Set Unit - 3
Symbol Name Type Function Remarks
SA4 IP dropping sensor Separate The sensor detects that the IP drops.
(SA4-1, transmitting An error is detected when the sensor
SA4-2) type sensor is in CLOSE state with the IP having
dropped before suction, or when
it is in CLOSE state after the IP is
returned to the cassette and before
the cassette cover closes.
SA4-1: Light emitting side
SA4-2: Light receiving side
SA5 IP Suction sensor Pressure The sensor detects that the IP is
sensor sucked, and is in Open state when
the IP is sucked and in Close state
when the IP leaks.
SA6 Suction arm HP PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the removal
sensor arm is at the home position, and is in
CLOSE state when the arm is at the
home position.
MA3 Suction arm driving Two-phase Drives the removal arm.
motor pulse motor
MA4 IP transport motor Two-phase Conveys the IP.
pulse motor
PA1 IP suction pump DC pump Sucks the IP. It sucks the IP when
turned ON.
SVA1 IP air-leak valve Solenoid Leaks the IP from the suction cup. It
valve leaks the IP when turned ON.
SVA2 IP suction path Solenoid Changes over the suction modes.
changeover valve valve ON: Two suction disks suck an IP
other than a pantomographic
IP.
OFF: One suction disk sucks the
pantomographic IP.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-7
MD-8
1.5.4 Erasure Unit
Symbol Name Type Function Reference
TSWB1 Thermal switch Thermo Safety switch against abnormal heat
sensitive generation {MD:3.2.2}
switch
THB1 Lamp temperature Thermistor Detects the temperature in the lamp
{MD:3.2.2}
sensor box of the erasure unit.
FANB1 Erasure unit cooling DC fan Cools the lamp box of the erasure
{MD:3.2.2}
fan unit. (Can detect a rotation failure.)
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-8
MD-9
1.5.5 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit - 1
Symbol Name Type Function Remarks
SC1 Side-positioning grip PI (5mm) The sensor detects the home
HP sensor position of the grip mechanism
(grip down), and is in OPEN state
when the mechanism is at the home
position.
SC2 Side-positioning grip PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the grip
release position sensor mechanism is at the grip release
position, and is in OPEN state when
the mechanism is at the grip release
position.
SC3 IP sensor 1 PI (19mm) Detects the IP position when side-
positioning the IP that has been
conveyed.
SC9 "15x31/24x30 IP width" Reflecting- Detects the size of remaining IPs
identifying sensor type photo- during bootup.
sensor
BCRC1 Barcode reader Barcode Reads the IP barcode.
reader
MC1 Side-positioning IP Two-phase Conveys the IP.
transport motor pulse motor
MC2 Side-positioning DC motor Grips/releases the grip roller.
conveyor roller grip
release motor
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-9
MD-10
1.5.6 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit - 2
Symbol Name Type Function Remarks
SC6 IP side-positioning PI (5mm) Detects that the side-positioning
HP sensor mechanism is at the home position.
The sensor is in CLOSE state when
the mechanism is at the home
position.
SC7 Side-positioning PI (5mm) Detects that the side-positioning
reference block HP reference frame is at the home
sensor position.
SC8 Side-positioning latch PI (19mm) Detects the side-positioning latch
position sensor position for each IP size.
SC10 Side-positioning latch PI (5mm) Detects a pushed-in amount (stroke)
stroke sensor of the side-positioning.
MC3 Side-positioning latch Two-phase Drives the side-positioning latch
mechanism driving pulse motor mechanism. Protrudes the side-
motor positioning latch in accordance with
the IP size.
Drives the side-positioning latch
mechanism. Performs an IP side-
positioning operation.
MC4 Side-positioning DC motor Drives the side-positioning
reference block reference frame.
driving motor
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-10
MD-11
1.5.7 Subscanning Unit
Symbol Name Type Function Remarks
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor Laser light- Detects the tip of the IP to be read.
receiving
element
SZ2 Driven-side grip roller PI (5mm) Detects the gripping state of the
release HP sensor driven grip roller.
SZ3 Driving-side grip roller PI (5mm) Detects the gripping state of the
release HP sensor driving grip roller.
SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor PI (5mm) The sensor detects that the light-
collecting mirror dust removal
mechanism is at the home position,
and is in OPEN state when the
mechanism is at the home position.
MZ1 Subscanning motor FFM Conveys the IP.
MZ2 Driven/driving grip DC motor Grips/releases the driving grip roller
roller driving motor and the driven grip roller.
MZ3 Dust removal motor DC motor Drives the dust removal mechanism
to remove dust from the light-
collecting guide and the mirror.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-11
MD-12
1.5.8 Housing
Symbol Name Type Function Reference
FANG1 Scanner unit cooling DC fan Stirs the air in the housing (scanner
fan unit). -
(Can detect a rotation failure.)
FANG3 Cooling fan DC fan Cools the housing.
-
(Can detect a rotation failure.)
SG1 IP sensor 2 PI (19mm) Detects that the IP being conveyed
-
is present.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-12
MD-13
1.6 Board Locations 1.6.2 Cassette Set Unit
1.6.1 Housing
1.6.3 Erasure Unit
For the mounting position of the INV board, which is mounted on the ERS23A board, and
the locations of the erasure lamps controlled by the INV board, see "3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations."
{MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and Board Configurations}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-13
MD-14
1.6.4 Scanning Optics Unit 1.6.6 Subscanning Unit
1.6.5 Light-Collecting Unit
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-14
MD-15
1.7 System Block Diagram
n Power Supply System
CNB61 Erasure board
+24V (G)
+24V (G) SSR ERS23A
+5V (B)
+5V (B)
Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board
INV26A INV26A INV26A INV26A INV26A INV26A
Power supply
board
PSU29B
THB1 FAN TSWB1 LAMPB1, 3 LAMPB5, 7 LAMPB9, 11 LAMPB2, 4 LAMPB6, 8 LAMPB10, 12
+24V (G)
+5V (B)
+24V (G)
CN1
+5V (B) Sensor drive board Sensor drive board
SND23A SND23B
CN1 +24V (G)
+5V (B) +24V (G)
S M SOL P SV M(DC) FFM S M M(DC) FAN
+5V (B)
+5V (B)
+5Vs (A)
+5Vs (A)
+12V (E)
+12V (E)
+24V (G) CN1 CPU board
+15V (C)
-15V (D) CPU23B
+5V +1.5V
+24V (F) FAN
CN5
+5V +1.8V
-15V (D) +24V (G) Scanner board
SCN23C Regulator
+15V (C) +5V (B) +5V +3.3V
+5V (B) For board
15V +5VAS +5V +3.3V operation
SSR Relay circuit
Symbol Name
Photomultiplier BCR S Sensor
LD driver board Start-point IP leading-edge M Pulse motor
board
LDD23A detection board detection board LAN board M (DC) DC motor
PMT27B
SYN23A SED23A LAN23A SOL Solenoid
PNL board SV Solenoid valve
PNL23B P Pump
Operation panel FFM Motor
LDA23A PDA23A Polygon BCR Barcode reader
TSWB1 Thermal switch
THB1 Thermistor
Scanning optics unit MBRU1010004.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-15
MD-16
n Signal System
Erasure board
H8S ERS23A
CPU
CN81
Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board
Power supply INV26A INV26A INV26A INV26A INV26A INV26A
board
PSU29B
THB1 FAN TSWB1 LAMPB1, 3 LAMPB5, 7 LAMPB9, 11 LAMPB2, 4 LAMPB6, 8 LAMPB10, 12
Control Sensor drive board Control Sensor drive board
circuit SND23A circuit SND23B
DRV DRV DRV DRV
CN81 CN81
S M SOL P SV M (DC) FFM S M M (DC) FAN
CN1 CN6 CN7 CN9 CPU board
CPU23B
+24V (F) FAN FLASH
ROM
Scanner board
H8S SCN23A/SCN23C Control CPU
CPU circuit circuit
DRV Driver circuit
Symbol Name
Photomultiplier BCR S Sensor
Start-point IP leading-edge FLASH SH
board LD driver board M Pulse motor
detection board detection board ROM CPU LAN board
PMT27B LDD23A M (DC) DC motor
SYN23A SED23A LAN23A SOL Solenoid
PNL board SV Solenoid valve
PNL23B P Pump
Operation panel FFM Motor
LDA23A PDA23A Polygon BCR Barcode reader
TSWB1 Thermal switch
THB1 Thermistor
Scanning optics unit MBRU1010005.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-16
MD-17
2. Descriptions of Software Control 2.2 Data Flow between RU and CL
The exchange of data between the RU and CL is described below.
u NOTE u
In this chapter, the "RU Application," "RU IP Address," and "RU Configuration" are referred to 2.2.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing
shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively.
l Flow of image data
2.1 Network Settings The image data read from the IP is stored in the SDRAM of the CPU board (CPU23B), and
transferred to the CL via the network.
Settings for respective network items are made as follows.
l Flow of log data
The contents that have been set from machine Maintenance Utility (operation panel) are retained
in the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board. - The log data is written into the FTP server upon RU shutdown processing or upon occurrence
of a FATAL error.
Setup items Setting means Factory default values - The log data is retained in the FTP server until a certain amount of that data is reached, and,
RU IP address Machine Maintenance Utility 172.16.1.10 once that amount is exceeded, the data is overwritten on a first-in, first-out basis.
RU subnet mask Machine Maintenance Utility 255.255.0.0
RU default gateway Machine Maintenance Utility 0.0.0.0
FTP server IP address Machine Maintenance Utility 172.16.1.20
CL IP address RU PC-TOOL EDIT CL NAME 172.16.1.20
u NOTE u
The IP address of the RU can be set only from the machine Maintenance Utility (operation
panel).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-17
MD-18
2.2.2 “INSTALL” Operation and Data Flow (4) Select “USE” when a linac cassette is to be used in the user’s site and otherwise
select “NOT USE”.
(1) Set the “Reader Unit IP Address” and “FTP Server IP Address” from the machine
Maintenance Utility (operation panel).
→ The addresses are written into the Flash ROM on the CPU23B board.
(5) Set “CONFIGURATION”.
→ The configuration is written into the FTP server.
(2) Execute “INSTALL” on the RU PC-TOOL (CL).
(3) Set the language/brand type/ window display specifications of the operation panel
to be displayed on the operation panel.
→ The language and specifications for the RU LCD panel display are set.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-18
MD-19
(6) Set IP address of the CL. n Data Flow Block Diagram
→ RU-AP is written from the CD to the FTP server and to the SDRAM located on the
CPU23B board. CONFIGURATION and CL IP ADDR are written from the FTP server
to the SDRAM.
→ RU-AP, CONFIGURATION, and CL IP ADDR are written from the SDRAM located on
the CPU23B board to the FLASH ROM.
u NOTE u
If the version appears in red text, or when the version does not appear at all, it is a sign that the
install has not been done correctly. In that case, it is necessary to perform the install procedures
all over again.
CAUTION
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of the RU.
If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is corrupted,
so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-19
MD-20
2.2.3 "VERSION UP" Operation and Data Flow (3) Set "IP ADDR" of the CL.
→ RU-AP is written from the CD to the FTP server and to the SDRAM located on the
n Overview of Version Update CPU23B board.
- A version update for the RU-AP is performed via the FTP server through the use of [VERSION → RU-AP, CONFIGURATION, and CL IP ADDR are written from the SDRAM located on
UP] of the “RU PC-TOOL” of the CL or “CLIENT PC-TOOL” of the client PC. the CPU23B board to the FLASH ROM.
- With [VERSION UP], only a version update for the RU-AP should be done, but not for the
configuration. u NOTE u
If the version appears in red text, or when the version does not appear at all, it is a sign that the
n Data Flow
install has not been done correctly. In that case, it is necessary to perform the install procedures
(1) Execute "VERSION UP" from the RU PC-TOOL (CL), or the CLIENT PC-TOOL (client all over again.
PC).
- To update the version from the RU PC-TOOL:
CAUTION
While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of the RU.
If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is corrupted,
so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
- To update the version from the CLIENT PC-TOOL:
(2) Set “USE” or “NOT USE” of the linac cassette.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-20
MD-21
2.2.4 Flow of BACKUP Data 2.2.5 Data Flow during Restore
The following data are copied to a Storage media (USB memory stick or the like) by use of The following data are restored from the Storage media (USB memory stick or the like) to the
"BACKUP" of the RU PC-TOOL. FLASH ROM of the RU by use of "RESTORE" of the PC-TOOL.
- Configuration data (CONFIGURATION) - Configuration data (CONFIGURATION)
- Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA) - Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA)
- Log data (ERROR LOG, TRACE LOG, HISTORY LOG) - Log data (HISTORY alone)
l Data Flow
CAUTIONS
(1) The configuration data and scanner data are copied to the Storage media (USB
- While data is being restored, never turn OFF the power of the RU.
memory stick or the like) from the FLASH ROM of the RU via the FTP server.
- If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is
(2) The log data is copied to the Storage media (USB memory stick or the like) from corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
the CPU23B board memory (SDRAM) of the RU via the FTP server.
u NOTE u
The data restored is made effective by powering OFF the RU once and back ON.
REFERENCE
Of the log data, only HISTORY LOG is restored.
l Data Flow
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-21
MD-22
2.3 Master CL Switching Function n Example of Master CL Switching
Scenario where the system is operated with RU-A set in master CL-A and RU-B/C set in master
u NOTE u CL-B, but is switched to a system with RU-A/B/C under control of CL-B.
The master CL switching function is available only when “N: N connection” is set. {IN: Appendix 1._Setting the Master CL}
{Instruction Manual}
Once several master CL's are registered in the RU PC-TOOL, the User Utility allows the user to
selectively switch the master CL; provided that the following restrictions should be met.
n Restrictions
l When the master CL is switched, the following service information and
service procedures are inaccessible while switching is being done.
Exercise due care when the master CL switching function is used.
Service information: ERRLOG, HISTORYLOG
Service procedures: All procedures performed from the RU PC-TOOL
l The RU should be registered in CONFIGURATION of the CL to be switched.
REFERENCES
- The master CL is a CL that controls the RU. If the master CL goes down, system processing
cannot be executed.
- Up to four master CL's may be registered into the RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-22
MD-23
2.4 Error Handling
The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where it is
inoperable.
2.4.1 Error Handling
When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and IP
reading, the IP is returned to the cassette.
2.4.2 Cases where Retry is Impossible (FATAL Error)
(1) When the function of the CPU23B board stops.
(2) When the power supply voltage output stops.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-23
MD-24
2.5 HIBERNATION Mode 2.5.2 Transition to the HIBERNATION Mode
The "HIBERNATION mode" is such that, in order to save power, the conditions in the machine
n Transition Requirements
automatically change to the power-saving mode when the RU is not operated within a specified
period of time. (1) If "HIBERNATION Mode ON" is set in the User Utility and the RU is not operated
within the preset "HIBERNATION mode transition time" while the RU remains in
2.5.1 Operation in HIBERNATION Mode READY state, then the state transitions to the HIBERNATION mode.
(1) The machine comes into the same conditions with the power turned OFF, when it REFERENCE
transfers to the HIBERNATION mode. The HIBERNATION mode is not activated while operation is being performed in the User Utility
(2) Only the power lamp on the operation panel lights up in green in the and while an error message is being displayed.
HIBERNATION mode.
(2) When "HIBERNATION Mode ON" is set from the LCD panel during shutdown
processing.
→ The state immediately transitions to the HIBERNATION mode.
n Setting of Transition Time
- The setting of "HIBERNATION Mode" is made by the "Set Hibernation timer" of the User Utility.
- Time setting may be done with "HIBERNATION Mode ON" enabled.
- The time is settable in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.
2.5.3 Recovery from HIBERNATION Mode
n Recover Requirements
Turn ON the system power switch.
n Diagnosis upon Recovery
Upon recovery, the RU performs a bootup process that excludes mechanism bootup.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-24
MD-25
2.6 Bootup Processing (3) Perform diagnostics on each board.
Boards to be diagnosed: SND23A board, SND23B board, SCN board
After power is turned ON, diagnostic processing is performed in order of steps (1) through (7).
(1) Check the connection with the FTP server. (4) Perform "barcode reader COMMUNICATION check" and "fuse check".
REFERENCE
If the connection with the FTP server is abnormal, a connection retry takes about 3 minutes; thus,
the time required to display the bootup screen varies, as compared to the normal bootup time.
(2) Load RU-IPL, RU-AP, etc. from the FLASH ROM to the SDRAM.
(5) Perform "Mechanical Initialization 1". (IP search within the machine)
→ When it is completed normally, the time data is obtained from the CL.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-25
MD-26
(6) Perform "Mechanical Initialization 2". (Subscanning unit grip correction) 2.7 RU Shutdown Processing
(7) Perform "Scanner Initialization".
Mechanical shutdown processing and saving of log data are referred to as "RU shutdown
processing."
u NOTE u
If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will not be
saved.
n Flow of RU Shutdown Processing
(1) "Shutdown processing" command
There are two scenarios: "when system shutdown is performed for the CL" and "when the
system is shut down from the RU operation panel."
(2) Execute "saving of log data", and turn OFF the power.
(8) Perform "Mechanical Initialization 3". (Home positioning for each mechanism) Saving of log data:
Save HISTORY LOG, TRACE LOG, and ERROR LOG to the FTP server.
(9) The RU enters the READY state.
→ The CL is notified that the RU is now READY.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-26
MD-27
3. Descriptions of Electrical Operations 3.1.2 Fuses and the Components to Be Protected
Fuse mounted part Power supply Fuse No. Component to be protected
F1 Inverter board: INV board
3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function +24V(G) F2 Lamp
ERS23A board F3 Fan: FANB1
To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply voltage F4 Thermal switch: TSWB1
output detection function, which offers the following features: +5V(B)
F5 Current limit for +5 V(B) system.
- Each load circuit incorporates a fuse that serves to isolate a fault. +5V(B) F1 Sensor: SA1 to 12, SA14 to SA16
- The isolation points are provided with a current detection circuit, which constantly monitors F2 Pulse motor: MA1
the power supply voltage output. F3 Pulse motor: MA3
- The detection point can be identified by checking the combination of current detection F4 Pulse motor: MA4
circuits (points) in which an error has occurred. SND23A board +24V(G) Solenoid: SOLA1
- The DC motors (MA2, MC2, MC4 and MZ3) are protected by a driver circuit (mounted on F5 Pump: PA1
the board) which incorporates an overcurrent protection circuit. Solenoid valve: SVA1, SVA2
The driver circuit always detects a current and outputs a current of up to 2 A. If it detects
F6 Current limit for +24 V(G) system.
the current larger than 2 A, it stops outputting the current by the protection circuit.
+5V(B) F7 Current limit for +5 V(B) system.
Sensor: SC1 to 3, SC6 to 10,
+5V(B) F1
SG1, SZ2, SZ3, SZ5
3.1.1 Driver Circuits Incorporating the Overcurrent Protection F2 Pulse motor: MC1
+24V(G) F3 Pulse motor: MC3
Circuit and the Components to Be Protected
SND23B board F4 Fan: FANG1
Protection circuit Power +5V(B) F5 FFM motor: MZ1
Component to be protected
mounted part supply F6 DC motor: MZ2
+24V(G)
SND23A board +24V(G) DC motor: MA2 F7 Current limit for +24 V(G) system.
DC motor: MC2 +5V(B) F8 Current limit for +5 V(B) system.
+5V(B) F1
SND23B board +24V(G) DC motor: MC4
+5Vs(A) F2 LCD board: LCD23A board
DC motor: MZ3
CPU23B board +12V(E) F3
F4 Barcode reader: BCRC1
+5V(B)
F5 Current limit for +5 V(B) system.
+15(C) F1
Photomultiplier: PMT board
-15(D) F2
+5Vs(A) F3 IP leading-edge sensor: SED23A board
+24V(G) F4 Polygon
SCN board +15(C) F5 Laser: LDD23A board
Start-point sensor: SYN23A board
+5V(B) F6
Laser: LDD23A board
Protects +5 VAS after conversion by the
+15(C) F7
DC-DC converter.
+24V(G) F8 Current limit for +24 V(G) system.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-27
MD-28
3.1.3 Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram
Power supply board Erasure board: ERS23A Inverter board Lamp: LAMPB1
PSU29B INV26A
+24V(G) Relay
F1 Lamp: LAMPB3
circuit
F5 F2 Inverter board Lamp: LAMPB5
+5Vs(A) +5V(B)
INV26A
Sensor drive board Lamp: LAMPB7
SND23A
+5V(B) Inverter board Lamp: LAMPB9
+5V(B) F7 F1 Sensor INV26A
Lamp: LAMPB11
F6 F2 Pulse motor: MA1
+24V(G) Inverter board Lamp: LAMPB2
DRV DC motor: MA2 INV26A
+15V(C)
Lamp: LAMPB4
F3 Pulse motor: MA3
F4 Inverter board Lamp: LAMPB6
Pulse motor: MA4
INV26A
-15(D) Lamp: LAMPB8
Solenoid: SOLA1
F5 Pump: PA1 Inverter board Lamp: LAMPB10
INV26A
+12V(E) Solenoid valve: SVA1, SVA2 Lamp: LAMPB12
F3 Fan: FANB1
+24V(F)
Sensor drive board +5V(B) Thermal switch: TSWB1
F4
SND23B
+5V(B)
F8 F1 Sensor
+24V(G)
F7 F2 Pulse motor: MC1
+24V(G)
DRV DC motor: MC2 Fuse, and blown fuse detection circuit
F3 Pulse motor: MC3 For board operation
DRV DC motor: MC4 DRV Driver circuit incorporating an
overcurrent protection circuit (upper limit of 2 A).
F4 Fan: FANG1
F5 F6 F7 F8 It is impossible to replace the fuse only.
Replace the board with each fuse mounted
F5 FFM motor: MZ1 if the fuse is blown.
Replace the erasure assembly when
F6 DC motor: MZ2 an ERS23A-board-mounted fuse is blown.
DRV DC motor: MZ3
MBRU1030001.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-28
MD-29
Power supply board
PSU29B
+5Vs(A)
CPU board: CPU23B
Operation panel
+5V(B)
+5V(B) F5 F1
+5Vs(A)
F2 PNL board: PNL23B
+12V(E)
F3
+15V(C)
F4 Barcode reader: BCRC1
Scanner board
-15(D) SCN23C
+15V(C)
F1 Photomultiplier board
-15V(D)
PMT27B
+12V(E) F2
+5V(B)
F8 F3 IP leading-edge detection board: SED23A
+24V(G)
F4
+24V(F) FUZE Fan: FANG3 Start-point detection board Polygon
SYN23A
LD driver board
LDD23A
+24V(G)
F5 LDA board: LDA23A
15V 5VAS
F7 F6 PDA board: PDA23A
Fuse, and blown fuse detection circuit
DC-DC converter
(15V 5VAS)
F5 F7 F8 It is impossible to replace the fuse only.
Replace the board with each fuse mounted
if the fuse is blown.
MBRU1030002.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-29
MD-30
3.2 Erasure Unit Control l Control regarding service life of the lamp
- When the illumination count of the erasure lamp approaches the assumed machine working
hours, a warning “It’s about time to replace” is issued.
3.2.1 Overview of the Erasure Unit Control - When the illumination count of the erasure lamp reaches the assumed machine working
hours, a warning “The fluorescent lamp reaches the end of life. Contact the service for
replacement” is issued.
l Temperature adjustment control
- When the illumination count of the erasure lamp exceeds the assumed machine working
Temperature adjustment control is exercised to keep the inside of the erasure unit at a
hours, a warning “The erasure cannot be guaranteed” is issued.
constant temperature by controlling the operation of the erasure cooling fan (FANB1) in order
to obtain adequate light intensity required for IP erasure after the RU power is turned ON.
l IP erasure control
Erasure unit pass time is controlled in accordance with the dose received by a read IP, and
the IP is erased. VN-type IPs and VI-type IPs can be used in the machine. In a user’s site
where both of the two types of the IP are used in the machine, by selecting VN when setting
the configuration information, both the VN- and VI-type IPs can be erased.
l Fan control
The temperature in the erasure unit is detected by the lamp temperature detection thermistor
(THB1), and the erasure unit is controlled to activate the erasure cooling fan (FANB1) when
the detected temperature is high.
When an error occurs in the thermistor, the erasure cooling fan (FANB1) is always operated
during the IP processing, irrespective of the temperature in the erasure unit.
l Control in case of error
When an error occurs due to a burnt-out lamp during bootup or routine processing, the
machine transfers to “erasure time extension mode” or “erasure degeneration” mode after
the detection of the error. The relation of the conditions of the erasure unit lamps, the mode
to transfer, and the RU operation are as follows:
Erasure unit Mode to RU operation
condition transfer
Conveyance speed is delayed (erasure time is extended)
One or two lamps Erasure time since the light intensity needed for the IP erasure is
have burnt out. extension insufficient with the conveyance speed for routine
processing, so as to erase the image exposed on the IP.
Three or more lamps
have burned out. The image is read, but the IP is erased for the same
Erasure period of time as the erasure time extension mode.
The erasure cooling degeneration The message mentioning that the IP erasure cannot be
fan (FANB1) does not guaranteed is displayed on the RU operation panel.
work normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-30
MD-31
3.2.2 Components of Erasure Unit Control
- The control circuit for the erasure lamp unit is located on the ERS23A board. A control
signal from the ERS23A board causes the relay circuit and lamp inverter circuit to operate,
thereby turning ON or OFF the lamps and fans.
- To enable discrimination between failures of the control board (ERS23A board) and driver
board (INV board), LEDs are provided on the SND23B board to indicate the status of the
control signal.
Erasure board CPU board
Power supply ERS23A CPU23B
board
PSU29B Temperature Temperature Safety Unlit lamp Lit lamp LED
control fan thermostat detection control
management (FANB1)
sensor circuit control circuit monitor circuit circuit
control circuit
CNB61
Relay Main CPU Main CPU
+24V(G)
circuit
+5V(B)
Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board
INV26A INV26A INV26A
Lamp Lamp Lamp
THB1 FAN TSWB1 inverter inverter inverter
circuit circuit circuit
LAMPB5, 7 LAMPB2, 4 LAMPB10, 12
Inverter board Inverter board Inverter board
FANB1: Erasure unit cooling fan INV26A INV26A INV26A
TSWB1: Thermal switch
Lamp Lamp Lamp
THB1: Lamp temperature sensor inverter inverter inverter
circuit circuit circuit
LAMPB1, 3 LAMPB9, 11 LAMPB6, 8 MBRU1030003.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-31
MD-32
3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and Board Configurations
This section illustrates the erasure lamps and boards that are mounted in the erasure unit.
The mounting position of the INV board and the locations of the erasure lamps controlled by
the INV board are as indicated below.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-32
MD-33
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-33
MD-34
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-34
MD-35
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MD-35
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Troubleshooting (MT)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
MT-1
1. Overview of Troubleshooting
n Flow of Troubleshooting
The flow of RU troubleshooting greatly varies depending on whether the associated error log
exists.
When you start a troubleshooting procedure, be sure to confirm the error log.
l When the error is logged
Note the error code table, analysis flow, and check flow to identify the cause of the error.
l When the error is not logged
Note the check flow to identify the cause of the error.
n How to Use the Analysis Flow
If many parts are in error, the checks to be performed and procedural reference sections (check
flow) are sequentially indicated in the flow.
n Check Flow
The checks to be performed are sequentially indicated in the flow.
Typical check flows are indicated below.
- "4. Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism"
- "14. Line Error between CL and RU"
- "15. Troubleshooting Procedures for Image Abnormalities"
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting n Error Classifications
RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories:
Trouble occurred
1. Errors causing the CL screen or the operation panel of the RU to display an
error code
Checking the Error Log Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the CL screen or the LCD of
the RU to display an error code upon error detection
{MT:1.4.1_Checking the Error Log}
2. Errors causing the operation panel of the RU to display a “line error”.
1. Errors causing the CL screen or the Operation Panel of CL-to-RU communication errors that inhibit the RU from becoming ready
the RU to display an error code
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
Errors that result in image abnormalities due to laser light blockage caused by a scratched IP
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} or dust or due to electrical/scanner system component abnormalities
4. Errors interrupting the progress of a process and causing the inability to
{MT:2._Error Code Table} detect an error code
Errors that occur due to a CPU23B board or operation panel abnormality, interrupt the
“Analysis Flow” progress of a process, and cause the inability to detect an error code.
5. Errors causing the inability to upgrade the software or save data
“Check Flow”
Errors that cause a problem between the FTP server and CPU23B board due to an improper
2. Errors causing the Operation Panel of the RU to display a "line error". FTP server setting, IP address setting, or RU name setting
{MT:14._Line Error between CL and RU}
3. Errors causing image abnormalities
{MT:15._Troubleshooting Procedures for Image Abnormalities}
4. Analysis of errors causing the inability to display an error code and
the inability of the machine to boot
{MT:20._Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code Is Undetectable
and Machine does not Boot Up}
5. Errors causing the inability to update the software or save data
{MT:7._Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability to Update
the Software Version or Back Up the Machine Shipment Control Data}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-2
MT-3
1.2 Analysis and Check Flow Marks n Examples of Analysis/Check Flow Mark Usage
In the Troubleshooting volume, troubleshooting procedures are described in the form of a l Example 1: Example of operation item
flow. Various marks are used for flow simplification.
n Marks Used in Flows
Replace the CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Indicates an operation item. Refer to pages in "Chapter 11,
11.2 CPU23B Board" of the MC
The operation description is given next to a circle.
volume to perform the procedures.
FRCH201003.EPS
l Example 2: Example where check is performed
Q1 Indicates that the flow of operation branches off in a Q5 CPU23B board and SCN board tested in MUTL normal?
N specific direction depending on the result of the check
described next to Q1 . {MT:18_Board Tests in MUTL}
Y The actual check procedures may be described in the
reference section indicated by the mark positioned N
Refer to pages in "Chapter 18 Board Tests
below the text of Q1 . Y in MUTL" of the MT volume for checks.
Indicates the section you should refer to.
If normal, proceed in the direction of the arrow "Y"; if not,
The chapter/section number and title are indicated.
proceed in the direction of the arrow "N".
{MT:X.X_XXXXX} FRCH201004.EPS
Chapter, section, or subsection title
Chapter, section, or subsection number
Volume title
FRCH201002.EPS
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-3
MT-4
1.3 How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting from Error Log"
Each page consists of two vertical columns lying side by side. The left-hand side describes
the “analysis procedure” and the right-hand side furnishes “supplementary information”.
When you read the Troubleshooting volume for the first time, you should read not only the
left-hand side but also the "detailed information" on the right-hand side to understand the
background, objective, and other details of the troubleshooting procedure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-4
MT-5
1.4 Troubleshooting from Error Log n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log
An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the
machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first-out
1.4.1 Checking the Error Log basis.
Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about errors
Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of error encountered during the user’s use of the machine.
codes. If the error log is not backed up beforehand, the information about errors encountered during
troubleshooting may overwrite the previously logged error information. Therefore, you may
START lose the information about errors that occurred during the user’s use of the machine.
n Purpose of Viewing the Error Log
When an error occurs, it may incur two or more additional errors. The error code displayed
on the CL represents the last-encountered error.
Start the RU PC-TOOL.
You must therefore view the error log to locate the error code related to the encountered
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} trouble before proceeding to perform troubleshooting.
Back Up the ERROR LOG.
{MT:19._Collecting Various Data for Troubleshooting}
Start the ERROR DB to view the error log.
{MU:4.18_ERROR DB}
END
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-5
MT-6
1.4.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered Trouble n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log
When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error
1. Group the errors that occurred. occurrence timing.
2. Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the error that
l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the CL
occurred first).
Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time"
(Example) indications.
- Error occurrence groups A and B are judged as separate error occurrence groups,
because the difference between their error occurrence times is 14 minutes.
- The first error in Group A is "12302".
n When an error occurred after "time data" was acquired from the CL
l When errors occurred before "time data" was acquired from the CL
The resulting occurrence date/time indications look like "0000.00.00 00.00.25".
Note, however, that the time elapsed after power ON is indicated in the "seconds" position
(underlined) of the "occurrence time" field.
The error having the smallest "seconds" value occurred first.
n When an error occurred before "time data" was acquired from the CL
n Purpose of Grouping Errors and Identifying Error that Occurred First
If two or more errors are logged and you perform troubleshooting in accordance with the
error that is not responsible for the encountered trouble, troubleshooting will not easily be
accomplished. It is therefore necessary to locate the error responsible for the encountered
trouble (the error that occurred first) before proceeding to conduct troubleshooting.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-6
MT-7
1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the Associated n Error Code Table Description
Analysis Flow The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search.
Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence
conditions.
It is also provided with the information (page number or section number) that indicates the
most appropriate analysis flow you should refer to.
n Viewing the Error Table to Locate the Reference Analysis Flow
1. Search the error code table for the error code that is most likely to be responsible
for the encountered trouble.
2. Note the section number suggested in the "Analysis Flow" column for the error
code, and then see the suggested page.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-7
MT-8
1.4.4 Viewing the Check Flows in Accordance with an Analysis Flow
<Example of Analysis Flow> <Check Flow> � Start with START of an analysis flow and perform the steps indicated within
10336, 12336, 123 From the error code table, search 18. Board Test in MUTL the QX marks. Continue to perform the suggested steps in accordance
START another error code that occurred. 18.1 Analysis Flow
with the check results.
Check the error log in
START
� Check whether a power supply error (12801-12812) is encountered. If it is
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the e or g?
{MT:1.4 Troubleshooting from E or L g}
encountered ("Y"), note the error code table to identify the error.
N
Check the error code table again for he e or at the beginning,
Q1 Board tested normal?
{MT:18.2 Board Test}
The example below shows how to read the illustration:
and troubleshoot.
{MT:2. Error Code Table} N
Y Q2
Y
Q2 Power supply error (12801 12812) occurs?
Turn OFF the power of FCR MB 201.
Y
Check the error code table again and oubleshoot.
{MT:2. Error Code Table}
Y
N Turn ON the high voltage switch (HV) on the
SCN board.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
Q4 CPU23B board and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal? Secure RU to FCR MB 201.
Y
{MT:18. Board Test in MUTL} {MC:3.1.2 Pulling Out the RU} Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q8 N If a power supply error is
Return to the error code analysis flow or check flow. logged, branch to "Y".
Y
When you complete the steps in the Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
Q6 Check the motor (MA3)
{MT:11. Procedures for Checking the Motors}
check flow, return to the analysis flow. {MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q7 Error recurs? <Check Flow> If no power supply error is
logged, branch to "N".
N
A
11. Procedures for Checking the
Y
Motors
11.1 Check Flow of Motor
Replace the boards in the order named.
START
1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5 SND23A Board}
2. CPU23B board Q1 Operation of the motor normal?
� Check whether the check procedure reference section is suggested.
{MC:11.2 CPU23B Board} See the reference page of the suggested chapter number, and perform the
Q8 Reseat the error causing boa d and check if the error occurs again.
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow. suggested procedures in "Check Flow"
N
N
A Reference section for � When you complete the steps in the "check flow", return to the "analysis flow".
Q2 Cable normal?
Y the procedures
Replace the error causing b ard. N
Restore
SND23A board
END {MC:11.5 SND23A Board} Y
CPU23B board
{MC:11.2 CPU23B Board}
Q3 Resistance value of the motor normal?
{MT:11.13 Checking the Motor
Resistance Values}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Replace the motor.
{MC:2. Table of Contents}
When you complete the steps in the
check flow, return to the analysis flow. MBRU2010004.eps
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-8
MT-9
n Error Code Detail l Y: Error category
0: OS (operating system software), libraries
1: Image processing CPU
2: Scanner control (for front side)
3: Conveyance control
4: Overall control
5: Network control
6: Scanner control (for back side)
7: Electrical/hardware related
8: Reserved
l X: Error level 9: Others (software installation, version update, etc.)
Error level notations
FATAL error: 0 l ZZ: Reference number
- The user is notified of an error occurrence. It is managed according to each error category.
- Level of error where the routine processing cannot be resumed.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 2
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Level of error where the function associated with the error is rendered unusable.
- It is necessary to immediately troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 1
- The user is notified of an error occurrence.
- Errors that occur due to erroneous user operation (incorrect loading of the cassette
or IP, etc.).
- If this level of error occurred at the same time with another level of warning, it is
necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial action.
WARNING: 4
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when a retry operation is performed.
- If the same error occurs frequently and if this level of error occurs at the same time
with another level of warning, it is necessary to troubleshoot and take remedial
action.
WARNING: 3
- An error is logged, but the user is not notified.
- Errors that occur when servicing procedures are performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-9
MT-10
1.5 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch when troubleshooting is to be made with
the machine cover removed and the power supply turned ON.
The photomultiplier gets damaged if the power supply of the machine is turned ON
while the high-voltage switch is ON.
1. Pull out the RU.
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU}
2. Turn OFF the high-voltage
switch (S1) of the SCN board.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-10
MT-11
2. Error Code Table
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10001 File open error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10002 File read error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10003 File format error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10004 File write error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10005 File close error (1) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10010 File open error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10011 File read error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10012 File format error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-11
MT-12
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10013 File write error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the CPU23B board into the DRAM,
10014 File close error (2) error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file {MT:18.}
residing in the DRAM.
A file could not be opened during bootup or routine processing due to abnormal motor or other device
10060 Device open error management information, which is stored on the CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
Although the CPU23B board attempted during bootup or routine processing to start devices on the
10061 Device I/O control error SCN23A and SND23A/B boards, an error was detected.
{MT:18.}
Although the CPU23B board attempted during bootup or routine processing to read device information
10062 Device read error from the SCN23A and SND23A/B boards, an error was detected.
{MT:18.}
Although the CPU23B board attempted during bootup or routine processing to write device information
10063 Device write error onto the SCN23A and SND23A/B boards, an error was detected.
{MT:18.}
Barcode reader communication The communication between the CPU23B board and barcode reader (BCR) failed during bootup or
10064 {MT:18.}
error routine processing due to a communication error.
The scanner board status was checked during bootup or routine processing before command
10065 SCN board BUSY timeout transmission from the CPU23B board to scanner board SCN23A. However, the scanner board was {MT:18.}
busy.
SCN board transmission A timeout occurred in the communication between the main CPU (CPU23B board) and scanner H8
10066 {MT:18.}
timeout CPU (SCN23A) during bootup or routine processing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-12
MT-13
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
SCN board transmission The CPU23B board attempted to transmit a command to the SCN23A board during bootup or routine
10067 {MT:18.}
maximum retry count exceeded processing. However, the maximum retry count was exceeded (maximum retry count: 3).
SCN board reception checksum A checksum error occurred during bootup or routine processing when the CPU23B board attempted to
10071 {MT:18.}
error receive a command from the SCN23A board.
A timeout occurred during bootup or routine processing when the CPU23B board attempted to receive
10072 SCN board reception timeout a command from the SCN23A board.
{MT:18.}
Image reduction process A parameter error occurred during routine processing when the CPU23B board was engaged in an
10080 {MT:18.}
parameter error image reduction process.
An error occurred during routine processing when the CPU23B board was engaged in an image
10081 Image reduction process error reduction process.
{MT:18.}
ERS board communication The communication between the CPU23B board and ERS23A board failed during bootup or routine
10082 {MT:18.}
error processing due to a communication error.
During bootup or during routine processing, because the connector (CN1 on the PMT23A board, CNZ31
on the scanning optics unit, CNZ32 on the scanning optics unit, CN1 on the SYN23A board, CN1 on the
LDD23A board) is disconnected, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and photomultiplier (PMT)
10230 Scanner functional error functions are disabled. {MT:5.1}
Because the laser is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code:
D0E503).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is D0E403.
During bootup or during routine processing, because +15V is not supplied to the SCN23A board due to
blow of the fuse (F2 on the SCNS23A board) or +15V power supply error, most of the functions, except
10231 Scanner power supply error (1) for the polygonal mirror (POL) and laser (LDD), are disabled (detail code: A00300).
{MT:5.2}
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is A00000.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-13
MT-14
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup or during routine processing, because the fuse (F5 and F6 on the SCN23A board) is
blown, the photomultiplier (PMT) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled (detail code:
10232 Scanner power supply error (2) 809500).
{MT:5.3}
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 808400.
During bootup or during routine processing, because the fuse (F2 on the SCN23A board) is blown or
because -15V is not supplied to the SCN23A board, the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection
10233 Scanner power supply error (3) (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. {MT:5.1}
Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail
code: A00300).
- During bootup or during routine processing, because the fuse (F2 on the SCN23A board) is blown, ±
15V is not supplied to the SCN23A board, and the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN),
laser (LDD), and SCN board (PLL) functions are disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the
leadingedge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: A00303).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is A00003.
10234 Scanner power supply error (4) - During bootup, all the fuses except for the fuse (F5 on the SCN23A board) are blown, ±15V is not
{MT:5.4}
supplied to the SCN23A board, and the photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), laser (LDD),
and SCN board (PLL) functions are disabled. Because the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge
C28detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code: B00300).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is B00000.
- During bootup or during routine processing, because +24V is not supplied to the SCN23A board due
to blow of the fuse (F4 on the SCN23A board) or +24V (SLOT-E) power supply error, the polygonal
mirror (POL) function is disabled (detail code: 902403).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 903403.
10235 Scanner power supply error (5) - During bootup or during routine processing, because +5V is not supplied to the SYN23A board and
{MT:5.5}
SED23A board due to blow of the fuse (F3 or F6 on the SCN23A board) or +5V (SLOT-B) power supply
error, the leading-edge detection (SED) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled (detail
code: C01400).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-14
MT-15
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup or during routine processing, because ±15V is not supplied to the SYN23A board,
PMT23A board, and LDD23A board due to blow of the fuses (F2 and F5 on the SCN23A board), the
photomultiplier (PMT), start-point detection (SYN), and laser (LDD) functions are disabled. Because
10236 Scanner power supply error (6) the laser (LDD) is not enabled, the leading-edge detection (SED) cannot be performed (detail code:
{MT:5.6}
80D500).
Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is 80D400.
During bootup, an SCN23A board diagnostic error associated with polygon error is detected.
10244 Scanner control board error (4) Because the PLL on the SCN23A board does not oscillate, a polygon sync signal cannot be detected.
{MT:5.7}
During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal mirror
10261 Polygon rotation error (1) function is disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are {MT:5.7}
also disabled (detail code: 903403, 003400, 902403).
During bootup, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled due to blow of the
10271 Laser unlit error (1) fuse (F4 on the SCN23A board) or laser failure (detail code: 805413, C05413, 00503).
{MT:5.8}
During routine processing or during self-diagnostics, because the signal from the start-point detection
10281 Start-point detection error (1) (SYN) is faulty, the SCN23A board does not operate normally (detail code: 801C03).
{MT:5.9}
For self-diagnostics prior to reading during routine processing, the SCN23A board diagnostic error
Scanning optics unit board
10283 associated with polygon error is detected. The laser is unlit due to a disconnected connector at the {MT:5.7}
error (1) scanning optics unit, etc., so that an error related to the polygon error occurs, as well.
It was detected during bootup that the classification of the SCN23 board was not as specified. The
10293 Board classification error SCN23A board is installed in NDT FCR, or the SCN23B board is installed in medical FCR.
-
It was detected during bootup that the version of the firmware for the H8 CPU on the SCN23A board
10294 H8 CPU version error was not as specified.
{MT:5.10}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-15
MT-16
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup, because the scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the cassette and the
10298 Scanner retry error scanner is initialized. The routine processing is retried again, but the scanner-related error recurs.
{MT:5.11}
The cassette width sensors detected an abnormal combination when the cassette set unit performed
Cassette hold sensor a cassette hold operation during bootup. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was
10311 {MT:4.9}
combination inconsistency present (OPEN). The cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold (CLOSED). The cassette
ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN).
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination during bootup.
Cassette sensor combination The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The cassette hold sensor (SA2)
10312 {MT:4.10}
inconsistency (1) detected that a cassette hold was released (OPEN). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that
no cassette was present (OPEN).
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination during bootup.
Cassette sensor combination The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The cassette hold sensor (SA2)
10313 {MT:4.10}
inconsistency (2) detected a cassette hold (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette
was present (OPEN).
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination during bootup.
The cassette insertion error sensor (SA14) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The large cassette size
Cassette sensor combination
10314 sensor (SA15) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). When a small-size cassette is inserted {MT:4.11}
inconsistency (3) into position under normal conditions, the SA14 and SA15 both OPEN. When a large-size cassette is
inserted into position under normal conditions, the SA14 and SA15 both CLOSE.
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination during bootup.
Cassette sensor combination The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). The cassette
10315 {MT:4.19}
inconsistency (4) ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). The inch/metric sensor (SA16)
detected inch cassette (OPEN).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-16
MT-17
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Side-positioning grip sensor When a home positioning operation was performed for the side-positioning grip during bootup or routine
10317 combination inconsistency processing, the side-positioning grip HP sensor (SC1) and side-positioning grip release position sensor {MT:4.20}
(SC1 & SC2) (SC2) detected an abnormal state.
When a home positioning operation was performed for the side-positioning grip during bootup or routine
processing, the side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven. However, the
10318 Side-positioning grip HP error side-positioning grip HP sensor (SC1) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although
{MT:4.20}
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When an operation was performed to detect a side-positioning start position during bootup or routine
Side-positioning start position processing, the side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven. However, the side-
10319 {MT:4.21}
detection error positioning latch stroke sensor (SC10) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Although
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When a home positioning operation was performed for the side-positioning mechanism during bootup
Side-positioning home or routine processing, the side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven. However,
10320 {MT:4.21}
positioning error the side-positioning latch stroke sensor (SC10) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When an operation was performed to search the subscanning grip position during bootup, the driving-
Subscanning grip position
10322 side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3) or driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not {MT:4.26}
search error CLOSED. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When an operation was performed to grip the driving-side grip roller during bootup, the driving-side grip
Driving-side grip roller grip
10323 roller release HP sensor (SZ3) was not OPEN. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry {MT:4.26}
error count was exceeded.
When a fast grip operation was performed for the driven-side grip roller during bootup, the driven-side
Driven-side grip roller grip error
10324 grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not OPEN. Although retries were performed, the maximum {MT:4.26}
(1) retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-17
MT-18
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
When a home position release operation was performed for the cassette cover closing mechanism
during bootup or routine processing, the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2)
Cassette cover closing
10325 was driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not OPEN within {MT:4.12}
mechanism HP release error a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was
exceeded.
When an attempt was made to return the cassette cover closing mechanism to its home position
Cassette cover closing during bootup or routine processing, the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was
10326 mechanism home positioning driven. However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within {MT:4.12}
error a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was
exceeded.
When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism during
Debris fall prevention shutter
10327 bootup, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the shutter was {MT:4.13}
close error during bootup closed).
When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism during
IP hold release error during
10328 bootup, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new {MT:4.14}
bootup cassette was detected).
When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism during
Cassette cover opening bootup or routine processing, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven
10329 mechanism HP detection error by one pulse. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE {MT:4.15}
(1) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was
exceeded.
When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism during
Debris fall prevention shutter bootup or routine processing, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven (to
10332 {MT:4.13}
open error (1) perform an approaching operation). However, the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected
that the shutter was open.
When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism during
Debris fall prevention shutter bootup or routine processing, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven (to
10333 {MT:4.13}
open error (2) perform a returning operation). However, the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected that
the shutter was open.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-18
MT-19
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism during
Debris fall prevention shutter bootup or routine processing, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven
10334 {MT:4.13}
open error (3) by one pulse. However, the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) detected that the shutter was
open.
When a suction arm home positioning operation was performed during bootup or routine processing,
Suction arm home positioning the suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven. However, it was impossible to detect that the suction
10336 {MT:4.16}
error arm HP sensor (SA6) was OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries were performed, the sensor status
was not detected, and the system went down.
Cassette size sensor When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, the cassette width sensors (SA9,
10339 {MT:4.11}
combination error (1) SA14, and SA15) in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination.
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, the cassette IN sensor and
Cassette size sensor cassette ejection sensor in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination. The cassette
10340 {MT:4.10}
combination error (2) ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN). However, the cassette IN
sensor (SA1) detected a cassette (CLOSED).
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, the IP dropping sensor (SA4)
10343 IP drop detection during bootup detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped.
{MT:4.17}
When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position during
IP holding arm release error
10344 bootup, the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was {MT:4.14}
during bootup (1) detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position during
IP holding arm release error bootup while the cassette cover opening mechanism was in the cassette cover open position, the
10345 {MT:4.15}
during bootup (2) cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected).
Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-19
MT-20
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Feed IP drop detection during When an IP feed operation was performed for a remaining IP search process during bootup, the IP
10346 {MT:4.17}
bootup (1) dropping sensor (SA4) detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped.
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, the IP dropping sensor (SA4)
10347 IP sensor combination error and side-positioning conveyor unit IP sensor 1 (SC3) were CLOSED (detected an IP). Therefore, the {MT:4.1}
system went down.
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4,
and MC1) were driven. However, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) in the cassette set unit, IP sensor 1 (SC3)
Remaining IP conveyance error
10348 in the side-positioning conveyor unit, or IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within a {MT:4.2}
(side-positioning conveyor unit) predetermined period of time (did not detect an IP). It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed in the
side-positioning conveyor unit.
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, the IP transport motors (MZ1, MA4,
and MC1) were driven. However, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) in the cassette set unit, IP sensor 1 (SC3)
Remaining IP conveyance error
10349 in the side-positioning conveyor unit, or IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within a {MT:4.2}
(subscanning unit) predetermined period of time (did not detect an IP). It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed in the
subscanning unit.
When the subscanning unit grip roller freely rotated during bootup, the driving-side grip roller release
Subscanning grip roller free
10350 HP sensor (SZ3) was not OPEN. Therefore, retries were performed. However, the maximum retry {MT:4.26}
rotation error count was exceeded.
When a fast grip release operation was performed for the driving-side grip roller during bootup, the
Driving-side grip roller fast grip
10351 driving-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3) was not OPEN. Therefore, retries were performed. {MT:4.26}
release retry error (1) However, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-20
MT-21
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
When a subscanning IP ejection grip operation was performed during bootup or routine processing, the
Subscanning IP ejection grip
10352 driving-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3) was not CLOSED. Therefore, retries were performed. {MT:4.26}
maximum retry count exceeded However, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
Remaining IP length When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed during bootup, the IP transport
10353 measurement conveyance error motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning {MT:4.3}
(1) conveyor unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time.
Remaining IP length When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed during bootup, the IP transport
10354 measurement conveyance error motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning {MT:4.3}
(2) conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
Remaining IP length When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed during bootup, the IP transport
10355 measurement conveyance error motors (MZ1, MA4, and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning {MT:4.3}
(3) conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed during bootup, a nonstandard IP
10356 Nonstandard IP detection size was detected.
{MT:4.22}
When the subscanning unit performed a pre-reading grip release operation during bootup or routine
Subscanning pre-reading grip
10357 processing, the driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not CLOSED. Although retries {MT:4.26}
retry error (1) were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When a remaining IP side-positioning process was performed during bootup, the IP transport motors
Remaining IP side-positioning
10358 (MA4 and MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit did not {MT:4.4}
error (1) CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time.
Feed IP drop detection during When an IP feed operation was performed within the cassette for a remaining IP ejection process
10360 {MT:4.17}
bootup (2) during bootup, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) detected an IP (CLOSED) to find that an IP was dropped.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-21
MT-22
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
When a home positioning operation was performed for the cassette cover opening mechanism during
Cassette cover opening bootup or routine processing, the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven.
10361 mechanism home positioning However, it was impossible to detect that the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) was {MT:4.15}
error OPEN or CLOSED. Although two retries were performed, the sensor status was not detected, and the
system went down.
When a remaining IP ejection process was performed during bootup, the IP transport motors (MA4 and
Remaining IP load conveyance
10364 MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an {MT:4.5}
error during bootup (1) IP) within a predetermined period of time.
When a remaining IP ejection process was performed during bootup, the IP transport motors (MA4 and
Remaining IP load conveyance
10365 MC1) were driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no {MT:4.5}
error during bootup (2) IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
When a subscanning grip speed correction operation was performed during bootup or routine
Subscanning speed correction
10367 processing, an error occurred. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was {MT:4.26}
retry error exceeded.
The dust removal motor (MZ3) was driven during bootup or routine processing to perform a home
Dust removal mechanism home positioning operation for the dust removal mechanism. However, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ5) did
10370 {MT:4.27}
positioning retry error not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry
count was exceeded.
The dust removal motor (MZ3) was driven by the dust removal mechanism during user utility
Dust removal mechanism drive
10371 processing. However, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ5) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period {MT:4.27}
retry error (1) of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
The dust removal motor (MZ3) was driven by the dust removal mechanism during user utility
Dust removal mechanism drive
10372 processing. However, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ5) did not OPEN within a predetermined period {MT:4.27}
retry error (2) of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-22
MT-23
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to close the debris fall
Cassette cover opening
10380 prevention shutter during routine processing. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP {MT:4.15}
mechanism error sensor (SA7) was CLOSED.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing
to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position after IP suction. However, it was
10391 IP holding arm release error (1) found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was
{MT:4.14}
detected).
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) for IP holding was driven during routine
processing. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was
10393 Feed IP holding error held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count
{MT:4.14}
was exceeded.
The IP transport motor (MA4) was driven during routine processing to return an IP to the cassette after
Pre-length-measurement IP
10395 an IP drop. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was {MT:4.6}
position detection error (2) present) within a predetermined period of time.
When an IP return conveyance operation was performed during routine processing for the purpose
BCR read retry conveyance
10404 of retrying to read a barcode, the IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven. However, the IP {MT:4.7}
error dropping sensor (SA4) did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time.
The side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven to release the side-positioning
Side-positioning grip release grip during bootup or routine processing. However, the side-positioning grip release position sensor
10408 {MT:4.20}
error (SC2) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the
maximum retry count was exceeded.
The side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven for the purpose of retrying to
Side-positioning grip release
10409 release the side-positioning grip during bootup or routine processing. However, the side-positioning {MT:4.20}
preparation error grip HP sensor (SC1) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-23
MT-24
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven for side-positioning gripping
purpose during bootup or routine processing. However, the side-positioning grip HP sensor (SC1) did
10410 Side-positioning grip error not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry
{MT:4.20}
count was exceeded.
The side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven to retry a side-positioning
Side-positioning grip
10411 gripping operation during bootup or routine processing. However, the side-positioning grip release {MT:4.20}
preparation error position sensor (SC2) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
The driven/driving grip roller driving motor (MZ2) was driven during routine processing to release the
Driving-side grip roller grip
10418 driving-side grip roller grip. However, the driving-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3) was not {MT:4.26}
release error OPEN.
The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven during routing processing to perform a post-
Post-reading conveyance error IP-reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did
10419 {MT:4.8}
(1) not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum
retry count was exceeded.
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform an IP erasure
10420 Erasure conveyance error conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that {MT:4.5}
no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
For IP suction purposes, the IP suction pump (PA1) was turned ON during routine processing.
IP suction error (after IP
10421 However, it was found that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (the IP was not vacuum-retained). {MT:4.18}
reading) Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
After the cassette IP holding arm was released during routine processing, it was found that the IP
10422 Load IP drop (1) dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, retries were performed. {MT:4.17}
However, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
After the cassette cover was closed during routine processing, it was found that the IP dropping sensor
10423 Load IP drop (2) (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, retries were performed. However, the maximum {MT:4.17}
retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-24
MT-25
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the
10424 IP holding error IP was not held and an old cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the maximum
{MT:4.14}
retry count was exceeded.
When a suction positioning preliminary conveyance operation was performed for a load IP during
IP suction positioning
10425 routine processing, the IP transport motor (MA4) was driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the {MT:4.6}
preliminary conveyance error housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time.
When a suction positioning conveyance operation was performed for a load IP during routine
IP suction positioning
10426 processing, the IP transport motor (MA4) was driven. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit {MT:4.6}
conveyance error did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
Debris fall prevention shutter
10427 release a held IP in the load sequence. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter {MT:4.13}
open error sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open).
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
release a held IP in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10)
10428 IP hold release error (1) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the
{MT:4.14}
maximum retry count was exceeded.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
release a held IP in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10)
10429 IP hold release error (2) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the
{MT:4.14}
maximum retry count was exceeded.
Cassette cover opening The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
achieve cassette cover opening mechanism home positioning. However, it was found that the debris
10430 mechanism home positioning fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the shutter was closed). Although retries were
{MT:4.13}
error performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-25
MT-26
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
When a suction relief operation was performed in the IP load sequence during routine processing, it
10432 IP suction relief error was found that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was OPEN (the IP was vacuum-retained). Although retries {MT:4.18}
were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
After the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing
IP drop after cassette cover
10433 to retract the cassette cover opening pin, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED {MT:4.17}
opening (1) (due to IP detection).
IP drop after cassette cover After a held IP was released in the load sequence during routine processing, it was found that the IP
10434 {MT:4.17}
opening (2) dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection).
The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven during bootup or routine processing.
However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not OPEN (did not find that no IP was present)
10435 IP conveyance error within a predetermined period of time. It is conceivable that the IP may be jammed between the
{MT:4.8}
erasure unit and side-positioning conveyor unit.
The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven during routine processing.
Cassette cover closing However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a
10436 {MT:4.12}
mechanism drive error predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was
exceeded.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse during bootup or
Debris fall prevention shutter routine processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism.
10441 {MT:4.13}
open error (4) However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was
open).
Bootup cassette cover opening When the cassette cover opening mechanism was moved from the reference position to the home
10443 mechanism home positioning position during bootup, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP {MT:4.17}
error detection). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When a remaining IP side-positioning process was performed during bootup, the IP transport motors
Remaining IP side-positioning
10451 (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven to achieve IP positioning. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the {MT:4.8}
error (2) housing unit was CLOSED.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-26
MT-27
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Cassette cover closing When an attempt was made during bootup or routine processing to place the cassette cover closing
10456 {MT:4.12}
mechanism HP sensor error mechanism in its reference position, the cassette cover CLOSE position sensor (SA12) was not OPEN.
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform an IP return
10461 Feed conveyance retry error conveyance operation in the feed conveyance retry sequence. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the {MT:4.5}
housing unit did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven during routing processing to perform a post-
Post-reading conveyance error
10462 IP-reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit did {MT:4.3}
(2) not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time.
Side-positioning reference The side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the side-positioning reference block. However,
10464 block home positioning retry the side-positioning reference block HP sensor (SC7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of
{MT:4.23}
error time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
Remaining IP side-positioning The side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) was driven during bootup to perform a
10465 reference surface positioning remaining IP side-positioning process. However, the side-positioning reference block HP sensor (SC7) {MT:4.23}
error did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning latch home processing to perform a home positioning operation for the side-positioning latch. However, the side-
10467 {MT:4.24}
positioning error positioning latch position sensor (SC8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning latch HP processing to detect the home position of the side-positioning latch. However, the side-positioning
10468 {MT:4.24}
detection error latch position sensor (SC8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-27
MT-28
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning latch processing to protrude the side-positioning latch. However, the side-positioning latch position sensor
10469 {MT:4.24}
protrusion error (SC8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the
maximum retry count was exceeded.
When the ERS board conducted a diagnostic check during bootup, it was found that the INV23A board
10731 INV23A board position error was not mounted in the correct position. For the correct board position, refer to the MD volume.
{MT:21.7}
Configuration initialization During bootup, the Iconfiguration data (Irset.cfg) could not be loaded into the SDRAM from the flash
10900 {MT:18.}
failure ROM on the CPU23A board.
mismatch between IPL and
10901 An combination of IPL and application software is not specified.Version update the IPL. -
application software
11200 Initialization HV-OFF status It was found during bootup that the high voltage of the photomultiplier (PMT23A board) was OFF. {MT:13.}
11273 Laser life warning During bootup, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default value. {MT:5.10}
Image data variation or image An abnormal virtual data change was detected when the virtual data transfer diagnostics was
11287 signal connector error during conducted for bootup. In the virtual data transfer diagnostics for bootup, an abnormal virtual data {MT:5.12}
bootup change, disconnected image signal connector, or erroneous connector connection was detected.
Bootup improper cassette It was found during bootup that a cassette was improperly loaded (inserted obliquely or into a non-
11315 {MT:4.19}
loading detection reference position).
It was found during bootup that a cassette was incompletely inserted. The cassette IN sensor (SA1)
Bootup incomplete cassette
11316 detected that no cassette was present (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that a {MT:4.10}
insertion detection cassette was present (CLOSED).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-28
MT-29
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, an incompletely inserted cassette
Improper cassette loading was detected. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was present (CLOSED). The
11341 {MT:4.10}
detection (1) cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11)
detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED).
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, an incompletely inserted cassette
Improper cassette loading was detected. The cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that a cassette was present (OPEN). The
11342 {MT:4.10}
detection (2) cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). The cassette
ejection sensor (SA11) detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED).
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold) during routine processing.
However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold was released (CLOSED).
Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
11373 Cassette hold retry error An error results also when the following operation takes place.
{MT:4.9}
- When the cassette is loaded upside down;
- When the cassette is loaded front side back.
It was found during routine processing that a cassette was incompletely inserted. The cassette IN
Incomplete cassette insertion
11374 sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was present (CLOSED). The cassette ejection sensor (SA11) {MT:4.10}
detection detected that a cassette was present (CLOSED).
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold) during routine processing.
11375 Cassette not detected However, the cassette IN sensor (SA1) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN).
{MT:4.9}
Cassette size sensor The cassette width sensors (SA9, SA14, and SA15) in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal
11377 {MT:4.11}
combination error combination during routine processing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-29
MT-30
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The cassette width sensors in the cassette set unit detected an abnormal combination during routine
Small-size cassette loading processing. The "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor (SA9) detected that no cassette was present
11378 {MT:4.11}
error (OPEN). The cassette insertion error sensor (SA14) detected a cassette (CLOSED). The large
cassette size sensor (SA15) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN).
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to release a cassette hold) during routine
11379 Cassette hold release error processing. However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Although {MT:4.9}
retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
Debris fall prevention shutter close the debris fall prevention shutter. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter
11381 {MT:4.13}
close error sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry
count was exceeded.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (old
11382 Old cassette loading cassette). Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. It was therefore
{MT:4.14}
concluded that an old cassette was loaded.
The IP suction pump (PA1) turned ON during routine processing to perform an IP suction operation.
However, it was found that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (the IP was not vacuum-retained).
IP suction error (before IP
11389 Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded. {MT:4.18}
reading) An error results also when the following operation takes place.
- When a cassette of a metric type is loaded into an inch-type machine.
It was found during routine processing that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (the IP was not
11390 Feed IP suction error vacuum-retained) prior to the IP feed air leak sequence. Although an IP feed operation was retried, the {MT:4.18}
maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-30
MT-31
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform a feed
conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not detect
11396 Feed IP conveyance error (1) an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry
{MT:4.5}
count was exceeded.
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform a feed
conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit did not
11397 Feed IP conveyance error (2) CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were performed,
{MT:4.4}
the maximum retry count was exceeded.
When a remaining IP length measurement process was performed during bootup, IP sensor 1 (SC3)
11398 Nonstandard IP size in the side-positioning conveyor unit and "15x30/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor (SC9) detected an {MT:4.22}
abnormal combination. It was therefore concluded that a nonstandard IP size was encountered.
An IP length measurement process was performed with IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit in the
feed conveyance sequence during routine processing. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) CLOSED within a
11399 IP length measurement retry short period of time. Therefore, the IP length measurement process was retried, but the maximum retry
{MT:4.6}
count was exceeded.
The barcode could not be read during routine processing. Although the barcode reading operation was
11403 Barcode reading retry error retried, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
{MT:4.25}
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform a barcode
Barcode reading retry
11405 reading retry conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit {MT:4.4}
conveyance error did not CLOSE (did not detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time.
During routine processing, the IP size detected in an IP length measurement process and the IP type
11406 Nonstandard IP size detected in a barcode reading operation formed an abnormal combination.
{MT:4.25}
Unacceptable IP generation/ The IP type detected in a barcode reading operation during routine processing was other than ST-VN/
11407 -
type detection ST-VI.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-31
MT-32
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The subscanning motor (MZ1) was driven during routine processing to perform a reading conveyance
11413 Leading-edge detection error operation. However, the leading-edge detection interrupt did not occur within a predetermined period of {MT:4.28}
time.
The subscanning motor (MZ1) was driven during routine processing to perform a reading conveyance
Subscanning conveyance error
11414 operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit did not OPEN (did not find {MT:4.29}
(1) that no IP was present) within a predetermined period of time.
The subscanning motor (MZ1) was driven during routine processing to perform a reading conveyance
Subscanning conveyance error
11415 operation. As a result, a leading-edge detection interrupt occurred. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the {MT:4.29}
(2) side-positioning conveyor unit did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
Improperly sized cassette When a remaining IP ejection process was performed during bootup, it was found that the cassette size
11453 {MT:4.11}
ejection request did not match the size of the IP in the machine. It was therefore requested that the cassette be ejected.
When a remaining IP ejection process was performed during bootup, an empty cassette was detected.
11454 Empty cassette ejection request It was therefore requested that the cassette be ejected.
{MT:4.10}
The cassette IP holding arm performed an IP holding operation during bootup to determine whether
Old cassette loading during the cassette was old or new. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was
11460 {MT:4.14}
bootup CLOSED (the IP was not held and an old cassette was detected). Although retries were performed, the
maximum retry count was exceeded. It was therefore concluded that an old cassette was encountered.
Side-positioning reference The side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a reference surface positioning operation for the side-positioning reference block.
11465 block reference surface However, the side-positioning reference block HP sensor (SC7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined
{MT:4.23}
positioning retry error period of time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
The side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning reference processing to return the side-positioning reference block. However, the side-positioning reference
11466 {MT:4.23}
block return retry error block HP sensor (SC7) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Although retries were
performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-32
MT-33
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Scanner unit cooling fan It was found during bootup or routine processing that the scanner unit cooling fan (FANG1) in the
11489 {MT:6.1}
(FANG1) failure housing unit was faulty.
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, an unread IP in the machine was
11495 -
bootup returned to a cassette and then the cassette was ejected.
Request for an empty cassette When a remaining IP ejection process was performed during bootup, the insertion of an empty cassette
11498 -
having a specified size having a specified size was requested.
Unread IP ejection during When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, an unread IP in the machine was
11499 -
bootup returned to a cassette and then the cassette was ejected.
<Improper servicing>
In the CR-IR355RU, the employed RU/console connection setting was N-N. Therefore, the cassette
was ejected with a message displayed. Change the console configuration setting to 1:1.
11510 Unread IP ejection (1) <Occurrence condition analysis>
-
The console conducted a barcode search during routine processing. However, the relevant information
was not found. Therefore, the IP was ejected into the cassette without being read.
<User operation>
This error occurs if no menu is selected at the time of image output.
Patient information not
11511 <Occurrence condition analysis> -
registered The barcode could not be read because, for instance, the patient information relevant to the barcode of
the processed IP was not registered in the CL or the barcode label attached to the IP was soiled.
Although the RU sent an ID information inquiry to the CL during routine processing, the RU could not
acquire ID information due to CL abnormality. (This error does not occur in a situation where the target
11512 ID information acquisition error ID is not registered or the ID information cannot be acquired due to a barcode error.) The processed IP
{MT:14.}
returns to the cassette, the cassette is ejected, and the panel displays a message.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-33
MT-34
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
11530 Image data retransmission The RU has retransmitted the image data to the CL -
During routine processing, an attempt is made to retransmit the unsent image data from the RU to the
11531 Retransmission retry failure CL after communication with the CL is suspended; however, the CL rejects it, so that the image data is {MT:14.}
lost and the cassette is ejected.
Erasure time extension due Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate. Therefore, the message appeared, and a process was
11700 to erasure lamp illumination performed in the erasure extension mode in which the erasure time was extended. For the number of {MT:6.3}
failure unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume.
Erasure degeneration resulting A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate. The erasure degeneration mode then
from inadequate erasure due prevailed due to inadequate erasure. An unerased IP was ejected into the cassette. The message
11701 {MT:6.3}
to erasure lamp illumination appeared and the user made a mode selection. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD
volume.
failure
A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. Therefore, the message
Erasure lamp life end advance
11702 appeared to indicate that the lamp life end is about to be reached. For the predetermined cumulative {MT:21.8}
notice erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD volume.
The life end warning message appeared because a predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination
11703 Erasure lamp life end 1 time was exceeded. For the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD {MT:21.8}
volume.
The life end message appeared because a predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time
11704 Erasure lamp life end 2 was exceeded. For the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD {MT:21.8}
volume.
A predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was exceeded. Therefore, the message
Erasure lamp cleaning end
11705 appeared to indicate that the lamp life end is about to be reached. For the predetermined cumulative {MT:21.8}
advance notice erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD volume.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-34
MT-35
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The life end warning message appeared because a predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination
11706 Erasure lamp cleaning end 1 time was exceeded. For the predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time, refer to the MD {MT:21.8}
volume.
It was found during bootup that the temperature thermistor (THE1) was outside the specified
11710 Temperature sensor failure temperature range or that the erasure unit temperature control function was inoperative due to an open- {MT:6.4}
circuited or short-circuited sensor.
Erasure cooling fan (FANB1) The failure was detected by a current monitor circuit inside the erasure cooling fan (FANB1) during
11720 {MT:6.2}
failure bootup or routine processing.
It was found during bootup or routine processing that the F3 fuse on the ERS23A board, which protects
11721 ERS23A board F3 fuse blowout the erasure cooling fan (FANB1), was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the fuse mounted on the ERS23A board was
11730 ERS23A board fuse blowout blown.
{MT:9.}
Erasure time extension due to Some erasure lamps failed to illuminate due to an INV board failure. Therefore, the erasure time was
11732 {MT:6.3}
INV board failure extended. For the number of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume.
A predetermined number of erasure lamps failed to illuminate due to an INV board failure. The erasure
Erasure degeneration due to
11733 degeneration mode then prevailed, and an unerased IP was ejected into the cassette. For the number {MT:6.3}
INV board failure of unlit erasure lamps, refer to the MD volume.
An IP that was inadequately erased due, for instance, to an erasure lamp illumination failure or erasure
11760 Inadequately erased IP ejection lamp temperature detection thermistor (THB1) failure was returned to the cassette, and the cassette {MT:6.6}
was ejected.
The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the right-hand side cover air
Right-hand side cover air filter
11901 filter was reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded. Replace the air {MT:21.5}
life end indication filter.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-35
MT-36
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the erasure unit brush roller
Erasure unit brush roller life
11902 was reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded. Replace the brush {MT:21.5}
end indication roller.
The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the cassette impact
Cassette impact absorption
11903 absorption damper was reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 180,000 (4 years) was exceeded. {MT:21.5}
damper life end indication Replace the damper.
Erasure lamp filter life end The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the erasure lamp filter was
11904 {MT:21.5}
indication reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 90,000 (2 years) was exceeded. Replace the lamp filter.
The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the IP suction pump was
11905 IP suction pump life end reached, that is, an IP conveyance count of 135,000 (3 years) was exceeded. Replace the pump.
{MT:21.5}
11906 Laser life end The message appeared because a predetermined cumulative laser illumination time was exceeded. {MT:21.5}
Log information save error An error occurred during an RU shutdown process when an attempt was made to save error log/trace
11907 {MT:7.}
during shutdown process information in the FTP server.
The message appeared and the error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 50% from initial
11908 S-value fluctuations (1) value.
-
The message appeared and the error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 70% from initial
11909 S-value fluctuations (2) value.
-
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-36
MT-37
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Cassette insertion before
The message appeared and the cassette was ejected because the cassette was inserted before the
11950 console connection connection to the console was established.
{MT:14.}
establishment
The message appeared because the cassette was not inserted all the way in and two seconds elapsed.
An error results also when the following operation takes place.
11951 Cassette setting failure - When the cassette is slantly loaded; -
- When the cassette is inserted into an opposite side to reference;
- When a cassette of an inch type is loaded into a metric-type machine.
When an erasure mode process was performed during routing processing, an X-ray overdose was
Inadequate erasure due to X-ray
11960 detected. Therefore, the message appeared and an inadequately erased IP was returned to the -
overdose cassette.
Power restoration IP process An incompletely read IP was detected during bootup. Therefore, the message appeared, and the IP
11970 -
request was returned to the cassette and ejected.
Power restoration IP erasure An incompletely erased IP was detected during bootup. Therefore, the message appeared, and the IP
11971 -
request was returned to the cassette and ejected.
Since a high dose was detected during routine processing, the message appeared and a primary
Erasure incompleteness after
11980 erasure process was retried five times. Although the primary erasure process was retried five times, -
re-erasure the detected dose was still high. Therefore, the inadequately erased IP was returned to the cassette.
12001 File open error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file open sequence. {MT:7.}
12002 File read error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file read sequence. {MT:7.}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-37
MT-38
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
12003 File format error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file formatting sequence. {MT:7.}
12004 File write error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file write sequence. {MT:7.}
12005 File close error 1 (FTP) An error occurred in the FTP server file close sequence. {MT:7.}
Console BMP server connection An error occurred during routine processing when an attempt was made to establish the connection to
12039 {MT:14.}
error the console BMP server.
Console BMP server An error occurred during routine processing when an attempt was made to establish the communication
12040 {MT:14.}
communication error with the console BMP server.
12201 Start-point detection error During bootup, error for the start-point detection signal (SSH, SSL) is detected. {MT:5.9}
12202 Leading-edge detection error During bootup, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1L) is detected. {MT:5.13}
During bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error (no main-scan sync signal is generated) associated with
12203 SCN sync signal error polygon error occurs.
{MT:5.7}
During bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error (no polygon index signal is generated) associated with
12204 Polygon index signal error polygon error occurs.
{MT:5.7}
An error occurred during bootup because no edge detection interrupt was generated in the event of a
12206 Interrupt error CPU23B-to-SCN23A board interrupt diagnostic check error.
{MT:18.}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-38
MT-39
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
At the initializing and the processings, cannot detect polygon "OK" signal within 7.5 secounds after
12210 Polygon timeout polygon "ON".
{MT:5.16}
During bootup and routine processing, error for the PMT analog power supply signal (+15VOKH,
12211 PMT analog power supply error +15VOKL) is detected.
{MT:5.14}
12212 Laser light intensity error During bootup and routine processing, error for the laser OK signal (LD1OKH, LD1OKL) is detected. {MT:5.15}
12213 Polygon lock error During bootup and routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal (POKL, PONL) is detected. {MT:5.7}
During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the polygon rotation detection function on
12214 Polygon rotation error the SCN23A board.
{MT:5.16}
12215 PLL function error During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the PLL function on the SCN23A board. {MT:5.16}
During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the start-point interval function on the
12216 Start-point interval error SCN23A board.
{MT:5.16}
High-voltage command value During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the high-voltage command value diagnostics
12217 {MT:5.16}
error signal on the SCN23A board.
High-voltage detection value During bootup and routine processing, error is detected for the high-voltage detection value diagnostics
12218 {MT:5.16}
error signal on the SCN23A board.
12221 Lightproof error During S-value fluctuation detection, it is detected that QL value is 9 or more. -
During bootup and routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the
12222 Laser drive current value error factory default value.
{MT:5.10}
12225 Reading status error During routine processing, error is detected for the VSYNC signal on the SCN23A board. {MT:18.}
12226 Operation line status error During routine processing, error is detected for the SEDTM/FCLKTM signal on the SCN23A board. {MT:18.}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-39
MT-40
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup or during routine processing, error is detected for the PLL function, polygon rotation
12241 Scanner control board error (1) function, startpoint interval function on the SCN23A board.
{MT:5.16}
During routine processing, because the PMT high-voltage value is not set correctly on the SCN23A
12242 Scanner control board error (2) board, error is detected for the high-voltage command diagnostics.
{MT:5.16}
During bootup or during routine processing, error is detected for the start-point mask signal generated
12243 Scanner control board error (3) from the SCN23A board and the index signal (PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror (POL).
{MT:5.16}
During routine processing, an SCN board diagnostic error associated with polygon error is detected.
12244 Scanner control board error (4) Because the PLL on the SCN23A board does not oscillate, a polygon sync signal cannot be detected.
{MT:5.7}
During bootup or during routine processing, only error for the PMT analog power supply signal
Photomultiplier control board
12251 (+15VOKH, +15VOKL) is detected (detail code: 008100). Note that if the HV is OFF, the detail code is {MT:5.14}
error (1) 008000.
Photomultiplier control board During bootup or during routine processing, only error for the high-voltage power supply signal (HVOKH,
12252 {MT:5.14}
error (2) HVOKL) is detected.
Leading-edge detection error During bootup or during routine processing, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1,
12255 {MT:5.13}
(1) SED2L) is detected.
Leading-edge detection timing During routine processing, IP conveyance overrun occurs due to mechanical error or SCN23A board
12256 {MT:5.13}
error control error, and only error for the SEDTM and FCLKTM signals on the SCN23A board is detected.
During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal mirror
12261 Polygon rotation error (1) function is disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are {MT:5.7}
also disabled.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-40
MT-41
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup or during routine processing, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) and error
12262 Polygon rotation error (2) for the start-point interval function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN23A/SCT23B {MT:5.7}
board are detected (detail code: 003400).
During bootup or during routine processing, only error for the lock signal (POKL, PONL) from the
12263 Polygon rotation error (3) polygonal mirror (POL) is detected (detail code: 002001). {MT:5.7}
If error for the SEDTM or FCLKTM signal on the SCN23A board is detected, the detail code is 002003.
During bootup or during routine processing, error for the signals (PONL, POKL, PINDXL) from the
polygonal mirror and the SEDTM signal on the SCN23A board is detected (detail code: 001002).
Alternatively, error for the index signal (PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM and
12264 Polygon rotation error (4) FCLKTM signals on the SCN23A board is detected (detail code: 001000).
{MT:5.7}
Alternatively, error for the signals (POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM signal on
the SCN23A board is detected (error code: 101000).
At the processings, detected that the value of LD driving current has changed greater than 5mA, in
12270 LDIFMAX update order to control the lack of light intensity (keep the same level light intensity) due to the LD deterioration.
-
During routine processing, the laser (LDD) and start-point detection (SYN) functions are disabled due to
12271 Laser unlit error (1) blow of the fuse (G011 and H011 on the SCN23A board) or laser failure (detail code: 805413, C05413, {MT:5.8}
00503).
During routine processing, the laser light intensity is less than 50%, and the laser light intensity error
signal (LD1OKL, LD1OKH) is detected (detail code: 004000).
12272 Insufficient laser light intensity Alternatively, the laser light intensity error signal (LD1OKL, LD1OKH) and laser drive current value (LDIF)
{MT:13.}
error are detected (detail code: 014000).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-41
MT-42
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During routine processing, the laser drive current value (LDIF) is more than 1.4 times the factory default
12273 Laser life warning value.
{MT:5.10}
During bootup, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL
function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN23A board are detected (detail code:
801C03).
Alternatively, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function, and error for the PLL function
12281 Start-point detection error (1) on the SCN23A board are detected (detail code: 800C03).
{MT:5.9}
Alternatively, during routine processing, the disabled state of the start-point detection (SYN) function,
and error for the PLL function and polygon rotation detection function on the SCN23A board are
detected (detail code: 801401).
During bootup and routine processing, only error for the start-point interval function on the SCN23A
board is detected (detail code: 000400).
12282 Start-point detection error (2) Alternatively, error for the start-point interval function and polygon rotation detection function on the
{MT:5.9}
SCN23A board is detected (detail code: 001401).
Scanning optics unit board During bootup, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and leading-edge detection (SED) functions
12283 {MT:5.10}
error during bootup are disabled due to laser failure or disconnected connector.
During IP reading, the laser drive current value (LDIF) becomes more than 1.4 times the factory default
12284 LD monitor value error warning value.
{MT:5.10}
During IP reading, error is detected for the HV command value signal sent from the SCN23A board to
HV command value error
12285 the PMT23A board. The difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup {MT:5.14}
warning value is out of specification.
HV detection value error During routine processing, error is detected for the HV detection value signal of the PMT23A board. The
12286 {MT:5.14}
warning difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value is out of specification.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-42
MT-43
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
An abnormal image data change was detected when the image data transfer diagnostics was
Image data variation or image conducted for scanner diagnostics during routine processing.
12287 signal connector error during In the image data transfer diagnostics for scanner diagnostics during routine processing, an abnormal {MT:5.12}
routine processing virtual data change, disconnected image signal connector, or erroneous connector connection was
detected.
During routine processing, error for the VSYNC signal on the SCN23A board is detected after IP
12291 Reading sequence error reading is completed (detail code: 000002).
{MT:18.}
Reading is completed by any interrupt other than the leading-edge detection interrupt or end-of-screen
Reading sequence error during interrupt.
12292 {MT:4.30}
routine (2) At the same time, an insufficient number of output lines and a too-early start of reading are detected (detail
code: 000003).
A scanner unit abnormality was detected while control communication is established between the
Scanner transmission/reception
12295 CPU23B board and SCN23A board during bootup, during routine processing, or in the Maintenance {MT:5.16}
error Utility. Therefore, the control communication did not normally end.
During bootup, during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, control communication between
12296 Scanner send sum check error the CPU23B board and SCN23A board can be done; however, sum check error is detected from the {MT:5.16}
SCN23A board.
During bootup, or during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, communication between the
Communication receive size
12297 CPU23B board and SCN23A board can be done; however, data size error is detected from the SCN23A {MT:5.16}
error board.
During routine processing, because scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the cassette
12298 Scanner retry error and scanner initialization is performed, with a retry made for routine processing.
{MT:5.11}
During bootup or routine processing, a combination of errors that should not have logically occurred
12299 Error for scanner, etc. were generated.
-
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-43
MT-44
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning grip home processing to perform a home positioning operation for the side-positioning grip. However, the side-
12318 {MT:4.20}
positioning retry positioning grip HP sensor (SC1) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a
retry was performed.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning start position
12319 processing to detect a side-positioning start position. However, the side-positioning latch stroke sensor {MT:4.21}
detection retry (SC10) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning mechanism processing to perform a home positioning operation for the side-positioning mechanism. However,
12320 {MT:4.21}
home positioning retry the side-positioning latch stroke sensor (SC10) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
Therefore, a retry was performed.
When a subscanning grip position search was conducted during bootup, it was found that the driving-
Subscanning grip position
12322 side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3) or driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not {MT:4.26}
search retry CLOSED. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Driving-side grip roller grip When the driving-side grip roller performed a grip operation during bootup, the driving-side grip roller
12323 {MT:4.26}
retry release HP sensor (SZ3) was not OPEN. Therefore, a retry was performed.
When the driven-side grip roller performed a fast grip operation during bootup, the driven-side grip roller
12324 Driven-side grip roller grip retry release HP sensor (SZ2) was not OPEN. Therefore, a retry was performed.
{MT:4.26}
The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven during bootup or routine
Cassette cover closing processing to perform a home position release operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism.
12325 {MT:4.12}
mechanism HP release retry However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not OPEN within a predetermined
period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-44
MT-45
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Cassette cover closing The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism.
12326 mechanism home positioning However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a
{MT:4.12}
retry predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Cassette cover opening The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse during bootup
or routine processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening
12329 mechanism home positioning mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within
{MT:4.15}
retry (1) a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Cassette cover opening The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism.
12330 mechanism home positioning However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a
{MT:4.15}
retry (2) predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Cassette cover opening The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism.
12331 mechanism home positioning However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not OPEN within a
{MT:4.15}
retry predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
IP suction sensor error during It was found during bootup that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (the IP was vacuum-
12335 {MT:4.18}
bootup retained).
The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven by one pulse during bootup or routine processing to
Suction arm home positioning
12336 perform a home positioning operation for the suction arm. However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) {MT:4.16}
retry (1) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven during bootup or routine processing to perform a home
Suction arm home positioning
12337 positioning operation for the suction arm. However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not CLOSE {MT:4.16}
retry (2) within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-45
MT-46
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The suction arm driving motor (MA3) was driven during bootup or routine processing to perform a home
Suction arm home positioning
12338 positioning operation for the suction arm. However, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) did not OPEN {MT:4.16}
retry within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position during
IP holding arm release retry
12344 bootup, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new {MT:4.14}
during bootup (1) cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed.
When an attempt was made to release the cassette IP holding arm from the cassette cover opening
IP holding arm release retry
12345 position during bootup, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was {MT:4.14}
during bootup (2) held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed.
Subscanning grip free rotation When the subscanning unit grip roller freely rotated during bootup, the driving-side grip roller release
12350 {MT:4.26}
retry HP sensor (SZ3) was not OPEN. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Driving-side grip roller fast grip When a fast grip release operation was performed for the driving-side grip roller during bootup, the
12351 {MT:4.26}
release retry driving-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3) was not OPEN. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Subscanning IP ejection grip When a subscanning IP ejection grip operation was performed during bootup or routine processing, the
12352 {MT:4.26}
retry driving-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3) was not CLOSED. Therefore, a retry was performed.
When the subscanning unit performed a pre-reading grip operation during bootup or routine processing,
Subscanning pre-reading grip
12357 the driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not CLOSED. Therefore, a retry was {MT:4.26}
retry (1) performed.
Cassette cover opening The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven by one pulse during bootup
or routine processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening
12361 mechanism home positioning mechanism. However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within
{MT:4.15}
retry (1) a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-46
MT-47
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Cassette cover opening The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism.
12362 mechanism home positioning However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not CLOSE within a
{MT:4.15}
retry (2) predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Cassette cover opening The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism.
12363 mechanism home positioning However, the cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) did not OPEN within a
{MT:4.15}
retry predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
When a subscanning grip speed correction operation was performed during bootup or routine
Driven-side grip roller grip
12367 processing, it was found that the driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not OPEN. {MT:4.26}
speed correction retry Therefore, a retry was performed.
The dust removal motor (MZ3) was driven during bootup or routine processing to perform a home
Dust removal home positioning
12370 positioning operation for the dust removal mechanism. However, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ5) did {MT:4.27}
retry not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The dust removal motor (MZ3) was driven by the dust removal mechanism during user utility
Dust removal mechanism drive
12371 processing. However, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ5) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period {MT:4.27}
retry (1) of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The dust removal motor (MZ3) was driven by the dust removal mechanism during user utility
Dust removal mechanism drive
12372 processing. However, the dust removal HP sensor (SZ5) did not OPEN within a predetermined period {MT:4.27}
retry (2) of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold) during routine processing.
12373 Cassette hold retry However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected that a cassette hold was released (CLOSED). {MT:4.9}
Therefore, a retry was performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-47
MT-48
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Cassette undetected in cassette The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned OFF (cassette hold) during routine processing.
12376 {MT:4.9}
hold sequence However, the cassette ejection sensor (SA11) detected that no cassette was present (OPEN).
The cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) turned ON (to release a cassette hold) during routine
12379 Cassette hold release retry processing. However, the cassette hold sensor (SA2) detected a cassette hold (OPEN). Therefore, a {MT:4.9}
retry was performed.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
Debris fall prevention shutter
12381 close the debris fall prevention shutter. However, it was found that the debris fall prevention shutter {MT:4.13}
close retry sensor (SA3) was OPEN (the shutter was open). Therefore, a retry was performed.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
12382 Old cassette loading retry prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (old {MT:4.14}
cassette). Therefore, a retry was performed.
When a suction arm home position was checked during bootup or routine processing, it was found that
12383 Suction arm home positioning the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) was OPEN. Therefore, the suction arm was returned to its home {MT:4.16}
position.
After the cassette cover was opened during routine processing, it was found that the IP dropping sensor
12386 IP drop detection (1) (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection).
{MT:4.17}
After IP suction during routine processing, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED
12388 IP drop detection (2) (due to IP detection).
{MT:4.17}
The IP suction pump (PA1) turned ON during routine processing to perform an IP suction operation.
12389 IP suction retry However, it was found that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (the IP was not vacuum-retained). {MT:4.18}
Therefore, a retry was performed.
It was found during routine processing that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (the IP was not
12390 Feed IP suction retry vacuum-retained) prior to the IP feed air leak sequence. Therefore, an IP feed operation was retried.
{MT:4.18}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-48
MT-49
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
release the cassette IP holding arm from the IP holding position after IP suction. However, it was found
12391 IP holding arm release error (2) that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and an old cassette was
{MT:4.14}
detected).
When an IP feed leak operation was performed during routine processing, it was found that the IP
12392 Feed suction IP leak error suction sensor (SA5) was OPEN (the IP was vacuum-retained).
{MT:4.18}
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
12393 Feed IP fall prevention retry hold an IP. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was {MT:4.14}
held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed.
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform a feed
Feed IP side-positioning
12396 conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within a {MT:4.5}
conveyance retry (1) predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform a feed
Feed IP side-positioning
12397 conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit did not {MT:4.4}
conveyance retry (2) CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The barcode could not be read during routine processing. Therefore, the barcode reading operation
12403 Barcode reading retry was retried.
{MT:4.25}
The side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven during bootup or routine
Side-positioning grip release
12408 processing to release the side-positioning grip. However, the side-positioning grip release position {MT:4.20}
drive retry sensor (SC2) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) was driven for the side-positioning grip
12410 Side-positioning grip drive retry during bootup or routine processing. However, the side-positioning grip HP sensor (SC1) did not OPEN {MT:4.20}
within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-49
MT-50
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The subscanning motor (MZ1) was driven during routine processing to perform a reading conveyance
Subscanning conveyance error
12415 operation. As a result, a leading-edge detection interrupt occurred. However, IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the {MT:4.29}
(2) side-positioning conveyor unit did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
The subscanning motor (MZ1) was driven during routine processing to perform a reading conveyance
12416 FFM drive W.F. abnormal operation. However, a W.F. abnormality was detected.
{MT:4.28}
The driven/driving grip roller driving motor (MZ2) was driven during routine processing to let the driven-
Driven-side grip roller grip error
12417 side grip roller perform a grip operation. However, the driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) {MT:4.26}
(2) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
The IP transport motors (MA4, MC1, and MZ1) were driven during routing processing to perform a post-
12419 Post-reading conveyance retry reading conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE (did not {MT:4.8}
detect an IP) within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The IP suction pump (PA1) turned ON during routine processing to perform an IP hold release
12421 Load IP suction retry operation. However, it was found that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was CLOSED (the IP was not {MT:4.18}
vacuum-retained). Therefore, a retry was performed.
After an IP hold release operation was performed during routine processing, it was found that the IP
12422 Load IP drop retry (1) dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, a retry was performed.
{MT:4.17}
After the cassette cover was closed during routine processing, it was found that the IP dropping sensor
12423 Load IP drop retry (2) (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). Therefore, a retry was performed.
{MT:4.17}
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
12424 Load IP hold retry prevent an IP drop. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the {MT:4.14}
IP was not held and an old cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-50
MT-51
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
release an IP hold in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor
12428 Load IP hold release retry (1) (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was
{MT:4.14}
performed.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven during routine processing to
release an IP hold in the load sequence. However, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor
12429 Load IP hold release retry (2) (SA10) was OPEN (the IP was held and a new cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was
{MT:4.14}
performed.
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to perform a home positioning
Cassette cover opening operation for the cassette cover opening mechanism during routine processing. However, it was found that
12430 the debris fall prevention shutter sensor (SA3) was CLOSED (the shutter was closed). Therefore, a retry
{MT:4.13}
mechanism HP drive retry
was performed.
When a suction relief operation was performed in the IP load sequence during routine processing, it was
12432 Load IP suction relief retry found that the IP suction sensor (SA5) was OPEN (the IP was vacuum-retained). Therefore, a retry was {MT:4.18}
performed.
The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven during routine processing.
Cassette cover closing
12436 However, the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined {MT:4.12}
mechanism drive retry period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Cassette cover closing The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism. However,
12438 mechanism home positioning the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of
{MT:4.12}
retry time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
Cassette cover closing The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven during bootup or routine
processing to perform a home positioning operation for the cassette cover closing mechanism. However,
12439 mechanism home positioning the cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of
{MT:4.12}
retry error time. Although retries were performed, the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-51
MT-52
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Cassette cover closing The cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) was driven during bootup or routine processing
12440 mechanism close positioning to place the cassette cover closing mechanism in the close position. However, the cassette cover CLOSE {MT:4.12}
error position sensor (SA12) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time.
When a home position check was performed on the cassette cover closing mechanism during bootup or
Cassette cover closing
12441 routine processing, the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) was OPEN. Therefore, the cassette cover closing {MT:4.16}
mechanism HP check mechanism was placed at its home position.
IP found in remaining IP
12442 When a remaining IP ejection process was performed during bootup, an IP was found in the cassette. -
ejection cassette during bootup
Bootup cassette cover opening When the cassette cover opening mechanism was moved from the reference position to the home
12443 mechanism home positioning position during bootup, it was found that the IP dropping sensor (SA4) was CLOSED (due to IP detection). {MT:4.17}
retry Therefore, a retry was performed.
When the driven-side grip roller performed a grip operation during routine processing, it was found that the
12444 Driven-side grip roller grip error driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not OPEN.
{MT:4.26}
The driven/driving grip roller driving motor (MZ2) was driven during routine processing to let the driven-side
Subscanning grip speed grip roller perform a grip operation. However, the time required for the driven-side grip roller release HP
12446 sensor (SZ2) to switch from the CLOSE state to the OPEN state was not as specified. (Since the required
{MT:4.26}
timeout (2)
time was significantly different from the specified time, a correction must be made.)
When the subscanning unit performed a pre-reading grip operation during bootup or routine processing,
Subscanning pre-reading grip
12447 the driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not CLOSED. Although retries were performed, {MT:4.26}
retry error (2) the maximum retry count was exceeded.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-52
MT-53
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Subscanning pre-reading grip When the subscanning unit performed a pre-reading grip operation during bootup or routine processing,
12448 the driven-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) was not CLOSED. Therefore, a retry was performed.
{MT:4.26}
retry (2)
The cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) was driven to release an IP hold in the load
Cassette cover opening
12449 sequence during routine processing. However, it was found that the cassette cover opening mechanism {MT:4.15}
mechanism operation error HP sensor (SA7) was CLOSED.
No remaining-IP ejection empty When a remaining IP ejection process was performed during bootup, a remaining IP was detected in the
12452 machine. However, it was found that there was no ejection cassette in the cassette set unit.
{MT:4.10}
cassette during bootup
When a remaining IP search process was performed during bootup, the IP dropping sensor (SA4) in the
Two IPs remaining during
12455 cassette set unit and IP sensor 1 (SC3) in the side-positioning conveyor unit were both CLOSED (due to IP {MT:4.1}
bootup detection). It was therefore concluded that there were a plurality of IPs in the machine.
When the cassette IP holding arm held an IP during bootup to determine whether an old or new cassette
Old/new cassette judgment
12460 is used, it was found that the cassette IP holding sensor (SA10) was CLOSED (the IP was not held and an {MT:4.14}
retry during bootup old cassette was detected). Therefore, a retry was performed.
The side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning reference to place the side-positioning reference block at its home position. However, the side-positioning reference
12464 block HP sensor (SC7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was
{MT:4.23}
block home positioning retry
performed.
Side-positioning reference The side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) was driven during bootup or routine processing
to perform a reference surface positioning operation for the side-positioning reference block. However, the
12465 block reference surface side-positioning reference block HP sensor (SC7) did not CLOSE within a predetermined period of time.
{MT:4.23}
positioning retry Therefore, a retry was performed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-53
MT-54
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning reference
12466 to return the side-positioning reference block. However, the side-positioning reference block HP sensor {MT:4.23}
block return retry (SC7) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning latch home to perform a home positioning operation for the side-positioning latch. However, the side-positioning
12467 latch position sensor (SC8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was
{MT:4.24}
positioning retry
performed.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning latch HP
12468 to detect the home position of the side-positioning latch. However, the side-positioning latch position {MT:4.24}
detection retry sensor (SC8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning latch
12469 to protrude the side-positioning latch. However, the side-positioning latch position sensor (SC8) did not {MT:4.24}
protrusion retry OPEN within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
The IP transport motors (MA4 and MC1) were driven during routine processing to perform a feed
12474 Feed IP conveyance error (3) conveyance operation. However, IP sensor 2 (SG1) in the housing unit did not CLOSE within a {MT:4.5}
predetermined period of time. Therefore, a retry was performed.
12510 Message format error An illegal command was received from the CL during bootup or routine processing. -
12520 Message transmission failure An attempt to transmit a message from the RU to the CL failed during bootup or routine processing. {MT:14.}
RES message receiving time- During bootup or routine processing, a REQUEST message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU
12521 cannot receive a RESPONSE message, thus resulting in a time-out.
{MT:14.}
out
During bootup or routine processing, a message is transmitted from RU to CL, however, RU cannot receive
12522 ACK receiving time-out ACK, thus resulting in a time-out.
{MT:14.}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-54
MT-55
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Although the SET command was transmitted from the RU during routine processing, a signal other than
SET command CL receiving
12523 OK was received as a response from the CL. After the processed IP returns to a cassette, the cassette is -
error ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU panel.
Although the Start-Process command was transmitted from the RU to the CL immediately after cassette
Forbidden Response to Start-
12524 insertion during routine processing, a rejection command was received from the CL. After the processed IP {MT:14.}
Process command returns to a cassette, the cassette is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU panel.
Although the INQ command was transmitted from the RU to the CL immediately after cassette insertion
Forbidden Response to INQ
12525 during routine processing, a rejection command was received from the CL. After the processed IP returns {MT:14.}
command to a cassette, the cassette is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU panel.
Although the Start-Read command was transmitted from the RU immediately before IP reading during
Forbidden Response to Start-
12526 routine processing, a rejection command was received from the CL. After the processed IP returns to a {MT:14.}
Read command cassette, the cassette is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU panel.
An error occurred during routine processing when an attempt was made to read image data from an image
12589 Image read error area in the SDRAM on the CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
A timeout occurred during routine processing when an attempt was made to read image data from an
12591 Image read timeout image area in the SDRAM on the CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
An error occurred in the scanner correction mode of the Maintenance Utility when an attempt was made to
12592 Image read error read image data from an image area in the SDRAM on the CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
Error in image transfer from During normal use or in the Maintenance Utility, the whole or part of an image was not transferred from the
12594 SCN23A board to the CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
SCN board
Erasure unit safety thermostat During bootup or routine processing, the safety thermostat (TSWE1) was activated because the
12711 temperature of the erasure unit lamp house was unduly raised.
{MT:6.5}
activation
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-55
MT-56
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
ERS board communication
12740 During bootup, an error was detected in the communication between the CPU23B board and ERS board. {MT:18.}
error
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 1 was blown.
12770 INV board port 1 failure For the INV board location and port numbers, refer to the MD volume.
{MT:6.7}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 2 was blown.
12771 INV board port 2 failure For the INV board location and port numbers, refer to the MD volume.
{MT:6.7}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 3 was blown.
12772 INV board port 3 failure For the INV board location and port numbers, refer to the MD volume.
{MT:6.7}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 4 was blown.
12773 INV board port 4 failure For the INV board location and port numbers, refer to the MD volume.
{MT:6.7}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 5 was blown.
12774 INV board port 5 failure For the INV board location and port numbers, refer to the MD volume.
{MT:6.7}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 6 was blown.
12775 INV board port 6 failure For the INV board location and port numbers, refer to the MD volume.
{MT:6.7}
Wait for erasure due to out-of- During routine processing, the erasure unit internal temperature did not reach a specified level within 60
12790 seconds. Therefore, the message appeared and erasure degeneration occurred.
{MT:6.4}
range temperature
During routine processing, temperature buildup was awaited before IP erasure because the erasure unit
Timeout after wait for erasure
12791 internal temperature was out of range. However, a timeout occurred. As a result, erasure degeneration {MT:6.4}
due to out-of-range temperature occurred.
Out-of-range temperature
12792 The temperature was out of range during erasure. {MT:6.4}
during erasure
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-56
MT-57
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F2 fuse on the SND23A board (MA1 fuse)
12801 MA1 fuse blowout was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F3 fuse on the SND23A board (MA3 fuse)
12802 MA3 fuse blowout was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F4 fuse on the SND23A board (MA4 fuse)
12803 MA4 fuse blowout was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F5 fuse on the SND23A board (a common
12804 SPSV fuse blowout fuse for the solenoids, pumps, and valves) was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F1 fuse on the SND23A board (a common
12805 ALLSA fuse blowout fuse for the daylight section sensors) was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F2 fuse on the SND23B board (MC1 fuse)
12806 MC1 fuse blowout was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F3 fuse on the SND23B board (MC3 fuse)
12807 MC3 fuse blowout was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F6 fuse on the SND23B board (MZ2 fuse) was
12808 MZ2 fuse blowout blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F4 fuse on the SND23B board (FANG1 or
12809 Scanner fan fuse blowout FANG2 fuse) was blown.
{MT:9.}
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F5 fuse on the SND23B board (the fuse for
12811 MZ1 fuse blowout protecting the subscanning motor (MZ1)) was blown.
{MT:9.}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-57
MT-58
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the F1 fuse on the SND23B board (the fuse
IP conveyance sensor fuse
12812 for protecting the side-positioning conveyor sensors (SC1 to SC3 and SC6 to SC10), subscanning unit {MT:9.}
blowout sensors (SZ2, SZ3, and SZ5), and housing unit sensor (SG1)) was blown.
In the Maintenance Utility, an error occurred when an SDRAM diagnostic check was performed on the
12820 SDRAM test error CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
CPU23B board flash ROM When a board check was conducted in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the flash
12821 ROM read/write test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
CPU23B board interrupt When a board check was conducted in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the
12822 CPU23B interrupt test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
CPU23B board register In the Maintenance Utility, an error occurred when a register diagnostic check was performed on the
12823 CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
SCN23A board interrupt When the SCN23A board was checked in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the
12830 interrupt test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
SCN23A board register When the SCN23A board was checked in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the
12831 register read/write test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
SCN23A board interrupt When the SCN23A board was checked in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the
12840 interrupt test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
SCN23A board register When the SCN23A board was checked in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the
12841 register test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
SCN23B board interrupt When the SCN23B board was checked in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the
12842 interrupt test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
SCN23B board register When the SCN23B board was checked in the Maintenance Utility, an abnormality was detected in the
12843 register test.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-58
MT-59
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Panel board communication When the PNL23A board diagnostic check was performed in the Maintenance Utility, a timeout occurred in
12850 the communication with the CPU23B board.
{MT:18.}
timeout
PNL23A board flash ROM In the Maintenance Utility, an error occurred when a flash ROM diagnostic check was performed on the
12851 PNL23A board.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
PNL23A board SDRAM In the Maintenance Utility, an error occurred when an SDRAM diagnostic check was performed on the
12852 PNL23A board.
{MT:18.}
diagnostic error
PNL23A board self-diagnostic In the Maintenance Utility, an error occurred when flash ROM and SDRAM diagnostic checks were
12853 performed on the PNL23A board.
{MT:18.}
error
12908 S-value fluctuations (1) The error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 50% from initial value. -
12909 S-value fluctuations (2) The error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 70% from initial value. -
During routine processing, an IP that was inadequately erased due to X-ray overdose was returned to the
12960 Re-erasure detection cassette. The error occurs only when the log function is turned on for configuration setup purposes.
-
- "MUTL mode" functions are simultaneously activated for the RU.
MUTL mode multiple access
12980 - The function that is entered first is activated, but the function that is entered second is not activated, and -
warning error is logged.
During bootup and during routine processing, the FTP server cannot be accessed for communication from
12990 FTP server access error the RU to the CL. Or, the FTP server may be accessed, but a connection cannot be established.
{MT:14.}
High-voltage OFF during
13200 During bootup, the photomultiplier (PMT23A board) high voltage is OFF. -
bootup
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-59
MT-60
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
During bootup or routine processing, a command error occurred in the status acquisition sequence after
13207 High-voltage ON retry high-voltage turn-ON. Therefore, a retry was performed.
-
During bootup and routine processing, the polygon OK signal is not detected within 7 seconds after turn-
13210 Polygon timeout ON of the polygonal mirror.
{MT:5.7}
The IP of the size other than the input size is inserted for shading correction of the M-Utility, so that error is
13227 Reading IP size error detected.
-
In the shading correction mode of the Maintenance Utility, a correction was made of a non-flat image or a
13228 Shading correction data error clear portion that was generated due to improper image formatting. Make the shading correction again.
-
13229 HVCNT value error During M-Utility operation, an out-of-spec HV is inputted. -
- During bootup or during routine processing, the start-point mask signal issued from the SCN23A board
13240 Start-point mask signal warning varies by 0.02%, peak to peak. -
- During bootup or during routine processing, the detection of 12241 error is done with 2% variations.
During bootup or routine processing, the range of main scan interval variations was outside the upper or
lower limit of the error decision value parameter.
<User operation>
13260 Main scan interval warning If vibration is applied to the machine from the outside while the adjuster bolts are not lowered, the vibration -
is transmitted to the scanning optics unit and logged.
<Action>
Check to ensure that the adjuster bolts are lowered.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-60
MT-61
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
This error occurs when the surrounding temperature around the machine changes drastically.
During routine processing checks, it is detected that the LD drive current value varies by more than 5 mA.
13270 LDIFMAX update In order to adjust the insufficient luminosity due to degraded LD (to maintain the same level of luminosity), -
it is necessary to vary the LD drive current by more than 5 mA. During LDIFMAX update, variations of 5
mA or more are detected.
During routine processing, the difference between MIN and MAX of the laser drive current monitor value is
13284 LD monitor value error warning out of specification.
{MT:5.10}
During routine processing, error is detected for the HV command value signal sent from the SCN23A board
HV command value error
13285 to the PMT23A board. The difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup {MT:5.14}
warning value is out of specification.
HV detection value error During routine processing, error is detected for the HV detection value signal of the PMT23A board. The
13286 difference between MIN and MAX of the monitor value relative to the setup value is out of specification.
{MT:5.14}
warning
13289 Format adjustment data error In the Maintenance Utility, when format adjustments are performed, out-of-range data is inputted. -
When a restore command was executed in the M-Utility to write scanner data from a floppy disk to the
13290 Scanner data format error IMG board flash ROM, the command did not terminate normally because a scanner data format error was -
detected.
When control communication was established between the CPU23B board and SCN23A board from the
Scanner send/receive retry
13295 Maintenance Utility during bootup or routine processing, a scanner unit error was detected. Error recovery -
warning was achieved by performing a retry operation.
Bootup cassette size sensor
13312 The cassette size sensors (SA9, SA14, and SA15) detected an abnormal combination during bootup. {MT:4.11}
combination inconsistency
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-61
MT-62
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning start position
13319 to detect a side-positioning start position. However, the side-positioning latch stroke sensor (SC10) did not {MT:4.21}
detection error CLOSE within a predetermined period of time.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning latch HP
13320 to detect the side-positioning home position. However, the side-positioning latch stroke sensor (SC10) did {MT:4.21}
detection error not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
Error encountered before side-
When an attempt was made during bootup or routine processing to detect a side-positioning start position,
13321 positioning start position the side-positioning latch stroke sensor (SC10) was CLOSED.
{MT:4.21}
detection
Subscanning grip speed data
13368 The speed data was updated during bootup or routine processing to correct the subscanning grip speed. -
update (1)
The driven/driving grip roller driving motor (MZ2) was driven during bootup or routine processing to correct
Driven-side grip roller grip
13369 the subscanning grip speed. However, the time required for the driven-side grip roller release HP sensor {MT:4.26}
release timeout (great) (SZ2) to switch from the CLOSE state to the OPEN state was considerably longer than the specified time.
The driven/driving grip roller driving motor (MZ2) was driven during routine processing to let the driven-side
Driven-side grip roller grip
13417 grip roller perform a grip operation. However, the time required for the driven-side grip roller release HP {MT:4.26}
release timeout (small) sensor (SZ2) to switch from the CLOSE state to the OPEN state was a bit longer than the specified time.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning latch HP
13468 to detect the home position of the side-positioning latch. However, the side-positioning latch position {MT:4.24}
detection error sensor (SC8) did not OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
The side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) was driven during bootup or routine processing
Side-positioning latch
13469 to protrude the side-positioning latch. However, the side-positioning latch position sensor (SC8) did not {MT:4.24}
protrusion error OPEN within a predetermined period of time.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-62
MT-63
Error Analysis
Error Name Occurrence Condition
Code Flow
Detection of communication During bootup or during routine processing, it is detected that the communication between the CL and the
13520 RU is broken.
{MT:14.}
abortion to CL
During bootup or during routine processing, because the communication between the CL and RU is
CL communication failure
13521 broken, the connection is suspended and initialization of communication between the CL and RU is {MT:14.}
detected performed again.
The CL was too late receiving the image data sent from the RU, so that the image was retransmitted from
the RU.
13530 CL image data receive timeout The network is overloaded, or a communication error occurs due to hardware failure of the network,
{MT:14.}
thereby causing frequent retries.
FTP server data acquisiton
13900 During bootup, data cannot be gotten from FTP server and is initialized. {MT:14.}
failure
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-63
MT-64
3. Detail Code
3.1 How to Understand Detail Code
The error log contains the operation mode of the RU and detail code associated with the
error that occurred.
This section describes the detail code display format and meaning of each item.
3.1.1 Display of Detail Code
l Sensor status
0: OPEN
1: CLOSE
l IP size
1. 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm)
2. 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm)
3. 10" x 12"
4. 8" x 10"
5. 18 cm x 24 cm
6. 24 cm x 30 cm
9. 15 cm x 30 cm
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-64
MT-65
3.2 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors 3.2.2 Meaning of Six-Digit Detail Code
Scanner errors are detected by checking a plurality of scanner I/O states and finding a To each bit of a six-digit detail code is assigned an object to be checked during error check,
combination of defects and/or failures. so that a bit value of “1” indicates that the object to checked is in error.
Each I/O status at the time of error occurrence can be identified by checking the detail code
in the error log.
3.2.1 Display of Detail Code
The detail code is displayed in six hexadecimal digits, located in the error log as shown
NO. Object to be checked Signal source Value of bit
below. Hexadecimal
1 Start-point sensor SYN23A board 1 2 3 4
2 Leading-edge sensor SED23A board 0 0 0 0 0
I
3 Start-point mask signal SCN board 1 0 0 0 1
4 Polygon index POL (polygon) 2 0 0 1 0
1 – – 3 0 0 1 1
2 – – 4 0 1 0 0
II
3 – – 5 0 1 0 1
4 – – 6 0 1 1 0
1 PMT analog power supply PMT board 7 0 1 1 1
2 Laser light intensity error LDD23A board 8 1 0 0 0
III
3 Polygon lock POL (polygon) 9 1 0 0 1
4 Polygon rpm POL (polygon) A 1 0 1 0
1 PLL function SCN board B 1 0 1 1
2 Start-point period SYN23A board C 1 1 0 0
IV High-voltage command
3 SCN board D 1 1 0 1
value diagnostics
High-voltage detection
4 PMT board E 1 1 1 0
value diagnostics
1 – – F 1 1 1 1
2 – –
V
3 – –
4 LD drive current LDD23A board
1 – –
2 – –
VI
3 Reading status error SCN board
4 Operation line status error SCN board
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-65
MT-66
4. Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism Q5 Check the sensor (SA4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
4.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 1 Q6 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10347, 12455 Q7 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. N
A
Y
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Replace the boards in the order named.
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
N 2. SND23B board
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
3. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - SND23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} - CPU23B board
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-66
MT-67
4.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 2 Q5 Check the sensor (SA4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10348, 10349 Q6 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the sensor (SG1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the motor (MA4).
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
N
Q9 Check the motor (MC1).
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q10 Check the motor (MZ1).
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Y Q11 Error recurs?
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
N
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. A
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Y
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SND23A board
A
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
2. SND23B board
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
3. CPU23B board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} Q12 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N N
Q12 A
Y Y
Q5 Replace the error-causing board.
- SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
- CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-67
MT-68
4.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 3 Q5 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10353, 10354, 10355 Q6 Check the sensor (SG1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the motor (MA4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the motor (MC1).
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
N
Q9 Check the motor (MZ1).
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q10 Error recurs?
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
Y N
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. A
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Y
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Replace the boards in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 1. SND23A board
2. Pull out the RU. {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. 2. SND23B board
A {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
3. CPU23B board
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} Q11 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} N
A
Y
N
Q11 Replace the error-causing board.
Y - SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Q5 - SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
- CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-68
MT-69
4.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 4 Q5 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10358, 11397, 11405, 12397 Q6 Check the motor (MA4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the motor (MC1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. SND23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
3. CPU23B board
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A
N
A
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Y
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} Replace the error-causing board.
- SND23A board
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} - SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
N - CPU23B board
Q9
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-69
MT-70
4.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 5 Q5 Check the sensor (SG1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10364, 10365, 10420, 10461, 11396, 12396, 12474 Q6 Check the motor (MA4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the motor (MC1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. SND23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
3. CPU23B board
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A
N
A
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Y
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} Replace the error-causing board.
- SND23A board
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} - SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
N - CPU23B board
Q9
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-70
MT-71
4.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 6 Q5 Check the sensor (SG1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10395, 10425, 10426, 11399 Q6 Check the motor (MA4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23A board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
2. SND23B board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
3. CPU23B board
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU. N
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. A
A Y
Replace the error-causing board.
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - SND23A board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} - SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
- CPU23B board
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-71
MT-72
4.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 7 Q5 Check the sensor (SA4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10404 Q6 Check the motor (MA4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the motor (MC1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. SND23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
3. CPU23B board
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A
N
A
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Y
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} Replace the error-causing board.
- SND23A board
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} - SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
N - CPU23B board
Q9
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-72
MT-73
4.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 8 Q5 Check the sensor (SG1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10419, 10435, 10451, 12419 Q6 Check the motor (MA4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the motor (MC1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
N
Q9 Error recurs?
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
N
A
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? Y
Y Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. 2. SND23B board
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. Pull out the RU. 3. CPU23B board
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
A
Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} N
A
Y
Q4 CPU23B, SND23A, and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} Replace the error-causing board.
- SND23A board
N {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Q10 - SND23B board
Y {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
- CPU23B board
Q5
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-73
MT-74
4.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 9 Q5 Check the sensor (SA1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10311, 11373, 11375, 11379, 12373, 12376, 12379 Q6 Check the sensor (SA2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the sensor (SA11).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the solenoid (SOLA1).
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}
N
Q9 Error recurs?
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
N
A
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? Y
Y Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. 2. CPU23B Board
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). N
A
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
Y
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Replace the error-causing board.
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal? - SND23A board
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
- CPU23B board
N {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q10
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-74
MT-75
4.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 10 Q5 Check the sensor (SA1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10312, 10313, 10340, 11316, 11341, 11342, 11374, 11454, 12452 Q6 Check the sensor (SA2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the sensor (SA11).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. CPU23B Board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
N
A A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board - SND23A board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-75
MT-76
4.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 11 Q5 Check the sensor (SA9).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10314, 10339, 11377, 11378, 11453, 13312 Q6 Check the sensor (SA14).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the sensor (SA15).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. CPU23B Board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
N
A A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board - SND23A board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-76
MT-77
4.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 12 Q5 Check the sensor (SA8).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10325, 10326, 10436, 10456, 12325, 12326, 12436, 12438, 12439, 12440 Q6 Check the sensor (SA12).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the motor (MA2).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. CPU23B Board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
N
A A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board - SND23A board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-77
MT-78
4.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 13 Q5 Check the sensor (SA3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10327, 10332, 10333, 10334, 10427, 10430, 10441, 11381, 12381, 12430 Q6 Check the motor (MA1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23A board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-78
MT-79
4.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 14 Q6 Check the sensor (SA10).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10328, 10344, 10345, 10391, 10393, 10424, 10428, 10429, 11382, 11460, Q7 Check the motor (MA1).
12344, 12345, 12382, 12391, 12393, 12424, 12428, 12429, 12460 {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow Q8 Error recurs?
Q1 Is a cassette of an applicable type to the machine inserted?
N
N A
Replace the cassette.
Y
Y
Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Q2 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 2. CPU23B Board
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
N
Q3 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? A
Y
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} Replace the error-causing board.
N
- SND23A board
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. - CPU23B board
2. Pull out the RU. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
A
Q4 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q5 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-79
MT-80
4.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 15 Q5 Check the sensor (SA7).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10329, 10361, 10380, 12329, 12330, 12331, 12361, 12362, 12363, 12449 Q6 Check the motor (MA1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23A board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-80
MT-81
4.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 16 Q5 Check the sensor (SA6).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10336, 12336, 12337, 12338, 12383, 12441 Q6 Check the motor (MA3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23A board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-81
MT-82
4.17 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 17 Q5 Check the sensor (SA4).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10343, 10346, 10360, 10422, 10423, 10433, 10434, 10443, 12386, 12388, Q6 Error recurs?
12422, 12423, 12443
n Analysis Flow N
A
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Y
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 1. SND23A board
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
2. CPU23B Board
N {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
N
Y A
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} Y
N
Replace the error-causing board.
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
- SND23A board
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU. {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
A
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-82
MT-83
4.18 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 18 Q5 Check the sensor (SA5).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10421, 10432, 11389, 11390, 12335, 12389, 12390, 12392, 12421, 12432 Q6 Check the pump (PA1).
{MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the valve (SVA1).
{MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the valve (SVA2).
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators}
N
Q9 Error recurs?
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
N
A
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? Y
Y Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SND23A board
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. 2. CPU23B Board
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Q10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). N
A
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
Y
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Replace the error-causing board.
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal? - SND23A board
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
- CPU23B board
N {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q10
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-83
MT-84
4.19 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 19 Q5 Check the sensor (SA1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10315, 11315 Q6 Check the sensor (SA9).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the sensor (SA11).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Check the sensor (SA14).
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
N
Q9 Check the sensor (SA15).
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q10 Error recurs?
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
Y N
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. A
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Y
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Replace the boards in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 1. SND23A board
2. Pull out the RU. {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. 2. CPU23B Board
A {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Q11 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
N
A
Q4 CPU23B and SND23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
Y
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
Replace the error-causing board.
N - SND23A board
Q11 {MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-84
MT-85
4.20 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 20 Q5 Check the sensor (SC1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10317, 10318, 10408, 10409, 10410, 10411, 12318, 12408, 12410 Q6 Check the sensor (SC2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Check the motor (MC2).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q8 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23B Board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. CPU23B Board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
N
A A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board - SND23B board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-85
MT-86
4.21 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 21 Q5 Check the sensor (SC10).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10319, 10320, 12319, 12320, 13319, 13320, 13321 Q6 Check the motor (MC3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23B Board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-86
MT-87
4.22 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 22 Q5 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10356, 11398 Q6 Check the sensor (SC9).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23B Board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-87
MT-88
4.23 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 23 Q5 Check the sensor (SC7).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10464, 10465, 11465, 11466, 12464, 12465, 12466 Q6 Check the motor (MC4).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23B Board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-88
MT-89
4.24 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 24 Q5 Check the sensor (SC8).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10467, 10468, 10469, 12467, 12468, 12469, 13468, 13469 Q6 Check the motor (MC3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23B Board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-89
MT-90
4.25 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 25 Q5 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
11403, 11406, 12403
N
n Analysis Flow Q8
Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q6 Barcode reader (BCRC1) normal?
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} N
Replace the barcode reader (BCRC1).
Y {MC:7.38_Barcode Reader (BCRC1)}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Q7 Error recurs?
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SND23B Board
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. CPU23B Board
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q3 Error recurs after a retry is performed with a cassette suitable for the machine set in Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
position?
N N
END A
Y Y
A Replace the error-causing board.
- SND23B board
Q4 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board - CPU23B board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-90
MT-91
4.26 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 26 Q5 Check the sensor (SZ2).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10323, 10322, 10324, 10350, 10351, 10352, 10357, 10367, 10418, 12322, Q6 Check the sensor (SZ3).
12323, 12324, 12350, 12351, 12352, 12357, 12444, 12367, 12417, 12446, {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
12447, 12448, 13369, 13417
Q7 Check the motor (MZ2).
n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q8 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
N
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} A
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. SND23B Board
Y
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 2. CPU23B Board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. N
A
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. Y
A Replace the error-causing board.
- SND23B board
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board - CPU23B board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-91
MT-92
4.27 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 27 Q5 Check the sensor (SZ5).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
10370, 10371, 10372, 12370, 12371, 12372 Q6 Check the motor (MZ3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23B Board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-92
MT-93
4.28 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 28 Q5 MUTL indicates that the light-collecting mirror operation is normal?
{MU:7.3[6-4-3]_Dust Removal: Dust Removal Operation}
11413, 12416
N
n Analysis Flow Q10
Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q6 Check the sensor (SZ1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} Q7 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. Q8 Error recurs?
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Replace the boards in the order named.
1. SND23B Board
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. 2. CPU23B Board
2. Pull out the RU. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
A
Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board N
B
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Y
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
N - CPU23B board
Q9
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-93
MT-94
Q10 Check whether the spur gear for driving the light-collecting shaft is properly mounted.
{MC:10.20_Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear}
N
Restore
Y
Q11 Check the sensor (SZ5).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q12 Check the motor (MZ3).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
Q13 Error recurs?
Y
A
N
END
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-94
MT-95
4.29 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 29 Q5 Check the sensor (SC3).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
11414, 11415, 12415 Q6 Check the motor (MZ1).
{MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors}
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Error recurs?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
A
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Y
N Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. 1. SND23B Board
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
N
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. A
2. Pull out the RU. Y
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Replace the error-causing board.
A
- SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-95
MT-96
4.30 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 30 Q5 Check the sensor (SZ1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
12292 Q6 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
n Analysis Flow
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q1 Check whether the connector for the IP leading-edge sensor (SZ1) is properly
connected. Q7 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:17.5_Sensor (SZ1), Scanning Optics Unit (LDD23A, {MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
PDA23A, LDA23A, SYN23A, and POL23A)}
N
Restore N
Y
Q9
Y
A
Q8 Error recurs?
Q2 Error recurs?
N
A
N
END Y
Y
Replace the boards in the order named.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. 1. SND23B Board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
2. CPU23B Board
Q3 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} N
A
Q4 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? Y
Y Replace the error-causing board.
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
- SND23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
- CPU23B board
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
2. Pull out the RU.
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-96
MT-97
5. Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner Q6 Error recurs?
N
A
5.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 1
Y
10230 Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
n Analysis Flow 1. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? 3. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A
N
A
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5). Y
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)} Replace the error-causing board.
- SCN board
Q3 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL} - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Q7
Y
Q4 Check the connector of the SCN board.
{MT:21.1_Checking the Connector on the SCN Board}
Q5 Check the connector of the scanning optics unit.
{MT:21.2_Checking the Connector on the Scanning Optics Unit}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-97
MT-98
5.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 2 Q7 Error recurs?
10231, 10233 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
N
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins A
(CN5)} Y
Q3 Check the fuse (F2) on the SCN board. Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Q6 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-98
MT-99
5.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 3 Q6 Error recurs?
10232 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
N
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins A
(CN5)} Y
Q3 Check the fuses (F5 and F6) on the SCN board. Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 Error recurs? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
A
Y
Q5 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-99
MT-100
5.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 4 Q7 Error recurs?
10234 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
N
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins A
(CN5)} Y
Q3 Check all fuses except the fuse (F5) on the SCN board. Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Q6 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-100
MT-101
5.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 5 Q7 Error recurs?
10235 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
N
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins A
(CN5)} Y
Q3 Check the fuses (F3, F4, and F6) on the SCN board. Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Q6 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-101
MT-102
5.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 6 Q7 Error recurs?
10236 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
N
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins A
(CN5)} Y
Q3 Check the fuses (F2 and F5) on the SCN board. Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Q6 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-102
MT-103
5.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 7 Q6 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
10244, 10261, 10283, 12203, 12204, 12213, 12244, 12261, 12262, 12263, N
A
12264, 13210
Y
n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board.
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)}
Q3 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y
Q4 Check the polygon (POL).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-103
MT-104
5.8 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 8 Q7 Error recurs?
10271, 12271 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Y {MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
3. CPU23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
A
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5). Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)} N
A
Q3 Check the fuses (F4, F5, and F6) on the SCN board. Y
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Replace the error-causing board.
- SCN board
Q4 Error recurs? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
A
Y
Q5 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q6 Check the laser (LDD).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-104
MT-105
5.9 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 9 Q6 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
10281, 12201, 12281, 12282 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the error-causing board.
- SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)}
Q3 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q6
Y
Q4 Check the start-point sensor (SYN).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
{MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
3. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-105
MT-106
5.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 10 Q7 Error recurs?
10294, 11273, 12222, 12273, 12283, 12284, 13284 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Y {MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
3. CPU23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
A
Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Scanner machine-specific data correctly installed onto the CPU23B board?
N
A
N Y
Restore the scanner machine-specific data (SCN ALL DATA) attached to the
Y machine.
Replace the error-causing board.
{MC:16.2_Restore Procedure} - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q3 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5). - CPU23B board
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
(CN5)}
Q4 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Q5 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q6 Check the laser (LDD).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-106
MT-107
5.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 11 Q7 Performs scanner initialization self-diagnostics.
{MU:7.3[5-1]_Diagnostic}
10298, 12298
Q8 Error recurs?
n Analysis Flow
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. N
A
Y
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged?
Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
Y 1. SCN board
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
A {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q2 Other software exited before RU startup?
Q9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
N
Exit the other software.
Y N
A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins Replace the error-causing board.
(CN5)} - SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q4 Check all the fuses on the SCN board. - CPU23B board
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q5 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Q6 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q9
Y
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-107
MT-108
5.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 12 Q7 Error recurs?
11287, 12287 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
A Q8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5). N
A
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)} Y
Q3 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal? Replace the error-causing board.
- SCN board
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
- CPU23B board
N {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q8
Y
Q4 Performs scanner initialization self-diagnostics.
{MU:7.3[5-1]_Diagnostic}
Q5 Check the photomultipliers (PMT).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
Q6 Check the connector of the SCN board.
{MT:21.1_Checking the Connector on the SCN Board}
Q7
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-108
MT-109
5.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 13 Q5 Error recurs?
12202, 12255, 12256 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Y {MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
3. CPU23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
A
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5). Q6 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)} N
A
Check the subscanning unit mechanism. Y
{MC:10.1_Subscanning Unit}
Replace the error-causing board.
- SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q3 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
- CPU23B board
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Q6
Y
Q4 Check the leading-edge sensor (SZ1).
{MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors}
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-109
MT-110
5.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 14 Q6 Error recurs?
12211, 12251, 12252, 12285, 12286, 13285, 13286 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. PMT Board
Y {MC:8.2_PMT Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
3. CPU23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
A
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5). Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)}
N
A
Q3 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal? Y
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
Replace the error-causing board.
- SCN board
N
Q7 {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Y - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q4 Check the connector of the PMT board.
{MT:21.3_Checking the Connector on the PMT Board}
Q5 Check the photomultipliers (PMT).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-110
MT-111
5.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 15 Q6 Error recurs?
12212 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. Scanning optics unit
Y {MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
3. CPU23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
A
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5). Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)} N
A
Q3 Error recurs? Y
Replace the error-causing board.
N - SCN board
A
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Y
- CPU23B board
Q4 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y
Q5 Check the laser (LDD).
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-111
MT-112
5.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 16 Q6 Error recurs?
12210, 12214, 12215, 12216, 12217, 12218, 12241, 12242, 12243, 12295, N
A
12296, 12297
Y
n Analysis Flow Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. detected, replace the affected part.
1. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q1 Errors 10230-10236 logged? 2. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
A
N
A
Q2 Check the voltage of the SCN board test pin (CN5).
Y
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins
(CN5)} Replace the error-causing board.
- SCN board
Q3 Check the connection between the board connectors.
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
{MT:21.4_Checking the Board-to-Board Connectors}
- CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q4 Error recurs?
N
A
Y
Q5 CPU23B and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-112
MT-113
6. Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical Q5 Check the fuse (F4) on the SND23B board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
N
Replace the SND23B board fuse (F4).
6.1 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 1
Y {MC:12.6_ERS23A Board Fuses}
11489 Q6 Drive and stop the fan with the MUTL to check for improper operation.
{MU:7.3[6-4-6]_FAN (G1) Diagnostic}
n Analysis Flow
N
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the fan (FANG1).
Y {MC:4.3_Fan (FANG1)}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Q7 Error recurs?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}
N
N A
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Replace the boards in the order named.
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? 1. SND23B board
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. 2. CPU23B board
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. Q8 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the board on
2. Pull out the RU. which the error was detected?
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
N
A A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). Replace the error-causing board.
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board - SND23B board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} {MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
- CPU23B board
Q4 CPU23B and SND23B boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-113
MT-114
6.2 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 2 Q6 Error recurs?
11720 N
A
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the parts in the order named.
1. Erasure assembly
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 2. CPU23B board
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Is “Result-13720” displayed as the board test result?
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
N
Replace the Fan (FANB1).
Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot. Y {MC:6.2_Fan (FANB1)}
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q8 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the board on
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. which the error was detected?
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU. N
A
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Y
A
Replace the error-causing parts.
- Erasure assembly
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
- CPU23B board
(PSU23B) Test Pins (TP1)}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q4 CPU23B and ERS23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y
Q5 Check the fuse (F3) on the ERS23A board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-114
MT-115
6.3 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 3 Q6 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connectors for the
CPU23B board, ERS23A board, and INV board?
11700, 11701, 11732, 11733 N
END
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Q7 Lamps normal?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? N
Replace the erasure assembly.
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Y
N Replace the CPU23B board.
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
Q8 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the board on
Y which the error was detected?
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} N
A
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Y
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
Replace the error-causing parts.
2. Pull out the RU.
- Erasure assembly
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
A - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and ERS23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5 Check the fuse (F1 and F2) on the ERS23A board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-115
MT-116
6.4 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 4 Q5 Lamp temperature sensor (THB1) properly conducting?
{MT:17.7_Erasure Assembly}
11710, 12790, 12791, 12792
N
n Analysis Flow Replace the lamp temperature sensor (THB1).
Y {MC:6.12_Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1)}
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q6 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connectors for the
CPU23B board and ERS23A board?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} N
END
Y
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Replace the parts in the order named.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. Erasure assembly
{MC:6.13__Erasure Assembly}
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Q7 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the board on
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. which the error was detected?
2. Pull out the RU.
N
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. A
A Y
Replace the error-causing parts.
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - Erasure assembly
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q4 CPU23B and ERS23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-116
MT-117
6.5 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 5 Q6 Thermal switch (TSWB1) properly conducting?
{MT:17.7_Erasure Assembly}
12711
N
n Analysis Flow Replace the thermal switch (TSWB1).
Y {MC:6.11_Thermal Switch (TSWB1)}
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q7 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connectors for the
CPU23B board and ERS23A board?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} N
END
Y
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
Replace the parts in the order named.
Y {MT:2._Error Code Table} 1. Erasure assembly
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs?
2. CPU23B board
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named. Q8 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the board on
1. Secure space for servicing the machine. which the error was detected?
2. Pull out the RU.
N
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. A
A Y
Replace the error-causing parts.
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1). - Erasure assembly
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board {MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} - CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q4 CPU23B and ERS23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q8
Y
Q5 Check the fuse (F1 and F2) on the ERS23A board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-117
MT-118
6.6 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 6 Q6 Lamp temperature sensor (THB1) properly conducting?
{MT:17.7_Erasure Assembly}
11760
N
n Analysis Flow Replace the lamp temperature sensor (THB1).
Y {MC:6.12_Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1)}
Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
Q7 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connectors for the
CPU23B board, ERS23A board, and INV board?
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log?
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} N
END
Y
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q8 Lamps normal?
Y
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? N
Replace the erasure assembly.
Y Y {MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Replace the CPU23B board.
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU. Q9 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the board on
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. which the error was detected?
A N
A
Y
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board Replace the error-causing parts.
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)} - Erasure assembly
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Q4 CPU23B and ERS23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
- CPU23B board
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Q9
Y
Q5 Check the fuse (F1 and F2) on the ERS23A board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-118
MT-119
6.7 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 7 Q6 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connectors for the
CPU23B board, ERS23A board, and INV board?
12770, 12771, 12772, 12773, 12774, 12775 N
END
n Analysis Flow Y
Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the parts in the order named.
1. Erasure assembly
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Q1 The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? 2. CPU23B board
{MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log} {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Check the error code table again for the error at the beginning, and troubleshoot.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} Q7 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the board on
Y
which the error was detected?
Q2 Power supply error (12801-12812) occurs? N
A
Y Y
Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
N {MT:2._Error Code Table} Replace the error-causing parts.
- Erasure assembly
Perform preparation procedures in the order named.
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
1. Secure space for servicing the machine.
2. Pull out the RU. - CPU23B board
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q3 Check the voltage on the power supply board test pin (TP1).
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Q4 CPU23B and ERS23A boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
N
Q7
Y
Q5 Check the fuse (F1 and F2) on the ERS23A board.
{MT:9._Procedures for Checking the Fuses}
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-119
MT-120
7. Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the n Analysis Procedures
Inability to Update the Software Version u NOTE u
Troubleshoot the errors in accordance with the following steps. Otherwise, they cannot be
or Back Up the Machine Shipment Control troubleshooted.
Data START
This chapter summarizes the procedures for troubleshooting the errors that causes the
inability to update the software version or back up the machine shipment control data. Q1 Does the RU operation panel indicate a connection error?
Troubleshoot the errors in accordance with the check procedures in each section.
Y
Restore
N {MT:14.1_Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU}
Q2 Network Check from the RU OK?
{MU:3.8_Network Check}
Y
END
N
Q3 Check the IIS.
{MT:7.1_Checking the IIS}
Q4 Check the FTP server operating status.
{MT:7.2_Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server}
Q5 Check the IP address of the CL.
{MT:7.3_Checking the IP Address of the CL}
Q6 Make sure that the RU has been registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" of the RU PC-
TOOL.
{MT:7.4_Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU"}
END
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-120
MT-121
7.1 Checking the IIS 7.2 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Server
Unless the IIS ("Internet Information Service") is not installed, the FTP server cannot be
used. n Check Procedures
Make sure that the IIS has been installed in the CL that is used as the FTP server. 1. Exit the CL software.
n Check Procedures 2. From Windows' [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
1. Exit the CL software. → The "Control Panel" window opens.
2. From Windows' [Start] menu, click [Control Panel]. 3. Double-click "Administrative Tools."
→ The "Control Panel" window opens.
3. Double-click "Administrative Tools."
4. Double-click “Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager”.
4. Make sure that "Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0 Manager" has been
installed in "Administrative Tools".
5. Make sure that “Default FTP Site” has been started (i.e., “Stopped” is not
displayed).
If the IIS has not been installed, install it.
{FCR-MB 201 Console Service Manual}
u NOTE u
If "Stopped" is displayed, select [Start] from the [Action] menu.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-121
MT-122
7.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL 6. Choose "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and then click [Properties].
n Check Procedures
1. Exit the CL software.
2. From Windows' [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
→ The "Control Panel" window opens.
3. Double-click .
→ The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
→ The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.
4. Click [View status].
7. Make sure that the IP address of the CL matches “FTP Server IP Address” that is
set in the RU.
If they are not matched, set the IP addresses of the RU as appropriate.
→ The “Local Area Connection Status” window opens. {MT:7.5_Checking the FTP Server Address of the RU}
5. Click [Properties].
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-122
MT-123
7.4 Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU"
n Check Procedures
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. Verify that the "LIST OF EXISTING RU" shows the RU to be updated or backed up.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the RU is not registered yet, install it.
{IN: Appendix 4._Installing the RU Software}
3. Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-123
MT-124
7.5 Checking the FTP Server Address of the RU 3. Verify the RU's FTP server address.
u INSTRUCTION u
n Check Procedures Check whether the RU's FTP server address agrees with the CL's IP address, which
was confirmed as directed under "7.3 Checking the IP Address." If the addresses do
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
not agree with each other, change the FTP server address setting in accordance with
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} the CL's IP address.
2. Verify that "FTP Server IP Address" is chosen, and then press the [Select] button.
REFERENCE
For details on the procedure for changing the RU's FTP server address, see "1.4.2
Procedures for Changing the Address" in the Maintenance Utility volume.
{MU:1.4.2_Procedures for Changing the Address}
4. Press the [Return] button.
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-124
MT-125
8. Procedures for Checking the Voltage n Reference Sections
l Scanner board (SCN23C)
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins (CN5)}
8.1 Checking the Board Locations
l Power supply board (PSU29B)
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Unit (PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-125
MT-126
8.2 Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins (CN5) 8.2.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins
1. Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal.
WARNING
u NOTE u
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the following
If the checked voltage is not within the range of the power supply voltage inspection
precautions.
standard, adjust the FCR-MB 201 voltage .
- Do not touch the power supply terminals.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
- When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion) of a
multimeter.
8.2.1 Check Procedures
START
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
{MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch}
Remove the board box cover.
{MC:4.7_Board Box Cover}
Q1 Voltage on the SCN board normal?
{MT:8.2.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Check the voltage on the power supply board.
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Reinstall the board box cover
{MC:4.7.2_Board Box Cover} Connector CN5 Voltage Power supply voltage inspection standard
CN5 1-4 + 24V (G) Should be within a range from +22.8 to +25.2 V
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
CN5 2-5 + 15V (C) Should be within a range from +14.25 to +15.75 V
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
CN5 3-6 - 15V (D) Should be within a range from -14.25 to -15.75 V
Return to the error code analysis flow. 2. Check that all the CPU23B board cables are connected to the CPU23B board.
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-126
MT-127
8.3 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply 8.3.1 Check Procedures
Board (PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1) START
WARNING Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the following
precautions. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
- Do not touch the power supply terminals. {MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch}
- When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion) of a
multimeter. Turn ON the power of FCR-MB 201.
Q1 Voltage on the power supply board (PSU29B) normal?
{MT:8.3.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins}
N
Replace the power supply board.
Y {MC:11.7_PSU29B Board}
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-127
MT-128
8.3.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins
1. Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal.
u NOTES u
If the checked voltage is not within the range of the power supply voltage inspection
standard, adjust the FCR-MB 201 voltage.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
Test Pin TP1 Voltage Power supply voltage inspection standard Remarks
TP1 2-8 + 24V Should be within a range from +22.8 to +25.2 V
TP1 3-9 - 15V Should be within a range from -14.25 to -15.75 V
TP1 4-10 + 15V Should be within a range from +14.25 to +15.75 V
TP1 5-11 + 12V Should be within a range from +11.28 to +12.72 V
TP1 6-12 + 5V Should be within a range from +4.75 to +5.25 V
Auxiliary
TP1 1-7 + 12V Should be within a range from +11.28 to +12.72 V
power
2. Check to ensure that all the cables of the power supply board are connected.
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-128
MT-129
9. Procedures for Checking the Fuses l SND23A board
9.1 Checking the Fuse Locations
After checking the fuse locations on each of the boards, check the fuses in accordance with
the procedures described in the reference section.
9.1.1 Checking the Board Locations
l CPU23B board, SCN board, and SND23B board
l ERS23A board
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-129
MT-130
9.1.2 List of Reference Sections
Fuse-mounted component Fuse No. Reference Sections
F1
F2
ERS23A Board F3 {MT:9.6_ERS23A Board}
F4
F5
F1
F2
F3
SND23A Board F4 {MT:9.2_SND23A Board}
F5
F6
F7
F1
F2
F3
F4
SND23B Board {MT:9.3_SND23B Board}
F5
F6
F7
F8
F1
F2
CPU23B Board F3 {MT:9.5_CPU23B Board}
F4
F5
F1
F2
F3
F4
SCN Board {MT:9.4_SCN Board}
F5
F6
F7
F8
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-130
MT-131
9.2 SND23A Board
9.2.1 Check Flow
START
Q1 A lot of fuse errors (12801 to 12811) occur? Q4 Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection
circuit on the SND23A board in the MUTL?
N
Q4 {MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
Y
A N
A
Y
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Replace the SND23A board.
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU}
Q2 Fuse on the SND23A board normal?
{MT:9.2.2_Procedures for Checking the SND23A Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
{MC:12.2_SND23A Board Fuses}
Replace the SND23A board when F6 or F7 is blown.
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
Y
Q3 Load protected by the fuse normal?
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-131
MT-132
9.2.2 Procedures for Checking the SND23A Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the SND23A board.
2. Check the fuses.
{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}
3. Check the cable.
{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-132
MT-133
9.3 SND23B Board
9.3.1 Check Flow
START
Q4 Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection
Q1 A lot of fuse errors (12801 to 12811) occur? circuit on the SND23B board in the MUTL?
N {MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
Q4
Y N
A A
Y
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Replace the SND23B board.
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU}
Remove the dust-tight cover assembly.
{MC:5.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly}
Q2 Fuse on the SND23B board normal?
{MT:9.3.2_Procedures for Checking the SND23B Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
{MC:12.3_SND23B Board Fuses}
Replace the SND23B board when F7 or F8 is blown.
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Y
Q3 Load protected by the fuse normal?
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y
Reinstall the dust-tight cover assembly.
{MC:5.2.2_Dust-Tight Cover Assembly}
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-133
MT-134
9.3.2 Procedures for Checking the SND23B Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the SND23B board.
2. Check the fuses.
{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}
3. Check the cable.
{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-134
MT-135
9.4 SCN Board
9.4.1 Check Flow
START
Q4 Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection
Q1 A lot of fuse errors (12801 to 12811) occur? circuit on the SCN board in the MUTL?
N {MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
Q4
Y N
A A
Y
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Replace the SCN board.
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU}
Remove the board box cover.
{MC:4.7_Board Box Cover}
Q2 Fuse on the SCN board normal?
{MT:9.4.2_Procedures for Checking the SCN Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
{MC:12.4_SCN Board Fuses}
Replace the SCN board when F7 or F8 is blown.
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Y
Q3 Load protected by the fuse normal?
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y
Reinstall the board box cover
{MC:4.7.2_Board Box Cover}
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-135
MT-136
9.4.2 Procedures for Checking the SCN Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the SCN board.
2. Check the fuses.
{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}
3. Check the cable.
{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-136
MT-137
9.5 CPU23B Board
9.5.1 Check Flow
START
Q4 Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection
Q1 A lot of fuse errors (12801 to 12811) occur? circuit on the CPU23B board in the MUTL?
N {MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
Q4
Y N
A A
Y
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Replace the CPU23B board.
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Remove the board assembly and then remove the SCN board.
{MC:11.1_Board Assembly}
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q2 Fuse on the CPU23B board normal?
{MT:9.5.2_Procedures for Checking the CPU23B Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
{MC:12.5_CPU23B Board Fuses}
Replace the CPU23B board when F5 is blown.
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Y
Q3 Load protected by the fuse normal?
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y
Reinstall the SCN board and then reinstall the board assembly.
{MC:11.3.2_SCN Board}
{MC:11.1.2_Board Assembly}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-137
MT-138
9.5.2 Procedures for Checking the CPU23B Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the CPU23B board.
2. Check the fuses.
{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}
3. Check the cable.
{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-138
MT-139
9.6 ERS23A Board
9.6.1 Check Flow
START
Q4 Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection
Q1 A lot of fuse errors (12801 to 12811) occur? circuit on the ERS23A board in the MUTL?
N {MT:18._Board Tests in MUTL}
Q4
Y N
A A
Y
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Replace the erasure assembly.
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Remove the erasure unit and then remove the cover bracket.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
{MC:6.6_Cover Bracket}
Q2 Fuse on the ERS23A board normal?
{MT:9.6.2_Procedures for Checking the ERS23A Board Fuses}
N
Replace the fuse.
{MC:12.6_ERS23A Board Fuses}
Replace the erasure assembly when F5 is blown.
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
Y
Q3 Load protected by the fuse normal?
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
N
Restore the load.
Y
Reinstall the cover bracket and then reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.6.2_Cover Bracket}
{MC:6.1.2_Erasure Unit}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-139
MT-140
9.6.2 Procedures for Checking the ERS23A Board Fuses
1. Check the locations of the fuses on the ERS23A board.
2. Check the fuses.
{MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse}
3. Check the cable.
{MT:9.8_Checking the Cable}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-140
MT-141
9.7 Checking the Fuse 9.8 Checking the Cable
Check the fuse for continuity as illustrated below. Referring to "17. Block Diagrams", check the following.
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
1. Check for improper connector connections.
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2 Ω or greater
3. Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2 Ω or greater
4. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1 Ω or less
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-141
MT-142
10. Procedures for Checking the Sensors 10.1 Checking the Sensors
To check whether a sensor is normal, monitor it with the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. Because the sensor checking procedures differ for each of the sensors, refer to the check
procedures for the sensor to be checked.
n Reference Sections for Check Procedures of Each Sensor
I/O No Reference Sections
SA1 {MT:10.3_Sensor Check Flow 1: SA1}
SA2 {MT:10.4_Sensor Check Flow 2: SA2}
SA3 {MT:10.5_Sensor Check Flow 3: SA3, SA7, and SA10}
SA4 (SA4-1, SA4-2) {MT:10.7_Sensor Check Flow 5: SA4 and SA6}
SA5 {MT:10.6_Sensor Check Flow 4: SA5}
SA6 {MT:10.7_Sensor Check Flow 5: SA4 and SA6}
SA7 {MT:10.5_Sensor Check Flow 3: SA3, SA7, and SA10}
SA8 {MT:10.8_Sensor Check Flow 6: SA8 and SA12}
SA9 {MT:10.9_Sensor Check Flow 7: SA9}
SA10 {MT:10.5_Sensor Check Flow 3: SA3, SA7, and SA10}
SA11 {MT:10.10_Sensor Check Flow 8: SA11}
SA12 {MT:10.8_Sensor Check Flow 6: SA8 and SA12}
SA14 {MT:10.11_Sensor Check Flow 9: SA14 and SA15}
SA15 {MT:10.11_Sensor Check Flow 9: SA14 and SA15}
SA16 {MT:10.21_Sensor Check Flow 18: SA16}
SC1 {MT:10.12_Sensor Check Flow 10: SC1 and SC2}
SC2 {MT:10.12_Sensor Check Flow 10: SC1 and SC2}
SC3 {MT:10.13_Sensor Check Flow 11: SC3, SC9, and SG1}
SC6 {MT:10.14_Sensor Check Flow 12: SC6 and SC10}
SC7 {MT:10.15_Sensor Check Flow 13: SC7}
SC8 {MT:10.16_Sensor Check Flow 14: SC8}
SC9 {MT:10.13_Sensor Check Flow 11: SC3, SC9, and SG1}
SC10 {MT:10.14_Sensor Check Flow 12: SC6 and SC10}
BCRC1 {MT:10.20_Barcode Reader Check Flow: BCRC1}
SZ1 {MT:10.19_Sensor Check Flow 17: SZ1}
SZ2 {MT:10.17_Sensor Check Flow 15: SZ2 and SZ3}
SZ3 {MT:10.17_Sensor Check Flow 15: SZ2 and SZ3}
SZ5 {MT:10.18_Sensor Check Flow 16: SZ5}
SG1 {MT:10.13_Sensor Check Flow 11: SC3, SC9, and SG1}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-142
MT-143
10.2 Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function 10.2.2 Starting to Exercise the Monitoring Function from the CLIENT
PC-TOOL
With the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL sensor monitoring function activated, turn ON/
OFF the sensor to be checked. If the sensor status changes corresponding to the ON/OFF 1. Connect the client PC to the network in the user's site. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL
timing, it can be judged that the sensor is normal. and then perform the network setup and connection verification procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
10.2.1 Starting to Exercise the Monitoring Function from the RU PC-
TOOL
2. From the hospital list, select an RU.
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU.
3. Click on [MON] button.
3. Click on [MON] button.
4. Click on [START] button.
4. Click on [START] button.
→ When the RU operates under this condition, display entries are added whenever the
I/O changes.
→ When the RU operates under this condition, display entries are added whenever the
I/O changes.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-143
MT-144
10.2.3 Exiting the Monitoring Function
1. Click on [STOP] button.
2. Click on button.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-144
MT-145
10.3 Sensor Check Flow 1: SA1 10.3.1 Check Flow 1
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. START
Insert and eject the cassette to open or close the cassette IN sensor (SA1). Verify that the
sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.3.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (1)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-145
MT-146
10.3.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (1) 3. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Allow the cassette to be inserted and ejected with the hold released, and check
the monitoring display.
l GOOD indication
l NO GOOD indication
Although the cassette was inserted and ejected, the sensor status (OPEN or CLOSE)
was not displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-146
MT-147
10.4 Sensor Check Flow 2: SA2 10.4.1 Check Flow 2
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. START
Move the hold release arm to open or close the cassette hold sensor (SA2). Verify that the
sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.4.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-147
MT-148
10.4.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2) 3. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Allow the hold release arm to move, and check the monitoring display.
l GOOD indication
l NO GOOD indication
Although the hold release arm was moved, the sensor status (OPEN or CLOSE) was
not displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-148
MT-149
10.5 Sensor Check Flow 3: SA3, SA7, and SA10 10.5.1 Check Flow 3
Drive the cassette cover opening mechanism with the MUTL to open or close the debris fall START
prevention shutter sensor (SA3), cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7), and
cassette IP holding sensor (SA10). Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.5.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-149
MT-150
10.5.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Open Lid Diagnostic" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-150
MT-151
10.6 Sensor Check Flow 4: SA5 10.6.1 Check Flow 4
Convey the IP in the "erasure" mode to open or close the IP suction sensor (SA5). Verify START
that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.6.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-151
MT-152
10.6.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4)
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Operate the operation panel on the RU main body to select the "erasure" mode.
{Instruction Manual}
3. Set the cassette in position.
4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
l GOOD indication
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-152
MT-153
10.7 Sensor Check Flow 5: SA4 and SA6 10.7.1 Check Flow 5
Drive the IP removal arm with the MUTL to open or close the IP dropping sensor (SA4) and START
suction arm HP sensor (SA6). Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.7.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the
following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-153
MT-154
10.7.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Removal Diagnostic" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-154
MT-155
10.8 Sensor Check Flow 6: SA8 and SA12 10.8.1 Check Flow 6
Drive the cassette cover closing mechanism with the MUTL to open or close the cassette START
cover closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) and cassette cover CLOSE position sensor (SA12).
Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.8.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-155
MT-156
10.8.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Close Lid Diagnostic" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-156
MT-157
10.9 Sensor Check Flow 7: SA9 10.9.1 Check Flow 7
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. START
Insert and eject the cassette to open or close the "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor. Verify
that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.9.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-157
MT-158
10.9.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7) l NO GOOD indication
Although the cassette was inserted and ejected, the sensor status (OPEN or CLOSE)
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. was not displayed.
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function} u NOTE u
2. Allow the cassette to be inserted and ejected with the hold released, and check Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
the monitoring display. beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
u NOTE u
Always use a cassette other than a 15cm x 30cm size. With the cassette of 15cm x
3. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
30cm size, whether the sensor is OPEN or CLOSE cannot be checked.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
l GOOD indication
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-158
MT-159
10.10 Sensor Check Flow 8: SA11 10.10.1 Check Flow 8
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. START
Open and close the cassette set unit shutter by hand to open or close the cassette ejection
sensor (SA11). Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.10.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-159
MT-160
10.10.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8) 3. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Open and close the shutter by hand. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
l GOOD indication
l NO GOOD indication
Although the shutter opened and closed, the sensor status (OPEN or CLOSE) was not
displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-160
MT-161
10.11 Sensor Check Flow 9: SA14 and SA15 10.11.1 Check Flow 9
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. START
Insert and eject the cassette to open or close the cassette insertion error sensor (SA14) and
large cassette size sensor (SA15). Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.11.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-161
MT-162
10.11.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9) l NO GOOD indication
Although the cassette was inserted and ejected, the sensor status (OPEN or CLOSE)
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. was not displayed.
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function} u NOTE u
2. Allow the cassette to be inserted and ejected with the hold released, and check Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
the monitoring display. beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
u NOTE u
Be sure to use a 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) or 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) size cassette.
3. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
If any other cassette size is used, you cannot verify the sensor status (OPEN or
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
CLOSE).
l GOOD indication
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-162
MT-163
10.12 Sensor Check Flow 10: SC1 and SC2 10.12.1 Check Flow 10
Drive the grip arm with the MUTL to open or close the side-positioning grip HP sensor START
(SC1) and side-positioning grip release position sensor (SC2). Verify that the sensor status
changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.12.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
and SZ5)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-163
MT-164
10.12.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Side-positioning Operation" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-164
MT-165
10.13 Sensor Check Flow 11: SC3, SC9, and SG1 10.13.1 Check Flow 11
Convey the IP in the "erasure" mode to open or close the IP sensor 1 (SC3), "15x30/24x30 START
IP width" identifying sensor (SC9), and IP sensor 2 (SG1). Verify that the sensor status
changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.13.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
and SZ5)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-165
MT-166
10.13.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11)
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Operate the operation panel on the RU main body to select the "erasure" mode.
{Instruction Manual}
3. Set the cassette in position.
4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
l GOOD indication
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-166
MT-167
10.14 Sensor Check Flow 12: SC6 and SC10 10.14.1 Check Flow 12
Operate the side-positioning mechanism with the MUTL to open or close the IP side- START
positioning HP sensor (SC6) and side-positioning latch stroke sensor (SC10). Verify that the
sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.14.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
and SZ5)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-167
MT-168
10.14.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Side-positioning Operation" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-168
MT-169
10.15 Sensor Check Flow 13: SC7 10.15.1 Check Flow 13
Operate the reference block with the MUTL to open or close the side-positioning reference START
block HP sensor (SC7). Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.15.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the
following points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
and SZ5)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-169
MT-170
10.15.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Side-positioning Base Pin HP" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-170
MT-171
10.16 Sensor Check Flow 14: SC8 10.16.1 Check Flow 14
Operate the side-positioning latch mechanism with the MUTL to open or close the side- START
positioning latch position sensor (SC8). Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.16.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (14)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
and SZ5)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-171
MT-172
10.16.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (14) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Side-positioning Hook HP" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-172
MT-173
10.17 Sensor Check Flow 15: SZ2 and SZ3 10.17.1 Check Flow 15
Operate the side-positioning grip mechanism with the MUTL to open or close the driven- START
side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ2) and driving-side grip roller release HP sensor (SZ3).
Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.17.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (15)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
and SZ5)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-173
MT-174
10.17.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (15) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Sub-Scanning Grip HP" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-174
MT-175
10.18 Sensor Check Flow 16: SZ5 10.18.1 Check Flow 16
Operate the dust removal mechanism with the MUTL to open or close the dust removal HP START
sensor (SZ5). Verify that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.18.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (16)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.4_Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3,
and SZ5)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-175
MT-176
10.18.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (16) 4. Verify the displayed monitoring result.
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. l GOOD indication
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Perform the "Dust Removal Operation" process.
l NO GOOD indication
When the status (OPEN or CLOSE) of the checked sensors is not displayed
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
5. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-176
MT-177
10.19 Sensor Check Flow 17: SZ1 Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
10.19.1 Check Flow 17 1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
START 3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.5_Sensor (SZ1) and Scanning Optics Unit (LDD23A,
Remove the left-hand cover plate. PDA23A, LDA23A, SYN23A, and POL23A)}
{MC:3.4_Left-Hand Cover Plate} N
Restore
Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201. Y
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU}
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
{MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch}
Reinstall the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.
{MC:10.2.2_Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
Remove the board box cover, cable, and front cover.
{MC:4.7_Board Box Cover}
Reinstall the board box cover, cable, and front cover.
{MC:3.2_Front Cover Plate} {MC:3.2.2_Front Cover Plate}
{MC:4.7.2_Board Box Cover}
Remove the post-reading conveyor guide assembly.
{MC:10.2_Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly}
Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Q1 Result of SCN board LED check normal?
{MT:10.19.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SCN Board (17)} Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow. Reinstall left-hand cover plate.
N {MC:3.4.2_Left-Hand Cover Plate}
Q2
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-177
MT-178
10.19.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SCN Board (17)
1. Using the jig cables, start up the RU with it pulled out.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Erase the IP with the ERASE1 mode, and check the display on the LED-SOH of
the SCN board.
l GOOD indication
When the IP is inserted: The LED comes on.
When the IP is removed: The LED goes off.
l NO GOOD indication
The LED status does not change.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-178
MT-179
10.20 Barcode Reader Check Flow: BCRC1 Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. points.
Turn ON the barcode reader in the MUTL, to make sure that the barcode reader (BCRC1) 1. The connector is securely plugged in.
reads the barcode of the IP. 2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
10.20.1 Check Flow 18 {MT:17.6_PNL23B, FANG1, FANG3, and BCRC1}
N
START Restore
Y
Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201. Replace the barcode reader (BCRC1).
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU} {MC:2._Table of Contents}
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
{MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch}
Remove the rear cover plate. Reinstall the rear cover plate.
{MC:3.3_Rear Cover Plate} {MC:3.3.2_Rear Cover Plate}
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility
of the RU}
Reinstall the board box cover.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal? {MC:4.7.2_Board Box Cover}
{MT:10.20.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (18)}
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-179
MT-180
10.20.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (18) 3. Release the clamp and disconnect the barcode reader (BCRC1) from the side-
positioning conveyor unit.
1. Start the MUTL.
u NOTE u
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
Do not disconnect the connector of the barcode reader.
2. Select "Barcode-Reader Check".
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-180
MT-181
4. Select “Barcode-Reader On” with the cassette brought close to the barcode 5. Reinstall the barcode reader (BCRC1) and retain the cable with the clamps.
reader (BCRC1), and select “Show Barcode”.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the cable with the barcode reader dropping, since the
connector of the barcode reader is kept connected with the side-positioning conveyor
unit.
l GOOD indication
“RESULT-OK” and the barcode No. that has been read are displayed on the MUTL.
l NO GOOD indication
“RESULT-OK” and the barcode No. that has been read are not displayed on the MUTL.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-181
MT-182
10.21 Sensor Check Flow 18: SA16 10.21.1 Check Flow 18
Start the RU in the maintenance mode. START
Insert and eject the cassette of 8x10 (inch) or 10x12 (inch) to open or close the inch/metric
sensor (SA16) to check that the sensor status changes.
Q1 Result of monitoring function check normal?
{MT:10.21.2_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (18)}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.3_Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)}
N
Restore
Y
Replace the error-causing sensor.
{MC:2._Table of Contents}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-182
MT-183
10.21.2 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (18) 3. Exit the monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2.3_Exiting the Monitoring Function}
1. Start the monitoring function of the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MT:10.2_Starting and Exiting the Monitoring Function}
2. Allow the cassette of 8x10 (inch) or 10x12 (inch) to be inserted and ejected with
the hold released, and check the monitoring display.
l GOOD indication
l NO GOOD indication
Although the cassette was inserted and ejected, the sensor status (OPEN or CLOSE)
was not displayed.
u NOTE u
Click on the [START] button in the monitoring window to initiate the monitoring
beforehand. Unless the monitoring is initiated, nothing is displayed in the window even
when the sensor changes its status.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-183
MT-184
11. Procedures for Checking the Motors Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
11.1 Motor Check Flow 2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
START 4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.1_Motors (MA1 to MA4) and Actuators (SOLA1, PA1,
SVA1, and SVA2)
Q1 Operation of the motor normal?
{MT:17.2_Motors (MC1 to MC4, MZ1 to MZ3)}
For checking the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) N
Restore
{MT:11.2_Checking the MA1 Operation}
Y
For checking the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2)
{MT:11.3_Checking the MA2 Operation} Q3 Resistance value of the motor normal?
For checking the suction arm driving motor (MA3) {MT:11.13_Checking the Motor Resistance Values}
{MT:11.4_Checking the MA3 Operation} Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
For checking the IP transport motor (MA4)
N
{MT:11.5_Checking the MA4 Operation}
For checking the side-positioning IP transport motor (MC1) Replace the motor.
{MT:11.6_Checking the MC1 Operation} {MC:2._Table of Contents}
For checking the side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2)
{MT:11.7_Checking the MC2 Operation}
For checking the side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3)
{MT:11.8_Checking the MC3 Operation}
For checking the side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4)
{MT:11.9_Checking the MC4 Operation}
For checking the subscanning motor (MZ1)
{MT:11.10_Checking the MZ1 Operation}
For checking the driven/driving grip roller driving motor (MZ2)
{MT:11.11_Checking the MZ2 Operation}
For checking the dust removal motor (MZ3)
{MT:11.12_Checking the MZ3 Operation}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-184
MT-185
11.2 Checking the MA1 Operation 11.3 Checking the MA2 Operation
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. 1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} {MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Start the MUTL. 2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Select "IP Removal Unit 1". 3. Select "IP Removal Unit 1".
4. Select "OpenLid Mechanism".
4. Select "CloseLid Mechanism".
5. Select "Open Lid Diagnostic". 5. Select "Close Lid Diagnostic".
6. Check the result of the operation. 6. Check the result of the operation.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again. error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} {MT:2._Error Code Table}
7. Exit the MUTL. 7. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-185
MT-186
11.4 Checking the MA3 Operation 11.5 Checking the MA4 Operation
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. 1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} {MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Start the MUTL. 2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Select "IP Removal Unit 1". 3. Select "IP Removal Unit 2".
4. Select "Removal Mechanism". 4. Select "Feed Conveyance (MA4/MC1)".
5. Select "Removal Diagnostic". 5. Check the result of the operation.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
6. Exit the MUTL.
6. Check the result of the operation. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
7. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-186
MT-187
11.6 Checking the MC1 Operation 11.7 Checking the MC2 Operation
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. 1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} {MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Start the MUTL. 2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Select "IP Removal Unit 2". 3. Select "Side-Positioning Conveyor".
4. Select "Feed Conveyance (MA4/MC1)". 4. Select "Side-Positioning".
5. Check the result of the operation. 5. Select "Side-Positioning Grip HP".
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} 6. Check the result of the operation.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
7. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-187
MT-188
11.8 Checking the MC3 Operation 11.9 Checking the MC4 Operation
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. 1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} {MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Start the MUTL. 2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Select "Side-Positioning Conveyor". 3. Select "Side-Positioning Conveyor".
4. Select "Side-Positioning". 4. Select "Side-Positioning".
5. Select "Side-Positioning Hook HP". 5. Select "Side-Positioning Base Pin HP".
6. Check the result of the operation. 6. Check the result of the operation.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again. error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} {MT:2._Error Code Table}
7. Exit the MUTL. 7. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-188
MT-189
11.10 Checking the MZ1 Operation 6. Drive the subscanning motor (MZ1).
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 7. Check the result of the operation.
3. Select "Sub Scanning". If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
8. Stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
4. Select "Conveyance Motor".
9. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Set the conveyance speed to "SR (356)".
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-189
MT-190
11.11 Checking the MZ2 Operation 11.12 Checking the MZ3 Operation
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. 1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} {MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Start the MUTL. 2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Select "Sub Scanning". 3. Select "Sub Scanning".
4. Select "Sub-Scanning Grip". 4. Select "Dust Removal".
5. Select "Sub-Scanning Grip HP". 5. Select "Dust Remova Operation".
6. Check the result of the operation. 6. Check the result of the operation.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again. error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} {MT:2._Error Code Table}
7. Exit the MUTL. 7. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-190
MT-191
11.13 Checking the Motor Resistance Values
With reference to the block diagram, measure the motor resistance values based on the pin
numbers.
{MT:17.1_Motors (MA1 to MA4) and Actuators (SOLA1, PA1, SVA1, and SVA2)}
{MT:17.2_Motors (MC1 to MC4, MZ1 to MZ3)
n List of Resistance Values of Motor Windings
Reference resistance value
I/O No. Load name Pin numbers Pin numbers Pin numbers Pin numbers
1 and 2 3 and 2 4 and 5 6 and 5
Cassette cover opening mechanism
MA1 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω
driving motor
Cassette cover closing mechanism
MA2 0.8–1.3Ω
driving motor
MA3 Suction arm driving motor 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω
MA4 IP transport motor 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω
MC1 Side-positioning IP transport motor 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω
Side-positioning conveyor roller grip
MC2 0.8–1.3Ω
release motor
Side-positioning latch mechanism
MC3 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω 0.8–1.3Ω
driving motor
Side-positioning reference block
MC4 0.8–1.3Ω
driving motor
MZ2 Driven/driving grip roller driving motor 0.8–1.3Ω
MZ3 Dust removal motor 0.8–1.3Ω
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-191
MT-192
12. Procedures for Checking the Actuators Q3 Resistance value of the actuator normal?
{MT:12.6_Checking the Actuator Resistance Values}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
12.1 Actuator Check Flow N
START Replace the actuator.
{MC:5.60_Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
{MC:5.37_IP Suction Pump (PA1)}
Q1 Operation of the actuator normal? {MC:5.36_IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2)}
l For checking the cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1)
{MT:12.2_Checking the SOLA1 Operation}
l For checking the IP suction pump (PA1)
{MT:12.3_Checking the PA1 Operation}
l For checking the IP air-leak valve (SVA1)
{MT:12.4_Checking the SVA1 Operation}
l For checking the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2)
{MT:12.5_Checking the SVA2 Operation}
Y
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N
Q2 Cable normal?
Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following
points.
1. The connector is securely plugged in.
2. The resistance between each of the pins and GND is 2Ω or greater.
3. The resistance between each of the pins is 2Ω or greater.
4. The continuity between each of the pins is 1Ω or less.
{MT:17.1_Motors (MA1 to MA4) and Actuators (SOLA1, PA1,
SVA1, and SVA2)}
N
Restore
Y
Q3
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-192
MT-193
12.2 Checking the SOLA1 Operation Q3 Cassette hold pin damaged such as bent?
{MC:5.60_Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
12.2.1 Solenoid Check Flow Y
Replace the cassette hold pin.
START N {MC:5.60_Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
Replace the solenoid.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility
{MC:5.60_Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2)}
of the RU}
Q1 Result of visual check normal? Q4 Result of cassette hold solenoid check normal after changing type of cassette?
{MT:12.2.2_Visual Check Procedures} {MT:12.2.3_Procedures for Checking the Cassette Hold
N Solenoid}
Q3
Y N
Q3
Y
Q2 Result of cassette hold solenoid normal?
{MT:12.2.3_Procedures for Checking the Cassette Hold Return to the check flow.
N Solenoid} {MT:12.1_Actuator Check Flow}
Q4
Y
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Return to the check flow.
{MT:12.1_Actuator Check Flow}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-193
MT-194
12.2.2 Visual Check Procedures 4. Turn OFF the solenoid, and check to ensure that the cassette hold pin rises.
Allow the solenoid to work in MUTL, and check to ensure that the cassette hold pin rises/ l MUTL operation
lowers normally.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select "IP Removal Unit 2".
l RU status
3. Turn ON the solenoid, and check to ensure that the cassette hold pin lowers.
l MUTL operation
l RU status 5. Repeat the steps 4 and 5 several times, and check the operation of the cassette
hold pin.
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-194
MT-195
12.2.3 Procedures for Checking the Cassette Hold Solenoid 5. Turn OFF the solenoid, and check to ensure that the cassette hold pin rises.
Turn ON the solenoid with the MUTL, and insert the cassette with hold pin lowered. Turn l MUTL operation
OFF the solenoid to raise the hold pin and hold the cassette.
Verify that the cassette is properly held by the hold pin.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select "IP Removal Unit 2".
l RU status
3. Turn ON the solenoid to lower the hold pin.
4. Insert the cassette.
6. Turn ON the solenoid to lower the hold pin.
7. Pull out the cassette.
8. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-195
MT-196
12.3 Checking the PA1 Operation 12.4 Checking the SVA1 Operation
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. 1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} {MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Start the MUTL. 2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Select "IP Removal Unit 2". 3. Select "IP Removal Unit 2".
4. Turn ON/OFF the pump. 4. Turn ON/OFF the valve.
5. Check the result of the operation. 5. Check the result of the operation.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again. error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table} {MT:2._Error Code Table}
6. Exit the MUTL. 6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-196
MT-197
12.5 Checking the SVA2 Operation 12.6 Checking the Actuator Resistance Values
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode. With reference to the block diagram, measure the actuator resistance values based on the
pin numbers.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
{MT:17.1_Motors (MA1 to MA4) and Actuators (SOLA1, PA1, SVA1, and SVA2))}
2. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} l Resistance Values of Solenoid
3. Select "IP Removal Unit 2".
I/O No. Load name
Reference resistance value
Pin numbers 1 and 3 Pin numbers 2 and 4
SOLA1 Cassette hold pin solenoid 13.5–16.5Ω 134–154Ω
l Resistance Values of Pump
Reference resistance value
4. Turn ON/OFF the valve. I/O No. Load name
Pin numbers 1 and 3
PA1 IP suction pump 1Ω or less
l Resistance Values of Valve
Reference resistance value
I/O No. Load name
Pin numbers 1 and 2
SVA1 IP air-leak valve
65–95Ω or less
SVA2 IP suction path changeover valve
5. Check the result of the operation.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the
error code table and troubleshoot again.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-197
MT-198
13. Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O Q6 Error recurs?
N
Return to the error code analysis flow.
13.1 Scanner I/O Check Flow Y
Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
START
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. Q7 CPU23A and SCN boards tested in MUTL normal?
{MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch} {MT:18.2.2_Testing the CPU23B Board}
{MT:18.2.3_Testing the SCN Board}
Q1 Laser ON operated in MUTL normal?
{MT:13.2_Checking Laser ON in MUTL} N
Replace the error-causing board.
Y Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Return to the error code analysis flow.
N {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q2 PMT (photomultiplier) normal?
{MT:13.3_Checking the PMT} Q8 Error recurs?
Y N
Return to the error code analysis flow. Return to the error code analysis flow.
N Y
Q3 Check the voltage on CN5 of the SCN board. Replace the scanning optics unit.
{MT:8.2_Checking the Voltage on the SCN Board Test Pins {MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
(CN5)}
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Q4 Check all the fuses on the SCN board.
{MT:9.4_SCN Board}
Q5 Cable normal?
{MT:13.4_Checking the Cable}
N
Restore the cable.
Y
Q6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-198
MT-199
13.2 Checking Laser ON in MUTL 3. Check to see whether the LEDs on the SCN board are normal.
l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL.
No abnormality exists if the indication is other than the NO GOOD indication.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
u NOTE u
2. Turn ON the laser.
The "HVON" LED display varies depending on the state of the high-voltage switch.
Thus, check the state of the high-voltage switch.
- High-voltage switch ON → LED illuminated
- High-voltage switch OFF → LED not illuminated
l NO GOOD indication
→The following messages appear in the MUTL.
TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT : 300
LDIFNOW : 0
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 0
THE LASER IS TURNED ON.
u NOTE u
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "THE LASER IS TURNED ON.",
then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-199
MT-200
13.3 Checking the PMT 3. Check to see whether the LEDs on the SCN board are normal.
l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL.
No abnormality exists if the indication is other than the NO GOOD indication.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
u NOTE u
2. Turn ON the laser.
The "HVON" LED display varies depending on the state of the high-voltage switch.
Thus, check the state of the high-voltage switch.
- High-voltage switch ON → LED illuminated
- High-voltage switch OFF → LED not illuminated
l NO GOOD indication
→The following messages appear in the MUTL.
TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT : 300
LDIFNOW : 0
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 0
THE LASER IS TURNED ON.
u NOTE u
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "THE LASER IS TURNED ON.",
then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-200
MT-201
13.4 Checking the Cable
1. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. Referring to the block diagram, check the following points.
{MT:17._Block Diagrams}
- The connector is securely plugged in.
- Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2 Ω or greater
- Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2 Ω or greater
- Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1 Ω or less
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-201
MT-202
14. Line Error between CL and RU Q6 Check the RU’s IP address.
{MT:14.6_Checking the IP Address of the RU}
14.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU
Q7 PING from the CL acceptable?
START {MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL}
Q1 PING from the CL acceptable? N
Q8
{MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL} Y
N
Q6 END
Y
Q2 Check the NETWORK CONFIGURATION information of the CL.
Q8 Perform a loopback test.
{MT:14.3_Checking Configuration Information of the CL}
{MT:14.7_Loopback Test}
Q3 Check the IP address of the CL.
Q9 PING from the CL acceptable?
{MT:14.4_Checking the IP Address of the CL}
{MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL}
N
Q4 Check to see whether the IP address of the master CL that is set in the RU is correct. Restore the network connection.
{MT:14.5_Checking the IP Address of the Master CL} Y
END
Q5 Check to see whether the FTP server setting is correct.
{MT:7._Troubleshooting the Errors that Cause the Inability to
Update the Software Version or Back Up the Machine Shipment
Control Data}
END
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-202
MT-203
14.2 Checking Connection from the CL 4. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
Using the "PING" function of the "RU PC-TOOL", check the connection between the RU and
CL.
n Check Procedures
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU that is targeted for a connection
check.
REFERENCE
"Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING
command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some problem.
l GOOD indication
3. Click on [PING]. If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.11: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l NO GOOD indication
Other than above is all abnormal.
5. Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
→ The DOS prompt window opens to display the test result. {MU:4.23.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-203
MT-204
14.3 Checking Configuration Information of the CL
n Check Procedures
1. Exit the CL software.
2. Start the IIP Service Utility.
3. Click on [Setup Configuration Item] button.
4. Check the setting of "NETWORK CONFIG".
Make sure that the RU name and IP address are identical to those registered in "LIST
OF EXISTING RU" of the RU PC-TOOL.
If not, modify the setting.
5. Check the setting of "CONNECTING EQUIPMENT".
Make sure that the RU that was checked at step 4 is set.
If the setting is improper, modify the setting. If nothing is set, set it anew.
{FCR-MB 201 Console Service Manual}
6. Exit the IIP Service Utility.
7. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-204
MT-205
14.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL 6. Choose "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and then click [Properties].
n Check Procedures
1. Exit the CL software.
2. From Windows' [Start] menu, click [Control Panel].
→ The "Control Panel" window opens.
3. Double-click .
→ The “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties” window opens.
→ The “Network and Sharing Center” window opens.
4. Click [View status].
u INSTRUCTION u
Take note of the "IP address" displayed.
→ The “Local Area Connection Status” window opens.
5. Click [Properties].
→ The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-205
MT-206
14.5 Checking the IP Address of the Master CL 4. Click on [CANCEL] to close the window.
n Check Procedures
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master CL's is to be
checked, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
2. Click on [MODIFY] button.
3. Check the IP address displayed.
Make sure that the IP address displayed is identical to the IP address noted at step 6 of
"14.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL".
If it is not identical, modify "CL IP ADDRESS", and click on the [SET] button.
REFERENCE
For "CL NAME", any name (20 bytes: 20 alphanumeric characters, or 10 Kanji
characters) may be entered.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-206
MT-207
14.6 Checking the IP Address of the RU 4. Press the [Return] button.
n Check Procedures
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Verify that "Reader Unit IP Address" is chosen, and then press the [Select] button.
5. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
3. Check the IP address of the RU.
Make sure that it is identical to the IP address registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" of
the RU PC-TOOL.
If it is not identical, modify the IP address of the RU.
REFERENCE
For details on the procedure for changing the RU's IP address, see "1.4.2 Procedures
for Changing the Address" in the Maintenance Utility volume.
{MU:1.4.2_Procedures for Changing the Address}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-207
MT-208
14.7 Loopback Test Q4 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the CPU23B
board?
Connect the loopback cable (jig: 898Y0981) to the network cable or LAN23A board
connector, allow the signal transmitted from the RU to be looped back by the jig, and check Y
whether the transmitted signal returns. Q5
Conducting the loopback test enables you to locate an open in the network or a fault in the N
RU.
Return to the analysis flow.
For details on the loopback test function, see “3.9 Loopback Test” in the Maintenance Utility
volume. {MT:14.1_Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU}
{MU:3.9_Loop Back Test}
14.7.1 Loopback Test Flow Q5 Are the CPU23B board check results generated by the MUTL normal?
{MT:18.2.2_Testing the CPU23B Board}
START
Y
Replace the LAN23A board.
Q1 Network connection to the LAN cable connector normal?
N {MC:11.4_LAN23A Board}
{MT:14.7.2_Loopback Test-1}
Replace the CPU23B board.
Y {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Q3
N
Q2 Error recurs when the LAN23A board is reseated?
{MC:11.4_LAN23A Board}
Y
Q4
N
Return to the analysis flow.
{MT:14.1_Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU}
Q3 Network connection between the RU and hub normal?
{MT:14.7.3_Loopback Test-2}
N
Replace the LAN cable.
Y
Return to the analysis flow.
{MT:14.1_Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-208
MT-209
14.7.2 Loopback Test-1 14.7.3 Loopback Test-2
1. Connect the jig (898Y0981) to the LAN cable connector. 1. Disconnect the LAN cable from the hub. Connect the jig (898Y0981) to the LAN
cable.
2. Perform a loopback test.
{MT:14.7.4_Loopback Test Procedure} 2. Perform a loopback test.
3. Remove the jig and then connect the LAN cable to the RU. {MT:14.7.4_Loopback Test Procedure}
3. Remove the jig and then connect the LAN cable to the RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-209
MT-210
14.7.4 Loopback Test Procedure 4. Confirm the test result.
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11.2_Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during READY
State}
2. Verify that "Loop Back Test" is chosen, and then press the [Select] button.
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
u NOTE u
After completion of the loopback test, be sure to turn the FCR-MB 201 power OFF
and then back ON. If you do not observe this precaution, the RU may fail to operate
normally.
3. Press the [Check] button.
→ The test result is displayed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-210
MT-211
15. Troubleshooting Procedures for Image Q4 Quasi-data output from the PMT board normal?
{MU:7.3[4-1-2]_PMT Virtual Read}
Abnormalities N
Q9
Y
15.1 Vertical Streaks Q5 Quasi-data output from the LED lighting on the PMT board normal?
{MU:7.3[4-1-1]_LED Virtual Read}
15.1.1 Peculiar Events N
Replace the light-collecting guide.
Y {MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Guide}
- Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP?
- Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating? Q6 Error recurs after the light-collecting guide and light-collecting mirror are cleaned?
- Does this image abnormality occur depending o the processing size?
N
15.1.2 Analysis Flow END
Y
START
Replace the parts in the order named.
1. Scanning Optics Unit
Check the frequency of occurrence of abnormal image. {MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
* Subsequent check procedures differ depending on the frequency of occurrence. 2. SCN board
A {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
3. PMT board
Q1 Any peculiar event found when abnormal image occurs?
{MC:8.2_PMT Board}
4. Light-collecting mirror
Y {MC:10.22_Light-Collecting Mirror}
Troubleshoot the peculiar event or check the RU machine.
N
Q7 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the SCN
Q2 Printer normal? board?
N
A
N
Perform printer troubleshooting. Y
Y
Q8 Reseat the SCN board from the CPU23A board and check if the error occurs again.
Q3 Quasi-data output from the SCN board normal?
{MU:7.3[4-1-3]_SCN Board Virtual Read} N
A
N
Q7 Y
Y
Replace the parts in the order named.
Q4 1. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
2. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-211
MT-212
Q9 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the PMT
board?
N
A
Y
Replace the parts in the order named.
1. PMT board
{MC:8.2_PMT Board}
2. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-212
MT-213
15.2 Horizontal Streaks 15.2.2 Troubleshooting Image Abnormalities Considered to be
Caused by IP
15.2.1 Analysis Flow for Horizontal Streaks If an image abnormality occurs only with a specific IP or cassette, the image abnormality is
considered to be caused by a defect of the IP.
START
n Analysis Flow
START
Q1 Error code logged?
{MT:1.4.1_Checking the Error Log}
Y Q1 Can the IP number or cassette number that causes image abnormality be identified?
Perform analysis procedures based on the error code.
{n Checking the IP Number or Cassette Number}
N {MT:2._Error Code Table}
Q2 Check the IP or cassette number that caused image abnormality. N
Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks.
{MT:15.2.2_Troubleshooting Image Abnormalities Considered to
Y
be Caused by IP}
Q3 Printer normal? Q2 Read IPs in a cassette with the identified IP number or cassette number, and check if
the image abnormality occurs again.
N
Perform printer troubleshooting.
N
Y Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks.
Y
Q4 X-ray not irradiated to the RU during reading?
Check to see, among others, whether: Replace a specific IP.
- The X-ray room door is not opened during exposure
- The medical equipment that employs X-ray is not used during reading.
n Checking the IP Number or Cassette Number
Y Check the IP number or cassette number that causes image abnormality.
Guide the user to move the RU to a place where X-ray is not irradiated.
N
Q5 Check to see whether pale band-like nonuniformity occurs at the leading edge or trailing
edge of the IP.
{MT:15.2.3_Analyzing Pale Nonuniformity at the Leading Edge
or Trailing Edge of the IP}
Q6 Check to see whether thin, distinct nonuniformity occurs.
{MT:15.2.4_Analyzing Thin, Distinct Nonuniformity}
END
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-213
MT-214
15.2.3 Analyzing Pale Nonuniformity at the Leading Edge or Trailing n Checking the IP Size and Nonuniformity Occurrence Location
Edge of the IP The nonuniformity occurrence location differs depending on the IP size.
If a pale nonuniformity occurs at a fixed location on the leading-edge or trailing-edge side IP contact position center during gripping IP type IP size Event
relative to the IP conveyance direction, the grip mechanism is considered to be faulty. 14" x 17"
(35cm x 43cm)
n Analysis Flow
14" x 14"
START
(35cm x 35cm)
Reading leading edge 70 mm, trailing edge
ST 10" x 12" Grip operation
70 mm: White streak
Q1 Pale nonuniformity occurs at a position that is considered to be caused by faulty grip (24cm x 30cm)
mechanism?
8" x 10"
{n Checking the IP Size and Nonuniformity Occurrence Location}
(18cm x 24cm)
N
Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks. 15cm x 30cm
Y
REFERENCE
Q2 Grip mechanism normal? The location of the nonuniformity is shown for the original size; thus, convert it, as needed,
{n Procedures for Checking the Grip Mechanism} based on the reduction ratio of the film, to check its location.
N
Restore
Y
Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-214
MT-215
n Procedures for Checking the Grip Mechanism 5. Execute sub-scanning Grip HP.
Check the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit in accordance with the procedures
described below, and remedy a problem, if any.
1. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU} Repeat Grip HP several times to check the following points.
3. Start the MUTL.
l RESULT-OK is displayed
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} If an error code is displayed in the "OK" portion of RESULT-OK, then refer to the error
4. Select "Sub-Scanning Grip". code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
l When offensive noise is heard
When offensive noise is heard, remove the front cover plate and check the operation of
the grip roller.
u NOTE u
The grip springs of appropriate lengths should be used for the right and left sides of the
machine.
If their lengths are inappropriate, replace them with springs of appropriate lengths.
{MC:10.10_Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)}
{MC:10.11_Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)}
{MC:10.12_Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)}
{MC:10.13_Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)}
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-215
MT-216
15.2.4 Analyzing Thin, Distinct Nonuniformity 15.2.5 Procedures for Checking the Grip Roller (Upper)
If a thin, distinct nonuniformity occurs at a fixed location on the trailing-edge side relative to
the IP conveyance direction, the grip mechanism or FFM motor is considered to be faulty. n Check Procedures
START Check the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit in accordance with the procedures
described below, and remedy a problem, if any.
1. Remove the driving-shaft and driven-shaft grip rollers (upper).
Q1 Check to see that there is nothing abnormal with the grip roller (upper).
{MC:10.14_Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
{MT:15.2.5_Procedures for Checking the Grip Roller (Upper)}
{MC:10.15_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
Q2 Check to see that there is nothing abnormal with the grounding of the photomultiplier (PMT).
2. Make sure that there is nothing abnormal with the grip roller (upper) removed.
{MT:15.2.6_Procedures for Checking the Grounding of the - There should be no peeled adhesive.
Photomultiplier (PMT)} - Grasp the bearings on both ends to rotate the shaft, and make sure that the roller rotates
smoothly.
Q3 Check to see that there is nothing abnormal with the FFM motor (MZ1).
u NOTE u
{MT:15.2.7_Procedures for Checking the FFM Motor}
If anything abnormal is found, replace the grip roller (upper).
Return to the analysis flow for horizontal streaks.
3. Make sure that there is nothing abnormal with the grip roller (lower).
- The antistatic brush should come into contact with the grip roller (lower).
- Light shielding should be provided sufficiently (the covers should be attached
appropriately).
u NOTE u
If anything abnormal is found, replace the grip roller (lower).
4. Reinstall the driving-shaft and driven-shaft grip rollers (upper).
{MC:10.14.2_Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
{MC:10.15.2_Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-216
MT-217
15.2.6 Procedures for Checking the Grounding of the Photomultiplier
(PMT)
n Check Procedures
With the FCR-MB 201 placed in the power-OFF condition, perform the following procedures.
1. Disconnect the connectors connected to the PMT board.
{MC:8.2_PMT Board}
2. Check for continuity of the PMT shield portion and body.
If continuity is found, remedy it.
3. Connect the connectors to the PMT board.
{MC:8.2.2_PMT Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-217
MT-218
15.2.7 Procedures for Checking the FFM Motor 8. Drive the subscanning motor (MZ1).
n Check Procedures
Check the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit in accordance with the procedures
described below, and remedy a problem, if any.
1. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to check the following points.
If anything abnormal is found, replace the FFM motor.
2. Remove the left-hand cover plate.
{MC:3.4_Left-Hand Cover Plate} l RESULT-OK is displayed
If an error code is displayed in the "OK" portion of RESULT-OK, then refer to the error
3. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
{MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch}
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
l The wow/flutter is held below the reference
The wow/flutter is held below 0.6%.
5. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} l There is no offensive noise
There is no offensive noise during rotation of the FFM motor.
6. Select "Conveyance Motor".
If any offensive noise is found, remedy it.
9. Stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
10. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
11. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
12. Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
7. Select "SR (356)". 13. Secure the RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
14. Reinstall the left-hand cover plate.
{MC:3.4.2_Left-Hand Cover Plate}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-218
MT-219
15.3 Other Abnormal Images Q5 Quasi-data output from the PMT board normal?
{MU:7.3[4-1-2]_PMT Virtual Read}
N
15.3.1 Peculiar Events Q9
Y
- Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP?
- Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating? Q6 Quasi-data output from the LED lighting on the PMT board normal?
- Does this image abnormality occur depending o the processing size? {MU:7.3[4-1-1]_LED Virtual Read}
N
Replace the light-collecting guide.
15.3.2 Analysis Flow
Y {MC:8.1_Light-Collecting Guide}
START
END
Check the frequency of occurrence of abnormal image.
* Subsequent check procedures differ depending on the frequency of occurrence. Q7 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the SCN
board?
A
N
Q1 Any peculiar event found when abnormal image occurs? A
Y
Y
Troubleshoot the peculiar event or check the RU machine. Q8 Reseat the SCN board from the CPU23A board and check if the error occurs again.
N
N
Q2 Printer normal? A
Y
N
Perform printer troubleshooting. Replace the parts in the order named.
Y 1. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
Q3 IP not irradiated twice by X-rays? 2. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N
Re-expose it.
Y
Q4 Quasi-data output from the SCN board normal?
{MU:7.3[4-1-3]_SCN Board Virtual Read}
N
Q7
Y
Q5
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-219
MT-220
Q9 Photomultiplier (PMT) normal?
{MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O}
N
Remedy the error according to the procedures for checking the scanner I/O.
Y
Q10 Does the error recur when you disconnect and reconnect the connector for the PMT
board?
N
A
Y
Replace the parts in the order named.
1. PMT board
{MC:8.2_PMT Board}
2. SCN board
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-220
MT-221
16. Removing the IP
If an IP is jammed, locate it and then perform an appropriate IP removal procedure in
accordance with the IP jam location.
l If an IP is jammed in the cassette set unit or erasure unit
{MT:16.1_If an IP Is Jammed in the Cassette Set Unit/Erasure Unit}
l If an IP is jammed in the side-positioning conveyor unit or subscanning unit
{MT:16.2_If an IP Is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit/Subscanning
Unit}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-221
MT-222
16.1 If an IP Is Jammed in the Cassette Set Unit/Erasure Unit 2. While rotating the handle of the cassette set unit and the timing belt of the side-
positioning conveyor unit, move the IP to the side-positioning conveyor unit.
If an IP is jammed in the cassette set unit or erasure unit, rotate the handle of the cassette
set unit and the timing belt of the side-positioning conveyor to move the IP to the side-
positioning conveyor unit. After the IP is moved to the side-positioning conveyor unit, remove
the IP from the front of the machine by performing the procedure set forth under "16.2 If an
IP Is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit/Subscanning Unit."
1. To prepare for IP removal, remove the following parts concerned. Remove
the parts by performing the procedures set forth in sections designated in the
"Reference" column.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.4} Left-Hand Cover Plate
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:10.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:8.1} Light-Collecting Guide
* If any of the procedures set forth in sections designated in the "Reference" column are
already completed, skip them.
3. Remove the IP from the front of the machine by performing the procedure set
forth under "16.2 If an IP Is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit/
Subscanning Unit."
{MT:16.2_If an IP Is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit/Subscanning
Unit}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-222
MT-223
16.2 If an IP Is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit/ 2. While rotating the timing belt of the side-positioning conveyor unit and the
flywheel, remove the IP.
Subscanning Unit
If an IP is jammed in the side-positioning conveyor unit or subscanning unit, remove it from
the front of the machine by rotating the timing belt of the side-positioning conveyor unit and
the flywheel of the subscanning unit.
1. To prepare for IP removal, remove the following parts concerned. Remove
the parts by performing the procedures set forth in sections designated in the
"Reference" column.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.4} Left-Hand Cover Plate
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:10.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:8.1} Light-Collecting Guide
* If any of the procedures set forth in sections designated in the "Reference" column are
already completed, skip them.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-223
MT-224
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:8.1.2} Light-Collecting Guide
{MC:10.2.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:3.2.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.4.2} Left-Hand Cover Plate
* If any of the procedures set forth in sections designated in the "Reference" column are
already completed, skip them.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-224
MT-225
17. Block Diagrams
17.1 Motors (MA1 to MA4) and Actuators (SOLA1, PA1, SVA1,
and SVA2)
PSU29B SND23A
CN23
1 MA1A BLU 136Y9322 1
CN12 CN41 CN1 2 MA1COM BLU 2
F2
5VDC +R
5VDC -R
1 1 +24V RED 136Y102541 1 3
4
MA1AL
MA1B
BLU
BLU
3
4
MA1
2 2 GND RED 4
12VDC +R 5 MA1COM BLU 5 118SX213
3 3 +24V RED 2
12VDC -R 4 4 GND RED 5 6 MA1BL BLU 6
15VDC +R 5 5 +5V RED 3
15VDC -R 6 6 GND RED 6
24VDC +R CN24 MA2
7 7 NC
24VDC -R 1 MA2DRV1 BLU 136Y9322 1
8 8 NC DRV
N.C 9
2 MA2DRV2 BLU 2 MA2
N.C 10
118Y100091
AUX 11
AUX_GND CN25
12
1 MA3A BLU 136Y9322 1
2 MA3COM BLU 2
F3
3
4
MA3AL
MA3B
BLU
BLU
3
4
MA3
5 MA3COM BLU 5 118SX213
6 MA3BL BLU 6
CN26
1 MA4A BLU 136Y9322 1
2 MA4COM BLU 2
F4
3
4
MA4AL
MA4B
BLU
BLU
3
4
MA4
5 MA4COM BLU 5 118SX213
6 MA4BL BLU 6
CN27 SOLA1
1 +24V(SOLA1) BLU 136Y9322 1 107Y0183
F5
2 SOLA1DRV BLU NC 2
3 SOLA1PD BLU 3 SOLA1
4
CN28 PA1
1 +24V BLU 136Y9322 1
133Y2034
2 PA1DRV BLU NC 2
PA1
3 +24V BLU 3
4 SVA1DRV BLU
5 +24V BLU
6 SVA2DRV BLU 134S0059
1
2
SVA1
1 134S0059
2 SVA2
MBRU2170001.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-225
MT-226
17.2 Motors (MC1 to MC4, MZ1 to MZ3)
PSU29B SND23B
CNC61
CN23 CNC61-P CNC61-J MC1
1 MC1A BLU 136Y9332 1 1 BLU 136Y8917 1
CN12
F2 2 MC1COM BLU 2 2 BLU 2
5VDC +R 1 MC1AL
5VDC -R 2
3 BLU 3 3 BLU 3
MC1
4 MC1B BLU 4 4 BLU 4
12VDC +R 3 MC1COM BLU 5 5 BLU 5
118SX215
5
12VDC -R 4
CN42 CN1
6 MC1BL BLU 6 6 BLU 6
15VDC +R 5 1 +24V RED 136Y102542 1 7 7 BLU
15VDC -R 6 2 GND RED 4 8 8 BLU
24VDC +R MC3
7 3 +24V RED 2 9 9 BLU
24VDC -R 8 4 GND RED 5 CN24 10 10 BLU
1
N.C 9 5 +5V RED 3 MC3A 11 11 BLU
2
1 BLU
N.C 10 6 GND RED 6 MC3COM 12 12 BLU
3
MC3
2 BLU
AUX F3 4
11 3 MC3B BLU 13 13 BLU 118SX214
AUX_GND 12 MC3AL 14 14 BLU
5
4 BLU
6
5 MC3COM BLU 15 15 BLU
6 MC3BL BLU 16 16 BLU
DRV 7 MC2DRV1 BLU MC2
8 MC2DRV2 BLU 1
DRV 9 MC4DRV1 BLU 2 MC2
10 MC4DRV2 BLU
118Y100092
MC4
1
2 MC4
118Y100081
CN5 CN1
1 +15V ORN 136Y9330 1
2 GND ORN 2
CN6 CN2 MZ1
1 SUP OK GRY 136Y9330 1
F5 FFM
2 5V GRY 2
3 OKL GRY 3 118YX256
4 STARTL GRY 4
5 CWL GRY 5
6 M0L GRY 6
7 M1L GRY 7
8 M2L GRY 8
CNZ61
CN25 CNZ61-P CNZ61-J MZ2
1 MZ2DRV1 BLU 136Y9332 1 1 BLU 136Y8920 1
F6
2 MZ2DRV2 BLU 2 2 BLU 2 MZ2
DRV 3 MZ3DRV1 BLU 3 3 BLU
4 MZ3DRV2 BLU 4 4 BLU 118YX257
MZ3
1
2 MZ3
118YX257
MBRU2170002.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-226
MT-227
17.3 Sensors (SA1 to SA12, SA14 to SA16)
SND23A
1 SA1
2
3
146S0029
CN3
PSU29B 1 SA_5V GRY 136Y102609 CNA52
2 SINSA1 GRY CNA52-P CNA52-J SA5
3 GND
GRY GRY 136Y102179 1 COM
1 1 128S0934
GRY NO
4 SINSA5 2 2 GRY 2
GRY
5 GND
CN12 GRY
6 SA 5V
5VDC +R 1 GRY 1 SA6
7 SINSA6
5VDC -R 2 GRY 2
8 GND 146S0029
12VDC +R 3 GRY 3
CN41 CN1 9 SA 5V
12VDC -R 4 GRY
+24V 136Y102541 10 SINSA3
15VDC +R 5 1 RED 1
GRY
15VDC -R 2 GND RED 4 11 GND 1 SA3
6
GRY
24VDC +R 3 +24V RED 2 12 SA_5V 2
7
GRY 146S0029
24VDC -R 4 GND RED 5 13 SINSA8 3
8
GRY
N.C +5V 14 GND
N.C
9 5
6 GND
RED
RED
3
6
F7 F1 15 SA_5V
GRY
10
GRY
1 SA8
AUX 7 NC 16 SINSA10
11 2
GRY
AUX_GND 12 8 NC 17 GND 146S0029
3
GRY
18 SA 5V
GRY
19 SINSA12
GRY
20 GND 1 SA10
GRY
21 SA 5V 2
GRY 146S0029
22 SINSA16 3
GRY
23 GND
24 N.C 1 SA12
2
146S0029
CNA51 3
CN4 CNA51-J CNA51-P
SA_5V GRY 136Y102609 GRY 136Y9701
1 1 1 1 SA2
2 SINSA2 GRY 2 2 GRY 2
3 GND GRY 3 3 GRY 3
146S0029
4 SA_5V GRY 4 4 GRY
5 SINSA7 GRY 5 5 GRY
6 GND GRY 6 6 GRY
1 SA7
2
7 SA_5V GRY GRY 7 7 GRY 146S0029
3
8 SINSA11 GRY GRY 8 8 GRY
9 GND GRY GRY 9 9 GRY
10 SA_5V GRY 10 10 GRY 1 SA11
11 SINSA14 GRY 11 11 GRY 2
146S0029
12 GND GRY 12 12 GRY 3
13 SA 5V GRY 13 13 GRY
14 SINSA15 GRY 14 14 GRY
1 SA14
15 GND GRY 15 15 GRY
2
16 SA_5V GRY 16 16 GRY 146S0029
3
17 SA_5V GRY 17 17 GRY
18 SHORT_SA4 GRY 18 18 GRY
19 18-19(SA4) GRY 19 19 GRY 1 SA15
20 GND GRY 20 20 GRY 2
146S0029
21 SINSA4 GRY 21 21 GRY 3
22 SA_5V GRY 22 22 GRY
23 SA_5V GRY 23 23 GRY
1
24 SINSA9 GRY 24 24 GRY
2
SA4-2
25 GND GRY 25 25 GRY
3
26 N.C N.C 26 26 N.C 4
146S0083-1
1 SA9
1 SA4-1 2
2
3
146S0029
3
146S0082-1
CNA53
CNA53-J CNA53-P
CNA54
CNA54-P CNA54-J CN21 3 1 GRY 136Y9702 1 SA16
GRY
136Y102618 1 2 2 GRY 2
1 1
1 3 GRY 3
146S0029
2 2 GRY 2
3 3 GRY 3
4 4 GRY SA 5V 4 PSU29B
5 5 GRY SINSA11 5
6 6 GRY GND 6
MBRU2170003.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-227
MT-228
17.4 Sensors (SC1 to SC3, SC6 to SC10, SG1, SZ2, SZ3, and
SZ5)
PSU29B SND23B
1
SC1
2
3 146S0029
CN12
5VDC +R 1
5VDC -R 2
12VDC +R 3
1
SC2
12VDC -R 4
2
15VDC +R 3 146S0029
5
15VDC -R 6
24VDC +R 7
24VDC -R 8
N.C 9
1
SC3
CNC51
N.C 10 CN3
2
CNC51-J CNC51-P 146N0016
AUX 11
3
1 SCGZ 5V GRY 136Y9330 1 1 GRY 136Y8915
AUX_GND 12
2 SINSC1 GRY 2 2 GRY
3 GND GRY 3 3 GRY
4 SCGZ_5V GRY 4 4 GRY 1
SC9
5 SINSC2 GRY 5 5 GRY 2
CN42 CN1 6 GND GRY 6 6 GRY 3 146N100002
1 +24V RED 136Y102542 1
7 SCGZ 5V GRY 7 7 GRY
2 GND RED 4
8 SINSC3 GRY 8 8 GRY
3 +24V RED 2
9 GND GRY 9 9 GRY
10 SCGZ_5V 10 10 136Y8925 1
4 GND RED 5 GRY GRY SC6
+5V 11 SINSC9 GRY 11 11 GRY 2
5
6 GND
RED
RED
3
6
F1 12 GND GRY 12 12 GRY 3 146S0029
13 SCGZ 5V GRY 13 13 GRY
14 SINSC6 GRY 14 14 GRY CNC53
15 GND GRY 15 15 GRY CNC53-P CNC53-J
16 SCGZ_5V GRY 16 16 GRY 1 1 GRY 1
SC7
17 SINSC7 GRY 17 17 GRY 2 2 GRY 2
18 GND GRY 18 18 GRY 3 3 GRY 3 146S0029
19 SCGZ 5V GRY 19 19 GRY 4 4 GRY
20 SINSC8 GRY 20 20 GRY 5 5 GRY
21 GND GRY 21 21 GRY 6 6 GRY
22 SCGZ 5V GRY 22 22 GRY 7 7 GRY 1
SC8
23 SINSC10 GRY 23 23 GRY 8 8 GRY 2
24 GND GRY 24 24 GRY 9 9 GRY 3 146N0016
10 10 GRY
11 11 GRY
12 12 GRY
1
SC10
2
3 146S0029
CN4
1 SCGZ 5V GRY 136Y9330 1
SG1
2 SINSG1 GRY 2 1
SZ2
3 GND GRY 3 146N0016 2
4 NC 3 146S0029
5 NC CNZ52
6 NC CNZ52-P CNZ52-J
7 SCGZ 5V GRY 136Y9330 1 1 GRY 136Y8919
1
8 SINSZ2 GRY 2 2 GRY SZ3
2
9 GND GRY 3 3 GRY 146S0029
3
10 SCGZ 5V GRY 4 4 GRY
11 SINSZ3 GRY 5 5 GRY
12 GND GRY 6 6 GRY
13 SCGZ 5V GRY 7 7 GRY 1
SZ5
14 SINSZ5 GRY 8 8 GRY 2
15 GND GRY 9 9 GRY 3 146S0029
16 NC NC 10 10
NC
MBRU2170004.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-228
MT-229
17.5 Sensor (SZ1), Scanning Optics Unit (LDD23A, PDA23A,
LDA23A, SYN23A, and POL23A)
PSU29B SCN23C
CN3 CN1 CN1
Vcc+15AS 136Y9331
CN12 F5 1 GRY 1 1
5VDC +R
2 GND A GRY 2 2 PDA23A
1 3 Vcc+15AS GRY 3 3
5VDC -R 2 4 GND_A GRY 4 113Y1735
4
12VDC +R 3 Vcc+5AS CN2
12VDC -R 4
F7 F6 5
6 GND A
GRY
GRY
5
6 1 VCC_+5AS BLK 136Y8924
15VDC +R 5 7 LDONH GRY 7 2 VLD CE BLK
15VDC -R
24VDC +R
6 8 LDONL GRY 8 LDD23A 3 PDK BLK
CN1
7 9 LDOKH GRY 9 4 GND A BLK
24VDC -R 8 10 LDOKL GRY 10 5 GND_LD BLK 1
N.C
N.C
9 11 LD1FH GRY 11 6 LDK BLK 2 LDA23A
10 12 LD1FL GRY 12 7 LDA BLK 3
AUX 11 13 LDTMPH GRY 13 8 NC 113Y1739
AUX_GND 12 CN3 CN7 14 LDTMPL GRY 14
1 +24V RED 136Y102544 1 15 Vcc+5AS GRY 15
NC
4 GND RED 4 16 NC NC 16
2 +15V RED 2 17 GND_A GRY
5 AGND RED 5 18 NC
-15V YEL
3 RED 3 19 SSL
AGND CNZ31
6 RED 6 20 SSH GRY CN1
7
8
NC
NC
CNZ31-J CNZ31-P
1 1 GRY 1
Scanning Optics Unit
NC 2 2 NC NC 2
3 3 GRY 3 839Y0059
NC 4 4 NC NC 4
5 5 BRN 5
6 6 GRY 6
CNZ32
CN1 CNZ32-J CNZ32-P CN3 SYN23A CN2 CN1
1 NC 1 1 NC NC 1 1 Vcc_+24PS BLK 136Y8922 1
2 N.C NC 2 2 NC NC 2 2 GND_P BLK 2
3 PIDXL GRY 136Y9331 3 3 GRY 3 3 POKL BLK 3
4 GND P GRY 4 4 GRY 4 4 PONL BLK 4 POL23A
5 PONL GRY 5 5 GRY 5 5 GND_P BLK 5
6 POKL GRY 6 6 GRY 6 6 PIDXL BLK 6
7 GND P GRY 7 7 GRY 7 7 7
Vcc+24PS GRY N.C N.C
F4 8 8 8 GRY 8 8 8
CNZ51
CN2 CNZ51-J CNZ51-P SZ1
SED2L 136Y9331 1 136Y8918 SED2L
F3 1
2 SED1L
GRY
GRY 2
1
2
GRY
GRY SED1L
1
2 SED23A
3 VCC GRY 3 3 GRY VCC 3
4 DG GRY 4 4 GRY DG 4 113Y1738
CN10
CN2
CN1 CN1
1 +12V RED 136Y102545 1
2 GND RED 5
7 +5V RED 2
8 GND RED 6
9 +5VS RED 3
10 GND RED 7
11 POWERON RED 4
12 GND RED 8
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 NC CPU23B
MBRU2170005.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-229
MT-230
17.6 PNL23B, FANG1, FANG3, and BCRC1
PSU29B CPU23B
CNG51 CNC52 BCRC1
CN8 CNG51-P CNG51-J CNC52-J CNC52-P BCRC1-P BCRC1-J
1 CTS GRY 136Y102539 1 1 GRY 136Y9330 1 1 GRY 136Y8916 1 1 CTS
CN12 CN1 CN1 2 SG GRY 2 2 GRY 2 2 GRY 2 2 SG
5VDC +R +12V 136Y102545 VCC(+5) 3 VCC(+5)
F4
1 1 RED 1 3 GRY 3 3 GRY 3 3 GRY 3
5VDC -R 2 2 GND RED 5 4 TXD GRY 4 4 GRY 4 4 GRY 4 4 TXD
12VDC +R 3 7 +5V RED 2
F1 5 RTS GRY 5 5 GRY 5 5 GRY 5 5 RTS BCRC1
12VDC -R 4 8 GND RED 6 6 RXD GRY 6 6 GRY 6 6 GRY 6 6 RXD
15VDC +R +5VS 7 INZONE
15VDC -R
5
6
9
10 GND
RED
RED
3
7
F2 7
8 N.C N.C
7
8 8 NC
24VDC +R 7 11 POWERON RED 4
24VDC -R 8 12 GND RED 8
N.C 9 3 NC PNL-CN1
N.C CN5 PNL-CN1 PNL-CN1 CN1
10 4 NC
AUX 11 5 NC 1 POWONSW-N GRY 136Y102540 1 1 GRY 136Y102610 1
AUX_GND 12 6 NC 2 GND GRY 2 2 GRY 2
3 +5V GRY 3 3 GRY 3
4 +5VS GRY 4 4 GRY 4
5 GND GRY 5 5 GRY 5 PNL23B
+12V GRY
F3 6
7 GND
GRY
GRY
6
7
6
7 GRY
6
7
8 SDA GRY 8 8 GRY 8
9 SCL GRY 9 9 GRY 9
10 GND GRY 10 10 GRY 10
SND23B
FANG1
CN42 CN1 CN26 FANG-P FANG-J
+24V 136Y102542 +24V 136Y9332
1
GND
RED 1
F4 1 ORN 4 1 1
FANG1
4 RED 4 2 NC NC 3 2
NC 2
2 +24V RED 2 3 ALARM ORN 2 3 3
5 GND RED 5 4 GND ORN 1 4
119S0049
3 +5V RED 3
6 GND RED 6
CN22 FANG3-P FANG3-J
+24V 136Y102547
1 ORN 4 1 1 FANG3
2 GND ORN 3 2
NC 2
3 NC N.C 2 3 3
119S0049
4 NC 1 4
MBRU2170006.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-230
MT-231
17.7 Erasure Assembly
PSU29B ERS23A
CN11
INV26A
CN1 CN5 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB1
.
CN12
5VDC +R 1 CN12 CN2 CN6 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
5VDC -R 2 PSU-CN3 2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB3
.
12VDC +R 3 CN2 PSU-CN3-P PSU-CN3-J CN1
12VDC -R 4 1
+24V RED 136Y102543 1 1 ORN 136Y100431 1
15VDC +R 5 2
GND RED 4 4 ORN 4
F1 INV26A
15VDC -R 6 3
+24V RED 2 2 ORN 2 CN13
CN1 CN7 1 WHT LAMP_L
24VDC +R 7 4
GND RED 5 5 ORN 5 .
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB5
24VDC -R +5V ORN
8 RED
F2
.
5 3 3 3
N.C 9 6
GND RED 6 6 ORN 6
N.C 10 CN14 CN2 CN8 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
AUX 11 2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB7
.
AUX_GND 12
INV26A
CN15
CN1 CN9 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB9
.
CN16 CN2 CN10 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB11
.
INV26A
CN17
CN1 CN12 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB2
.
CN18 CN2 CN11 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB4
.
INV26A
CN19
CN1 CN3 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB6
.
CN20 CN2 CN4 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB8
.
INV26A
CN21
CN1 CN14 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB10
.
CN22 CN2 CN13 1 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB12
.
CN31 TSWB1 TSWB1
TSW_H 136Y100431 NC COM 1
F4 1
TSW_L
GRY
GRY
1 1 2
115Y0048
2 2 2
3 NC
TSWB1-P TSWB1-J
CN32
BLK
1
THB1
2 BLK
115Y0047
CN33 FANB1-P FANB1-J
+24V 136Y100431
F3 1
NC
ORN 4
3
1
2 FANB1
2 NC NC 1
3 ALARM ORN 2 3
NC 2
GND ORN 1 4 119S0049
4
MBRU2170007.ai
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-231
MT-232
18. Board Tests in MUTL Q2 Connector connected on the error-causing board snugly installed?
N
Restore
18.1 Analysis Flow Y
START Q3 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again.
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201. N
A
Y
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
{MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch} Replace the error-causing board or operation panel assembly.
If the ERS23A board is in error, replace the erasure assembly.
If the PNL board is in error, replace the operation panel assembly.
Turn ON the power of FCR-MB 201.
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
A {MC:11.4_LAN23A Board}
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
Q1 Board tested normal? {MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
{MT:18.2_Board Test} {MC:4.1_Operation Panel Assembly}
N
Q2
Y
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Return to the error code analysis flow or check flow.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-232
MT-233
18.2 Board Test 18.2.1 Testing All Boards
Locations to be checked for the board test are specified on each board. Carry out the board Check the CPU23A board, SCN board, SND23A board, SND23B board, ERS23A board, and
test and check those locations on the board, to ensure that the board is free from errors. PNL boards.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
l To check the all boards
{MT:18.2.1_Testing All Boards} 2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
l To check the CPU23B board
{MT:18.2.2_Testing the CPU23B Board}
l To check the SCN board
{MT:18.2.3_Testing the SCN Board}
l To check the SND23A board
{MT:18.2.4_Testing the SND23A Board}
l To check the SND23B board
{MT:18.2.5_Testing the SND23B Board}
l To check the ERS23A board
{MT:18.2.6_Testing the ERS23A Board}
l To check the PNL board (Operation Panel Assembly)
{MT:18.2.7_Testing the PNL Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-233
MT-234
3. Note the MUTL indication. l NO GOOD indication
The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code).
l GOOD indication
If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the
When the number of board tests is set to "1," the following diagnostic results appear in
error detected on the checked location. When an error is detected, the board test is
the MUTL window. The meanings of the displayed results are indicated below:
interrupted, pand the error code is displayed again as the result of the board check.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the “NO GOOD” indication is given, perform the troubleshooting procedures again in
accordance with the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-234
MT-235
18.2.2 Testing the CPU23B Board 3. Note the MUTL indication.
Check the CPU23A board. l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL. When the number of board tests is set to "1," the following diagnostic results appear in
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
the MUTL window.
2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
l NO GOOD indication
The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code).
If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the
error detected on the checked location. When an error is detected, the board test is
interrupted, pand the error code is displayed again as the result of the board check.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the “NO GOOD” indication is given, perform the troubleshooting procedures again in
accordance with the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-235
MT-236
18.2.3 Testing the SCN Board 3. Note the MUTL indication.
Check the SCN board. l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL. When the number of board tests is set to "1," the following diagnostic results appear in
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
the MUTL window.
2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
l NO GOOD indication
The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code).
If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the
error detected on the checked location. When an error is detected, the board test is
interrupted, pand the error code is displayed again as the result of the board check.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the “NO GOOD” indication is given, perform the troubleshooting procedures again in
accordance with the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-236
MT-237
18.2.4 Testing the SND23A Board 3. Note the MUTL indication.
Check the SND23A board. l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL. When the number of board tests is set to "1," the following diagnostic results appear in
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
the MUTL window.
2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
l NO GOOD indication
The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code).
If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the
error detected on the checked location. When an error is detected, the board test is
interrupted, pand the error code is displayed again as the result of the board check.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the “NO GOOD” indication is given, perform the troubleshooting procedures again in
accordance with the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-237
MT-238
18.2.5 Testing the SND23B Board 3. Note the MUTL indication.
Check the SND23B board. l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL. When the number of board tests is set to "1," the following diagnostic results appear in
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
the MUTL window.
2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
l NO GOOD indication
The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code).
If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the
error detected on the checked location. When an error is detected, the board test is
interrupted, pand the error code is displayed again as the result of the board check.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the “NO GOOD” indication is given, perform the troubleshooting procedures again in
accordance with the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-238
MT-239
18.2.6 Testing the ERS23A Board 3. Note the MUTL indication.
Check the ERS23A board. l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL. When the number of board tests is set to "1," the following diagnostic results appear in
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
the MUTL window.
2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
l NO GOOD indication
The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code).
If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the
error detected on the checked location. When an error is detected, the board test is
interrupted, pand the error code is displayed again as the result of the board check.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the “NO GOOD” indication is given, perform the troubleshooting procedures again in
accordance with the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-239
MT-240
18.2.7 Testing the PNL Board 3. Note the MUTL indication.
Check the PNL board (Operation Panel Assembly). l GOOD indication
1. Start the MUTL. When the number of board tests is set to "1," the following diagnostic results appear in
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
the MUTL window.
2. In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
l NO GOOD indication
The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code).
If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the
error detected on the checked location. When an error is detected, the board test is
interrupted, pand the error code is displayed again as the result of the board check.
u INSTRUCTION u
If the “NO GOOD” indication is given, perform the troubleshooting procedures again in
accordance with the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-240
MT-241
19. Collecting Various Data for l Using "BACKUP" of the RU PC-TOOL
Use "BACKUP" of the RU PC-TOOL to back up the "LOG ALL" and "CONFIGURATION"
Troubleshooting data.
The backed-up data is stored at a location that is specified with "BACKUP" of the RU PC-
When a trouble is encountered, back up the following two data on a storage media (USB TOOL.
memory stick or the like): For details on the procedure for collecting various data for troubleshooting by using
- LOG ALL "BACKUP" of the RU PC-TOOL, see "19.1 Collecting Various Data from the RU PC-TOOL."
- CONFIGURATION {MT:19.1_Collecting Various Data from the RU PC-TOOL}
REFERENCE
When you back up "LOG ALL," the following three data are backed up:
- ERROR LOG
- TRACE LOG
- HISTORY LOG l Using "DOWNLOAD" of the CLIENT PC-TOOL
Use "DOWNLOAD" of the CLIENT PC-TOOL to back up the "LOG ALL" and
Use either of the following two data collection methods: "CONFIGURATION" data.
- Using "BACKUP" of the RU PC-TOOL The backed-up data is stored on drive C of the client PC.
- Using "DOWNLOAD" of the CLIENT PC-TOOL To use the data stored in the client PC at an outside location, it is necessary to execute
"WRITE" after "DOWNLOAD" execution to save the data on an external storage media (USB
memory stick or the like).
For details on the procedure for collecting various data for troubleshooting by using
"DOWNLOAD" of the CLIENT PC-TOOL, see "19.2 Collecting Various Data from the CLIENT
PC-TOOL."
{MT:19.2_Collecting Various Data from the CLIENT PC-TOOL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-241
MT-242
19.1 Collecting Various Data from the RU PC-TOOL 19.2 Collecting Various Data from the CLIENT PC-TOOL
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL. 1. Connect the client PC to the network in the user's site, and then perform network
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} setup.
2. From the "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select the RU whose data is to be backed up. {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
Back up the "LOG ALL" and "CONFIGURATION" data. 2. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:6.28_Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
3. From the "Hospital List," select the RU whose data is to be downloaded.
Download the "LOG ALL" and "CONFIGURATION" data.
u NOTE u
When you back up the data on a storage media (USB memory stick or the like), set a
formatted storage media into the PC before selecting a backup location.
4. To use the data stored in the client PC at an outside location, execute "WRITE."
REFERENCE {MU:6.20_WRITE}
For details on the backup procedure, see "16. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure" in the
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
5. Exit the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MC:16._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure} {MU:6.28.3_Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
3. Exit the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-242
MT-243
20. Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code Q5 DIP switch on the CPU23B board properly set?
{MT:20.3_Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU23B Board}
Is Undetectable and Machine does not Boot N
Up Y
Restore
If the error code is not displayed and the machine does not boot up, perform the following
steps. Perform the procedures for restoring the RU application.
{MT:20.4_Procedures for Restoring the RU Application}
20.1 Analysis Flow for Bootup Failure
Q6 Mechanical initialization effected after RU startup?
START
N
Q8
Y
Q1 POWER lamp ( ) lit when FCR-MB 201 power is turned ON?
Q7 Operation panel indications normal?
N {MT:20.6_Checking the Operation Panel}
Check the connection and continuity of cables.
N
Y {MT:20.7_Check of Cable Connection and Continuity} Q9
Y
Q2 RU in one of the following states?
- The operation panel remains black and shows nothing. END
- Only the cassette IN and cassette OUT lamps illuminated.
- The LEDs on the CPU23B board are abnormal.
Q8 Error recurs when the CPU23B board is reseated?
{MT:20.2_Checking the LEDs on the CPU23B Board}
N
Y Q9
Q5 Y
N
Replace the CPU23B board.
Q3 Message “Now Loading...” repeatedly displayed on the operation panel? {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
N Q9 Operation panel cable properly connected?
Q9
Y N
Restore
Y
Q4 Connector connections between the boards normal?
{MT:20.5_Checking the Connector Connections} Q10 Error recurs?
N
Restore
Y N
Replace the parts in the order named.
Y 1. Operation Panel Assembly
Replace the boards in the order named.
{MC:4.1_Operation Panel Assembly}
1. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board} 2. CPU23B board
2. SCN board {MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
3. SND23B board END
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-243
MT-244
20.2 Checking the LEDs on the CPU23B Board l GOOD indication
A normal result is obtained when the illuminated LED position moves from left to right
The LEDs are mounted on the CPU23B board to indicate that the board is operating. and right to left.
If anything abnormal is found with the LED lighting status while the FCR-MB 201 is powered
ON, replace the CPU23B board.
n Checking the LED Display
1. Pull out the RU.
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU}
2. Remove the board box cover.
{MC:4.7_Board Box Cover}
3. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
4. Check the LEDs on the CPU23B board.
l NO GOOD indication
Other than above is all abnormal.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-244
MT-245
20.3 Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU23B Board
Verify that the DIP switch on the CPU23B board is set as indicated below.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-245
MT-246
20.4 Procedures for Restoring the RU Application 3. Turn ON DIP switch No. 8 on the CPU23B board.
u NOTE u
Once the procedures for restoring the RU application are performed, the machine shipment
control data of the RU is initialized. Check the IP addresses of the RU and CL beforehand,
and writhe them down on your notepad.
1. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. To prepare for RU application restoration, remove the following parts concerned.
Remove the parts by performing the procedures set forth in sections designated
in the "Reference" column.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
{MC:11.4} LAN23A Board
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-246
MT-247
4. Install the LAN23A board. 10. Click on [OK].
{MC:11.4.2_LAN23A Board}
5. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
The RU starts in the following state:
- The operation panel remains black and shows nothing.
- The power lamp glows green.
- The initialization operation is not performed.
11. Verify that the RU's IP address, which was selected in step 7, is displayed, and
6. Start the RU PC-TOOL. then click [OK].
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
7. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
8. Select "Initialize APL" from the "Operation (O)" menu.
u NOTE u
When you click [OK], the "Command Prompt" window appears on the CL to start an
application initialization process. If the CL does not change so that the application
initialization process does not progress, it is necessary to perform the application
initialization process by turning ON DIP switch No. 7 on the CPU23B board. For the
procedure to be performed, see "Appendix 1. Procedure for Restoring an Application
with DIP Switch No. 7 on the CPU23B Board."
{MT: Appendix 1._Procedure for Restoring an Application with DIP Switch No. 7
9. Set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit.
on the CPU23B Board}
REFERENCE
When you set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit, the
"Set Up PC-TOOL" window may open. If the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens, close it
by clicking [EXIT].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-247
MT-248
12. Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the [Enter] key. 17. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
REFERENCE REFERENCES
The initialization of the application takes about 3 minutes. - When you turn ON the RU, it starts in the maintenance mode about two minutes later.
- The [Return] button, which is at the lower left corner of the operation panel, is hidden.
13. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
14. Remove the LAN23A board.
{MC:11.4_LAN23A Board}
15. Restore the original setting for DIP switch No. 8 on the CPU23B board.
16. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:11.4.2} LAN23A Board
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-248
MT-249
18. Select "Reader Unit IP Address" from the RU's operation panel. 20. Select "FTP Sever IP Address" from the RU's operation panel.
For details on a menu item selection method, see "1.3 Method of Menu Selection in For details on a menu item selection method, see "1.3 Method of Menu Selection in
Respective Modes." Respective Modes."
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
19. Set the IP address. 21. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Initializing the application resets the RU’s IP address setting for the RU to the factory Initializing the application resets the FTP server’s IP address setting for the RU to the
default. Be sure to enter the RU’s IP address that is entered from the CL. factory default. Be sure to enter the CL’s IP address.
For details on an address setup method, see "1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the For details on an address setup method, see "1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the
Address." Address."
{MU:1.4.2_Procedures for Changing the Address} {MU:1.4.2_Procedures for Changing the Address}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-249
MT-250
22. Select "Network Check" from the RU's operation panel. 24. Select the RU to be deleted from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and click [DELETE].
For details on a menu item selection method, see "1.3 Method of Menu Selection in
Respective Modes."
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
23. Press the [Check] button.
u NOTE u
If you click [DELETE] without inserting the RU-APL CD into the CL, the following error
message appears. If the error message appears, insert the RU-APL CD into the CL
and then repeat steps 24 and beyond.
25. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{MT:14._Line Error between CL and RU} 26. Verify that the RU selected in step 24 is deleted from "LIST OF EXISTING RU."
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-250
MT-251
27. Click on [NEW]. 30. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
28. Enter Install "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR".
u NOTE u
Input the RU’s IP address specified in the procedure 19.
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.11: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l [NO GOOD indication]
Other than above is all abnormal. (The selected IP address of the RU is displayed.)
29. Click on [PING]. u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{MT:14._Line Error between CL and RU}
31. Click on [INSTALL].
REFERENCE
When clicking on [INSTALL], “Under maintenance” appears on the operation panel of
the RU.
32. Click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-251
MT-252
33. Select "INSTALL VERSION". 36. Select an operation panel screen type (SCREEN TYPE), and then click [OK].
u NOTE u
The proper selection varies with a network connection between the RU and
CL. Make a proper selection in accordance with the employed network connection.
If an improper selection is made, the connection between the RU and CL is not
guaranteed.
- When a "1:1 connection" is established between the RU and CL, choose "CLINIC."
- When an "N:N connection" is established between the RU and CL, choose "HOSPITAL."
34. Select "LANGUAGE".
REFERENCE
The following languages can be selected during the installation.
Japanese, English, Germany, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Danish,
Norwegian, Korean, ChineseSimplified, ChineseTraditional, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Hebrew, Russian, Turkish, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Thai, Indonesian
37. If a LINAC CASSETTE is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the LINAC
CASSETTE is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
35. Select "BRAND TYPE".
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-252
MT-253
38. Click on [SET]. 40. Confirm the installation precautions.
CAUTION
While the flash ROM is being written into, never turn OFF the FCR-MB 201. If you turn
OFF the power, the program stored in the memory becomes damaged and cannot
restart.
41. Click on [SET].
39. Set "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME". When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the CL display. While the
flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTE u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU.
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 27 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-253
MT-254
42. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter] 45. Shut down the CL.
key twice.
46. Verify that the RU's LED is extinguished, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-
MB 201.
REFERENCE
The message "Under maintenance" is displayed on the operation panel. However,
turning OFF the RU power does not affect the RU's functionality.
43. Click on [OK]. 47. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
u NOTE u
Unless the power of the FCR-MB 201 is turned OFF and back ON, the state only allows
you to perform INSTALL and VERSION UP.
44. Verify the RU software version.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 24 and perform install procedures
all over again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-254
MT-255
48. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data restore, and restore the 49. Close the SetUp PC-TOOL.
"CONFIGURATION", "HISTORY LOG", and "SCN ALL DATA" data.
u NOTE u
If the storage media (USB memory stick or the like) that stores the data to be restored is
not on hand, perform setup as directed below:
- CONFIGURATION: Restore from the machine specific data CD-R attached to the
machine.
- HISTORY LOG: Perform setup again from the RU PC-TOOL’s “EDIT HISTORY” as
much as possible.
- SCN ALL DATA: Restore from the machine specific data CD-R attached to the
machine.
50. Shut down the CL.
51. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
52. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
REFERENCE
For details on the restore procedure, see under “16.2 Restore Procedure” in the
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:16.2_Restore Procedure}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-255
MT-256
20.5 Checking the Connector Connections 20.6 Checking the Operation Panel
Conduct the following connection checks: Check that the RU goes into the following state upon mechanical initialization.
- Check that CPU23B board connector CN2 is tightly connected to SCN board connector
CN10. l GOOD
- Check that SND23B board connector CN81 is tightly connected to CPU23B board - The RU properly goes into the READY state.
connector CN7. For details on the operation panel screen that appears when the RU normally enters
- Check that SND23A board connector CN81 is tightly connected to CPU23B board the READY state, see "1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents" in the Machine
connector CN6. Description volume.
{MD:1.3.3_Operation Panel Display Screen Contents}
- No error occurs
l NO GOOD
- The operation panel remains black and shows nothing.
- Only the cassette IN and cassette OUT lamps illuminated.
- An error code is displayed.
u INSTRUCTION u
If an error code is displayed, perform a troubleshooting procedure again in accordance with
the error code.
{MT:2._Error Code Table}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-256
MT-257
20.7 Check of Cable Connection and Continuity Q2 Cable connected to CN5 on the CPU23B board?
{MT:20.7.2_Checking Connection of the CPU23B Board
Connector}
n Phenomenon N
Restore
Y
If the POWER lamp ( ) does not light up, the remote ON switch cannot be turned ON. If
Q3 Check for the continuity of the power supply cable between the operation panel and the
the remote ON switch cannot be turned ON, the secondary output of the power supply board CPU23B board.
cannot be output, resulting in the failure of the machine to boot up. {MT:20.7.3_Checking for Continuity of the Cables 1}
n Action Q4 Check for the continuity of the power supply cable between the power supply board and
the CPU23B board.
Follow the procedures below if the POWER lamp ( ) does not light up with the FCR-MB {MT:20.7.4_Checking for Continuity of the Cables 2}
201 power tuned ON. Q5 Error recurs?
20.7.1 Check Flow N
END
START Y
Replace the parts in the order named.
Turn OFF the Power of FCR-MB 201. 1. CPU23B board
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board. 2. Operation panel assembly
{MT:1.5_Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch} {MC:4.1_Operation Panel Assembly}
3. Power supply board
Q1 Power supply board (PSU29B) TP1 is conducted when the FCR-MB 201 power is turned ON? {MC:11.7_PSU29B Board}
{MT:8.3_Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply Board
(PSU29B) Test Pins (TP1)}
Y
Q2
N
Turn OFF the power of FCR-MB 201.
Replace the power supply board.
{MC:11.7_PSU29B Board}
Turn ON the high-voltage switch (HV) of the SCN board.
Secure RU to FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1.2_Pulling Out the RU}
Return to the analysis flow for bootup failure.
{MT:20.1_Analysis Flow for Bootup Failure}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-257
MT-258
20.7.2 Checking Connection of the CPU23B Board Connector 20.7.3 Checking for Continuity of the Cables 1
Check to ensure that the connector is snugly connected to CN5 on the CPU23B board. Check the cable between operation panel connector CN1 and CPU23B board connector CN5
for continuity. Replace the cable if its continuity cannot be verified.
1. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2 Ω or greater
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2 Ω or greater
3. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1 Ω or less
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-258
MT-259
20.7.4 Checking for Continuity of the Cables 2
Check the cable between power supply board CN1 connector pin 11 and CPU23B board
CN1 connector pin 4 for continuity. Replace the cable if its continuity cannot be verified.
1. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2 Ω or greater
2. Check for shorts between each of the pins → 2 Ω or greater
3. Check for continuity of each of the pins → 1 Ω or less
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-259
MT-260
21. Checking the Status of Each Parts 21.2 Checking the Connector on the Scanning Optics Unit
Check to ensure that the connectors (CN1, CNZ31 and CNZ32) connected to the scanning
optics unit are snugly connected.
21.1 Checking the Connector on the SCN Board
Check to ensure that there is no wobbling on the connector connected to the SCN board for
transferring image data.
u NOTE u
Do not apply excessive force to the connector to check its wobble. The connector region
might get damaged.
Repair a disconnected connector if any.
Replace the SCN board if the connector region wobbles.
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts Volume, “11.3 SCN Board” for
details of the replacement procedures of the SCN board.
{MC:11.3_SCN Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-260
MT-261
21.3 Checking the Connector on the PMT Board 21.4 Checking the Board-to-Board Connectors
Check to ensure that there is no wobbling on the connector connected to the PMT board for Check that CPU23B board connector CN2 and SCN board connector CN10 are connected
transferring image data. without a gap.
u NOTE u
Do not apply excessive force to the connector to check its wobble. The connector region
might get damaged.
Replace the PMT board if the connector region wobbles.
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts Volume, “8.2 PMT Board” for
details of the replacement procedures of the PMT board.
{MC:8.2_PMT Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-261
MT-262
21.5 Checking the Parts for the End of Their Life 21.5.1 Air Filter
If an error code (11901, 11902, 11904 to 11906) indicating the end of parts life is displayed, 1. Start [EDIT HISTORY].
note the HISTORY LOG and replace a part that has reached the end of its useful life. {MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
11901: End of an air filter's life
2. Check whether the part has reached the end of its useful life.
11902: End of a brush roller's life
11904: End of an erasure lamp filter's life
11905: End of an IP suction pump's life
11906: End of a laser's life
3. Replace the air filter.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
21.5.2 Brush Roller
1. Start [EDIT HISTORY].
{MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
2. Check whether the part has reached the end of its useful life.
3. Replace the brush roller.
{MC:6.8_Brush Roller}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-262
MT-263
21.5.3 Lamp Filter 21.5.5 Laser
1. Start [EDIT HISTORY]. 1. Start [EDIT HISTORY].
{MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY} {MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
2. Check whether the part has reached the end of its useful life. 2. Check whether the part has reached the end of its useful life.
3. Replace the lamp filter. 3. Replace the scanning optics unit.
{MC:6.9_Filter} {MC:9._Scanning Optics Unit}
21.5.4 IP Suction Pump
1. Start [EDIT HISTORY].
{MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
2. Check whether the part has reached the end of its useful life.
3. Replace the IP suction pump.
{MC:6.9_Filter}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-263
MT-264
21.7 Checking the INV Board Mounting Position 21.8 Checking the Erasure Lamp Assembly for the End of Its
Life
Check the mounting position of the INV board, which is on the ERS23A board. If the INV
board is improperly positioned, mount it in its correct position. If an error code (11702-11704) indicating the end of life is displayed, view the HISTORY LOG
1. Remove the erasure unit. to confirm the cumulative illumination time of the part, and then replace the part.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit} 1. Start [EDIT HISTORY].
2. Remove the cover bracket. {MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
{MC:6.6_Cover Bracket} 2. Check whether the part has reached the end of its useful life.
3. Check whether the INV board is properly positioned. If it is improperly positioned,
mount it in its correct position.
u NOTE u
For the correct mounting position of the INV board, which is on the ERS23A board, see
"3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and Board Configurations" in the Machine Description volume.
{MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and Board Configurations}
4. Reinstall the cover bracket.
{MC:6.6.2_Cover Bracket}
5. Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Erasure Unit}
3. Replace the erasure assembly.
6. After completion of machine reassembly, turn ON the RU to check for an error.
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
4. Reset the erasure lamp cumulative illumination time, and total count for the IP
erasing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-264
MT-265
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-265
MT-266
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-266
MT-267
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MT-267
Appx_MT-1
Appendix 1. Procedure for Restoring an CAUTION
Check that the RU whose IP address is set to “172.16.1.10” is not connected on the
Application with DIP Switch No. 7 on network, before following the procedures below. If any connected, isolate the RU from
the CPU23B Board the network by disconnecting the network cable or the like.
Otherwise, the application will not be able to be restored normally.
u NOTES u 1. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
- Restore the application according to the procedures shown in this section only when
initialization of the application is not normally completed after it was tried in “20.4
2. To prepare for RU application restoration, remove the following parts concerned.
Remove the parts by performing the procedures set forth in sections designated
Procedures for Restoring the RU Application”.
in the "Reference" column.
- Be sure to set the CL’s IP to “172.16.1.20” before initializing the application. Restore the IP
address to the user specified value after the initialization. Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
Turn ON the DIP SW-No.7 of the CPU23B board to boot up the RU. The machine is forced to
boot up with the RU IP address and the FTP server IP address as the factory default values. {MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
RU IP address: 172.16.1.10
{MC:11.4} LAN23A Board
FTP server IP address: 172.16.1.20
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-1
Appx_MT-2
3. Set No. 7 of the DIP SW of the CPU23B board to ON. 4. Install the LAN23A board.
{MC:11.4.2_LAN23A Board}
5. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
The RU starts in the following state:
- The touch panel does not display anything and remains blank.
- The power lamp glows green.
- The initialization operation is not performed.
6. Check the CL’s IP address and record it.
u NOTE u
The CL’s IP address must be restored to the user specified value after the RU
application is initialized. Be sure to confirm the CL’s IP address (user specified value)
and record it.
7. Change the CL’s IP address to “172.16.1.20”.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-2
Appx_MT-3
8. Start the RU PC-TOOL. 12. Click on [OK].
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
9. Click [NEW]. Enter an arbitrary name in the "RU NAME" field and enter
"172.16.1.10" in the "RU IP ADDR" field.
u NOTE u
Always input “172.16.1.10” in RU IP ADDR.
13. Check to ensure that the RU IP address input in the step 9 (172.16.1.10) is
displayed, and click on [OK].
10. Select "Initialize APL" from the "Operation (O)" menu.
14. Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the [Enter] key.
REFERENCE
The initialization of the application takes about 3 minutes.
11. Set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit.
REFERENCE
When you set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit, the
"Set Up PC-TOOL" window may open. If the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens, close it
by clicking [EXIT].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-3
Appx_MT-4
15. Shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201. 20. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
16. Remove the LAN23A board. REFERENCES
{MC:11.4_LAN23A Board} - When you turn ON the FCR-MB 201, it starts in the maintenance mode about two
17. Restore No. 7 of the DIP SW of the CPU23B board to its original setting. minutes later.
18. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:11.4.2} LAN23A Board
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
19. Restore the CL’s IP address to the value registered in step 5 (the user specified
value).
- The [Return] button, which is at the lower left corner of the operation panel, is hidden.
21. Select "Reader Unit IP Address" from the RU's operation panel.
For details on a menu item selection method, see "1.3 Method of Menu Selection in
Respective Modes."
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-4
Appx_MT-5
22. Set the IP address. 24. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Initializing the application resets the RU’s IP address setting for the RU to the factory Initializing the application resets the FTP server’s IP address setting for the RU to the
default. Be sure to enter the RU’s IP address that is entered from the CL. factory default. Be sure to enter the CL’s IP address.
For details on an address setup method, see "1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the For details on an address setup method, see "1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the
Address." Address."
{MU:1.4.2_Procedures for Changing the Address} {MU:1.4.2_Procedures for Changing the Address}
23. Select "FTP Sever IP Address" from the RU's operation panel. 25. Select "Network Check" from the RU's operation panel.
For details on a menu item selection method, see "1.3 Method of Menu Selection in For details on a menu item selection method, see "1.3 Method of Menu Selection in
Respective Modes." Respective Modes."
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes} {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-5
Appx_MT-6
26. Press the [Check] button. 27. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and click on
[DELETE].
u NOTE u
If you click [DELETE] without inserting the RU-APL CD into the CL, the following error
message appears. If the error message appears, insert the RU-APL CD into the CL
u NOTE u and then repeat steps 27 and beyond.
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{MT:14._Line Error between CL and RU}
28. Click on [OK].
29. Verify that the RU selected in step 27 is deleted from "LIST OF EXISTING RU."
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-6
Appx_MT-7
30. Click on [NEW]. 33. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
31. Enter Install "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR".
u NOTE u
Input the RU’s IP address specified in the procedure 22.
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.11: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l [NO GOOD indication]
Other than above is all abnormal. (The selected IP address of the RU is displayed.)
32. Click on [PING]. u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{MT:14._Line Error between CL and RU}
34. Click on [INSTALL].
REFERENCE
When clicking on [INSTALL], “Under maintenance” appears on the operation panel of
the RU.
35. Click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-7
Appx_MT-8
36. Select "INSTALL VERSION". 39. Select an operation panel screen type (SCREEN TYPE), and then click [OK].
u NOTE u
The proper selection varies with a network connection between the RU and CL. Make
a proper selection in accordance with the employed network connection. If an improper
selection is made, the connection between the RU and CL is not guaranteed.
- When a "1:1 connection" is established between the RU and CL, choose "CLINIC."
- When an "N:N connection" is established between the RU and CL, choose "HOSPITAL."
37. Select "LANGUAGE".
REFERENCE
The following languages can be selected during the installation.
Japanese, English, Germany, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Danish,
Norwegian, Korean, ChineseSimplified, ChineseTraditional, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Hebrew, Russian, Turkish, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Thai, Indonesian
40. If a LINAC CASSETTE is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the LINAC
CASSETTE is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
38. Select "BRAND TYPE".
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-8
Appx_MT-9
41. Click on [SET]. 43. Confirm the installation precautions.
CAUTION
While the flash ROM is being written into, never turn OFF the RU or CL. If you turn
OFF the power, the program stored in the memory becomes damaged and cannot
restart.
44. Click on [SET].
42. Set "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME". When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the CL display. While the
flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u INSTRUCTION u
u NOTE u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU.
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 27 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-9
Appx_MT-10
45. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter] 48. Verify that the RU's LED is extinguished, shut down the CL, and then turn OFF the
key twice. power of the FCR-MB 201.
REFERENCE
The message "Under maintenance" is displayed on the operation panel. However,
turning OFF the FCR-MB 201 power does not affect the RU's functionality.
49. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
46. Click on [OK]. u NOTE u
Unless the power of the FCR-MB 201 is turned OFF and back ON, the state only allows
you to perform INSTALL and VERSION UP.
47. Verify the RU software version.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 27 and perform install procedures
all over again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-10
Appx_MT-11
50. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data restore, and restore the 51. Close the SetUp PC-TOOL.
"CONFIGURATION", "HISTORY LOG", and "SCN ALL DATA" data.
u NOTE u
If the storage media (USB memory stick or the like) that stores the data to be restored is
not on hand, perform setup as directed below:
- CONFIGURATION: Restore from the machine specific data CD-R attached to the
machine.
- HISTORY LOG: Perform setup again from the RU PC-TOOL’s “EDIT HISTORY” as
much as possible.
- SCN ALL DATA: Restore from the machine specific data CD-R attached to the
machine.
52. Shut down the CL.
53. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again..
54. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
REFERENCE
For details on the restore procedure, see under “16.2 Restore Procedure” in the
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:16.2_Restore Procedure}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-11
Appx_MT-12
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MT-12
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of
Parts (MC)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
MC-1
1. Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each u INSTRUCTION u
The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled.
Unit When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures.
1.1 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment 1.2 Types of Screws
- In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require
special attention or adjustment during their removal/reinstallation. For removal The DT screw and the TP screw employed in the machine are of similar shape and color.
procedures for such components, refer to the Parts List Volume. Check the screw type referring to the figures below when attaching a screw.
- When performing check/replacement/adjustment procedures on the machine, the
DT screw TP screw
following precautions should be observed.
Has four dots on the head Has no dot on the head
WARNING
To avoid electric shock hazards, power OFF the machine before performing the
procedures.
WARNING/CAUTION
1.3 Checking the Protective Grounding
Observe the warnings and cautions described in the "Safety Precautions".
u INSTRUCTION u
CAUTIONS Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
- When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
- Do not remove the cover of the scanning optics unit. to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
- Never remove the red-painted screws. that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
u INSTRUCTION u
Some of the illustrations in this volume contain check/adjustment and half-punch indicators 1.4 Handling Parts Containing Hazardous Substance
as needed.
For removal and reinstallation, perform the procedures as instructed by such indicators. When handling parts containing a hazardous substance, such as the operation panel,
the photomultiplier and the erasure lamp, fully exercise care in handling. The hazardous
- Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the
substance may leak from the inside of a broken part.
installation location when the part or component removed
is to be reinstalled. This indicator is placed in the illustration
that depicts the procedures for removing the parts and 1.5 Checking the High-Voltage Switch and Image
components. When you see this indicator, refer to its relevant
When you install the RU after a check, replacement, or adjustment, make sure that the high-
"n Check/ Adjustment Procedures.”
voltage switch is ON. After the machine is restored to normal, run an image read check to
- Half-punch indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to align the half-punches when
verify that a read image is normal.
installing the parts or components. However, it is not indicated
for the half-punches for improving ease of assembly or
preventing erroneous assembly procedures.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
2. Table of Contents 5.20
5.21
Cassette Hold Release Arm
Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
MC-84
MC-86
5.22 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly MC-89
3. Pulling Out the RU / Cover 3. Pulling Out the RU / Cover MC-6 5.23 Cassette Insertion Error Sensor (SA14) MC-91
3.1 Pulling Out the RU MC-6 5.24 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) MC-92
3.2 Front Cover Plate MC-7 5.25 Cable Junction Bracket (C) MC-96
3.3 Rear Cover Plate MC-7 5.26 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving
3.4 Left-Hand Cover Plate MC-8 Motor (MA2) MC-100
5.27 IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism
(Opposite Reference Side Gear) MC-101
5.28 IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism
(Reference Side Gear) MC-104
5.29 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) MC-106
5.30 Cable Junction Bracket (D) MC-108
5.31 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving
Shaft MC-110
4. Housing Unit 4. Housing Unit MC-9 5.32 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly MC-115
4.1 Operation Panel Assembly MC-9 5.33 Cassette Cover Closing Roller MC-118
4.2 Fan Assembly MC-11 5.34 Hose MC-126
4.3 Fan (FANG1) MC-12 5.35 Hose Joints MC-129
4.4 Fan (FANG3) MC-15 5.36 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) MC-130
4.5 Antistatic Member MC-17 5.37 IP Suction Pump (PA1) MC-133
4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) MC-18 5.38 IP Suction Sensor (SA5) MC-136
4.7 Board Box Cover MC-21 5.39 IP Dropping Sensor Assembly MC-138
5.40 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4, Light Emitting Side) MC-140
5.41 IP Dropping Sensor
(SA4, Light Receiving Side) MC-141
5.42 Guide (Right-Hand) MC-143
5. Cassette Set Unit 5. Cassette Set Unit MC-24 5.43 Guide (Left-Hand) MC-147
5.1 Cassette Set Unit MC-24 5.44 Suction Cup Assembly (Right-Hand) MC-150
5.2 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly MC-32 5.45 Suction Cup (Right-Hand) MC-153
5.3 Opening/Closing the Board Box MC-37 5.46 Suction Cup (Left-Hand) MC-155
5.4 Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side) MC-41 5.47 Suction Cup (Left-Hand) MC-160
5.5 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving 5.48 IP Transport Motor (MA4) MC-162
Motor (MA1) MC-43 5.49 Cable Junction Bracket (E) MC-165
5.6 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) MC-45 5.50 Rubber Roller Driving Gear MC-166
5.7 Cable Junction Bracket (A) MC-48 5.51 Spring and Wire (Reference Side) MC-168
5.8 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Sensor (SA3) MC-52 5.52 Rubber Roller Protection Bracket MC-170
5.9 Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side) MC-53 5.53 Rubber Rollers (A) and (B) MC-172
5.10 Spur Gear (Reference Side) MC-55 5.54 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1) MC-185
5.11 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly MC-59 5.55 Actuator Assembly MC-186
5.12 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft MC-65 5.56 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6) MC-188
5.13 Cable Junction Bracket (B) MC-71 5.57 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP
5.14 Antistatic Member MC-73 Sensor (SA7) MC-190
5.15 Shutter Assembly MC-74 5.58 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) MC-192
5.16 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) MC-78 5.59 Solenoid Assembly MC-194
5.17 Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side) MC-80 5.60 Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor
5.18 Bearing Retaining Bracket (SA2) MC-198
(Opposite Reference Side) MC-81 5.61 Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15) MC-200
5.19 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving 5.62 Movable Guide Driving Assembly MC-202
Gear MC-82 5.63 Movable Guide Assembly MC-207
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-2
MC-3
5.64 "15x30 Cassette" Movable Guide Assembly MC-210 7. Side-Positioning Conveyor 7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit MC-293
5.65 IP Removal Arm MC-212 Unit 7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit MC-293
5.66 Removal Link Shaft MC-217 7.2 Sensor Assembly MC-300
5.67 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly MC-219 7.3 Side-Positioning Grip HP Sensor (SC1) and
Side-Positioning Grip Release Position
5.68 Antistatic Member Assembly MC-225
Sensor (SC2) MC-302
5.69 Guide Plate (Reference Side) MC-226 7.4 Timing Belt MC-303
5.70 Guide Plate (Opposite Reference Side) MC-228 7.5 Tensioner Assembly MC-305
5.71 Guide Plate (Inch/Metric) MC-230 7.6 Guide (A) MC-306
5.72 Stopper (Reference Side) MC-231 7.7 Guide (B) MC-307
5.73 Stopper (Opposite Reference Side) MC-232 7.8 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly MC-308
5.74 Stopper (Inch/Metric) MC-233 7.9 Leaf Spring (Reference Side) MC-309
5.75 Cassette Cover Opening Pin (Inch/Metric) MC-234 7.10 Leaf Spring (Opposite Reference Side) MC-310
5.76 Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16) MC-237 7.11 Planetary Gear Assembly MC-311
7.12 Spur Gear (Reference Side) MC-312
5.77 Inch/Metric Sensor Actuator MC-239 7.13 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) MC-313
5.78 Cable Junction Bracket (E) MC-243 7.14 Grip Arm (Reference Side) MC-314
6. Erasure Unit 6. Erasure Unit MC-244 7.15 Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side) MC-318
6.1 Erasure Unit MC-244 7.16 Grip Shaft MC-320
7.17 IP Sensor (SC3) MC-323
6.2 Fan (FANB1) MC-248
7.18 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor
6.3 Duct (Air-Intake Side) MC-250 (SC9) MC-324
6.4 Duct (Exhaust Side) MC-251 7.19 Reference Block Assembly MC-326
6.5 Reflection Plate MC-252 7.20 Cable Junction Bracket MC-331
6.6 Cover Bracket MC-255 7.21 Side-Positioning Conveyor Roller Grip
6.7 Brush Roller Assembly MC-256 Release Motor (MC2) MC-333
6.8 Brush Roller MC-259 7.22 Side-Positioning Reference Block HP
6.9 Filter MC-263 Sensor (SC7) MC-337
7.23 Side-Positioning Latch Stroke Sensor (SC10) MC-339
6.10 Spur Gear MC-267
7.24 Claw Driving Unit MC-341
6.11 Thermal Switch (TSWB1) MC-268 7.25 Reference Block Driving Mechanism MC-349
6.12 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1) MC-271 7.26 Side-Positioning Reference Block Driving
6.13 Erasure Assembly MC-275 Motor (MC4) MC-353
6.14 INV Board (A) MC-276 7.27 Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit) MC-356
6.15 INV Board (B) MC-279 7.28 Arm MC-357
6.16 ERS23A Board MC-282 7.29 Shaft Driving Assembly MC-360
6.17 Lamp Assembly MC-284 7.30 Housing MC-363
7.31 Side-Positioning HP Sensor (SC6) MC-365
7.32 Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8) MC-367
7.33 Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly MC-369
7.34 Shaft Assemblies MC-372
7.35 Shafts and Claws MC-376
7.36 Side-Positioning Latch Mechanism Driving
Motor (MC3) MC-379
7.37 Half Clutch Assembly MC-381
7.38 Barcode Reader (BCRC1) MC-387
7.39 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1) MC-389
7.40 Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs MC-391
7.41 Rubber Roller (A) MC-394
7.42 Rubber Roller (B) MC-399
7.43 Rubber Roller (C) MC-404
7.44 Rubber Roller (D) MC-409
7.45 Rubber Roller (E) MC-415
7.46 Rubber Roller (F) MC-420
7.47 Guide (C) MC-426
7.48 Guide (D) MC-429
7.49 Reinforcement Bracket MC-434
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-3
MC-4
8. Light-Collecting Unit 8. Light-Collecting Unit MC-436 10. Subscanning Unit 10. Subscanning Unit MC-465
8.1 Light-Collecting Guide MC-436 10.1 Subscanning Unit MC-465
8.2 PMT Board MC-446 10.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly MC-475
8.3 Shield Member MC-454 10.3 Rubber Belt MC-478
10.4 Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving
Shaft Side) MC-481
10.5 Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven
Shaft Side) MC-482
10.6 Kapton® Belt MC-483
10.7 Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) MC-486
10.8 Tensioner Assembly MC-487
10.9 FFM Motor (MZ1) MC-488
10.10 Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side) MC-495
9. Scanning Optics Unit 9. Scanning Optics Unit MC-456 10.11 Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side) MC-496
10.12 Driving Shaft Grip Bracket
(Opposite Reference Side) MC-497
10.13 Driven Shaft Grip Bracket
(Opposite Reference Side) MC-498
10.14 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-499
10.15 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) MC-503
10.16 Guide (A) MC-507
10.17 Guide (B) MC-511
10.18 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) MC-515
10.19 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) MC-520
10.20 Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear MC-525
10.21 Light-Collecting Mirror Assembly MC-528
10.22 Light-Collecting Mirror MC-534
10.23 Antistatic Member MC-535
10.24 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) MC-536
10.25 Center Roller MC-538
10.26 Motor Assembly MC-542
10.27 Driven-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor
(SZ2) MC-549
10.28 Driving-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor
(SZ3), Driven/Driving Grip Roller Driving
Motor (MZ2) MC-551
10.29 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ5),
Dust Removal Motor (MZ3) MC-555
10.30 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm MC-558
10.31 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm MC-562
10.32 Antistatic Member MC-565
10.33 Vibration-Proof Rubber Assembly MC-566
10.34 Toothed Washer (Driving Shaft) MC-569
10.35 Toothed Washer (Driven Shaft) MC-572
10.36 Auxiliary Bracket MC-575
10.37 Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket MC-576
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-4
MC-5
11. PC Boards 11. PC Boards MC-577 19. Installing the Software 19. Installing the Software MC-658
11.1 Board Assembly MC-577 19.1 Installing the RU Software MC-658
11.2 CPU23B Board MC-582 19.2 Installing the RU PC-TOOL MC-658
11.2.1 Replacement Procedures MC-582 19.3 Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL MC-658
11.2.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance 20. List of Jigs and Tools 20. List of Jigs and Tools MC-659
Utility of the RU MC-582
20.1 Jigs and Tools MC-659
11.2.3 Machine Data Backup MC-584
11.2.4 Replacing the CPU23B Board MC-585 Appendix 1. Parts Removal/ Appendix 1. Parts Removal/Installation Appx_MC-1
11.2.5 Setting the IP Address of the RU MC-588 Installation 1. Sensor (5 mm type) Appx_MC-2
11.2.6 Updating the RU Software Version MC-592
11.2.7 Restoring the Machine Data MC-596
11.3 SCN Board MC-597
11.4 LAN23A Board MC-599
11.5 SND23A Board MC-602
11.6 SND23B Board MC-609
11.7 PSU29B Board MC-615
12. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse 12. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations MC-617
Locations 12.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement
Procedures MC-617
12.1.1 Fuse Classification MC-617
12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures MC-617
12.2 SND23A Board Fuses MC-618
12.3 SND23B Board Fuses MC-620
12.4 SCN Board Fuses MC-622
12.5 CPU23B Board Fuses MC-623
12.6 ERS23A Board Fuses MC-624
13. Updating the Software 13. Updating the Software MC-625
13.1 Updating the Software from the CL MC-625
13.2 Updating the Software from the Client PC MC-631
14. Format Adjustment 14. Format Adjustment MC-638
14.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment MC-638
14.1.1 Main Scan Length Adjustment MC-638
14.1.2 Main Scan Position Adjustment MC-640
15. Shading/Sensitivity 15. Shading/Sensitivity Correction MC-642
Correction 15.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction MC-642
15.2 Shading Speed Correction MC-644
15.3 Sensitivity Correction MC-646
16. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure 16. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure MC-648
16.1 Backup Procedure MC-648
16.2 Restore Procedure MC-650
16.3 Backing Up the Scanner Data MC-652
17. Image/Conveyance Checks 17. Image/Conveyance Checks MC-653
17.1 Check Before Procedures MC-653
17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks MC-653
17.3 Detailed Description of the Image Output
Procedure MC-655
18. Confirming the S Value 18. Confirming the S Value MC-656
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-5
MC-6
3. Pulling Out the RU / Cover
3.1 Pulling Out the RU
{SP:INDEX}
3.1.1 Removal Procedures 3.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201. Refer to FCR-MB 201 Service Manual for detailed 1. Secure RU to FCR-MB 201. Refer to FCR-MB 201 Service Manual for detailed
procedures. procedures.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual} {FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-6
MC-7
3.2 Front Cover Plate 3.3 Rear Cover Plate
{SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}
3.2.1 Removal Procedures 3.3.1 Removal Procedures
1. Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201. 1. Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201.
{MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU} {MC:3.1_Pulling Out the RU}
2. Remove the board box cover.
2. Remove the screws to remove
the rear cover plate.
{MC:4.7_Board Box Cover}
3. Disconnect the connectors of the board box cover. Refer to the procedures 3 to 6
of "11.1 Board Assembly" for detailed procedures.
{MC:11.1_Board Assembly}
4. Remove the screws to remove
the front cover plate.
3.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-7
MC-8
3.4 Left-Hand Cover Plate
{SP:INDEX}
3.4.1 Removal Procedures
u NOTE u
Remove the Left-hand cover plate before pulling out RU from FCR-MB 201.
1. Remove the FCR-MB 201 covers.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
2. Remove the screws to remove
the left-hand cover plate.
3.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-8
MC-9
4. Housing Unit 4.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures
4.1 Operation Panel Assembly
{SP:INDEX}
4.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the FCR-MB 201 covers.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the operation panel
assembly , and disconnect the
connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-9
MC-10
4.1.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures
After operation panel replacement, delete the RU that is registered in the RU PC-TOOL's
"LIST OF EXISTING RU," and then perform the installation procedure.
u NOTE u
When the operation panel is supplied as a service part, its display language and display
screen are not defined. The display language and display screen for the operation panel can
only be defined during the RU software installation process. Therefore, when the operation
panel is replaced with a new one, be sure to reinstall the RU software.
1. Start the RU in the maintenance mode.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility}
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," delete the RU for which the operation panel has
been replaced.
u NOTE u
Before deleting the RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU," note down the RU's IP address.
{IN: Appendix 3-1_Deleting an Installed RU}
3. Install the RU software.
u NOTE u
As regards the "Operation Panel Language Display (LANGUAGE)" and "Screen Display
(BRAND TYPE)," which are to be specified during the installation process, select the
same settings as those for the previously used operation panel.
{IN: Appendix 4-3_Installing the RU Software}
4. Shut down the CL.
5. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power and then turn it ON.
6. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-10
MC-11
4.2 Fan Assembly 4. Remove the screws to remove
the fan assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
4.2.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the FCR-MB 201 covers.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
2. Take the procedures 3 to 4 from 4.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-11
MC-12
4.3 Fan (FANG1) 4. Remove the screws to remove
the fan assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
4.3.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Disconnect the connector.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Disconnect the connector. 6. Remove the screws, and pull
out the fan (FANG1) from the
bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-12
MC-13
4.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Connect the connector.
1. Verify the mount orientation 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
by the arrow mark of the fan from the direction indicated by
(FANG1) and the orientation of the arrow in the figure.
the cable, then insert the fan
into the bracket, and retain with
the screws.
u NOTE u
Do not mount the fan (FANG1) in
a wrong orientation.
4. Reinstall the fan assembly, and
reinstall the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-13
MC-14
5. Connect the connector.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.2.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-14
MC-15
4.4 Fan (FANG3) 4.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
4.4.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:4.2} Fan Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Unclamp the clamp, and 1. Verify the mount orientation
disconnect the connector. by the arrow mark of the fan
(FANG3) and the orientation of
the cable, and then retain the
fan with the screws.
u NOTE u
Do not mount the fan (FANG3) in
a wrong orientation.
3. Remove the screws to remove 2. Retain the cable with the clamp,
the fan (FANG3). and connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-15
MC-16
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:4.2.2} Fan Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-16
MC-17
4.5 Antistatic Member 4. Remove the screws to remove
the antistatic member.
{SP:INDEX}
4.5.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from 5. Remove the guide plate.
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the screws to remove 4.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the antistatic member.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-17
MC-18
4.6 IP Sensor (SG1) 3. Remove the retaining screw
of the sensor assembly, and
{SP:INDEX} slightly pull out the assembly.
4.6.1 Removal Procedures u NOTE u
The sensor assembly has the
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
cable attached. Exercise care not
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
to damage the cable when pulling
parts.
out the sensor assembly.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:10.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:8.1} Light-Collecting Guide
{MC:9.} Scanning Optics Unit
4. Unclamp the clamp.
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from 5. Disconnect the connector, and
the direction indicated by the remove the sensor assembly.
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-18
MC-19
6. Remove the screws to remove 4.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the sensor (SG1).
1. Reinstall the sensor (SG1), and
reinstall the screws.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-19
MC-20
3. Connect the connector to the 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
sensor assembly. procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
{MC:9.2} Scanning Optics Unit
{MC:8.1.2} Light-Collecting Guide
{MC:10.2.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Retain the cable with the clamp.
5. Check to make sure that the
half punches are correctly fitted
with the sensor assembly, and
then reinstall the screw.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the
half punches are correctly fitted
with the sensor assembly before
reinstalling the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-20
MC-21
4.7 Board Box Cover 4. Unclamp the clamps.
{SP:INDEX}
4.7.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:4.2} Fan Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 2 to 6 5. Unclamp the clamps.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the screws to remove 6. Loosen the top and bottom
the bracket. screws, and remove the middle
screw.
u NOTE u
Just loosen the top and bottom
screws, but do not remove them.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-21
MC-22
7. Slightly raise the bracket and 10. Unclamp the clamps.
remove it.
8. Take the procedures from 9 to 11. Remove the screws to remove
11 from the direction indicated the bracket.
by the arrow in the figure.
u NOTE u
Remove the bracket straight in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Otherwise, the connector and the
bracket might come into contact,
and the connector get damaged.
9. Remove the screws to remove
the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-22
MC-23
12. Remove the screw, and remove 4.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the board box cover.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
u NOTE u
When reinstall the bracket be careful not to damage cables with the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-23
MC-24
5. Cassette Set Unit 2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
5.1 Cassette Set Unit
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
Since the cassette set unit is a heavy object, be careful about the following points when
removing, reinstalling and moving.
- Secure a sufficient working space before the operation.
- Hold the position where the “Hold here” label is applied.
- Lift the unit in a natural posture.
5.1.1 Removal Procedures 3. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:5.2} Dust-Tight Cover Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-24
MC-25
4. Unclamp the clamp, and 5. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector. disconnect the connector
Put the cable aside out of the while pushing the hook of the
housing for the protection of connector. Put the cable aside
the cable. out of the housing for the
protection of the cable.
u NOTE u
Be sure to put the cable aside out u NOTES u
of the housing. Otherwise, the - As the working space is small,
cable and the connector might get exercise care not to get injured
caught when removing/reinstalling by peripheral components when
the cassette set unit. disconnecting the connector.
- Be sure to put the cable
aside out of the housing.
Otherwise, the cable and the
connector might get caught
when removing/reinstalling the
cassette set unit.
6. Remove the retaining screws of
the cassette set unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-25
MC-26
7. Take the procedure 8 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
8. Remove the retaining screws of
the cassette set unit.
CAUTION
Never remove red painted screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-26
MC-27
9. Take the procedure 10 from the 10. Hold the cassette set unit on
direction indicated by the arrow the positions indicated in the
in the figure. figure. Lift the cassette set unit
above the housing frame and
u NOTE u remove it.
The heavy object is to be handled
in the following procedure. Be u NOTES u
sure to work from the direction as - Since the cassette set unit is a
instructed. heavy object, be sure to secure
a sufficient working space
before the operation, and work
in a natural posture.
- Be sure to lift the cassette set
unit above the housing frame
before removing. If the cassette
set unit has not been lifted high
enough, the unit might come
into contact with the housing,
causing the damage.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-27
MC-28
5.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Hold the cassette set unit on
the positions indicated in the
figure. Lift the cassette set
unit above the housing frame,
and lower it halfway with the
housing clamp as a guide.
Push the unit against the left-
hand and then inner sides of
the housing in this order, and
vertically lower the unit for
reinstallation.
u NOTES u
- Always lift the cassette set unit
above the housing frame before
reinstalling. If the cassette set
unit has not been lifted high
enough, the unit might come
into contact with the housing,
causing the damage.
- Be sure to push the unit against
the left-hand and then inner
side of the housing in this order.
Otherwise, the cassette set unit
cannot be reinstalled in place,
and the housing cable might get
damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-28
MC-29
2. Reinstall the retaining screws 3. Take the procedure 4 from the
of the cassette set unit. direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
4. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the cassette set unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-29
MC-30
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 7. Connect the connector, and
from the direction indicated by retain the cable with the clamp.
the arrow in the figure.
6. Unclamp the clamp, connect
the connector, and retain the
cable with the clamp.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-30
MC-31
8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.2.2} Dust-Tight Cover Assembly
{MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-31
MC-32
5.2 Dust-Tight Cover Assembly 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.2.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
3. Remove the retaining screws of
the dust-tight cover assembly
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL A.
4. Remove the retaining screws of
the dust-tight cover assembly
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL B.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-32
MC-33
5. Hold the dust-tight cover
assembly on the position
indicated in the figure, and lift
it straight up to remove, while
exercising care not to tilt the
assembly.
u NOTE u
Be sure to lift the dust-tight cover
assembly straight without tilting
it, to remove it. Otherwise, the
sensor or the gear might get
damaged.
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view of
the dust-tight cover assembly, see
the "Service Parts List" volume.
{SP:03A_CASSETTE SET
UNIT 1}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-33
MC-34
5.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Hold the dust-tight cover
assembly on the positions
indicated in the figure, and
push the assembly against the
housing. Lower the assembly
straight down not to tilt it and
reinstall.
u NOTE u
Be sure to lower the dust-tight
cover assembly straight down
without tilting it, and reinstall.
Otherwise, the sensor or the gear
might get damaged.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-34
MC-35
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 6. Take the procedures 7 and 8
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
4. Check to make sure that 7. Reinstall the retaining screws
there is no difference in level of the dust-tight cover
between the dust-tight cover assembly from the direction
assembly and the side plate of instructed in DETAIL A.
the cassette set unit from the
direction instructed in DETAIL
A.
5. Check to make sure that 8. Reinstall the retaining screws
there is no difference in level of the dust-tight cover
between the dust-tight cover assembly from the direction
assembly and the side plate of instructed in DETAIL B.
the cassette set unit from the
direction instructed in DETAIL
B.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-35
MC-36
9. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-36
MC-37
5.3 Opening/Closing the Board Box 3. Disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
The board box can be opened/closed even when the cassette set unit is not removed from
the housing. When you open/close the board box while the cassette set unit is removed from
the housing, you do not have to perform procedures 1 to 4. Just perform procedures 5 and 6.
5.3.1 Opening the Board Box
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
4. Disconnect the connector
while pushing the hook of the
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. connector.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
disconnecting the connector.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 5. Remove the screws.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-37
MC-38
6. Lift the board box and remove
the safety bar from the retainer.
Lift the safety bar and hook
it on the bracket of the board
box.
u NOTE u
Be sure to hook the safety bar
on the bracket of the board box
to prevent the board box from
falling down. Otherwise, the board
box might fall down, hurting the
operator.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-38
MC-39
5.3.2 Closing the Board Box
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. While holding the position
indicated in the figure and
supporting the board box,
remove the safety bar. Lower
the safety bar and fix to the
retainer. Then lower the board
box.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-39
MC-40
3. Reinstall the screws. 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Connect the connector.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
5. Connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-40
MC-41
5.4 Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{SP:INDEX}
5.4.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the KL ring, and
remove the shutter driving arm.
u NOTE u
When the shutter driving arm is
removed, the bearing installed
inside the arm might drop.
Exercise care not to miss the
bearing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-41
MC-42
5.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Install the bearing inside the
shutter driving arm. Then
mount the shutter driving arm
and the KL ring.
u NOTES u
- Pay attention to the orientation
of mounting the bearing.
- Mount the shutter driving
arm and the bearing in place
referring to the figure.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-42
MC-43
5.5 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) 4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL B, remove the screws
{SP:INDEX} and then the motor assembly.
5.5.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Remove the motor (MA1) from
from the direction indicated by the vibration-proof rubber.
the arrow in the figure.
3. Disconnect the connector in the
direction indicated in DETAIL A.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-43
MC-44
5.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL A, mount the motor
assembly in the cassette set
unit with the connector oriented
as shown.
u NOTE u
When mounting the motor
assembly, ensure that the
connector is properly oriented.
1. Mount the vibration-proof 4. In the direction indicated
rubber on the motor (MA1) in DETAIL B, connect the
in such a manner that the connector.
positional relationship between
the connector for the motor
(MA1) and the half punch holes
in the vibration-proof rubber is
as indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
If the positional relationship
between the motor and vibration-
proof rubber is not as indicated
in the figure, the motor assembly
cannot properly be mounted in
the cassette set unit.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-44
MC-45
5.6 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) 4. Remove the spur gears and
bearing.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTES u
5.6.1 Removal Procedures - When you remove the
uppermost spur gear, the
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
bearing may drop. Be sure to
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
keep track of the bearing.
parts.
- The uppermost spur gear on
Reference Part concerned the reference side differs in
shape and color from the one
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
on the opposite reference side.
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side) The spur gear on the opposite
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. reference side is white.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-45
MC-46
5.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. With the arm lifted, mount the
spur gear and bearing.
u NOTES u
- Ensure that the mounted bearing
is properly oriented.
- The uppermost spur gear on
the reference side differs in
shape and color from the one
on the opposite reference side.
The spur gear on the opposite
reference side is white.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the spur gears. 4. Reinstall the screw.
u NOTE u
Ensure that the mounted spur
gears are properly oriented.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-46
MC-47
5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-47
MC-48
5.7 Cable Junction Bracket (A) 4. Disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
5.7.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 8 5. Unclamp the clamps.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the bracket. 6. Disconnect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-48
MC-49
7. Remove the screws. 8. Remove the bracket while
lifting up the shutter driving
u NOTES u arm.
- Do not remove the bracket after
the screws are removed. If the u NOTE u
bracket is removed in this state, Always remove the bracket with
the sensor installed inside the the shutter driving arm lifted up.
bracket might get damaged. Otherwise, the sensor installed
- If the bracket lowers and on the bracket might interfere with
disengages after the screws are the shutter driving arm, resulting
removed, the procedure 6 is in the damage of the sensor.
not necessary. Proceed to the
procedure 8.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-49
MC-50
5.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the bracket while
lifting up the shutter driving
arm.
u NOTE u
Always install the bracket with
the shutter driving arm lifted up.
Otherwise, the sensor installed
on the bracket might interfere with
the shutter driving arm, resulting
in the damage of the sensor.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 7
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Reinstall the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-50
MC-51
4. Connect the connector. 7. Reinstall the bracket.
5. Verify that the cable ties are 8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
positioned as indicated in the procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
figure, and then secure the
Reference Part concerned
cable with the clamps.
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
6. Connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-51
MC-52
5.8 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Sensor (SA3) 5.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.8.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the sensor from the
cable junction bracket.
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-52
MC-53
5.9 Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{SP:INDEX}
5.9.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the KL ring, and
remove the shutter driving arm.
u NOTE u
When the shutter driving arm is
removed, the bearing installed
inside the arm might drop.
Exercise care not to miss the
bearing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-53
MC-54
5.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Install the bearing inside the
shutter driving arm. Then
mount the shutter driving arm
and the KL ring.
u NOTES u
- Pay attention to the orientation
of mounting the bearing.
- Mount the shutter driving
arm and the bearing in place
referring to the figure.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-54
MC-55
5.10 Spur Gear (Reference Side) 2. Rotate the motor gear to a
position at which the sensor
{SP:INDEX} (SA7) and spur gear actuator
do not interfere with each other.
5.10.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-55
MC-56
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
4. Remove the screw.
5. Remove the spur gear and
bearing.
u NOTES u
- When you remove the spur gear,
the bearing may drop. Be sure
to keep track of the bearing.
- The spur gear on the reference
side differs in shape and color
from the one on the opposite
reference side. The spur gear
on the reference side is black.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-56
MC-57
5.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. With the arm lifted, mount the
spur gear and bearing.
u NOTES u
- Ensure that the mounted bearing
is properly oriented.
- The spur gear on the reference
side differs in shape and color
from the one on the opposite
reference side. The spur gear
on the reference side is black.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Reinstall the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-57
MC-58
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-58
MC-59
5.11 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly 3. Remove the tension coil spring
(L = 43 mm).
{SP:INDEX}
5.11.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side) from the direction indicated by
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) the arrow in the figure.
{MC:5.5} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 5. In the direction indicated in
direction indicated by the arrow DETAIL A, remove the screw
in the figure. and then the guide.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-59
MC-60
6. In the direction indicated in 9. While inserting the cassette
DETAIL B, remove the screw cover opening pins into the
and then the guide. frame holes in the cassette
set unit, give a square, slightly
forward pull to the cassette
cover opening assembly.
Rotate the cassette cover
opening assembly driving shaft
until its D-cut flat surface faces
forward. Pull the left-hand side
of the cassette cover opening
assembly forward. Remove
the cassette cover opening
assembly while exercising
care not to damage the sensor
7. Take the procedure 8 from the (SA4-2) and cable.
direction indicated by the arrow
u NOTE u
in the figure.
When you remove the cassette
cover opening assembly, the
bearings may drop. Be sure to
keep track of the bearings.
8. Undo the clamps and then
position the cable outside the
cassette set unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-60
MC-61
10. Remove the bearings.
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view
of the cassette cover opening
assembly, see the "Service Parts
List" volume.
{SP:03H_CASSETTE SET
UNIT 8}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-61
MC-62
5.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Mount the bearings on the
cassette cover opening
assembly driving shaft.
u NOTE u
Ensure that the mounted bearings
are properly oriented.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the 4. While exercising care so that
direction indicated by the arrow the sensor (SA4-2) cable is not
in the figure. damaged by the cassette cover
opening pin, insert the cassette
cover opening assembly in
such a manner that the two
shafts on the right-hand side
of the cassette cover opening
assembly are positioned inside
the cable that is routed inside
the right-hand side of the
cassette set unit.
2. Rotate the cassette cover
opening assembly driving shaft
until its D-cut flat surface faces
forward.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-62
MC-63
5. Insert the left-hand side of 7. Secure the cable with the
the cassette cover opening clamps.
assembly into the left-hand side
of the cassette set unit. While
inserting the cassette cover
opening pins into the frame
holes in the cassette set unit,
squarely insert the cassette
cover opening assembly.
8. Take the procedures 9 and 10
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
6. Take the procedure 7 from the 9. In the direction indicated in
direction indicated by the arrow DETAIL A, mount the guide and
in the figure. then tighten the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-63
MC-64
10. In the direction indicated in 13. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
DETAIL B, mount the guide and procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
then tighten the screw.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.5.2} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.6.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
11. Take the procedure 12 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
12. Mount the tension coil spring
(L = 43 mm).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-64
MC-65
5.12 Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft 3. Rotate the cassette cover
opening assembly driving shaft
{SP:INDEX} until the cam screw on the
leftmost end of the cassette
5.12.1 Removal Procedures cover opening assembly
driving shaft can be rotated
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
with a screwdriver. Remove the
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts. screw. Move the cam inward
and then remove the straight
Reference Part concerned pin.
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
u NOTE u
{MC:5.5} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1) When you move the cam, the
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A) straight pin may drop. Be sure to
keep track of the straight pin.
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.11} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 7 from
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-65
MC-66
4. Rotate the cassette cover 5. Remove the right- and left-
opening assembly driving shaft hand KL rings that secure
until the second cam screw the cassette cover opening
from the left of the cassette assembly driving shaft.
cover opening assembly
driving shaft can be rotated
with a screwdriver. Remove the
screw. Move the cam inward
and then remove the straight
pin.
u NOTE u
When you move the cam, the
straight pin may drop. Be sure to
keep track of the straight pin.
6. Locate the two cams and the
bearing on the left-hand side
of the cassette cover opening
assembly driving shaft. Move
these parts inward.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-66
MC-67
7. Move the cassette cover 8. Remove the bearings and
opening assembly driving shaft cams.
to the left, pull its rightmost end
forward, and then remove the
entire cassette cover opening
assembly driving shaft.
u NOTE u
When you move the cassette
cover opening assembly driving
shaft, the bearings and cams may
drop. Be sure to keep track of
them.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-67
MC-68
5.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Insert the leftmost end of
the cassette cover opening
assembly driving shaft into the
hole in the left-hand side of
the cassette set unit. Push the
rightmost end inward. Insert
the rightmost end into the hole
in the right-hand side of the
cassette set unit.
1. Locate the marking on the
cassette cover opening
assembly driving shaft. With
the marked end positioned on
the right-hand side, install two
cams over the left-hand side of
the shaft. Verify that the two
inner cams are oriented in the
same direction and that the two
outer cams are oriented in the
same direction.
2. Install the bearings over both
ends of the cassette cover
opening assembly driving
shaft.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-68
MC-69
4. Mount the bearings over the 5. Rotate the cassette cover
holes in both sides of the opening assembly driving shaft
cassette set unit. Secure until the second cam screw
the cassette cover opening from the left of the cassette
assembly driving shaft with the cover opening assembly
KL rings. driving shaft can be rotated
with a screwdriver. Insert the
straight pin into the cassette
cover opening assembly
driving shaft. Move the cam
outward and then install the
screw to secure the cam.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-69
MC-70
6. Rotate the cassette cover 7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
opening assembly driving shaft procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
until the cam screw on the
Reference Part concerned
leftmost end of the cassette
cover opening assembly {MC:5.11.2} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
driving shaft can be rotated
{MC:5.5.2} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
with a screwdriver. Insert the
straight pin into the cassette {MC:5.6.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
cover opening assembly {MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
driving shaft. Move the cam
outward and then install the {MC:5.10.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
screw to secure the cam. {MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-70
MC-71
5.13 Cable Junction Bracket (B) 4. Disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
5.13.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the [Disconnect]
parts. Connector
Reference Part concerned SOLA1
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
MBRU3050098.EPS
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 8 5. Remove the screw.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamps. 6. Remove the cable junction
bracket (B).
u NOTE u
The cable is still attached to the
removed cable junction bracket
(B). Exercise care not to damage
the cable.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-71
MC-72
7. Unclamp the clamps. 5.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
8. While pressing the connector
hook with long-nose pliers,
remove the connector from
the bracket. Remove the cable
from the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-72
MC-73
5.14 Antistatic Member 5.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.14.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the screws to remove
the antistatic member.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-73
MC-74
5.15 Shutter Assembly 3. Remove the screws. Remove
the shutter assembly (left-
{SP:INDEX} hand) while rotating it forward
to release the latches from the
5.15.1 Removal Procedures frame holes.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-74
MC-75
4. Disassemble the shutter 5.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures
assembly.
5. Remove the shutter assembly 1. Reassemble the shutter
(right-hand) by performing assembly. Verify that the
steps similar to steps 3 and 4. leading end of the torsion coil
spring is lodged in the shutter
groove.
u NOTE u
Hold the reassembled shutter
assembly by hand. If it is not held
by hand, it is disassembled by the
action of the torsion coil spring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-75
MC-76
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 3. While inserting the leading
from the direction indicated by end of the torsion coil spring
the arrow in the figure. into the groove in the guide
plate, position the shutter
assembly in the cassette set
unit. Slightly lift the shutter
assembly. While rotating the
lifted shutter assembly, insert
the shutter assembly latches
into the frame holes. Install the
screws to secure the shutter
assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-76
MC-77
4. Press the shutter by hand and then release it to check that the shutter is returned
by spring action.
5. Mount the shutter assembly (right-hand) by performing steps similar to steps 1 to
3.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-77
MC-78
5.16 Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) 4. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
5.16.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 5. Remove the screws.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamps. 6. Remove the sensor bracket
assembly.
u NOTE u
The cable is still attached to
the removed sensor bracket
assembly. Exercise care not to
damage the cable.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-78
MC-79
7. Disconnect the connector. 5.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
8. Remove the sensors.
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-79
MC-80
5.17 Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side) 4. Remove the bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
5.17.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Remove the spring (L = 38 mm).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-80
MC-81
5.18 Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side) 5.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.18.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-81
MC-82
5.19 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear 4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL B, remove the spur
{SP:INDEX} gear and straight pin while
supporting the cassette cover
5.19.1 Removal Procedures closing assembly shaft by
hand.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
u NOTE u
parts.
When you remove the spur gear,
Reference Part concerned the straight pin may drop. Be
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit sure to keep track of the straight
pin.
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. While supporting the cassette
from the direction indicated by cover closing assembly by
the arrow in the figure. hand, lower it to its lowermost
position.
3. In the direction indicated in 6. Remove the spur gear.
DETAIL A, support the cassette
cover closing assembly shaft
by hand.
REFERENCE
When you remove the spur gear
in procedure 4, the cassette cover
closing assembly may drop. To
prevent the cassette cover closing
assembly from dropping and
becoming damaged, support the
cassette cover closing assembly
by hand before spur gear
removal.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-82
MC-83
5.19.2 Reinstallation Procedures
REFERENCE
For installation, there is no need to support the cassette cover closing assembly by hand.
Mount the spur gear while the cassette cover closing assembly is at its lowermost position.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-83
MC-84
5.20 Cassette Hold Release Arm 5.20.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
5.20.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. in the figure.
3. Remove the screws. Remove 2. Screw down the flange and
the flange and hold release hold release arm.
arm.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to overtighten
the screws. If you overtighten the
screws, the flange may become
damaged, causing the arm to
improperly operate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-84
MC-85
3. Press the hold release arm to
check for improper operation.
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.17.2} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-85
MC-86
5.21 Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.21.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
3. Remove the spring (L = 43 mm).
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
REFERENCE
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
The same tension coil spring (L =
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side) 43 mm) is used for the cassette
IP holding arm assemblies on
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
the reference side and opposite
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) reference side.
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Removing the driving arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-86
MC-87
5. Take the procedures from 6 to 9 8. Move the cassette IP holding
from the direction indicated by arm assembly in the direction
the arrow in the figure. of the arrow until it reaches its
uppermost position.
REFERENCE
After the cassette IP holding
arm assembly is moved to its
uppermost position, the lever can
be removed horizontally from the
opening in the side plate.
6. Remove the spring (L = 43 mm). 9. Remove the lever on the
opposite reference side.
7. Removing the driving arm. 10. Take the procedures 11 and 12
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-87
MC-88
11. Move the cassette IP holding 5.21.2 Reinstallation Procedures
arm assembly in the direction
of the arrow until it reaches its For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
uppermost position.
REFERENCE
After the cassette IP holding
arm assembly is moved to its
uppermost position, the lever can
be removed horizontally from the
opening in the side plate.
12. Remove the lever on the u INSTRUCTION u
reference side.
Mount the cassette IP holding arm
with its holed side facing upward.
13. Remove the cassette IP holding
arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-88
MC-89
5.22 Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.22.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
3. In the direction indicated in
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side) DETAIL A, remove the screws.
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.20} Cassette Hold Release Arm
{MC:5.21} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL B, remove the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-89
MC-90
5. Remove the cassette inlet 5.22.2 Reinstallation Procedures
guide assembly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-90
MC-91
5.23 Cassette Insertion Error Sensor (SA14) 4. Remove the sensor (SA14).
REFERENCE
{SP:INDEX}
For details on the sensor
5.23.1 Removal Procedures removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts Type)."
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the {MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
parts. (5 mm Type)}
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Disconnect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-91
MC-92
5.24 Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) 4. Remove the screw.
{SP:INDEX}
5.24.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 7 from 5. Hold the portion indicated in
the direction indicated by the the figure, rotate the sensor
arrow in the figure. assembly, and pull it downward
and out.
3. Undo the clamp and then
remove the cable from the
clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-92
MC-93
6. Disconnect the connector.
7. Remove the sensor (SA11) from
the bracket.
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-93
MC-94
5.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Connect the connector.
1. Mount the sensor (SA11) on the 4. Hold the portion indicated in
bracket. the figure, insert the sensor
assembly into the setting unit,
and hook the sensor assembly
in the bracket hole.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-94
MC-95
5. Verify that the sensor assembly
is properly mounted on the
half punch, and then install the
screw.
6. Verify that the cable ties are
positioned as indicated in the
figure, push the cable into the
clamp, and secure the clamp.
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.13.2} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-95
MC-96
5.25 Cable Junction Bracket (C) 4. Unclamp the clamps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.25.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 8 from 5. Remove the screws.
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamps.
u NOTE u
Since the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
on your hands by the edge of the
bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-96
MC-97
6. Position the cable so as to 7. Disconnect the lower
prevent it from being caught connector.
by the bracket clamp. Move
the bracket to the center of the
cassette set unit. Remove the
bracket by rotating it.
u NOTE u
Be sure to move the bracket with
the cable positioned away from
the bracket clamp. If you do not
observe this precaution, the cable
may be caught by the clamp and
damaged.
8. Disconnect the upper
connector from the bracket
while depressing both sides of
the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-97
MC-98
5.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Insert the bracket beneath
the board box shaft. While
positioning the cable so as to
prevent it from being caught by
the bracket clamp, mount the
bracket.
u NOTE u
Be sure to mount the bracket with
the cable positioned away from
the bracket clamp. If you do not
observe this precaution, the cable
may be caught by the clamp and
captured within the bracket.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the upper connector on
the bracket and connect the
lower connector to the upper
connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-98
MC-99
4. Reinstall the screws. 6. Secure the cable with the
clamps.
u NOTE u
When tightening the screws, u NOTE u
exercise care so that the cable is The work space is limited. When
not caught. securing the clamps, exercise
care so that your hands are not
injured by bracket edges.
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.78.2} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to
5. Secure the cable with the
clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-99
MC-100
5.26 Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) 3. While supporting the motor
(MA2) by hand, remove the
{SP:INDEX} screws.
5.26.1 Removal Procedures u NOTE u
Be sure to support the motor by
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
hand. Upon screw removal, the
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
motor may drop.
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
4. Locate the WP screw
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear protrusions on the motor (MA2)
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C) shaft. With the protrusions
aligned with the opening in the
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. side plate, remove the motor
(MA2).
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5.26.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-100
MC-101
5.27 IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference 3. Take the procedures from 4 to 7
from the direction indicated by
Side Gear) the arrow in the figure.
{SP:INDEX}
5.27.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Hold the arm (white) to move 4. Remove the arm (white).
the IP removal arm to the
lowermost position.
REFERENCE
When you remove the IP
removal unit link mechanism,
the IP removal arm may drop.
To prevent the IP removal arm
from being damaged, move the
IP removal arm to its lowermost
position before IP removal unit
link mechanism removal.
5. Remove the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-101
MC-102
6. Remove the gear. 5.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures
7. Remove the spur gears. 1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the spur gears.
u NOTE u
Ensure that the mounted spur
gears are properly oriented.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-102
MC-103
3. Mount the gear. 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Reinstall the screw.
5. Mount the arm (white).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-103
MC-104
5.28 IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear) 3. Take the procedures from 4 to 6
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.28.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Hold the arm (white) to move 4. Remove the arm (white).
the IP removal arm to the
lowermost position.
REFERENCE
When you remove the IP
removal unit link mechanism,
the IP removal arm may drop.
To prevent the IP removal arm
from being damaged, move the
IP removal arm to its lowermost
position before IP removal unit
link mechanism removal.
5. Remove the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-104
MC-105
6. Remove the gear. 5.28.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-105
MC-106
5.29 Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) 3. Disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
5.29.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the screws and then
the motor assembly.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the motor (MA3) from
from the direction indicated by the vibration-proof rubber.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-106
MC-107
5.29.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Mount the motor assembly in
the cassette set unit with the
connector oriented as shown.
u NOTE u
When mounting the motor
assembly, ensure that the
connector is properly oriented.
1. Mount the vibration-proof 4. Connect the connector.
rubber on the motor (MA3)
in such a manner that the
positional relationship between
the connector for the motor
and the half punch holes in the
vibration-proof rubber is as
indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
If the positional relationship
between the motor and vibration-
proof rubber is not as indicated
in the figure, the motor assembly
cannot properly be mounted in
the cassette set unit.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.27.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-107
MC-108
5.30 Cable Junction Bracket (D) 3. Unclamp the clamps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.30.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
4. Take the procedure 5 from the
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 5. Remove the screws.
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-108
MC-109
6. Take the procedure 7 from the 5.30.2 Reinstallation Procedures
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
7. Move the cable junction bracket
(D) to the center of the cassette
set unit. Remove the cable
junction bracket (D) by rotating
it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-109
MC-110
5.31 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft 3. Remove KL ring.
{SP:INDEX}
5.31.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
4. Move the spur gear and remove
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C) the straight pin.
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
u NOTE u
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear When you move the spur gear,
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3) the straight pin may drop. Be
sure to keep track of the straight
{MC:5.26} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) pin.
{MC:5.30} Cable Junction Bracket (D)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-110
MC-111
5. Move the bearing. 8. Remove the cassette cover
closing assembly driving shaft.
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
7. Pull the leftmost end of
the cassette cover closing
assembly driving shaft away
from the side plate.
u NOTE u
Also remove the bearing that is
attached to the side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-111
MC-112
5.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Insert the cassette cover
closing assembly driving shaft
into the cassette set unit.
1. Engage the rightmost end of 3. Engage one end of the cassette
the cassette cover closing cover closing assembly driving
assembly driving shaft with the shaft with the side plate on the
right-hand side plate. Ensure reference side.
that the cassette cover closing
assembly driving shaft is
properly oriented.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation
of the cassette cover closing
assembly driving shaft. Ensure
that the shaft end without a KL
ring is engaged with the side plate
on the opposite reference side.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-112
MC-113
4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7 6. Insert the straight pin into its
from the direction indicated by position and then move the
the arrow in the figure. spur gear.
5. Insert the bearing into the hole
in the right-hand side plate.
7. Mount the KL ring to secure the
spur gear.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-113
MC-114
8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.30.2} Cable Junction Bracket (D)
{MC:5.26.2} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)
{MC:5.29.2} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
{MC:5.19.2} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.27.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.25.2} Cable Junction Bracket (C)
{MC:5.16.2} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.78.2} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-114
MC-115
5.32 Cassette Cover Closing Assembly 2. Close the board box.
{MC:5.3.2_Closing the Board Box}
{SP:INDEX}
5.32.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.20} Cassette Hold Release Arm
{MC:5.26} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)
{MC:5.30} Cable Junction Bracket (D)
{MC:5.21} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
{MC:5.22} Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly
{MC:5.31} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-115
MC-116
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 5. In the direction indicated in
from the direction indicated by DETAIL B, remove the screw
the arrow in the figure. and then the bearing while
supporting the cassette cover
closing assembly by hand.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the cassette
cover closing assembly by hand.
If the cassette cover closing
assembly is tilted, the actuator
may come into contact with the
side plate opening section and
become damaged.
4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL A, remove the screw
and then the bearing while
supporting the cassette cover
closing assembly by hand.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the cassette
cover closing assembly by hand.
If the cassette cover closing
assembly is tilted, the actuator
may come into contact with the
side plate opening section and
become damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-116
MC-117
6. Hold the cassette cover 5.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures
closing assembly with both
hands, and horizontally move For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
it until the actuator lodges
into the opening in the side
plate. Verify that the actuator
is not in contact with the side
plate. With the right-hand side
of the cassette cover closing
assembly handled as a fulcrum,
remove the cassette cover
closing assembly by lifting its
left-hand side.
REFERENCES
- For details on the cassette
cover closing roller removal/
reinstallation procedure, see
"5.37 Cassette Cover Closing
Roller."
{MC:5.33_Cassette Cover
Closing Roller}
- For the detailed exploded view
of the cassette cover closing
assembly, see the "Service
Parts List" volume.
{SP:03F_CASSETTE SET
UNIT 6}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-117
MC-118
5.33 Cassette Cover Closing Roller 2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
{SP:INDEX} in the figure.
5.33.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
3. Remove the torsion coil spring
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12) hook with long-nose pliers or
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C) the like. Move the torsion coil
spring inward.
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.20} Cassette Hold Release Arm
{MC:5.26} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)
{MC:5.30} Cable Junction Bracket (D)
{MC:5.21} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
{MC:5.22} Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly
{MC:5.31} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.32} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-118
MC-119
4. Take the procedure 5 from the 6. Lift the roller assembly along
direction indicated by the arrow the grooves. Move the roller
in the figure. assembly to the right and pull
its leftmost end away from the
left-hand groove.
u NOTE u
When you remove the roller
assembly, the bearing may drop.
Be sure to keep track of the
bearing.
5. Remove the torsion coil spring
hook with long-nose pliers or
the like. Move the torsion coil
spring inward.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-119
MC-120
7. Pull the rightmost end of the 8. Remove the outside retaining
roller assembly away from the KL rings from the rollers (white).
right-hand groove. Remove the Remove the rollers (white).
roller assembly and bearings. Remove the inside retaining KL
rings.
u NOTE u
When you remove the roller
assembly, the bearing may drop.
Be sure to keep track of the
bearing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-120
MC-121
9. Remove the KL rings that retain
the roller (black). Move the
rollers (black).
10. Remove the KL ring and then
the rollers (black).
11. Remove the KL ring, and then
remove the resin rollers and
the ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-121
MC-122
5.33.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Mount the KL ring.
1. Put the resin rollers and the 4. Move the rollers (black) and
ring over the shaft, and put on then mount the KL rings.
the KL ring.
2. Install the rollers (black) over
the roller. Ensure that the
rollers (black) are oriented as
indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
Ensure that the rollers (black) are
properly oriented.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-122
MC-123
5 Mount the inside retaining KL 6. Install the bearings over the
rings for the rollers (white). roller assembly. Tilt the roller
Mount the rollers (white), assembly and then insert its
and then mount the outside rightmost end into the hole
retaining KL rings. in the cassette cover closing
assembly.
u NOTE u
Insert the roller assembly while
exercising care to its orientation
so that it is oriented as shown in
the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-123
MC-124
7. Insert the leftmost end of the 8. Take the procedure 9 from the
roller assembly into the groove. direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
9. Engage the lower end of the
torsion coil spring with the
bearing. With long-nose
pliers or the like, lodge the
hook on the upper end of the
torsion coil spring in the hole
in the cassette cover closing
assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-124
MC-125
10. Take the procedure 11 from the 12. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
direction indicated by the arrow procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.32.2} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly
{MC:5.31.2} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.22.2} Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly
{MC:5.21.2} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
{MC:5.30.2} Cable Junction Bracket (D)
{MC:5.26.2} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)
{MC:5.20.2} Cassette Hold Release Arm
{MC:5.10.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
11. Engage the lower end of the {MC:5.6.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
torsion coil spring with the
bearing. With long-nose {MC:5.29.2} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
pliers or the like, lodge the {MC:5.19.2} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
hook on the upper end of the
{MC:5.18.2} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
torsion coil spring in the hole
in the cassette cover closing {MC:5.17.2} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
assembly.
{MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.27.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.25.2} Cable Junction Bracket (C)
{MC:5.16.2} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.78.2} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-125
MC-126
5.34 Hose 4. Remove the hose.
u NOTE u
{SP:INDEX}
Exercise care not to damage the
5.34.1 Removal Procedures hose when removing it.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the hose.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
hose when removing it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-126
MC-127
5.34.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Attach the hose.
u NOTES u
- When attaching the hose,
exercise care not to damage it.
- Be sure to attach the hose to
the suction side of the IP suction
pump.
- Insert the hose to the innermost
region.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Attach the hose.
u NOTE u
When attaching the hose,
exercise care not to damage it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-127
MC-128
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-128
MC-129
5.35 Hose Joints 4. Remove the hoses.
u NOTES u
{SP:INDEX}
Exercise care not to damage the
5.35.1 Removal Procedures hose when removing it.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the screw. Remove
from the direction indicated by the bracket and hose joints.
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the hose. 5.35.2 Reinstallation Procedures
u NOTE u For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Exercise care not to damage the
hose when removing it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-129
MC-130
5.36 IP Air Leak Valve Assembly (SVA1/SVA2) 4. While pushing the hook
of the connector with the
{SP:INDEX} longnose pliers, disconnect the
connector from the bracket.
5.36.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.34} Hose
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 5. Disconnect the connectors.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Disconnect the connector. 6. Remove the screw. Remove
the IP air leak valve assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-130
MC-131
5.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Connect the connectors.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5 4. Attach the connector to the
from the direction indicated by bracket.
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the IP air leak valve 5. Connect the connector.
assembly.
u NOTE u
When mounting the IP air leak
valve assembly, exercise care so
that the cable is not caught by the
assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-131
MC-132
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.34.2} Hose
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-132
MC-133
5.37 IP Suction Pump (PA1) 4. Disconnect the connector, and
unclamp the clamp.
{SP:INDEX}
5.37.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.34} Hose
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 5. While pushing the hook
direction indicated by the arrow of the connector with the
in the figure. longnose pliers, disconnect the
connector from the bracket.
3. Remove the hose. 6. Remove the retaining screw of
the pump.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
hose when removing it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-133
MC-134
7. Remove the pump. 5.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Mount the IP suction pump
so that the IP suction cable
pump is located behind the IP
leak valve assembly. Put on
the retaining screw of the IP
suction pump.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-134
MC-135
2. Attach the connector to the 4. Attach the hose.
bracket.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to attach the hose to
the suction side of the IP suction
pump.
- Insert the hose to the innermost
region.
3. Retain the cable with the clamp,
and connect the connector.
5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.34.2} Hose
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-135
MC-136
5.38 IP Suction Sensor (SA5) 4. Remove the screw. Remove
the sensor (SA5).
{SP:INDEX}
5.38.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.34} Hose
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Disconnect the connector and
then undo the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-136
MC-137
5.38.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Secure the clamps and then
connect the connector.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.34.2} Hose
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the cable as indicated in
the figure and then mount the
sensor (SA5).
u NOTE u
When mounting the suction
sensor, exercise care so that the
hose is not caught.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-137
MC-138
5.39 IP Dropping Sensor Assembly 4. Pull out the bracket, and
unclamp the clamp.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
5.39.1 Removal Procedures Since the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
on your hands by the edge of the
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
bracket.
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Disconnect the connector.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the retaining screws of
the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-138
MC-139
5.39.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Verify that the cable ties are
positioned as indicated in the
figure, and then secure the
cable with the clamps.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4 4. Check to make sure that the
from the direction indicated by bracket is correctly mounted
the arrow in the figure. on the half punches, before
retaining with the screws.
u NOTE u
Always make sure that the
bracket is correctly mounted on
the half punches, before retaining
with the screws.
2. Connect the connector. 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-139
MC-140
5.40 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4, Light Emitting Side) 5.40.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.40.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.39} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the screw. Remove
the IP dropping sensor (SA4,
light emitting side) while
exercising care not to damage
its light emitting surface.
u NOTES u
- Do not damage or soil the
light emitting surface of the
IP dropping sensor. Failure
to observe this precaution
may degrade the sensor
performance.
- The IP dropping sensor on the
light emitting side differs from
the one on the light receiving
side in the number of connector
pins. The connector for the light
emitting side has three pins.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-140
MC-141
5.41 IP Dropping Sensor (SA4, Light Receiving Side) 3. Take the procedures from 4 and
5 from the direction indicated
{SP:INDEX} by the arrow in the figure.
5.41.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. To obtain the work space for 4. Remove the screw.
removing the IP dropping
sensor (SA4, light receiving
side), rotate the motor gear
to place the cassette cover
opening assembly at its
uppermost position.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-141
MC-142
5. Disconnect the connector while 5.41.2 Reinstallation Procedures
exercising care not to damage
the light receiving surface of For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
the IP dropping sensor (SA4,
light receiving side).
u NOTES u
- Do not damage or soil the
light receiving surface of the
IP dropping sensor. Failure
to observe this precaution
may degrade the sensor
performance.
- The IP dropping sensor on the
light receiving side differs from
the one on the light emitting
side in the number of connector
pins. The connector for the light
receiving side has four pins.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-142
MC-143
5.42 Guide (Right-Hand) 2. Manually rotate the gear of the
motor, and check to make sure
{SP:INDEX} that the anti-foreign-matter
shutter assembly has moved to
5.42.1 Removal Procedures its closed position.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the CAUTION
parts. Do not work with your head put
under the board box.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
u NOTE u
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
Check to make sure that the
antiforeign-matter shutter
assembly has moved to its closed
position.
Otherwise, the tip of the IP
removal arm comes into contact,
preventing the arm from moving.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-143
MC-144
3. Move the IP removal arm while 4. Remove the screws, to remove
holding the arm (white) to a the guide.
position where the driver can
access the screws of the IP
removal arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-144
MC-145
5.42.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Insert the tip of the guide into
an aperture of the bracket
before mounting the guide. Be
sure to verify that the guide is
correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with
the screws.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify that the guide
is correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with the
screws.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-145
MC-146
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-146
MC-147
5.43 Guide (Left-Hand) 2. Manually rotate the gear of the
motor, and check to make sure
{SP:INDEX} that the anti-foreign-matter
shutter assembly has moved to
5.43.1 Removal Procedures its closed position.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the CAUTION
parts. Do not work with your head put
under the board box.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
u NOTE u
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
Check to make sure that the
antiforeign-matter shutter
assembly has moved to its closed
position.
Otherwise, the tip of the IP
removal arm comes into contact,
preventing the arm from moving.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-147
MC-148
3. Move the IP removal arm while 4. Remove the screws, to remove
holding the arm (white) to a the guide.
position where the driver can
access the screws of the IP
removal arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-148
MC-149
5.43.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
2. Be sure to verify that the guide
is correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with
the screws.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify that the guide
is correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with the
screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-149
MC-150
5.44 Suction Cup Assembly (Right-Hand) 4. Remove the retaining screws
of the suction cup assembly
{SP:INDEX} (right-hand). Hold the assembly
on the position indicated in
5.44.1 Removal Procedures the figure, and pull out the
assembly (right-hand) from
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
below the IP removal link shaft.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
u NOTE u
Reference Part concerned Exercise care not to damage the
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box hose when pulling out the suction
cup assembly.
{MC:5.42} Guide (Right-Hand)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the hose.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-150
MC-151
5.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the suction cup
assembly (right-hand) on the
IP removal arm from below
the IP removal link shaft.
Make sure that the suction
cup assembly (right-hand) is
correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with
the screws.
u NOTES u
- Exercise care not to damage
the hose when reinstalling the
suction cup assembly on the IP
removal arm.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 - Be sure to verify that the suction
from the direction indicated by cup assembly has been correctly
the arrow in the figure. mounted on the half punches,
before retaining with the screws.
2. Check the mounted orientation
of the KL ring.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the KL
ring is attached in the orientation
indicated in the figure. Otherwise,
the suction cup assembly cannot
be correctly mounted on the IP
removal arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-151
MC-152
4. Connect the hose.
5. Pull the hose in the direction
indicated by the arrow, and
make sure that there is no
excessive slack of the hose in
the region surrounded by the
dotted line in the figure.
u NOTE u
If the hose has an excessive
slack, the hose might get
damaged as it is pulled when the
IP removal arm is moved.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.42.2} Guide (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-152
MC-153
5.45 Suction Cup (Right-Hand) 3. While pressing down on the
hose joint with a wrench or the
{SP:INDEX} like, remove the suction cup
with a Phillips screwdriver.
5.45.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.42} Guide (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.44} Suction Cup Assembly (Right-Hand)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-153
MC-154
5.45.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Verify that metal cuttings generated, for instance, by a screwdriver are not
attached to the suction cup.
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.44.2} Suction Cup Assembly (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.42.2} Guide (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
1. While pressing down on the
hose joint with a wrench or the
like, reinstall the suction cup
with a Phillips screwdriver.
2. Mount the KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-154
MC-155
5.46 Suction Cup (Left-Hand) 2. Manually rotate the gear of the
motor, and check to make sure
{SP:INDEX} that the anti-foreign-matter
shutter assembly has moved to
5.46.1 Removal Procedures its closed position.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the CAUTION
parts. Do not work with your head put
under the board box.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
u NOTE u
{MC:5.39} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
Check to make sure that the
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. antiforeign-matter shutter
assembly has moved to its closed
position.
Otherwise, the tip of the IP
removal arm comes into contact,
preventing the arm from moving.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-155
MC-156
3. Take the procedure 4 from the 4. Move the IP removal arm while
direction indicated by the arrow holding the arm (white) to a
in the figure. position where the driver can
access the screws of the IP
removal arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-156
MC-157
5. Remove the hose. 6. Remove the retaining screws
of the suction cup assembly
(left-hand). Hold the assembly
on the position indicated in
the figure, and pull out the
assembly (left-hand) from
below the IP removal link shaft.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
hose when pulling out the suction
cup assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-157
MC-158
5.46.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the suction cup
assembly (left-hand) on the IP
removal arm from below the IP
removal link shaft. Make sure
that the suction cup assembly
(left-hand) is correctly mounted
on the half punches, before
retaining with the screws.
u NOTES u
- Exercise care not to damage
the hose when reinstalling the
suction cup assembly on the IP
removal arm.
- Be sure to verify that the suction
1. Check the mounted orientation cup assembly has been correctly
of the KL ring. mounted on the half punches,
before retaining with the screws.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the KL
ring is attached in the orientation
indicated in the figure. Otherwise,
the suction cup assembly cannot
be correctly mounted on the IP
removal arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-158
MC-159
3. Pull the hose in the direction
indicated by the arrow, and
make sure that there is no
excessive slack of the hose in
the region surrounded by the
dotted line in the figure.
u NOTE u
If the hose has an excessive
slack, the hose might get
damaged as it is pulled when the
IP removal arm is moved.
4. Connect the hose.
5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.39.2} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-159
MC-160
5.47 Suction Cup (Left-Hand) 3. While pressing down on the
hose joint with a wrench or the
{SP:INDEX} like, remove the suction cup
with a Phillips screwdriver.
5.47.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.39} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
{MC:5.46} Suction Cup (Left-Hand)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-160
MC-161
5.47.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Verify that metal cuttings generated, for instance, by a screwdriver are not
attached to the suction cup.
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.46.2} Suction Cup (Left-Hand)
{MC:5.39.2} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
1. While pressing down on the
hose joint with a wrench or the
like, reinstall the suction cup
with a Phillips screwdriver.
2. Mount the KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-161
MC-162
5.48 IP Transport Motor (MA4) 4. Take the procedures from 5 and
6 from the direction indicated
{SP:INDEX} by the arrow in the figure.
5.48.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 5. Remove the screws and then
direction indicated by the arrow the motor assembly.
in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamp, and 6. Remove the vibration-proof
disconnect the connector. rubber from the motor (MA4).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-162
MC-163
5.48.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Verify that the connector is
positioned as shown, and then
mount the motor assembly in
the cassette set unit.
u NOTE u
When mounting the motor
assembly, ensure that the
connector is properly oriented.
1. Mount the vibration-proof 4. Take the procedure 5 from the
rubber on the motor (MA4) direction indicated by the arrow
in such a manner that the in the figure.
positional relationship between
the connector for the motor
(MA4) and the half punch holes
in the vibration-proof rubber is
as indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
If the positional relationship
between the motor and vibration-
proof rubber is not as indicated in
the figure, the assembly cannot
properly be mounted in the
cassette set unit.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 5. Connect the connector and
direction indicated by the arrow then secure the clamp.
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-163
MC-164
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-164
MC-165
5.49 Cable Junction Bracket (E) 4. Remove the screws and then
pull out the bracket. Undo the
{SP:INDEX} clamps and then remove the
bracket.
5.49.1 Removal Procedures
u NOTE u
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
The removed bracket has the
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
cable left attached. Exercise care
parts.
not to damage the cable.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamp, and 5.49.2 Reinstallation Procedures
disconnect the connector.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-165
MC-166
5.50 Rubber Roller Driving Gear 5.50.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
5.50.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. in the figure.
3. Remove the rubber roller 2. Properly orient the rubber roller
driving gears. driving gears and mount them.
u NOTE u
Ensure that the mounted rubber
roller driving gears are oriented
as shown.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-166
MC-167
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-167
MC-168
5.51 Spring and Wire (Reference Side) 3. Remove the spring (L = 40 mm)
and then the wire.
{SP:INDEX}
5.51.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.28} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.50} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-168
MC-169
5.51.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.50.2} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
{MC:5.28.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
2. Engage the wire hook with the
side plate of the cassette set
unit. Thread the wire through
the grooves in the housings.
Engage the spring (L = 40
mm) with the side plate of the
cassette set unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-169
MC-170
5.52 Rubber Roller Protection Bracket 3. Remove the retaining screws
from the rubber roller
{SP:INDEX} protection bracket.
5.52.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.50} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-170
MC-171
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 6. Pull the rubber roller protection
from the direction indicated by bracket away from the
the arrow in the figure. underside of the cassette set
unit.
5. Remove the retaining screws 5.52.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the rubber roller
protection bracket. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-171
MC-172
5.53 Rubber Rollers (A) and (B) 3. Remove the spring (L = 40 mm)
and then the wire.
{SP:INDEX}
5.53.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.28} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
4. Remove the KL ring and then
{MC:5.50} Rubber Roller Driving Gear the handle.
{MC:5.51} Spring and Wire (Reference Side)
{MC:5.52} Rubber Roller Protection Bracket
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the spur gears while
from the direction indicated by opening their claws.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-172
MC-173
6. Open the board box. 7. While supporting rubber roller
{MC:5.3.1_Opening the Board Box } (A) by hand to prevent it from
tilting, rotate the housing that
is located to the right of rubber
roller (A) until it is oriented
as shown, and remove the
housing.
u INSTRUCTION u
When removing the housing,
be sure to support the rubber
roller by hand to prevent it from
tilting. If the rubber roller is not
supported when you remove the
housing, the rubber roller may tilt,
causing the opposite housing to
be damaged due to rubber roller
load.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-173
MC-174
8. While supporting rubber roller 9. Remove the bearings from both
(A) by hand to prevent it from ends of rubber roller (A).
tilting, rotate the housing that
is located to the left of rubber
roller (A) until it is oriented
as shown, and remove the
housing.
u INSTRUCTION u
When removing the housing, be
sure to support the rubber roller
by hand to prevent it from tilting.
If the rubber roller is titled, the
housing may be damaged due to
rubber roller load.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-174
MC-175
10. Move the leftmost end of 11. While supporting rubber roller
rubber roller (A) to the right and (B) by hand to prevent it from
pull it away from the side plate. tilting, rotate the housing that
Lower and remove rubber roller is located to the right of rubber
(A). roller (B) until it is oriented
as shown, and remove the
REFERENCE
housing.
For the detailed exploded view
of the rubber roller (A), see the u INSTRUCTION u
"Service Parts List" volume. When removing the housing,
{SP:03N_CASSETTE SET be sure to support the rubber
UNIT 14} roller by hand to prevent it from
tilting. If the rubber roller is not
supported when you remove the
housing, the rubber roller may tilt,
causing the opposite housing to
be damaged due to rubber roller
load.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-175
MC-176
12. While supporting rubber roller 13. Remove the bearings from both
(B) by hand to prevent it from ends of rubber roller (B).
tilting, rotate the housing that
is located to the left of rubber
roller (B) until it is oriented
as shown, and remove the
housing.
u INSTRUCTION u
When removing the housing, be
sure to support the rubber roller
by hand to prevent it from tilting.
If the rubber roller is titled, the
housing may be damaged due to
rubber roller load.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-176
MC-177
14. Move the leftmost end of
rubber roller (B) to the right and
pull it away from the side plate.
Lower and remove rubber roller
(B).
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view
of the rubber roller (B), see the
"Service Parts List" volume.
{SP:03N_CASSETTE SET
UNIT 14}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-177
MC-178
5.53.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Insert the leftmost end of
rubber roller (B) into the side
plate.
1. Insert the rightmost end of
rubber roller (B) into the hole in
the side plate.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Orient rubber roller (B) and then
insert it into the side plate hole.
- Properly distinguish between
rubber rollers (A) and (B). The
left shaft end of rubber roller
(B) does not have a D-cut flat
surface.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-178
MC-179
3. Install the bearings over both 4. While supporting rubber roller
ends of rubber roller (B). (B) by hand to prevent it from
tilting, locate the housing that
is positioned to the left of
rubber roller (B), align it with
the cut in the side plate, and
mount it.
u INSTRUCTION u
When mounting the housing, be
sure to support the rubber roller
by hand to prevent it from tilting.
If the rubber roller is titled, the
housing may be damaged due to
rubber roller load.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-179
MC-180
5. While supporting rubber roller 6. Insert the rightmost end of
(B) by hand to prevent it from rubber roller (A) into the hole in
tilting, locate the housing that the side plate.
is positioned to the right of
rubber roller (B), align it with u INSTRUCTION u
the cut in the side plate, and Orient rubber roller (A) and then
mount it. insert it into the side plate hole.
u INSTRUCTION u
When mounting the housing, be
sure to support the rubber roller
by hand to prevent it from tilting.
If the rubber roller is titled, the
housing may be damaged due to
rubber roller load.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-180
MC-181
7. Insert the leftmost end of 8. Install the bearings over both
rubber roller (A) into the side ends of rubber roller (A).
plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-181
MC-182
9. While supporting rubber roller 10. While supporting rubber roller
(A) by hand to prevent it from (A) by hand to prevent it from
tilting, locate the housing that tilting, locate the housing that
is positioned to the left of is positioned to the right of
rubber roller (A), align it with rubber roller (A), align it with
the cut in the side plate, and the cut in the side plate, and
mount it. mount it.
u INSTRUCTION u u INSTRUCTION u
When mounting the housing, be When mounting the housing, be
sure to support the rubber roller sure to support the rubber roller
by hand to prevent it from tilting. by hand to prevent it from tilting.
If the rubber roller is titled, the If the rubber roller is titled, the
housing may be damaged due to housing may be damaged due to
rubber roller load. rubber roller load.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-182
MC-183
11. Close the board box. 14. Mount the handle and then the
{MC:5.3.2_Closing the Board Box} KL ring.
12. Take the procedures from 13 to 15. Engage the wire hook with the
15 from the direction indicated side plate of the cassette set
by the arrow in the figure. unit. Thread the wire through
the grooves in the housings.
Engage the spring (L = 40
mm) with the side plate of the
cassette set unit.
13. Mount the spur gears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-183
MC-184
16. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.52.2} Rubber Roller Protection Bracket
{MC:5.51.2} Spring and Wire (Reference Side)
{MC:5.50.2} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
{MC:5.28.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.27.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-184
MC-185
5.54 Cassette IN Sensor (SA1) 3. Remove the sensor (SA1).
REFERENCE
{SP:INDEX}
For details on the sensor
5.54.1 Removal Procedures removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts Type)."
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the {MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
parts. (5 mm Type)}
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
5.54.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-185
MC-186
5.55 Actuator Assembly 5.55.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
5.55.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
direction indicated by the arrow from the direction indicated by
in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the screw. While 2. While holding the spring
holding the spring section by section to prevent the
hand, remove the actuator actuator assembly from being
assembly. disassembled, insert the
leading end of the actuator into
the stopper hole, ensure that the
actuator assembly is properly
mounted on the side plate half
punches, and install the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-186
MC-187
3. Press the actuator spring
section to move the actuator.
Verify that the actuator properly
moves.
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-187
MC-188
5.56 Suction Arm HP Sensor (SA6) 2. Manually rotate the gear of the
motor, and check to make sure
{SP:INDEX} that the anti-foreign-matter
shutter assembly has moved to
5.56.1 Removal Procedures its closed position.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the CAUTION
parts. Do not work with your head put
under the board box.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
u NOTE u
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
Check to make sure that the
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box antiforeign-matter shutter
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
assembly has moved to its closed
position.
Otherwise, the tip of the IP
removal arm comes into contact,
preventing the arm from moving.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-188
MC-189
3. Raise the arm (white) and verify 5. Disconnect the connector.
that the sensor (SA6) is visible
beneath the gear.
6. Remove the sensor (SA6).
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 5.56.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-189
MC-190
5.57 Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism HP Sensor (SA7) 3. Undo the clamp and then
disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
5.57.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
4. Remove the screw and then the
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. sensor assembly.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the sensor (SA7).
from the direction indicated by
REFERENCE
the arrow in the figure.
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-190
MC-191
5.57.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-191
MC-192
5.58 "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9) 3. Undo the clamps and remove
the cable.
{SP:INDEX}
5.58.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 4. Remove the screw.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-192
MC-193
5. Lift the sensor (SA9) assembly 7. Remove the sensor (SA9).
and then remove it by pulling it
REFERENCE
forward.
For details on the sensor
u NOTE u removal/installation procedure,
The cable is still attached to see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
the removed sensor assembly. Type)."
Exercise care not to damage the {MC: Appendix 1-1__Sensor
cable. (5 mm Type)}
5.58.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
6. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-193
MC-194
5.59 Solenoid Assembly 3. Remove the tension coil spring
(L = 38 mm).
{SP:INDEX}
5.59.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.58} "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9)
4. Disconnect the connector with
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. tweezers.
u NOTE u
Since the available work space is
limited, use tweezers or like tool
to disconnect the connector.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 5. While supporting the solenoid
from the direction indicated by assembly by hand, remove the
the arrow in the figure. retaining screws.
u NOTE u
When removing the retaining
screws, be sure to support the
solenoid assembly by hand.
If you do not observe this
precaution, the solenoid assembly
may drop.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-194
MC-195
6. While holding the cassette
hold pin, remove the solenoid
assembly by pulling it
obliquely.
u NOTE u
When removing the solenoid
assembly, be sure to hold the
cassette hold pin. If you do not
observe this precaution, the
cassette hold pin may drop and
become lost.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-195
MC-196
5.59.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. While holding the cassette
hold pin, insert the solenoid
assembly bracket into the side
plate and insert the cassette
hold pin into the mounting
position. Mount the solenoid
assembly in the cassette set
unit.
u NOTE u
When mounting the solenoid
assembly, be sure to hold the
cassette hold pin. If you do not
observe this precaution, the
cassette hold pin may drop and
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5 become lost.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-196
MC-197
3. While supporting the solenoid 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
assembly by hand, install the procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
retaining screws.
Reference Part concerned
u NOTE u {MC:5.58.2} "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9)
When installing the retaining
{MC:5.24.2} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
screws, be sure to support the
solenoid assembly by hand. {MC:5.13.2} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
If you do not observe this {MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
precaution, the solenoid assembly
may drop and become lost. * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Connect the connector with
tweezers.
u NOTE u
Since the available work space is
limited, use tweezers or like tool
to connect the connector.
5. Mount the tension coil spring (L
= 38 mm).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-197
MC-198
5.60 Solenoid (SOLA1) and Cassette Hold Sensor (SA2) 3. Remove the screws.
{SP:INDEX}
5.60.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.58} "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9)
4. Remove the solenoid.
{MC:5.59} Solenoid Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the cassette hold pin. 5. Remove the KL ring and then
the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-198
MC-199
6. Remove the sensor (SA2). 5.60.2 Reinstallation Procedures
REFERENCE For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-199
MC-200
5.61 Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15) 4. Remove the screw.
{SP:INDEX}
5.61.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 5. Disconnect the connector.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Disconnect the connector. 6. Lift the sensor (SA15) assembly
and then remove it by pulling it
forward.
u NOTE u
The cable is still attached to
the removed sensor assembly.
Exercise care not to damage the
cable.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-200
MC-201
7. Disconnect the connector. 5.61.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
8. Remove the sensor (SA15).
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-201
MC-202
5.62 Movable Guide Driving Assembly 3. Remove the torsion coil spring.
{SP:INDEX}
5.62.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.61} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
4. Remove the screw.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 9 5. Remove the bearing.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-202
MC-203
6. Remove one end of the spring (L 9. Move the movable guide
= 67 mm) from the shaft. driving assembly rightward
until it reaches a position at
which its protrusion does not
come into contact with the pin.
Slightly pull the leftmost end
of the movable guide driving
assembly. Position the pin
within the cut in the movable
guide driving assembly.
Remove the movable guide
driving assembly.
u NOTES u
- When removing the movable
7. Remove the screw. guide driving assembly, keep it
from coming into contact with
the cable. The leftmost end
of the movable guide driving
assembly might come into
contact with the cable, thereby
damaging the cable.
- When removing the movable
guide driving assembly, keep it
from coming into contact with
the sensor. Failure to observe
this precaution may damage the
sensor.
REFERENCE
8. Remove the pin bracket and For the detailed exploded view
then the spring (L = 67 mm). of the movable guide driving
assembly, see the "Service Parts
List" volume.
{SP:03L_CASSETTE SET
UNIT 12}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-203
MC-204
5.62.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Position the pin within the
cut in the movable guide
driving assembly and mount
the movable guide driving
assembly. Move the rightmost
end of the movable guide
driving assembly rightward.
Move the movable guide driving
assembly leftward until its
protrusion is positioned above
the pin.
u NOTES u
- When mounting the movable
guide driving assembly, keep it
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 9 from coming into contact with
from the direction indicated by the cable. The leftmost end
the arrow in the figure. of the movable guide driving
assembly might come into
contact with the cable, thereby
damaging the cable.
- When mounting the movable
guide driving assembly, keep it
from coming into contact with
the sensor. Failure to observe
this precaution may damage the
sensor.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-204
MC-205
3. Mount the pin bracket and then 6. Verify that one end of the
the spring (L = 67 mm). spring (L = 67 mm) is lodged in
the groove in the pin bracket.
u NOTE u
Install one end of the spring over
the pin bracket shaft.
4. Tighten the screw. 7. Mount the bearing.
5. Engage one end of the spring (L 8. Reinstall the screw.
= 67 mm) with the shaft.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-205
MC-206
9. Mount the torsion coil
spring. Engage its ends with
the movable guide driving
assembly bracket and frame
claw.
10. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.24.2} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.13.2} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.61.2} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-206
MC-207
5.63 Movable Guide Assembly 2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
{SP:INDEX} in the figure.
5.63.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.61} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.5} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
3. Disconnect the connector and
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B) then unclamp the clamps.
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.62} Movable Guide Driving Assembly
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.11} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
{MC:5.12} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.76} Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. 4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-207
MC-208
5. Remove the bearing and then 5.63.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the screws.
6. Remove the sensor (SA14) 1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
assembly. from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
7. Remove the movable guide 2. Mount the movable guide
assembly. assembly.
u NOTE u
When mounting the movable
guide assembly, align the
movable guide assembly shaft
with the D-cut flat surface of the
hole in the unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-208
MC-209
3. Mount the sensor (SA14) 6. Secure the clamps and connect
assembly and then push the the connector.
movable guide assembly in the
direction of the arrow.
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.76.2} Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16)
{MC:5.12.2} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.11.2} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
{MC:5.10.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.6.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.62.2} Movable Guide Driving Assembly
{MC:5.24.2} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
5. Install the screws and then the {MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
bearing.
{MC:5.13.2} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.5.2} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.61.2} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-209
MC-210
5.64 "15x30 Cassette" Movable Guide Assembly 3. Remove the spring (L = 51 mm).
u INSTRUCTION u
{SP:INDEX}
Since the available work space is
5.64.1 Removal Procedures limited, use a tool to remove the
spring.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.5} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
4. Remove the spring (L = 40 mm).
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
u INSTRUCTION u
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
Since the available work space is
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11) limited, use a tool to remove the
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) spring.
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.58} "15x30 Cassette" Identifying Sensor (SA9)
{MC:5.11} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
{MC:5.12} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 5. While supporting the "15x30
from the direction indicated by cassette" movable guide
the arrow in the figure. assembly by hand, remove the
screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-210
MC-211
6. Remove the "15x30 cassette" 5.64.2 Reinstallation Procedures
movable guide assembly.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view
of the "15x30 cassette" movable
guide assembly, see the "Service
Parts List" volume.
{SP:03K_CASSETTE SET
UNIT 11}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-211
MC-212
5.65 IP Removal Arm 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.65.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
3. In the direction indicated in
{MC:5.39} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly DETAIL A, remove the slide
{MC:5.48} IP Transport Motor (MA4) bearing and bearings.
{MC:5.49} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.28} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.50} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
{MC:5.42} Guide (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.43} Guide (Left-Hand)
{MC:5.46} Suction Cup (Left-Hand)
{MC:5.44} Suction Cup Assembly (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.51} Spring and Wire (Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. 4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL B, remove the slide
bearing and bearings.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-212
MC-213
5. Lift the rightmost end of the IP 6. While moving the cable away
removal arm to the uppermost by hand, remove the left end
position by moving it along shaft of the IP removal arm
the groove in the side plate. from the groove in the side
Lower the leftmost end of the IP plate and take the IP removal
removal arm along the groove arm away.
in the side plate, and stop it
in a position at which the left
end shaft of the IP removal arm
comes into contact with the
cable.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-213
MC-214
5.65.2 Reinstallation Procedures 1. Insert the rightmost end of
the IP removal arm into the
uppermost position of the
groove in the side plate. While
moving the cable away, insert
the left end shaft of the IP
removal arm into the groove in
the side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-214
MC-215
2. Lift the leftmost end of the IP 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
removal arm by moving it along from the direction indicated by
the groove in the side plate. the arrow in the figure.
Insert both of the two left end
shafts of the IP removal arm
into the groove in the side plate
and then place the IP removal
arm in a horizontal position.
4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL A, mount the bearings
and slide bearing.
u NOTE u
When mounting the slide bearing,
ensure that it is properly oriented.
5. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL B, mount the bearings
and slide bearing.
u NOTE u
When mounting the slide bearing,
ensure that it is properly oriented.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-215
MC-216
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.51.2} Spring and Wire (Reference Side)
{MC:5.44.2} Suction Cup Assembly (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.46.2} Suction Cup (Left-Hand)
{MC:5.43.2} Guide (Left-Hand)
{MC:5.42.2} Guide (Right-Hand)
{MC:5.50.2} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
{MC:5.28.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.49.2} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.48.2} IP Transport Motor (MA4)
{MC:5.39.2} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
{MC:5.27.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-216
MC-217
5.66 Removal Link Shaft 3. Remove KL ring.
{SP:INDEX}
5.66.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
4. Move the bearing in the
{MC:5.28} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear) direction of the arrow.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-217
MC-218
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 5.66.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
6. Move the IP removal link shaft u NOTE u
and bearing to the left.
Orient the IP removal link shaft so
that its long small-diameter end is
on the left-hand side, and insert it
into the cassette set unit with its
left end positioned forward.
7. Remove the IP removal link
shaft.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-218
MC-219
5.67 Debris Fall Prevention Shutter Assembly 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.67.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
3. Remove the screw.
{MC:5.39} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
{MC:5.28} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.50} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.51} Spring and Wire (Reference Side)
{MC:5.52} Rubber Roller Protection Bracket
{MC:5.53} Rubber Rollers (A) and (B)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the arm and bearing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-219
MC-220
5. Take the procedures from 6 to 8 8. Remove the screw and then the
from the direction indicated by pin.
the arrow in the figure.
6. Remove the screw.
7. Remove the arm and bearing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-220
MC-221
9. Lower the left end shaft of the 5.67.2 Reinstallation Procedures
debris fall prevention shutter
assembly along the cut in the
left-hand side plate. Remove
the debris fall prevention
shutter assembly by pulling its
right end shaft away from the
right-hand side plate.
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view of
the debris fall prevention shutter
assembly, see the "Service Parts
List" volume.
{SP:03N_CASSETTE SET
UNIT 14}
1. Attach the torsion coil springs
to the shafts on both ends
of the debris fall prevention
shutter assembly, and engage
the torsion coil spring hooks
with the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-221
MC-222
2. Insert the right end shaft of the 3. Insert the left end shaft of the
debris fall prevention shutter debris fall prevention shutter
assembly into the hole in the assembly by moving it along
side plate, and engage the end the cut in the side plate.
of the torsion coil spring with
the pin on the side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-222
MC-223
4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7 6. Mount the arm and bearing.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
5. Engage the torsion coil spring 7. Reinstall the screw.
end on the leftmost end of the
debris fall prevention shutter
assembly with the pin, and then
screw down the pin.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-223
MC-224
8. Take the procedures 9 and 10 11. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.53.2} Rubber Rollers (A) and (B)
{MC:5.52.2} Rubber Roller Protection Bracket
{MC:5.51.2} Spring and Wire (Reference Side)
{MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.50.2} Rubber Roller Driving Gear
{MC:5.28.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.39.2} IP Dropping Sensor Assembly
9. Mount the arm and bearing. {MC:5.27.2} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.3.2} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
10. Reinstall the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-224
MC-225
5.68 Antistatic Member Assembly 5.68.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.68.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the antistatic member
assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-225
MC-226
5.69 Guide Plate (Reference Side) 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.69.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.55} Actuator Assembly
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
3. Remove the screws.
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
4. Remove the guide plate
{MC:5.20} Cassette Hold Release Arm (reference side).
{MC:5.26} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)
u NOTE u
{MC:5.30} Cable Junction Bracket (D) When you remove the guide
{MC:5.21} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly plate (reference side), the "15x30
cassette" movable guide assembly
{MC:5.31} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft
roller may drop. Be sure to keep
{MC:5.22} Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly track of the roller.
{MC:5.32} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-226
MC-227
5.69.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-227
MC-228
5.70 Guide Plate (Opposite Reference Side) 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
5.70.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
3. Remove the screws.
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.20} Cassette Hold Release Arm 4. Remove the guide plate
{MC:5.26} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) (opposite reference side).
{MC:5.30} Cable Junction Bracket (D)
{MC:5.21} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
{MC:5.31} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.22} Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly
{MC:5.32} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-228
MC-229
5.70.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-229
MC-230
5.71 Guide Plate (Inch/Metric) 4. Remove the guide plate (inch/
metric).
{SP:INDEX}
5.71.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5.71.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Remove the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-230
MC-231
5.72 Stopper (Reference Side) 2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
{SP:INDEX} in the figure.
5.72.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.55} Actuator Assembly
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
3. Remove the screws and then
the stopper (reference side).
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C)
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.20} Cassette Hold Release Arm 5.72.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.26} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:5.30} Cable Junction Bracket (D)
{MC:5.21} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
{MC:5.31} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.22} Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly
{MC:5.32} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly
{MC:5.69} Guide Plate (Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-231
MC-232
5.73 Stopper (Opposite Reference Side) 2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
{SP:INDEX} in the figure.
5.73.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.78} Cable Junction Bracket (E)
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.16} Sensor Bracket Assembly (SA8/SA10/SA12)
{MC:5.25} Cable Junction Bracket (C)
3. Remove the screws and then
the stopper (opposite reference
{MC:5.27} IP Removal Unit Link Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gear) side).
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.17} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:5.18} Bearing Retaining Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.19} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Gear
{MC:5.29} Suction Arm Driving Motor (MA3)
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.20} Cassette Hold Release Arm
5.73.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:5.26} Cassette Cover Closing Mechanism Driving Motor (MA2)
{MC:5.30} Cable Junction Bracket (D) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:5.21} Cassette IP Holding Arm Assembly
{MC:5.31} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.22} Cassette Inlet Guide Assembly
{MC:5.32} Cassette Cover Closing Assembly
{MC:5.70} Guide Plate (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-232
MC-233
5.74 Stopper (Inch/Metric) 5.74.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
5.74.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.3} Opening/Closing the Board Box
{MC:5.71} Guide Plate (Inch/Metric)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the screws and then
the stopper (inch/metric).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-233
MC-234
5.75 Cassette Cover Opening Pin (Inch/Metric) 2. Remove the KL rings.
{SP:INDEX}
5.75.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.61} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.5} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
3. Remove the shaft.
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.62} Movable Guide Driving Assembly
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.11} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
{MC:5.12} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.76} Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16)
{MC:5.63} Movable Guide Assembly 4. Remove the cassette cover
opening pin (inch/metric).
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-234
MC-235
5.75.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the ring and the
spring, and then the shafts.
1. Insert the cassette cover
opening pin (inch/metric) into
the rail. Align the bearing with
the hole of the movable guide
assembly for placement.
3. Mount the KL rings.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-235
MC-236
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.63.2} Movable Guide Assembly
{MC:5.76.2} Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16)
{MC:5.12.2} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.11.2} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
{MC:5.10.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.6.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.62.2} Movable Guide Driving Assembly
{MC:5.24.2} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.13.2} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.5.2} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.61.2} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-236
MC-237
5.76 Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16) 3. Remove the screw while putting
away the actuator by the hand.
{SP:INDEX}
5.76.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-237
MC-238
4. Pull out the sensor (SA16) 5.76.2 Reinstallation Procedures
assembly, and disconnect the
connector. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
5. Remove the sensor from the
bracket.
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-238
MC-239
5.77 Inch/Metric Sensor Actuator 2. Remove the KL ring.
{SP:INDEX}
5.77.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.1} Cassette Set Unit
{MC:5.61} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.5} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.7} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
3. Raise the actuator, and remove
{MC:5.13} Cable Junction Bracket (B) the straight pin.
{MC:5.9} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.4} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.24} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.62} Movable Guide Driving Assembly
{MC:5.6} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.10} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.11} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
{MC:5.12} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.76} Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16)
{MC:5.63} Movable Guide Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-239
MC-240
4. Raise the bracket, and remove 5.77.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the E ring.
5. Pull out the shaft, and remove 1. Rotate the bracket, and align
the torsion coil spring and the the bracket hole with the
actuator. bearing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-240
MC-241
2. Reinstall the torsion coil spring 4. Raise the actuator, and reinstall
and the actuator, and insert the the straight pin.
shaft.
3. Raise the bracket, and reinstall 5. Mount the KL ring.
the E ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-241
MC-242
6. Hook the end of the torsion coil
spring on a groove between the
actuator and the protrusion.
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.63.2} Movable Guide Assembly
{MC:5.76.2} Inch/Metric Sensor (SA16)
{MC:5.12.2} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly Driving Shaft
{MC:5.11.2} Cassette Cover Opening Assembly
{MC:5.10.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:5.6.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.62.2} Movable Guide Driving Assembly
{MC:5.24.2} Cassette Ejection Sensor (SA11)
{MC:5.4.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:5.9.2} Shutter Drive Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:5.13.2} Cable Junction Bracket (B)
{MC:5.7.2} Cable Junction Bracket (A)
{MC:5.5.2} Cassette Cover Opening Mechanism Driving Motor (MA1)
{MC:5.61.2} Large Cassette Size Sensor (SA15)
{MC:5.1.2} Cassette Set Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-242
MC-243
5.78 Cable Junction Bracket (E) 4. Disconnect the right-hand
connector from the bracket
{SP:INDEX} while depressing both sides of
the connector.
5.78.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the screws to remove
from the direction indicated by the bracket.
the arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamps, and 5.78.2 Reinstallation Procedures
disconnect the left-hand
connector. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-243
MC-244
6. Erasure Unit 3. Remove the screw and unclamp
the clamp.
6.1 Erasure Unit
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
When removing the erasure unit, exercise care in handling as the unit is hot.
6.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the FCR-MB 201 covers.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
4. Disconnect the connectors.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 6 from 5. Remove the retaining screws of
the direction indicated by the the erasure unit.
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-244
MC-245
6. Holding the erasure unit on the 6.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures
position indicated in the figure,
pull it out.
u NOTE u
When removing the erasure unit,
exercise care in handling as the
unit is hot.
1. Take the procedures 2 to 6 from
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-245
MC-246
2. While pushing the erasure 3. Pull out the erasure unit.
unit in the direction of the Slightly rotate the spur gear,
arrow, push it halfway into and then push the erasure unit
the housing. Push into the slowly into the housing.
innermost while exercising care
not to have the cable caught. u NOTE u
If the erasure unit cannot be
u NOTES u pushed into the inner of the
- If the erasure unit cannot be housing, do not forcibly pull it in.
pushed into the inner of the The spur gear of the erasure unit
housing, do not forcibly pull it might get damaged.
in. The spur gear of the erasure
unit might get damaged.
- If the erasure unit can be
pushed into the innermost
without the cassette set unit and
the spur gear of the erasure
unit interfering with each other,
the procedure 4 need not be
performed. Proceed to the
procedure 5.
4. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the erasure unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-246
MC-247
5. Connect the connectors.
6. Retain the cable with the
clamps.
7. Reinstall the FCR-MB 201 covers.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-247
MC-248
6.2 Fan (FANB1) 4. Remove the screws to remove
the guard and the fan (FANB1).
{SP:INDEX}
6.2.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the
figure.
3. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured by
peripheral parts when unclamping
the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-248
MC-249
6.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Install the fan (FANB1).
1. Place the erasure unit in the 4. Connect the connector, and
orientation as indicated in the retain the cable with the clamp.
figure.
2. Verify the mount orientation of 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
the fan (FANB1) by the arrow procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
mark and the orientation of the
Reference Part concerned
cable.
{MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-249
MC-250
6.3 Duct (Air-Intake Side) 6.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
6.3.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:6.2} Fan (FANB1)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the screws to remove
the duct (air-intake side).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-250
MC-251
6.4 Duct (Exhaust Side) 6.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
6.4.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
2. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the
figure.
3. Remove the screws to remove
the duct (exhaust side).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-251
MC-252
6.5 Reflection Plate 6.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
6.5.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
2. Place the erasure unit in the 1. Place the reflection plate with
orientation as indicated in the its notches facing downward
figure. on the erasure unit.
u NOTE u
Exercise care in the orientation of
mounting the reflection plate.
3. Remove the reflection plate. 2. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the reflection plate.
u NOTES u
- Do not strongly grasp the
reflection plate and the filter,
when removing the reflection
plate. Otherwise, the lamp
located inside the filter might get
damaged.
- Do not damage the reflection
face of the reflection plate that
has been removed. If it gets
damaged, IP erasure might not
be performed normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-252
MC-253
3. Check to make sure that the 6.5.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures
clearance is 6 ± 1 mm between
the reflection plate and the
filter around the center of the
reflection plate.
u NOTES u
- When the distance between
the reflection plate and the
filter is within 6±1 mm, it is not
necessary to correct the warp of
the reflection plate. Proceed to
the procedure 4.
- If the clearance between the
reflection plate and the filter is
smaller than 5 mm or larger than 1. Remove the reflection plate.
7 mm, the warp of the reflection
plate need be corrected. u NOTES u
Correct the warp of the reflection - Do not strongly grasp the
plate, referring to “6.5.3 Check/ reflection plate and the filter,
Adjustment Procedures”. when removing the reflection
{MC:6.5.3_Check/Adjustment plate. Otherwise, the lamp
Procedures} located inside the filter might get
damaged.
- Do not damage the reflection
face of the reflection plate that
has been removed. If it gets
damaged, IP erasure might not
be performed normally.
4. Reinstall the erasure unit. 2. Push around the center of the
{MC:6.1.2_Erasure Unit} reflection plate to adjust the
warp of the reflection plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-253
MC-254
3. Place the reflection plate with
its notches facing downward
on the erasure unit.
u NOTE u
Exercise care in the orientation of
mounting the reflection plate.
4. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the reflection plate.
5. Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Erasure Unit}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-254
MC-255
6.6 Cover Bracket 6.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
6.6.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
2. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the
figure.
3. Remove the cover bracket.
u NOTE u
Do not raise nor move the erasure
unit, holding the reflection plate.
If the reflection plate deforms,
correct its warp referring to
the Check, Replacements and
Adjustment of Parts “6.5.3 Check/
Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:6.5.3_Check/
Adjustment Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-255
MC-256
6.7 Brush Roller Assembly 4. Remove the brush roller
assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
6.7.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
2. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the
figure.
u NOTE u
Do not raise nor move the erasure
unit, holding the reflection plate.
If the reflection plate deforms,
correct its warp referring to
the Check, Replacements and
Adjustment of Parts “6.5.3 Check/
Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:6.5.3_Check/
Adjustment Procedures}
3. Remove the retaining screw of
the brush roller assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-256
MC-257
6.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Check to make sure that both
brush roller assembly latches
are inserted into the bracket
holes.
u NOTE u
Improper insertion of the brush
roller assembly latch may cause
an IP jam.
1. Insert the brush roller assembly 3. Put on the retaining screw of
latches into the bracket holes, the brush roller assembly.
before reinstalling.
4. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the
figure.
u NOTE u
Do not raise nor move the erasure
unit, holding the reflection plate.
If the reflection plate deforms,
correct its warp referring to
the Check, Replacements and
Adjustment of Parts “6.5.3 Check/
Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:6.5.3_Check/
Adjustment Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-257
MC-258
5. Check to make sure that the
brush roller assembly latches
and the protrusions are
correctly mounted.
6. Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Erasure Unit}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-258
MC-259
6.8 Brush Roller 4. Remove the KL ring and the
half clutch spur gears.
{SP:INDEX}
6.8.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:6.7} Brush Roller Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. While expanding the latches of 5. While pushing the latches
the spur gear, remove the spur at both ends of the stopper,
gears. remove the stopper.
3. While pushing the latches 6. Remove the brash roller from
at both ends of the stopper, the bracket, and remove the
remove the stopper. bearings at both ends of the
brush roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-259
MC-260
6.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Reinstall the brush roller,
watching the orientations of the
brush roller and the bracket.
u NOTE u
Install the brush roller in the
correct orientation referring to the
figure.
- Insert the shorter shaft end of
the brush roller to a region of the
bracket with a latch.
- Insert the longer shaft end of the
brush roller to a region of the
bracket with a hole.
1. Reinstall the bearings into both
ends of the brush roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-260
MC-261
3. Install the other brush roller 5. Mount the half clutch spur gear
similarly to the procedure 1. and the KL ring on the longer
shaft end.
u NOTE u
Place the half clutch spur gear
in the orientation indicated in the
figure. If reversely placed, the
brush roller assembly will not
work normally.
4. While pushing the latches
at both ends of the stopper,
mount the stopper. Check to
make sure that the stopper will
not disengage.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the
stopper latch hooks the inside
of the bracket and does not
disengage.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-261
MC-262
6. While pushing the latches
at both ends of the stopper,
mount the stopper. Check to
make sure that the stopper will
not disengage.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the
stopper latch hooks the inside
of the bracket and does not
disengage.
7. Reinstall the spur gears.
8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.7.2} Brush Roller Assembly
{MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-262
MC-263
6.9 Filter 3. Remove the screw to remove
the bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
6.9.1 Removal Procedures Exercise care not to damage
the lamp by the bracket when
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
removing the bracket.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:6.5} Reflection Plate
{MC:6.6} Cover Bracket
{MC:6.7} Brush Roller Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-263
MC-264
4. Place the erasure unit in the 6. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the orientation as indicated in the
figure. figure.
5. Lift the filter with a jeweler’s 7. Lift the filter while watching the
screwdriver, and remove it from lamp. Disengage the portion
the half punch. engaged with the half punch,
and remove the filter.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage
the lamp with your fingers when
removing the filter.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-264
MC-265
6.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Insert the end of the filter into
the aperture of the bracket,
move it in the direction of the
arrow, and reinstall the filter.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
lamp when reinstalling the filter.
1. Check the orientation of
mounting the filter.
REFERENCE
Determine the orientation of
mounting the filter by a yellow
portion of the filter.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-265
MC-266
3. Push the filter into the right and 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
left half punches. procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.7.2} Brush Roller Assembly
{MC:6.6.2} Cover Bracket
{MC:6.5.2} Reflection Plate
{MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Reinstall the bracket.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage
the lamp when reinstalling the
bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-266
MC-267
6.10 Spur Gear 6.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
6.10.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
2. Place the erasure unit in the 1. Check the orientation of the
orientation as indicated in the spur gear, and mount on the
figure. shaft.
u NOTE u
Mount the spur gear in the correct
orientation, referring to the figure.
3. Remove the retaining screw of 2. Reinstall the spur gear and the
the spur gear, and remove the shaft, and reinstall the retaining
spur gear and the shaft. screw.
3. Reinstall the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1.2_Erasure Unit}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-267
MC-268
6.11 Thermal Switch (TSWB1) 4. Remove the cable from the
clamp.
{SP:INDEX}
6.11.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the erasure unit.
{MC:6.1_Erasure Unit}
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Take the procedures 6 and 7
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamp, and 6. Unclamp the clamps.
disconnect the connector.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured by
peripheral parts.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-268
MC-269
7. Remove the screws to remove 6.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the thermal switch (TSWB1).
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Put on the thermal switch
(TSWB1) with its shorter cable
upward, and reinstall the
screws.
u NOTE u
Mount the thermal switch in the
correct orientation, noticing the
length of the cable.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-269
MC-270
3. Retain the cable with the clamps. 6. Connect the connector, and
retain the cable with the clamp.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured by
peripheral parts.
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Reinstall the erasure unit.
from the direction indicated by {MC:6.1.2_Erasure Unit}
the arrow in the figure.
5. Push the cable into the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-270
MC-271
6.12 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1) 4. Disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
6.12.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:6.6} Cover Bracket
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the erasure unit in the 5. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the orientation as indicated in the
figure. figure.
3. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-271
MC-272
6. Remove the screw, and
supporting on the position as
indicated in the figure, remove
the lamp temperature sensor
(THB1).
u NOTES u
- Always hold the position as
indicated in the figure for the
operation. Otherwise, the lamp
temperature sensor (THB1)
might get damaged.
- Exercise care not to damage
the tip of the lamp temperature
sensor (THB1). If damaged, the
lamp temperature sensor (THB1)
may not work normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-272
MC-273
6.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation as indicated in the
figure.
1. Insert the lamp temperature 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
sensor (THB1) into the lamp from the direction indicated by
assembly hole while exercising the arrow in the figure.
care not to damage the tip of
the sensor. Reinstall the screw.
u NOTES u
- Always hold the position as
indicated in the figure for the
operation. Otherwise, the lamp
temperature sensor (THB1)
might get damaged.
- Exercise care not to damage
the tip of the lamp temperature
sensor (THB1). If damaged, the
lamp temperature sensor (THB1) 4. Connect the connector.
may not work normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-273
MC-274
5. Connect the connectors.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.6.2} Cover Bracket
{MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-274
MC-275
6.13 Erasure Assembly 3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
{SP:INDEX} Reference Part concerned
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts {MC:6.7.2} Brush Roller Assembly
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts. {MC:6.5.2} Reflection Plate
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.4.2} Duct (Exhaust Side)
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit {MC:6.3.2} Duct (Air-Intake Side)
{MC:6.2} Fan (FANB1) {MC:6.2.2} Fan (FANB1)
{MC:6.3} Duct (Air-Intake Side) {MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
{MC:6.4} Duct (Exhaust Side)
{MC:6.5} Reflection Plate
{MC:6.7} Brush Roller Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Replace the erasure assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-275
MC-276
6.14 INV Board (A) 3. Remove the screws.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
u NOTE u
Three INV boards (A) are mounted on the erasure unit. Although only one board is shown in
the procedures below, two other boards can be removed/reinstalled similarly.
6.14.1 Removal Procedures 4. Hold the positions as indicated
in the figure, slightly raise the
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts INV board from the ERS23A
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the board, and remove.
parts.
u NOTES u
Reference Part concerned
- Always lift vertically from the
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit ERS23A board to remove.
{MC:6.6} Cover Bracket Otherwise, the board connector
part might get damaged.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
- Do not lift the INV board too
high. The cable connected from
the lamp assembly might get
damaged.
2. Place the erasure unit in the 5. Disconnect the connectors, and
orientation as indicated in the remove the INV board.
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-276
MC-277
6.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Connect the connector to the
upper connector of the INV
board with the white cable of
the cables retained with the
upper clamp upward. Connect
the connector to the lower
connector of the INV board
with the white cable of the two
cables retained with the lower
clamp upward.
u NOTE u
Refer to the Machine Description
volume “3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations” for the
1. Place the erasure unit in the positional relation between the
orientation as indicated in the connector of the INV board and
figure. the cables connected with it.
{MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-277
MC-278
3. Holding the positions as 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
indicated in the figure, procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
insert the INV board into the
Reference Part concerned
innermost of the connectors of
the ERS23A board. {MC:6.6.2} Cover Bracket
u NOTES u {MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
- Be sure to push the INV board * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
into the specified position on
the ERS23A board. If the INV
board is mounted on a wrong
position, the erasure lamp will
not work normally. Refer to the
Machine Description volume
“3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and Board
Configurations” for details of the
mounting position of the INV
board.
{MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations}
- Be sure to push in the connector
vertically to the board. If pushed
slantly, the board might get
damaged.
- Always push in the connector to
the innermost.
4. Reinstall the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-278
MC-279
6.15 INV Board (B) 3. Remove the screws.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
u NOTE u
Three INV boards (B) are mounted on the erasure unit. Although only one board is shown in
the procedures below, two other boards can be removed/reinstalled similarly.
6.15.1 Removal Procedures 4. Hold the positions as indicated
in the figure, slightly raise the
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts INV board from the ERS23A
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the board, and remove.
parts.
u NOTES u
Reference Part concerned
- Always lift vertically from the
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit ERS23A board to remove.
{MC:6.6} Cover Bracket Otherwise, the board connector
part might get damaged.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
- Do not lift the INV board too
high. The cable connected from
the lamp assembly might get
damaged.
2. Place the erasure unit in the 5. Disconnect the connector, and
orientation as indicated in the remove the INV board.
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-279
MC-280
6.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Connect the connector to the
upper connector of the INV
board with the white cable of
the cables retained with the
upper clamp upward. Connect
the connector to the lower
connector of the INV board
with the white cable of the two
cables retained with the lower
clamp upward.
u NOTE u
Refer to the Machine Description
volume “3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations” for the
1. Place the erasure unit in the positional relation between the
orientation as indicated in the connector of the INV board and
figure. the cables connected with it.
{MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-280
MC-281
3. Holding the positions as 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
indicated in the figure, procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
insert the INV board into the
Reference Part concerned
innermost of the connectors of
the ERS23A board. {MC:6.6.2} Cover Bracket
u NOTES u {MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
- Be sure to push the INV board * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
into the specified position on
the ERS23A board. If the INV
board is mounted on a wrong
position, the erasure lamp will
not work normally. Refer to the
Machine Description volume
“3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and Board
Configurations” for details of the
mounting position of the INV
board.
{MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations}
- Be sure to push in the connector
vertically to the board. If pushed
slantly, the board might get
damaged.
- Always push in the connector to
28
the innermost.
4. Reinstall the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-281
MC-282
6.16 ERS23A Board 3. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
6.16.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit 4. Disconnect the connector.
{MC:6.6} Cover Bracket
{MC:6.14} INV Board (A)
{MC:6.15} INV Board (B)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the erasure unit in the 5. Remove the screws to remove
orientation as indicated in the the ERS23A board.
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-282
MC-283
6.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-283
MC-284
6.17 Lamp Assembly 4. Take the procedures 5 to 9 from
the direction indicated by the
{SP:INDEX} arrow in the figure.
6.17.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:6.3} Duct (Air-Intake Side)
{MC:6.4} Duct (Exhaust Side)
{MC:6.5} Reflection Plate
{MC:6.6} Cover Bracket
{MC:6.10} Spur Gear
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Disconnect the connector of the thermal switch (TSWB1), and unclamp the
clamps which retain the cable. Refer to the procedures 3 to 6 of “6.12 Thermal
Switch (TSWB1) for detailed procedures.
{MC:6.11_Thermal Switch (TSWB1)}
REFERENCE
The thermal switch (TSWB1) is attached to the lamp assembly for replacement. You
need not remove the switch in this procedure.
3. Disconnect the connector of the lamp temperature sensor (THB1). Refer to the
procedure 4 of “6.13 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1)” for detailed procedures.
{MC:6.12_Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1)}
REFERENCE
The lamp temperature sensor (THB1) is attached to the lamp assembly for replacement.
You need not remove the sensor in this procedure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-284
MC-285
5. Unclamp the clamps. 7. Unclamp the clamps.
6. Disconnect the connectors. 8. Disconnect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-285
MC-286
9. Remove the retaining screws of 10. Take the procedure 11 from the
the lamp assembly. direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
u NOTE u
Do not strongly grasp the filter
when removing the screws. The
lamp located inside the filter might
get damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-286
MC-287
11. Slightly lift the lamp assembly, 12. Remove the cable clamp to
holding the positions as remove the bracket.
indicated in the figure. Pull
out the right-hand side slowly
toward you. Shift the lamp
assembly slightly sideward,
and remove the assembly
toward you while watching the
connector and the cable.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to have the
connector and the cable caught
by the bracket, when removing
the lamp assembly. The
connector and the cable might get
damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-287
MC-288
6.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Check the mount orientation of
the lamp assembly.
REFERENCE
Determine the mount orientation
of the lamp assembly by the
yellow portion of the filter.
1. Attach the bracket to the lamp
assembly. Put the cables on the
lamp assembly hooks, and then
attach the cable clamps.
REFERENCES
- For the lamp assembly with a
part No. of 360Y0137C or later,
you can attach the bracket by
means of half punches of the
lamp assembly.
- For the lamp assembly with
a part No. of 360Y0137A
or earlier, no half punch for
positioning is not present on the
lamp assembly. Position the
bracket through screw holes,
and attach the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-288
MC-289
3. Put in the left-hand cables of 4. Put in the right-hand cables of
the lamp assembly, and mount the lamp assembly. Push in the
the assembly on the erasure lamp assembly while exercising
unit. Push to the left while care not to have the connector
watching the connectors on and the cable caught.
the left-hand side of the lamp
assembly. u NOTE u
Exercise care not to have the
u NOTE u connector and the cable caught
Exercise care not to have the by the bracket, when pushing
connector and the cable caught in the lamp assembly. The
by the bracket, when pushing connector and the cable might get
in the lamp assembly. The damaged.
connector and the cable might get
damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-289
MC-290
5. Push in the lower part of the 8. Reinstall the retaining screws
lamp assembly into the bracket. of the lamp assembly.
u NOTE u
Do not strongly grasp the filter
when reinstalling the screws. The
lamp located inside the filter might
get damaged.
6. Check to make sure that the
screws of the lamp assembly
are fitted into the holes of the
bracket.
7. Take the procedures 8 to 12
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-290
MC-291
9. Connect the cable to the 11. Connect the cable to the
connector. connector.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Refer to the Machine Description Refer to the Machine Description
volume “3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and volume “3.2.3 Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations” for the Board Configurations” for the
positional relation between the positional relation between the
connector of the INV board and connector of the INV board and
the cables connected with it. the cables connected with it.
{MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and {MD:3.2.3_Erasure Lamp and
Board Configurations} Board Configurations}
10. Retain the cables with the 12. Retain the cables with the
clamps. clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-291
MC-292
13. Connect the connector of the lamp temperature sensor (THB1). Refer to the
reinstallation procedure 4 of “6.13 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1)” for detailed
procedures.
{MC:6.12.2_Lamp Temperature Sensor (THB1)}
14. Retain the cable of the thermal switch (TSWB1) with clamps, and connect the
connector. Refer to the reinstallation procedures 3 to 6 of “6.12 Thermal Switch
(TSWB1)” for detailed procedures.
{MC:6.11.2_Thermal Switch (TSWB1)}
15. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:6.10.2} Spur Gear
{MC:6.6.2} Cover Bracket
{MC:6.5.2} Reflection Plate
{MC:6.4.2} Duct (Exhaust Side)
{MC:6.3.2} Duct (Air-Intake Side)
{MC:6.1.2} Erasure Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-292
MC-293
7. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 3. Unclamp the clamps, and
disconnect the connectors.
Move the cable toward the side
face and hook on the clamp
7.1 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit for the protection of the cable.
Close the clamp.
{SP:INDEX}
7.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.4} Left-Hand Cover Plate
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.3} Rear Cover Plate
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-293
MC-294
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 6. Remove the retaining screw of
from the direction indicated by the side-positioning conveyor
the arrow in the figure. unit.
5. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
Set aside the cable out of the
housing for the protection of
the cable.
u NOTE u
Be sure to put the cable aside out
of the housing. Otherwise, the
cable and the connector might get
caught when removing/reinstalling
the side-positioning conveyor unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-294
MC-295
7. Take the procedures 8 and 9 9. Supporting the side-positioning
from the direction indicated by conveyor unit on the positions
the arrow in the figure. indicated in the figure, pull the
unit straight toward you.
u NOTE u
Always support the unit on the
positions indicated in the figure
for this operation. If the unit is
pulled out with other positions
supported, components of the
side-positioning conveyor unit
might get damaged.
8. Remove the retaining screws of
the side-positioning conveyor
unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-295
MC-296
7.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Push in the side-positioning
conveyor unit straight halfway
into the housing. Push in
the lower part of the side-
positioning conveyor unit
horizontally into the housing,
and then push in the upper
part.
u NOTE u
Always support the unit on the
positions indicated in the figure
for this operation. If the unit is
pulled out with other positions
supported, components of the
1. Take the procedures from 2 and side-positioning conveyor unit
3 from the direction indicated might get damaged.
by the arrow in the figure.
2. Hold the side-positioning
conveyor unit as indicated in
the figure, and mount it on the
housing.
u NOTE u
Always support the unit on the
positions indicated in the figure
for this operation. If the unit is
pulled out with other positions
supported, components of the
side-positioning conveyor unit
might get damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-296
MC-297
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Take the procedure 8 from the
from the direction indicated by direction indicated by the arrow
the arrow in the figure. in the figure.
5. Reinstall the retaining screw of 8. Reinstall the retaining screws
the side-positioning conveyor of the side-positioning
unit. conveyor unit.
6. Connect the connector, and
retain the cable with the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-297
MC-298
9. Take the procedure 10 from the 10. Unclamp the clamp. Remove
direction indicated by the arrow the cable from the clamp,
in the figure. and move it toward the rear
of the housing. Connect the
connectors, and retain the
cable with the clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-298
MC-299
11. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.3.2} Rear Cover Plate
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.4.2} Left-Hand Cover Plate
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-299
MC-300
7.2 Sensor Assembly 4. Disconnect the connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
7.2.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the screws. Remove
from the direction indicated by the sensor assembly.
the arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-300
MC-301
7.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Connect connector SC2 to
the upper sensor. Connect
connector SC1 to the lower
sensor.
u NOTE u
Note the markings on the sensor
assembly and properly connect
the connectors. If the connectors
are erroneously connected,
the machine does not operate
normally.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4 4. Verify that the cable ties are
from the direction indicated by positioned as indicated in the
the arrow in the figure. figure, and then secure the
cable with the clamps.
2. Mount the sensor assembly 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
and reinstall the screws. procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-301
MC-302
7.3 Side-Positioning Grip HP Sensor (SC1) and Side- 7.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures
Positioning Grip Release Position Sensor (SC2) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
7.3.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Note the markings on the
bracket and remove the
sensors (SC1 and SC2).
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-302
MC-303
7.4 Timing Belt 4. Remove the timing belt.
{SP:INDEX}
7.4.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the tension coil spring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-303
MC-304
7.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Mount the tension coil spring.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4 4. Verify that the timing belt is
from the direction indicated by threaded through the path
the arrow in the figure. indicated in the figure.
2. Thread the timing belt through 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
the path indicated in the figure. procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-304
MC-305
7.5 Tensioner Assembly 7.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
7.5.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the KL ring. Remove
the tensioner assembly.
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view of
the tensioner assembly, see the
"Service Parts List" volume.
{SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING
CONVEYOR 3}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-305
MC-306
7.6 Guide (A) 7.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
7.6.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts 1. Orient the side-positioning
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the conveyor unit as indicated in
parts. the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the screws. Remove
the guide (A).
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view
of the guide (A), see the "Service
Parts List" volume. 2. Place one end of the guide (A)
{SP:05A_SIDE-POSITIONING in its mounting position and
CONVEYOR 1} screw it down. Place the other
end in its mounting position
and screw it down to secure
the guide (A).
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-306
MC-307
7.7 Guide (B) 7.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
7.7.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.6} Guide (A)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the screws. Remove
the guide (B).
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view
of the guide (B), see the "Service
Parts List" volume.
{SP:05A_SIDE-POSITIONING
CONVEYOR 1}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-307
MC-308
7.8 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly 7.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
7.8.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the screws. Remove
the shock-absorbing roller
assembly.
REFERENCE
For the detailed exploded view
of the shock-absorbing roller
assembly, see the "Service Parts
List" volume.
{SP:05A_SIDE-POSITIONING
CONVEYOR}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-308
MC-309
7.9 Leaf Spring (Reference Side) 7.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
7.9.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts 1. Verify that the leaf spring is
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the properly mounted on the half
parts. punch, and then install the
screw.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit u NOTE u
Before installing the screw, be
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
sure to verify that the leaf spring
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. is properly mounted on the half
punch.
2. Remove the screw and then the
leaf spring.
2. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-309
MC-310
7.10 Leaf Spring (Opposite Reference Side) 7.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
7.10.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the 1. Verify that the leaf spring is
parts. properly mounted on the half
punch, and then install the
Reference Part concerned
screw.
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
u NOTE u
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
Before installing the screw, be
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly sure to verify that the leaf spring
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. is properly mounted on the half
punch.
2. Remove the screw and then the
leaf spring.
2. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-310
MC-311
7.11 Planetary Gear Assembly 4. Remove the planetary gear
assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
7.11.1 Removal Procedures For the detailed exploded view of
the planetary gear assembly, see
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts the "Service Parts List" volume.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the {SP:05B_SIDE-POSITIONING
parts. CONVEYOR 2}
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the spur gears while 7.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures
opening their claws.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-311
MC-312
7.12 Spur Gear (Reference Side) 7.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
7.12.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the spur gears while
opening their claws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-312
MC-313
7.13 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) 7.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{SP:INDEX}
7.13.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the spur gears while
opening their claws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-313
MC-314
7.14 Grip Arm (Reference Side) 2. Remove the KL rings. Remove
the spacers, bearings, and grip
{SP:INDEX} arm.
7.14.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-314
MC-315
7.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Before mounting the side-positioning conveyor unit in the housing, adjust the
phases of the right- and left-hand grip arms.
{MC:7.14.3_Check/Adjustment Procedure}
u NOTE u
Before mounting the side-positioning conveyor unit in the housing, be sure to adjust the
phases of the right- and left-hand grip arms. If you mount the side-positioning conveyor
unit in the housing without properly adjusting the phases of the grip arms, the machine
does not operate normally.
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
1. Mount the grip arm, bearings, {MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
and spacers while keeping
them from coming into contact {MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
with the leaf spring. Mount the * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
KL rings.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-315
MC-316
7.14.3 Check/Adjustment Procedure 2. With a thin-blade screwdriver,
rotate the shaft at least one
turn clockwise.
REFERENCE
If you continuously rotate the shaft
with a thin-blade screwdriver, the
gears disengage from the grip
arms and then engage with the
grip arms, generating a hitting
sound. However, it does not
constitute any machine failure.
1. Verify that the right- and left-
hand grip arms are mounted in
the side-positioning conveyor
unit.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify that the right-
and left-hand grip arms are
mounted. If either of them is
not mounted, mount it and then
proceed to perform procedures 2
and beyond.
- For mounting the grip arm
(reference side)
{MC:7.14.2_Grip Arm
(Reference Side)}
- For mounting the grip arm
(opposite reference side)
{MC:7.15.2_Grip Arm
(Opposite Reference Side)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-316
MC-317
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 6. Perform the grip arm installation procedure.
from the direction indicated by - To perform the grip arm (reference side) installation procedure
the arrow in the figure. {MC:7.14.2_Grip Arm (Reference Side)}
- To perform the grip arm (opposite reference side) installation procedure
{MC:7.15.2_Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)}
4. In the direction indicated
in DETAIL A, verify that the
lowermost tooth of the grip arm
is in mesh with the spur gear.
u NOTE u
If the lowermost tooth of the grip
arm is not in mesh with the spur
gear, make adjustment again by
performing procedure 2.
5. In the direction indicated
in DETAIL B, verify that the
lowermost tooth of the grip arm
is in mesh with the spur gear.
u NOTE u
If the lowermost tooth of the grip
arm is not in mesh with the spur
gear, make adjustment again by
performing procedure 2.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-317
MC-318
7.15 Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side) 2. Remove the KL rings. Remove
the spacers, bearings, and grip
{SP:INDEX} arm.
7.15.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.13} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-318
MC-319
7.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. To adjust the phases of the grip arms, remove the sensor assembly.
{MC:7.2_Sensor Assembly}
u NOTE u
If the sensor assembly is already removed, there is no need to perform procedure 2.
Skip to procedure 3.
3. Before mounting the side-positioning conveyor unit in the housing, adjust the
phases of the right- and left-hand grip arms.
{MC:7.14.3_Check/Adjustment Procedure}
u NOTE u
Before mounting the side-positioning conveyor unit in the housing, be sure to adjust the
phases of the right- and left-hand grip arms. If you mount the side-positioning conveyor
unit in the housing without properly adjusting the phases of the grip arms, the machine
1. Mount the grip arm, bearings, does not operate normally.
and spacers while keeping
them from coming into contact 4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
with the leaf spring. Mount the procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
KL rings.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.13.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.1.2} Sensor Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-319
MC-320
7.16 Grip Shaft 3. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL A, remove the E-ring
{SP:INDEX} and then the spur gear.
Remove the KL ring, spur gear,
7.16.1 Removal Procedures and bearing.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.14} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
4. In the direction indicated in
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt DETAIL B, remove the KL ring.
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly Remove the spur gear and then
the bearing.
{MC:7.13} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.15} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Take the procedure 6 from the
from the direction indicated by direction indicated by the arrow
the arrow in the figure. in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-320
MC-321
6. Pull out the grip shaft. 7.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
2. Verify that the grooved shaft
end is positioned toward the
reference side, and then insert
the grip shaft into its position.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-321
MC-322
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.15.2} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.13.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.14.2} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
4. Verify that the spur gear * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
protrusion faces the side plate,
and then mount the bearing,
spur gear, and KL ring.
5. Verify that the spur gear
protrusion faces the side plate,
and then mount the bearing,
spur gear, and KL ring. Mount
the spur gear and E-ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-322
MC-323
7.17 IP Sensor (SC3) 4. Remove the screws. Remove
the sensor (SC3).
{SP:INDEX}
7.17.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 7.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Disconnect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-323
MC-324
7.18 "15x30/24x30 IP Width" Identifying Sensor (SC9) 3. Remove the sensor assembly
retaining screws.
{SP:INDEX}
7.18.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.3} Rear Cover Plate
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the cable from the
clamp and then remove the
sensor assembly by pulling it
out.
u NOTE u
The cable is attached to the
removed sensor assembly.
Exercise care not to damage the
cable.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-324
MC-325
5. Disconnect the connector. 7.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures
Remove the screw and then the
sensor (SC9). For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-325
MC-326
7.19 Reference Block Assembly 1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
{SP:INDEX} parts.
7.19.1 Removal Procedures l Removing reference block assemblies (A) and (B)
Reference Part concerned
u NOTES u
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
- The same removal steps are
applied to reference block {MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
assemblies (A), (B), and (C)
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
except procedure 1.
- Reference block assemblies (A) * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
and (B) are the same parts.
l Removing reference block assembly (C)
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.14} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-326
MC-327
3. Remove the reference block
assembly retaining screw.
4. Remove the reference block
assembly by moving it
downward.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-327
MC-328
7.19.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Press the arm to verify that
the guide is at its lowermost
u NOTES u position.
- The same removal steps are
u NOTE u
applied to reference block
Be sure to verify that the guide
assemblies (A), (B), and (C)
is at its lowermost position. If
except procedure 8.
the guide is not at its lowermost
- Reference block assemblies (A)
position, the proper phase does
and (B) are the same parts.
not prevail after installation.
1. Verify that the reference block driving mechanism is installed.
u NOTE u
If the reference block driving mechanism is not installed, install it as directed under
"7.25 Reference Block Driving Mechanism." If the reference block driving mechanism is
not installed, the reference block assembly cannot properly be installed.
{MC:7.25_Reference Block Driving Mechanism}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-328
MC-329
3. Verify that the installed 6. While the guide is retained with
reference block assembly cap a 2.0 mm diameter jeweler's
is oriented as shown in the screwdriver or wrench, insert
figure. the reference block assembly
u NOTE u into its position with the left-
hand protrusion aligned with
Be sure to verify that the installed
the hole in the side plate. Lift
cap is properly oriented. If the
the reference block assembly
cap is reversed, the reference
while pressing it against the
block assembly cannot be
side plate, and engage the
installed.
upper protrusion with the side
plate.
u NOTE u
Be sure to mount the reference
4. Verify that the curved surface block assembly while the guide
of the guide is visible. Insert is retained with a 2.0 mm
a 2.0 mm diameter jeweler's diameter jeweler's screwdriver
screwdriver or wrench into or wrench. If you remove the
the hole in the reference block jeweler's screwdriver or wrench
assembly to secure the guide, before completion of this step, an
which is positioned inside.
improper phase adjustment may
u NOTE u
result.
Be sure to secure the guide, which
is positioned inside, with a 2.0 mm
diameter jeweler's screwdriver
or wrench. If a size other than
specified is used, an improper
phase adjustment may result at the
time of reference block assembly
installation.
5. Take the procedure 6 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-329
MC-330
7. Install the reference block
assembly screw and then
remove the jeweler's
screwdriver or wrench.
8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
l For mounting reference block assembly (A) or (B)
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
l For mounting reference block assembly (C)
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.14.2} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-330
MC-331
7.20 Cable Junction Bracket 4. Remove the retaining screws of
the bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
7.20.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the bracket by tilting it
from the direction indicated by forward.
the arrow in the figure.
3. Unclamp the clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-331
MC-332
7.20.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the bracket retaining
screws.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4 4. Secure the cable with the
from the direction indicated by clamps.
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the bracket by inserting 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
its lower end into a section that procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
is shaded in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-332
MC-333
7.21 Side-Positioning Conveyor Roller Grip Release Motor 3. Take the procedures from 4 to 6
from the direction indicated by
(MC2) the arrow in the figure.
{SP:INDEX}
7.21.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the KL ring and then 4. Undo the clamps. Disconnect
the spur gear. connector MC2 by pressing its
claw.
u NOTE u
Do not disconnect connector
MC4.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-333
MC-334
5. While supporting the motor 6. Position the shaft end of the
(MC2) by hand, remove the motor (MC2) so that its shape
retaining screws. matches the side plate hole,
and then pull out the motor.
u NOTE u
If you remove the retaining
screws without supporting the
motor (MC2) by hand, the motor
may drop.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-334
MC-335
7.21.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. While supporting the motor
(MC2) by hand, install the
retaining screws.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Position the shaft end of the 4. Connect the connector.
motor (MC2) so that its shape Verify that the cable ties and
matches the side plate hole, connectors are positioned as
and then insert the motor into indicated in the figure, and
its position. then secure the cable with the
clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-335
MC-336
5. Mount the spur gear and then
the KL ring.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-336
MC-337
7.22 Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7) 4. Remove the sensor assembly
retaining screw.
{SP:INDEX}
7.22.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the side-positioning 5. Rotate the sensor assembly
conveyor unit as indicated in until the sensor (SC7) becomes
the figure. visible, and then remove the
sensor assembly.
u NOTE u
The cable is attached to the
removed sensor assembly.
Exercise care not to damage the
cable.
3. Take the procedures from 4 to 6 6. Disconnect the connector and
from the direction indicated by then remove the sensor (SC7).
the arrow in the figure.
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-337
MC-338
7.22.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Rotate the sensor assembly
until it is properly oriented
for mounting. Verify that the
sensor assembly is properly
mounted on the half punch, and
then install the screw.
u NOTE u
Before installing the screw, be
sure to verify that the sensor
assembly is properly mounted on
the half punch.
1. Take the procedures from 2 and
3 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the sensor (SC7) on 4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
the bracket. Connect the procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
connector to the sensor (SC7).
Reference Part concerned
REFERENCE {MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure, * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-338
MC-339
7.23 Side-Positioning Latch Stroke Sensor (SC10) 4. Remove the sensor assembly
retaining screws.
{SP:INDEX}
7.23.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the side-positioning 5. Pull out the sensor assembly.
conveyor unit as indicated in
the figure. u NOTE u
The cable is still attached to
the removed sensor assembly.
Exercise care not to damage the
cable.
3. Take the procedures from 4 to 6 6. Disconnect the connector and
from the direction indicated by then remove the sensor (SC10).
the arrow in the figure.
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-339
MC-340
7.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Verify that the sensor assembly
is properly mounted on the
half punch, and then install the
screw.
u NOTE u
Before installing the screw, be
sure to verify that the sensor
assembly is properly mounted on
the half punch.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the sensor (SC10) on 4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
the bracket. Connect the procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
connector to the sensor (SC10).
Reference Part concerned
REFERENCE
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure, * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-340
MC-341
7.24 Claw Driving Unit 3. Rotate the spur gear of the
motor (MC3) in the direction of
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure to verify
that the shaft assembly claw is
7.24.1 Removal Procedures positioned nearest the sensor
(SC6).
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Verify the position of the shaft 4. Rotate the spur gear of the
assembly claw. motor (MC3) in the direction of
- If the shaft assembly claw the arrow in the figure to verify
is positioned in the CLOSE that the shaft assembly claw is
position of the sensor (SC6), moved to the CLOSE position
skip to procedure 5. of the sensor (SC6).
- If the shaft assembly claw is
u NOTE u
not positioned in the CLOSE
position of the sensor (SC6), Be sure to verify that the claw is
perform procedures 3 and 4 to moved to the CLOSE position of
adjust the claw position. the sensor (SC6). If you do not
observe this precaution, the claw
may break when you remove the
claw driving section.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-341
MC-342
5. In the direction indicated in 6. Take the procedures from 7 to 9
DETAIL A, access the spur gear from the direction indicated by
of the motor (MC3). Rotate the the arrow in the figure.
spur gear in the direction of
the arrow in the figure to move
the arm claws. In the direction
indicated in DETAIL B, verify
that the arm claws are moved
to the inside of the side plate.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to verify that the arm
claws are moved to the inside
of the side plate. If you do not
observe this precaution, the arm
claws may be caught by the side 7. Unclamp the clamps.
plate and damaged when you
remove the claw driving unit.
- Be sure to rotate the spur
gear of the motor (MC3) in
the specified direction only.
Rotating the spur gear in an
opposite direction shifts the claw
position that was adjusted in
procedures 3 and 4.
- If the motor (MC3) is
inadvertently rotated in an
opposite direction, return to
procedure 3 and adjust the shaft
assembly claw position again.
8. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTE u
Do not disconnect connector
MC2.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-342
MC-343
9. Orient the side-positioning 12. In the direction indicated in
conveyor unit as indicated in DETAIL B, remove the claw
the figure. driving unit retaining screws.
10. Take the procedures 11 and 12
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
11. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL A, remove the claw
driving unit retaining screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-343
MC-344
13. Hold the portions indicated
in the figure and slightly pull
the claw driving unit. While
verifying that the arm claws
are not interfering with the side
plate, squarely pull out the claw
driving unit exercising care not
to tilt it leftward or rightward.
u NOTES u
- When you pull out the claw
driving unit, be sure to verify that
the arm claws are not interfering
with the side plate. Failure to
observe this precaution may
break the claws.
- Be sure to squarely pull out the
claw driving unit while exercising
care not to tilt it leftward or
rightward. If you do not observe
this precaution, the arm claws
may interfere with the side plate
and become damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-344
MC-345
7.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Rotate the spur gear of the
motor (MC3) in the direction of
the arrow in the figure to verify
that the shaft assembly claw is
positioned nearest the sensor
(SC6).
1. Verify the position of the shaft 3. Rotate the spur gear of the
assembly claw. motor (MC3) in the direction of
- If the shaft assembly claw the arrow in the figure to verify
is positioned in the CLOSE that the shaft assembly claw is
position of the sensor (SC6), moved to the CLOSE position
skip to procedure 4. of the sensor (SC6).
- If the shaft assembly claw is
u NOTE u
not positioned in the CLOSE
position of the sensor (SC6), Be sure to verify that the claw is
perform procedures 2 and 3 to moved to the CLOSE position of
adjust the claw position. the sensor (SC6). If you do not
observe this precaution, the claw
may break when you install the
claw driving section.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-345
MC-346
4. Rotate the spur gear of the 5. Hold the claw driving unit as
motor (MC3) in the direction indicated in the figure and
indicated in the figure until the insert the arm claws into the
end surfaces of the arms align holes in the side plate. Install
with the edge of the bracket. the right-hand side of the claw
Verify that the end surfaces of driving unit over the lower
the arms have moved to the end of the screw shown, and
edge of the bracket. then push the claw driving unit
inward.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to verify that the end u NOTE u
surfaces of the arms have Be sure to push the claw driving
moved to the edge of the unit inward with the claws inserted
bracket. If you do not observe into the holes in the side plate.
this precaution, the arm claws Failure to observe this precaution
may be caught by the side plate may damage the claw.
and damaged when you install
the claw driving unit.
- Be sure to rotate the spur
gear of the motor (MC3) in
the specified direction only.
Rotating the spur gear in an
opposite direction shifts the claw
position that was adjusted in
procedures 2 and 3.
- If the motor (MC3) is
inadvertently rotated in an
opposite direction, return to
procedure 2 and adjust the
shaft assembly claw position
again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-346
MC-347
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8 9. Orient the side-positioning
from the direction indicated by conveyor unit as indicated in
the arrow in the figure. the figure.
7. In the direction indicated in 10. Take the procedures 11 and 12
DETAIL A, install the claw from the direction indicated by
driving unit retaining screws. the arrow in the figure.
8. In the direction indicated in 11. Connect the connectors.
DETAIL B, install the claw
driving unit retaining screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-347
MC-348
12. Verify that the two cable ties
and connectors (MC2 and MC4)
are positioned as indicated in
the figure, and then secure the
cable with the clamps.
13. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-348
MC-349
7.25 Reference Block Driving Mechanism 3. Remove the tension coil spring.
{SP:INDEX}
7.25.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the E ring.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6 5. Remove the arm.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-349
MC-350
6. Remove the screws and then 7.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the rack assemblies.
u NOTE u
When installing the reference block driving mechanism, ensure that the reference
block assembly is installed in the side-positioning conveyor unit. If the reference block
assembly is not installed, the reference block driving mechanism cannot be properly
installed. If the reference block assembly is removed, install it as directed under "7.19.2
Reference Block Assembly."
{MC:7.19.2_Reference Block Assembly}
7. Pull the guides out of the racks. 1. Insert the guides into the rack
grooves.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 8
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-350
MC-351
3. Install the rack assemblies and 5. From top to bottom, insert
then install the screws. the guide protrusions into the
grooves in the centers of the
guides.
4. With a jeweler's screwdriver
or the like, move all the three
guides downward.
u NOTE u
Be sure to move all the three
guides downward. If the guides
are not moved in this manner, the
arm cannot be properly mounted
in procedures 5 and beyond.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-351
MC-352
6. Verify that all the three arm 8. Mount the tension coil spring.
protrusions are inserted into
the grooves at the guide center.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to verify that all the
three arm protrusions are
inserted into the grooves at
the guide center. If you do not
observe this precaution, the
machine may fail to properly
operate.
- If the arm protrusions are not
inserted into the grooves at the
guide center, return to procedure
4 and insert the arm protrusions 9. Remove the reference block assembly, make phase adjustment, and then reinstall the
into the grooves. reference block assembly.
u NOTE u
Be sure to remove the reference block assembly and make phase adjustment as
directed under "7.19 Reference Block Assembly." When the reference block driving
mechanism is removed or installed, the machine may fail to properly operate due to an
improper reference block phase adjustment.
{MC:7.19_Reference Block Assembly}
10. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
7. Install the E-rings. {MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-352
MC-353
7.26 Side-Positioning Reference Block Driving Motor (MC4) 3. Unclamp the clamp.
{SP:INDEX}
7.26.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the screw and then the
motor assembly.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Remove the KL ring and then
from the direction indicated by the spur gear. Remove the
the arrow in the figure. screws and then the motor
(MC4).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-353
MC-354
7.26.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
1. Mount the motor (MC4) on the 4. Mount the motor assembly and
bracket and install the screws. install the screw.
2. Properly orient the spur gear. 5. Secure the cable with the
Mount the spur gear and KL clamp.
ring.
u NOTE u
Before mounting the spur gear,
orient it so that its protrusion end
faces the KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-354
MC-355
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-355
MC-356
7.27 Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit) 2. Remove the screw and then the
spur gear assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
REFERENCE
7.27.1 Removal Procedures For details on the spur gear
assembly, see the "Service Parts
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts List" volume.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the {SP:05F_SIDE-POSITIONING
parts. CONVEYOR 6}
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
7.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-356
MC-357
7.28 Arm 3. Remove the screw and then the
leaf spring.
{SP:INDEX}
7.28.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove one arm by lifting its
end.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Remove the other arm by repeating procedure 4.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-357
MC-358
7.28.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Push one arm into its position
after ounting its end with a
m
protrusion over the shaft and
aligning the other end with the
shaft groove. Repeat this step
to install the other arm.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Install the bracket with its
grooves aligned with the arm
protrusions, and then install
the screw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-358
MC-359
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-359
MC-360
7.29 Shaft Driving Assembly 3. Remove the tension coil spring.
{SP:INDEX}
7.29.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.22} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
4. Rotate the housing until the KL
{MC:7.27} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit) ring comes into view. Insert a
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. jeweler's screwdriver or the like
to remove the KL ring.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the shaft driving
from the direction indicated by assembly.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-360
MC-361
7.29.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Move the housing to locate the
shaft groove.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5 4. Mount the KL ring in alignment
from the direction indicated by with the shaft groove that was
the arrow in the figure. located in procedure 3.
2. Mount the shaft driving 5. Mount the tension coil spring.
assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-361
MC-362
6. Verify the shaft assembly phase adjustment.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify the shaft assembly phase adjustment as directed under "7.43.3 Check/
Adjustment Procedures." When the shaft driving assembly is removed or installed, an
improper shaft assembly phase adjustment may result.
{MC:7.34.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures}
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.27.2} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.22.2} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-362
MC-363
7.30 Housing 2. Hold the housing, move it
in a direction in which the
{SP:INDEX} compression coil spring
contracts, and lift the housing.
7.30.1 Removal Procedures
u NOTE u
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
While you are moving the
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
housing in a direction in which the
parts.
compression coil spring contracts,
Reference Part concerned do not release your hand from the
housing. If you do not observe
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
this precaution, the housing and
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket compression coil spring may
{MC:7.22} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7) scatter due to spring action and
become lost.
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.27} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
{MC:7.29} Shaft Driving Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-363
MC-364
7.30.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Mount the housings,
compression coil spring, and
spacer. When mounting the
spacer on the cut housing,
align the housing protrusion
with the spacer groove.
2. Install the noncut housing over
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
the bearing as indicated in
the figure. Install the housing procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
over the bearing by moving the Reference Part concerned
housing in a direction in which
the compression coil spring {MC:7.29.2} Shaft Driving Assembly
contracts.
{MC:7.27.2} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
u NOTE u
While you are moving the {MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
housing in a direction in which the
compression coil spring contracts, {MC:7.22.2} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
do not release your hand from the
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
housing. If you do not observe
this precaution, the housing and {MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
compression coil spring may
scatter due to spring action and * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
become lost.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-364
MC-365
7.31 Side-Positioning HP Sensor (SC6) 3. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
7.31.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Manually rotate the spur gear of 4. Remove the sensor (SC6).
the motor (MC3) in the direction
REFERENCE
of the arrow in the figure to
verify that the shaft assembly For details on the sensor
claw is disengaged from the removal/installation procedure,
CLOSE position of the sensor see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
(SC6). Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
u NOTE u (5 mm Type)}
If you remove the sensor (SC6)
while it is engaged with the claw,
the sensor (SC6) may become
damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-365
MC-366
7.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
1. Mount the sensor (SC6).
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
2. Connect the connector. Make
sure that the cable tie is
positioned as indicated in the
figure, before retaining the
cable with the clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-366
MC-367
7.32 Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8) 2. Disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
7.32.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.3} Rear Cover Plate
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
3. Remove the screws and then
the sensor (SC8).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-367
MC-368
7.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Connect the connector.
1. Verify that the connector faces 3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
downward, mount the sensor procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
(SC8), and install the screws.
Reference Part concerned
u NOTE u {MC:3.3.2} Rear Cover Plate
Be sure to verify that the
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
connector faces downward.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-368
MC-369
7.33 Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly 3. Remove the E rings.
{SP:INDEX}
7.33.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.28} Arm
4. Remove the claws.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 7 5. Unclamp the clamp, and
from the direction indicated by disconnect the connector.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-369
MC-370
6. Remove the retaining screw 7.33.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the shaft retaining bracket
assembly.
7. Remove the shaft retaining 1. Take the procedures from 2 to 6
bracket assembly. from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the shaft retaining
bracket assembly in a
horizontal position.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-370
MC-371
3. Install the retaining screw 6. Mount the E rings.
to secure the shaft retaining
bracket assembly.
4. Connect the connector. Make 7. Verify the shaft assembly phase adjustment.
sure that the cable tie is
positioned as indicated in the u NOTE u
figure, before retaining the Be sure to verify the shaft assembly phase adjustment as directed under "7.34.3 Check/
cable with the clamps. Adjustment Procedures." When the shaft driving assembly is removed or installed, an
improper shaft assembly phase adjustment may result.
{MC:7.34.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures}
5. With the protrusion of the claw 8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
facing the shaft, reinstall the procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
claw in alignment with the
Reference Part concerned
D-cut flat surface.
{MC:7.28.2} Arm
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-371
MC-372
7.34 Shaft Assemblies 7.34.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX}
7.34.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.22} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
{MC:7.32} Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8)
1. Orient the shaft assemblies in
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit the same direction so that the
{MC:7.27} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit) claws are roughly parallel to
each other.
{MC:7.29} Shaft Driving Assembly
{MC:7.28} Arm
{MC:7.33} Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the shaft assemblies 2. Make sure that the shaft
by moving them in a horizontal assembly having a groove
direction. in the middle of the shaft is
located in front. Insert the shaft
assemblies in a horizontal
direction so that the spur gears
mesh with the teeth of the half
clutch assemblies.
u NOTE u
Shaft assemblies are different in
shape. Be sure to place the shaft
assembly having a groove in the
middle of the shaft in front.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-372
MC-373
3. Verify the shaft assembly phase adjustment.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify the shaft assembly phase adjustment as directed under "7.34.3 Check/
Adjustment Procedure." When the shaft driving assembly is removed or installed, an
improper shaft assembly phase adjustment may result.
{MC:7.34.3_Check/Adjustment Procedure}
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.33.2} Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly
{MC:7.28.2} Arm
{MC:7.29.2} Shaft Driving Assembly
{MC:7.27.2} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.32.2} Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8)
{MC:7.22.2} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-373
MC-374
7.34.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures 4. With the rear shaft secured,
measure the claw as indicated
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts in the figure.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts. l When the claw height is 27±1 mm
Reference Part concerned Claw phase adjustment is
properly made. Therefore, there
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit is no need to perform procedures
{MC:7.29} Shaft Driving Assembly 5 and beyond. Return to the
installation procedure.
{MC:7.33} Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly
l When the claw height is not 27±1
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. mm
Proceed to perform procedures
5 and 6 to make claw phase
adjustment.
2. Take the procedure from 3 to 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Rotate the rear shaft until the
claw height shown in the figure
is 50±1 mm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-374
MC-375
5. Move the shaft driving 6. Make claw height
assemblies in the direction measurements again as
indicated in the figure. Rotate indicated in the figure. Verify
the front shaft assembly to that the rear claw height is 50±1
adjust the claw height. After mm and that the front claw
completion of adjustment, height is 27±1 mm.
move the shaft assembly to
its original position so that the u NOTE u
spur gear meshes with the half If the claw heights are not as
clutch assembly. specified above (50±1 mm and
27±1 mm), return to procedure 5
u NOTE u and make claw phase adjustment.
The direction of shaft assembly
rotation varies with the claw
height measured in procedure 4.
l When the claw height is more 7. Return to the reinstallation
than ©27±1 mm procedure.
Rotate the shaft assembly
rearward.
l When the claw height is less
than 27±1 mm
Rotate the shaft assembly
forward.
REFERENCE
When you rotate the shaft
assembly by one tooth position,
the claw height is changed by
about 5 mm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-375
MC-376
7.35 Shafts and Claws 3. Remove the claws.
{SP:INDEX}
7.35.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.22} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
{MC:7.32} Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8)
4. Remove the E-ring from the
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit other end of the shaft.
{MC:7.27} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
{MC:7.29} Shaft Driving Assembly
{MC:7.28} Arm
{MC:7.33} Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly
{MC:7.34} Shaft Assemblies
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the E ring. 5. Remove the spur gear and
claw.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-376
MC-377
7.35.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Mount the E-ring.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
2. With the protrusion of the claw 5. With the protrusion of the claw
facing forward, install the claw facing the shaft, install the claw
and spur gear in alignment with in alignment with the D-cut flat
the D-cut flat surface. surface.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-377
MC-378
6. With the protrusion of the claw 8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
facing the shaft, install the claw procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
in alignment with the three
Reference Part concerned
D-cut flat surfaces.
{MC:7.34.2} Shaft Assemblies
{MC:7.33.2} Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly
{MC:7.28.2} Arm
{MC:7.29.2} Shaft Driving Assembly
{MC:7.27.2} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.32.2} Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8)
{MC:7.22.2} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
7. Mount the E ring. {MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-378
MC-379
7.36 Side-Positioning Latch Mechanism Driving Motor (MC3) 3. Insert a screwdriver obliquely
and remove the retaining
{SP:INDEX} screws from the motor (MC3).
7.36.1 Removal Procedures u NOTE u
When inserting the screwdriver
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
obliquely to remove the screws,
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
exercise care not to damage
parts.
the screw threads. If the screw
Reference Part concerned threads are damaged, you may
not be able to remove the motor
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
(MC3).
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the motor (MC3).
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-379
MC-380
7.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Insert a screwdriver obliquely
and install the motor (MC3)
retaining screws.
u NOTE u
When inserting the screwdriver
obliquely to install the screws,
exercise care not to damage
the screw threads. If the screw
threads are damaged, you may
not be able to remove the motor
(MC3).
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Verify that the connector for
the motor (MC3) is oriented as
shown in the figure, and then
mount the motor (MC3).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-380
MC-381
7.37 Half Clutch Assembly 3. Remove the screws and then
the base assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
7.37.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.22} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
{MC:7.23} Side-Positioning Latch Stroke Sensor (SC10)
{MC:7.32} Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8)
4. Remove the retaining screw of
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit the bracket.
{MC:7.27} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
{MC:7.29} Shaft Driving Assembly
{MC:7.28} Arm
{MC:7.33} Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly
{MC:7.34} Shaft Assemblies
{MC:7.36} Side-Positioning Latch Mechanism Driving Motor (MC3)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 7 5. Remove the bracket.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-381
MC-382
6. Remove KL ring.
7. Remove the half clutch
assembly and spur gear.
Remove the leaf spring and
spacer.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-382
MC-383
7.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Verify that the clutch marking is
positioned outward. Mount the
clutch with the three grooves
properly positioned.
u NOTE u
Before mounting the clutch, be
sure to verify that the clutch
marking is visible.
1. Install the spacers and spur 4. Mount the bearing.
gear in alignment with the D-cut
flat surface.
2. Install the bearing and cam. 5. Take the procedures from 6 to
10 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-383
MC-384
6. Mount the leaf spring. Engage 9. Have on hand the half
the leading end of the leaf clutch assembly, which was
spring with the base assembly. assembled by performing
procedures 1 to 4. Mount the
u NOTE u half clutch assembly while
Be sure to engage the leading keeping it from coming into
end of the leaf spring with the contact with the leaf spring.
base assembly. If the leading end
of the leaf spring is not engaged
with the base assembly, the parts
mentioned in procedures 7 and
beyond cannot be mounted.
7. Mount the arm while observing 10. Verify that the longer shaft end
the positional relationship of the spur gear faces the shaft.
shown in the figure. Mount the spur gear and then
the KL ring.
u NOTE u
Be sure that the positional
relationship between the leaf
spring and arm is as indicated
in the figure. If the positional
relationship between the leaf
spring and arm is not as shown,
the machine may fail to properly
operate.
8. While the positional 11. Orient the base assembly as
relationship mentioned in indicated in the figure. In the
procedure 7 is maintained, direction of the arrow, perform
secure the leaf spring by procedures 12 and 13.
pressing it from below with
your finger.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-384
MC-385
12. Mount the bearing. With 15. Mount the bracket while
the two visible holes facing aligning the bracket protrusion
upward, mount the half clutch with the half clutch hole.
spur gear.
13. Verify that the clutch marking is 16. Reinstall the bracket retaining
positioned outward. Mount the screw.
clutch with the three grooves
properly positioned. Mount the
bearing.
14. Orient the base assembly as 17. Mount the base assembly, and
indicated in the figure. In the install the screws.
direction of the arrow, perform
procedures 15 and 16.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-385
MC-386
18. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.36.2} Side-Positioning Latch Mechanism Driving Motor (MC3)
{MC:7.34.2} Shaft Assemblies
{MC:7.33.2} Shaft Retaining Bracket Assembly
{MC:7.28.2} Arm
{MC:7.29.2} Shaft Driving Assembly
{MC:7.27.2} Spur Gear Assembly (Claw Driving Unit)
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.32.2} Side-Positioning Latch Position Sensor (SC8)
{MC:7.23.2} Side-Positioning Latch Stroke Sensor (SC10)
{MC:7.22.2} Side-Positioning Reference Block HP Sensor (SC7)
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-386
MC-387
7.38 Barcode Reader (BCRC1) 3. Unclamp the clamps, and
disconnect the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
7.38.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.3} Rear Cover Plate
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the screws and then
the barcode reader assembly.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Remove the screws and then
from the direction indicated by the barcode reader (BCRC1).
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-387
MC-388
7.38.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-388
MC-389
7.39 Side-Positioning IP Transport Motor (MC1) 3. Press the claw and disconnect
the connector.
{SP:INDEX}
7.39.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Remove the motor (MC1)
retaining screws.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the motor (MC1) while
from the direction indicated by tilting it.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-389
MC-390
7.39.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Screw down the motor (MC1).
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4 4. Connect the connector.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Verify that the connector for 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
the motor (MC1) is oriented as procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
shown in the figure. Mount the
Reference Part concerned
motor (MC1) while tilting it.
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
u NOTE u
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
Ensure that the connector is
properly oriented. {MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-390
MC-391
7.40 Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs 4. Remove the tension coil spring.
{SP:INDEX}
7.40.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.12} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Take the procedure 6 from the
from the direction indicated by direction indicated by the arrow
the arrow in the figure. in the figure.
3. Remove the spur gears while 6. Remove the tension coil spring.
opening their claws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-391
MC-392
7.40.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the 4. Mount the tension coil spring
direction indicated by the arrow along the groove in the
in the figure. housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring on the
reference side differs in length
from the one on the opposite
reference side. The spring on the
opposite reference side is 61 mm
long.
2. Mount the tension coil spring 5. Mount the spur gears.
along the groove in the
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring on the
reference side differs in length
from the one on the opposite
reference side. The spring on the
reference side is 80 mm long.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-392
MC-393
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.12.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-393
MC-394
7.41 Rubber Roller (A) 3. Rotate the housing until it is
oriented as shown in the figure.
{SP:INDEX} Remove the housing.
7.41.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.6} Guide (A)
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.12} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:7.40} Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 4. Remove the bearing.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-394
MC-395
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 7. Remove the bearing.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
6. Rotate the housing until it is 8. Take the procedure 9 from the
oriented as shown in the figure. direction indicated by the arrow
Remove the housing. in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-395
MC-396
9. Move rubber roller (A) inward 7.41.2 Reinstallation Procedures
and then remove it.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Insert one end of rubber roller
(A) into the side plate.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation of
the rubber roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-396
MC-397
3. Insert the other end of rubber 6. Mount the housing after
roller (A) into the side plate. aligning it with the hole in the
side plate.
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
5. Mount the bearing. 7. Take the procedures 8 and 9
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-397
MC-398
8. Mount the bearing. 10. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.40.2} Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs
{MC:7.12.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.6.2} Guide (A)
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
9. Mount the housing after
aligning it with the hole in the
side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-398
MC-399
7.42 Rubber Roller (B) 3. Rotate the housing until it is
oriented as shown in the figure.
{SP:INDEX} Remove the housing.
7.42.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.12} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:7.40} Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs
{MC:7.38} Barcode Reader (BCRC1)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 4. Remove the bearing.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-399
MC-400
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 7. Remove the bearing.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
6. Rotate the housing until it is 8. Take the procedure 9 from the
oriented as shown in the figure. direction indicated by the arrow
Remove the housing. in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-400
MC-401
9. Move rubber roller (B) inward 7.42.2 Reinstallation Procedures
and then remove it along the
opening in the side plate.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Insert one end of rubber roller
(B) into the side plate while
keeping it from coming into
contact with the stay.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation of
the rubber roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-401
MC-402
3. Insert the other end of rubber 6. Mount the housing after
roller (B) along the opening in aligning it with the hole in the
the side plate. side plate.
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
5. Mount the bearing. 7. Take the procedures 8 and 9
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-402
MC-403
8. Mount the bearing. 10. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.38.2} Barcode Reader (BCRC1)
{MC:7.40.2} Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs
{MC:7.12.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
9. Mount the housing after
aligning it with the hole in the
side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-403
MC-404
7.43 Rubber Roller (C) 3. Remove the tension coil spring.
{SP:INDEX}
7.43.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.14} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
4. Remove the E-ring. Remove
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt the housing and bearings.
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.13} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.15} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Take the procedures from 6 to 8
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-404
MC-405
6. Remove the tension coil spring. 9. Take the procedure 10 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
7. Remove the tension coil spring. 10. Move rubber roller (C) inward
and then remove it.
8. Remove the E-ring. Remove
the housing and bearings.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-405
MC-406
7.43.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Insert the other end of rubber
roller (C) into the side plate.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
2. Insert one end of rubber roller 5. Mount the bearings and
(C) into the side plate. housing. Mount the E-ring.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation of
the rubber roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-406
MC-407
6. Mount the tension coil spring 9. Mount the bearings and
along the groove in the housing. Mount the E-ring.
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
7. Engage the tension coil spring 10. Mount the tension coil spring
with the side plate and mount along the groove in the
it along the groove in the housing.
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
8. Take the procedures 9 and 10
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-407
MC-408
11. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.15.2} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.13.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.14.2} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-408
MC-409
7.44 Rubber Roller (D) 3. Unclamp the clamps.
{SP:INDEX}
7.44.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.14} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
4. Remove the screws and then
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt the bracket.
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.13} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.15} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Take the procedures 6 and 7
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-409
MC-410
6. Remove the tension coil spring. 9. Remove the tension coil spring.
7. Remove the spacers, bearings, 10. Remove the tension coil spring.
and housing in the order
indicated in the figure.
8. Take the procedures 9 and 10 11. Remove the spacer, bearings,
from the direction indicated by and housing in the order
the arrow in the figure. indicated in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-410
MC-411
12. Take the procedure 13 from the 13. Move rubber roller (D) inward,
direction indicated by the arrow and then remove it while
in the figure. keeping it from coming into
contact with the cable.
u NOTE u
Remove rubber roller (D) while
exercising care not to damage the
cable.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-411
MC-412
7.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Insert the other end of rubber
roller (D) into the side plate.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
2. Insert one end of rubber roller 5. Mount the bearings, housing,
(D) into the side plate while and spacer in the order
keeping it from coming into indicated in the figure.
contact with the cable.
u NOTES u
- Mount rubber roller (D) while
exercising care not to damage
the cable.
- Pay attention to the orientation
of the rubber roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-412
MC-413
6. Mount the tension coil spring 9. Mount the bearings, housing,
along the groove in the and spacer in the order
housing. indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
7. Engage the tension coil spring 10. Mount the tension coil spring
with the side plate and mount along the groove in the
it along the groove in the housing.
housing.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u The tension coil spring length
The tension coil spring length varies with the mounting position.
varies with the mounting position. Mount an tension coil spring
Mount an tension coil spring having the proper length.
having the proper length.
8. Take the procedures 9 and 10 11. Take the procedures 12 and 13
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-413
MC-414
12. Mount the bracket and secure it 14. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
with the screws. procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.15.2} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.13.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.14.2} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
13. Secure the cable with the * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-414
MC-415
7.45 Rubber Roller (E) 3. Remove the tension coil spring.
{SP:INDEX}
7.45.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.14} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
4. Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.13} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.15} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Remove the E-ring. Remove
from the direction indicated by the housing and bearings.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-415
MC-416
6. Take the procedures from 7 to 9 9. Remove the E-ring. Remove
from the direction indicated by the housing and bearings.
the arrow in the figure.
7. Remove the tension coil spring. 10. Take the procedure 11 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
8. Remove the tension coil spring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-416
MC-417
11. Move rubber roller (E) inward 7.45.2 Reinstallation Procedures
and then remove it.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Insert one end of rubber roller
(E) into the side plate.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation of
the rubber roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-417
MC-418
3. Insert the other end of rubber 6. Mount the tension coil spring
roller (E) into the side plate. along the groove in the
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7 7. Engage the tension coil spring
from the direction indicated by with the side plate and mount
the arrow in the figure. it along the groove in the
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
5. Mount the bearings and 8. Take the procedures from 9 to
housing. Mount the E-ring. 11 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-418
MC-419
9. Mount the bearings and 12. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
housing. Mount the E-ring. procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.15.2} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.13.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.14.2} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
10. Mount the tension coil spring * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
along the groove in the
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
11. Engage the tension coil spring
with the side plate and mount
it along the groove in the
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-419
MC-420
7.46 Rubber Roller (F) 3. Take the procedures from 4 to 6
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
7.46.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.14} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
4. Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.13} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.15} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.20} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.24} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.25} Reference Block Driving Mechanism
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the side-positioning 5. Remove the tension coil spring.
conveyor unit as indicated in
the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-420
MC-421
6. Remove the spacers, bearings, 9. Remove the tension coil spring.
and housing in the order
indicated in the figure.
7. Take the procedures from 8 to 10. Remove the KL ring. Remove
10 from the direction indicated the spacer, bearings, and
by the arrow in the figure. housing in the order indicated
in the figure.
8. Remove the tension coil spring. 11. Take the procedure 12 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-421
MC-422
12. Move the rubber roller inward
and then lift it along the
opening in the side plate.
Remove the rubber roller while
keeping it from coming into
contact with the motor (MC1).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-422
MC-423
7.46.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Insert the other end of the
rubber roller into the side plate.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 4. Take the procedures from 5 to 7
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
2. Insert one end of the rubber 5. Mount the bearings, housing,
roller into the side plate while and spacer in the order
keeping it from coming into indicated in the figure, and then
contact with the motor (MC1). mount the KL ring.
u NOTE u
Pay attention to the orientation of
the rubber roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-423
MC-424
6. Mount the tension coil spring 9. Mount the spacers, bearings,
along the groove in the and housing in the order
housing. indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
7. Engage the tension coil spring 10. Mount the tension coil spring
with the side plate and mount along the groove in the
it along the groove in the housing.
housing.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u The tension coil spring length
The tension coil spring length varies with the mounting position.
varies with the mounting position. Mount an tension coil spring
Mount an tension coil spring having the proper length.
having the proper length.
8. Take the procedures from 9 to 11. Engage the tension coil spring
11 from the direction indicated with the side plate and mount
by the arrow in the figure. it along the groove in the
housing.
u NOTE u
The tension coil spring length
varies with the mounting position.
Mount an tension coil spring
having the proper length.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-424
MC-425
12. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.25.2} Reference Block Driving Mechanism
{MC:7.24.2} Claw Driving Unit
{MC:7.20.2} Cable Junction Bracket
{MC:7.15.2} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.13.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.14.2} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-425
MC-426
7.47 Guide (C) 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
7.47.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.6} Guide (A)
{MC:7.7} Guide (B)
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
4. In the direction indicated in
{MC:7.12} Spur Gear (Reference Side) DETAIL A, remove the guide (C)
{MC:7.40} Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs retaining screws.
{MC:7.41} Rubber Roller (A)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the side-positioning 5. In the direction indicated in
conveyor unit as indicated in DETAIL B, remove the guide (C)
the figure. retaining screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-426
MC-427
6. Remove guide (C) by lifting its 7.47.2 Reinstallation Procedures
leading end.
1. Place guide (C) on the side
plate half punches.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-427
MC-428
3. In the direction indicated in 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
DETAIL A, install the guide (C) procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
retaining screws.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.41.2} Rubber Roller (A)
{MC:7.40.2} Spur Gears and Tension Coil Springs
{MC:7.12.2} Spur Gear (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.7.2} Guide (B)
{MC:7.6.2} Guide (A)
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL B, install the guide (C)
retaining screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-428
MC-429
7.48 Guide (D) 2. Orient the side-positioning
conveyor unit as indicated in
{SP:INDEX} the figure.
7.48.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:7.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.11} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.14} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
3. Take the procedure 4 from the
{MC:7.9} Leaf Spring (Reference Side) direction indicated by the arrow
{MC:7.17} IP Sensor (SC3) in the figure.
{MC:7.4} Timing Belt
{MC:7.5} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.13} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.15} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.10} Leaf Spring (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.43} Rubber Roller (C)
{MC:7.45} Rubber Roller (E)
{MC:7.8} Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. 4. Remove the screw and then the
bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-429
MC-430
5. Remove the guide (D) retaining 8. In the direction indicated in
screws. DETAIL B, remove the guide (D)
retaining screws.
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8 9. Remove guide (D) by lifting its
from the direction indicated by leading end.
the arrow in the figure.
7. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL A, remove the guide (D)
retaining screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-430
MC-431
7.48.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Place one end of guide (D) on
the two front half punches.
Lay guide (D) by inclining it
rearward. As indicated in the
figure, press guide (D) against
the half punches.
2. Verify that guide (D) is properly
mounted on the half punches,
and then loosely install the
screws.
u NOTE u
Before loosely installing the
screws, be sure to verify that
guide (D) is properly mounted on
the half punches.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-431
MC-432
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 6. Securely tighten the guide (D) retaining screws that were loosely installed in
from the direction indicated by procedures 2 to 5.
the arrow in the figure.
4. In the direction indicated in 7. Take the procedure 8 from the
DETAIL A, loosely install the direction indicated by the arrow
guide (D) retaining screws. in the figure.
5. In the direction indicated in 8. Mount the bracket and secure it
DETAIL B, loosely install the with the screw.
guide (D) retaining screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-432
MC-433
9. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.8.2} Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly
{MC:7.45.2} Rubber Roller (E)
{MC:7.43.2} Rubber Roller (C)
{MC:7.10.2} Leaf Spring (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.15.2} Grip Arm (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.13.2} Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:7.5.2} Tensioner Assembly
{MC:7.4.2} Timing Belt
{MC:7.17.2} IP Sensor (SC3)
{MC:7.9.2} Leaf Spring (Reference Side)
{MC:7.14.2} Grip Arm (Reference Side)
{MC:7.11.2} Planetary Gear Assembly
{MC:7.2.2} Sensor Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-433
MC-434
7.49 Reinforcement Bracket 4. Remove the reinforcement
bracket retaining screws.
{SP:INDEX}
7.49.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the side-positioning 5. Remove the retaining screws of
conveyor unit as indicated in the bracket.
the figure.
3. Take the procedures from 4 to 6 6. Remove the bracket retaining
from the direction indicated by screw and then the bracket.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-434
MC-435
7.49.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Reinstall the bracket retaining
screw.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4 4. Verify that the guide is properly
from the direction indicated by mounted on the half punches,
the arrow in the figure. and then install the screws.
u NOTE u
Before installing the screws, be
sure to verify that the guide is
properly mounted on the half
punches.
2. Verify that the bracket is 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
properly mounted on the half procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
punches, and then install the
Reference Part concerned
retaining screw.
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
u NOTE u
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
Always make sure that the
bracket is correctly mounted on
the half punches, before retaining
with the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-435
MC-436
8. Light-Collecting Unit 8.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
8.1 Light-Collecting Guide concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
{SP:INDEX}
Reference Part concerned
CAUTIONS {MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are {MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
wearing gloves. {MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:10.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves. * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 and
4 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-436
MC-437
3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Disconnect the connector while
holding the shaded portion in
the figure.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to disconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Disconnect the connector
vertically. If it is disconnected
slantly, the connector on the
board may get damaged.
- As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
disconnecting the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-437
MC-438
5. Disconnect the connector. 7. Take the procedures 7 and 8
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
6. Retain the three cables 8. Remove the retaining screws
removed in the procedures of the light-collecting guide
3 to 5 with the clamp for the from the direction instructed in
protection of the cables. DETAIL A.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Be sure to retain the cables with Exercise care not to damage the
the clamp. Otherwise, the cable acrylic part of the light-collecting
and the connector might get guide when removing the screws.
caught when removing/reinstalling
the light-collecting guide.
9. Remove the retaining screws
of the light-collecting guide
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL B.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
acrylic part of the light-collecting
guide when removing the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-438
MC-439
10. Supporting the light-collecting
guide on the positions
indicated in the figure, lift the
guide. Check to make sure
that the light-collecting guide
bracket is disengaged from
the hook on the side plate of
the subscanning unit, and then
pull out to remove the light-
collecting guide toward you.
u NOTE u
Always check to make sure that
the light-collecting guide bracket
is disengaged from the hook on
the side plate of the subscanning
unit before removing the light-
collecting guide. Otherwise, the
tip of the light-collecting guide
might get damaged.
10. Place the light-collecting guide
in the orientation indicated in
the figure.
u NOTE u
Be sure to place the light-
collecting guide in the orientation
indicated in the figure. If placed
reversely, load may be applied
to the adhesive part of the
photomultiplier, causing the light-
collecting guide to get damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-439
MC-440
8.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Hold the light collecting guide
as indicated in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-440
MC-441
2. Mount the light-collecting 3. Push in the light-collecting
guide on the guides of the guide while slightly raising it.
subscanning unit. Insert the Check to make sure that the
light-collecting guide along the guide is correctly engaged with
guides into the subscanning the hooks of the subscanning
unit. unit side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-441
MC-442
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Take the procedures from 8 to
from the direction indicated by 11 from the direction indicated
the arrow in the figure. by the arrow in the figure.
5. Reinstall the retaining screws 8. Unclamp the clamp.
of the light-collecting guide
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL A.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
acrylic part of the light-collecting
guide with a screwdriver when
reinstalling the screws.
6. Reinstall the retaining screws 9. Connect the connector.
of the light-collecting guide
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL B.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
acrylic part of the light-collecting
guide with a screwdriver when
reinstalling the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-442
MC-443
10. Reconnect the connector 11. Connect the connector
vertically, holding the shaded
portion in the figure. Check
that the connector is fully
inserted into its position as
shown.
CAUTION
Be sure to check that the connector
is fully inserted into its position
as shown. If the connector is not
properly connected, an error occurs
during image reading.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to reconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Connect the connector vertically
to the board. If it is connected
in a rotated state, the connector
might get damaged.
- As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-443
MC-444
12. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.2.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:3.2.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
13. When the light-collecting guide has been replaced with a new one, restore the
machine-specific data from the CD attached to the light-collecting guide, after the
machine is restored exactly as it was.
u INSTRUCTION u
When the light-collecting guide has been replaced with a new one, restore the attached
machine-specific data, referring to “8.1.3 Check/adjustment procedures”.
{MC:8.1.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-444
MC-445
8.1.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures 5. Select “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA”, specify the path to the machine-specific
Restore the machine-specific data of the light-collecting guide attached to the light-collecting data CD, and restore the machine-specific data of the light-collecting guide.
guide.
1. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. Set the machine-specific data CD into the CD drive which is connected to the
Mobil X-ray Unit.
3. Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
4. Select the RU to which the machine-specific data is to be restored from the “LIST
OF EXISTING RU”.
REFERENCE
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “16.2 RESTORE Procedure”
for the detailed restoring procedures.
{MC:16.2_Restore Procedure}
6 Shut down the CL.
7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power and then turn it ON.
8. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l No abnormal S-value is exhibited and image read normally takes place.
{MC:18._Confirming the S Value}
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-445
MC-446
8.2 PMT Board 8.2.1 Removal Procedures
{SP:INDEX} 1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
CAUTIONS
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to Reference Part concerned
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body {MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:10.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-446
MC-447
3. Disconnect the connector while 4. Disconnect the connector.
holding the shaded portion in
the figure.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to disconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Disconnect the connector
vertically. If it is disconnected
slantly, the connector on the
board may get damaged.
- As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when 5. Take the procedures 6 and 7
disconnecting the connector. from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
6. Loosen the retaining screws of
the PMT board assembly.
u NOTE u
Just loosen the screws which
retain the PMT board assembly,
but do not remove them.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-447
MC-448
7. Hold on the shield member 8.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures
of the PMT board assembly.
Slowly raise it, and remove the
PMT board assembly.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured by
peripheral parts when removing
the PMT board assembly.
1. Reinstall the PMT board on the
shield member.
8. Remove the screws to remove 2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from
the PMT board assembly from the direction indicated by the
the shield member. arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-448
MC-449
3. Reinstall the PMT board 4. Check to make sure that the
assembly on the connection socket of the PMT board
of the light-collecting guide. is installed in parallel to
Push in straight so that the the connection of the light-
PMT board is in parallel to collecting guide, and that
the connection of the light- clearances on the right and left
collecting guide. are equal.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured by
peripheral parts when reinstalling
the PMT board assembly.
5. Fasten the retaining screws of
the PMT board assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-449
MC-450
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8 8. Reconnect the connector
from the direction indicated by vertically, holding the shaded
the arrow in the figure. portion in the figure. Check
that the connector is fully
inserted into its position as
shown.
CAUTION
Be sure to check that the connector
is fully inserted into its position
as shown. If the connector is not
properly connected, an error occurs
during image reading.
7. Connect the connector. u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to reconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Connect the connector vertically
to the board. If it is connected
in a rotated state, the connector
might get damaged.
- As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-450
MC-451
9. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.2.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:3.2.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
10. When the PMT board is replaced with a new one, recover the machine, and then
confirm the S-value.
{MC:18._Confirming the S Value}
11. If the PMT board is replaced with a new one, reassemble the machine and then
perform the "LED Initialize" and "SCN ALL DATA" backup procedures with the
MUTL.
u INSTRUCTION u
When the PMT board is replaced with a new one, be sure to perform the "LED Initialize"
procedure and then the "SCN ALL DATA" backup procedure with the MUTL as directed
under "8.2.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures."
{MC:8.2.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-451
MC-452
8.2.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures 6. Click on [OK].
After the replacement of the PMT board, initialize the LED data of the PMT board by “LED
initialize” of MUTL, to back up “SCN ALL DATA”.
With “SCN ALL DATA” backed up, the initialization values for error detection are set.
1. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
7. Verify that the MUTL message field reads "THE FLASH MEMORY WAS UPDATED."
3. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select a RU for which the PMT board has been
replaced.
8. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Start the MUTL. 9. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select a RU for which the LED data has been
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} initialized.
5. Select "LED initialize".
10. Back up "SCN ALL DATA."
REFERENCE
For details on the backup procedure, see "16.1 Backup Procedure" in the Checks,
Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:16.1_Backup Procedure}
→ The confirmation window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-452
MC-453
11. Shut down the CL.
12. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power and then turn it ON.
13. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-453
MC-454
8.3 Shield Member 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are
wearing gloves.
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
8.3.1 Removal Procedures 3. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL A, remove the screws
and then remove the flange.
CAUTION
Do not handle the light-collecting
guide by its shield member (shaded
section in the figure) alone. If
this precaution is not observed,
the adhesion surfaces of the
photomultiplier and light-collecting
guide may separate from each
other, thereby causing an image
abnormality.
4. In the direction indicated in
DETAIL B, remove the screws
and then remove the flange.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:4.3} FAN (FANG1)
{MC:8.2} PMT Board
{MC:8.1} Light-Collecting Guide
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-454
MC-455
5. Remove the screws. 8.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
6. Remove the shield member
by rotating it in the direction CAUTION
shown. Do not handle the light-collecting
guide by its shield member (shaded
section in the figure) alone. If
this precaution is not observed,
the adhesion surfaces of the
photomultiplier and light-collecting
guide may separate from each
other, thereby causing an image
abnormality.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-455
MC-456
9. Scanning Optics Unit u NOTE u
If you are going to use the scanning optics unit that was used in another machine, install it
{SP:INDEX} and then make a shading correction. After shading correction, back up the "SCN OPTICAL
DATA".
{MC:15.1_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
CAUTION
Never touch the window of the
scanning optics unit. If fingerprints
or the like are left on the window,
the scanning optics unit must be
replaced.
u NOTE u
Place the scanning optics unit
in the orientation as shown
in the figure, according to the
label indicating how to place the
scanning optics unit.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-456
MC-457
9.1 Removal Procedures 2. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts Retain the cables with the
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the clamp for the protection of the
parts. cable.
Reference Part concerned
u NOTE u
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
Be sure to retain the cables with
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover the clamp. Otherwise, the cable
and the connector might get
{MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate
caught when removing/reinstalling
{MC:10.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly the scanning optics unit.
{MC:8.1} Light-Collecting Guide
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-457
MC-458
3. Unclamp the clamp, and 4. Loosen the retaining screws of
disconnect the connectors. the scanning optics unit.
Retain the cable with the clamp
for its protection. u NOTE u
Just loosen the screws which
u NOTE u retain the scanning optics unit,
Be sure to retain the cables with but do not remove them.
the clamp. Otherwise, the cable
and the connector might get
caught when removing/reinstalling
the scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-458
MC-459
5. Hold the green labels and raise
the scanning optics unit. Make
sure that holes on the scanning
optics unit and screw heads
are located where they do not
interfere with each other. Then,
pull out the scanning optics
unit parallel to the guides.
CAUTION
Never touch the window of the
scanning optics unit. If fingerprints
or the like are left on the window,
the scanning optics unit must be
replaced.
u NOTES u
- Hold the green labels to remove/
reinstall the scanning optics unit.
- Pull out the scanning optics unit
parallel to the guides. If the unit
is tilted, it may drop from the
guides and result in damage
of peripheral components or
sensors.
6. Place the scanning optics unit
in the orientation as shown in
the figure.
u NOTE u
Place the scanning optics unit
in the orientation as shown
in the figure, according to the
label indicating how to place the
scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-459
MC-460
9.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Mount the notches on both
sides of the scanning optics
unit on the guides. Push
straight completely while
exercising care not to tilt the
scanning optics unit.
u NOTE u
Push in the scanning optics unit
straight along the guides not to
permit it to tilt. If the unit is tilted,
it may drop from the guides and
result in damage of peripheral
components or sensors.
1. Hold the scanning optics unit
on parts with the attached
green labels.
CAUTION
Never touch the window of the
scanning optics unit. If fingerprints
or the like are left on the window,
the scanning optics unit must be
replaced.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-460
MC-461
3. Be sure to check that the 4. Secure the retaining screws
scanning optics unit is correctly while pushing the scanning
placed on the retaining screws. optics unit against the
positioning pin.
u NOTE u
Make sure that the scanning u NOTE u
optics unit is correctly placed on Be sure to retain the retaining
the retaining screws. If the screw screw while pushing the scanning
head is not in the correct position optics unit against the positioning
in the hole of the scanning optics pin. By pushing the scanning
unit, the unit cannot be installed optics unit tightly against the
correctly. positioning pin, the unit is located
If the screw head is not in the in the correct position.
correct position, reinstall the unit
again and recheck.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-461
MC-462
5. Unclamp the clamp and 6. Unclamp the clamp and
connect the connectors. connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-462
MC-463
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:8.1.2} Light-Collecting Guide
{MC:10.2.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:3.2.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
8. Restore the machine-specific data from the CD attached to the scanning optics
unit, after the machine is restored exactly as it was.
u INSTRUCTION u
When the scanning optics unit has been replaced with a new one, always restore the
attached machine-specific data, referring to “9.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:9.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-463
MC-464
9.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures 5. Select “SCN OPTICAL DATA”, and restore the machine-specific data of
the scanning optics unit.
Restore the machine-specific data of the scanning optics unit attached to the scanning optics
unit.
1. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. Set the machine-specific data CD into the CD drive which is connected to the
Mobil X-ray Unit.
3. Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
4. Select the RU to which the machine-specific data is to be restored from the “LIST
OF EXISTING RU”.
REFERENCE
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “16.2 RESTORE Procedure”
for the detailed restoring procedures.
{MC:16.2_Restore Procedure}
6 Shut down the CL.
7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power and then turn it ON.
8. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-464
MC-465
10. Subscanning Unit 2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
10.1 Subscanning Unit
{SP:INDEX}
10.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.4} Left-Hand Cover Plate
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate 3. Remove the retaining screw of
the bracket.
{MC:3.3} Rear Cover Plate
{MC:7.1} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:10.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:8.1} Light-Collecting Guide
{MC:9.} Scanning Optics Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-465
MC-466
4. Unclamp the clamp, and 6. Loosen the screws and then
disconnect the connector. remove the jig.
Retain the cables with the
REFERENCE
clamp and the tape for the
protection of the cables. After subscanning unit removal,
mount the removed jig on the
vibration-proof rubber assembly.
7. Remove the retaining screws of
the subscanning unit.
CAUTION
Never remove red painted screws.
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-466
MC-467
8. Take the procedure 9 from the 10. Take the procedure 11 from the
direction indicated by the arrow direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. in the figure.
9. Remove the screws. With 11. Remove the screws. With
long-nose pliers, remove the long-nose pliers, remove the
bracket. bracket.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Exercise care not to drop the Exercise care not to drop the
bracket. If the bracket drops, it bracket. If the bracket drops, it
may damage nearby parts. may damage nearby parts.
u INSTRUCTION u u INSTRUCTION u
The removed bracket need be The removed bracket need be
reinstalled when installing the reinstalled when installing the
subscanning unit. Exercise care subscanning unit. Exercise care
not to miss it. not to miss it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-467
MC-468
12. Take the procedure 13 from the 14. Holding the green labels,
direction indicated by the arrow pull out the subscanning unit
in the figure. slightly forward. Shift the
held positions, pull out the
subscanning unit straight, and
remove the subscanning unit
while holding its upper part.
u NOTE u
Be sure to hold the specified
positions to pull out straight the
subscanning unit. Otherwise,
part of the subscanning unit
might come into contact with the
housing, causing damage.
13. Remove the retaining screws of
the subscanning unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-468
MC-469
15. Have on hand the jig that was
removed in procedure 6.
u NOTE u
After subscanning unit removal,
be sure to mount the jig. If you
perform the procedure without
mounting the jig, the vibration-
proof rubber assembly may fail to
properly function.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-469
MC-470
10.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Supporting the subscanning
unit on the positions indicated
in the figure, put the unit on the
housing rails. Push the unit
straight halfway.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to have your
hand caught in the housing when
pushing in the subscanning unit.
1. Remove the two jigs as
indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
Remove only the two jigs shown.
If you remove all the jigs, you
may not be able to mount the
subscanning unit in the housing.
2 Take the procedures from 3 to 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-470
MC-471
4. Remove the jigs. 6. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the subscanning unit.
5. Putting your hands on the
positions indicated in the
figure, push in the subscanning
unit straight into the housing.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to put your hands
on the specified positions to
push in the subscanning unit
straight. Otherwise, part of the
subscanning unit might come
into contact with the housing,
causing damage.
- Exercise care not to have
your hands caught in the
housing when pushing in the
subscanning unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-471
MC-472
7. Take the procedure 8 from the 9. Take the procedure 10 from the
direction indicated by the arrow direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. in the figure.
8. Reinstall the retaining screws 10. Put on the bracket and retain it
of the subscanning unit. with a screw.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to drop the
bracket. If the bracket drops, it
may damage nearby parts.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-472
MC-473
11. Take the procedure 12 from the 13. Take the procedures 14 and 15
direction indicated by the arrow from the direction indicated by
in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
12. Put on the bracket and retain it 14. Connect the connectors.
with a screw.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to drop the
bracket. If the bracket drops, it
may damage nearby parts.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-473
MC-474
15. Tighten the retaining screw for 17. Mount the jig and then tighten
the bracket. the screws.
18. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:9.2} Scanning Optics Unit
{MC:8.1.2} Light-Collecting Guide
{MC:10.2.2} Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
{MC:7.1.2} Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
{MC:3.3.2} Rear Cover Plate
{MC:3.2.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:3.4.2} Left-Hand Cover Plate
16. Take the procedure 17 from the * Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-474
MC-475
10.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly 4. Supporting the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly on
{SP:INDEX} the position indicated in the
10.2.1 Removal Procedures figure, fall it down slantly and
remove.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.2} Front Cover Plate
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the retaining screws
of the post-reading conveyor
guide assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-475
MC-476
10.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Hold the post-reading conveyor
guide assembly as indicated
in the figure, and mount it on
the guide of the subscanning
unit. Raise the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly until
it hooks on the bracket of the
subscanning unit.
u NOTES u
- Do not strongly grasp the
upper part of the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly. The
guide might deform, causing an
IP jam.
- Mount the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly on the
guide of the subscanning unit,
before raising the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-476
MC-477
2. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the post-reading conveyor
guide assembly.
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.2.2} Front Cover Plate
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-477
MC-478
10.3 Rubber Belt 3. While rotating the flywheel,
gradually move the rubber belt
{SP:INDEX} toward you and remove it.
10.3.1 Removal Procedures
CAUTION
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts Do not pull only the rubber belt
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the to remove it without rotating the
parts. flywheel. If the rubber belt goes
Reference Part concerned
slack, the machine may not work
normally.
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-478
MC-479
10.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Hitch the rubber belt on the
lower flywheel, and then hitch
on the upper flywheel. Put on
the rubber belt while rotating
the flywheel, and check to
make sure that the rubber belt
does not come off.
CAUTION
Do not pull only the rubber belt
to reinstall it without rotating the
flywheel. If the rubber belt goes
slack, the machine may not work
normally.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow u NOTE u
in the figure. Reinstall the rubber belt with its
glossy face facing outward. If
the rubber belt is placed inside
out, the machine might not work
normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-479
MC-480
3. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-480
MC-481
10.4 Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side) 4. Insert an Allen wrench into
the hole in the driving shaft
{SP:INDEX} grip roller. While the roller is
10.4.1 Removal Procedures secured, remove the flywheel.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the subscanning unit in 10.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the orientation indicated in the
figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Take the procedure 4 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-481
MC-482
10.5 Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side) 10.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
10.5.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Insert an Allen wrench into
the hole in the driven shaft
grip roller. While the roller is
secured, remove the flywheel.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-482
MC-483
10.6 Kapton® Belt 4. Support the Kapton® belt on
the positions indicated in the
{SP:INDEX} figure, and remove it.
10.6.1 Removal Procedures u NOTE u
When removing the Kapton® belt,
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
exercise care not to turn the belt
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
inside out. The machine might not
parts.
work normally.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Remove the tension coil spring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-483
MC-484
10.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Hitch the lower part of the
Kapton® belt on the flywheel,
and hitch the upper part on
the shaft. While pressing the
tensioner from upward, put the
end of the Kapton® belt on the
tensioner. While rotating the
flywheel, mount the Kapton®
belt.
u NOTE u
When reinstalling the Kapton ®
belt, exercise care not to turn
the belt inside out. The machine
might not work normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-484
MC-485
3. Reinstall the tension coil
spring.
4. Rotate the flywheel, and check
to make sure that the Kapton®
belt does not come off.
5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-485
MC-486
10.7 Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) 4. Insert an Allen wrench into
the hole in the driving shaft
{SP:INDEX} grip roller. While the roller is
10.7.1 Removal Procedures secured, remove the flywheel.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the subscanning unit in 10.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures
the orientation indicated in the
figure. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
3. Take the procedure 4 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-486
MC-487
10.8 Tensioner Assembly 10.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
10.8.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the KL ring and then
remove the tensioner assembly.
REFERENCE
For details on the tensioner
assembly, see the "Service Parts
List" volume.
{SP:08B_SUB SCANNING
UNIT 2}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-487
MC-488
10.9 FFM Motor (MZ1) 2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from
the direction indicated by the
{SP:INDEX} arrow in the figure.
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
u NOTES u 3. Check the DIP switch setting
before replacement.
- Do not use any magnet
screwdriver when removing/ REFERENCE
installing the FFM motor (MZ1). The setting example in the figure
- Do not touch the magnet portion shows the settings for shipment
of the FFM motor (MZ1). of the FFM motor (MZ1). Note
that the settings may have been
changed.
10.9.1 Removal Procedures 4. Remove the cover.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts u NOTE u
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the Do not use a magnet screwdriver.
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-488
MC-489
5. While supporting the FFM
motor (MZ1) by the hand,
preventing it from dropping,
remove the retaining screws to
remove the FFM motor (MZ1).
u NOTES u
- Do not use a magnet
screwdriver.
- Do not touch the magnet portion
of the FFM motor (MZ1).
- Be sure to support the FFM
motor (MZ1) not to have it
dropped, and remove the
retaining screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-489
MC-490
10.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Mount the FFM motor (MZ1) on
the subscanning unit. While
u NOTE u supporting the FFM motor
(MZ1) by the hand not to have it
When the FFM motor (MZ1) is to be installed, temporarily fasten the screws once, and then
dropped, temporarily fasten the
fasten the screws according to the procedures.
retaining screws of the motor.
u NOTES u
- Do not use a magnet
screwdriver.
- Do not touch the magnet portion
of the FFM motor (MZ1).
- Be sure to support the FFM
motor (MZ1) not to have it
dropped, and temporarily fasten
1. Check the DIP switch settings the retaining screws.
before the replacement, and
make the same settings.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from 4. Put on the cover, and
the direction indicated by the temporarily fasten the retaining
arrow in the figure. screws.
u NOTE u
Do not use a magnet screwdriver.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-490
MC-491
5. Fasten the screws in the order
as indicated in the figure.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
7. Check the subscan length.
u INSTRUCTION u
When the FFM motor (MZ1) is replaced, always check the subscan length according to
“10.9.3 Subscan Length Check”.
{MC:10.9.3_Subscan Length Check}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-491
MC-492
10.9.3 Subscan Length Check 4. Calculate the length (theoretical value) of the steel rule on the film.
1. Perform primary erasure on the IP to be used for subscan length check.
{Instruction Manual}
u NOTES u
- The IP type to be used should be the VI type.
- Make sure that no important image data has been exposed on the IP to be used.
2. Place a steel rule on the cassette and expose it at 1 mR.
5. Based on the theoretical value calculated in the procedure 4, calculate the
allowable subscan length.
REFERENCE
If the IP cannot be exposed at 1 mR, it should be exposed at 1 mR, with reference to
the following exposure conditions. Note, however, that those conditions are for standard
IP setup reference.
Distance: 1.8m
Voltage: 80kV
Amperage: 50mA
Time: 0.013 sec
6. Measure the steel rule length (actual measurement) on the output film, and make
3. Read the IP, which was exposed in the procedure 2 by “TEST”, “Image format” or sure that the length is within the allowable range calculated in the procedure 5.
“Image format-2” and “SINGLE”, and output it.
149.6 mm ≤ Actual measurement ≤ 151.4 mm
u NOTE u
If the subscan length is beyond the allowable value, make subscan length adjustments
(change the DIP switch setting), as appropriate.
{MC:10.9.4_Subscan Length Adjustment}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-492
MC-493
10.9.4 Subscan Length Adjustment DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1)
Switch Speed fine-adjustment
1. Remove the Left-Hand Cover Plate. S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 setup factor (%)
{MC:3.4_Left-Hand Cover Plate} OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF -1.6
2. With reference to the DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1), change the DIP switch OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON -1.5
setting. OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF -1.4
OFF ON ON OFF ON ON -1.3
REFERENCE
OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF -1.2
Changing the “speed fine-adjustment setup factor” in the positive (+) direction will cause
OFF ON ON ON OFF ON -1.1
the F value to decrease, while changing it in the negative (-) direction will cause the F
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF -1.0
value to increase.
OFF ON ON ON ON ON -0.9
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF -0.8
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON -0.7
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF -0.6
ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON -0.5
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF -0.4
ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON -0.3
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF -0.2
ON OFF OFF ON ON ON -0.1
ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 0
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON +0.1
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF +0.2
ON OFF ON OFF ON ON +0.3
ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF +0.4
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON +0.5
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF +0.6
ON OFF ON ON ON ON +0.7
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF +0.8
ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON +0.9
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF +1.0
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON +1.1
ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF +1.2
ON ON OFF ON OFF ON +1.3
ON ON OFF ON ON OFF +1.4
ON ON OFF ON ON ON +1.5
ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF +1.6
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-493
MC-494
3. Reinstall the Left-Hand Cover Plate.
{MC:3.4.2_Left-Hand Cover Plate}
4. Check the subscan length.
{MC:10.9.3_Subscan Length Check}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-494
MC-495
10.10 Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side) 4. Rotate the driving shaft until
the driving shaft grip bracket
{SP:INDEX} hole is oriented in the same
10.10.1 Removal Procedures direction as the housing
latches, and then remove the
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
driving shaft grip bracket.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts. u NOTE u
Reference Part concerned Be sure to remove the driving
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit shaft grip bracket while the
driving shaft grip bracket hole is
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
oriented in the same direction
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
as the housing latches. Failure
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. to observe this precaution may
damage the housing latches.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. While pressing down on the 10.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures
bracket to prevent the housing
latches from being damaged, For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
remove the tension coil spring.
u NOTE u
Be sure to remove the tension coil
spring while pressing down on
the bracket. Failure to observe
this precaution may damage the
housing latches.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-495
MC-496
10.11 Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side) 4. Rotate the driven shaft until the
driven shaft grip bracket hole is
{SP:INDEX} oriented in the same direction
10.11.1 Removal Procedures as the housing latches, and
then remove the driven shaft
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
grip bracket.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts. u NOTE u
Reference Part concerned Be sure to remove the driven
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit shaft grip bracket while the
driven shaft grip bracket hole is
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
oriented in the same direction
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
as the housing latches. Failure
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. to observe this precaution may
damage the housing latches.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. While pressing down on the 10.11.2 Reinstallation Procedures
bracket to prevent the housing
latches from being damaged, For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
remove the tension coil spring.
u NOTE u
Be sure to remove the tension coil
spring while pressing down on
the bracket. Failure to observe
this precaution may damage the
housing latches.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-496
MC-497
10.12 Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side) 4. Rotate the driving shaft until
the driving shaft grip bracket
{SP:INDEX} hole is oriented in the same
10.12.1 Removal Procedures direction as the housing
latches, and then remove the
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
driving shaft grip bracket.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts. u NOTE u
Reference Part concerned Be sure to remove the driving
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit shaft grip bracket while the
driving shaft grip bracket hole is
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
oriented in the same direction
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
as the housing latches. Failure
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. to observe this precaution may
damage the housing latches.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. While pressing down on the 10.12.2 Reinstallation Procedures
bracket to prevent the housing
latches from being damaged, For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
remove the tension coil spring.
u NOTE u
Be sure to remove the tension coil
spring while pressing down on
the bracket. Failure to observe
this precaution may damage the
housing latches.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-497
MC-498
10.13 Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side) 4. Rotate the driven shaft until the
driven shaft grip bracket hole is
{SP:INDEX} oriented in the same direction
10.13.1 Removal Procedures as the housing latches, and
then remove the driven shaft
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
grip bracket.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts. u NOTE u
Reference Part concerned Be sure to remove the driven
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit shaft grip bracket while the
driven shaft grip bracket hole is
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
oriented in the same direction
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
as the housing latches. Failure
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. to observe this precaution may
damage the housing latches.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. While pressing down on the 10.13.2 Reinstallation Procedures
bracket to prevent the housing
latches from being damaged, For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
remove the tension coil spring.
u NOTE u
Be sure to remove the tension coil
spring while pressing down on
the bracket. Failure to observe
this precaution may damage the
housing latches.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-498
MC-499
10.14 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) 3. Take the procedure 4 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
{SP:INDEX} in the figure.
10.14.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.13} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
4. Remove the bracket and then
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. remove the bearing.
2. Place the subscanning unit in
the orientation indicated in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-499
MC-500
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 8. Remove the bearing from the
from the direction indicated by driven shaft grip roller.
the arrow in the figure.
6. Move the driven shaft grip
roller to the left and then pull it
away from the side plate.
7. Lift one end of the driven shaft
grip roller and then remove the
driven shaft grip roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-500
MC-501
10.14.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Tilt the driven shaft grip roller
and insert it into the hole in the
left-hand side plate.
u NOTE u
Insert the driven shaft grip roller in
the direction shown.
1. Install the bearing while paying
attention to the orientation of
the driven shaft grip roller.
u NOTE u
Be sure to install the bearing over
the shaft end shown while paying
attention to the orientation of the
driven shaft grip roller.
3. Level the driven shaft grip
roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-501
MC-502
4. Insert the driven shaft grip 7. Place the subscanning unit in
roller into the hole in the right- the orientation indicated in the
hand side plate. figure.
5. Take the procedure 6 from the 8. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
direction indicated by the arrow procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.13.2} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
6. Install the bearing and then
mount the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-502
MC-503
10.15 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper) 3. Remove the bracket and then
remove the bearing.
{SP:INDEX}
10.15.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) from the direction indicated by
{MC:10.12} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side) the arrow in the figure.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 5. Move the driving shaft grip
direction indicated by the arrow roller to the right and then pull
in the figure. it away from the side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-503
MC-504
6. Lift one end of the driving shaft 10.15.2 Reinstallation Procedures
grip roller and then remove the
driving shaft grip roller.
7. Remove the bearing from the 1. Install the bearing while paying
driving shaft grip roller. attention to the orientation of
the driving shaft grip roller.
u NOTE u
Be sure to install the bearing over
the shaft end shown while paying
attention to the orientation of the
driving shaft grip roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-504
MC-505
2. Tilt the driving shaft grip roller 4. Insert the driving shaft grip
and insert it into the hole in the roller into the hole in the left-
right-hand side plate. hand side plate.
u NOTE u
Insert the driving shaft grip roller
in the direction shown.
5. Take the procedure 6 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Level the driving shaft grip 6. Install the bearing and then
roller. mount the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-505
MC-506
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.12.2} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.4.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-506
MC-507
10.16 Guide (A) 3. Remove the guide retaining
screws in the direction
{SP:INDEX} indicated in DETAIL A.
10.16.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.11} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
4. Remove the guide retaining
{MC:10.37} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket screws in the direction
{MC:10.19} Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) indicated in DETAIL B.
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.13} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.14} Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
{MC:10.32} Antistatic Member
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. While paying attention to the
from the direction indicated by light-collecting mirror, remove
the arrow in the figure. the guide.
u NOTE u
When you remove the guide,
exercise care not to damage the
light-collecting surface of the light-
collecting mirror.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-507
MC-508
10.16.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Press the grooves in both ends
of the guide against the half-
punches on the side plate inner
surfaces.
u NOTE u
When you press the guide against
the half-punches, exercise care
not damage the light-collecting
surface of the light-collecting
mirror.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-508
MC-509
3. Press the upper side of the 5. Install the guide retaining
guide against the half-punches. screws in the direction
indicated in DETAIL A.
6. Install the guide retaining
screws in the direction
indicated in DETAIL B.
4. With the guide pressed against
the half-punches, perform
procedures 5 and 6 in the
directions indicated by the
arrows in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-509
MC-510
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.32.2} Antistatic Member
{MC:10.14.2} Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
{MC:10.13.2} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.19.2} Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)
{MC:10.37.2} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
{MC:10.11.2} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:10.5.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-510
MC-511
10.17 Guide (B) 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
10.17.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.10} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
4. Remove the guide retaining
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt screws in the direction
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) indicated in DETAIL A.
{MC:10.12} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.15} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
{MC:10.18} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)
{MC:10.36} Auxiliary Bracket
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the subscanning unit in 5. Remove the guide retaining
the orientation indicated in the screws in the direction
figure. indicated in DETAIL B.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-511
MC-512
6. Take the procedure 7 from the 7. Raise the grip release arm latch
direction indicated by the arrow forward. Remove the guide
in the figure. while keeping it from coming
into contact with the latch.
u NOTE u
Be sure to remove the guide with
the grip release arm latch raised
forward. If this precaution is not
observed, you may not be able to
remove the guide because it may
be caught by the latch.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-512
MC-513
10.17.2 Reinstallation Procedures
1. Raise the grip release arm latch
forward. Insert the guide into
the subscanning unit while
keeping it from coming into
contact with the latch. Press
the grooves in both ends of
the guide against the rear half
punches on the inner side plate
surfaces. Press the guide
against the front half punches.
u NOTE u
Be sure to insert the guide with
the grip release arm latch raised
forward. If this precaution is not
observed, you may not be able to
install the guide because it may
be caught by the latch.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-513
MC-514
2. With the guide pressed against 5. Place the subscanning unit in
the half-punches, perform the orientation indicated in the
procedures 3 and 4 in the figure.
directions indicated by the
arrows in the figure.
3. Install the guide retaining 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
screws in the direction procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
indicated in DETAIL A.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.36.2} Auxiliary Bracket
{MC:10.18.2} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower)
{MC:10.15.2} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
{MC:10.12.2} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.10.2} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:10.4.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
4. Install the guide retaining {MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
screws in the direction
indicated in DETAIL B. {MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-514
MC-515
10.18 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) 3. Remove the KL ring and
bearing. Verify that the housing
{SP:INDEX} latch is positioned to match the
shape of the side plate hole,
10.18.1 Removal Procedures and then remove the housing.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts REFERENCE
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the The housing can be removed only
parts. when its latch is positioned to
Reference Part concerned match the shape of the side plate
hole.
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.10} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
4. Remove the spacer and
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt bearing.
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.12} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.15} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-515
MC-516
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 8. Take the procedures 9 and 10
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
6. Remove the KL ring and 9. Move the driving shaft grip
bearing. Verify that the housing roller to the right and then pull
latch is positioned to match the it away from the side plate.
shape of the side plate hole,
and then remove the housing.
REFERENCE
The housing can be removed only
when its latch is positioned to
match the shape of the side plate
hole.
7. Remove the spacer and 10. Pull out one end of the driving
bearing. shaft grip roller and then
remove the driving shaft grip
roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-516
MC-517
10.18.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Insert the driving shaft grip
roller into the subscanning
unit.
1. Tilt the driving shaft grip roller 3. Insert the driving shaft grip
and insert it into the hole in the roller shaft into the hole in the
right-hand side plate. left-hand side plate.
u NOTE u
Insert the driving shaft grip roller
in the direction shown.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-517
MC-518
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Take the procedures 8 and 9
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
5. Install the bearing and then 8. Install the bearing and then
install the spacer. install the spacer.
6. Verify that the housing latch is 9. Verify that the housing latch is
positioned to match the shape positioned to match the shape
of the side plate hole, and then of the side plate hole, and then
mount the housing. Install the mount the housing. Install the
bearing and then mount the KL bearing and then mount the KL
ring. ring.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
The housing can be mounted only The housing can be mounted only
when its latch is positioned to when its latch is positioned to
match the shape of the side plate match the shape of the side plate
hole. hole.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-518
MC-519
10. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.15.2} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
{MC:10.12.2} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.10.2} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:10.4.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-519
MC-520
10.19 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) 3. Take the procedures 4 and 5
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
10.19.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.11} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
4. Remove the KL ring and
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt bearing. Verify that the housing
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) latch is positioned to match the
shape of the side plate hole,
{MC:10.13} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side) and then remove the housing.
{MC:10.37} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
REFERENCE
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. The housing can be removed only
when its latch is positioned to
match the shape of the side plate
hole.
2. Place the subscanning unit in 5. Remove the spacer and
the orientation indicated in the bearing.
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-520
MC-521
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8 9. Take the procedures 10 and 11
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
7. Remove the KL ring and 10. Move the driven shaft grip
bearing. Verify that the housing roller to the left and then pull it
latch is positioned to match the away from the side plate.
shape of the side plate hole,
and then remove the housing.
REFERENCE
The housing can be removed only
when its latch is positioned to
match the shape of the side plate
hole.
8. Remove the spacer and 11. Pull one end of the driven shaft
bearing. grip roller and then remove the
driven shaft grip roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-521
MC-522
10.19.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Insert the driven shaft grip
roller into the subscanning
unit.
1. Tilt the driven shaft grip roller 3. Insert the driven shaft grip
and engage the driven shaft roller into the hole in the right-
grip roller shaft with the left- hand side plate.
hand side plate.
u NOTE u
Mount the driven shaft grip roller
in the direction shown.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-522
MC-523
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Take the procedures 8 and 9
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
5. Install the bearing and then 8. Install the bearing and then
install the spacer. install the spacer.
6. Verify that the housing latch is 9. Verify that the housing latch is
positioned to match the shape positioned to match the shape
of the side plate hole, and then of the side plate hole, and then
mount the housing. Install the mount the housing. Install the
bearing and then mount the KL bearing and then mount the KL
ring. ring.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
The housing can be mounted only The housing can be mounted only
when its latch is positioned to when its latch is positioned to
match the shape of the side plate match the shape of the side plate
hole. hole.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-523
MC-524
10. Place the subscanning unit in
the orientation indicated in the
figure.
11. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.37.2} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
{MC:10.13.2} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.11.2} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:10.5.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-524
MC-525
10.20 Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{SP:INDEX}
10.20.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the KL ring and then
remove the light-collecting
shaft driving gear.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-525
MC-526
10.20.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Align the leading end (enlarged
hole section) of the groove
in the light-collecting shaft
driving gear with the side plate
shaft, and then install the light-
collecting shaft driving gear.
REFERENCE
The light-collecting shaft driving
gear can be removed/installed
only at one position at which
the leading end (enlarged hole
section) of the groove in the light-
collecting shaft driving gear is
aligned with the side plate shaft.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Verify that the side plate shaft
and arm shaft are properly
positioned in the grooves of the
light-collecting shaft driving
gear.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-526
MC-527
4. Mount the KL ring.
5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-527
MC-528
10.21 Light-Collecting Mirror Assembly 3. Take the procedures from 4 to 6
from the direction indicated by
{SP:INDEX} the arrow in the figure.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
When handing the light-collecting mirror, observe the following precautions:
- Wear gloves. However, never touch the reflection surface of the light-collecting mirror even
when you are wearing gloves.
- Wear a mask so that saliva does not come into contact with the light-collecting mirror.
10.21.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned 4. Remove the tension coil spring.
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Place the subscanning unit in 5. Remove the KL ring, and then
the orientation indicated in the remove the guide and bearing.
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-528
MC-529
6. Disconnect the connector. 9. Pull out the SZ1 assembly while
exercising care not to damage
the flat cable.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bend or
damage the flat cable.
7. Take the procedures 8 and 9 10. Take the procedure 11 from the
from the direction indicated by direction indicated by the arrow
the arrow in the figure. in the figure.
8. Remove the screw. 11. Remove the KL ring, and then
remove the spur gear and
bearing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-529
MC-530
12. Take the procedures 13 and 14 10.21.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
13. While supporting the portion
indicated in the figure with your CAUTIONS
finger, move the light-collecting - Ensure that the reflection surface
mirror assembly to the left and
of the light-collecting mirror
pull it away from the side plate.
does not come into contact with
CAUTIONS neighboring parts. Failure to
- Ensure that the reflection surface observe this precaution may
of the light-collecting mirror damage the reflection surface of
does not come into contact with the light-collecting mirror.
neighboring parts. Failure to - Do not bend the flat cable.
observe this precaution may
damage the reflection surface of
the light-collecting mirror.
- Do not bend the flat cable.
14. Hold the light-collecting mirror
assembly as indicated in the
figure, lift one end of it, and
then remove it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-530
MC-531
1. Hold a shaft end of the light- 3. Verify that the positional
collecting mirror assembly relationship between the light-
as indicated in the figure, and collecting mirror assembly and
insert the light-collecting mirror stopper is as indicated in the
assembly shaft into the hole in figure, and then insert the light-
the left-hand side plate. collecting mirror assembly
shaft into the hole in the right-
u NOTE u hand side plate.
Be sure to hold the indicated shaft u NOTE u
end of the light-collecting mirror Be sure to verify that the positional
assembly. relationship between the light-
collecting mirror assembly and
stopper is as indicated in the
figure. Failure to observe this
precaution may damage a part of
the subscanning unit.
4. Take the procedure 5 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
2. Level the light-collecting mirror 5. Mount the bearing, spur gear,
assembly. and KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-531
MC-532
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8 9. Take the procedures from 10 to
from the direction indicated by 12 from the direction indicated
the arrow in the figure. by the arrow in the figure.
7. While positioning the flat cable 10. Connect the connector.
within the bracket, insert the
SZ1 assembly into the side
plate.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bend or
damage the flat cable.
8. Reinstall the screw. 11. Mount the bearing. Orient the
guide protrusion as indicated
in the figure and then mount
the guide. Mount the KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-532
MC-533
12. Reinstall the tension coil
spring.
13. Place the subscanning unit in
the orientation indicated in the
figure.
14. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.5.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.4.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-533
MC-534
10.22 Light-Collecting Mirror 3. While exercising care not to
touch the reflection surface
{SP:INDEX} of the light-collecting mirror,
remove the light-collecting
u INSTRUCTIONS u mirror.
When handing the light-collecting mirror, observe the following precautions:
- Wear gloves. However, never touch the reflection surface of the light-collecting mirror u NOTE u
even when you are wearing gloves. Be sure not to touch the reflection
- Wear a mask so that saliva does not come into contact with the light-collecting mirror. surface of the light-collecting
mirror.
10.22.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the 10.22.2 Reinstallation Procedures
parts.
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.21} Light-Collecting Mirror Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the light-collecting shaft
assembly as indicated in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-534
MC-535
10.23 Antistatic Member 3. Remove the antistatic member.
{SP:INDEX}
10.23.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
10.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.21} Light-Collecting Mirror Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Orient the light-collecting shaft
assembly as indicated in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-535
MC-536
10.24 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1) 3. Orient the light-collecting
mirror assembly as indicated in
{SP:INDEX} the figure.
10.24.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
4. While depressing the nail of the
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt IP leading edge sensor (SZ1)
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side) with a jeweler's screwdriver,
pull the IP leading edge sensor
{MC:10.21} Light-Collecting Mirror Assembly (SZ1) forward.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to bend or
damage the flat cable.
2. Remove the bracket from
the light-collecting mirror
assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-536
MC-537
5. Remove the IP leading-edge 10.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures
sensor (SZ1).
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-537
MC-538
10.25 Center Roller 3. Remove the bracket and then
remove the bearing.
{SP:INDEX}
10.25.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.20} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6
{MC:10.37} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket from the direction indicated by
{MC:10.26} Motor Assembly the arrow in the figure.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the 5. Move the center roller to the left
direction indicated by the arrow and pull it away from the side
in the figure. plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-538
MC-539
6. Pull one end of the center roller 10.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures
and then remove the center
roller.
7. Remove the KL ring from the 1. While paying attention to the
center roller, and then remove orientation of the center roller,
the bearing. mount the bearing and then the
KL ring.
u NOTE u
Mount the bearing while paying
attention to the orientation of the
center roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-539
MC-540
2. Tilt the center roller, and then 4. Insert the center roller into
insert the center roller shaft the hole in the right-hand side
into the hole in the left-hand plate.
side plate.
u NOTE u
Orient the center roller as
indicated in the figure.
5. Take the procedure 6 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Insert the center roller into the 6. Install the bearing and then
subscanning unit. mount the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-540
MC-541
7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.26.2} Motor Assembly
{MC:10.37.2} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
{MC:10.20.2} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-541
MC-542
10.26 Motor Assembly 3. Remove the screw.
{SP:INDEX}
10.26.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.20} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
4. Rotate the bracket and pull it
{MC:10.37} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket out of the subscanning unit.
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Reinstall the screw.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-542
MC-543
6. Place the subscanning unit in 8. Undo the clamps, and then
the orientation indicated in the remove the connector from the
figure. bracket.
7. Take the procedures 8 and 9
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
9. Hold the portion indicated in
the figure and pull out the arm
squarely.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-543
MC-544
10. Take the procedure 11 from the 12. Take the procedures 13 and 14
direction indicated by the arrow from the direction indicated by
in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
11. Unclamp the clamps, and 13. Remove the motor assembly
disconnect the connectors. retaining screws.
14. Pull the motor assembly
forward and out.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-544
MC-545
10.26.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Push the rightmost end of
the motor assembly into the
subscanning unit.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4 4. Remove the motor assembly
from the direction indicated by retaining screws.
the arrow in the figure.
2. Mount the motor assembly.
u NOTE u
When mounting the motor
assembly, exercise care so that
the cable is not caught by the
subscanning unit side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-545
MC-546
5. Take the procedure 6 from the 7. Take the procedures 8 and 9
direction indicated by the arrow from the direction indicated by
in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
6. Connect the connectors and 8. Hold the portion indicated in
then secure the clamps. the figure and push in the arm
squarely.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-546
MC-547
9. Mount the connector on the 11. Remove the screw.
bracket and then secure the
cable with the clamps.
12. Rotate the bracket, and return it
into the subscanning unit.
10. Place the subscanning unit in 13. Reinstall the screw.
the orientation indicated in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-547
MC-548
14. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.37.2} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
{MC:10.20.2} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-548
MC-549
10.27 Driven-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor (SZ2) 3. Remove the retaining screws
from the sensor (SZ2)
{SP:INDEX} assembly.
10.27.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.20} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
4. Remove the sensor (SZ2)
{MC:10.26} Motor Assembly assembly and then remove the
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. bearing.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Remove the sensor (SZ2) from
from the direction indicated by the bracket.
the arrow in the figure.
REFERENCE
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-549
MC-550
10.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Mount the bearing, and then
mount the sensor (SZ2)
assembly.
1. Mount the sensor (SZ2) on the 4. Verify that the sensor (SZ2)
bracket. assembly is properly mounted
on the half punches, and then
REFERENCE
tighten the screws.
For details on the sensor
removal/installation procedure,
see "Appendix 1-1 Sensor (5 mm
Type)."
{MC: Appendix 1-1_Sensor
(5 mm Type)}
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.26.2} Motor Assembly
{MC:10.20.2} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-550
MC-551
10.28 Driving-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor (SZ3), 3. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
Driven/Driving Grip Roller Driving Motor (MZ2)
{SP:INDEX}
10.28.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
4. Remove the sensor (SZ3)
{MC:10.20} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear assembly.
{MC:10.26} Motor Assembly
{MC:10.27} Driven-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor (SZ2)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-551
MC-552
5. With an Allen wrench, loosen 7. Remove the motor (MZ2).
the cam retaining screws.
u NOTES u
- Loosen the screws, but do not
remove them.
- Loosen only the specified
screws.
6. Remove the cam.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-552
MC-553
10.28.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Apply screw-locking bond (3B)
to the screws, and then tighten
the screws with an Allen
wrench.
1. Mount the motor (MZ2).
2. Properly orient the cam, install
it over the shaft, and push it all
the way in.
u NOTES u
- When mounting the cam,
properly orient it.
- Install the cam over the shaft
and then push it all the way in.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-553
MC-554
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.27.2} Driven-Side Grip Roller Release HP Sensor (SZ2)
{MC:10.26.2} Motor Assembly
{MC:10.20.2} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
5. Verify that the sensor (SZ3)
assembly is properly mounted
on the half punches, and then
tighten the screws.
6. Connect the connector, and
retain the cable with the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-554
MC-555
10.29 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ5), Dust Removal Motor 3. Unclamp the clamp.
(MZ3)
{SP:INDEX}
10.29.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
4. Disconnect the connector.
{MC:10.20} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{MC:10.26} Motor Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 7 5. Remove the motor (MZ3).
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-555
MC-556
6. Remove the retaining screws 10.29.2 Reinstallation Procedures
from the sensor (SZ5)
assembly.
7. Slightly lift the sensor (SZ5) 1. Take the procedures from 2 to 6
assembly and undo the clamp. from the direction indicated by
Remove the cable from the the arrow in the figure.
clamp.
2. Push the cable into the sensor
(SZ5) assembly clamp and
then secure the cable with the
clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-556
MC-557
3. Verify that the sensor (SZ5) 6. Retain the cable with the clamp.
assembly is properly mounted
on the half punches, and then
tighten the screws.
4. Mount the motor (MZ3). 7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.26.2} Motor Assembly
{MC:10.20.2} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
5. Connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-557
MC-558
10.30 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm 3. Remove the bearing in the
direction indicated in DETAIL A.
{SP:INDEX}
10.30.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.20} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
4. Remove the bearing in the
{MC:10.37} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket direction indicated in DETAIL B.
{MC:10.26} Motor Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-558
MC-559
5. Take the procedure 6 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
6. Remove the driving shaft grip
release arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-559
MC-560
10.30.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Mount the driving shaft grip
release arm, and then engage
the latches on both ends with
the driving shaft grip roller
shaft.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-560
MC-561
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.26.2} Motor Assembly
{MC:10.37.2} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
{MC:10.20.2} Light-Collecting Shaft Driving Gear
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Mount the bearing in the
direction indicated in DETAIL A.
5. Mount the bearing in the
direction indicated in DETAIL B.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-561
MC-562
10.31 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm 4. Remove the bearing in the
direction indicated in DETAIL B.
{SP:INDEX}
10.31.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.37} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 5. Take the procedure 6 from the
from the direction indicated by direction indicated by the arrow
the arrow in the figure. in the figure.
3. Remove the bearing in the 6. Remove the driven shaft grip
direction indicated in DETAIL A. release arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-562
MC-563
10.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Mount the driven shaft grip
release arm, and then engage
the latches on both ends with
the driven shaft grip roller
shaft.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-563
MC-564
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
from the direction indicated by procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
the arrow in the figure.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.37.2} Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
4. Mount the bearing in the
direction indicated in DETAIL A.
5. Mount the bearing in the
direction indicated in DETAIL B.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-564
MC-565
10.32 Antistatic Member 10.32.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
10.32.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the antistatic member.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-565
MC-566
10.33 Vibration-Proof Rubber Assembly 2. Remove the jigs.
{SP:INDEX}
u NOTE u
When a vibration-proof rubber assembly needs to be replaced, replace both of the two
vibration-proof rubber assemblies.
10.33.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-566
MC-567
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 6. Take the procedures 7 and 8
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
4. Remove the screws to 7. Remove the screws to
disconnect one end of each disconnect one end of each
ground wire. ground wire.
5. Remove the vibration-proof 8. Remove the vibration-proof
rubber assembly. rubber assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-567
MC-568
10.33.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-568
MC-569
10.34 Toothed Washer (Driving Shaft) 3. Remove the tension coil spring.
{SP:INDEX}
10.34.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.4} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.10} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
4. Remove the KL ring and then
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt remove the guide.
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.12} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.15} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from 5. Remove the bracket and then
the direction indicated by the remove the toothed washer.
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-569
MC-570
10.34.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. While keeping the toothed
washer from falling off the
bracket, mount the bracket
on the half punches. While
pressing the bracket against
the side plate, tighten the
screws.
u NOTE u
Tighten the screws while pressing
the bracket to prevent the toothed
washer from falling off.
1. Engage the toothed washer
with the nail of the bracket.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from 4. Verify that the guide protrusion
the direction indicated by the is oriented as indicated in the
arrow in the figure. figure, mount the guide, and
mount the KL ring.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-570
MC-571
5. Reinstall the tension coil
spring.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.15.2} Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
{MC:10.12.2} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.10.2} Driving Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:10.4.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driving Shaft Side)
{MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-571
MC-572
10.35 Toothed Washer (Driven Shaft) 3. Remove the bracket and then
remove the toothed washer.
{SP:INDEX}
10.35.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
{MC:10.3} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.5} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.11} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:10.6} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.7} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.13} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.14} Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-572
MC-573
10.35.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. While keeping the toothed
washer from falling off the
bracket, mount the bracket
on the half punches. While
pressing the bracket against
the side plate, tighten the
screws.
u NOTE u
Tighten the screws while pressing
the bracket to prevent the toothed
washer from falling off.
1. Engage the toothed washer
with the nail of the bracket.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-573
MC-574
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.14.2} Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)
{MC:10.13.2} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.7.2} Flywheel (Opposite Reference Side)
{MC:10.6.2} Kapton® Belt
{MC:10.11.2} Driven Shaft Grip Bracket (Reference Side)
{MC:10.5.2} Flywheel (Reference Surface-Driven Shaft Side)
{MC:10.3.2} Rubber Belt
{MC:10.1.2} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-574
MC-575
10.36 Auxiliary Bracket 10.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
10.36.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the auxiliary bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-575
MC-576
10.37 Shock-Absorber-Attached Bracket 10.37.2 Reinstallation Procedures
{SP:INDEX} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
10.37.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:10.1} Subscanning Unit
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
3. Remove the shock-absorber-
attached bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-576
MC-577
11. PC Boards 3. Disconnect the connector.
11.1 Board Assembly
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
11.1.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the 4. Disconnect the connector.
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
{MC:11.4} LAN23A Board
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 9 from 5. Remove the connector (CN4)
the direction indicated by the straight, holding the shaded
arrow in the figure. portion in the figure.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to disconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Be sure to remove the connector
straight. If it is removed slantly,
a failure in connection may
occur, causing an error.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-577
MC-578
6. Disconnect the connectors. 9. Disconnect the connectors.
7. Push the hook of the 10. While supporting the board
connectors and disconnect assembly by hand, remove the
them. retaining screws, and remove
the board assembly.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the board
assembly for the operation.
Otherwise, the board assembly
might drop, getting damaged.
8. Disconnect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-578
MC-579
11.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. While supporting the board
assembly by hand, reinstall the
retaining screws.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the board
assembly for the operation.
Otherwise, the board assembly
might drop, getting damaged.
1. Take the procedures 2 to 9 from
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
3. Connect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-579
MC-580
4. Connect the connectors. 7. Reinstall the connector straight,
holding the shaded portion in
the figure.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to reconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Be sure to reinstall the connector
straight. If it is reinstalled
slantly, the connector on the
board might get damaged.
5. Connect the connectors. 8. Connect the connector.
6. Connect the connectors. 9. Connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-580
MC-581
10. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:11.4.2} LAN23A Board
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-581
MC-582
11.2 CPU23B Board 11.2.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU
{SP:INDEX} When the RU can boot up, start up the machine Maintenance Utility of the RU to back up the
machine data.
CAUTION If the RU cannot boot up, proceed to “11.2.4 Replacing the CPU23B Board”.
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to {MC:11.2.4_Replacing the CPU23B Board}
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
The Flash ROM of the CPU23B board stores the RU machine data (configuration information,
scanner information and log information). Since the CPU23B board shipped as a service
part does not contain the machine data set, it is necessary to restore the RU as exactly it
was before the replacement by updating the software version and adjusting the machine data
after replacement.
For the adjustment of the machine data, take either of the following procedures depending on
the RU conditions.
- When the RU can boot up, back up the machine data, and restore the backed up machine
data after the replacement of the CPU23B board.
- When the RU cannot boot up, restore the machine-specific data by means of the machine-
specific data CD attached to the machine.
- If the RU cannot boot up and no machine-specific data CD is available, adjust the machine
data through format adjustment, and shading/sensitivity correction.
11.2.1 Replacement Procedures
Replace the CPU23B board according to the procedures mentioned in the following reference
list.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:11.2.2} Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU
{MC:11.2.3} Machine Data Backup
{MC:11.2.4} Replacing the CPU23B Board
{MC:11.2.5} Setting the IP Address of the RU
{MC:11.2.6} Updating the RU Software Version
{MC:11.2.7} Restoring the Machine Data
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-582
MC-583
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU. 2. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left {MC:11.2.1_Replacement Procedures}
on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
u NOTE u
Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the CL and FCR-MB 201
power sequentially and repeat from the procedure 1.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-583
MC-584
11.2.3 Machine Data Backup 4. Back up the “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN OPTICAL DATA” and “HISTORY LOG”.
It is necessary to restore the machine as exactly it was before the replacement of the
CPU23B board by restoring the machine data after the replacement of the CPU23B board.
To do so, back up the machine data.
1. Start up the RU PC-TOOL.
REFERENCE
Refer to the Maintenance Utility “4.23.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL” for the details of the
startup procedures of the RU PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. When a storage media (USB memory stick or the like) is to be used for backing up
the machine data, connect it to the CL.
u NOTE u
When the machine data is to be backed up in an arbitrary place in the hard disk of the
CL, the procedure 2 need not be taken. Proceed to the procedure 3.
3. Select the RU whose machine data is to be backed up from the “LIST OF REFERENCE
EXISTING RU”. Refer to “16.1 Backup Procedure” for the details of the backup procedures.
{MC:16.1_Backup Procedure}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power.
7. Eject the storage media (USB memory stick or the like) from the CL when the
machine data has been backed up on the storage media.
8. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
{MC:11.2.1_Replacement Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-584
MC-585
11.2.4 Replacing the CPU23B Board 2. Remove the bracket.
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
Replace the CPU23B board.
The CPU23B board shipped as a service part is specified for use in Japan. Make the DIP
switch settings equal to those of the removed CPU23B board before installing the board.
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts 3. Remove the CPU23B board.
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
{MC:11.4} LAN23A Board
{MC:11.1} Board Assembly
{MC:11.3} SCN Board
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-585
MC-586
4. Make the DIP switch settings of a new CPU23B board to be installed. l Meaning of DIP switch settings
Normal
u INSTRUCTION u No Item Meaning
setting
Make the DIP switch settings of a new CPU23B board to be installed equal to those of
the removed CPU23B board. If differently set, the machine will not work normally. 1 For design OFF Nothing
2 For design OFF Nothing
3 Machine selection 1 OFF Sets the type of the machine.
Always set to OFF for this machine.
4 BCR yes/no ON Sets as to whether or not the BCR is installed
in the side-positioning conveyor unit. Always
set to ON for this machine.
5 Machine selection 2 OFF Sets the type of the machine.
Always set to OFF for this machine.
6 15x30 IP usable/nonusable ON Sets whether or not 15x30 size IPs are to be
used. Always set to ON for this machine.
7 Restoring applications (for OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PC-
troubleshooting) TOOL with the IP address of the RU fixed to
“172.16.1.10” and the IP address of the CL
When the IP addresses of the fixed to "172.16.1.20".
RU and the FTP server are OFF: “Initialize APL” cannot be executed.
unknown. ON: “Initialize APL” can be executed.
8 Restoring applications (for OFF Used to perform “Initialize APL” of the RU PC-
troubleshooting) TOOL
OFF: “Initialize APL” cannot be executed.
When the IP addresses of the ON: “Initialize APL” can be executed.
RU and the FTP server are
known.
* If both No.7 and No.8 switches are ON, the function of the No.8 switch has priority.
REFERENCE
When “Board check” of the MUTL is selected, “28” is displayed in “CPU Board Setting
Display”. Refer to the Maintenance Utility “7.3 [2-8] CPU Board Setting Display” for the
details of “CPU Board Setting Display”.
{MU:7.3[2-8]_CPU Board Setting Display}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-586
MC-587
5. Install the CPU23B board. 7. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:11.3.2} SCN Board
{MC:11.1.2} Board Assembly
{MC:11.4.2} LAN23A Board
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
8. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
{MC:11.2.1_Replacement Procedures}
6. Reinstall the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-587
MC-588
11.2.5 Setting the IP Address of the RU 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left
The IP address of the RU is set to the default after the replacement of the CPU23B board.
on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
Set the IP address of the RU to the address before the replacement of the CPU23B board.
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
REFERENCE
u NOTE u
This chapter describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made as
Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
follows:
Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
IP address of the RU: 172.16.1.11
does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the CL and FCR-MB 201
IP address of the FTP server: 172.16.1.21
power sequentially and repeat from the procedure 1.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-588
MC-589
REFERENCE 3. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once.
The IP address of the RU is set in the procedures 2 to 4.
u NOTE u
2. Make sure that “Reader Unit IP Address” is selected, and then press the [Select] Set the IP address of the RU specified on the CL.
button.
4. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button.
→ The address setting window appears.
→ In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified
address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-589
MC-590
REFERENCE 6. Press the [Select] button.
The IP address of the FTP server is to be set in the procedures 5 to 8.
5. Press the button twice, and select “FTP Server IP Address”.
→ The address setting window appears.
7. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once.
u NOTE u
Specify the IP address of the CL.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-590
MC-591
8. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button. REFERENCE
In the procedures 10 to 13, “Check of the connection with the CL” is performed.
10. Press the button, and select “Network Check”.
→ In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified
address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores.
9. Set the following addresses according to the conditions before the replacement
of the CPU23B board.
- Subnet Mask
{MU:3.3_Subnet Mask}
- Default Gateway
11. Press the [Select] button.
{MU:3.5_Default Gateway}
- Secure Host
{MU:3.6_Secure Host}
- Secure Net
{MU:3.7_Secure Net}
→ The “Network Check” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-591
MC-592
12. Press the [Check] button. 11.2.6 Updating the RU Software Version
The RU software version is updated to update the RU software in the latest conditions. After
the updating, set the master CL.
1. Set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit.
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
2. Click on [START].
13. Confirm the display on the operation panel.
3. Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU”, and click on [FTP].
u NOTES u
- “OK” is displayed in the GOOD indication when “Default Gateway” is specified.
- Take the troubleshooting procedures when the NO GOOD indication appears.
{Troubleshooting}
14. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
{MC:11.2.1_Replacement Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-592
MC-593
4. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK]. 6. Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU”, and click on [VERSION UP].
7. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
In the case of the NO GOOD indication, refer to: 8. Verify the “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK].
{Troubleshooting}
5. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
9. Click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-593
MC-594
10. Check the precautions for the installation. 12. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter]
key twice.
CAUTION
Never turn OFF the power of the RU nor the FCR-MB 201 during the write into the
Flash ROM. If turned OFF, the program in the memory will be destroyed and cannot
restart.
11. If a linac cassette is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the linac
cassette is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the CL display. While the
flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u NOTE u
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 7 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
13. Click on [OK].
14. Verify the RU software version.
u NOTE u
If the NO GOOD indication appears, return to the procedure 1, and again perform the
installation.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-594
MC-595
15. Select the RU whose software version has been updated from the “LIST OF 18. Return to the reference list described in the replacement procedures.
EXISTING RU”, and click on [EDIT CL NAME]. {MC:11.2.1_Replacement Procedures}
16. Click on [MODIFY].
17. Input “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”, and click on [SET].
u INSTRUCTION u
The “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME” settings should be the same as those before
the replacement of the CPU23B board.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-595
MC-596
11.2.7 Restoring the Machine Data 1. Select the RU whose machine data is to be restored from the “LIST OF EXISTING
RU”.
The machine is not properly adjusted after the replacement of the CPU23B board.
Restore the backup data created in “11.2.3 Machine Data Backup”, and restore to the
conditions before the replacement of the CPU23B board.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- If the RU was not able to boot up before the replacement of the CPU23B board and you
were not able to back up the machine data, restore the machine-specific data by means of 2. Restore “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN OPTICAL DATA” and “HISTORY LOG”.
the machine-specific data CD attached to the machine.
- If no backup data or machine-specific data is available, take the procedures for the “format
adjustment” and “shading/sensitivity correction” to adjust the machine. Also perform
“shading speed correction” when needed.
l Format Adjustment
{MC:14._Format Adjustment}
l Shading/Sensitivity Correction
{MC:15.1_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
l Shading Speed Correction
{MC:15.2_Shading Speed Correction}
REFERENCE
Refer to “16.2 Restore Procedure” for the details of the restoring procedures.
{MC:16.2_Restore Procedure}
3. Shut down the CL.
4. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power.
5. Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power.
6. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-596
MC-597
11.3 SCN Board 3. Hold and raise the SCN board
straight not to tilt, and remove
{SP:INDEX} it.
u NOTE u
CAUTION
Be sure to hold and raise the
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
SCN board straight not to tilt
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
for removal. Otherwise, the
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
connector on the board might get
damaged.
11.3.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
{MC:11.4} LAN23A Board
{MC:11.1} Board Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Remove the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-597
MC-598
11.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Check to make sure that the
SCN board connector (CN10) is
snugly fitted into the CPU23B
board connector (CN2).
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify that the
connector is snugly fitted.
Otherwise, the machine might not
work normally.
1. Mount the SCN board on the 3. Reinstall the screws.
CPU23B board connector (CN2)
with the connector (CN10)
position aligned. Place your
fingers on the positions as
indicated in the figure, and
vertically push in the SCN
board.
u NOTE u
Be sure to push in the SCN board
vertically. If pushed slantly, the
connector on the board might get
damaged.
4. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:11.1.2} Board Assembly
{MC:11.4.2} LAN23A Board
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-598
MC-599
11.4 LAN23A Board 3. Remove the retaining screws of
the LAN23A board assembly.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
11.4.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned 4. Pull out the LAN23A board
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU assembly not to tilt it to the
right or left.
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
u NOTE u
Be sure to hold the positions as
indicated in the figure to pull out
the LAN23A board assembly. If
pulled out with the board held, the
board might get damaged.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 5 from 5. Remove the LAN23A board
the direction indicated by the from the bracket.
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-599
MC-600
11.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Align the edge of the LAN23A
board with the PCI1 connector
in position.
1. Reinstall the LAN23A board
onto the bracket.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 5 4. Hold the positions as indicated
from the direction indicated by in the figure to push in the
the arrow in the figure. LAN23A board assembly.
u NOTES u
- Push in the LAN23A board
assembly, holding the positions
as indicated in the figure.
Otherwise, the bracket might
deform.
- Push in LAN23A board
assembly, exercising care not to
tilt it to the right or left.
- Be sure to fit the LAN23A board
snugly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-600
MC-601
5. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the LAN23A board assembly.
6. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:4.7.2} Board Box Cover
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-601
MC-602
11.5 SND23A Board 3. Remove the board box cover.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
11.5.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned 4. Disconnect the connectors.
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
u NOTE u
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to. As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
disconnecting the connector.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 13
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-602
MC-603
5. Unclamp the clamps. 8. Disconnect the connectors.
6. Disconnect the connectors. 9. Close the clamps.
u NOTE u
Be sure to close the clamps.
Otherwise, the board and the
clamp may interfere with each
other when the board is to be
removed.
7. Disconnect the connectors. 10. Put the cable aside for the
protection of the cable.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-603
MC-604
11. Remove the retaining screws of 13. Slightly pull out one of sides
the SND23A board. of the SND23A board while
supporting on the positions as
indicated in the figure. Slightly
raise the SND23A board, and
slantly pull it out exercising
care not to have the connector
caught by the bracket.
u NOTE u
Exercise care in removing the
SND23A board, not to have
the connector caught by the
bracket. The connector might get
damaged.
12. Push out the retainers until
the SND23A board disengages
while supporting the SND23A
board.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the SND23A
board for the operation.
Otherwise, the SND23A board
might drop, getting damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-604
MC-605
11.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures 2. Slightly put in one of sides
of the SND23A board into the
board box while supporting on
the positions as indicated in
the figure. Make sure that the
connector is inserted into the
bracket hole, before installing
the SND23A board in the board
box.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify that the
connector has been inserted into
the bracket hole, before installing
the SND23A board in the board
1. Take the procedures 2 to 12 box. Otherwise, the connector
from the direction indicated by might get damaged.
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-605
MC-606
3. Push in the SND23A board until 5. Open the clamps.
the board is retained with the
retainers while supporting the
SND23A board.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the SND23A
board for the operation.
Otherwise, the SND23A board
might drop, getting damaged.
4. Reinstall the retaining screws 6. Connect the connectors.
of the SND23A board.
7. Connect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-606
MC-607
8. Connect the connectors. 11. Connect the connectors.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
9. Manually push in the fuses (F2
to F5) around the cable on the
SND23A board. Check to make
sure that the fuses are not
loose.
10. Retain the cable with the 12. Reinstall the board box cover.
clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-607
MC-608
13. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-608
MC-609
11.6 SND23B Board 3. Remove the bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
11.6.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned 4. Unclamp the clamps.
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:5.2} Dust-Tight Cover Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 to 9 from
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-609
MC-610
5. Disconnect the six connectors. 6. Disconnect the connectors.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
As the working space is small, As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when by peripheral components when
disconnecting the connector. disconnecting the connector.
7. Remove the retaining screws of
the SND23B board.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-610
MC-611
8. Push out the retainers until 9. Pull out the SND23B board,
the SND23B board disengages supporting the positions as
while supporting the SND23B indicated in the figure.
board.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the SND23B
board for the operation.
Otherwise, the SND23B board
might drop, getting damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-611
MC-612
11.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Push in the SND23B board,
supporting the board, until the
SND23B board is retained with
the retainers.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the SND23B
board for the operation.
Otherwise, the SND23B board
might drop, getting damaged.
1. Take the procedures 2 to 9 from
the direction indicated by the
arrow in the figure.
2. Put in the SND23B board into
the housing.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-612
MC-613
4. Reinstall the retaining screws 6. Connect the six connectors.
of the SND23B board.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
5. Connect the connectors.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
7. Manually push in the fuses (F1
to F6) around the cable on the
SND23B board, and make sure
that they are not loose.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-613
MC-614
8. Retain the cable with the 10. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
clamps. procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:5.2.2} Dust-Tight Cover Assembly
{MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
9. Reinstall the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-614
MC-615
11.7 PSU29B Board 3. Disconnect the eleven
connectors.
{SP:INDEX}
CAUTION
When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
11.7.1 Removal Procedures
1. Remove the FCR-MB 201 covers.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4 4. While supporting the PSU29B
from the direction indicated by board by hand, remove the
the arrow in the figure. retaining screws, and remove
the PSU29B board.
u NOTE u
Be sure to support the PSU29B
board for the operation.
Otherwise, the PSU29B board
might drop, getting damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-615
MC-616
11.7.2 Reinstallation Procedures 3. Connect the eleven connectors.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. While supporting the PSU29B 2. Reinstall the following parts concerned to restore the machine. Refer to the
board by hand, reinstall the procedures mentioned as the reference, to reinstall the parts concerned.
retaining screws.
Reference Part concerned
u NOTE u {MC:3.1.2} Pulling Out the RU
Be sure to support the PSU29B
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
board for the operation.
Otherwise, the PSU29B board
might drop, getting damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-616
MC-617
12. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse Locations 12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures
CAUTIONS
12.1 Fuse Classification and Replacement Procedures - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
12.1.1 Fuse Classification - When replacing the fuse, check the rated amperage of the fuse to be replaced, and
replace it with a fuse of the same rated amperage. At that time, check the Rated
l How to understand fuse notations amperage (A) silk-screened on the board as well.
An example of classification symbols and rated amperage is shown below. - To remove the fuse, pull it straight up and off.
- When attaching the fuse, exercise care not to bend the pins of the fuse.
1. Pull out the fuse, and replace it with a new one.
l How to identify rated amperage
Fuse notation Rated amperage
03 (D) 0.3A
05 (D) 0.5A
10 (D) 1A
13 (D) 1.3A
LM 16 (D) 1.6A
20 (D) 2A
32 (D) 3.2A
40 (D) 4A
50 (D) 5A
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-617
MC-618
12.2 SND23A Board Fuses 3. Remove the board box cover.
{SP:INDEX}
12.2.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-618
MC-619
4. Replace the SND23A board fuses with new ones, referring to the fuse location and l Fuse information
the fuse information. Refer to "12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures" for details Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
of the replacement procedures of the fuse.
F1 LM 48V 2A
{MC:12.1.2_Fuse Replacement Procedures}
F2 LM 48V 3.2A
l Fuse location
F3 LM 48V 3.2A
F4 LM 48V 3.2A
F5 LM 48V 3.2A
F6 LM 48V 5A
F7 LM 48V 5A
u NOTE u
Since the fuses F6 and F7 are directly mounted on the SND23A board, the fuse cannot
be replaced singly. If the fuse F6 or F7 is blown out, replace the SND23A board.
{MC:11.5_SND23A Board}
12.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-619
MC-620
12.3 SND23B Board Fuses 3. Remove the bracket.
{SP:INDEX}
12.3.1 Removal Procedures
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:5.2} Dust-Tight Cover Assembly
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Take the procedures 3 and 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-620
MC-621
4. Replace the SND23B board fuses with new ones, referring to the fuse location l Fuse information
and the fuse information. Refer to "12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures" for Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
details of the replacement procedures of the fuse.
F1 LM 48V 2A
{MC:12.1.2_Fuse Replacement Procedures}
F2 LM 48V 3.2A
l Fuse location
F3 LM 48V 3.2A
F4 LM 48V 2A
F5 LM 48V 3.2A
F6 LM 48V 2A
F7 LM 48V 5A
F8 LM 48V 5A
u NOTE u
Since the fuses F7 and F8 are directly mounted on the SND23B board, the fuse cannot
be replaced singly. If the fuse F7 or F8 is blown out, replace the SND23B board.
{MC:11.6_SND23B Board}
12.3.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-621
MC-622
12.4 SCN Board Fuses l Fuse information
Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
{SP:INDEX}
F1 LM 48V 1.6A
12.4.1 Removal Procedures F2 LM 48V 1.6A
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts F3 LM 48V 1.6A
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
F4 LM 48V 1.6A
parts.
F5 LM 48V 1.6A
Reference Part concerned
F6 LM 48V 1.6A
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
F7 LM 48V 3.2A
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
F8 LM 48V 5A
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
2. Replace the SCN board fuses with new ones, referring to the fuse location and u NOTE u
the fuse information. Refer to "12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures" for details Since the fuses F7 and F8 are directly mounted on the SCN board, the fuse cannot be
of the replacement procedures of the fuse. replaced singly. If the fuse F7 or F8 is blown out, replace the SCN board.
{MC:12.1.2_Fuse Replacement Procedures} {MC:11.3_SCN Board}
l Fuse location
12.4.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-622
MC-623
12.5 CPU23B Board Fuses 3. Replace the CPU23B board fuses with new ones, referring to the fuse location
and the fuse information. Refer to "12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures" for
{SP:INDEX} details of the replacement procedures of the fuse.
12.5.1 Removal Procedures {MC:12.1.2_Fuse Replacement Procedures}
l Fuse location
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:4.7} Board Box Cover
{MC:11.4} LAN23A Board
{MC:11.1} Board Assembly
{MC:11.3} SCN Board
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
l Fuse information
Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
F1 LM 48V 1A
F2 LM 48V 1A
F3 LM 48V 1A
F4 LM 48V 1A
F5 LM 48V 5A
u NOTE u
Since the fuse F5 is directly mounted on the CPU23B board, the fuse cannot be
2. Remove the bracket.
replaced singly. If the fuse F5 is blown out, replace the CPU23B board.
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board}
12.5.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-623
MC-624
12.6 ERS23A Board Fuses 2. Replace the ERS23A board fuses with new ones, referring to the fuse location and
the fuse information. Refer to “12.1.2 Fuse Replacement Procedures” for details
{SP:INDEX} of the replacement procedures of the fuse.
12.6.1 Removal Procedures {MC:12.1.2_Fuse Replacement Procedures}
l Fuse location
1. For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts
concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the
parts.
Reference Part concerned
{MC:3.1} Pulling Out the RU
{MC:6.1} Erasure Unit
{MC:6.6} Cover Bracket
* Skip the already completed procedures in those referred to.
l Fuse information
Board indications Type Rated voltage (V) Rated amperage (A)
F1 LM 48V 5A
F2 LM 48V 5A
F3 LM 48V 2A
F4 LM 48V 2A
F5 LM 48V 5A
u NOTE u
Since the fuse F5 is directly mounted on the ERS23A board, the fuse cannot be
replaced singly. If the fuse F5 is blown out, replace the erasure assembly.
{MC:6.13_Erasure Assembly}
12.6.2 Reinstallation Procedures
For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-624
MC-625
13. Updating the Software 13.1 Updating the Software from the CL
The software update procedure for the CL differs from that for the client PC. Perform either 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
of two different software update procedures depending on the situation of the institution. Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left
on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
- For updating the software from the CL, see "13.1 Updating the Software from the CL." “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
{MC:13.1_Updating the Software from the CL} u NOTE u
- For updating the software from the client PC, see "13.2 Updating the Software from the Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
Client PC." Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
{MC:13.2_Updating the Software from the Client PC} does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the CL and FCR-MB 201
power sequentially and repeat from the procedure 1.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-625
MC-626
REFERENCE 5. Click on [Remove].
Steps 2 to 6 are performed to uninstall the RU PC-TOOL.
2. Set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit.
3. Click on [UNINSTALL].
6. Upon completion of uninstallation, click [Finish].
4. Click on [NEXT].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-626
MC-627
REFERENCE 9. Click on [NEXT].
Steps 7 to 15 are performed to install the RU PC-TOOL.
7. Click on [INSTALL].
10. Click on [INSTALL].
8. Choose "For FTP-Server" and then click [SET].
u NOTE u
Be sure to choose "For FTP-Server." If "For Client PC" is chosen, you cannot properly
perform the installation procedure. If you inadvertently click [SET] with "For Client PC"
chosen, perform installation again as directed under "Appendix 5. Corrective Procedure
to be Performed after Improper RU PC-TOOL Installation" in the "Installation" volume.
{IN: Appendix 5._Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper RU PC-
TOOL Installation}
11. Upon completion of installation, click [Finish].
12. Click on [START].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-627
MC-628
13. Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF 15. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
EXISTING RU”, and click on [FTP].
14. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
In the case of the NO GOOD indication, refer to:
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
Steps 16 to 28 are performed to update the RU software.
16. Select the RU whose software version is to be updated from the “LIST OF
EXISTING RU”, and click on [VERSION UP].
u NOTE u
In the case of the NO GOOD indication, refer to:
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
When you click [VERSION UP], the message "Under maintenance" appears on the RU
operation panel.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-628
MC-629
17. Click on [OK]. 20. Check the precautions for the installation.
CAUTION
Never turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201 during the write into the Flash ROM. If
turned OFF, the program in the memory will be destroyed and cannot restart.
18. Select the “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK].
21. If a linac cassette is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the linac
cassette is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the CL display. While the
flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u NOTE u
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 16 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
19. Click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-629
MC-630
22. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter] 24. Verify the RU software version, and then close the RU PC-TOOL.
key twice.
23. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
If the NO GOOD indication appears, return to the procedure 1, and again perform the
installation.
25. Shut down the CL.
26. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power.
27. Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power.
28. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-630
MC-631
13.2 Updating the Software from the Client PC 3. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left
1. Turn ON the client PC. on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
2. Connect the client PC to the network within the institution, and then perform
network setup. u NOTE u
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the CL and FCR-MB 201
power sequentially and repeat from the procedure 1.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-631
MC-632
REFERENCE 7. Click on [Remove].
Steps 4 to 8 are performed to uninstall the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
4. Set the RU-APL CD into the client PC's CD drive.
5. Click on [UNINSTALL].
8. Upon completion of uninstallation, click [Finish].
6. Click on [NEXT].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-632
MC-633
REFERENCE 11. Click on [NEXT].
Steps 9 to 18 are performed to install the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
9. Click on [INSTALL].
12. Click on [INSTALL].
10. Choose "For Client PC" and then click [SET].
u NOTE u
Be sure to choose "For Client PC" If "For FTP-Server" is chosen, you cannot properly
perform the installation procedure.
If you inadvertently click [SET] with "For FTP-Server" chosen, perform installation again
as directed under "5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT
PC-TOOL Installation" in the "Maintenance Utility" volume.
{MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation}
13. Upon completion of installation, click [Finish].
14. Click on [START].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-633
MC-634
15. Select the RU in the hospital list. 18. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
16. Click on [FTP].
u NOTE u
In the case of the NO GOOD indication, refer to:
{Troubleshooting}
17. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
In the case of the NO GOOD indication, refer to:
{Troubleshooting}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-634
MC-635
REFERENCE 23. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK].
Steps 19 to 33 are performed to update the RU software.
19. Select the RU in the hospital list.
24. Click on [OK].
20. Click on [VERSION UP].
REFERENCE
When you click [VERSION UP], the message "Under maintenance" appears on the RU
operation panel.
21. Click on [OK].
22. Select "VERSION UP".
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-635
MC-636
25. Check the precautions for the installation. 27. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter]
key twice.
CAUTION
Never turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201 nor the client PC during the write into
the Flash ROM. If turned OFF, the program in the memory will be destroyed and
cannot restart.
26. If a linac cassette is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the linac
cassette is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the Client PC display.
While the flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u NOTE u
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 16 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
28. Click on [OK].
29. Exit from the “CLIENT PC-TOOL” window.
u NOTE u
If the NO GOOD indication appears, return to the procedure 1, and again perform the
installation.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-636
MC-637
30. Shut down the CL.
31. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power.
32. Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power.
33. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without
nonuniformity.
{MC:17._Image/Conveyance Checks}
l There is no error occurrence.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-637
MC-638
14. Format Adjustment 3. Measure a misalignment of the reading width.
Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of the white blank
portion, and calculate an adjustment value in accordance with the formula shown below.
14.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment
u INSTRUCTION u
Of the IPs used by the user, the largest sized IP should be utilized for adjustment.
14.1.1 Main Scan Length Adjustment
If the output image is enlarged or reduced in a horizontal direction (in the direction of main --- Example ---
scanning), perform the following procedure for fine adjustment purposes. For details on main If the measured value of the reading width is 170 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35cm x
scan length adjustment, see under "[5-5-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ)" in the "Maintenance 35cm) size is outputted to a 14" x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
Utility" volume.
(175 - (170/1))/175x100 = 2.8 (%)
{MU:7.3[5-5-1]_Manual Adjustment (FREQ)}
Since the adjustment will be made so as to enlarge the white blank portion, enter the
u NOTE u value 2.8 in the "Input range" field.
To adjust the main scan length, expose an IP to radiation while using a steel rule or other
thin article. If you use a multimeter or other thick article, the resulting image is larger than the REFERENCES
actual size so that the main scan length cannot be properly adjusted. - The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film.
1. Place a 175mm-length steel rule on an IP of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm) or 14” x 17”
(35cm x 43cm) size, and expose it with the tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
u INSTRUCTION u
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
2. Using menus “QC/TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 1”, and “SINGLE”,
read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output.
- The white blank portion within the output image reduces when you enter a minus (-)
u INSTRUCTION u value and enlarges when you enter a plus (+) value.
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-638
MC-639
4. Start the MUTL. 7. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
5. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
6. Enter the reading start position (e.g., “2.8”) calculated at step 3.
u NOTES u
- Do not turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT- 8. Using menus “QC/TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 1”, and “SINGLE”,
OK." If the FCR-MB 201 is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output.
retained.
u INSTRUCTION u
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -5 to 5.
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
9. Measure the actual size of the 175mm-length steel rule and the size of the white
blank portion, and verify that there is no misalignment.
10. Back up the adjusted data on a storage media (USB memory stick or the like).
{MC:16.3_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
11. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
12. Shut down the CL.
13. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-639
MC-640
14.1.2 Main Scan Position Adjustment 3. Measure the extent to which the reading start position is shifted, and then
calculate an adjustment value.
If the output image is shifted in a horizontal direction (in the direction of main scanning) (a
Measure the size of the white blank portion, and calculate an adjustment value in
horizontal white blank portion is generated or a part of the image is not output), perform the accordance with the formula shown below.
following procedure for fine adjustment purposes.
For details on main scan position adjustment, see under "[5-5-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)"
in the "Maintenance Utility" volume.
{MU:7.3[5-5-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)}
1. Expose IPs of 14” x 14” (35cm x 35cm) or 14” x 17” (35cm x 43cm) size with the
tungsten X-ray tube at about 1 mR.
u INSTRUCTION u
At least two IPs should be exposed for checks before and after the adjustment.
2. Using menus “QC/TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 1”, and “SINGLE”, --- Example ---
read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output. If the positional misalignment is 1 mm when an IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) size is
outputted to a 14" x17" (35cm x 43cm) film:
u INSTRUCTION u
((1/1 + 0.5) x 10) = 15 (PIXEL)
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks." Since the adjustment will be made so as to reduce the white blank portion, enter the
value 15 in the "Input range" field.
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
REFERENCES
- The reduction ratio is indicated in the lower right corner of the output film.
- The white blank portion within the output image enlarges when you enter a minus (-)
value and reduces when you enter a plus (+) value.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-640
MC-641
4. Start the MUTL. 7. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
5. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
6. Enter the reading start position adjustment value (e.g., 15) that was calculated in
step 3.
u NOTES u 8. Using menus “QC/TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format - 1”, and “SINGLE”,
read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output.
- Do not turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 before the MUTL text display field reads "RESULT-
OK." If the FCR-MB 201 is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be u INSTRUCTION u
retained.
- “Input range” only accepts values ranging from -999 to 999. When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
9. Verify that there is no white blank portion and the resulting image is not cut off.
u NOTE u
If anything abnormal is found with the image:
{Troubleshooting}
10. Back up the adjusted data on a storage media (USB memory stick or the like).
{MC:16.3_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
11. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
12. Shut down the CL.
13. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-641
MC-642
15. Shading/Sensitivity Correction REFERENCE
Steps 1 to 8 are performed for shading/sensitivity correction.
u INSTRUCTION u 1. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value.
Before making adjustments, verify the exposure conditions. For details on the exposure 2. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35
conditions, see "[5-6] Correction" in the "Maintenance Utility" volume. cm x 43 cm) IP to about 1 mR of radiation.
{MU:7.3[5-6]_Correction}
3. From the CL screen, start the MUTL of the RU Service Utility.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
u NOTES u
- Shading/sensitivity correction can be made only when the IP size is 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35
4. Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 0.92 mR) to perform correction
setup.
cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm).
- Before making shading/sensitivity correction, adjust the format. If there is a white blank REFERENCE
portion in an exposed image, an error may occur. When the measured X-ray dose is 0.92 mR, enter the value 0.92.
- Of the IPs used by the user, the largest size IP should be utilized for adjustment. The use When the measured X-ray dose is 1.11 mR, enter the value 1.11.
of a smaller size IP may incur unusual irregularities.
REFERENCE
Reference exposure conditions
Distance Voltage Current Time
Tungsten X-ray tube 1.8m 80Kv 50mA 0.013 sec
15.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction
Make shading/sensitivity correction at a normal speed (SR).
For details on shading/sensitivity correction, see "[5-6-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction" in
the "Maintenance Utility" volume.
{MU:7.3[5-6-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
In shading/sensitivity correction, a total of two IPs are conveyed (one for correction and one
for verification). Make shading/sensitivity correction by performing the following steps.
u INSTRUCTION u
Use a calibrated dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose.
u NOTE u
Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray
exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot be properly
made.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-642
MC-643
5. Click on [OK]. REFERENCE
Steps 9 to 11 are performed for shading/sensitivity correction verification.
9. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35
cm x 43 cm) IP to about 1 mR of radiation.
6. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel so that a 10. Read the IP obtained in step 9 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
cassette can be loaded. minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
7. Read the IP obtained in step 2 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 u INSTRUCTION u
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
u INSTRUCTION u {MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks." 11. Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value.
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks} REFERENCE
The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below:
8. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
1 mR: The S value is 200.
10 mR: The S value is 20.
For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "18. Confirming the S Value."
{MC:18._Confirming the S Value}
12. With "Shading Speed Correction," make shading correction for the FR speed.
u NOTE u {MC:15.2_Shading Speed Correction}
Do not convey the IP to the RU before the correction ends normally with the message 13. Back up the corrected data on a storage media (USB memory stick or the like).
"RESULT-OK" displayed. {MC:16.3_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
14. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
15. Shut down the CL.
16. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-643
MC-644
15.2 Shading Speed Correction 4. Set the SR (SR speed).
This section describes how to make shading speed correction for each speed.
For details on shading speed correction, see "[5-6-2] Shading Speed Correction" in the
"Maintenance Utility" volume.
{MU:7.3[5-6-2]_Shading Speed Correction}
In shading speed correction, a total of three IP are conveyed (one for SR adjustment, one for
FR adjustment, and one for verification).
Make shading speed correction by performing the following steps.
u NOTE u
Be sure to use a tungsten X-ray tube. If you use a molybdenum X-ray tube, which involves
irregularities, the correction process does not normally end.
REFERENCE
Steps 1 to 8 are performed to make shading correction for the SR speed.
1. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35
cm x 43 cm) IP to about 1 mR of radiation.
u INSTRUCTION u
For SR adjustment, FR adjustment, and post-adjustment verification, expose at least
three IPs.
2. From the CL screen, start the MUTL of the RU Service Utility. 5. Click on [OK].
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
3. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
6. Read one of the IPs obtained in step 1 by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format"
or "Image Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
7. Check the image for unusual irregularities.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-644
MC-645
8. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. 11. Read one of the IPs obtained in step 1 by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format"
or "Image Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
REFERENCE 12. Check the image for unusual irregularities.
Steps 9 to 13 are performed to make shading correction for the FR speed.
13. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
9. Set the FR (FR speed).
REFERENCE
Steps 14 to 15 are performed for shading speed correction verification.
14. Read one of the IPs obtained in step 1 by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format"
or "Image Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
15. Check the image for unusual irregularities.
16. Back up the corrected data on a storage media (USB memory stick or the like).
{MC:16.3_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
17. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
18. Shut down the CL.
10. Click on [OK].
19. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-645
MC-646
15.3 Sensitivity Correction 4. Enter the X-ray dose measured in step 1 (e.g., 0.92 mR), and then prepare for
correction.
This section describes how to make IP sensitivity correction.
REFERENCE
For details on sensitivity correction, see "[5-6-3] Sensitivity Correction" in the "Maintenance
When the measured X-ray dose is 0.92 mR, enter the value 0.92.
Utility" volume.
When the measured X-ray dose is 1.11 mR, enter the value 1.11.
{MU:7.3[5-6-3]_Sensitivity Correction}
In sensitivity correction, a total of two IPs are conveyed (one for correction and one for
verification).
Make sensitivity correction by performing the following steps.
u INSTRUCTION u
Use a calibrated X-ray dosimeter to measure the X-ray dose.
u NOTE u
Perform a read operation for a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray
exposure. If the read operation is otherwise timed, sensitivity correction cannot be properly
made.
REFERENCE
Steps 1 to 8 are performed to make sensitivity correction.
1. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value.
2. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 5. Click on [OK].
cm x 43 cm) IP to about 1 mR of radiation.
3. From the CL screen, start the MUTL of the RU Service Utility.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
6. Clear the message "Under maintenance" from the operation panel.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
7. Read the IP obtained in step 2 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-646
MC-647
8. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. 13. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen.
REFERENCE
14. Back up the corrected data on a storage media (USB memory stick or the like).
Steps 9 to 13 are performed for sensitivity correction verification. {MC:16.3_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
15. Exit the MUTL.
9. Measure the X-ray dose with an X-ray dosimeter and record the measured value. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUT}
10. With a tungsten X-ray tube, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 16. Shut down the CL.
cm x 43 cm) IP to about 1 mR of radiation. 17. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
11. Read the IP obtained in step 9 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Format - 1," and "SINGLE" menus, and then output the read image.
u INSTRUCTION u
When generating an image output, be sure to observe the instructions set forth under
"17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks."
{MC:17.2_Image/Conveyance Checks}
12. Check the image for unusual irregularities and confirm the S value.
REFERENCE
The relationship between the X-ray dose and S value is as summarized below:
0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
1 mR: The S value is 200.
10 mR: The S value is 20.
For details on the procedure for S-value confirmation, see "18. Confirming the S Value."
{MC:18._Confirming the S Value}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-647
MC-648
16. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure 1. Start the PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
This section describes the procedures for backing up and restoring the CONFIGURATION 2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select the RU whose data is to be backed up.
information and error log data.
16.1 Backup Procedure
This procedure is used to copy the CONFIGURATION information, error log data, and the
like from the RU's flash ROM to a storage media (USB memory stick or the like).
The following eight items of data can be backed up:
- ERROR LOG
3. Click on [FTP].
- CONFIGURATION
- TRACE LOG
- HISTORY LOG
- LOG ALL
- SCN ALL DATA
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA For details on the FTP, see "4.9 FTP" in the "Maintenance Utility" volume.
- SCN OPTICAL DATA
{MU:4.9_FTP}
For details on the backup procedure, see "4.15 Backup" in the "Maintenance Utility" volume. 4. From the "BACKUP" pull-down menu, select an item to be backed up.
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
CAUTION
When you back up the following data, never turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 because the
RU's flash ROM will be accessed. If you turn OFF the FCR-MB 201, the program stored
in the flash ROM becomes damaged so that the RU cannot restart.
LOG ALL
SCN ALL DATA
SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA
SCN OPTICAL DATA
5. Click on [EXECUTE].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-648
MC-649
6. Select a data backup destination. 8. Reconfirm the location for data backup, and then click [OK].
u NOTE u
To back up data to a storage media (USB memory stick or the like), set a formatted
storage media into the PC before selecting a backup destination.
9. When a message appears to indicate the completion of backup, click [OK].
u NOTE u
If the data has been backed up to a storage media (USB memory stick or the like), be
sure to click the [OK] button and then remove the storage media.
10. Exit the PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
7. Verify that the selected location is displayed, and then click [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-649
MC-650
16.2 Restore Procedure 1. Start the PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
This procedure is used to copy the CONFIGURATION information, error log data, and the
like from a storage media (USB memory stick or the like) or other recording medium to the
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select the RU whose data is to be restored.
RU's flash ROM.
The following five items of data can be restore:
- CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG
- SCN ALL DATA
- SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA
- SCN OPTICAL DATA 3. From the "RESTORE" pull-down menu, select an item to be restored
For details on the restore procedure, see "4.16 RESTORE" in the "Maintenance Utility"
volume.
{MU:4.16_RESTORE}
CAUTION
When you restore the following data, never turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 because the
RU's flash ROM will be accessed. If you turn OFF the FCR-MB 201, the program stored
in the flash ROM becomes damaged so that the RU cannot restart.
SCN ALL DATA 4. Click on [EXECUTE] button.
SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA
SCN OPTICAL DATA
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-650
MC-651
5. Select the location of the data to be restored. 7. Reconfirm the location of the data to be restored, and then click [OK].
u NOTE u
To restore data from a storage media (USB memory stick or the like), set the storage
media, which stores the data to be restored, into the PC before selecting a data
location.
8. When a message appears to indicate the completion of restore, click [OK].
u NOTE u
If the data has been restored from a storage media (USB memory stick or the like), be
sure to click the [OK] button and then remove the storage media.
9. Exit the PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
6. Verify that the selected location is displayed, and then click [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-651
MC-652
16.3 Backing Up the Scanner Data
This section describes how to back up corrected scanner data.
1. Start the PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select the RU whose scanner data is to be backed
up. Back up the "CONFIGURATION" data and "SCN ALL DATA."
REFERENCE
For details on the backup procedure, see "16.1 Backup Procedure."
{MC:16.1_Backup Procedure}
3. Exit the PC-TOOL.
{MU:4.23.2_Exiting RU PC-TOOL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-652
MC-653
17. Image/Conveyance Checks 17.2 Image/Conveyance Checks
The following checks are made in this section. u NOTE u
- Conveyance checks Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks should be
- Image checks performed with the "MENU" specified below.
17.1 Check Before Procedures u INSTRUCTION u
If the message "Under maintenance" is displayed at the center of the operation panel, the
u NOTES u IPs cannot be conveyed because the operating control buttons on the operation panel
- If a cassette with a wrong IP type is inserted, appropriate image cannot be obtained. When are inoperative. Therefore, clear the message "Under maintenance" by performing the
inserting an IP into a cassette, be sure to perform servicing after confirming the IP type. procedure set forth under "4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel" in
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in the the "Maintenance Utility" volume.
hospital should be employed. {MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data exposed.
1. Using “QC/TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format-2” and “SINGLE”, record
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears. the IP exposed at "17.1 Check Before Procedures", and generate an image output.
2. Perform "secondary erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and image REFERENCE
accumulated on the IP to be used.
Refer to "17.3 Detailed Description of the Image Output Procedure" for detailed
{Instruction Manual} procedures for inputting the image.
3. Perform IP exposures. {MC:17.3_Detailed Description of the Image Output Procedure}
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Have on hand two IPs of the largest size for use at the institution. Expose these IPs to
the following dose.
- With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and the
second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
- X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35cm x 35cm) or 14"x17" (35cm x 43cm) size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
Voltage 80 kVp
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-653
MC-654
2. Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output film or on the 3. Check the image format.
image displayed on the image monitor. Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP,
from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u NOTE u
There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction. u NOTE u
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the two IPs If anything abnormal is found:
of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused by the machine {Troubleshooting}
or X-ray tube.
l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
u NOTE u
→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity. The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending
on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using
{Troubleshooting}
the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the
l If positions of uneven density difference are different actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-654
MC-655
17.3 Detailed Description of the Image Output Procedure 3. Click [IP#] and then enter the barcode of the cassette to be used.
1. From the CL's study reception screen, click [NEXT].
2. From the "QC/TEST" menu, choose [IMAGE FORMAT] or [IMAGE FORMAT - 2]
and then click the [Start Study] button.
4. Press the [ENTER] key.
→ The study reservation procedure is completed. The following screen opens.
3. Select [SINGLE]. 5. Have on hand the cassette whose barcode was entered, and insert it into its
position.
→ A read process starts. An image appears on the CL.
6. Verify the displayed image.
u NOTE u
If any unusual irregularity is found in the displayed image:
{Troubleshooting}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-655
MC-656
18. Confirming the S Value 2. Set the tube voltage to 80 kVp. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the
radiation dose is 1 mR.
The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 1 mR of u NOTE u
radiation, during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 1 mR, leave the tube voltage at
output the read image, and check that the S value for 1 mR of radiation, which is determined 80 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a radiation dose of 1
from the displayed S value and average dose value, is within the control limits. mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
REFERENCE - Distance: ___cm
- Tube voltage: ___kVp
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below:
- Tube current: ___mA
- S value control limits for user adjustments
- Time: ___sec
Upper limit: 200 x 1.5 = 300
Lower limit: 200/1.5 = 133
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments REFERENCE
Upper limit: 200 x 1.3 = 260 If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
Lower limit: 200/1.3 = 154 values and make fine adjustments:
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time after
service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service technician
adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
1. Position a cassette so that the cassette center coincides with the X-ray
radiation field center. Perform setup so that the X-ray radiation field outline is
approximately 3 cm outside the cassette outer frame. Temporarily remove the
cassette and then position a dosimeter at the radiation field center.
3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, measure the radiation dose
five times and average the measured values.
--- Example ---
First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value
0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.04
4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in step
3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table."
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-656
MC-657
5. Subject the natural radiation and image stored on the employed IP to secondary 8. Determine the "S value for 1 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the S
erasure. value printed on the film or displayed on the CL screen) and the average radiation
{Instruction Manual} dose value obtained in step 3.
--- Example ---
u NOTE u Displayed S value: 200
Before secondary erasure, confirm that no important image data is recorded on the Average radiation dose value obtained in step 3: 1.04
employed IP.
6. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x
35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) IP to X-ray radiation.
u NOTE u
Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution.
7. Read the IP exposed in step 6 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Format - 2," and "SINGLE" CL menus, and then output the read image.
S value for 1 mR of radiation = Displayed S value x average radiation dose value
= 200 x 1.04
= 208
9. Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is
within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit value Upper control limit value
154 < 208 < 260
Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which
was determined in step 8, is between the upper and
lower control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is not between
the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction as directed in "15.3
Sensitivity Correction" and then confirm the S value again.
{MC:15.3_Sensitivity Correction}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-657
MC-658
19. Installing the Software 19.1 Installing the RU Software
Install various software programs by performing the procedures that are set forth in the For installing the RU software, see "Appendix 4. Installing the RU Software" in the
designated reference sections. "Installation" volume.
{IN: Appendix 4._Installing the RU Software}
19.2 Installing the RU PC-TOOL
For installing the RU software, see "Appendix 4-2 Installing the RU PC-TOOL" in the
"Installation" volume.
{IN: Appendix 4-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
19.3 Installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL
For installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL, see "5.2 Setting Up the Client PC" in the "Maintenance
Utility" volume.
{MU:5.2_Setting Up the Client PC}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-658
MC-659
20. List of Jigs and Tools
20.1 Jigs and Tools
Name Code No. Manufacturer Model No. Remarks
Loop cable
FUJIFILM
898Y0981
Corporation
Cable Consists of two cables.
Used when checking the RU operation while the board box of
the cassette set unit is open.
FUJIFILM
136Y9620
Corporation
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-659
MC-660
Name Code No. Manufacturer Model No. Remarks
Cable Used when checking the RU operation while the RU is pulled
out from the Mobil X-ray Unit.
FUJIFILM
403N100005
Corporation
Brush
FUJIFILM
403N100005 For cleaning the erasure lamp unit
Corporation
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-660
MC-661
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-661
MC-662
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-662
MC-663
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MC-663
Appx_MC-1
Appendix 1. Parts Removal/Installation
This appendix gives a detailed description of parts removal/installation procedures.
Part concerned Reference
Sensor (5 mm type)
{MC: Appendix 1-1}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MC-1
Appx_MC-2
1. Sensor (5 mm type)
1.1 Removal Procedure 1.2 Reinstallation Procedure
1. Pinch the sensor claws and 1. Engage the sensor's trailing
push the sensor outward. end claw with the bracket.
Remove the sensor from the Mount the sensor on the
bracket. bracket while pinching the
sensor claws.
u NOTE u
If you cannot pinch the sensor u NOTE u
claws due to a limited work space, If you cannot pinch the sensor
remove the sensor while pushing claws due to a limited work space,
the sensor claws with steel rules install the sensor while pushing
or the like. the sensor claws with steel rules
or the like.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MC-2
Appx_MC-3
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MC-3
Appx_MC-4
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx_MC-4
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Maintenance Utility (MU)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
MU-1
1. Overview of RU Service Utility 1.2 RU Operation Panel
The RU Service Utility consists of six kinds of utilities including the User Utility, Machine Change the RU settings or check its operation from the RU operation panel. The menu
Maintenance Utility of the RU, RU PC-TOOL, Client PC, CLIENT PC-TOOL, and MUTL. items displayed on the operation panel screen can be selected/executed by the four control
The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by end users as well, while the Machine buttons.
Maintenance Utility of the RU, RU PC-TOOL, Client PC, CLIENT PC-TOOL and MUTL offer
maintenance tools used exclusively by service engineers.
The User Utility and RU's Machine Maintenance Utility are operated from the operation panel
of the RU machine, the RU PC-TOOL and MUTL are operated from the CL, and the Client
PC and CLIENT PC-TOOL are operated on the client PC.
1.1 Tree of RU Service Utility
The architecture of the RU Service Utility is shown in the tree diagram below.
n Tree Diagram
RU Service Utility
{MU:2._User Utility}
{MU:3._Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
n To Execute the Menu Item “Mode change”
{MU:4._RU PC-TOOL} To change the mode, press the control button below “Mode change”.
{MU:5._Client PC}
{MU:6._CLIENT PC-TOOL}
{MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
u INSTRUCTION u
The menus of the MUTL for "For Design" should never be used for routine servicing
procedures. In the Maintenance Utility volume, their functions and procedures are not
described.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-1
MU-2
1.3 Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes 1.3.1 Description of Buttons
Described in this section is the procedure for selecting the menu items displayed on the The buttons to be used in the menu selection in the respective modes are mentioned below.
operation panel.
Button Function
The following is the menu selection window for the Machine Maintenance Utility.
Return button Returns to the User Utility window.
button Moves the cursor one item up from the current selection.
button Moves the cursor one item down from the current selection.
Select button Displays the setting window of the item selected by the
/ buttons.
Confirm button Sets the item selected by the / buttons in the RU.
Check button Used when executing the “Network Check” and “Loop Back Test” in
the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-2
MU-3
1.3.2 Procedures for Menu Selection 3. Press the Select button.
The procedures for selecting “Loop Back Test” in the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU
are described as an example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Press the button seven times and select “Loop Back Test”.
→ The window of the selected menu appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-3
MU-4
1.4 Method of Setting the Addresses 1.4.1 Description of Buttons
The procedures for setting addresses such as the Reader Unit IP Address and Subnet Mask The buttons to be used to set the addresses are mentioned below.
from the operation panel are described. Button Function
The following is the window for setting the Reader Unit Address.
Return button Returns to the menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance
Utility of the RU. The address being changed is canceled.
button Moves the cursor one digit left from the current digit.
button Increments the value of the current digit by one.
button Decrements the value of the current digit by one.
button Moves the cursor one digit right from the current digit.
Confirm button Sets the changed address in the RU and returns to the menu selection
window of the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
u NOTE u
When the addresses for the Subnet Mask, Secure Host and Secure Net are to be effective,
The following address items are set from the operation panel. be sure to turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power after the addresses are set, and then turn it ON
- Reader Unit IP Address again. The changed address is not set in the RU only by pressing the [Confirm] button.
- Subnet Mask
- FTP Server IP Address REFERENCES
- Default Gateway - The [Return] button appears only when the cursor is at the leftmost digit. To return to the
- Secure Host menu selection window of the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU, move the cursor to
- Secure Net the leftmost digit by pressing the [←] button. Then press the [Return] button.
- The [Confirm] button appears only when “OK” is selected. To return to the menu selection
window of RU's Machine Maintenance Utility, after the set address is made effective, move
the cursor to “OK” by pressing the [→] button. Then press the [Confirm] button.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-4
MU-5
1.4.2 Procedures for Changing the Address 3. Press the button once, select “OK”, and press the Confirm button.
The procedures of changing the address from “172.016.001.010” to “172.013.001.018” are
described as an example.
1. Press the button five times and then press the button three times.
2. Press the button six times and then press the button eight times.
→ An alarm sound beeps 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, and the
display returns to the menu selection window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-5
MU-6
2. User Utility n Tree Diagram
The architecture of the User Utility is shown in the tree diagram below.
The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by both the end user and service engineer. User Utility
u NOTE u
Equipment info*
The menu items appearing in the “User Utility” depend on the settings of the EDIT
CONFIGURATION specified at the time of installation. Scanner Cleaning*
Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION” for details of the EDIT CONFIGURATION settings.
{MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION} Set alarm volume*
Set alarm silence method*
See the Instruction Manual.
2.1 Overview of User Utility Set button volume*
Panel Brightness*
n User Utility Window
Panel OFF timer*
Set Hibernation timer*
Select master IIP console
For more detail on those marked by *, see the Instruction Manual.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-6
MU-7
n Overview of Functions
The overview of the User Utility functions is presented below.
l Equipment info
"Date of installation", "Number of IP read", "Number of IP conveyance", "Total time of laser
ON", and "Total time of erasure lamp ON" are displayed.
The respective values are those specified by the EDIT HISTORY of the RU PC-TOOL. Refer
to “4.12 EDIT HISTORY” for details of the EDIT HISTORY.
{MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
l Scanner Cleaning
The light-collecting mirror is rotated to clean the light-collecting face of the light-collecting
guide and perform its home-positioning.
l Set alarm volume
Used to set the volume of the alarm sound.
l Set alarm silence method
Used to set how to stop the alarm sound.
l Set button volume
Used to set whether to enable or disable the sound when a button is touched. This is also
used to set the volume of the button touch sound.
l Panel Brightness
Used to adjust the brightness of the LCD panel.
l Panel OFF timer
Used to set the time until the backlight is automatically turned OFF when no button operation
takes place.
l Set Hibernation timer
Used to set the time until the RU automatically enters the hibernation mode when the RU is
idle.
l Select master IIP console
Refer to “2.3 Master CL setting” for details of the master CL setting.
{MU:2.3_Master CL Setting}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-7
MU-8
2.2 Starting and Exiting the User Utility 2.3 Master CL Setting
The procedures for starting and exiting the User Utility are described below. Set the CL to be used as a master CL among those registered during the installation or those
registered by the RU PC-TOOL or CLIENT PC-TOOL. The setting can be done only when
2.2.1 Starting the User Utility “HOSPITAL” is selected in the “SCREEN TYPE” setup during the installation or version-
update of the RU software.
CAUTION 2.3.1 Function
When starting the User Utility, make sure that all the processing, such as reading, has
been completed and the machine is in READY state. The master CL can be changed. Up to four CL can be registered. One of them can be set as
the RU’s default master CL.
1. Press the [Utility] button.
CAUTION
Even when the master CL is changed, the IP address of the FTP server that is set in
the RU remains unchanged. Information to be stored in the FTP server, such as error
logs, is written into the FTP server of the IP address that is set in the RU.
2.3.2 Procedures
2.2.2 Exiting the User Utility
u NOTE u
1. Press the [Back] button. Do not change the master CL unless an emergency arises or the machine is faulty.
Changing the master CL erases the "ERROR LOG", "HISTORY LOG", and other data
necessary for the user.
For the master CL change procedure, see "Appendix 4. Setting the Master CL" in the
Installation volume.
{IN: Appendix 1._Setting the Master CL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-8
MU-9
3. Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU u NOTE u
If the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU is started up during bootup, the [Return] button
The Machine Maintenance Utility offers a maintenance tool used exclusively by the service in the lower right corner of the Machine Maintenance Utility window of the RU is hidden. This
engineer. provision is made to prevent an initialization process from being inadvertently started during
Setup of the RU’s IP address, the check of network connection from the RU side or the like is maintenance, as “Under maintenance” does not appear on the RU operation panel if the
operated from the operation panel of the RU. Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU is started up during bootup.
Setup items include the followings:
- Reader Unit Address
- Subnet Mask
- FTP Server IP Address
- Default Gateway
- Secure Host
- Secure Net
- Network Check
- Loop Back Test
- HV On/Off
Note that the setup items of the RU's Machine Maintenance Utility cannot be set from the CL
or the client PC.
n Machine Maintenance Utility Window of the RU
3.1 Tree of RU's Machine Maintenance Utility
n Tree Diagram of RU's Machine Maintenance Utility
Machine Maintenance of the RU
{MU:3.2_Reader Unit IP Address}
{MU:3.3_Subnet Mask}
{MU:3.4_FTP Server IP Address}
{MU:3.5_Default Gateway}
{MU:3.6_Secure Host}
{MU:3.7_Secure Net}
{MU:3.8_Network Check}
{MU:3.9_Loop Back Test}
{MU:3.10_HV On/Off}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-9
MU-10
3.2 Reader Unit IP Address 3.2.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the RU to "172.016.001.011" are described as
an example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select “Reader Unit IP Address”.
Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
3.2.1 Function selection method.
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
Used to set the IP address of the RU in the flash ROM on the CPU23B board of the RU.
Setting the IP address of the RU specified here in the CL attains the network connection from 3. Set the IP address.
the CL to the RU.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU23B board, the IP address is set to "172.016.001.010".
- Do not change the IP address setting of "172.016.001.010" when the machine is to be used
under the conditions as shipped from the factory.
Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting
method.
{MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses}
u NOTE u
The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed.
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-10
MU-11
3.3 Subnet Mask 3.3.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the subnet mask to "255.255.255.000" are described as an
example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select “Subnet Mask”.
Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
3.3.1 Function selection method.
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
Used to set the subnet mask in the flash ROM on the CPU23B board of the RU. With the
3. Set the subnet mask.
subnet mask set, networking devices capable of exchanging data can be limited.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU23B board, the subnet mask is set to "255.255.000.000".
- Do not change the subnet mask setting of "255.255.000.000" when the machine is to be
used under the conditions as shipped from the factory.
Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting
method.
{MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses}
u NOTE u
The setting does not become effective only by selecting “OK” and pressing the [Confirm]
button. Turn OFF the RU power once and then turn it ON again to make the setup
contents effective.
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-11
MU-12
3.4 FTP Server IP Address 3.4.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the FTP server to "172.016.001.021" are
described as an example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select “FTP Server IP Address”.
3.4.1 Function Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
selection method.
Used to set the IP address of the FTP server which contains the HISTORY LOG, ERROR {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
LOG, configuration information or the like in the flash ROM on the CPU23B board of the RU.
Setting the IP address of the FTP server attains the network connection from the RU to the 3. Set the IP address of the FTP server.
FTP server.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU23B board, the IP address of the FTP server is set to
"172.016.001.020".
- Do not change the FTP IP address setting of "172.016.001.020" when the machine is to be
used under the conditions as shipped from the factory.
Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting
method.
{MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses}
u NOTE u
The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed.
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-12
MU-13
3.5 Default Gateway 3.5.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the gateway to "172.016.001.001" are described
as an example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select "Default Gateway".
Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
3.5.1 Function selection method.
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
Used to set the IP address of the gateway, if the machine is networked via the gateway,
3. Set the IP address of the Gateway.
in the flash ROM on the CPU23B board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the gateway
attains the network connection with a machine with different network settings connected with
the gateway.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU23B board, the IP address of the gateway is set to
"000.000.000.000".
- Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the gateway is not to be used.
The following diagram shows an example of network connection between networks with
different subnet mask settings.
Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting
method.
{MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses}
u NOTE u
The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed.
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-13
MU-14
3.6 Secure Host 3.6.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the IP address of the Secure Host to "172.016.001.021" are
described as an example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select "Secure Host".
Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
3.6.1 Function selection method.
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
Used to set the IP address of a machine connectable with the RU via the telnet in the flash
3. Set the IP address of the Secure Host.
ROM on the CPU23B board of the RU. Setting the IP address of the Secure Host disables
the connection with a networking device with an IP address except the setup IP address via
the telnet. This assures certain security.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU23B board, the IP address of the Secure Host is set to
"000.000.000.000".
- Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the Secure Host is not to be
used.
Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting
method.
{MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses}
u NOTE u
The setting does not become effective only by selecting “OK” and pressing the [Confirm]
button. Turn OFF the RU power once and then turn it ON again to make the setup
contents effective.
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-14
MU-15
3.7 Secure Net 3.7.2 Procedures
The procedures for setting the network address of the Secure Net to "172.016.000.000" are
described as an example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select "Secure Net".
Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
3.7.1 Function selection method.
{MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
Used to set the network address connectable with the RU via the telnet in the flash ROM
of the RU. Setting the network address of the Secure Net disables the connection with 3. Set the IP address of the Secure Net.
a networking device out of the setup range of the network addresses via the telnet. This
assures certain security.
REFERENCES
- By factory default for the CPU23B board, the network address of the Secure Net is set to
"000.000.000.000".
- Do not change the default setting of "000.000.000.000" when the Secure Net is not to be
used.
Refer to “1.4 Method of setting the addresses” for the details of the address setting
method.
{MU:1.4_Method of Setting the Addresses}
u NOTE u
The setting does not become effective only by selecting “OK” and pressing the [Confirm]
button. Turn OFF the RU power once and then turn it ON again to make the setup
contents effective.
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-15
MU-16
3.8 Network Check 3.8.2 Procedures
The procedures of a setup example where the FTP server is connected with the network and
the gateway is not used are described.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select "Network Check".
3.8.1 Function Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
selection method.
Used to check whether the network connection with the PC specified as the FTP server {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
and the gateway is made by executing the PING command from the RU. The result of the
network check appears on the operation panel. 3. Press the [Check] button.
u INSTRUCTION u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, remedy the error with reference to the
Troubleshooting Volume.
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-16
MU-17
3.9 Loop Back Test The loopback test makes it possible to verify the network connection within the area shown
below:
3.9.1 Function
While the loopback cable (jig: 898Y0981) is connected to the network cable or connector, For the RU, the loopback test is to be conducted at the following two locations.
the signal transmitted from the RU can be looped back by the jig to check whether the
transmitted signal returns.
l Immediately before the hub
Conducting the loopback test enables you to locate an open in the network or a fault in the
RU.
The result of the loopback test appears on the operation panel.
l LAN23A board connector CN1
3.9.2 Procedures
For the loopback test procedure, see “14.7 Loopback Test” in the Troubleshooting volume.
{MT:14.7_Loopback Test}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-17
MU-18
3.10 HV On/Off 3.10.2 Procedures
The procedures for turning OFF the HV switch (software switch) are described as an
example.
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Select "HV On/Off".
3.10.1 Function Refer to “1.3 Method of menu selection in respective modes” for details of the menu
selection method.
Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch). {MU:1.3_Method of Menu Selection in Respective Modes}
REFERENCE
3. Select “OFF” and press the [Confirm] button.
If the high-voltage switch of the SCN23C is set to OFF, the HV switch (software switch)
cannot be turned ON (although ON or OFF is selectable, the setting is not effective).
4. Exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
u NOTE u
The setting is effective when “OK” is selected and the [Confirm] button is pressed.
REFERENCE
After you exit from the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU and return to the main
window, the HV-OFF error window (error code: 11200) appears. Press the [Confirm]
button on the error window. The display returns to the main window, and “HV-OF” blinks
on the top of the window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-18
MU-19
3.11 Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of 3.11.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during
the RU Initialization
How to start and exit the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU is described. 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
REFERENCE Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left
on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
The RU does not become READY unless it is connected to the CL (the operation panel reads
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
the error message “CL communication error”). However, even when the RU is not connected
to the CL, the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU can be started, for instance, to set the u NOTE u
RU’s IP address. Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
The Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU is started up by one of the following three does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the CL and FCR-MB 201
methods depending on the RU state. power sequentially and repeat from the procedure 1.
- To start the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during bootup of the RU.
{MU:3.11.1_Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during
Initialization}
- To start the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU while the RU is in the READY state.
{MU:3.11.2_Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during READY
State}
- To start the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU when an error occurs in the RU.
{MU:3.11.4_Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU when Error
Occurred}
Refer to the following procedures for exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
{MU:3.11.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-19
MU-20
3.11.2 Starting Up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU during 3.11.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU
READY State
n When the [Return] Button Is Not Displayed in the Lower Left Corner of the
1. Press the [Utility] button.
Operation Panel
1. Shut down the CL.
2. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
3. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
→ The “Utility” window appears.
l There is no error occurrence.
2. Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left.
n When the [Return] Button Is Displayed in the Lower Left Corner of the
Operation Panel
1. Press the [Return] button.
2. Check the following points.
l The RU normally enters the READY state.
u INSTRUCTION u
l There is no error occurrence.
If the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU does not start up, exit the user utility by
pressing the [Back] button. Then, repeat the above procedures.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-20
MU-21
3.11.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU when
Error Occurred
1. If “System down” appears, press the leftmost button while pressing the third
button from the left.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-21
MU-22
4. RU PC-TOOL 4.1.2 Tree Diagram
RU PC-TOOL
4.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree EACH RU SETTING
CONNECTION TEST
4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:4.3_LIST OF EXISTING RU}
{MU:4.10_INSTALL}
{MU:4.4_NEW}
{MU:4.11_VERSION UP}
{MU:4.5_DELETE}
{MU:4.12_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:4.6_MUTL}
{MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:4.7_PING}
{MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME}
{MU:4.8_MON}
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
{MU:4.9_FTP}
{MU:4.16_RESTORE}
{MU:4.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
{MU:4.18_ERROR DB}
ALL RUs SETTEING
{MU:4.19_UNINSTALL: ALL RUs}
{MU:4.20_VERSION UP: ALL RUs}
REFERENCE
The version of the RU PC-TOOL is displayed on the upper left of the RU PC-TOOL window.
Configuration
{MU:4.21_CDPath}
Operation
{MU:4.22_Initialize APL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-22
MU-23
4.2 Outline of RU PC-TOOL n Resetting the “Under Maintenance” Message
Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. The “Under
RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer. Maintenance” message disappears, and the button control is accepted on the operation
Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the CL to RU, panel. IP conveyance takes place.
are performed on the CL connected to the RU via the network.
Note that, however, that the blinking “Under Maintenance” message appears on the top of
the operation panel even if you reset the “Under Maintenance” message appearing at the
4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel center of the operation panel.
“Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, indicating that the RU is under
maintenance.
n “Under Maintenance” Message
When a command to change the contents on the flash ROM is executed from the RU PC-
TOOL, “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, and the message of
“Can't process the cassette” appears at the center.
While “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, no button control can
be accepted. No IP conveyance takes place even if you insert a cassette.
REFERENCE
The blinking “Under Maintenance” message on the top of the operation panel indicates that
a command to change the contents of the flash ROM has been executed from the RU PC-
TOOL.
n To Terminate the “Under Maintenance” Message
The blinking “Under Maintenance” message disappears by turning OFF the RU power and
then turning it ON.
The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM:
- MUTL - INSTALL
- VERSION UP - EDIT HISTORY
- EDIT CONFIGURATION - EDIT CL NAME
- RESTORE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-23
MU-24
4.2.2 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display
If a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is executed while the RU is
running, the Error window as shown below appears on the CL. The command for changing
the contents of the flash ROM is not executed.
The commands for changing the contents of the flash ROM include:
The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM:
- MUTL - INSTALL
- VERSION UP - EDIT HISTORY
- EDIT CONFIGURATION - EDIT CL NAME
- RESTORE
CAUTION
Do not execute a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM while the RU
is running. The program stored in the flash ROM is corrupted and the machine cannot
start.
REFERENCE
The RU is running in the following states:
- The RU is being initialized.
- The RU is performing a “read”, “primary erasure”, or “secondary erasure” process.
- The User Utility is started by the RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-24
MU-25
4.3 LIST OF EXISTING RU 4.4 NEW
4.3.1 Function 4.4.1 Function
Upon installing the RU software, a data file corresponding to each machine is created in the Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU NAME"
FTP server. The list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server are listed up in “LIST and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew.
OF EXISTING RU”. Used to execute the following commands in the RU input in the “RU NAME” and “RU IP
ADDR” fields if not displayed in the “LIST OF EXISTING RU” field.
- MUTL - PING
- MON - INSTALL
4.4.2 Procedures
Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its corresponding RU
has not been installed normally. 1. Click on [NEW].
REFERENCES
- For the RU where nothing is displayed in its "RU TYPE" field, uninstall it and then install the
RF software again.
2. Input the RU name and the IP address of the RU.
- If "VERSION" is displayed in red, it indicates that the version of the RU software has not
been updated. Update the version as needed.
3. Execute the respective commands.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-25
MU-26
4.5 DELETE 4.6 MUTL
4.5.1 Function 4.6.1 Function
Used to delete a folder of the RU stored in the FTP server and also to delete it from "LIST OF Used to start the maintenance utility (MUTL) of the RU service utility.
EXISTING RU". MUTL offers functions for diagnosing and adjusting the RU, such as adjustments of the
When reinstallation is required in such a case where the machine is to be used with the IP reading start position and reading width, as well as board and mechanical checks.
address of the RU changed, use the “DELETE” command.
4.6.2 Procedures
4.5.2 Procedures
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
Refer to “Appendix 3-1_Deleting an Installed RU” for the details of deleting procedures in the
Installation volume.
{IN: Appendix 3-1_Deleting an Installed RU}
2. Click on [MUTL].
Refer to “7. MUTL (maintenance utility) functions” for functions of the respective MUTL
commands and the detailed procedures.
{MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-26
MU-27
4.7 PING 3. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
4.7.1 Function
Used to execute the "PING" command for the RU.
When you click on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears where you can check
whether or not the network connection from the CL to the RU is normal. If the network
connection is determined to be normal as the result of the PING execution, the message
indicating the result of execution OK appears on the “command prompt” window.
REFERENCE
4.7.2 Procedures
"Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some problem.
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
2. Click on [PING]. l [NO GOOD indication]
Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
→ The “command prompt” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-27
MU-28
4.8 MON l I/O name
The I/O name is displayed.
Symbol Name
4.8.1 Function SA1 Cassette IN sensor
Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes SA2 Cassette hold sensor
its status. SA3 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor
The barcode information is displayed if read, as well as the status of OPEN or CLOSE. SA4 IP dropping sensor
The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs (barcode readers) are displayed,
SA5 IP Suction sensor
although ON or OFF is not displayed for the motors.
SA6 Suction arm HP sensor
SA7 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
SA8 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor
SA9 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor
SA10 Cassette IP holding sensor
SA11 Cassette ejection sensor
SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor
SA14 Cassette insertion error sensor
SA15 Large cassette size sensor
SA16 Inch/metric sensor
SC1 Side-positioning grip HP sensor
SC2 Side-positioning grip release position sensor
l Status SC3 IP sensor 1
Displays one of statuses, OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ depending on the change of SC6 IP side-positioning HP sensor
the I/O conditions. SC7 Side-positioning reference block HP sensor
l Other information SC8 Side-positioning latch position sensor
Displays the barcode information when the barcode is read. SC9 "15x31/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor
SC10 Side-positioning latch stroke sensor
l Status changed time
Displays the time when the I/O status changes. SG1 IP sensor 2
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor
REFERENCE
SZ2 Driven-side grip roller release HP sensor
The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse.
The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted. SZ3 Driving-side grip roller release HP sensor
If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text. SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor
BCRC1 Barcode reader
LDSN1, LDSN2, Erasure lamp
LDSN3, LDSN4, LDSN5
24TSW Safety thermostat (lamp)
* The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-28
MU-29
4.8.2 Procedures
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
2. Click on [MON].
→ The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears.
3. Click on [START].
→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O
has changed.
REFERENCES
- When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However, the
items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
- When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to
resume the monitor function. The status change of the I/O of the RU since [STOP] is
clicked until [START] is clicked is not displayed.
- To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window,
and then open the monitor window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-29
MU-30
4.9 FTP 3. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on [OK].
4.9.1 Function
Used to check the network for the RU selected from “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, and to check
the operation of the FTP server for the CL.
Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the
FTP server of the CL are normal.
If the network connection and the FTP server are determined to be normal as the result of the
FTP execution, the message indicating the result of execution OK appears on two windows.
4.9.2 Procedures
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
2. Click on [FTP].
4. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
→ Two windows appear.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-30
MU-31
4.10 INSTALL l Selection of “SCREEN TYPE”
Select whether the display on the operation panel of the RU is for use in a hospital or use in
a clinic.
CAUTION l Selection as to whether or not the LINAC CASSETTE is to be used.
Never turn OFF the RU power during installation. If you turn OFF the RU power, the Select whether or not the LINAC CASSETTE is to be used in the RU to be installed.
RU fails to start up because the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted.
l Setting of configuration information
Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION” for the details of setting the configuration information.
4.10.1 Function {MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
Used to install the RU software into the RU entered in the "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" l Registration of the master CL
fields. Upon installation, an RU folder is created in the FTP server. Refer to “4.14 EDIT CL NAME” for the details of registration of the master CL.
{MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME}
l Recognizing the device type to be installed
The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the
installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the 4.10.2 Procedures
settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU23B board of the RU to identify the type.
Refer to the Installation volume for the details of the installing procedures.
u NOTE u {IN: Appendix 4._Installing the RU Software}
If the CPU23B board has been replaced, check to make sure that the settings of the DIP
switches mounted on the CPU23B board are correct. 4.10.3 Message on the Error Window
If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software will be installed, and the RU will
not start up. If the RU software is re-installed in the RU where the software has been already installed, the
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “11.2.4 Replacing the CPU23B following error message appears.
Board” for the details of the DIP switch settings of the CPU23B board.
{MC:11.2.4_Replacing the CPU23B Board}
l Selection of software version
A list of installable versions of the software stored in the RU-APL CD is displayed.
l Selection of software display language
A list of languages to be displayed on the operation panel of the RU is displayed.
l Selection of "BRAND TYPE"
Select "BRAND TYPE" to be displayed on the operation panel of the RU when the machine
starts up. Since “BRAND TYPE” differs depending upon its destination, "BRAND TYPE"
suitable for the destination need be selected when installing the software.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-31
MU-32
4.11 VERSION UP 4.11.2 Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “13. Updating the Software” for
CAUTION details of the procedures for version updates.
{MC:13._Updating the Software}
Never turn OFF the RU power during version update.
The contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up.
4.11.1 Function
Used to execute RU software version updates.
l Recognizing the device type to be updated in version
The RU selected before starting the version update is accessed, to automatically recognize
the device type of the RU. RU PC-TOOL reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on
the CPU23B board of the RU to identify the device type.
u NOTE u
If the CPU23B board has been replaced, check to make sure that the settings of the DIP
switches mounted on the CPU23B board are correct.
If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software is updated in version, resulting in
the RU unable to boot up.
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “11.2.4 Replacing the CPU23B
Board” for the details of the DIP switch settings of the CPU23B board.
{MC:11.2.4_Replacing the CPU23B Board}
l Selection of software version
A list of version-updatable ones of the software packages included in the RU-APL CD is
displayed.
REFERENCE
The "VERSION" indication of the RU registered in “LIST OF EXISTING RU” may appear
in red. This indicates that the RU software has not been updated in version. Update the
software version as needed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-32
MU-33
4.12 EDIT HISTORY 4.12.2 Procedures
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
4.12.1 Function
Used to view the HISTORY information (including the number of IP’s processed by the RU,
lighting time of the erasure lamp, etc.,) of the RU, and clear the information when a unit has
been replaced or other occasions. The following five kinds of information can be displayed
and edited.
l USE 2. Click on [EDIT HISTORY].
Displays the date when the RU software is installed or updated in version. Also displays the
total time count when the RU power has been ON.
{MU:4.12.3_Details of USE}
l IP
Displays the number of IP7s processed by the RU for each IP size and the count of each part
driven. Image reading, secondary erasure, and primary erasure are all subject to counting.
{MU:4.12.4_Details of IP}
l BARCODE
Displays the count that each IP with different barcode is processed.
{MU:4.12.5_Details of BARCODE}
l LASER
Displays lighting time and lighting count for the laser of the scanner unit. Image reading,
secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated in MUTL, are subject to
counting.
{MU:4.12.6_Details of LASER}
l LAMP
Displays the lighting time and the lighting count of the erasure lamp. Image reading, REFERENCE
secondary erasure, and primary erasure, as well as lighting activated in MUTL, are subject to Clicking on [EDIT HISTORY], “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of
counting. Lighting time and lighting count for preheating are also subject to counting. the RU.
{MU:4.12.7_Details of LAMP}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-33
MU-34
3. Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. 4.12.3 Details of USE
Refer to the detailed description of each item for the details of the contents appearing on
the screen.
{MU:4.12.3_Details of USE}
{MU:4.12.4_Details of IP}
{MU:4.12.5_Details of BARCODE}
{MU:4.12.6_Details of LASER}
{MU:4.12.7_Details of LAMP}
4. Click on [SET].
u NOTE u
The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device
information you can check by the user utility of the RU.
To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or
turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON.
Item name Function
Displays the date when the RU software is installed or
I INSTALLATION DATE
updated in version. A specific date can be entered manually.
A total count of a period of time when the RU power is turned
TOTAL POWER ON
II ON is displayed. A specific numerical value can be entered
TIME
manually.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-34
MU-35
4.12.4 Details of IP Item name Function
I RESET Resets each item in “IP”.
Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
II SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
TOTAL READING Counts the total count that normal reading takes place per IP
III
COUNTER size, and displays the total in “ALL IP SIZES”.
Displays the total count that normal reading, secondary
TOTAL PROCESSING
IV erasure and erasure take place. A specific numerical value
COUNTER ALL IP SIZES
can be entered manually.
Displays the respective total numbers that the air filter, the
PARTS PROCESSING erasure lamp, the brush roller, the IP suction pump, and the
V
COUNTER damper are used. Specific numerical values can be entered
manually.
u NOTE u
The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device
information you can check by the user utility of the RU.
To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or
turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-35
MU-36
4.12.5 Details of BARCODE 4.12.6 Details of LASER
Item name Function u NOTE u
I BARCODE NUMBER Displays the barcode number of the IP read by the RU. The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device
information you can check by the user utility of the RU.
Displays the total count of IP conveyance for each barcode. A To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or
II READING COUNTE
specific numerical value can be entered manually. turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON.
Item name Function
I RESET Resets each item of “LASER”.
Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
II SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
TOTAL TIME FOR THE Displays the total laser lighting time. A specific numerical
III
LASER ON value can be entered manually.
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total laser lighting count. A specific numerical
IV
THE LASER ON value can be entered manually.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-36
MU-37
4.12.7 Details of LAMP Item name Function
I RESET Resets each item of “THE ERASURE LAMP LIGHTING”.
Displays the date when the RU software is installed.
II SINCE By clicking on [RESET], the system date is automatically
entered. A specific date can be entered manually.
TOTAL TIME FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting time. A specific
III THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually.
LIGHTING
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total erasure lamp lighting count. A specific
IV THE ERASURE LAMP numerical value can be entered manually.
LIGHTING
V RESET Resets each item of "THE ERASUER LAMP CLEANING".
When the [RESET] button is clicked, the system date is
VI SINCE
entered. A specific date may be entered manually.
TOTAL COUNT FOR Displays the total count for the IP erasing. A specific
VII
THE IP ERASING numerical value can be entered manually.
u NOTE u
The information marked with * in the figure has the same value displayed in device
information you can check by the user utility of the RU.
To update the device information appearing on the RU, transfer once to another window, or
turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-37
MU-38
4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION 4.13.2 Procedures
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
4.13.1 Function
Used to edit the configuration information for the RU.
However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in Machine
Maintenance Utility cannot be set with EDIT CONFIGURATION.
The set information is written into the flash ROM of the RU.
2. Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION].
CAUTION
The LED panel of the RU lights up while the flash ROM of the RU is being updated.
Never turn OFF the RU power for the while.
If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the
RU will no longer boot up.
REFERENCE
Clicking on [EDIT CONFIGURATION], “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation
panel of the RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-38
MU-39
3. Set the respective CONFIGURATION items. Item name Function
Sets the identification code (1-digit alphanumeric character) with
u NOTE u
EQUIPMENT CODE which the user identifies the RU which has read the image when
Check to make sure that the setting of the IP type (GENERATION SETTING) coincides I
(A-Z) a plurality of RU’s are used. The identification code is printed on
with the IP type to be used at the user’s site. If the IP type set in the configuration the output film.
information differs from the IP to be used at the user’s site, such problems may occur Sets the erasure mode which can be selected by the “Mode
that sufficient IP image erasure cannot be done or it takes long to process. change” button of the RU.
The setting is effective only when “HOSPITAL” was selected in
RANGE OF ERASE setting “SCREEN TYPE” at the time of installation.
II
MODE - ERASE 1, ERASE 2 (default):
Can select secondary erasure or primary erasure.
- ERASE 1:
Can select only primary erasure.
Sets the period of time since “primary erasure” or “secondary
erasure” is selected by the “Mode change” button of the RU until
ERASE MODE TIME
III “Image reading” is automatically restored in the unit of second.
OUT (0-999[s])
When “0” is set, the mode is kept changed to “primary erasure”
or “secondary erasure”.
Determines whether the alarm sounds when a cassette is set.
ALARM
IV - ON (default): Alarm sounds.
(CASSETTE SET)
- OFF: Alarm does not sound.
Selects the kind of IP (inch or metric) to be used in the machine.
- INCH (default):
INCH OR METRIC
V Select when inch IP’s are to be used.
SETTING
- METRIC:
Select when metric IP’s are to be used.
Selects the IP type to be used in the machine.
GENERATION - VI (default): VI-type IP is to be used.
REFERENCE VI
SETTING - VN: VN-type IP is to be used.
When an overexposed IP is detected, it is written into the error log and an error * Need not be set for this machine.
message appears. The set item is displayed only when “USE” is selected in “selection Determines whether or not the patient’s name registered in the
as to whether or not the LINAC CASSETTE is to be used” when the software is installed CL is to be displayed on the operation panel.
or updated in version. This is effective only when “CLINIC” is selected in “SCREEN
DISPLAY TYPE” setting for installation.
VII PATIENT&MENU - ON (default): The patient’s name is displayed.
NAME - OFF: The patient’s name is not displayed.
u NOTE u
Always set to “OFF” in the machine.
- LOG&MESSAGE (default):
Write into the log file and display of an error message
WARNING OF - LOG ONLY:
VIII
OVERXRAY Write of an error log
- NONE:
Nothing is done.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-39
MU-40
4. Move down the slide bar. Item name Function
Determines the menu (user utility) items to be displayed when
the “Utility” button on the operation panel is pressed.
- FULL:
Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “HOSPITAL”.
Displays the entire menu of the user utility.
- SCANER CLEANING:
Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “CLINIC”.
II UTILITY MENU
Displays scanner cleaning only.
- :
Set this when the “SCREEN TYPE” setting is “CLINIC” at the
time of installation.
5. Set each item of CONFIGURATION.
Displays scanner cleaning only.
Do not set this when only the configuration setting is to be
changed.
Determines whether the warning on the laser life is to be only
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
in the error message.
III WARNING OF LD LIFE - LOG ONLY (default):
Only write into the error log
- LOG & MESSAGE:
Write into the error log and display of the error message.
Determines whether the warning on the erasure lamp life is to
be only written into the error log or written into the error log and
displayed in the error message.
WARNING OF LAMP
IV - LOG ONLY (default):
LIFE
Only write into the error log
- LOG & MESSAGE:
Write into the error log and display of the error message.
Determines whether the warning on the part life is to be only
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
in the error message.
WARNING OF PARTS
Item name Function V - LOG ONLY (default):
LIFE
Only write into the error log
Determines whether or not the name of the CL is displayed, - LOG & MESSAGE:
which is the destination of transfer of the read image during Write into the error log and display of the error message.
image reading.
Determines whether the warning on the S value is to be only
This is effective only when “HOSTPITAL” is selected in “SCREEN
written into the error log or written into the error log and displayed
I DISPLAY CL NAME TYPE” setting for installation.
in the error message.
- OFF (default): WARNING OF S
VI - LOG ONLY (default):
The CL name of the image destination is not displayed. VALUE
Only write into the error log
- ON:
- LOG & MESSAGE:
The CL name of the image destination is displayed.
Write into the error log and display of the error message.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-40
MU-41
6. Set the respective CONFIGURATION items (continues from step 5). 7. Click on [SET].
Item name Function
Set the timing when you can press the QUIT STUDY button on
the console after reading the image.
- IMAGE TRANSFER END:
You can press the QUIT STUDY button when the read image CAUTION
THE TIMING FOR data is transferred to the console. Do not take the procedures 8 to 10 during the installation of the RU software. If
I ACTIVATING "QUIT - UNLOCK CASSETTE: the FCR-MB 201 power is turned OFF and then ON before the installation of the RU
STUDY" BUTTON (1:1) You can press the QUIT STUDY button when the cassette hold software is completed, the software cannot be installed normally.
is released.
u NOTE u 8. Shut down the CL.
Always select "IMAGE TRANSFER END". 9. Turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
Set the timing to display the alarm for cleaning the erase lamp. REFERENCE
- NO DISP (default): Although “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, the RU functions are
The error message will not be displayed. not affected even if the FCR-MB 201 power is turned OFF.
- 45,000:
The alarm is displayed after the erase lamp is lighted up 45,000
times. 10. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
- 25,000:
WARNING OF LAMP
II The alarm is displayed after the erase lamp is lighted up 25,000
CLEANING
times.
- 90,000:
The alarm is displayed after the erase lamp is lighted up 90,000
times.
- FREE INPUT:
Enter a value for “WARNING OF LAMP CLEANING (FREE
INTPUT)”
WARNING OF LAMP Enter a value for the timing to clean the erasure lamp (only
III CLEANING (FREE when “FREE INTPUT” is selected at “WARNING OF LAMP
INPUT) CLEANING”).
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-41
MU-42
4.14 EDIT CL NAME l Procedures for editing/adding the CL as image transfer destination
1. Select from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" an RU where the CL as the image transfer
destinations is to be edited or added, and click on [EDIT CL NAME].
4.14.1 Function
Used to edit/add the CL as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master CL's.
4.14.2 Editing/Adding the CL as Image Transfer Destination
l Overview → “CL NAME” window appears.
Edit and/or add the CL as an image transfer destination of the RU. Up to 32 CL's may be
registered as image transfer destinations.
2. To edit, select the CL to be edited, and then click on [MODIFY]; to add, click on
[NEW].
l To edit:
l To add:
→ The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-42
MU-43
3. Enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET]. 4.14.3 Editing the List of Master CL's
u NOTE u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU. l Overview
Edit the list of master CL's. Of the CL registered as image transfer destinations, the CL
registered in the "MASTER CL" field is switchable as the master CL. Up to four CL may be
registered in the "MASTER CL" field.
When switched to the master CL, "CL NAME" of the CL registered is displayed on the LCD
screen of RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-43
MU-44
l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's
1. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master CL's is to be
edited, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
→ “CL NAME” window appears.
2. Select a CL to be added, and add it to the list of master CL's.
4.14.4 Switching the Master CL
Switch the master CL.
u NOTE u
Do not switch the master CL, except in case of emergency or machine trouble. If the master
CL is switched, data that is necessary for the user, such as "ERROR LOG" and "HISTORY
LOG", will be lost.
For the procedures for switching the master CL, see "Appendix 1. Setting the Master CL" of
the Installation volume.
{IN: Appendix 1._Setting the Master CL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-44
MU-45
4.15 BACKUP 4.15.2 Procedures
You can select a backup location (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item for
4.15.1 Function backup is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the CL are selectable.
Used to copy the configuration information, error log data or the like from the flash ROM of
the RU to a storage media (USB memory stick or the like). You can back up the following
data.
l "ERROR LOG"
Log data is backed up.
l "CONFIGURATION"
Configuration data is backed up.
l "TRACE LOGS"
Trace log data (design analysis information) is backed up.
l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is backed up.
l "LOG ALL"
All of “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” are backed up at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"
All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are backed up at a time.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Of the scanner data, light-collecting data is backed up.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"
Of the scanner data, optical data is backed up.
For details on the backup procedure, see under “16. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure” in the
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:16._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-45
MU-46
4.15.3 Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable
Causes
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
the RU, the following error message appears.
In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then
turning it ON.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-46
MU-47
4.16 RESTORE 4.16.2 Procedures
You can select a location in which the data to be restored exists (by specifying the drive and
4.16.1 Function directory) after an item for restore is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by
the CL are selectable.
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from a storage media
(USB memory stick or the like) to the flash ROM of the RU. The items to be restored include:
l "CONFIGURATION"
Configuration data is restored.
l "HISTORY LOG"
History data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time) is restored.
l "SCN ALL DATA"
All of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” are restored at a time.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Light collecting system data among the scanner data is restored.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"
Of the scanner data, optical data is restored.
REFERENCE
The contents copied into the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the RU power
and then turning it ON.
For details on the restore procedure, see under “16. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure” in the
Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:16._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-47
MU-48
4.16.3 Errors That May Occur during RESTORE and Their Probable
Causes
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
the RU, the following error message appears.
In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then
turning it ON.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-48
MU-49
4.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT Item name Function
The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is
1 "FILE OPEN" button
displayed on the Timing Chart screen.
4.17.1 Function
The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing
The I/O trace data is displayed in a timing chart. 2 "Pass" text box
chart is entered.
You can check operations including the reading of cassettes, erasure, conveyance check in
the RU PC-TOOL MUTL and mechanical checks. The display scale for the time base (horizontal
3 "Scale" button
axis) is changed.
Note that only the I/O trace data can be displayed.
4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed.
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar
5 Chart display area available, the display range may be moved by
manipulating the scroll bar.
By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and
pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the
following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B
fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position
6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area pointed by the left mouse button.
- B Time elapsed from power ON to the position
:
pointed by the right mouse button.
- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in
the A, B, and A-B fields are cleared.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-49
MU-50
4.17.2 Procedures
1. Back up the "LOG ALL".
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
REFERENCE
Backing up “LOG ALL” creates the IOT folder in the specified destination and the
following folder in the CR Console, and the "IOT.LOG" file is stored in the folder.
C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IRxxx\system\RU’s IP address\LOG\IOT
The IOT.LOG file stored in “C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IRxxx\system\RU’s IP
address\LOG\IOT” is specified by the default.
2. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
3. Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-50
MU-51
4.18 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected.
4.18.1 Function 2 “FATAL" button Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed.
3 “WARNING” button Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are displayed.
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data
of the RU. Memos may be appended to error messages, or detailed information or analysis Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are
4 “BOTH” button
flows may be viewed. displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.
The latest error log data is copied from the CPU23B board
6 “UPDATE” button
of the RU to the FTP server of the CL.
7 Error message list box The contents of the error log file selected are displayed.
The error code selected (highlighted) in the error message
8 “Error Code” text box
list box is displayed.
The error name selected (highlighted) in the error message
9 “Error Name” text box
list box is displayed.
The occurrence condition of the error message selected
10 “Meaning” text box
(highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed.
The detail information selected (highlighted) in the error
11 “Details Info.” Button
message list box is displayed.
The analysis flow for the error message selected
12 “Analysis Flow” button
(highlighted) in the error message list box is displayed.
A memo may be attached to the error message (highlighted)
13 “Memo.” text box in the error message list box.
Up to seven memos may be entered.
REFERENCE The name of the person (author) who entered text in the
14 “Author” text box
Clicking on [UPDATE], the error message list box is updated to the latest one. “Memo.” text box is entered.
The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key and
press the [SAVE] button again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-51
MU-52
4.18.2 Procedures
The procedures of displaying the latest error log are described as an example.
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
2. Click on [ERROR DB].
→ The “ERROR DB” window appears.
3. Click on [UPDATE].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-52
MU-53
4.19 UNINSTALL: ALL RUs 1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
4.19.1 Function
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD inserted into the
CL are collectively uninstalled. Upon the uninstallation, the folders of the uninstalled RU's
are deleted from the FTP server and the RU’s disappear from "LIST OF EXISTING RU". In 2. Click on [PING].
addition, the contents of “C:/ProgramFiles/FujiFIlm/FCR” directory on the CL are deleted.
u NOTE u
If a plurality of RU’s of the same device type exist, the software and configuration data for the
RU of the same type are all deleted from the FTP server upon executing UNINSTALL.
Be sure to perform INSTALL after UNINSTALL is executed.
→ Check to make sure that GOOD indication appears on the “command prompt”
4.19.2 Procedures window.
{MU:4.7_PING}
CAUTIONS 3. Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for all the RU’s to be uninstalled.
- Before executing UNINSTALL, be sure to take note of the IP addresses (user settings) 4. Back up the following files for the RU to be uninstalled.
of the RU, CL, and FTP server.
- CONFIGURATION
Once UNINSTALL is executed, all the user settings are lost. - HISTORY LOG
- For the RU connected to the CL, back up the following files. Those files must be - SCN ALL DATA
restored after installation. {MU:4.15_BACKUP}
- CONFIGURATION
- HISTORY LOG 5. Click on [UNINSTALL].
- SCN ALL DATA
If a plurality of the RU’s of the same device type exit, it is necessary to identify which
file belongs to which RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-53
MU-54
6. Select the device type to be uninstalled, and Click on [OK].
→ Uninstall is performed.
7. Click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-54
MU-55
4.20 VERSION UP: ALL RUs 4.20.2 Procedures
REFERENCE
4.20.1 Function When a plurality of RU's are to be updated inversion, update the connected RU’s one by one
in the sequence they are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU". If two RU’s are registered
The RU's of the same device type as those recorded in the RU-APL CD inserted into the CL in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" in the sequence of ru2 and ru1, they are updated in this order.
are collectively updated in version.
1. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
CAUTION
Never turn OFF the CL/RU power during the version updating.
The contents of the flash ROM might be corrupted, and the RU will no longer boot up.
u NOTE u
When a plurality of RU's are to be updated in version, sequentially update the RU software in
the connected RU’s. It takes about eight minutes to update one RU. Do not turn OFF the CL 2. Click on [PING].
and RU power until the installation is completed for all the RU's.
After the installation, be sure to check the software version of all of the RU's, and check to
make sure that they have been updated in version.
→ Check to make sure that GOOD indication appears on the displayed command
prompt window.
{MU:4.7_PING}
3. Repeat procedures 1 and 2 for all the RU's connected to the CL.
4. Click on [VERSION UP].
→ A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the CD.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-55
MU-56
5. Insert the RU-APL CD into the CL, and click on [OK]. 9. When a linac cassette is to be used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT
USE” if the linac cassette is not to be used. Then click on [SET].
6. Select "RU TYPE".
10. Click on [OK].
7. Select “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK].
→ The RU PC-TOOL window appears again.
11. Check to make sure that the version update has been normally completed.
→ The window to verify the execution of a version update appears.
8. Click on [OK].
→ Version-update of the RU software starts.
The LED of one RU lights up.
In approx. eight minutes, the update of the first RU is completed, and the update of a
second RU is started.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-56
MU-57
4.21 CDPath 2. Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD is completely copied.
l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the
4.21.1 Function procedure 5.
The RU software should normally be installed from the RU-APL CD.
If a folder that completely copies the RU-APL CD data resides in the hard disk of the CL, you
may install the RU software from that hard disk without using the RU-APL CD by specifying
the path of that folder.
u NOTES u
- To copy the RU-APL CD data, its whole data should be completely copied to a single folder.
If it is partially copied, the installation cannot be executed. l To enter the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and
- "CDPath" setting should be made only when necessary. If "CDPath" is set, installation from proceed to the next procedure.
the RU-APL CD cannot be executed.
4.21.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath"
The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the Copy CD-R of the C drive are
described as an example. → The window for selecting the folder appears.
1. Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
3. Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD is completely copied.
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-57
MU-58
4. Click on [OK]. 4.21.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
1. Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
→ The path is displayed in the text box.
2. Click on [CLEAR].
5. Click on [SET].
→ “CDPath” is set.
→ The path in the text box is cleared.
3. Click on [SET].
→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-58
MU-59
4.22 Initialize APL 4.23 Starting and Exiting RU PC-TOOL
4.22.1 Function 4.23.1 Starting RU PC-TOOL
Effects RU application initialization. 1. Power ON the FCR-MB 201.
u NOTE u 2. Press the [Window] key on the keyboard, and open the Start menu of Windows.
Effect RU application initialization only when no error code appears and the machine does
not boot up during troubleshooting.
3. Open the Windows start menu window, designate "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\
4.22.2 Procedures TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" in the "Start Search" column, and press the [Enter]
key.
For the procedure for RU application initialization, see “20.4 Procedures for Restoring the RU
Application” in the Troubleshooting volume.
{MT:20.4_Procedures for Restoring the RU Application}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-59
MU-60
4.23.2 Exiting RU PC-TOOL
1. Click on in the upper right corner of the main window of RU PC-TOOL.
2. Shut down the CL.
3. Turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-60
MU-61
5. Client PC l Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU
Even when the CL is not running, it is possible to execute command by specifying the RU's
IP address. Executable commands are MUTL, PING, and MON.
5.1 Features and Operations of the Client PC
The client PC is a notebook PC on which CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed. When CLIENT PC-
TOOL is installed on a notebook PC from the RU-APL CD, the notebook PC can be used as
the client PC.
5.1.1 Features of the Client PC
The use of CLIENT PC-TOOL, which is installed on the client PC, makes it possible to
execute commands as needed for RU maintenance even while the CL is used.
Note, however, the commands executable from RU PC-TOOL of the CL differ from those
executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL of the client PC.
Commands executable from CLIENT PC-TOOL can be classified into the following three
categories:
- Commands for editing data stored in the client PC
- Commands that the client PC can directly execute for the RU
- Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the CL l Commands that the client PC can execute for the RU via the CL
Commands can be executed for an RU that is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-
TOOL, which is installed on the client PC. This command execution is performed via the CL
CAUTION (FTP server).
When executing a command for allowing CLIENT PC-TOOL to access the RU's flash
ROM, it is necessary to observe precautions as is the case with the use of RU PC-
TOOL. For details on the precautions, see "5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC."
{MU:5.1.3_Precautions for Using the Client PC}
l Commands for editing data stored in the client PC
Data stored in the client PC can be edited and saved even when the client PC is not
connected to the network in the user's site.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-61
MU-62
5.1.2 Operations of the Client PC
l Client PC operation immediately after installation l Client PC operation after hospital list creation
When you install and start CLIENT PC-TOOL, the following window opens. When an RU is registered in the hospital list of CLIENT PC-TOOL, all commands of CLIENT
PC-TOOL can be executed. However, executable commands vary depending on whether
the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode or OFF-LINE mode.
For the difference between the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes and the details on commands
executable in the respective modes, see 5.6 "ON-LINE and OFF-LINE."
The following commands can be executed immediately after installation: {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- Commands selectable from the Configuration (C) menu
- Commands executable for a machine having an address that is entered in the IP address
field (MUTL, PING, and MON)
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-62
MU-63
5.1.3 Precautions for Using the Client PC 5.1.5 Precautions in Setting the CL
As is the case with RU PC-TOOL, CLIENT PC-TOOL has commands for accessing the When the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be used in the ON-LINE mode, always check to make sure
RU's flash ROM. When executing the commands for accessing the flash ROM, observe the that the “Windows Firewall” of the CL is set as follows.
following precautions: If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available.
- When executing a command for accessing the RU's flash ROM, never turn OFF the RU
or client PC power. If you turn OFF the power, the contents of the flash ROM become l “Exceptions” tab setting
damaged so that the RU does not start up.
- While the CL and RU are used, do not execute a command that allows the client PC to
access the flash ROM.
5.1.4 Precautions for Using a Notebook PC without a CD Drive
The RU-APL CD is required for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL, creating the hospital list, and
executing the version update command.
Before using a PC without a CD drive as the client PC, it is necessary to copy the contents of
the RU-APL CD to a certain place within the client PC.
When the CD path is set up after CLIENT PC-TOOL installation, it is possible to create the l Network connection setting in “Detail setting” tab
hospital list and execute the version update command even when the RU-APL CD is not on
hand.
Refer to “5.10 Checking the CL Setup when Using the Client PC” for the detailed procedures
of checking the respective settings.
{MU:5.10_Checking the CL Setup when Using the Client PC}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-63
MU-64
5.2 Setting Up the Client PC
This section describes the procedure for installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on the notebook PC
with the RU-APL CD so that the notebook PC can be used as the client PC.
n Items required for preparing the client PC n Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL
- Notebook PC for use as the client PC Use either of the following two CLIENT PC-TOOL installation procedures:
l Installing from the RU-APL CD
Insert the RU-APL CD into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically
opens. Start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL by clicking "INSTALL" in the "Set Up PC-TOOL"
window.
For details on the installation procedure, see "5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-
APL CD."
{MU:5.2.1_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD}
- RU-APL CD
l Installing on a PC without a CD drive
Install CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD data to the client PC with a flash
memory or other recording medium.
For details on the installation procedure, see "5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC
without a CD Drive."
{MU:5.2.2_Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD Drive}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-64
MU-65
5.2.1 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD 4. Click on [NEXT].
Insert the RU-APL CD into the PC. When the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically
opens, install CLIENT PC-TOOL.
1. Insert the RU-APL CD into the CD drive of the notebook PC.
→ The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
2. Click on [INSTALL].
5. Click on [INSTALL].
3. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], re-
install according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT
PC-TOOL Installation”.
{MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation} 6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
→ You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-65
MU-66
5.2.2 Installing CLIENT PC-TOOL on a PC without a CD Drive 3. Copy the entire copied RU-APL CD data to the folder created in step 2.
With a PC with a CD drive, copy the RU-APL CD data to a flash memory or other recording u NOTE u
medium. Copy the entire copied data to a folder on the client PC. Start "Set Up PC-TOOL" Be sure to copy the entire data to the folder created in step 2. If all the data is not
by double-clicking the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data. When the "Set Up copied, you cannot install CLIENT PC-TOOL.
PC-TOOL" window opens, start installing CLIENT PC-TOOL.
1. With a PC with a CD drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD data to a flash memory or
other recording medium.
u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD.
2. Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC (e.g., "Copy CD-R"
on drive C).
4. Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-66
MU-67
5. Click on [INSTALL]. 8. Click on [INSTALL].
6. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], re-
install according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT
PC-TOOL Installation”. 9. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
{MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation}
→ You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
7. Click on [NEXT].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-67
MU-68
5.3 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL
This section describes the procedures for starting CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Two different procedures are used to Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
l Starting from the CD (Setup PC-TOOL)
Insert the RU-APL CD into the PC. The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window then automatically
opens. Start CLIENT PC-TOOL from the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
For details on the procedure, see "6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD (Setup PC-
TOOL)."
{MU:6.28.1_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD (Setup PC-TOOL)}
l Starting from a client PC window
From a client PC window, start CLIENT PC-TOOL by specifying its file name.
For details on the procedure, see "6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC
Window."
{MU:6.28.2_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-68
MU-69
5.4 Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification 5. Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site and make the network settings of
the client PC
→ The “Network Connection” window appears.
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site.
6. Double-click "Local area connection," display the “Local Area Connection Status”
2. Make sure that the proxy server setting in “Internet Options” of the client PC is window, and click on [Property].
“OFF”.
{MU:5.11_Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC}
3. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
4. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
→ The “Local area connection property” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-69
MU-70
7. Choose "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then click [Properties]. 10. Enter the address of the RU or CL connected to the network in the user's site, and
then execute the "PING" command to verify that the client PC is connected to the
network in the user's site.
8. Set the client PC IP address and then click [OK].
u NOTES u
- Ask the network manager of the user’s site to check the available IP address before
changing the IP address. If the IP address of another device is specified, the client PC
cannot be connected with the network.
- Set the subnet mask and the default gateway as the need arises, after the network
setups of the site are confirmed.
9. Close the "Local Area Connection Properties" window, "Local Area Connection
Status" window, and "Network Connection" window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-70
MU-71
5.5 Preparing/Editing the Hospital List 5.5.1 Registering an RU in the Hospital List
Create the hospital list in “CLIENT PC-TOOL”. The hospital list includes names of sites, FTP Register an RU by executing the "NEW RU" command from "HOSPITAL" in the hospital list.
servers used at the site, and the RU’s registered in a tree format. Upon registering a site,
FTP server and RU in the hospital list, their folders are created in the C drive of the client PC.
With “CLIENT PC-TOOL”, the maintenance can be performed only for the RU registered in
the hospital list.
For details on the "NEW RU" command, see "6.4 NEW RU."
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
u NOTE u
The RU-APL CD is required for preparing/editing the hospital list. Therefore, have the RU-
APL CD on hand before you start performing the procedure.
If you create or edit the hospital list with a PC without a CD drive, it is necessary to copy the
RU-APL CD data to a certain location within the client PC and set the CD path. Therefore,
perform the procedure set forth under "6.23 CDPath" to set the CD path before creating or
editing the hospital list.
{MU:6.23_CDPath}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-71
MU-72
5.5.2 Adding an RU to the Hospital List l Using the "COPY" command
When the RU to be added has the same model number as an existing one, it can be added
This section describes the procedures for adding an RU to a prepared hospital list. with the "COPY" command. This procedure does not entail the use of the RU-APL CD.
To add an RU, use either of the following two procedures:
- Using the "NEW RU" command
u NOTE u
- Using the "COPY" command Use the "COPY" command only when the RU to be added has the same model number as
an existing one. If the RU to be added differs from existing ones, it cannot be added with the
l Using the "NEW RU" command "COPY" command.
Add an RU by performing the same procedure as for registering an RU in the hospital list.
When an RU is to be added, a previously registered site name and FTP server IP address
can be chosen from the pull-down menu.
For details on the "NEW RU" command, see "6.4 NEW RU."
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
For details on the use of the "COPY" command, see "6.6 COPY."
{MU:6.6_COPY}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-72
MU-73
5.5.3 Deleting a Hospital List Entry l Deleting an FTP server
Select the FTP server to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the "DELETE"
If an RU, FTP server, site, or tree is erroneously registered in the hospital list, it can be command.
deleted with the "DELETE" command. → The FTP server and all the RUs registered with the FTP server are then deleted.
The tree information to be deleted varies with the hospital list selection position.
l Deleting an RU only
Select the name of the RU to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the
"DELETE" command.
→ Only the RU is then deleted.
l Deleting a site
Select the name of the site to be deleted from the hospital list and then execute the
"DELETE" command.
→ The name of the site and all the FTP servers and RUs registered with the site are
then deleted.
For details on the use of the "DELETE" command, see "6.5 DELETE."
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
For details on the use of the "DELETE" command, see "6.5 DELETE."
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-73
MU-74
l Deleting all hospital list entries 5.5.4 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Indications
Choose "HOSPITAL" and then execute the "DELETE" command.
→ The entire tree information registered in the hospital list is then deleted. If it is found during hospital list creation/editing that the RU name or RU IP address to be
entered is already registered, the following error windows open.
l If the RU name to be entered is already registered
l If the IP address to be entered is already registered
For details on the use of the "DELETE" command, see "6.5 DELETE."
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-74
MU-75
5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE l OFF-LINE mode
5.6.1 Difference between ON-LINE and OFF-LINE Operations
By setting the IP address of the client PC, the PC can be connected with the network in the
user’s site. The client PC has commands to be executed while connected with the network
of the site (ON-LINE mode) and commands to be executed while separated from the network
of the site (OFF-LINE mode). The available commands differ depending on the mode of the
client PC, so that it is necessary to change over the mode of the client PC depending on the The following commands are available when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
type of the maintenance. The client PC can be changed over between the ON-LINE and - Commands to register the RU where the maintenance will take place
OFF-LINE modes through the use of the “Online” command of CLIENT PC-TOOL. - Commands to edit the machine information of the RU acquired during the ON-LINE mode
{MU:6.26_OnLine}
l ON-LINE mode
Refer to “5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode” for the details on operations in the OFF-LINE
mode.
When the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode, the following commands are available. {MU:5.6.3_Operation in OFF-LINE Mode}
- Commands to acquire/write machine information of the RU
- Commands to access the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP server
- Command to directly operate the RU (MUTL)
When a command to access the flash ROM of the RU is executed, “Under Maintenance”
appears on the operation panel of the RU as in the case of the RU PC-TOOL of the CL.
Refer to “5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode” for the details on operations in the ON-LINE
mode.
{MU:5.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-75
MU-76
5.6.2 Operation in ON-LINE Mode The following commands can be executed in the ON-LINE mode.
Command Function Reference
REFERENCE
Acquires the software version of the
The “ON-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when only the commands to
GET VERSION RU stored in the FTP server, and {MU:6.8_GET VERSION}
access the RU or the FTP server from CLIENT PC-TOOL are available. To change over the displays it in the hospital list.
client PC to the ON-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Starts up the MUTL of the RU service
Refer to “6.26 OnLine” for the details of procedures for changing over to the ON-LINE mode. MUTL {MU:6.9_MUTL}
utility.
{MU:6.26_OnLine}
Executes PING for the RU or the FTP
PING {MU:6.10_PING}
During the ON-LINE mode, the commands to directly access the flash ROM of the RU or the server.
FTP server, such as VERSION UP, UPLOAD of RU’s configuration information are executed. Displays the change of I/O statues of
MON {MU:6.11_MON}
the RU.
Checks the network connection with
FTP the RU and the operation of the FTP {MU:6.12_FTP}
server.
Updates the version of the RU
VERSION UP {MU:6.13_VERSION UP}
software.
Copies the maintenance information
UPLOAD edited in the OFF-LINE mode to the {MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
RU and the FTP server.
Copies the maintenance information of
DOWNLOAD the RU stored in the flash ROM of the {MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
RU and in the FTP to the client PC.
REFERENCES
- The commands available during the ON-LINE mode include those for accessing only the
flash ROM of the RU and those for accessing both the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP
server.
The commands for accessing both the flash ROM of the RU and the FTP server include:
- GET VERSION
- FTP
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
- DOWNLOAD
- When the following commands to change the contents of the flash ROM of the RU are
executed, “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU.
- MUTL
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
Refer to “6.2.1 “Under Maintenance” indication on the operation panel” for the details of the
“Under Maintenance” indication.
{MU:6.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-76
MU-77
5.6.3 Operation in OFF-LINE Mode The following commands can be executed in the OFF-LINE mode.
Command Function Reference
REFERENCE
The “OFF-LINE mode” of the client PC refers to the conditions when the commands to Registers an RU in the hospital
NEW RU {MU:6.4_NEW RU}
access the RU or the FTP server from the CLIENT PC-TOOL are not available. To change list.
over the client PC to the OFF-LINE mode, use the “OnLine” command of the CLIENT PC- Deletes an RU registered in
DELETE {MU:6.5_DELETE}
TOOL. the hospital list.
Refer to “6.26 OnLine” for the details of procedures for changing over to the OFF-LINE mode.
Duplicates an RU registered in
{MU:6.26_OnLine} COPY {MU:6.6_COPY}
the hospital list.
During the OFF-LINE mode, you can edit the configuration information, history information or Changes the name of an RU
RENAME {MU:6.7_RENAME}
the like registered the hospital list. registered in the hospital list.
u NOTE u Edits the history information of
EDIT HISTORY {MU:6.14_EDIT HISTORY}
the RU stored in the client PC.
The data you can edit in the OFF-LINE mode is limited to the information stored in the
client PC. To effect the contents edited in the client PC in the RU machine, the data need Edits the configuration
be uploaded after the client PC is changed over to the ON-LINE mode. Refer to “5.6.2 EDIT COFIGURATION information of the RU stored in {MU:6.15_EDIT COFIGURATION}
Operation in ON-LINE mode” for the details of the operation in the ON-LINE mode. the client PC.
{MU:5.6.2_Operation in ON-LINE Mode} Edits the list of the master
CL’s of the image transfer
EDIT CL NAME {MU:6.16_EDIT CL NAME}
destination stored in the client
PC.
Displays trace data of RU I/O
I/O TRACE EXPERT {MU:6.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
in the form of a timing chart.
Displays error log data of an
ERROR DB {MU:6.18_ERROR DB}
RU.
Reads the machine information
from a storage media (USB
READ {MU:6.19_READ}
memory stick or the like) to the
client PC.
Writes the machine information
from the client PC into a
WRITE {MU:6.20_WRITE}
storage media (USB memory
stick or the like).
Copies the information in the
Export hospital list from the client PC {MU:6.24_Export}
to a recording medium.
Copies the information in the
Import hospital list from a recording {MU:6.25_Import}
medium to the client PC.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-77
MU-78
5.7 Data Flow of Each Command 5.7.2 READ and WRITE
Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
Features of the commands of UPLOAD & DOWNLOAD, READ & WRITE, and Import &
READ: Writes the machine information resident in the client PC into an external recording
Export and the data flow are described below.
medium.
WRITE: Writes the machine information stored in an external recording medium into the
5.7.1 UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD client PC.
Available only when the client PC is in the ON-LINE mode.
DOWNLOAD: Acquires the machine information from the flash ROM of the RU.
UPLOAD: Writes the machine information edited by the client PC into the flash ROM
of the RU. “Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel of the RU
during the write.
Refer to “6.19 READ” and “6.20 WRITE” for the details of the commands “READ” and “WRITE”.
{MU:6.19_READ}
{MU:6.20_WRITE}
5.7.3 Import and Export
Available only when the client PC is in the OFF-LINE mode.
Refer to “6.21 UPLOAD” and “6.22 DOWNLOAD” for the details of the commands [UPLOAD] Import: Reads hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored
and [DOWNLOAD]. in an external recording medium into the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Export: Writes hospital names, the FTP server, and the RU information (hospital list) stored
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
in the CLIENT PC-TOOL into an external recording medium.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
Refer to “6.25 Import” and “6.24 Export” for the details of the commands “Import” and “Export”.
{MU:6.25_Import}
{MU:6.24_Export}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-78
MU-79
5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper 5.8.1 Solution-1
CLIENT PC-TOOL Installation The procedures for discontinuing the installation and re-installing the CLIENT PC-TOOL are
described.
If “For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed,
follow the procedures below to reinstall the CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. If you select “For FTP-Server” and click on [SET], click on [Cancel] in the
subsequently displayed window.
Two ways are available as countermeasures to be taken when a mistake is made during the
installation of the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
l Discontinue the installation, and re-install
“For FTP-Server” has been inadvertently selected when CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed.
If the mistake in selection is noticed during the operation, you can discontinue the installation.
Stop the installation, and then start to re-install the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Refer to “5.8.1 Solution -1” for details.
{MU:5.8.1_Solution-1}
l Delete the RU PC-TOOL, and re-install
“For FTP-Server” is inadvertently selected when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is to be installed.
The RU PC-TOOL is installed if the installation is continued. Delete the RU PC-TOOL by the
RU-APL CD, and re-install the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
Refer to “5.8.2 Solution-2” for details.
{MU:5.8.2_Solution-2}
2. Click on [Yes] to confirm the cancellation of the installation.
3. Click on [Finish].
4. Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to “5.2 Setting Up the Client PC”.
{MU:5.2_Setting Up the Client PC}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-79
MU-80
5.8.2 Solution-2 5. Click on [Remove].
The procedures for deleting the RU PC-TOOL by the RU-APL CD and then re-installing the
CLIENT PC-TOOL are described.
1. Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up.
2. Insert the RU-APL CD into the CL.
→ The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
3. Click on [UNINSTALL].
6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation.
4. Click on [NEXT].
7. Install the CLIENT PC-TOOL according to “5.2 Setting Up the Client PC”.
{MU:5.2_Setting Up the Client PC}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-80
MU-81
5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL 5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD
This section describes the version update procedures for CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. Exit from the RU PC-TOOL when it has booted up.
To update CLIENT PC-TOOL, use either of the following procedures: 2. Insert the RU-APL CD into the CL.
→ The “Set UP PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD
Insert the RU-APL CD into the PC. The "Set Up PC" window then automatically opens. 3. Click on [UNINSTALL].
From this window, uninstall CLIENT PC-TOOL and then perform an install again to update
CLIENT PC-TOOL.
For details on the version update procedure, see "5.9.1 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the
RU-APL CD."
{MU:5.9.1_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from the RU-APL CD}
l Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD drive
Update CLIENT PC-TOOL after copying the RU-APL CD data to the client PC with a flash
memory or other recording medium.
For details on the version update procedure, see "5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a
PC without a CD Drive." 4. Click on [NEXT].
{MU:5.9.2_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD Drive}
5. Click on [Remove].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-81
MU-82
6. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation. 9. Click on [NEXT].
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.
7. Click on [INSTALL]. 10. Click on [INSTALL].
8. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], re-
install according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT
PC-TOOL Installation”. 11. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
{MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation}
→ You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-82
MU-83
5.9.2 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL from a PC without a CD Drive 3. Copy the entire copied RU-APL CD data to the folder created in step 2.
1. With a PC with a CD drive, copy the entire RU-APL CD data to a flash memory or u NOTE u
other recording medium. Be sure to copy the entire data to the folder created in step 2. If all the data is not
copied, you cannot install CLIENT PC-TOOL.
u NOTE u
Be sure to copy the entire data from the RU-APL CD.
2. Create a new folder in an arbitrary location within the client PC (e.g., "Copy CD-R"
on drive C).
4. Double-click the "SetupRun.exe" file that is among the copied data.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-83
MU-84
5. Click on [UNINSTALL]. 8. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the uninstallation.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window opens.
9. Click on [INSTALL].
6. Click on [NEXT].
10. Select “For Client PC” and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
7. Click on [Remove]. Always select “For Client PC”. If “For FTP-Server” is selected, the software cannot be
normally installed. If you select “For FTP-Server” inadvertently and click on [SET], re-
install according to “5.8 Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT
PC-TOOL Installation”.
{MU:5.8_Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper CLIENT PC-TOOL
Installation}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-84
MU-85
11. Click on [NEXT].
12. Click on [INSTALL].
13. Click on [Finish] upon completion of the installation.
→ You are then returned to the "Set Up PC-TOOL" window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-85
MU-86
5.10 Checking the CL Setup when Using the Client PC 5. Click on the [Advanced] tab.
Be sure to check the settings in the “Windows Firewall” on the CL before using the CLIENT
PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode.
If differently set, the commands in the ON-LINE mode are not available.
1. Click on in the Windows [Start] menu.
→ The "Control Panel "window appears.
2. Double-click on .
6. Click on [Settings].
→ The "Windows Firewall" window appears.
3. Click on the [Exceptions] tab.
→ The “Advanced Settings” window appears.
7. Check to make sure that check box of “FTP server” is marked with a check.
4. Check to make sure that check boxes of “ftp.exe” and “FTP_port” are marked
with checks.
8. Close all of the windows.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-86
MU-87
5.11 Checking the “Internet Options” Setting of the Client PC 4. Make sure that a check mark is not put in the check box for the “Proxy server”
setting. If checked, cancel it.
If the proxy server setting is “ON” in the “Internet Options” of the notebook PC used as the
client PC, commands cannot be correctly executed for the RU, resulting in errors.
Be sure to set the “Proxy server” to “OFF” in the notebook PC used, before servicing.
1. Click from the Windows’ [Start] menu.
→ The “Control Panel” window opens.
2. Double-click .
→ The “Internet Properties” window opens.
3. Click the “Connections” tab, and click “LAN Settings” button.
5. Close the respective windows.
→ The “Local Area Network (LAN) Settings” window opens.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-87
MU-88
6. CLIENT PC-TOOL 6.1.2 Tree Diagram
CLIENT PC-TOOL
6.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window and Tree HOSPITAL
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
6.1.1 CLIENT PC-TOOL Main Window {MU:6.9_MUTL}
{MU:6.5_DELETE}
{MU:6.10_PING}
{MU:6.6_COPY}
{MU:6.11_MON}
{MU:6.7_RENAME}
{MU:6.12_FTP}
{MU:6.8_GET VERSION}
{MU:6.13_VERSION UP}
{MU:6.14_EDIT HISTORY}
{MU:6.15_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
{MU:6.16_EDIT CL NAME}
{MU:6.17_I/O TRACE EXPERT}
{MU:6.18_ERROR DB}
{MU:6.19_READ}
{MU:6.20_WRITE}
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
Configuration
{MU:6.23_CDPath}
{MU:6.24_Export}
{MU:6.25_Import}
{MU:6.26_OnLine}
{MU:6.27_Network}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-88
MU-89
6.2 Outline of the CLIENT PC-TOOL n “Under Maintenance” Message
When a command to change the contents of a flash ROM is executed from the CLIENT PC-
The CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed into a notebook PC of a service engineer to serve as TOOL while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL
a maintenance tool for use of service engineers. It is used to update the RU software in is in the ON-LINE mode, “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel,
version and check the connection between the CL and the RU on the client PC networked and the message of “Can't process the cassette” appears at the center.
with the RU.
While “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel, no button control can
be accepted. No IP conveyance takes place even if you insert a cassette.
6.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel
“Under Maintenance” appears on the operation panel, indicating that the RU is under
maintenance.
The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM:
- MUTL
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-89
MU-90
n Resetting the “Under Maintenance” Message 6.2.2 CLIENT PC-TOOL Error Screen Display
Press the leftmost button while pressing the third button from the left. The “Under
If a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM is executed while the RU is
Maintenance” message disappears, and the button control is accepted on the operation
running, the Error window as shown below appears on the client PC. The command for
panel. IP conveyance takes place.
changing the contents of the flash ROM is not executed.
Note that, however, that the blinking “Under Maintenance” message appears on the top of The commands for changing the contents of the flash ROM include:
the operation panel even if you reset the “Under Maintenance” message appearing at the
center of the operation panel.
The following commands are used to change the contents of the FLASH ROM:
- MUTL
- VERSION UP
- UPLOAD
CAUTION
Do not execute a command for changing the contents of the flash ROM while the RU
is running. The program stored in the flash ROM is corrupted and the machine cannot
start.
REFERENCE
The RU is running in the following states:
REFERENCE
- The RU is being initialized.
Blinking “Under Maintenance” indication on the top of the operation panel indicates that a
- The RU is performing a “read”, “primary erasure”, or “secondary erasure” process.
command to change the flash ROM through the use of the CLIENT PC-TOOL has been
- The User Utility is started by the RU.
executed.
n To Terminate the “Under Maintenance” Message
The blinking “Under Maintenance” message disappears by turning OFF the RU power and
then turning it ON.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-90
MU-91
6.3 Hospital List
6.3.1 Function
The hospital list contains the name of each site, the FTP server used there, and the RU’s
registered in a tree form. When the site, FTP server and RU are registered in the hospital
list, their respective folders are created in the C drive of the client PC.
Refer to “6.4 NEW RU” for the details of procedures of registering in the hospital list.
{MU:6.4_NEW RU}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-91
MU-92
6.4 NEW RU 4. Right-click "HOSPITAL". From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU].
6.4.1 Function
Used to register the name of a site, the FTP server used there and the RU in the hospital list
in the tree form. Folders for storing the respective data are created in the C drive of the client
PC according to the tree constructed in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
6.4.2 Registering an RU in the Hospital List
5. Enter a new site name in the "HOSPITAL NAME" field and then click [SET].
This section describes the procedure for registering an RU in the hospital list.
The procedure set forth below can also be used for registering a new site name, FTP server,
or RU.
1. When the employed PC is equipped with a CD drive, insert the RU-APL CD into
the client PC. If the employed PC is without a CD drive, verify that the CD path is
set up.
{MU:6.23.4_Verifying the "CDPath" Setting}
2. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
3. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-92
MU-93
6. In the "FTP-SERV. IP ADDR" field, enter the IP address of the FTP server used at 8. Select “RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”.
the site, and then click [SET].
9. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte numerical
characters are used, the input characters will be garbled.
REFERENCE
If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in step 7.
In this instance, skip to step 8.
7. Click on [OK].
10. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
If an error window opens, proceed as directed below:
- When the employed PC is equipped with a CD drive
Insert the RU-APL CD into the CD drive of the client PC.
- When the employed PC is without a CD drive
Click [CANCEL], set the CD path, and repeat RU registration steps 4 and beyond.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-93
MU-94
11. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT 6.4.3 Registering an FTP Server and RU with a Registered Site
USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET]. Name
This section describes the procedure for registering a new FTP server and RU with a
previously registered site name.
1. When the employed PC is equipped with a CD drive, insert the RU-APL CD into
the client PC. If the employed PC is without a CD drive, verify that the CD path is
set up.
{MU:6.23.4_Verifying the "CDPath" Setting}
2. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
→ The added contents are displayed in the hospital list.
{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
3. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
4. Right-click a site name. From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-94
MU-95
5. In the "FTP-SERV. IP ADDR" field, enter the IP address of the FTP server used at 7. Select “RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”.
the site, and then click [SET].
8. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte numerical
characters are used, the input characters will be garbled.
REFERENCE
If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in step 6.
In this instance, skip to step 7.
6. Click on [OK].
9. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
If an error window opens, proceed as directed below:
- When the employed PC is equipped with a CD drive
Insert the RU-APL CD into the CD drive of the client PC.
- When the employed PC is without a CD drive
Click [CANCEL], set the CD path, and repeat RU registration steps 4 and beyond.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-95
MU-96
10. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT 6.4.4 Registering an RU with a Registered FTP Server
USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET].
This section describes the procedure for registering a new RU with a previously registered
FTP server.
1. When the employed PC is equipped with a CD drive, insert the RU-APL CD into
the client PC. If the employed PC is without a CD drive, verify that the CD path is
set up.
{MU:6.23.4_Verifying the "CD Path" Setting}
2. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
→ The added contents are displayed in the hospital list.
3. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
4. Right-click a FTP Server. From the menu that pops up, choose [NEW RU].
REFERENCE
If the CD path is set up, the confirmation window does not open as indicated in step 5.
In this instance, skip to step 6.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-96
MU-97
5. Click on [OK]. 8. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
If an error window opens, proceed as directed below: 9. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT
- When the employed PC is equipped with a CD drive USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET].
Insert the RU-APL CD into the CD drive of the client PC.
- When the employed PC is without a CD drive
Click [CANCEL], set the CD path, and repeat RU registration steps 4 and beyond.
6. Select “RU TYPE” and “RU VERSION”.
→ The added contents are displayed in the hospital list.
7. Select “LANGUAGE”, “BRAND TYPE” and “SCREEN TYPE”, and click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-97
MU-98
6.5 DELETE 6.5.2 Deleting an RU Only
1. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
6.5.1 Function {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
Used to delete the site, FTP server or RU registered in the hospital list. The folders of the 2. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
site, FTP server or the RU deleted from the tree are deleted from the C drive of the client PC. {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
u NOTE u 3. Right-click the RU to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE].
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
4. Click on [OK].
→ The RU is then deleted.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-98
MU-99
6.5.3 Deleting an FTP Server 6.5.4 Deleting a Site
1. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL. 1. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL} {MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
2. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. 2. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
3. Right-click the FTP server to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose 3. Right-click the site name to be deleted. From the menu that pops up, choose
[DELETE]. [DELETE].
4. Click on [OK].
4. Click on [OK].
→ The site name and all the FTP servers and RUs registered with the site name are
→ The FTP server and all the RUs registered with the FTP server are then deleted. then deleted.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-99
MU-100
6.5.5 Deleting the Entire Tree Information 4. Click on [OK].
1. Start the CLIENT PC-TOOL.
{MU:5.3_Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL}
2. Verify that CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
→ The entire tree information registered in the hospital list is then deleted.
3. Right-click "HOSPITAL." From the menu that pops up, choose [DELETE].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-100
MU-101
6.6 COPY 3. Enter a new site name in the “HOSPITAL NAME” field, and click on [SET]. Or
select an existing site name from the pull-down menu, and click on [SET].
6.6.1 Function l To input a new site name:
Used to copy the RU registered in the hospital list. The folder of the selected RU is copied in
the C drive of the client PC.
u NOTES u
- The "COPY" command works only when the RU to be added has the same model number
as an existing one. If the RU to be added differs from existing ones, use the "NEW RU"
command.
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check l To select an existing site name:
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
6.6.2 Procedures
1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
2. Select [COPY] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be
copied in the hospital list.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-101
MU-102
4. Enter the IP address of the FTP server being used at the site in the “FTP-SERV. 5. Input “RU NAME” and “RU IP ADDR”, and click on [SET].
IP ADDR” field, and click on [SET]. Or select an existing site name from the pull-
down menu, and click on [SET].
l To input the IP address of a new FTP server:
6. When a linac cassette is used in the user’s site, select “USE”. Or select “NOT
USE” if the linac cassette is not used. Then click on [SET].
l To select the IP address of an existing site name:
→ The copied RU is added to the hospital list.
u NOTES u
- If the existing site name is not selected in the procedure 2, the IP address of that FTP
server is not displayed in the pull-down menu. If the existing site name has not been
selected, make a new entry of the IP address of the FTP server.
- Use one-byte numerical characters to enter the IP address. If two-byte characters are
used, the input characters will be garbled.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-102
MU-103
6.7 RENAME 3. Input the name of the RU to be changed, and click on [SET].
6.7.1 Function
Used to change the name of the RU registered in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the → The RU name is changed.
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
6.7.2 Procedures
1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
2. Select [RENAME] from the menu which appears by right-clicking on the RU to be
renamed in the hospital list.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-103
MU-104
6.8 GET VERSION 6.8.2 Procedures
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
6.8.1 Function {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
Used to identify the version of the RU software of the RU registered in the hospital list by 2. Select [GET VERSION] from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the RU
whose software version is to be identified in the hospital list.
accessing the FTP server from the client PC while connected with the network in the site.
The identified version of the RU software is displayed in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
→ The RU software version number then appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-104
MU-105
6.9 MUTL 3. Click on [MUTL].
6.9.1 Function
Used to start up the MUTL of the RU service utility. The MUTL serves to diagnose and adjust
the RU, such as board checks and mechanical checks. Although the same commands as
those of the CL appear when the MUTL is started up from the client PC, some of them cannot
be executed.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
6.9.2 Procedures
Refer to “7. MUTL (maintenance utility) functions” for functions of the respective MUTL
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings. commands and the detailed procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} {MU:7._MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions}
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-105
MU-106
6.10 PING 4. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
6.10.1 Function
Executes the PING command for the RU or the FTP server selected in the hospital list.
Clicking on [PING], the “command prompt” window appears, where you can check whether
the network connection from the client PC to the RU or the FTP server is normal. When
the network connection is determined to be normal as the result of the PING command, the
message of the result OK appears on the “command prompt” window.
u NOTE u REFERENCE
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the "Lost = (0% loss)" means that there is no problem as a result of executing the PING
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network command. If other than "(0% loss)", it is a sign that there was some problem.
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
6.10.2 Procedures | Ping statistics for 172.16.1.10: |
| Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
l [NO GOOD indication]
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification} Other than above (the IP address is the IP address of the RU selected).
2. Select the RU or FTP server in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
3. Click on [PING].
→ The “command prompt” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-106
MU-107
6.11 MON l Status
Used to display either the OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF or READ status.
l Other information
6.11.1 Function
isplays the barcode information when the barcode is read.
Used to display the status when the sensor of the I/O of the RU (sensors or the like) changes l Status changed time
its status.
Displays the time when the I/O status changes.
The barcode information is displayed if read, as well as the status of OPEN or CLOSE.
The status changes for the sensors, switches, and BCRs (barcode readers) are displayed, REFERENCE
although ON or OFF is not displayed for the motors. The text displayed on the Monitor window is selectable by dragging the mouse.
The text selected may be copied, cut, pasted, or deleted.
If the display is too crowded to see well, you may delete unnecessary portions of text.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-107
MU-108
l I/O name 6.11.2 Procedures
The I/O name is displayed.
Symbol Name 1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
SA1 Cassette IN sensor {MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
SA2 Cassette hold sensor 2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
SA3 Debris fall prevention shutter sensor
SA4 IP dropping sensor
SA5 IP Suction sensor
SA6 Suction arm HP sensor
SA7 Cassette cover opening mechanism HP sensor
SA8 Cassette cover closing mechanism HP sensor
SA9 "15x30 cassette" identifying sensor
SA10 Cassette IP holding sensor
SA11 Cassette ejection sensor
SA12 Cassette cover CLOSE position sensor
SA14 Cassette insertion error sensor
SA15 Large cassette size sensor
SA16 Inch/metric sensor
SC1 Side-positioning grip HP sensor
SC2 Side-positioning grip release position sensor
SC3 IP sensor 1
SC6 IP side-positioning HP sensor
SC7 Side-positioning reference block HP sensor
SC8 Side-positioning latch position sensor
SC9 "15x31/24x30 IP width" identifying sensor
SC10 Side-positioning latch stroke sensor
SG1 IP sensor 2
SZ1 IP leading-edge sensor
SZ2 Driven-side grip roller release HP sensor
SZ3 Driving-side grip roller release HP sensor
SZ5 Dust removal HP sensor
BCRC1 Barcode reader
LDSN1, LDSN2, Erasure lamp
LDSN3, LDSN4, LDSN5
24TSW Safety thermostat (lamp)
* The SZ1 (IP leading edge sensor) status changes will not be displayed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-108
MU-109
3. Click on [MON].
→ The “REAL TIME MONITOR” window appears.
4. Click on [START].
→ When the RU is operated under this condition, display items are added whenever I/O
has changed.
REFERENCES
- When the power of the RU is turned OFF, the monitor function is disabled. However, the
items displayed within the Monitor window are left unchanged.
- When you click on [STOP], the monitor temporarily stops working. Click on [START] to
resume the monitor function. The status change of the I/O of the RU since [STOP] is
clicked until [START] is clicked is not displayed.
- To reset (erase) the information appearing on the window, close the monitor window,
and then open the monitor window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-109
MU-110
6.12 FTP
6.12.1 Function
Used to check the network with the RU selected in the hospital list, and verify that the FTP
server in the CL is operating.
Clicking on [FTP], you can check whether or not the network connection to the RU and the
FTP server of the CL are normal.
If the network connection and the FTP server are determined to be normal as the result of the
FTP execution, the message indicating the result of execution OK appears on two windows.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
6.12.2 Procedures {Troubleshooting}
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
4. Make sure that the GOOD indication appears, and click on .
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
3. Click on [FTP].
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
→ Two windows appear.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-110
MU-111
6.13 VERSION UP 6.13.2 Procedures
Refer to Checks, replacement and adjustment of parts, “13.2 Updating the Software from the
CAUTION Client PC”, for details of the version update from the client PC.
{MC:13.2_Updating the Software from the Client PC}
Never turn OFF the RU or the client PC during version-update. Otherwise, the
contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, resulting in the RU unable to boot up.
6.13.1 Function
Used to execute RU software version updates.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
l Recognizing the device type to be updated in version
The RU with the IP address described in the “RU IP ADDR” field is accessed before the
installation is started, to automatically recognize the type of the RU. CLIENT PC-TOOL
reads the settings of the DIP switches mounted on the CPU23B board of the RU to identify
the type.
u NOTE u
If the CPU23B board has been replaced, check to make sure that the settings of the DIP
switches mounted on the CPU23B board are correct.
If the DIP switch settings are wrong, improper RU software is updated in version, resulting in
the RU unable to boot up.
Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “11.2.4 Replacing the CPU23B
Board” for the details of the DIP switch settings of the CPU23B board.
{MC:11.2.4_Replacing the CPU23B Board}
l Selection of software version
A list of version-updatable ones of the software packages included in the RU-APL CD is
displayed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-111
MU-112
6.14 EDIT HISTORY 6.14.2 Procedures
u NOTE u
6.14.1 Function The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT HITTORY] is the information
stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
Used to view the history information (such as the number of IP’s processed by the RU and
connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL
lighting time of the erasure lamp) of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC. The
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the history information.
information can be reset when units are replaced. The following five kinds of information are
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
displayed and may be edited.
- USE
- IP 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
- BARCODE {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- LASER
- LAMP
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
u NOTES u
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT HITTORY] is the information
stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-
TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the history information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the history information
while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in
the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-112
MU-113
3. Click on [EDIT HISTORY]. 5. Click on [SET].
u NOTE u
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the history
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
4. Check or change the contents displayed on the screen. PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
Refer to the detailed description of each item for the details of the contents appearing on
the screen.
{MU:4.12.3_Details of USE}
{MU:4.12.4_Details of IP}
{MU:4.12.5_Details of BARCODE}
{MU:4.12.6_Details of LASER}
{MU:4.12.7_Details of LAMP}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-113
MU-114
6.15 EDIT CONFIGURATION 6.15.2 Procedures
u NOTE u
6.15.1 Function The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CONFIGURATION] is the
information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified
Used to set the configuration information for the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC.
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT
However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in the
PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
Machine Maintenance Utility cannot be set.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
u NOTES u
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check 1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the {MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} 2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CONFIGURATION] is the
information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the
CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-114
MU-115
3. Click on [EDIT CONFIGURATION]. 5. Click on [SET].
u NOTE u
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
4. Set the respective CONFIGURATION items.
REFERENCE
Refer to “4.13 EDIT CONFIGURAIOTN” for the details of the CONFIGURATION items.
{MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-115
MU-116
6.16 EDIT CL NAME 6.16.2 Editing/Adding the CL as Image Transfer Destination
l Overview
6.16.1 Function Edit and/or add the CL as an image transfer destination of the RU. Up to 32 CL's may be
registered as image transfer destinations.
Used to edit/add the CL as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master CL's.
This command can be set only when “HOSPITAL” is selected in “SCREEN TYPE” setting at
the time of installation or the update in version.
u NOTES u
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information
stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-
TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-116
MU-117
l Procedures for editing/adding the CL as image transfer destination 4. Click on [MODIFY] to edit, or [NEW] to add.
u NOTE u l To edit:
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information
stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE} l To add:
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
→ The window for prompting the input of the “CL IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”
appears.
u NOTE u
3. Click on [CL NAME].
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-117
MU-118
5. Enter "CL IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME", and click on [SET]. 6.16.3 Editing the List of Master CL's
u NOTE u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the CL to be connected with the RU. l Overview
Edit the list of master CL's. Of the CL registered as image transfer destinations, the CL
registered in the "MASTER CL" field is switchable as the master CL. Up to four CL may be
registered in the "MASTER CL" field.
When switched to the master CL, "CL NAME" of the CL registered is displayed on the LCD
screen of RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-118
MU-119
l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's 4. Select a CL to be added, and add it to the list of master CL's.
u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [EDIT CL NAME] is the information
stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified in the RU,
connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL
to the ON-LINE mode, and download the configuration information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
u NOTE u
To write the specified information in the flash ROM of the RU, upload the configuration
3. Click on [EDIT CL NAME].
information while the client PC is connected with the network in the site and the CLIENT
PC-TOOL is in the ON-LINE mode.
{MU:6.21_UPLOAD}
6.16.4 Switching the Master CL
Switch the master CL.
u NOTE u
Do not switch the master CL, except in case of emergency or machine trouble. If the master
CL is switched, data that is necessary for the user, such as "ERROR LOG" and "HISTORY
LOG", will be lost.
For the procedures for switching the master CL, see "Appendix 1. Setting the Master CL" of
the Installation volume.
{IN: Appendix 1._Setting the Master CL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-119
MU-120
6.17 I/O TRACE EXPERT Item name Function
The file that has been set in the "Pass" text box is
1 "FILE OPEN" button
displayed on the Timing Chart screen.
6.17.1 Function
The path of IOT.LOG to be displayed as the timing
Used to view the I/O trace data of the RU stored in the C drive of the client PC in the form of 2 "Pass" text box
chart is entered.
a timing chart. Note that, however, only the I/O trace data can be displayed.
The display scale for the time base (horizontal
3 "Scale" button
axis) is changed.
4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed.
The timing chart is displayed. With the scroll bar
5 Chart display area available, the display range may be moved by
manipulating the scroll bar.
By placing the mouse pointer in the chart area and
pressing the left or right button of the mouse, the
following values are displayed in the A, B, and A-B
fields.
- A: Time elapsed from power ON to the position
6 "Measure Point (Unit: msec)" area pointed by the left mouse button.
-B : Time elapsed from power ON to the position
pointed by the right mouse button.
- A-B: Time difference between positions A and B.
When the "CLEAR" button is clicked, the values in
the A, B, and A-B fields are cleared.
u NOTES u
- This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode. Check
to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode before taking the
procedures.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
- The information to be displayed or edited by executing [I/O TRACE EXPERT] is the
information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the
CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the TRACE LOGS information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-120
MU-121
6.17.2 Procedures 3. Click on [I/O TRACE EXPERT].
u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [I/O TRACE EXPERT] is the
information stored in the C drive of the client PC. To acquire the latest information specified
in the RU, connect the client PC with the network in the user’s site, change over the CLIENT
PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE mode, and download the TRACE LOGS information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-121
MU-122
6.18 ERROR DB Item name Function
1 “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected.
6.18.1 Function 2 “FATAL" button Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are displayed.
Of the error log files, only WARNING errors are
Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log data of 3 “WARNING” button
displayed.
the RU, stored in the C drive of the client PC. You can append notes to error messages, or
view the detailed information or analysis flows. Both “FATAL and “WARNING” errors windows are
4 “BOTH” button
displayed.
5 “CLEAR” button The error log of the FTP server is cleared.
The latest error log data is copied from the CPU23B
6 “UPDATE” button
board of the RU to the FTP server of the CL.
The contents of the error log file selected are
7 Error message list box
displayed.
The error code selected (highlighted) in the error
8 “Error Code” text box
message list box is displayed.
The error name selected (highlighted) in the error
9 “Error Name” text box
message list box is displayed.
The occurrence condition of the error message
10 “Meaning” text box selected (highlighted) in the error message list box is
displayed.
The detail information selected (highlighted) in the
11 “Details Info.” Button
error message list box is displayed.
The analysis flow for the error message selected
12 “Analysis Flow” button (highlighted) in the error message list box is
displayed.
u NOTE u A memo may be attached to the error message
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [ERROR DB] is the information stored 13 “Memo.” text box (highlighted) in the error message list box.
in the C drive of the client PC. To display the latest information stored in the RU, connect the Up to seven memos may be entered.
client PC with the network in the site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE The name of the person (author) who entered text in
mode, and click on [UPDATE] or download the error log information. 14 “Author” text box
the “Memo.” text box is entered.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
The contents of “Memo.” and “Author” are saved.
15 “SAVE” button To delete them, erase them by use of the Delete key
and press the [SAVE] button again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-122
MU-123
6.18.2 Procedures 3. Click on [ERROR DB].
u NOTE u
The information to be displayed or edited by executing [ERROR DB] is the information stored
in the C drive of the client PC. To display the latest information stored in the RU, connect the
client PC with the network in the site, change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL to the ON-LINE
mode, and click on [UPDATE] or download the error log information.
{MU:6.22_DOWNLOAD}
1. Check to make sure that the CLIENT PC-TOOL is in the OFF-LINE mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-123
MU-124
6.19 READ 6.19.2 Procedures
1. Select the RU in the hospital list.
6.19.1 Function
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from a storage media
(USB memory stick or the like) to the C drive of the client PC. The items which can be
copied by means of the READ command include:
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data.
l "HISTORY LOG"
Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time). 2. Select the items to be read from the pull-down menu of “READ”.
l "SCN ALL DATA"
Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"
Copies optical data of the scanner data.
3. Click on [EXECUTE].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-124
MU-125
4. Select a location of the data to be read. 6. Again verify the location to be read, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When data is to be read from a storage media (USB memory stick or the like), be sure
to set the storage media which contains the data to be read in the client PC, before
selecting the location.
7. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When the data is read from the storage media (USB memory stick or the like), be sure
to remove the storage media after clicking on [OK].
5. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-125
MU-126
6.20 WRITE 6.20.2 Procedures
1. Select the RU in the hospital list.
6.20.1 Function
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from the C drive of the
client PC to a storage media (USB memory stick or the like). The items which can be copied
by means of the WRITE command include:
l "ERROR LOG"
Copies the error log data.
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data. 2. Select the items to be written from the pull-down menu of “WRITE”.
l "TRACE LOGS"
Copies the trace log data (design analysis information).
l "HISTORY LOG"
Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time).
l "LOG ALL"
Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"
Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data. 3. Click on [EXECUTE].
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"
Copies optical data of the scanner data.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-126
MU-127
4. Select a location where the data is to be written. 6. Again verify the location to write, and click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When data is to be written into a storage media (USB memory stick or the like), be sure
to set the storage media in the client PC, before selecting the location.
7. Click on [OK].
u NOTE u
When the data is written from the storage media (USB memory stick or the like), be sure
to remove the storage media after clicking on [OK].
5. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-127
MU-128
6.21 UPLOAD 6.21.2 Procedures
6.21.1 Function CAUTION
The LED panel of the RU lights up while the flash ROM of the RU is being updated.
Used to copy the configuration information and machine specific data from the C drive of the Never turn OFF the RU power for the while.
client PC to the flash ROM of the RU. The items which can be uploaded include: If the RU power is turned OFF, the contents of the flash ROM are corrupted, and the
RU will no longer boot up.
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data.
1. Select the RU in the hospital list.
l "HISTORY LOG"
Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time).
l "SCN ALL DATA"
Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"
Copies optical data of the scanner data. 2. Select the item to be uploaded from the pull-down menu of “UPLOAD”.
REFERENCE
The contents copied into the FLASH ROM become effective by turning OFF the RU power
and then turning it ON.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-128
MU-129
3. Click on [EXECUTE]. 6.21.3 Errors that may Occur during UPLOAD and their Probable
Causes
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
the RU, the following error message appears.
In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then
turning it ON.
→ Uploading starts, and the following dialogue boxes appear on the screen of the client
PC.
4. Click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-129
MU-130
6.22 DOWNLOAD 6.22.2 Procedures
1. Select the RU in the hospital list.
6.22.1 Function
Used to copy the configuration information, error log data or the like from the flash ROM of
the RU to the client PC. The items which can be downloaded include:
l "ERROR LOG"
Copies the error log data.
l "CONFIGURATION"
Copies the configuration data.
l "TRACE LOGS" 2. Select the item to be downloaded from the pull-down menu of “DOWNLOAD”.
Copies the trace log data (design analysis information).
l "HISTORY LOG"
Copies the history data (processing counter and erasure lamp lighting time).
l "LOG ALL"
Copies the whole “ERROR LOG”, “TRACE LOGS” and “HISTORY LOG” at a time.
l "SCN ALL DATA"
Copies the whole of “SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA” and “SCN OPTICAL DATA” at a time.
l "SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA"
Copies light-collecting data of the scanner data.
l "SCN OPTICAL DATA"
Copies optical data of the scanner data.
u NOTE u
This command is available when the CLIENT PC-TOOL is connected with the network in the
site and is in the ON-LINE mode. Connect with the network in the site and make network
settings before taking the procedures.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-130
MU-131
3. Click on [EXECUTE]. 6.22.3 Errors that may Occur during DOWNLOAD and their
Probable Causes
If the RU has not been powered ON or if no network connection has been established with
the RU, the following error message appears.
In this case, verify the network connection, before turning OFF the RU power and then
turning it ON.
→ Downloading starts, and the following dialogue boxes appear on the screen of the
client PC.
4. Click on [OK].
REFERENCE
Change over the CLEINT PC-TOOL to the OFF-LINE mode to execute respective
commands, when the downloaded information is to be edited or viewed. Refer to “5.6
ON-LINE and OFF-LINE” for the detailed procedures of changing over to the OFF-LINE
mode.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-131
MU-132
6.23 CDPath 2. Enter the path of the folder where RU-APL CD is completely copied.
l When the path is to be directly entered in the text box, go to the
6.23.1 Function procedure 5.
When an RU is to be registered in the hospital list or the RU software is to be updated in
version, the necessary data is usually acquired from the RU-APL CD. If a folder in which
the complete RU-APL CD data is copied is present on the hard disk of the client PC, you
can acquire the necessary data from the hard disk without the RU-APL CD by specifying the
folder path.
u NOTES u
- Completely copy all of the data into a single folder when the RU-APL CD data is to be l To select the path in a GUI manner just like the Explorer, click on […] and
copied. You cannot register an RU in the hospital list or update the RU software in version proceed to the next procedure.
with a folder containing a partial copy of the data.
- Set the “CDPath” only when necessary. If the “CDPath” is set, you cannot register an RU in
the hospital list or version-update the RU software from the RU-APL CD even if the RU-APL
CD is inserted into the client PC. Cancel the setting when not necessary.
6.23.2 Procedures for Setting "CDPath" → The window for selecting the folder appears.
The procedures for copying the complete CD contents to the “Copy CD-R” folder of the C 3. Double-click on the folder where RU-APL CD is completely copied.
drive are described as an example.
1. Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-132
MU-133
4. Click on [OK]. 6.23.3 Procedures for Canceling "CDPath"
1. Select “CDPath” from the [Configuration (C)] menu.
→ The path is displayed in the text box.
5. Click on [SET].
→ The “CD PATH SETTING” window appears.
2. Click on [CLEAR].
→ The path in the text box is cleared, and the “CDPath” setting is canceled.
3. Click on [SET].
→ The "CDPath" setting is canceled.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-133
MU-134
6.23.4 Verifying the "CDPath" Setting
1. Choose "CDPath" from the "Configuration(C)" menu.
→ The "CD PATH SETTING" window opens.
2. Verify that the CD path is set.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-134
MU-135
6.24 Export 2. Select the location to which the data is exported.
6.24.1 Function
Used to copy the tree information registered in the hospital list, and folders of the site, FTP
server and RU stored in the C drive of the client PC to the hard disk of the client PC or to an
external recording medium.
u NOTES u
- The data to be copied by means of [Export] is too large to be stored in a storage media
with a small recording capacity. Specify the hard disk with a sufficient empty space or a
recording medium with a large capacity as the destination of the data to be copied.
- Upon execution of [Export], a “SERV” folder is created in the specified storage region. Do
not change the folder name and the stored contents of the created “SERV” folder.
6.24.2 Procedures
1. Select “Export” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
3. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK].
4. Again verify the location for export, and click on [OK].
→ The “EXPORT” window appears.
→ The data is stored in the location specified in the procedure 2.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-135
MU-136
6.25 Import 2. Select the location to which the data is to be imported.
6.25.1 Function
Used to read the data stored by means of [Export], display the data in the tree of the hospital
list, and store it in the C drive of the client PC.
u NOTE u
If data with the site name same as that registered in the hospital list is to be read, the
following error message appears and [Import] is interrupted.
To read the data having the site name same as that registered in the hospital list, delete the
site having the same name registered in the hospital list, before re-trying [Export].
3. Check to make sure that the selected location is displayed, and then click on [OK].
6.25.2 Procedures
1. Select “Import” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
4. Again verify the location for import, and click on [OK].
→ The imported contents are reflected in the hospital list.
→ The “IMPORT” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-136
MU-137
6.26 OnLine 6.26.2 Procedures
1. Select “OnLine” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
6.26.1 Function
Used to change over the CLIENT PC-TOOL between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes.
The available commands differ between the OFF-LINE and ON-LINE modes.
l ON-LINE mode
A check mark appears at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ A check mark disappears from the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu,
setting the CLIENT-PC TOOL in the OFF-LINE mode.
l OFF-LINE mode
A check mark does not appear at the head of “OnLine” in the “Configuration (C)” menu.
Refer to “5.6 ON-LINE and OFF-LINE” for the details of the ON-LINE and OFF-LINE modes.
{MU:5.6_ON-LINE and OFF-LINE}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-137
MU-138
6.27 Network
6.27.1 Function
Upon executing the “Network” command, the “Network Connection” window of Windows
appears. This command is used to connect the client PC with the network at the user’s site
and make the network settings.
6.27.2 Procedures
1. Select “Network” from the “Configuration (C)” menu.
→ The “Network Connection” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-138
MU-139
6.28 Starting and Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL u NOTE u
If your click of [START] opens the following window without starting CLIENT PC-TOOL,
the version of CLIENT PC-TOOL stored on the RU-APL CD is later than the version of
6.28.1 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from the CD (Setup PC-TOOL) CLIENT PC-TOOL installed on the client PC.
1. Insert the RU-APL CD into the PC.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens.
2. Click [START].
→ CLIENT PC-TOOL starts up.
- To update CLIENT PC-TOOL, click [BACK] and then perform the version update
procedure set forth under "5.9 Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL."
{MU:5.9_Updating CLIENT PC-TOOL}
- If you do not intend to update CLIENT PC-TOOL on the spot, click [CONTINUE].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-139
MU-140
6.28.2 Starting CLIENT PC-TOOL from a Client PC Window 6.28.3 Exiting CLIENT PC-TOOL
1. Choose "Run..." from Windows' Start menu. 1. Click on in the upper right corner of the main window of CLIENT PC-TOOL.
→ The "Run" window opens.
2. Shut down the CL.
3. Turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. Enter "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" and then
click [OK].
→ CLIENT PC-TOOL starts up.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-140
MU-141
7. MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions A1
The MUTL, which offers a utility used by service engineers, is operated by starting up the {MU:7.3[3]_Software Check}
MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL on the CL or from the CLIENT PC-TOOL on the client PC.
{MU:7.3[3-1]_Ver. Display (FLASH)}
CAUTION {MU:7.3[3-2]_Ver. Display (FTP SERV)}
After the MUTL is used, the FCR-MB 201 cannot read normally. Be sure to turn OFF
and back ON the power of the FCR-MB 201 at the end. {MU:7.3[3-3]_MAC Address Display}
{MU:7.3[4]_Virtual Image Check}
7.1 Tree of MUTL {MU:7.3[4-1]_Virtual Image Test}
MUTL {MU:7.3[4-1-1]_LED Virtual Read}
{MU:7.3[1]_Conveyance Check} {MU:7.3[4-1-2]_PMT Virtual Read}
{MU:7.3[1-1]_Conveyance Setting} {MU:7.3[4-1-3]_SCN Board Virtual Read}
{MU:7.3[1-2]_Processing Mode Setting}
{MU:7.3[5]_Scanner Check}
{MU:7.3[1-3]_Number of Conveyance Setting}
{MU:7.3[5-1]_Diagnostic}
{MU:7.3[2]_Board Check} {MU:7.3[5-2]_Polygon Mortor}
{MU:7.3[2-1]_All Board} {MU:7.3[5-3]_Laser}
{MU:7.3[2-2]_CPU Board} {MU:7.3[5-4]_HV Diagnostic}
{MU:7.3[2-3]_SCN Board} {MU:7.3[5-4-1]_HV Setting/Diagnostic}
{MU:7.3[2-4]_SNS/DRV-A Board} {MU:7.3[5-5]_Format Adjustment}
{MU:7.3[2-5]_SNS/DRV-B Board}
{MU:7.3[5-5-1]_Manual Adjustment (FREQ)}
{MU:7.3[2-6]_ERS Board}
{MU:7.3[5-5-2]_Manual Adjustment (Pixel)}
{MU:7.3[2-7]_PNL Board}
{MU:7.3[5-5-3]_Default Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:7.3[2-8]_CPU Board Setting Display}
{MU:7.3[5-5-4]_Default Setting (Pixel)}
{MU:7.3[2-9]_IP Sensor Check}
{MU:7.3[5-5-5]_Optic Setting (FREQ)}
{MU:7.3[5-5-6]_Optic Setting (Pixel)}
A1
A2 B1
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-141
MU-142
A2 B1 A3 B2
{MU:7.3[5-6]_Correction} {MU:7.3[6-2]_IP Removal Unit 2}
{MU:7.3[5-6-1]_Shading/Sensitivity Correction} {MU:7.3[6-2-1]_Pump}
{MU:7.3[5-6-2]_Shading Speed Correction} {MU:7.3[6-2-2]_Valve 1 (SVA1)}
{MU:7.3[5-6-3]_Sensitivity Correction} {MU:7.3[6-2-3]_Valve 2 (SVA2)}
{MU:7.3[5-6-4]_Sensitivity S-Value Correction} {MU:7.3[6-2-4]_Solenoid}
{MU:7.3[5-7]_Trouble Shooting} {MU:7.3[6-2-5]_Feed Conveyance (MA4/MC1)}
{MU:7.3[5-7-1]_Shading Correction} {MU:7.3[6-2-6]_Erasure Conveyance (MA4/MC1)}
{MU:7.3[5-8]_HV ON/OFF} {MU:7.3[6-3]_Side-Positioning Conveyor}
{MU:7.3[5-9]_S Value} {MU:7.3[6-3-1]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning HP}
{MU:7.3[5-9-1]_S value now} {MU:7.3[6-3-2]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Hook HP}
{MU:7.3[5-9-2]_S value calculate} {MU:7.3[6-3-3]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Base Pin HP}
{MU:7.3[5-9-3]_PMT/LightGuide change: LED initialize} {MU:7.3[6-3-4]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Grip HP}
{MU:7.3[6]_Mechanical Check} {MU:7.3[6-3-5]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Size Selection}
{MU:7.3[6-1]_IP Removal Unit 1} {MU:7.3[6-3-6]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Operation}
{MU:7.3[6-1-1]_Removal Mechanism: Removal HP} {MU:7.3[6-3-7]_Barcode-Reader: Barcode-Reader On}
{MU:7.3[6-1-2]_Removal Mechanism: Removal Diagnostic} {MU:7.3[6-3-8]_Barcode-Reader: Show Barcode}
{MU:7.3[6-1-3]_Open Lid Mechanism: Open Lid HP} {MU:7.3[6-3-9]_Post-Conveyance (FFM/MC1)}
{MU:7.3[6-1-4]_Open Lid Mechanism: Open Lid Diagnostic} A4 B3
{MU:7.3[6-1-5]_Close Lid Mechanism: Close Lid HP}
{MU:7.3[6-1-6]_Close Lid Mechanism: Close Lid Diagnostic}
A3 B2
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-142
MU-143
A4 B3
{MU:7.3[6-4]_Sub Scanning}
{MU:7.3[6-4-1]_Sub-Scanning Grip : Sub-Scanning Grip HP}
{MU:7.3[6-4-2]_Dust Removal: Dust Removal HP}
{MU:7.3[6-4-3]_Dust Removal: Dust Removal Operation}
{MU:7.3[6-4-4]_Conveyance Motor: Conveyance Motor Speed Selection}
{MU:7.3[6-4-5]_Conveyance Motor : Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive}
{MU:7.3[6-4-6]_FAN (G1) Diagnostic}
{MU:7.3[7]_For Design}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-143
MU-144
7.2 Starting and Exiting the MUTL 7.2.1 Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL
The MUTL is started by the following two ways:
- To start from the RU PC-TOOL of the CL CAUTION
{MU:7.2.1_Starting up the MUTL from the RU PC-TOOL} Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU.
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
- To start from the CLEINT PC-TOOL in the ON-LINE mode
{MU:7.2.2_Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL}
1. Start the RU PC-TOOL.
Start up the MUTL by either method depending on the conditions of a user’s site for {MU:4.23.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL}
operation.
2. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where "MUTL" is to be started.
u NOTE u
Some commands for virtual image check and scanner check require images to be read and
output on the CL.
Since images cannot be read or output on the client PC, always start up the MUTL from the
RU PC-TOOL of the CL to check the virtual images and the scanner.
REFERENCE
3. Click on [MUTL].
The MUTL has the same menu items to appear either started from the RU PC-TOOL of the
CL or from the CLEINT PC-TOOL of the client PC.
To exit, refer to “7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL”.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
REFERENCE
Clicking on [MUTL], “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel of
the RU. Refer to “4.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the operation panel” for the
details of the “Under Maintenance” indication.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-144
MU-145
4. Click on [OK], and the “MUTL” window appears. 7.2.2 Starting up the MUTL from the CLIENT PC-TOOL
CAUTION
Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU.
If multiple MUTL's are started, the RU software becomes out of control.
1. Connect the client PC with the network in the site, and make the network settings.
{MU:5.4_Client PC Network Setup and Connection Verification}
2. Select the RU in the hospital list.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-145
MU-146
3. Click on [MUTL], and the “MUTL” window appears. 7.2.3 Exiting the MUTL
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the operation that was performed in the MUTL has been completed
before exiting the MUTL.
If the operation that was performed in the MUTL is under way, the operation running on the
RU remains intact even when the MUTL is exited by clicking on .
1. Click on in the upper right corner of the MUTL window.
REFERENCE
Clicking on [MUTL], “Under Maintenance” appears on the top of the operation panel of
u NOTE u
the RU. Refer to “6.2.1 Display of “Under Maintenance” on the operation panel” for the
details of the “Under Maintenance” indication. Turn OFF the RU power and then turn it ON again to convey the IP for reading an image on
{MU:6.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel} the RU or other operations after the MUTL is exited. Otherwise, the conveyance may fail.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-146
MU-147
7.3 Details of MUTL 4. Perform Conveyance Setting.
[1] Conveyance Check
n Function
Automatic conveyance (unattended conveyance) of IP
The following three items are to be specified for conveyance check:
- Setting of automatic conveyance → “Number of conveyance performed” and “number of conveyance setting” appear on
- Setting of processing mode the operation panel of the RU.
- Setting of number of conveyance
n Procedures
The procedures for the conveyance check with the following settings are described as an
example.
- Setting of automatic conveyance: AUTO MODE
- Setting of processing mode: 1-ERASE
- Setting of number of conveyance: Three times
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU.
- When using the RU PC-TOOL of the CL:
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
- When using the CLIENT PC-TOOL of the Client PC:
{MU:6.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
3. Click the [Conveyance Check].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-147
MU-148
5. Insert the cassette. n Procedures for Halting in the Middle of Conveyance
→ Erasure conveyance starts, and the result is displayed on the MUTL. 1. Set to halt the conveyance.
l GOOD indication
2. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
l NO GOOD indication
"RESULT: XXXX (XXXX: error code)" is displayed. n Procedures for Exiting Conveyance Check
u NOTE u 1. Select [ROUTINE] for Conveyance Setting.
A four-digit number is displayed as an error code.
Perform the troubleshooting procedure with “1” added to the head of the displayed error CAUTION
code. Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting" back to
---Example--- "ROUTINE" again.
When the displayed error code is “0293”:
→ Perform the troubleshooting procedures for the error of “10293”.
2. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
CAUTION
Once Conveyance Check is completed, be sure to set "Conveyance Setting" back to
"ROUTINE" again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-148
MU-149
[1-1] Conveyance Setting
l AUTO MODE
The conveyance is repeated with the processing mode and number of IP conveyance that
have been set.
It is used for checking the conveyance.
l ROUTINE
The conveyance is performed with the processing mode that has been set.
When the number of IP conveyance is set to greater than 1, the conveyance is performed
again as the cassette is set again once the IP returns to the cassette.
It should be noted that when the mode is changed to "ROUTINE" while the conveyance is
repeated in "AUTO MODE", "AUTO MODE" may be canceled.
[1-2] Processing Mode Setting
l READ: Read
Performs a normal read operation.
This menu should not be used for servicing purposes.
l 1-ERASE: Primary Erasure
IP reading is performed to detect the dose of the IP, and IP erasure is performed according to
the detected dose.
Because IP reading is intended to detect the dose, image output is not generated.
l 2-ERASE: Secondary Erasure
Conveyance is performed on the same conveyance path as for IP reading, but image reading
is not done.
This menu should be used when you only want to make mechanical checks on the IP
conveyance.
[1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting
The number of conveyance may be set in a range from 1 to 99999.
To halt the conveyance while the IP is conveyed with the number of conveyance set to
greater than 1, set "0 (zero)" to the number of conveyance.
When the number of conveyance is set, "number set" and "number conveyed" are displayed
on the operation panel of the RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-149
MU-150
[2] Board Check [2-1] All Board
u NOTE u n Function
Once the board check is initiated, the ongoing process cannot be interrupted. Even when the
The entire diagnoses for boards of the electrical subsystems are repeated by the specified
MUTL is exited, the board check running on the RU remains intact.
number of times.
To interrupt the board check, turn OFF the power of the RU.
The boards to be diagnosed include:
- CPU23B Board - SCN Board
Perform self-diagnostics on each board, and display the result of the diagnostics.
- SND23A Board - SND23B Board
The board check provides diagnostic checkout of the following 9 items: - ERS23A Board - PNL Board
- All Board
- CPU23B Board REFERENCE
- SCN Board If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is set as “1”,
- SND23A Board the following messages appear in the MUTL.
- SND23B Board
- ERS23A Board
- PNL Board
- CPU Board Setting Display
- IP Sensor Check
If a plural number of board checks are specified at a time, each board is sequentially self-
diagnosed by the specified number of times.
n Procedures
Refer to the Troubleshooting “18.2.1 Testing All Boards” for the detailed procedures to check
all boards.
{MT:18.2.1_Testing All Boards}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-150
MU-151
[2-2] CPU Board [2-3] SCN Board
n Function n Function
The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified. The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified.
- SDRAM read/write test - Firmware test
- Flash ROM read/write test - Diagnosis of fan rotation
- Interrupt diagnostics - Interrupt diagnostics
- Register read/write test - Register read/write test
REFERENCE REFERENCE
If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is set as “1”, If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is set as “1”,
the following messages appear in the MUTL. the following messages appear in the MUTL.
n Procedures
Refer to the Troubleshooting “18.2.3 Testing the SCN Board” for the detailed procedures for
SCN/SCT board check.
{MT:18.2.3_Testing the SCN Board}
n Procedures
Refer to the Troubleshooting “18.2.2 Testing the CPU23B Board” for the detailed procedures
for CPU board check.
{MT:18.2.2_Testing the CPU23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-151
MU-152
[2-4] SNS/DRV-A Board [2-5] SNS/DRV-B Board
n Function n Function
The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified. The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified.
- How sensor changes by turning ON/OFF the solenoid - How sensor changes by turning ON/OFF the solenoid
- Communication between the pulse motor and FPMC - Communication between the pulse motor and FPMC
- Interrupt diagnostics - Diagnosis of fan (FANG1) rotation
- Register read/write test - Interrupt diagnostics
REFERENCE - Register read/write test
If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is set as “1”, REFERENCE
the following messages appear in the MUTL. If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is set as “1”,
the following messages appear in the MUTL.
n Procedures
Refer to the Troubleshooting “18.2.4 Testing the SND23A Board” for the detailed procedures n Procedures
for SND-A board check. Refer to the Troubleshooting “18.2.5 Testing the SND23B Board” for the detailed procedures
{MT:18.2.4_Testing the SND23A Board} for SND-B board check.
{MT:18.2.5_Testing the SND23B Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-152
MU-153
[2-6] ERS Board [2-7] PNL Board
n Function n Function
The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified. The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified.
- Lit/unlit erasure lamp - Firmware test
- Firmware test REFERENCE
- Diagnosis of fan rotation
If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is set as “1”,
REFERENCE the following messages appear in the MUTL.
If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is set as “1”,
the following messages appear in the MUTL.
n Procedures
Refer to the Troubleshooting “18.2.7 Testing the PNL Board” for the detailed procedures for
PNL board check.
{MT:18.2.7_Testing the PNL Board}
n Procedures
Refer to the Troubleshooting “18.2.6 Testing the ERS23A Board” for the detailed procedures
for ERS board check.
{MT:18.2.6_Testing the ERS23A Board}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-153
MU-154
[2-8] CPU Board Setting Display [2-9] IP Sensor Check
n Function n Function
Displays the DipSW setting for the CPU23B board. The following sensors provided in the IP conveyance path are diagnosed:
The display content and setup meaning are presented below. - IP dropping sensor
- IP sensor 1
- IP sensor 2
REFERENCE
If the results after the IP sensor check are normal, the following messages appear in the
MUTL.
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [IP sensor check].
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “11.2 CPUS23B Board” for REFERENCE
details of the DIP switch settings. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
{MC:11.2_CPU23B Board} machine.
{Troubleshooting}
3. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Shut down the CL.
5. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-154
MU-155
[3] Software Check [3-2] Ver. Display (FTP SERV)
[3-1] Ver. Display (FLASH) n Function
Used to display the version of the CPU23B board IPL resident in the FTP server.
n Function n Procedures
Used to display the versions of the CPU23B board IPL, the firmware of the PNL board, and
1. Start the MUTL.
the firmware of the SCN board existing on the flash ROM.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
n Procedures 2. Select [Ver. Display (FTP SERV)].
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Ver. Display (FLASH)].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the versions, troubleshoot the
machine.
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the versions, troubleshoot the
machine.
3. Exit the MUTL.
{Troubleshooting} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Shut down the CL.
3. Exit the MUTL.
5. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Shut down the CL.
5. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-155
MU-156
[3-3] MAC Address Display
n Function
Displays the RU’s MAC address.
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [MAC Address Display].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the MAC address, troubleshoot the
machine.
{Troubleshooting}
3. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Shut down the CL.
5. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-156
MU-157
[4] Virtual Image Check n Procedures
u NOTE u
[4-1] Virtual Image Test Always use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL to perform “LED virtual read”.
Image is virtually read, thereby enabling a cause of image abnormality to be located. The procedures for LED virtual read with a dose of 0.1 mR are described as an example.
Generate and output test images with each of the components comprising the scanner unit, 1. Click on [NEXT] on the examination reception window of the CL.
by, for example, generating and outputting image data with the boards, or turning ON the
LED of the PMT board and inputting the resulting light; accordingly, a location that caused a
functional failure can be identified.
[4-1-1] LED Virtual Read
n Function 2. Select [Sensitivity] from the [QC/TEST] menu, and click on [Start Examination].
Cause the blue LED of the PMT board and the LED of the PMT board to illuminate, and input
the resulting light from the light-collecting guide to generate image output.
If there is no problem with the output image, it can be decided that the failure of the scanning
optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality.
3. Click on [IP#].
4. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-157
MU-158
5. Press the [ENTER] key. [4-1-2] PMT Virtual Read
→ The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.
n Function
Generate and output image data with the LOG AMP of the PMT board.
If there is any problem with "LED Virtual Read" but there is no problem with "SCN Board
Virtual Read", the result of "PMT Virtual Read" permits a decision to be made whether the
failure of the scanning optics unit is responsible for the image abnormality.
6. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
7. Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
8. Click on [LED Virtual Read], and select [ON (0.1mR)].
9. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
→ The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
10. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
11. Shut down the CL.
12. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-158
MU-159
n Procedures 5. Press the [ENTER] key.
u NOTE u → The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.
Always use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL to perform “PMT Virtual Read”.
1. Click on [NEXT] on the examination reception window of the CL.
6. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
7. Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU.
2. Select [Sensitivity] from the [QC/TEST] menu, and click on [Start Examination]. {MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
8. Click on [PMT Virtual Read], and select [ON].
3. Click on [IP#].
9. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
→ The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
4. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used. 10. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
11. Shut down the CL.
12. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-159
MU-160
[4-1-3] SCN Board Virtual Read n Procedures
u NOTE u
n Function Always use the MUTL of the RU PC-TOOL to perform “SCN board virtual read”.
Generate image data with the SCN board, and send the resulting image data to the CPU23B
board. 1. Click on [NEXT] on the examination reception window of the CL.
If there is any problem with the output image, it can be decided that the image processing
function of the CPU23B board is faulty.
2. Select [Sensitivity] from the [QC/TEST] menu, and click on [Start Examination].
3. Click on [IP#].
4. Type in the barcode of the cassette to be used.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-160
MU-161
5. Press the [ENTER] key.
→ The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears.
6. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
7. Cancel the “Under Maintenance” indication on the RU.
{MU:4.2.1_Display of “Under Maintenance” on the Operation Panel}
8. Click on [SCN/SCT Board Virtual Read], and select [ON].
9. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered.
→ The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL.
10. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
11. Shut down the CL.
12. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-161
MU-162
[5] Scanner Check [5-2] Polygon Mortor
[5-1] Diagnostic n Function
Turn ON or OFF the polygon.
When it is turned ON, it is checked to see whether the polygon is operating normally a
n Function predetermined time after the polygon is activated.
Perform scanner self-diagnostics on the scanner unit.
n Procedures
REFERENCE
It takes approx. 1 minute to perform initial self diagnosis to complete. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
n Procedures 2. Turn ON the polygon.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Diagnostic].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “THE POLYGON IS TURNED
ON.”, troubleshoot the machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the 3. Turn OFF the polygon.
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
3. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} 4. Exit the MUTL.
4. Shut down the CL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-162
MU-163
[5-3] Laser 3. Turn OFF the laser.
n Function
Turn ON or OFF the laser.
When the laser is turned ON, the polygon is turned ON, and the polygon and laser are
diagnosed.
4. Exit the MUTL.
Either of the following values is displayed on the MUTL. {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
- LDIFINT: Factory-default LD current value 5. Shut down the CL.
- LDIFNOW: Current value at present
- LDIFNOW/LDIFINT: Value to indicate how much the current has dropped, from the factory 6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
default until at present.
n Procedures
CAUTION
While the laser is being turned ON, do not turn OFF the polygon.
If the polygon is turned OFF, the laser is irradiated to a single spot, possibly result in a
machine failure or fire.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Turn ON the laser.
→ The following message appears in the MUTL.
TURNNING ON THE LASER IS IN PROGRESS..
LDIFINT : 300
LDIFNOW : 0
LDIFNOW/LDIFINT : 0
THE LASER IS TURNED ON.
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “THE LASER IS TURNED
ON.”, troubleshoot the machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-163
MU-164
[5-4] HV Diagnostic [5-5] Format Adjustment
When the image is outputted under condition where the machine shipment control data is
[5-4-1] HV Setting/Diagnostic installed, a while blank portion may appear on the film or there may be some non-outputted
portion (image loss). In that case, format adjustment is used for fine adjustment.
Format adjustment is also used when it is necessary to make adjustments between units, as
n Function in cases where the subscanning unit and side-positioning conveyor unit are replaced at the
When the HV voltage is inputted over a range from 250 to 999, the command value outputted same time.
from the SCN board is detected to check that the difference from the input value is held
within +/- 10%. Checks can be performed on the front side and back side, respectively.
u NOTES u
- Before making format adjustment, be sure to turn ON the HV switch. With the HV switch in
n Procedures the OFF position, format adjustment cannot be done.
- When the setting is changed, the result associated with that change is immediately
1. Start the MUTL.
reflected.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} - The result associated with the change becomes ineffective when the machine is rebooted.
2. Select [HV Diagnostic]. Thus, in order to make the setup value effective after reboot or save the setup value, back
up the configuration data.
{MU:4.15_BACKUP}
REFERENCE
3. Input the HV value. When both Manual Adjustment (FREQ) and Manual Adjustment (Pixel) are to be made,
Manual Adjustment (FREQ) should be performed first. If Manual Adjustment (Pixel) is done
first, it may be necessary to perform Manual Adjustment (Pixel) once again, as a result of
Manual Adjustment (FREQ).
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-164
MU-165
[5-5-1] Manual Adjustment (FREQ) [5-5-2] Manual Adjustment (Pixel)
n Function n Function
Make fine adjustment when the output image is enlarged or reduced in the horizontal Make fine adjustment when the output image is offset in the horizontal direction (main scan
direction (main scan direction). direction) (i.e., a white blank portion appears horizontally, or a portion of the image is not
Its adjustable range is from -5% to +5%. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered, the outputted).
image is enlarged, while it is reduced when a positive-quantity (+) value is entered. Its adjustable range is from -999 to 999 pixels. When a negative-quantity (-) value is entered,
The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows. the white blank portion is expanded, while the white blank portion is narrowed when a
positive-quantity (+) value is entered.
The calculation formula for the adjustment value is as follows.
n Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “14.1.1 Main Scan Length
Adjustment” for the detailed procedures for manual adjustment (main scan length).
{MC:14.1.1_Main Scan Length Adjustment}
n Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “14.1.2 Main Scan Position
Adjustment” for the detailed procedures for manual adjustment (main scan length).
{MC:14.1.2_Main Scan Position Adjustment}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-165
MU-166
[5-5-3] Default Setting (FREQ) [5-5-5] Optic Setting (FREQ)
Set the value of the main scan length (FREQ) to its default value. Unavailable menu for this machine.
Input no numerical values.
[5-5-4] Default Setting (Pixel) [5-5-6] Optic Setting (Pixel)
Set the value of the main scan position (Pixel) to its default value. Unavailable menu for this machine.
Input no numerical values.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-166
MU-167
[5-6] Correction [5-6-1] Shading/Sensitivity Correction
Exposure conditions for correction are as follows:
Correction X-ray Dose Tube Center S n Function
Description
procedure tube (mR) voltage value Perform shading/sensitivity correction.
Shading/ Shading correction for IP is done.
u NOTE u
sensitivity W 1 80 200
correction Correction can be performed with IPs irradiated by the tungsten X-ray tube. If irradiated by
the molybdenum X-ray tube, correction will not end normally because it suffers from tube-to-
Shading correction is done for each tube variability.
Shading speed speed, because subscanning motor
W 1 80 -
correction speed varies depending on the reading
mode. u INSTRUCTION u
Sensitivity Sensitivity correction for IP is done. IP reading should be done for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the X-ray
W 1 80 200 irradiation.
correction*
* Item to be used independently
REFERENCE
W: Tungsten X-ray tube
The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output.
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
n Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “15.1 Shading/Sensitivity
Correction” for the detailed procedures of correcting shading/sensitivity.
{MC:15.1_Shading/Sensitivity Correction}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-167
MU-168
[5-6-2] Shading Speed Correction [5-6-3] Sensitivity Correction
n Function n Function
As the subscanning motor speed differs depending on the reading mode, shading correction Used to correct the IP sensitivity.
can be performed for each of the speeds.
u NOTE u
The following two kinds of speed can be corrected:
Correction is possible only with the IP irradiated by the tungsten X-ray tube.
SR and FR
u NOTES u
u INSTRUCTION u
- Correct the shading at each subscanning motor speed. Otherwise, unusual nonuniformity
The X-ray dose required during exposure differs depending on the X-ray tube. Expose the IP
will occur when the IP is read at the speed at which shading correction is not performed.
according to the following conditions.
- Correction should be performed with the IP irradiated by the tungsten X-ray tube.
Tungsten X-ray tube: About 1 mR
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
Depending on the speed at which the correction is performed, film outputs and screen
The indications for the S value are as follows according to the irradiation output.
displays may vary.
For 0.1 mR: The S value is 2000.
For 1 mR: The S value is 200.
For 10 mR: The S value is 20.
n Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “15.3 Sensitivity Correction” for
the detailed procedures of correcting the sensitivity.
{MC:15.3_Sensitivity Correction}
n Procedures
Refer to the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts “15.2 Shading Correction” for the
detailed procedures of correcting the shading speed.
{MC:15.2_Shading Speed Correction}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-168
MU-169
[5-6-4] Sensitivity S-Value Correction 4. Enter the existing S-value and expected S-value.
n Function
Correct the S value indicated on the film.
For example, if the S value is indicated as 195 on the film when the IP exposed at 1 mR is
read, then correction is performed to indicate the S value as 200.
5. Back up the data so adjusted into a storage media (USB memory stick or the like).
{MC:16.3_Backing Up the Scanner Data}
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
7. Shut down the CL.
8. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
n Procedures
Procedures for correcting the indication of 195 to 200 are described as an example.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Correction].
3. Select [Sensitivity S-Value Correction].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-169
MU-170
[5-7] Trouble Shooting [5-8] HV ON/OFF
[5-7-1] Shading Correction n Function
Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch).
The setting changed becomes effective immediately; however, the result updated does not
n Function appear immediately on the operation panel of the RU.
For troubleshooting, set to determine whether to generate image output by use of the If the mode of the RU is changed (from the maintenance mode to routine mode), an error
shading correction data or without use of the shading correction data. message (error code: 11200) appears on the operation panel, and when the error window is
- ON: Generate image output by using the shading correction data. exited, the blinking “HV-OFF” message appears on the top of the operation panel.
- OFF: Generate image output without using the shading correction data.
CAUTION CAUTION
Check to make sure that the cover plate has been put on to shield the inside of the
Normally, be sure to set it to "ON".
housing against light, before turning ON the HV switch. If the HV switch is turned ON
If "OFF" setting is used, the resulting image suffers unusual nonuniformity.
without the inside of the housing shielded against light, the photomultiplier may get
damaged.
REFERENCE
The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON, or
REFERENCES
when IP reading operation is performed once or more.
- This can be set only when the HV switch on the SCN board of the RU is ON.
- The "OFF" setting is canceled when the power of the RU is turned OFF and back ON.
n Procedures
Procedures for setting the shading correction to OFF are described as an example. n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
The procedures of setting the HV switch to OFF are described as an example.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Click on [Trouble Shooting]. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Click on [HV ON/OFF], and select [OFF].
3. Click on [Shading correction], and select [OFF].
3. Exit the MUTL after the maintenance is completed.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Shut down the CL.
4. Exit the MUTL.
5. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-170
MU-171
[5-9] S Value [5-9-2] S value calculate
[5-9-1] S value now n Function
Performs calculations on the X-ray dose to determine the S value that corresponds to the
X-ray dose.
n Function
Displays the initial S value and current S value. n Procedures
Allows you to confirm S value changes.
1. Start the MUTL.
After the S value changes are confirmed, perform the S value verification procedure as
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
needed.
2. Select [S Value].
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [S Value].
3. Enter the X-ray dose value and then click [Set].
REFERENCE
If the X-ray dose value is set to 1, the following message appears in the MUTL window.
3. Select [S value now].
4. Exit the MUTL.
4. Verify the result displayed in the MUTL window.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
5. Verify the current S value. Perform the S value verification procedure as needed.
{MC:18._Confirming the S Value}
6. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
7. Shut down the CL.
8. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-171
MU-172
[5-9-3] PMT/LightGuide change: LED initialize
n Function
Initializes the LED data after PMT board replacement to set the initial value for S value error
detection.
u NOTE u
After the "LED initialize" procedure is performed, be sure to back up "SCN ALL DATA." When
the "LED initialize" procedure is performed, the initial value for S value error detection is set
up in the RU's flash ROM only. When you back up "SCN ALL DATA," the initial value for S
value error detection is saved in the FTP server.
n Procedures
For details on the "LED initialize" procedure, see "8.2.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures" under
"8.2 PMT Board" in the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume.
{MC:8.2.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-172
MU-173
[6] Mechanical Check 3. Select [Removal HP].
CAUTION
When the function of mechanical check is to be used, be sure to follow the procedures
in order. Otherwise, correct operation cannot be made.
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
[6-1] IP Removal Unit 1 machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
[6-1-1] Removal Mechanism: Removal HP
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
n Function
5. Shut down the CL.
Used to drive the suction arm driving motor (MA3) of the cassette set unit to home-position
the suction arm. When the suction arm HP sensor (SA6) is closed, the suction arm is 6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
detected to have moved to the home position.
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 1].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-173
MU-174
[6-1-2] Removal Mechanism: Removal Diagnostic [6-1-3] Open Lid Mechanism: Open Lid HP
n Function n Function
Used to drive the suction arm driving motor (MA3) of the cassette set unit to check the Used to drive the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) of the cassette
operation of the suction arm. set unit to home-position the cassette cover opening mechanism. When the cassette cover
opening mechanism HP sensor (SA7) is closed, the cassette cover opening mechanism is
n Procedures detected to have moved to the home position.
1. Start the MUTL.
n Procedures
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 1].
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 1].
3. Select [Removal Diagnostic].
3. Select [Open Lid HP].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table. REFERENCE
{Troubleshooting} If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
4. Exit the MUTL. {Troubleshooting}
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Exit the MUTL.
5. Shut down the CL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again. 5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-174
MU-175
[6-1-4] Open Lid Mechanism: Open Lid Diagnostic [6-1-5] Close Lid Mechanism: Close Lid HP
n Function n Function
Used to drive the cassette cover opening mechanism driving motor (MA1) of the cassette set Used to drive the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) of the cassette
unit to check the operation of the cassette cover opening mechanism. set unit to home-position the cassette cover closing mechanism. When the cassette cover
closing mechanism HP sensor (SA8) is closed, the cassette cover closing mechanism is
n Procedures detected to have moved to the home position.
1. Start the MUTL.
n Procedures
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 1].
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 1].
3. Select [Open Lid Diagnostic].
3. Select [Close Lid HP].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table. REFERENCE
{Troubleshooting} If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
4. Exit the MUTL. {Troubleshooting}
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Exit the MUTL.
5. Shut down the CL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again. 5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-175
MU-176
[6-1-6] Close Lid Mechanism: Close Lid Diagnostic [6-2] IP Removal Unit 2
n Function [6-2-1] Pump
Used to drive the cassette cover closing mechanism driving motor (MA2) of the cassette set
unit to check the operation of the cassette cover closing mechanism.
n Function
n Procedures Used to drive the IP suction pump (PA1) of the cassette set unit or release its drive, to check
the operation.
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} n Procedures
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 1]. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 2].
3. Select [Close Lid Diagnostic].
3. Set the pump to ON.
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting} REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
4. Exit the MUTL. machine referring to the error code table.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} {Troubleshooting}
5. Shut down the CL.
4. Set the pump to OFF.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Shut down the CL.
7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-176
MU-177
[6-2-2] Valve 1 (SVA1) [6-2-3] Valve 2 (SVA2)
n Function n Function
Used to drive the IP air-leak valve (SVA1) of the cassette set unit or release its drive, to Used to drive the IP suction path changeover valve (SVA2) of the cassette set unit or release
check the operation. its drive, to check the operation.
n Procedures n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL. 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 2]. 2. Select [IP Removal Unit 2].
3. Set the valve 1 to ON. 3. Set the valve 2 to ON.
REFERENCE REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table. machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting} {Troubleshooting}
4. Set the valve 1 to OFF. 4. Set the valve 2 to OFF.
5. Exit the MUTL. 5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Shut down the CL. 6. Shut down the CL.
7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again. 7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-177
MU-178
[6-2-4] Solenoid [6-2-5] Feed Conveyance (MA4/MC1)
n Function n Function
Used to drive the cassette hold pin solenoid (SOLA1) of the cassette set unit or release its Used to drive the IP transport motor (MA4) and the side-positioning IP transport motor (MC1)
drive, to check the operation. in the direction of reading the IP to check the operation.
Setting the solenoid to ON, the hold is canceled, and the cassette hold sensor (SA2) changes
from close to open. n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 2].
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 2].
3. Select [Feed Conveyance (MA4/MC1)].
3. Set the solenoid to ON.
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
REFERENCE machine referring to the error code table.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the {Troubleshooting}
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Set the solenoid to OFF.
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Shut down the CL.
7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-178
MU-179
[6-2-6] Erasure Conveyance (MA4/MC1) [6-3] Side-Positioning Conveyor
n Function [6-3-1] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning HP
Used to drive the IP transport motor (MA4) and the side-positioning IP transport motor (MC1)
in the direction of ejecting the IP to check the operation.
n Function
n Procedures Used to drive the side-positioning conveyor roller grip release motor (MC2) to home-position
the side-positioning grip mechanism. When the side-positioning grip HP sensor is opened,
1. Start the MUTL.
the grip mechanism is detected to have moved to the home position. The grip is released at
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
the home position.
2. Select [IP Removal Unit 2].
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
3. Select [Erasure Conveyance (MA4/MC1)].
3. Select [Side-Positioning HP].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
4. Exit the MUTL.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} machine referring to the error code table.
5. Shut down the CL. {Troubleshooting}
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-179
MU-180
[6-3-2] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Hook HP [6-3-3] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Base Pin HP
n Function n Function
Used to drive the side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) to home-position the Used to select the IP size for self diagnoses.
side-positioning mechanism. When the IP side-positioning HP sensor (SC6) is closed, the
side-positioning mechanism is detected to have moved to the home position. n Procedures
The procedures of setting the IP size to [1824] are described as an example.
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
1. Start the MUTL. {MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
3. Click on [Side-positioning Base Pin HP], and select [1824].
3. Select [Side-Positioning Hook HP].
4. Perform side-positioning self diagnosis.
REFERENCE {MU:7.3[6-3-4]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Grip HP}
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
5. Exit the MUTL.
{Troubleshooting} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Shut down the CL.
4. Exit the MUTL.
7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-180
MU-181
[6-3-4] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Grip HP [6-3-5] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Size Selection
n Function n Function
Used to drive the side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) to check the Used to drive the side-positioning latch mechanism driving motor (MC3) to homo-position
operation of the side-positioning mechanism. the side-positioning latch. The IP side-positioning HP sensor (SC6) is closed at the home
position.
n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
u INSTRUCTION u
Select an IP size when the need arises. 3. Select [Side-Positioning Size Selection].
{MU:7.3[6-3-3]_Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Base Pin HP}
3. Select [Side-Positioning Grip HP].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table. 4. Exit the MUTL.
{Troubleshooting} {MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} 6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-181
MU-182
[6-3-6] Side-Positioning: Side-Positioning Operation [6-3-7] Barcode-Reader: Barcode-Reader On
n Function n Function
Used to drive the side-positioning reference block driving motor (MC4) to home-position the Used to check that the barcode reader (BCRC1) is lit.
side-positioning reference pin (reference block). The side-positioning reference block HP
sensor (SC7) is closed at the home position. n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
3. Select [Barcode-Reader On].
3. Select [Side-Positioning Operation].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
REFERENCE machine referring to the error code table.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the {Troubleshooting}
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting} 4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
5. Shut down the CL. 6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-182
MU-183
[6-3-8] Barcode-Reader: Show Barcode [6-3-9] Post-Conveyance (FFM/MC1)
n Function n Function
Used to display the barcode number that the barcode reader (BCRC1) has just read. Used to drive the subscanning motor (MZ1) and the side-positioning IP transport motor (MC1)
in the direction of reading the IP to check the operation.
n Procedures
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
2. Select [Side-Positioning Conveyor].
3. Select [Show Barcode].
3. Select [Post-Conveyance (FFM/MC1)].
→ The barcode number which has just been read id displayed.
REFERENCE
REFERENCES
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
- If no barcode has just been read, “BARCODE NODATA” appears, and then “RESULT-OK”
machine referring to the error code table.
appears.
- If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the {Troubleshooting}
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting} 4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Exit the MUTL.
5. Shut down the CL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-183
MU-184
[6-4] Sub Scanning [6-4-2] Dust Removal: Dust Removal HP
[6-4-1] Sub-Scanning Grip : Sub-Scanning Grip HP n Function
Used to drive the dust removal motor (MZ3) to home-position the dust removal mechanism.
When the dust removal HP sensor (SZ5) is opened, the dust removal mechanism is detected
n Function to have moved to the home position.
Used to drive the driven/driving grip roller driving motor (MZ2) to home-position the grip
mechanism. n Procedures
n Procedures 1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} 2. Select [Sub Scanning].
2. Select [Sub Scanning].
3. Select [Dust Removal HP].
3. Select [Sub Scanning Grip HP].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
REFERENCE machine referring to the error code table.
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the {Troubleshooting}
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL} 5. Shut down the CL.
5. Shut down the CL. 6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-184
MU-185
[6-4-3] Dust Removal: Dust Removal Operation [6-4-4] Conveyance Motor: Conveyance Motor Speed Selection
n Function n Function
Used to drive the dust removal motor (MZ3) to remove dust. Used to select the conveyance speed when the IP transport motor is driven.
n Procedures CAUTION
1. Start the MUTL. Always stop the subscanning motor (MZ1) before carrying out “Select IP motor
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} conveyance speed”. If the speed is selected with the subscanning motor driven, it
may not work normally.
2. Select [Sub Scanning].
n Procedures
The procedures of setting the speed of the IP transport motor to [FR] are described as an
example.
3. Select [Dust Removal Operation].
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Sub Scanning].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table. 3. Click on [Select IP transport motor speed] and select [FR].
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL. 4. Drive and stop the transport motor.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again. {MU:7.3[6-4-5]_Conveyance Motor : Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive}
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Shut down the CL.
7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-185
MU-186
[6-4-5] Conveyance Motor : Conveyance Motor Stop/Drive 4. Click on [Transport motor stop/drive], and select [STOP].
n Function
Used to drive and stop the subscanning motor (MZ1).
n Procedures
REFERENCE
1. Start the MUTL. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL} machine referring to the error code table.
2. Select [Sub Scanning]. {Troubleshooting}
5. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
6. Shut down the CL.
u INSTRUCTION u
Select the IP transport motor speed when the need arises. 7. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
{MU:7.3[6-4-4]_Conveyance Motor: Conveyance Motor Speed Selection}
3. Click on [Transport motor stop/drive], and select [DRIVE].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-186
MU-187
[6-4-6] FAN (G1) Diagnostic [7] For Design
Commands for design
n Function Not used for servicing.
Used to check operation of the scanner unit cooling fan (FANG1).
n Procedures
1. Start the MUTL.
{MU:7.2_Starting and Exiting the MUTL}
2. Select [Sub Scanning].
3. Click on [FAN (G1) Diagnostic].
REFERENCE
If an error code is displayed on the MUTL instead of the “RESULT-OK”, troubleshoot the
machine referring to the error code table.
{Troubleshooting}
4. Exit the MUTL.
{MU:7.2.3_Exiting the MUTL}
5. Shut down the CL.
6. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual MU-187
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.10.2010 01 New release (FM5646) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Service Parts List (SP)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.10.2010 FM5646
SP-1
How to Use Service Character Significance
Consumable parts or parts
○ For software
The alphabet denotes a difference in the
Recommended quantities of spare
parts
Parts List A that will be replaced at short
intervals.
specifications. Parts differing in the suffix
are not compatible with each other. Version It is recommended as a rough guide to hold
Parts that may become faulty number is omitted in the list. in stock a certain quantity of parts according
B accidentally and have a to the rank (A, B, C, D, E) assigned to the
RANK
relatively high failure rate. PART NAME parts, as follows. For periodically replaced
Parts that have a sufficiently long parts, hold them in stock separately. Adjust
Handling RANK characters (parts C MTBF, but are expected to have
PART NAME represents a general name of
the stock quantity of service parts depending
that are handled in a special a relatively high failure rate. a part.
on the number of working units (N).
manner during parts operation, Parts that have a sufficiently Quantity used in a single system : Q
QTY.
such as management) D long MTBF, but are expected to
become faulty. ○ QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used ○N=1
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty
Parts that are necessary for fault in each unit. Rank A ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.3
R Must be returned. Repairable analysis, or parts that may be Rank C ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.05
Must be returned. E needed in case of unexpected ○ A part whose quantity is suffixed with -S Rank D ＝ 1 ＋ Q × 0.02
Q (We use for Not repairable accidents such as man-induced represents a small part that is shipped in
analysis.) damage. packs of 50. (Even if such a part is ordered ○ 2 ≦ N ≦ 10
Must Not be in quantity of 1, a pack containing 50 pieces Rank A ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
returned.
<The RANK guide> Rank C ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
of that part is supplied.)
(Consumable The Fault RANK characters, Handling RANK Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
T part. Not Not repairable characters, and Export regulation-applicable REMARKS
character are assigned in that order. ○ 11 ≦ N ≦ 300
applicable to
Thus, at least one character or up to three The REMARKS column indicates a unique Rank A ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.3
free-of-charge
warranty.) characters are assigned in the RANK name of a part or relevant information of Rank C ＝ 3 ＋ N × Q × 0.05
without Must Not be column. each part. Rank D ＝ 2 ＋ N × Q × 0.02
Not repairable
R, Q, T returned.
REF.NO. SERIAL NUMBER Precautions to be Observed When
The units may contain different parts Returning Parts for Repair
Export regulation-applicable REF. NO. is a part number indicated in the
Service Parts Exploded Views. For parts depending on their shipment control number. When returning a component for repair,
character(Parts with the following
having different functions, they are clearly SERIAL NUMBER indicates the shipment pack it in the same manner as for the
character are controlled by Export
distinguished in the REMARKS and SERIAL control number to which the relevant parts supplied substitute, using the substitute
regulation.)
NUMBER columns. are applicable. If the SERIAL NUMBER packing materials.
Character Significance column is blank, the parts are applicable to The use of different packing materials or
Parts applicable to export PART NUMBER all the relevant units. The shipment control packing methods may incur damage to
＋
regulations. number is represented by lower five digits packed component during transit.
PART NUMBER is a code number that is
of eight-digit number indicated on the rating
unique to each part. An alphabetic letter at
Fault RANK characters (which indication label.
the rightmost position of the code number
provide reference for determining the has the following meaning. REFER TO
recom-mended stock quantity)
○ For hardware The "REFER TO" column shows reference
All parts are assigned with one of The alphabet denotes the version number sections concerning the part.Clicking the
characters A through E. of a part. If parts have different version reference section in the "REFER TO" column
numbers, they are upward-compatible. jumps to the top page of the reference
section where the related information is in.
014-237-01E
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03 INDEX 10 INDEX 11 INDEX 12
COVER FRAME CASSETTE SET UNIT CABLE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH
TABLE
INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06 INDEX 13 INDEX 14 INDEX 15
ERASURE UNIT SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR SCANNING OPTICS UNIT JIG Other Service Parts
List of Service Parts for
Securing and Wiring
INDEX 07 INDEX 08 INDEX 09
LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT SUB SCANNING UNIT CONTROLLER
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-2
SP-3
01A 1
COVER 1
1
COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 405N3178D 銘板 Label 1 {MC:3.2}
D 2 343N0048 フック Hook 1 {MC:3.2}
D 3 382N1667 テープ Tape 2 {MC:3.2}
D 4 382N1670 テープ Tape 2 {MC:3.2}
E 5 345Y100151 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:3.2}
E 6 356N10768A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.2}
D 7 386N1372 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 {MC:3.2}
E 8 356Y0616A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.2}
D 9 376N0241B メカニカルフィルタ Mechanical Filter 1 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-3
SP-4
01B 2
COVER 2
2
COVER 2 01B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
1 ***
E 2 405N3178D 銘板 Label 1 {MC:3.3}
E 3 345Y100152 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:3.3}
D 4 382N1668 テープ Tape 2 {MC:3.3}
D 5 382N1667 テープ Tape 2 {MC:3.3}
D 6 382N1839 テープ Tape 2 {MC:3.3}
7 ***
8 ***
9 ***
10 ***
11 ***
E 12 345Y0320C 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 {MC:3.4}
D 13 382N1665 テープ Tape 2 {MC:3.4}
D 14 382N1666A テープ Tape 2 {MC:3.4}
E 15 356N10769A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:3.3}
D 16 386N1373 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 {MC:3.3}
E 17 356Y0617A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:3.3}
E 18 356N10761A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.4}
D 19 386N1367 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 {MC:3.4}
E 20 356Y0610A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.4}
21 ***
E 22 405N3178D 銘板 Label 1 {MC:3.4}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-4
SP-5
02A FRAME 1
1 1
FRAME 1 02A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356Y0459 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 2 382N1745B テープ Tape 1 －
D 3 382N100266 テープ Tape 1 －
E 4 356N10253B ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E 5 356Y0460 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E 6 356N10254B ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 7 382N1746A テープ Tape 1 －
D 8 382N1820 テープ Tape 2 －
E 9 356N10570C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E 10 405N102095 銘板 Label 1 －
E 11 405N101248 銘板 Label 1 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-5
SP-6
02B FRAME 2
2 2
FRAME 2 02B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
1 ***
D 2 387N0187A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 {MC:4.5}
D 3 363Y100232 ガイド板 Guide plate 1 {MC:4.5}
D 4 363N2614C ガイド板 Guide plate 1 {MC:4.5}
E 5 362N100289 受 Support 1 {MC:4.5}
E 6 362N100237 受 Support 1 {MC:4.5}
E 7 362N100288 受 Plate 1 {MC:4.5}
E 8 345N1757B 仕切板 Bracket 1 －
E 9 350N3134B カバー Cover 1 －
D 10 375N0103B パッキン Packing 1 －
D 11 375N0104B パッキン Packing 1 －
E 12 350N3133B カバー Cover 1 －
E 13 356N10208A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E 14 386N1292B 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
E 15 362N0836F 受 Bracket 1 －
D 16 382N1864 テープ Tape 2 －
E 17 356N9820E ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 18 382N1819 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 －
E 19 356N9819D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.6}
D 20 146N0016B ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SG1 {MC:4.6}
E 21 345N1799A 遮板 Light Protect Plate 1 －
E 22 319N101278 軸 Shaft 2 －
D 23 384N0105A こすり部材 Tape 1 －
E 24 356N10835 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.1}
E 25 316S0163 止め具 Clamp 1 {MC:10.1}
E 26 138S0139 フェライトコア Ferrite Core 1 {MC:10.1}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-6
SP-7
02C FRAME 3
3 3
FRAME 3 02C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 375N0099 シール Seal 24 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-7
SP-8
03A 1
CASSETTE SET UNIT 1
1
CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 03A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N6101401D ラック Guide 4 {MC:5.2}
D 2 327N1101607B 平歯車 Spur Gear 4 {MC:5.2}
D 3 322N1036B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.2}
E 4 356Y0407A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:5.2}
D 5 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:5.2}
E 6 319N4168D 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.2}
E 7 356Y0406B ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:5.2}
E 8 319N4146D 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.2}
E 9 350Y100766 カバー Cover 1 {MC:5.2}
E 10 356Y0458A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.2}
D 11 386N1266 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 4 {MC:5.2}
D 12 382N100266 テープ Tape 4 {MC:5.2}
E 13 350Y100765 カバー Cover 1 {MC:5.2}
E 14 356Y0457A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.2}
E 15 350Y101444 カバー Cover 1 {MC:5.2}
D 16 334Y100125 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 4 {MC:5.2}
17 ***
D 18 334N100159 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 {MC:5.2}
D 19 319N101173A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.2}
E 20 346N1254E 補助板 Plate Support 1 {MC:5.2}
E 21 353Y0073G シャーシ Chassis 1 {MC:5.2}
E 22 356N10790A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.2}
E 23 356N10111 ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:5.2}
D 24 387N0138C 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 2 {MC:5.2}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-8
SP-9
03B 2
CASSETTE SET UNIT 2
2
CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 03B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 341N1134C アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.4}
D 2 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.4}
E 3 341N100277 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.4}
D 4 322SY094 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.4}
D 5 329N100049 カム Cam 1 {MC:5.6}
D 6 327N100290 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.6}
D 7 327N100289 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.6}
D 8 322SY092 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.6}
E 9 341N1054C アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.21}
Rubber Vibration
E 10 386N1307A 防振ゴム 1 {MC:5.5}
Isolator
MA1,
D 11 118SX213 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 {MC:5.5}
STP-59D3002
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-9
SP-10
03C 3
CASSETTE SET UNIT 3
3
CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 03C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N9816C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.18}
2 ***
3 ***
4 ***
5 ***
E 6 341N0937B アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.27}
D 7 327N100294A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.27}
D 8 327N100289 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.27}
D 9 327N100290 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.27}
D 10 322N100228 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.65}
D 11 322SB058 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:5.65}
MA3,
D 12 118SX213 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 {MC:5.29}
STP-59D3002
E 13 356N9814B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.30}
E 14 386N1307A 防振ゴム Rubber Vibration Isolator 1 {MC:5.29}
E 15 322SY251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.66}
E 16 332N0640 ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:5.18}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-10
SP-11
03D 4
CASSETTE SET UNIT 4
4
CASSETTE SET UNIT 4 03D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.9}
E 2 341N1134C アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.9}
E 3 341N100277 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.9}
D 4 322SY094 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.9}
D 5 329N100039 カム Cam 1 {MC:5.10}
D 6 322SY092 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.10}
E 7 341N1131C アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.21}
E 8 356N9685A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.57}
D 9 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA7 {MC:5.57}
D 10 146S0083 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA4 {MC:5.41}
D 11 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA1 {MC:5.54}
E 12 341N100279 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.55}
D 13 388N100532 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 L ≒ 14mm {MC:5.55}
E 14 356Y100764 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.55}
E 15 356N10108A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.7}
E 16 356N9811B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.7}
D 17 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA3 {MC:5.8}
D 18 146S0082 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA4 {MC:5.40}
E 19 356N9808A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.40}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-11
SP-12
03E 5
CASSETTE SET UNIT 5
5
CASSETTE SET UNIT 5 03E
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N9680B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.16}
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA10 {MC:5.16}
D 3 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA8 {MC:5.16}
D 4 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA12 {MC:5.16}
5 ***
6 ***
7 ***
E 8 356N9815A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.17}
D 9 388N2563A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 38mm {MC:5.17}
D 10 335N0095B フランジ Flange 2 {MC:5.20}
E 11 341N1167 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.20}
12 ***
D 13 327N100293 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.19}
D 14 327N100292 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.19}
E 15 310S7002016 平行ピン Straight Pin 1 {MC:5.19}
MA2,
D 16 118Y100091A モータ Motor 1 {MC:5.26}
RB-35CM-FSF23
E 17 356N10106B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.25}
E 18 341N0937B アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.28}
D 19 327N100294A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.28}
D 20 322N100228 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.65}
D 21 322SB058 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:5.65}
D 22 327N100298 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.50}
D 23 327N100247 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.50}
D 24 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA6 {MC:5.56}
D 25 322SY251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.66}
D 26 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.66}
E 27 386N1307A 防振ゴム Rubber Vibration Isolator 1 {MC:5.48}
MA4,
D 28 118SX213 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 {MC:5.48}
STP-59D3002
E 29 356N10107A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.49}
E 30 319N101344 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.66}
E 31 356N104677A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.78}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-12
SP-13
03F 6
CASSETTE SET UNIT 6
6
CASSETTE SET UNIT 6 03F
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 322SB040 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:5.32}
D 2 322SY251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.31}
D 3 327N100292 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:5.31}
E 4 310S7002016 平行ピン Pin 2 {MC:5.31}
D 5 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:5.31}
E 6 319N101169 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.31}
E 7 341N1132C アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.33}
D 8 388N100537 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1 {MC:5.33}
D 9 322N100232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.33}
E 10 341N100275 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.33}
D 11 388N100538 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1 {MC:5.33}
D 12 334Y100081 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 {MC:5.33}
D 13 315N0011 止め輪 Snap Ring 8 {MC:5.33}
D 14 334N100192 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 2 {MC:5.33}
E 15 319N100390A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.33}
E 16 313N100173 ステー Stay 1 {MC:5.32}
E 17 319N101180 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.32}
D 18 334N100191 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 7 {MC:5.32}
D 19 334N100193 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 2 {MC:5.33}
D 20 338N100018 リング Ring 1 {MC:5.33}
D 21 334N100072D 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 2 {MC:5.33}
D 22 322SF268 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:5.32}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-13
SP-14
03G 7
CASSETTE SET UNIT 7
7
CASSETTE SET UNIT 7 03G
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 134Y100046 電磁バルブ Solenoid Valve 1 SVA1, SVA2 {MC:5.36}
D 2 369N0275B 管 Hose 1 {MC:5.34}
D 3 317N100052 栓 Plug 4 {MC:5.34}
PA1,
A 4 133Y2034C 電動ポンプ Pump 1 {MC:5.37}
CM-15-24
D 5 128Y0331 スイッチ Switch 1 SA5 {MC:5.38}
D 6 369N0288A 管 Hose 2 {MC:5.34}
D 7 372S0280 管継手 Joint 1 {MC:5.34}
D 8 372S0050A 管継手 Joint 2 {MC:5.35}
D 9 375S0040 パッキン Packing 4 {MC:5.35}
E 10 356N103613 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.35}
D 11 372S0053A 管継手 Joint 2 {MC:5.35}
D 12 372S0049A 管継手 Joint 2 {MC:5.35}
E 13 341Y0343 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.65}
E 14 356N103609 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.42}
E 15 356N103608 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.43}
D 16 370N100063A ホース Hose 1 L ≒ 200mm {MC:5.44}
17 ***
E 18 386N100269 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 {MC:5.65}
D 19 315N0011 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.45}
E 20 356N9875B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.44}
E 21 356N9874B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.46}
D 22 392N0009A 吸着盤 Suction Cup 1 {MC:5.45}
D 23 372S0053A 管継手 Joint 1 {MC:5.44}
D 24 372S0049A 管継手 Joint 1 {MC:5.44}
D 25 375S0040 パッキン Packing 2 {MC:5.44}
D 26 370N100063A ホース Hose 1 L ≒ 200mm {MC:5.46}
27 ***
D 28 372S0053A 管継手 Joint 1 {MC:5.46}
D 29 372S0049A 管継手 Joint 1 {MC:5.46}
D 30 375S0040 パッキン Packing 2 {MC:5.46}
D 31 315N0011 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.47}
D 32 392N0009A 吸着盤 Suction Cup 1 {MC:5.47}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-14
SP-15
03H 8
CASSETTE SET UNIT 8
8
CASSETTE SET UNIT 8 03H
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 405N0186 銘板 Label 2 {MC:5.2}
D 2 322SY251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.12}
D 3 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:5.12}
D 4 329N100048 カム Cam 4 {MC:5.12}
E 5 310S7002016 平行ピン Pin 4 {MC:5.12}
E 6 319N101179 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.12}
D 7 322N100229 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.11}
D 8 322SY094 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 8 {MC:5.11}
D 9 388N100533 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 43mm {MC:5.11}
E 10 357Y100062 台 Base 1 {MC:5.11}
E 11 356Y100762C レバー Lever 1 {MC:5.11}
E 12 356Y100761D レバー Lever 1 {MC:5.11}
E 13 362N100299 受 Guide 2 {MC:5.11}
D 14 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:5.11}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-15
SP-16
03 I 9
CASSETTE SET UNIT 9
9
CASSETTE SET UNIT 9 03 I
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N10105A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.61}
D 2 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA15 {MC:5.61}
D 3 388N3106C ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1 {MC:5.62}
D 4 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA11 {MC:5.24}
E 5 356N9810D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.24}
E 6 356N9812C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.13}
E 7 386N1322A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 {MC:5.11}
D 8 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA14 {MC:5.23}
SOLA1,
D 9 107Y0183A ソレノイド Solenoid 1 {MC:5.60}
TDS-12F-04
D 10 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.60}
D 11 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.60}
E 12 341N1136D アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.60}
E 13 319Y100046 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.60}
D 14 388N2563A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 38mm {MC:5.59}
E 15 346Y0083D 補助板 Plate Support 1 {MC:5.60}
D 16 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA2 {MC:5.60}
E 17 356N9877B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.54}
E 18 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA9 {MC:5.54}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-16
SP-17
03J 10
CASSETTE SET UNIT 10
10
CASSETTE SET UNIT 10 03J
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N100533 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 2 L ≒ 43mm {MC:5.21}
E 2 342N100050A レバー Lever 2 {MC:5.21}
E 3 362N100298 受 Holder 2 {MC:5.15}
D 4 350N101280 蓋 Shutter 2 {MC:5.15}
D 5 388N100536 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 2 {MC:5.15}
E 6 363N100699 ガイド Guide 4 {MC:5.22}
E 7 356N103370C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.22}
D 8 387N100023 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:5.14}
E 9 341N100271 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.21}
D 10 362N100297 受 Stopper 2 {MC:5.21}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-17
SP-18
03K 11
CASSETTE SET UNIT 11
11
CASSETTE SET UNIT 11 03K
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N100629 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 40mm {MC:5.64}
E 2 356Y100938 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.64}
D 3 322N100230 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.64}
E 4 353N100056 シャーシ Chassis 1 {MC:5.64}
E 5 319N101485 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.64}
D 6 388N100546 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 51mm {MC:5.64}
E 7 341N100323A アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.64}
D 8 334N2392 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 1 {MC:5.64}
E 9 341N100324 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.64}
E 10 356Y100939 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.64}
D 11 328N100017 爪 Claw 1 {MC:5.64}
D 12 362N100337 受 Guide 1 {MC:5.64}
D 13 332N100175B ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:5.64}
D 14 322SY067 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.64}
D 15 388N100630 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 24mm {MC:5.64}
E 16 319N101484 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.64}
D 17 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.64}
D 18 322SY066 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.64}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-18
SP-19
03L 12
CASSETTE SET UNIT 12
12
CASSETTE SET UNIT 12 03L
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 310Y100005 ピン Pin 1 {MC:5.62}
E 2 356N100903C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.76}
D 3 322N1017B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.62}
E 4 341Y0414 アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.62}
D 5 322N100230 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:5.62}
E 6 386N1388 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 {MC:5.62}
E 7 363N2505B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:5.62}
E 8 356N9809F ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.63}
D 9 322SY101 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:5.63}
D 10 388N100174A 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 67mm {MC:5.62}
D 11 322N100230 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 5 {MC:5.63}
D 12 388N100173C ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1 {MC:5.77}
D 13 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.77}
E 14 341N100068F アーム Arm 1 {MC:5.77}
E 15 310S7002016 平行ピン Pin 1 {MC:5.77}
E 16 319N101175B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.63}
E 17 319N100347E 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.77}
E 18 357N100096B 台 Base 1 {MC:5.63}
D 19 322N100044A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.77}
D 20 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SA16 {MC:5.76}
E 21 356N101345A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.76}
E 22 353Y100010H シャーシ Chassis 1 {MC:5.63}
E 23 319N100346A 軸 Shaft 2 {MC:5.75}
D 24 338N100026B リング Ring 1 {MC:5.75}
Compression Coil
D 25 388N100154 圧縮コイルバネ 1 {MC:5.75}
Spring
D 26 363N100240D 受 Guide 1 {MC:5.71}
D 27 332N100175B ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:5.74}
D 28 322SY097 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:5.75}
E 29 357N100097C 台 Base 1 {MC:5.75}
D 30 365N100009D レール Rail 1 {MC:5.75}
E 31 342Y100003D レバー Lever 1 {MC:5.75}
D 32 322SP202 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:5.75}
E 33 315S0053 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.75}
D 34 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:5.75}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-19
SP-20
03M 13
CASSETTE SET UNIT 13
13
CASSETTE SET UNIT 13 03M
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
1 ***
2 ***
3 ***
4 ***
5 ***
D 6 362N100294A 受 Guide Plate 1 {MC:5.69}
D 7 332N100176B ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:5.72}
E 8 387N100023 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:5.68}
E 9 356N103410A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.68}
10 ***
11 ***
D 12 362N100240A 受 Guide 1 {MC:5.70}
D 13 332N100175B ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:5.73}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-20
SP-21
03N 14
CASSETTE SET UNIT 14
14
CASSETTE SET UNIT 14 03N
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2594B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 40mm {MC:5.51}
D 2 383Y0075A ワイヤ Wire 1 {MC:5.51}
E 3 341N100278A アーム Arm 2 {MC:5.67}
D 4 322SY251 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.67}
D 5 327N1121801B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.50}
D 6 360N0475A ハウジング Housing 4 {MC:5.53}
D 7 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:5.53}
D 8 322SY121 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.67}
D 9 388N100539 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1 {MC:5.67}
E 10 310N100179 ピン Pin 2 {MC:5.67}
D 11 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:5.53}
D 12 340D775280A つまみ（ノブ） Knob 1 {MC:5.53}
D 13 327N1121605C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.53}
D 14 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:5.53}
D 15 388N100540 ねじりコイルバネ Torsion Coil Spring 1 {MC:5.67}
E 16 363N2507A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:5.52}
D 17 334Y3208B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:5.53}
D 18 334N3617B/C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:5.53}
D 19 322SB056 軸受 Bearing 4 {MC:5.53}
D 20 334Y3207B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:5.53}
D 21 334N3616C/D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:5.53}
E 22 319N101176 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.67}
E 23 386N100268 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 3 {MC:5.67}
E 24 356Y0356D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.67}
D 25 334N3677 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4 {MC:5.67}
26 ***
D 27 388N2594B 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 40mm {MC:5.53}
D 28 383Y0075A ワイヤ Wire 1 {MC:5.53}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-21
SP-22
04A 1
ERASURE UNIT 1
1
ERASURE UNIT 1 04A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 369N100121C ダクト Duct 1 {MC:6.3}
D 2 334Y5010G ブラシローラ Brush Roller 1 {MC:6.7}
E 3 350N101279 蓋 Cover 2 {MC:6.8}
D 4 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:6.8}
D 5 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:6.8}
E 6 362N100293B 受 Box 1 {MC:6.8}
A 7 334N100195C ブラシローラ Brush Roller 2 {MC:6.8}
D 8 332N0620 ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:6.8}
D 9 327N0208 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.8}
D 10 322SF267 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:6.8}
D 11 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:6.8}
D 12 119S0049A 電動ファン Fan 1 FANB1 {MC:6.2}
D 13 120S4293 コネクタ Connector 1 {MC:6.2}
E 14 369Y0027B ダクト Duct 1 {MC:6.4}
E 15 364N100102 ガード Guard 1 {MC:6.2}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-22
SP-23
04B 2
ERASURE UNIT 2
2
ERASURE UNIT 2 04B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DR 1 840Y100255 消去部 Erasure Unit 1 {MC:6.13}
E 2 350Y1761D カバー Cover 1 {MC:6.6}
E 3 405N3392 銘板 Label 1 {MC:6.1}
D 4 327N100288 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:6.10}
E 5 319N4177C 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:6.10}
E 6 356N104544 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 7 407Y0031E 反射板 Reflective Plate 1 {MC:6.5}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-23
SP-24
04C 3
ERASURE UNIT 3
3
ERASURE UNIT 3 04C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
CR 1 113Y1756H ERS23A ERS23A 1 {MC:6.16}
C 2 109N100001B 蛍光灯安定器 INV26A 3 {MC:6.14}
E 3 356N9731C ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:6.14}
4 ***
DR 5 360Y0137C ケース Lamp Assembly 1 {MC:6.17}
E 6 356N9851B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.17}
E 7 356Y0368C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.9}
A 8 603Y0070C フィルタ Filter 1 {MC:6.9}
D 9 115Y0048D 感熱スイッチ Thermo Switch 1 TSWB1 {MC:6.11}
E 10 356Y0405C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:6.17}
D 11 115Y0047B サーミスタ Thermo Switch 1 THEB1 {MC:6.12}
E 12 350N3238C 蓋 Cap 14 {MC:6.17}
48V/5.0A
AT 13 137S1280 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:6.16}
For ERS23A
48V/2.0A
AT 14 137S1277 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:6.16}
For ERS23A
C 15 109N100001B 蛍光灯安定器 INV26A 3 {MC:6.15}
E 16 356N9731C ブラケット Bracket 3 {MC:6.15}
E 17 356N10156A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-24
SP-25
05A 1
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1
1
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 05A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 363Y0623 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.6}
D 2 387Y0018A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:7.7}
E 3 363N2728F ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.7}
E 4 356N103592 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.8}
D 5 388N100529 板バネ Leaf Spring 3 {MC:7.8}
D 6 334N3619 ゴムローラ Resin Roller 3 {MC:7.8}
D 7 334Y100152 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller Assembly 3 {MC:7.8}
D 8 387Y0017A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:7.6}
D 9 387Y0019A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:7.8}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-25
SP-26
05B 2
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2
2
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 05B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N0219B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.12}
D 2 327N0218A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.12}
D 3 327N100301 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.11}
D 4 327N0217A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.11}
E 5 356N9658D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.2}
D 6 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC2 {MC:7.3}
D 7 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC1 {MC:7.3}
D 8 322SY059 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:7.11}
D 9 322SY303 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.14}
E 10 347N2034 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.14}
D 11 315S0053 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:7.14}
E 12 347N100491 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.44}
D 13 322SB053 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.44}
E 14 342Y0035A レバー Lever 1 {MC:7.11}
D 15 322SY232 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 {MC:7.11}
D 16 327N1102410C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 17 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:7.16}
D 18 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:7.21}
D 19 327N100293 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.21}
D 20 329N0178C カム Cam 1 {MC:7.14}
D 21 322SB061 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.16}
D 22 388N5421 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 {MC:7.9}
E 23 319N4084B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.16}
D 24 146N0016B ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC3 {MC:7.17}
MC2,
D 25 118Y100092A モータ Motor 1 RB-35CM- {MC:7.21}
FSF23
D 26 327N0219B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.11}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-26
SP-27
05C 3
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3
3
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 05C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 324N3194D タイミングベルト車 Timing Belt Pulley 2 {MC:7.13}
D 2 323S3374A タイミングベルト Timing Belt 1 {MC:7.4}
E 3 347N1939 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.44}
D 4 322SB053 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.44}
E 5 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.44}
D 6 315S0053 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:7.14}
E 7 347N2034 スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.14}
D 8 322SY303 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.14}
D 9 329N0178C カム Cam 1 {MC:7.14}
D 10 388N5421 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 {MC:7.10}
D 11 322SB061 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.16}
D 12 327N1102410C 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.16}
D 13 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:7.16}
E 14 356N10199B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
MC1,
D 15 118SX215 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 {MC:7.39}
STP-59D3002
E 16 356N10201C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
D 17 388N2613 バネ Spring 1 L ≒ 35mm {MC:7.4}
D 18 324N0080 平ベルト車 Belt Pulley 1 {MC:7.5}
D 19 324N3198 平ベルト車 Belt Pulley 1 {MC:7.16}
D 20 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.5}
E 21 341Y0334A アーム Arm 1 {MC:7.5}
D 22 324N0080 平ベルト車 Belt Pulley 1 {MC:7.4}
D 23 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:7.5}
E 24 347N1939 スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.46}
D 25 322SB053 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:7.46}
E 26 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.46}
E 27 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:7.13}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-27
SP-28
05D 4
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4
4
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 05D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N100530A 引張コイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 61mm {MC:7.40}
D 2 327N1121608A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:7.40}
D 3 360N0542D ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.42}
D 4 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.42}
D 5 388N2576B バネ Spring 1 L ≒ 130mm {MC:7.43}
D 6 322SB062 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.43}
D 7 360N0521E ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.43}
D 8 360N0543A ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.44}
D 9 322SB053 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.44}
D 10 388N2615A 引張コイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 72mm {MC:7.45}
D 11 388N100531A 引張コイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 80mm {MC:7.40}
D 12 388N2575B バネ Spring 1 L ≒ 127mm {MC:7.43}
D 13 388N2616 バネ Spring 1 L ≒ 102mm {MC:7.43}
D 14 388N2614A バネ Spring 1 L ≒ 103mm {MC:7.45}
D 15 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:7.46}
E 16 347N1624A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.46}
D 17 334N3625C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.43}
D 18 334N3624B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.44}
D 19 334N3623A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.41}
D 20 334N3622B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.42}
D 21 334N3621A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.46}
E 22 346N1405B 補強板 Reinforcement Plate 1 {MC:7.49}
E 23 363N100562A ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:7.47}
E 24 363N10555A ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.48}
D 25 360N0542D ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.41}
D 26 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.41}
D 27 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.44}
D 28 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.43}
D 29 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.46}
D 30 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.45}
D 31 388N2576B バネ Spring 1 L ≒ 130mm {MC:7.45}
D 32 388N2575B バネ Spring 1 L ≒ 127mm {MC:7.45}
D 33 360N0521E ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.45}
D 34 360N0543A ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.45}
D 35 322SB053 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.43}
D 36 322SB053 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 3 {MC:7.46}
D 37 322SB053 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:7.45}
D 38 334N3625C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:7.45}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-28
SP-29
05E 5
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5
5
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 05E
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356N9651F ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
E 2 405N0186 銘板 Label 2 {MC:7.1}
E 3 356N10305 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
D 4 146N100002 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC9 {MC:7.18}
E 5 356N10261B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.18}
E 6 356N10492D ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
E 7 356N10493A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
E 8 356N10567B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
E 9 313N1310B ステー Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
E 10 313N1309B ステー Bracket 1 {MC:7.20}
E 11 356Y0604 ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:7.1}
E 12 356Y0605C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
D 13 386N1362 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 3 {MC:7.1}
D 14 386N1370 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 {MC:7.1}
E 15 356Y0607 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
E 16 356Y0623 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.1}
D 17 386N1365 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 {MC:7.1}
D 18 852Y0074B 読取り部 Bar Code Reader 1 BCRC1 {MC:7.38}
E 19 356N9191 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.38}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-29
SP-30
05F 6
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 6
6
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 6 05F
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
MC4,
D 1 118Y100081 モータ Motor 1 {MC:7.26}
RB-35CM-FSF25
E 2 356N10196B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.26}
D 3 327N0236D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.26}
D 4 327N1103008A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.27}
D 5 329N0177C カム Cam 1 {MC:7.27}
E 6 356Y0416B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.27}
D 7 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC7 {MC:7.22}
D 8 356N10505B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.22}
D 9 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC10 {MC:7.23}
D 10 356N10495C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.23}
D 11 322SB063 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 6 {MC:7.19}
E 12 363N2725E ガイド Stopper 1 {MC:7.19}
D 13 317N1074B キャップ Cap 3 {MC:7.19}
D 14 360N0548C ケーシング Case 1 {MC:7.19}
E 15 363N2724E ガイド Stopper 2 {MC:7.19}
D 16 360N0547C ケーシング Case 2 {MC:7.19}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-30
SP-31
05G 7
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 7
7
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 7 05G
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 388N100176B 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 {MC:7.28}
D 2 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:7.33}
E 3 341N100076A アーム Arm 2 {MC:7.28}
D 4 322N100092A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 {MC:7.33}
E 5 356N100842B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.33}
D 6 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC6 {MC:7.31}
E 7 341N100062 アーム Arm 2 {MC:7.35}
E 8 341N100059 アーム Arm 2 {MC:7.35}
E 9 319N100371 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.35}
E 10 319N100372A 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.35}
D 11 388N2610 引張コイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 26mm {MC:7.29}
D 12 360N0537B ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.30}
D 13 388N1243 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 2 L ≒ 30mm {MC:7.30}
D 14 360N0553A ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:7.30}
D 15 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:7.29}
D 16 347N2082B スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:7.30}
D 17 368Y0027B 摺動台 Slider 1 {MC:7.30}
E 18 355N0752H フレーム Frame 1 －
D 19 146N0016A/B ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SC8 {MC:7.32}
D 20 356Y0454 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.37}
D 21 327N0234B 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:7.35}
D 22 327N0233 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.37}
D 23 322SB057 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:7.37}
D 24 330S0013 クラッチ Clutch 2 {MC:7.37}
D 25 327Y0017 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.37}
D 26 322SB059 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:7.37}
E 27 319N4293D 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:7.37}
D 28 347N2068A スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.37}
D 29 327N0232B 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 {MC:7.37}
D 30 347N2067B スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:7.37}
D 31 329N0176D カム Cam 1 {MC:7.37}
D 32 388Y100002 板バネ Leaf Spring 1 {MC:7.37}
D 33 341N1203B アーム Arm 1 {MC:7.37}
E 34 356Y0409F ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:7.37}
MC3,
D 35 118SX214 ステッピングモータ Stepping Motor 1 {MC:7.36}
STP-42D2046
D 36 322N100092A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.30}
D 37 322N100039A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:7.30}
E 38 341N100060 アーム Arm 2 {MC:7.33}
E 39 341N100061 アーム Arm 2 {MC:7.35}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-31
SP-32
05H 8
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 8
8
SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 8 05H
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 363N2826A ガイド Guide 3 {MC:7.25}
D 2 327N0237B ラック Rack 3 {MC:7.25}
D 3 388N2621C 引張コイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 35mm {MC:7.25}
D 4 363N2825B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:7.25}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-32
SP-33
06 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 06
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
DR 1 839Y100029 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1 {MC:9.}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-33
SP-34
07 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 07
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 345Y100041 遮板 Shield Plate 1 {MC:8.2}
E 2 405N3486 銘板 Label 1 {MC:8.2}
D 3 113Y100484B PMT27B PMT27B 1 {MC:8.2}
D 4 345N100713 遮板 Shield Plate 1 {MC:8.3}
D 5 335N100045 フランジ Flange 2 {MC:8.3}
D 6 345N100527 遮板 Shield Plate 1 {MC:8.3}
D 7 815Y100035B 集光ガイド Light-Collecting Unit 1 {MC:8.1}
D 8 120S4293 コネクタ Connector 1 {MC:4.3}
E 9 356N10089A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.3}
D 10 119S0049A 電動ファン Fan 1 FANG1 {MC:4.3}
E 11 405N3485 銘板 Label 1 {MC:8.1}
D 12 387N0197B 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:8.1}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-34
SP-35
08A 1
SUB SCANNING UNIT 1
1
SUB SCANNING UNIT 1 08A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
Vibration Proof Rubber 2 ヶ組／
E 1 898Y1311 防振ゴムアセンブリ 1 {MC:10.33}
Assembly A set of two
D 2 347N1950E スペーサ Spacer 1 {MC:10.33}
E 3 365N0114A レール Rail 2 －
E 4 405N101248 銘板 Label 2 {MC:10.1}
D 5 363N100680C ガイド Guide 1 {MC:10.2}
E 6 808Y100083 搬送部 Guide Plate 1 {MC:10.2}
E 7 356N103357B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.2}
D 8 334N100162C ローラ Roller 1 {MC:10.2}
E 9 356N10786A ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:10.2}
E 10 363N2849 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:10.2}
E 11 363N100681 ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:10.2}
E 12 356N103356A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.2}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-35
SP-36
08B 2
SUB SCANNING UNIT 2
2
SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 08B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N2570 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 59mm {MC:10.6}
D 2 322SB060 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 {MC:10.8}
D 3 334N0068B ローラ Roller 1 {MC:10.8}
D 4 388N1234 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Coil Spring 1 L ≒ 7mm {MC:10.8}
D 5 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:10.8}
E 6 341Y0352A アーム Arm 1 {MC:10.8}
E 7 350N2924C カバー Cover 1 {MC:10.9}
MZ1,
D 8 118YX256G FFM モータ FFM Motor 1 {MC:10.9}
ME8880
E 9 356Y0415C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.36}
D 10 337N0071B ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:10.7}
E 11 323N1262B ベルト Belt 1 {MC:10.6}
D 12 337N0070A ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:10.4}
E 13 323N1266 ベルト Belt 1 {MC:10.3}
D 14 309N100022 座金 Washer 2 {MC:10.8}
D 15 384N0104 こすり部材 Tape 2 －
D 16 386N1377 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
E 17 350N3329B カバー Cover 1 {MC:10.9}
D 18 337N0070A ホイール Flywheel 1 {MC:10.5}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-36
SP-37
08C 3
SUB SCANNING UNIT 3
3
SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 08C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 360N0508A ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:10.30}
2 ***
3 ***
E 4 341Y0412 アーム Arm 1 {MC:10.30}
5 ***
6 ***
E 7 341N1124C アーム Arm 1 {MC:10.26}
D 8 146Y0141 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor Assembly 1 SZ5 {MC:10.29}
MZ3,
D 9 118YX280 モータ Motor Assembly 1 RB-35CGM- {MC:10.29}
J338-24
MZ2,
D 10 118YX276A モータ Motor 1 RB-35CGM- {MC:10.28}
J338-24
D 11 146Y0142 ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor Assembly 1 SZ3 {MC:10.28}
D 12 329N0171D カム Cam 1 {MC:10.28}
D 13 322SB060 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 1 {MC:10.27}
E 14 356N9661B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.27}
D 15 146S0029A ホトインタラプタ Photo Sensor 1 SZ2 {MC:10.27}
E 16 356Y0615 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.1}
E 17 386N1365 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 {MC:10.1}
E 18 313N1263C ステー Stay 1 {MC:10.26}
D 19 360N0508A ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:10.31}
E 20 341Y0412 アーム Arm 1 {MC:10.31}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-37
SP-38
08D 4
SUB SCANNING UNIT 4
4
SUB SCANNING UNIT 4 08D
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N100527 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 47mm {MC:10.13}
D 2 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:10.19}
D 3 343N0068A フック Hook 1 {MC:10.13}
D 4 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:10.19}
E 5 356N103587A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.14}
D 6 360N100236 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:10.19}
7 ***
E 8 347N1944A スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:10.19}
D 9 322SB053 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:10.19}
D 10 334Y3229B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:10.14}
D 11 334N3614C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:10.19}
D 12 309S0025 座金 Washer 1 {MC:10.35}
E 13 356N103590 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.35}
D 14 343N0069A フック Hook 1 {MC:10.11}
D 15 363N2664B ガイド Guide 1 {MC:10.16}
D 16 388N100527 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 47mm {MC:10.11}
D 17 384N0104 こすり部材 Tape 2 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-38
SP-39
08E 5
SUB SCANNING UNIT 5
5
SUB SCANNING UNIT 5 08E
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 327N0213C 歯車 Gear 1 {MC:10.20}
D 2 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 1 {MC:10.20}
D 3 327N100285 歯車 Gear 1 {MC:10.21}
D 4 322SB057 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:10.21}
5 ***
D 6 387N0189A 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:10.32}
D 7 363N100689 ガイド Guide 1 {MC:10.21}
D 8 388N100526 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 41mm {MC:10.21}
E 9 356N103591B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.25}
10 ***
D 11 334Y3228D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:10.25}
E 12 356N103587A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.25}
13 ***
E 14 356N10562 ブラケット Bracket 1 －
E 15 356N9665C ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 16 113Y1738D SED23A SED23A 1 SZ1 {MC:10.24}
D 17 602Y100002 ミラー Mirror 1 {MC:10.22}
E 18 319N4263B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:10.21}
D 19 387N100002 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 1 {MC:10.23}
D 20 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:10.21}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-39
SP-40
08F 6
SUB SCANNING UNIT 6
6
SUB SCANNING UNIT 6 08F
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 388N100527 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 47mm {MC:10.10}
D 2 315S0050 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:10.18}
D 3 343N0068A フック Hook 1 {MC:10.10}
D 4 322SB052 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 {MC:10.18}
D 5 360N100236 ハウジング Housing 2 {MC:10.18}
E 6 347N1944A スペーサ Spacer 2 {MC:10.18}
D 7 322SB053 軸受 Bearing 2 {MC:10.18}
E 8 356N103590 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.34}
D 9 309S0025 座金 Washer 1 {MC:10.34}
10 ***
E 11 356N10200A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.1}
E 12 386N1292B 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 3 －
D 13 334Y3229B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:10.15}
D 14 334N3614C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:10.18}
E 15 356N103587A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.15}
D 16 343N0069A フック Hook 1 {MC:10.12}
D 17 363N2620E/F ガイド Guide 1 {MC:10.17}
D 18 387Y0020 帯電防止材 Antistatic Brush 4 {MC:10.17}
D 19 384N0104 こすり部材 Tape 4 －
D 20 388N100527 引張りコイルバネ Extension Spring 1 L ≒ 47mm {MC:10.12}
E 21 345N1925 遮光材 Light Shielding Film 1 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-40
SP-41
08G 7
SUB SCANNING UNIT 7
7
SUB SCANNING UNIT 7 08G
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 356Y0613A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 2 386N1366 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 －
E 3 356Y0608A ブラケット Bracket 1 －
D 4 386N1363 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 2 －
D 5 386N1380 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 －
E 6 356Y0622A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.1}
D 7 386N1369 緩衝機材 Bracket 2 {MC:10.1}
E 8 356Y0612 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.1}
9 ***
E 10 356Y0609 ブラケット Shock Absorber 3 {MC:10.1}
D 11 386N1370 緩衝機材 Rubber Roller 3 {MC:10.1}
E 12 313N1315A ステー Stay 1 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-41
SP-42
09A 1
CONTROLLER 1
1
CONTROLLER 1 09A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 350N2998C カバー Cover 1 {MC:11.6}
CR 2 113Y1758J SND23B SND23B 1 {MC:11.6}
D 3 316S0456 止め具 Clamp 3 {MC:11.6}
D 4 316S0268 止め具 Clamp 2 {MC:11.6}
E 5 358Y0086B ボックス Box 1 {MC:11.6}
CR 6 845Y100113A 操作パネル Panel 1 PNL23B {MC:4.1}
48V/3.2A
AT 7 137S1278 ヒューズ FUSE 3 {MC:12.3}
For SND23B
48V/2.0A
AT 8 137S1277 ヒューズ FUSE 3 {MC:12.3}
For SND23B
E 9 138S0515 フェライトコア Ferrite Core 1 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-42
SP-43
09B 2
CONTROLLER 2
2
CONTROLLER 2 09B
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 350N101672B カバー Cover 1 {MC:4.7}
E 2 356N104563A カバー Cover 1 {MC:4.7}
E 3 350N101784A カバー Cover 1 {MC:4.7}
E 4 350N101782 カバー Cover 1 {MC:4.7}
D 5 382N100540 テープ Tape 3 {MC:4.7}
CR 6 113Y100212C SCN23C SCN23C 1 {MC:11.3}
E 7 356N10569B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:11.2}
E 8 350N101786 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.7}
D 9 382N100534A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 10 382N100535A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 11 382N100532A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 12 382N100531A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 13 382N100529A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 14 382N100530A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 15 382N100533A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 16 382N100527A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
D 17 382N100528A テープ Tape 1 {MC:4.7}
CR 18 113Y1789N CPU23B CPU23B 1 {MC:11.2}
CR 19 113Y1790E LAN23A LAN23A 1 {MC:11.4}
E 20 356N10123B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:11.4}
E 21 358Y0088D ボックス Box 1 {MC:11.2}
D 22 119N100012 電動ファン Fan 1 {MC:4.4}
D 23 120S3912 コネクタ Connector 1 {MC:4.4}
E 24 356N104865B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.4}
CR 25 113Y100503A PSU29B PSU29B 1 {MC:11.7}
48V/1.0A For
AT 26 137S1178 ヒューズ FUSE 4 {MC:12.5}
CPU23B
48V/3.2A For
AT 27 137S1278 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:12.4}
SCN23C
48V/1.6A For
AT 28 137S1276 ヒューズ FUSE 6 {MC:12.4}
SCN23C
E 29 405N2505A 銘板 Label 1 －
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-43
SP-44
09C 3
CONTROLLER 3
3
CONTROLLER 3 09C
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 313N1271E ステー Stay 1 {MC:5.3}
E 2 362S0681 受 Rod holder 1 {MC:5.3}
E 3 362S0682 受 Rod holder 1 {MC:5.3}
E 4 319N4114B 軸 Shaft 1 {MC:5.3}
D 5 322SY063 すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 {MC:5.3}
D 6 315S0051 止め輪 Snap Ring 2 {MC:5.3}
E 7 356N9813C ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:5.3}
E 8 358Y0083G ボックス Box 1 {MC:11.5}
E 9 386N1322A 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 4 {MC:12.2}
E 10 316S0456 止め具 Clamp 2 {MC:11.5}
E 11 316S0268 止め具 Clamp 2 {MC:11.5}
CR 12 113Y1757J SND23A SND23A 1 {MC:11.5}
E 13 350N2642A カバー Cover 1 {MC:12.2}
48V/3.2A
AT 14 137S1278 ヒューズ FUSE 4 {MC:12.2}
For SND23A
48V/2.0A
AT 15 137S1277 ヒューズ FUSE 1 {MC:12.2}
For SND23A
E 16 356N10112A ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:10.1}
E 17 356N10787A ブラケット Bracket 4 {MC:10.1}
E 18 382N1844 テープ Tape 2 {MC:12.2}
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
AT 19 898Y1401 ヒューズキット FUSE KIT 1 －
48V/1.0A for
137S1178 ヒューズ Fuse 2 －
CPU23B
48V/1.6A for
137S1276 ヒューズ Fuse 2 SCN23A, －
SCN23C
48V/2.0A
for ERS23A,
137S1277 ヒューズ Fuse 2 －
SND23A,
SND23B
48V/3.2A for
SND23A,
137S1278 ヒューズ Fuse 2 SND23B, －
SCN23A,
SCN23C
48V/5.0A for
137S1280 ヒューズ Fuse 2 －
ERS23A
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-44
SP-45
10 CABLE
CIRCUIT
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO.
DIAGRAM
E 1 136Y100431 ケーブル Cable 4 2/10, 3/10, 9/10
E 2 136Y102179 ケーブル Cable 1 4/10
E 3 136Y102539 ケーブル Cable 2 3/10
E 4 136Y102540 ケーブル Cable 4 3/10
E 5 136Y102541 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 6 136Y102542 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 7 136Y102543 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 8 136Y102544 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 9 136Y102545 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 10 136Y102547 ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 11 136Y102609 ケーブル Cable 2 4/10
E 12 136Y102610B ケーブル Cable 1 3/10
E 13 136Y102616A ケーブル Cable 1 2/10
E 14 136Y102618A ケーブル Cable 1 4/10
E 15 136Y8915D ケーブル Cable 1 5/10
E 16 136Y8916A ケーブル Cable 1 3/10
E 17 136Y8917C ケーブル Cable 1 7/10
E 18 136Y8918B ケーブル Cable 1 10/10
E 19 136Y8919D ケーブル Cable 1 5/10
E 20 136Y8920C ケーブル Cable 1 7/10
E 21 136Y8921C ケーブル Cable 1 7/10
E 22 136Y8922A ケーブル Cable 1 10/10
E 23 136Y8924A ケーブル Cable 1 10/10
E 24 136Y8925E ケーブル Cable 1 5/10
E 25 136Y9322B ケーブル Cable 6 6/10
E 26 136Y9330D ケーブル Cable 6 3/10, 5/10
E 27 136Y9331G ケーブル Cable 5 10/10
E 28 136Y9332B ケーブル Cable 3 7/10
E 29 136Y9701 ケーブル Cable 1 4/10
E 30 136Y9702 ケーブル Cable 1 4/10
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-45
SP-46
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Cosel ACE450F
AC4-2HZNM-00-R +24V 赤 RED 136Y102541 SND23A-CN1
PSU29B-CN41 1 1
SLOT 1 2
GND 赤 RED 4
M Module +24V 赤 RED
A 3
GND 赤 RED
2
-
SND23A 3,4,6 A
A1 PSU29B-CN11 4 5
113Y1757
PSU29B-CN11 B1 5
+5V 赤 RED 3
信号名 信号名 GND 赤 RED
Signal description № Signal description
A2 6 6
1
. VCC_+5V A1 B1 GND_+5V
B2
PSU29B 3,4 7 NC
2 NC A2 B2 NC
A3 8 NC
3
.
VCC_+12V A3 B3 GND_+12V B3 113Y100503A
. N.C VCC_+15V A4 B4 GND_15V_COM A4
N.C VCC_-15V A5 B5 NC
SL1_CN2 7 B4
. VCC_+24V A6 B6 GND_+24V
8 VCC_+24V A7 B7 GND_+24V
A5 +24V 赤 RED 136Y102542 SND23B-CN1
. PSU29B-CN42 1 1
B 9 NC A8 B8 NC B5
2
GND 赤 RED 4
B
.
10
.
A6
3
+24V 赤 RED 2 -
SND23B 3,5,7
B6 GND 赤 RED
A7
4
+5V 赤 RED
5
113Y1758
SLOT 2 5 3
B7 GND 赤 RED
N Module A8
6 6
136Y102616 B8
136Y102543
1 PSU-CN3
.
2 PSU-CN3-P PSU-CN3-J
C . 5VDC +R C
3 1 PSU29B-CN12 +24V 赤 RED 橙 ORN 136Y100431 ERS23A-CN1
. N.C 5VDC -R PSU29B-CN2 1 1 1 1
2 GND 赤 RED 橙 ORN
N.C 12VDC +R 2 4 4 4
SL2_CN2 7
. 12VDC -R
3
3
+24V 赤 RED 2 2
橙 ORN
2 -
ERS23A 3,8,9
8 4 GND 赤 RED 橙 ORN
. 15VDC +R 4 5 5 5
113Y1756
9 5 +5V 赤 RED 橙 ORN
. 15VDC -R 5 3 3 3
10 6 GND 赤 RED 橙 ORN
. 24VDC +R 7
6 6 6 6
24VDC -R 8
SLOT 3 N.C 9
Z Module N.C 10
D
AUX 11 D
AUX_GND 12
136Y102544
+24V 赤 RED SCN23A/B/C-CN7
PSU29B-CN3 1 1
GND 赤 RED
1 2 4
. NC 1 PSU29B-CN23 +15V 赤 RED
2
. NC 2
3
AGND 赤 RED
2
-
SCN23C 3,10
3 4 5
. N.C NC 3
5
-15V 赤 RED 3 113Y100212
N.C NC 4 AGND 赤 RED
SL3_CN2 7 6 6
. NC 5
8 7 NC
. NC 6
9 8 NC
E . NC 7 E
10
. NC 8
NC 9
136Y102545
SLOT 4/5 NC 10 +12V 赤 RED CPU23B-CN1
PSU29B-CN1 1 1
2H Module NC 11
2
GND 赤 RED 5
NC 12
7
+5V 赤 RED 2
8
GND 赤 RED 6 -
CPU23B 3
+5VS 赤 RED
9
GND 赤 RED
3
113Y1789
10 7
11
POWERON 赤 RED 4
F 12
GND 赤 RED 8 F
3 NC
1
. 4 NC
2
. 5 NC
3
. N.C 6 NC
N.C
SL4/5_CN2 7
. 1 PSU29B-TP1
8
. 2 （電圧測定用）
9
. 3 (Voltage check)
10 4
.
G 5 G
6
FANG3-P FANG3-J
7 136Y102547
1 +24V 橙 ORN
. 8 PSU29B-CN22 1 4 1 1
2 GND 橙 ORN
CN1 . N.C 9 2 3 2 NC 2
FANG3 119S0049
3 PSU29A-TP1 N.C
. 10 3 NC 2 3 3
信号名 信号名
Signal description № Signal description
11 4 NC 1 4
12
一次側機能コネクタ AUX 1 7 AUX_GND
VCC_+24V 2 8 GND_+24V 機種 2191 ユニット -
VCC_-15V 3 9 GND_15V
H VCC_+15V 4 10 GND_15V 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
VCC_+12V 5 11 GND_+12V
VCC_+5V 6 12 GND_+5V コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 2
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-46
SP-47
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CNG51 CNC52 BCRC1
CNG51-P CNG51-J CNC52-J CNC52-P BCRC1-P BCRC1-J
CPU23B-CN8 CTS 灰 GRY 136Y102539 灰 GRY 136Y9330 灰 GRY 136Y8916 CTS
SND23A-CN81 灰 GRY 136Y102540 CPU23B-CN6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 SG 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 灰 GRY SG
灰 GRY 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 VCC(+5) 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 灰 GRY VCC(+5)
A 灰 GRY 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
BCRC1 A
3 3 TXD 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 灰 GRY TXD
-
SND23A 2,4,6 4
灰 GRY 4
4
RTS 灰 GRY
4 4
灰 GRY
4 4
灰 GRY
4 4
RTS 852N0027
灰 GRY 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
113Y1757 5 5 RXD 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 灰 GRY RXD
灰 GRY 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
6
灰 GRY
6
-
CPU23B 2 7 7 7
INZONE
7 7
N.C N.C NC
8
灰 GRY 8 113Y1789 8 8 8
9
灰 GRY 9
10
灰 GRY 10
CNB61
11
灰 GRY 11
CNB61-J CNB61-P
12
灰 GRY 12
CPU23B-CN9 1
TXD 灰 GRY 136Y102540 1 1
灰 GRY 136Y100431 1
ERS23A-CN81
B
13
灰 GRY 13 2
RXD 灰 GRY 2 2
灰 GRY 2
B
14
灰 GRY 14 3
GND 灰 GRY 3 3
灰 GRY 3 -
ERS23A 2,8,9
灰 GRY GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
15
灰 GRY
15 4
SDA 灰 GRY
4 4
灰 GRY
4
113Y1756
16 16 5 5 5 5
17
灰 GRY 17 6
SCL 灰 GRY 6 6
灰 GRY 6
18
灰 GRY 18
灰 GRY PNL-CN1
19 19 CPU23B-PCI ←→ LAN23A-PCI
灰 GRY PNL-CN1 PNL-CN1
20 20 CPU 信号名 LAN CPU 信号名 LAN
21
CPU23B-CN5 1
POWONSW-N 灰 GRY 136Y102540 1 1
灰 GRY 136Y102610 1
PNL23B-CN1 23B Signal description 23A 23B Signal description 23A
N.C GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
22 2 2 2 2 B1 -12V A1 B1 TRST A1
C 3
+5V 灰 GRY 3 3
灰 GRY 3 B2 TCK A2 B2 12V A2 C
4
+5VS 灰 GRY 4 4
灰 GRY 4 B3 GND A3 B3 TMS A3
SND23B-CN81 灰 GRY 136Y102539 GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY パネル部 B4 TDO A4 B4 TDI A4
1 1 CPU23B-CN7 5 5 5 5
B5 5V A5 B5 5V A5
灰 GRY +12V 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
2 2 6 6 6 6
845Y100113 B6 5V A6 B6 INTA A6
灰 GRY GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY B7 INTB A7 B7 INTC A7
-
SND23B 3
灰 GRY
3 7
SDA 灰 GRY
7 7
灰 GRY
7
B8 INTD A8 B8 5V A8
4 4 8 8 8 8
2,5,7 灰 GRY SCL 灰 GRY 灰 GRY B9 PRSNT1 A9 B9 RESERVED A9
5 5 9 9 9 9
灰 GRY GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY B10 RESERVED A10 B10 +V(I/O) A10
113Y1758 6 6 10 10 10 10 B11 PRSNT2 A11 B11 RESERVED A11
7
灰 GRY 7 B14 RESERVED A14 B14 RESERVED A14
8
灰 GRY 8 B15 GND A15 B15 RST A15
灰 GRY LAN23A-CN1 B16 CLK A16 B16 +V(I/O) A16
D 9 9 D
灰 GRY PCI1 PCI CPU23B-CN2 SCN23C-CN10 B17 GND A17 B17 GNT A17
10 10 1a 1a 1 ←→ B18 REQ A18 B18 GND A18
灰 GRY CPU 信号名 SCN CPU 信号名 SCN CPU 信号名 SCN B19 +V(I/O) A19 B19 RESERVED A19
11 11 2a 2a 2
23B S gnal description 23A 23B Signal description 23A 23B S gnal description 23A
12
灰 GRY 12 3 B20 AD[31] A20 B20 AD[30] A20
灰 GRY LAN23A 1 IMG0 1 41 GND 41 81 GND 81 B21 AD[29] A21 B21 3.3V A21
13 13 62a 62a 4
2 IMG2 2 42 GND 42 82 NC 82 B22 GND A22 B22 AD[28] A22
灰 GRY
14 14 1b 1b 113Y1790 5
3 IMG4 3 43 CPUA0 43 83 GND 83 B23 AD[27] A23 B23 AD[26] A23
灰 GRY 4 IMG6 4 44 CPUA2 44 84 GND 84 B24 AD[25] A24 B24 GND A24
15 15 2b 2b 6
16
灰 GRY 16 7 5 IMG8 5 45 CPUA4 45 85 CKIO 85 B25 3.3V A25 B25 AD[24] A25
灰 GRY 6 IMG10 6 46 GND 46 86 NC 86 B26 C/BE[3] A26 B26 IDSEL A26
17 17 62b 62b 8
7 NC 7 47 SIOTX 47 87 RDL 87 B27 AD[23] A27 B27 3.3V A27
灰 GRY
18 18
8 ODD 8 48 GND 48 88 NC 88 B28 GND A28 B28 AD[22] A28
19
灰 GRY 19 9 GND 9 49 SIORX 49 89 WEOL 89 B29 AD[21] A29 B29 AD[20] A29
E E
20
灰 GRY 20 10 GND 10 50 GND 50 90 NC 90 B30 AD[19] A30 B30 GND A30
11 IMGR0 11 51 NC 51 91 IRQ3 91 B31 3.3V A31 B31 AD[18] A31
12 IMGR2 12 52 NC 52 92 NC 92 B32 AD[17] A32 B32 AD[16] A32
CPU23B-CN2 1 1 SCN23C-CN10 13 IMGR4 13 53 VCC(+5V） 53 93 RESETL 93 B33 C/BE[2] A33 B33 3.3V A33
2 2 14 IMGR6 14 54 VCC(+5V） 54 94 NC 94 B34 GND A34 B34 FRAME A34
15 IMGR8 15 55 VCC(+5V） 55 95 NC 95 B35 IRDY A35 B35 GND A35
3 3 B36 3.3V A36 B36 TRDY A36
4 4 SCN23C 16 IMGR10 16 56 VCC(+5V） 56 96 GND 96
B37 DEVSEL A37 B37 GND A37
-
17 SDA 17 57 VCC(+5V） 57 97 CPUD1 97
2,10 18 SCL 18 58 VCC(+5V） 58 98 CPUD3 98 B38 GND A38 B38 STOP A38
117 117 19 GND 19 59 VCC(+5V） 59 99 CPUD5 99 B39 LOCK A39 B39 3.3V A39
118 118 113Y100212 20 FCLKL 20 60 VCC(+5V） 60 100 CPUD7 100 B40 PERR A40 B40 SDONE A40
21 GND 21 61 IMG1 61 101 GND 101 B41 3.3V A41 B41 SBO A41
F 119 119 22 LCLKL 22 62 IMG3 62 102 GND
-
102 B42 SERR A42 B42 GND A42 F
120 120 23 GND 23 63 IMG5 63 103 CPUA1 103 B43 3.3V A43 B43 PAR A43
24 GND 24 64 IMG7 64 104 CPUA3 104 B44 C/BE[1] A44 B44 AD[15] A44
25 CS5L 25 65 IMG9 65 105 CPUA15 105 B45 AD[14] A45 B45 3.3V A45
26 NC 26 66 IMG11 66 106 GND 106 B46 GND A46 B46 AD[13] A46
27 RDWRL 27 67 HVALID 67 107 NC 107 B47 AD[12] A47 B47 AD[11] A47
28 NC 28 68 VVALID 68 108 GND 108 B48 AD[10] A48 B48 GND A48
PSU29B-CN20 灰 GRY 136Y102540 CNDSU 29 DTAKL 29 69 GND 69 109 NC 109 B49 Ground A49 B49 AD[09] A49
1 1
30 NC 30 70 GND 70 110 GND 110 B52 AD[08] A52 B52 C/BE[0] A52
灰 GRY B53 AD[07] A53 B53 3.3V A53
2 2 31 WE1L 31 71 IMGR1 71 111 NC 111
3
N.C 3 32 NC 32 72 IMGR3 72 112 NC 112 B54 3.3V A54 B54 AD[06] A54
PSU29B 2,4 灰 GRY 33 BSL 33 73 IMGR5 73 113 VCC(+5V) 113 B55 AD[05] A55 B55 AD[04] A55
4 N.C 4
34 NC 34 74 IMGR7 74 114 VCC(+5V) 114 B56 AD[03] A56 B56 GND A56
G 灰 GRY G
113Y100503A 5 5
35 NC 35 75 IMGR9 75 115 VCC(+5V) 115 B57 GND A57 B57 AD[02] A57
灰 GRY B58 AD[01] A58 B58 AD[00] A58
6 6 36 GND 36 76 IMGR11 76 116 VCC(+5V) 116
灰 GRY 37 CPUD0 37 77 DRSTL 77 117 VCC(+5V) 117 B59 +V(I/O) A59 B59 +V(I/O) A59
7 N.C 7
B60 ACK64 A60 B60 REQ64 A60
N.C 38 CPUD2 38 78 DSLEEP 78 118 VCC(+5V) 118
8 N.C 8
39 CPUD4 39 79 GND 79 119 VCC(+5V) 119 B61 5V A61 B61 5V A61
9 9
40 CPUD6 40 80 PCLKL 80 120 VCC(+5V) 120 B62 5V A62 B62 5V A62
10
灰 GRY
機種 2191 ユニット -
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 3
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-47
SP-48
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 SA1
2
3
146S0029
A CNA52 A
CNA52-P CNA52-J SA5
SND23A-CN3 SA_5V 灰 GRY 136Y102609
1 灰 GRY 136Y102179 COM
SINSA1 灰 GRY 1 1 1 128S0934
2 灰 GRY NO
3
GND 灰 GRY 2 2 2
4
SINSA5 灰 GRY
GND 灰 GRY
-
SND23A 2,3,6 5
SA_5V 灰 GRY
6
113Y1757 7
SINSA6 灰 GRY
8
GND 灰 GRY
9
SA_5V 灰 GRY
B B
10
SINSA3 灰 GRY
11
GND 灰 GRY
12
SA_5V 灰 GRY
13
SINSA8 灰 GRY 1 SA6
GND 灰 GRY 2
14 146S0029
15
SA_5V 灰 GRY 3
16
SINSA10 灰 GRY
17
GND 灰 GRY
SA_5V 灰 GRY
18 1 SA3
19
SINSA12 灰 GRY
2
C C
20
GND 灰 GRY
3
146S0029
21
SA_5V 灰 GRY
SINSA16 灰 GRY
22 1 SA2
23
GND 灰 GRY
2
146S0029 1 SA8
24 N.C. 3
2
146S0029
CNA51 3
CNA51-JCNA51-P 1 SA7
SND23A-CN4 1
SA_5V 灰 GRY 136Y102609 1 1
灰 GRY 136Y9701 2
D 2
SINSA2 灰 GRY
2 2
灰 GRY
3
146S0029 1 SA10 D
GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 2
3 3 3 146S0029
4
SA_5V 灰 GRY
4 4
灰 GRY 3
5
SINSA7 灰 GRY
5 5
灰 GRY
6
GND 灰 GRY
6 6
灰 GRY 1 SA11
SA_5V 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 2
7 7 7 146S0029 1 SA12
8
SINSA11 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
8 8
灰 GRY 3
2
9
GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
9 9
灰 GRY
3
146S0029
10
SA_5V 灰 GRY
10 10
灰 GRY
SINSA14 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
11 11 11 1 SA14
12
GND 灰 GRY
12 12
灰 GRY
2
E E
13
SA_5V 灰 GRY
13 13
灰 GRY
3
146S0029
14
SINSA15 灰 GRY
14 14
灰 GRY
15
GND 灰 GRY
15 15
灰 GRY
16
SA_5V 灰 GRY
16 16
灰 GRY
17
SA_5V 灰 GRY
17 17
灰 GRY 1 SA15
SHORT_SA4 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 2
18 18 18 146S0029
19
18-19ショート(SA4) 灰 GRY
19 19
灰 GRY 3
20
GND 灰 GRY
20 20
灰 GRY
21
SINSA4 灰 GRY
21 21
灰 GRY
22
SA_5V 灰 GRY
22 22
灰 GRY
1
F F
23
SA_5V 灰 GRY
23 23
灰 GRY
2
SA4-2
24
SINSA9 灰 GRY
24 24
灰 GRY
3
25
GND 灰 GRY
25 25
灰 GRY
4
146S0083-1
26 N.C. N.C. 26 26 N.C.
1 SA9
2
1 SA4-1 3
146S0029
2
3
146S0082-1
G G
CNA53
CNA53-J CNA53-P 136Y9702
CNA54 136Y102618
灰 GRY
CNA54-P CNA54-J 3 1 1 SA16
灰 GRY
灰 GRY 2 2 2
1 1 1 灰 GRY 146S0029
2 2
灰 GRY
2
1 3 3
灰 GRY
3 3
灰 GRY SA_5V
3
PSU29B 2,3
4 4 4
5 5
灰 GRY SINSA11 5 113Y100503A 機種 2191 ユニット -
6 6
灰 GRY GND 6
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 4
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-48
SP-49
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SND23B-CN5 1
+15V 橙 ORN 136Y9330 1
FFM-CN1 1 SC1
A GND 橙 ORN 2 A
2 2
3
146S0029
SND23B-CN6 1
SUP OK 灰 GRY 136Y9330 1
FFM-CN2 MZ1
5V 灰 GRY
2 2
FFM 1 SC2
3
OKL 灰 GRY
3 2
4
STARTL 灰 GRY
4 118YX256 3
146S0029
5
CWL 灰 GRY
5
6
M0L 灰 GRY
6
7
M1L 灰 GRY
7
B B
M2L 灰 GRY
8 8 1 SC3
-
SND23B 2
146N0016
2,3,7 3
113Y1758 CNC51
CNC51-J CNC51-P
SND23B-CN3 SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY 136Y9330 灰 GRY 136Y8915
1 1 1 1 SC9
2
SINSC1 灰 GRY
2 2
灰 GRY
2
3
GND 灰 GRY
3 3
灰 GRY
3
146N100002
4
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY
4 4
灰 GRY
C C
5
SINSC2 灰 GRY
5 5
灰 GRY
6
GND 灰 GRY
6 6
灰 GRY
7
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY
7 7
灰 GRY
8
SINSC3 灰 GRY
8 8
灰 GRY
9
GND 灰 GRY
9 9
灰 GRY
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 136Y8925
10 10 10 1 SC6
11
SINSC9 灰 GRY
11 11
灰 GRY
2
12
GND 灰 GRY
12 12
灰 GRY
3
146S0029
13
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY
13 13
灰 GRY
14
SINSC6 灰 GRY
14 14
灰 GRY CNC53
D GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY CNC53-P CNC53-J D
15 15 15
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
16 16 16 1 1 1 SC7
17
SINSC7 灰 GRY
17 17
灰 GRY
2 2
灰 GRY
2
18
GND 灰 GRY
18 18
灰 GRY
3 3
灰 GRY
3
146S0029
19
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY
19 19
灰 GRY
4 4
灰 GRY
20
SINSC8 灰 GRY
20 20
灰 GRY
5 5
灰 GRY
21
GND 灰 GRY
21 21
灰 GRY
6 6
灰 GRY
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
22 22 22 7 7 1 SC8
23
SINSC10 灰 GRY
23 23
灰 GRY
8 8
灰 GRY
2
24
GND 灰 GRY
24 24
灰 GRY
9 9
灰 GRY
3
146N0016
E
10 10
灰 GRY E
11 11
灰 GRY
12 12
灰 GRY
1 SC10
2
3
146S0029
1 SG1
2
SND23B-CN4 1
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY 136Y9330 3
146N0016
F F
SINSG1 灰 GRY
2 1 SZ2
3
GND 灰 GRY
2
4
NC 3
146S0029
5
NC CNZ52
6
NC CNZ52-P CNZ52-J
7
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY 136Y9330 1 1
灰 GRY 136Y8919
8
SINSZ2 灰 GRY
2 2
灰 GRY 1 SZ3
GND 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 2
9 3 3 146S0029
10
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY
4 4
灰 GRY 3
11
SINSZ3 灰 GRY
5 5
灰 GRY
G G
12
GND 灰 GRY
6 6
灰 GRY
SCGZ_5V 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
13 7 7 1 SZ5
14
SINSZ5 灰 GRY
8 8
灰 GRY
2
15
GND 灰 GRY
9 9
灰 GRY
3
146S0029
16 NC NC10 10 NC
機種 2191 ユニット -
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 5
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-49
SP-50
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SND23A-CN23 1
MA1A 青 BLU 136Y9322 1
MA1COM 青 BLU
A
2
MA1AL 青 BLU
2 MA1 A
3 3
4
MA1B 青 BLU
4
118SX213
5
MA1COM 青 BLU
5
6
MA1BL 青 BLU
6
-
SND23A 2,3,4
113Y1757
MA2
B SND23A-CN24 1
MA2DRV1 青 BLU 136Y9322 1
B
2
MA2DRV2 青 BLU
2 MA2 118Y100091
SND23A-CN25 1
MA3A 青 BLU 136Y9322 1
2
MA3COM 青 BLU
2
C C
MA3AL 青 BLU
3
MA3B 青 BLU
3 MA3
4 4
5
MA3COM 青 BLU
5
118SX213
6
MA3BL 青 BLU
6
SND23A-CN26 1
MA4A 青 BLU 136Y9322 1
D MA4COM 青 BLU D
2 2
MA4AL 青 BLU
3
MA4B 青 BLU
3 MA4
4 4
5
MA4COM 青 BLU
5
118SX213
6
MA4BL 青 BLU
6
E SOLA1 E
SND23A-CN27 1
+24V(SOLA1) 青 BLU 136Y9322 1
SOLA1DRV 青 BLU
2 NC 2
SOLA1PD 青 BLU
SOLA1
3 3 107Y0183
4
PA1
F F
SND23A-CN28 1
+24V 青 BLU 136Y9322 1
PA1DRV 青 BLU
2 NC 2
PA1 133Y2034
3
+24V 青 BLU
3
4
SVA1DRV 青 BLU
5
+24V 青 BLU
6
SVA2DRV 青 BLU
1
2 SVA1 134S0059
G G
1
2 SVA2 134S0059
機種 2191 ユニット -
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 6
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-50
SP-51
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CNC61
A
CNC61-P CNC61-J MC1 A
SND23B-CN23 1
MC1A 青 BLU 136Y9332 1 1
青 BLU 136Y8917 1
2
MC1COM 青 BLU
2 2
青 BLU
2
3
MC1AL 青 BLU
3 3
青 BLU
3 MC1
MC1B 青 BLU 青 BLU
4 4 4 4 118SX215
5
MC1COM 青 BLU
5 5
青 BLU
5
6
MC1BL 青 BLU
6 6
青 BLU
6
7 7
青 BLU
8 8
青 BLU
9 9
青 BLU
10 10
青 BLU MC3
B B
SND23B-CN24 1
MC3A 青 BLU
11 11
青 BLU
1
2
MC3COM 青 BLU
12 12
青 BLU
2
3
MC3B 青 BLU
13 13
青 BLU
3 MC3
MC3AL 青 BLU 青 BLU
4 14 14 4 118SX214
5
MC3COM 青 BLU
15 15
青 BLU
5
6
MC3BL 青 BLU
16 16
青 BLU
6
7
MC2DRV1 青 BLU
8
MC2DRV2 青 BLU
9
MC4DRV1 青 BLU
10
MC4DRV2 青 BLU
C C
MC2
1
2 MC2
- -
SND23B 2,3,5 118Y100092
113Y1758
MC4
1
D 2 MC4 D
118Y100081
CNZ61
CNZ61-PCNZ61-J MZ2
SND23B-CN25 1
MZ2DRV1 青 BLU 136Y9332 1 1
青 BLU 136Y8920 1
2
MZ2DRV2 青 BLU
2 2
青 BLU
2 MZ2
E E
3
MZ3DRV1 青 BLU
3 3
青 BLU
4
MZ3DRV2 青 BLU
4 4
青 BLU 118YX257
MZ3
1
2 MZ3
136Y8921
118YX257
F 黒 BLK F
.
FG1 FG2
FANG1
FANG-P FANG-J
SND23B-CN26 1
+24V 橙 ORN 136Y9332 4 1 1
G G
NC
2 NC 3 2 NC 2
FANG1 119S0049
3
ALARM 橙 ORN
2 3 3
4
GND 橙 ORN
1 4
機種 2191 ユニット -
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 7
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-51
SP-52
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
ERS23A-CN11 CN1 CN5 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB1 123N0009
INV26A .
CN2 109N100001 CN6 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
ERS23A-CN12 2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB3 123N0009
B B
-
ERS23A 2,3,9
113Y1756
C C
CN1 CN7 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
ERS23A-CN13 .
2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB5 123N0009
.
INV26A
CN2 109N100001 CN8 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
.
ERS23A-CN14 2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB7 123N0009
.
D D
E CN1 CN9 1 白 WHT LAMP_L E
ERS23A-CN15 .
2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB9 123N0009
.
INV26A
CN2 109N100001 CN10 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
.
ERS23A-CN16 2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB11 123N0009
.
F F
CN1 CN12 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
ERS23A-CN17 .
2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB2 123N0009
INV26A .
G G
CN2 109N100001 CN11 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
.
ERS23A-CN18 2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB4 123N0009
.
機種 2191 ユニット -
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 8
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-52
SP-53
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A A
ERS23A-CN19 CN1 CN3 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
.
2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB6 123N0009
INV26A .
CN2 109N100001 CN4 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
.
ERS23A-CN20 2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB8 123N0009
B . B
-
ERS23A 2,3,8
113Y1756
C C
CN1 CN14 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
ERS23A-CN21 .
2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB10 123N0009
INV26A .
CN2 109N100001 CN13 1 白 WHT LAMP_L
.
ERS23A-CN22 2 桃 PIK LAMP_H LAMPB12 123N0009
.
D D
TSWB1
TSWB1-PTSWB1-J TSWB1
ERS23A-CN31 TSW_H 灰 GRY 136Y100431 NC COM 115Y0048
1 1 1 2 1
2
TSW_L 灰 GRY
2 2
感熱スイッチ
3
NC
E E
ERS23A-CN32 1
黒 BLK
2
黒 BLK
THB1 115Y0047
ランプ温度検出
FANB1
ORN
FANB1-P FANB1-J
F F
ERS23A-CN33 1
+24V 橙 136Y100431 4 1
NC
2 NC 3 2 NC 1
ALARM 橙 ORN
FANB1 119S0049
3 2 3 NC 2
4
GND 橙 ORN
1 4
G G
機種 2191 ユニット -
H 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 9
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-53
SP-54
11 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SCN23A/B/C-CN3 1
Vcc+15AS 灰 GRY 136Y9331 1
LDD23A-CN1 光学部 1
PDA23A-CN1
GND_A 灰 GRY 2
PDA23A
A
2
Vcc+15AS 灰 GRY
2
839Y0059 3 A
3 3
113Y1735
-
SCN23C 2,3 4
GND_A 灰 GRY
4
4
Vcc+5AS 灰 GRY
113Y100212 5 5 LDD23A-CN2 VCC_+5AS 黒 BLK 136Y8924
GND_A 灰 GRY 1
6 6 VLD_CE 黒 BLK
LDONH 灰 GRY 2
7 7 PDK 黒 BLK
LDONL 灰 GRY
LDD23A 3
8 8 GND_A 黒 BLK
LDOKH 灰 GRY 4
9 9
113Y1734 GND_LD 黒 BLK LDA23A-CN1
LDOKL 灰 GRY 5 1
10 10 LDK 黒 BLK
LD1FH 灰 GRY 6 2
LDA23A
11 11 LDA 黒 BLK
LD1FL 灰 GRY 7 3
12 12 NC 113Y1739
B
13
LDTMPH 灰 GRY
13
8 B
14
LDTMPL 灰 GRY
14
Vcc+5AS 灰 GRY
15 NC 15
NC
16 NC 16
17
GND_A 灰 GRY
18
NC
19
SSL 黄 YEL
SSH 灰 GRY 注意 SYN23A基板[113Y1736]は、ハーネスが
20 CNZ31 半田付けされた状態です。
CNZ31-J CNZ31-P
1 1 灰 GRY 1
SYN23A-CN1
C C
NC 2 2 NC NC 2
3 3 灰 GRY 3
NC 4 4 NC NC 4
茶 BRN
5
6
5
6 灰 GRY
5
6
SYN23A
113Y1736
CNZ32
SYN23A-CN2 Vcc_+24PS 黒 BLK 136Y8922 POL23A-CN1
CNZ32-J CNZ32-P 1 1
GND_P 黒 BLK
SCN23A/B/C-CN1 NC 1 NC NC SYN23A-CN3 2 2
D
1 1 1 POKL 黒 BLK
POL23A D
N.C NC 2 NC NC 3 3
2 2 2 PONL 黒 BLK
PIDXL 灰 GRY 136Y9331 灰 GRY 4 4
615N0006
3 3 3 3 GND_P 黒 BLK
GND_P 灰 GRY
灰 GRY 5 5
4 4 4 4 PIDXL 黒 BLK
5
PONL 灰 GRY
5 5 灰 GRY 5
6 6
6
POKL 灰 GRY
6 6 灰 GRY 6
7 7
N.C N.C
7
GND_P 灰 GRY
7 7 灰 GRY 7
8 8
8
Vcc+24PS 灰 GRY
8 8 灰 GRY 8
E E
SCN23A/B/C-CN6 1
灰 GRY 136Y9331 1
PMT27B-CN1
灰
集光部
GRY
2 2
3
灰 GRY
3
4
灰 GRY
4
815Y100032 SCN23A/B/C-CN6 ←→ PMT23A/26A-CN1
PMT27B 信号名 信号名
Signal description No. No. Signal description
灰 GRY
113Y100484
31 31 HVMONH 1 18 GND_A
F
32
灰 GRY
32 HVMONL 2 19 Vcc+15AS F
33
灰 GRY
33 +15VOKH 3 20 GND_A
灰 GRY +15VOKL 4 21 Vcc-15AS
34 34 HVSH 5 22 GND_A
HVSL 6 23 Vcc-15AS
Vcc+15AS 7 24 GND_A
GND_A 8 25 Vcc-15AS
Vcc+15AS 9 26 GND_A
GND_A 10 27 ERSH
Vcc+15AS 11 28 ERSL
PMT27B-CN2 GND_A 12 29 LEDSIGH
SCN23A/B/C-CN4 1
PMTH 136Y9331 1 Vcc+15AS 13 30 LEDSIGL
G
GND_A 14 31 LEDONH G
PMTL Vcc+15AS 15 32 LEDONL
2
GND_A 16 33 VIONH
Vcc+15AS 17 34 VIONL
CNZ51 136Y8918
136Y9331 CNZ51-JCNZ51-P SZ1
SCN23A/B/C-CN2 1
SED2L 灰 GRY
1 1
灰 GRY
SED2L 1
SED1L 灰 GRY 灰 GRY 機種 2191 ユニット -
SED1L 2
H
2
VCC 灰 GRY
2 2
灰 GRY VCC
SED23A 名称 回路図 補助名称 TAKUMI H
3 3 3 3
DG 灰 GRY 灰 GRY
DG 113Y1738
4 4 4 4
コード Z22N2191000 Rev. 2
頁
富士フイルム株式会社 10
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-54
SP-55
12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
107Y0183A 03I-9 136Y102610B 10-12 146S0029A 03I-8 315S0050 08D-2 319Y100046 03I-13 322SB062 05D-6
109N100001B 04C-2 136Y102616A 10-13 146S0029A 03I-16 315S0050 08E-2 322N100039A 05G-37 322SB063 05F-11
109N100001B 04C-15 136Y102618A 10-14 146S0029A 03I-18 315S0050 08E-20 322N100044A 03L-19 322SF267 04A-10
113Y100212C 09B-6 136Y102751 13-3 146S0029A 03L-20 315S0050 08F-2 322N100092A 05G-4 322SF268 03F-22
113Y100484B 07-3 136Y8915D 10-15 146S0029A 05B-6 315S0051 03E-26 322N100092A 05G-36 322SP202 03L-32
113Y100503A 09B-25 136Y8916A 10-16 146S0029A 05B-7 315S0051 03F-5 322N100228 03C-10 322SY059 05B-8
113Y1738D 08E-16 136Y8917C 10-17 146S0029A 05F-7 315S0051 03H-3 322N100228 03E-20 322SY063 05C-20
113Y1756H 04C-1 136Y8918B 10-18 146S0029A 05F-9 315S0051 05B-17 322N100229 03H-7 322SY063 09C-5
113Y1757J 09C-12 136Y8919D 10-19 146S0029A 05G-6 315S0051 05C-13 322N100230 03K-3 322SY066 03A-5
113Y1758E/F/G/H 09A-2 136Y8920C 10-20 146S0029A 08C-15 315S0051 05C-23 322N100230 03L-5 322SY066 03I-11
113Y1789N 09B-18 136Y8921C 10-21 146S0082 03D-18 315S0051 05C-27 322N100230 03L-11 322SY066 03K-18
113Y1790E 09B-19 136Y8922A 10-22 146S0083 03D-10 315S0051 05G-2 322N100232 03F-9 322SY092 03B-8
115Y0047B 04C-11 136Y8924A 10-23 146Y0141 08C-8 315S0051 09C-6 322N1017B 03L-3 322SY092 03D-6
115Y0048D 04C-9 136Y8925E 10-24 146Y0142 08C-11 315S0053 03L-33 322N1036B 03A-3 322SY094 03B-4
118SX213 03B-11 136Y9322B 10-25 309N100022 08B-14 315S0053 05B-11 322S067 03K-14 322SY094 03D-4
118SX213 03C-12 136Y9330D 10-26 309S0025 08D-12 315S0053 05C-6 322SB040 03F-1 322SY094 03H-8
118SX213 03E-28 136Y9331G 10-27 309S0025 08F-9 316S0163 02B-25 322SB052 03N-7 322SY097 03L-28
118SX214 05G-35 136Y9332B 10-28 310N100179 03N-10 316S0268 09A-4 322SB052 04A-5 322SY101 03L-9
118SX215 05C-15 136Y9620 13-2 310S7002016 03E-15 316S0268 09C-11 322SB052 05D-4 322SY121 03N-8
118Y100081 05F-1 136Y9701 10-29 310S7002016 03F-4 316S0456 09A-3 322SB052 05D-26 322SY232 05B-15
118Y100091A 03E-16 136Y9702 10-30 310S7002016 03H-5 316S0456 09C-10 322SB052 05D-27 322SY251 03C-15
118Y100092A 05B-25 137S1178 09B-26 310S7002016 03L-15 317N100052 03G-3 322SB052 05D-28 322SY251 03E-25
118YX256G 08B-8 137S1276 09B-28 310Y100005 03L-1 317N1074B 05F-13 322SB052 05D-29 322SY251 03F-2
118YX276A 08C-10 137S1277 04C-14 313N100173 03F-16 319N100346A 03L-23 322SB052 05D-30 322SY251 03H-2
118YX280 08C-9 137S1277 09A-8 313N1263C 08C-18 319N100347E 03L-17 322SB052 08D-4 322SY251 03N-4
119N100012 09B-22 137S1277 09C-15 313N1271E 09C-1 319N100371 05G-9 322SB052 08F-4 322SY303 05B-9
119S0049A 04A-12 137S1278 09A-7 313N1309B 05E-10 319N100372A 05G-10 322SB053 05B-13 322SY303 05C-8
119S0049A 07-10 137S1278 09B-27 313N1310B 05E-9 319N100390A 03F-15 322SB053 05C-4 323N1262B 08B-11
120S3912 09B-23 137S1278 09C-14 313N1315A 08G-12 319N101169 03F-6 322SB053 05C-25 323N1266 08B-13
120S4293 04A-13 137S1280 04C-13 315N0011 03F-13 319N101173A 03A-19 322SB053 05D-9 323S3374A 05C-2
120S4293 07-8 138S0139 02B-26 315N0011 03G-19 319N101175B 03L-16 322SB053 05D-35 324N0080 05C-18
128Y0331 03G-5 138S0515 09A-9 315N0011 03G-31 319N101176 03N-22 322SB053 05D-36 324N0080 05C-22
133Y2034C 03G-4 146N0016A/B 05G-19 315S0050 03B-2 319N101179 03H-6 322SB053 05D-37 324N3194D 05C-1
134Y100046 03G-1 146N0016B 02B-20 315S0050 03D-1 319N101180 03F-17 322SB053 08D-9 324N3198 05C-19
136Y100431 10-1 146N0016B 05B-24 315S0050 03H-14 319N101278 02B-22 322SB053 08F-7 327N0208 04A-9
136Y102179 10-2 146N100002 05E-4 315S0050 03I-10 319N101344 03E-30 322SB056 03N-19 327N0213C 08E-1
136Y102539 10-3 146S0029A 03D-9 315S0050 03K-17 319N101484 03K-16 322SB057 05G-23 327N0217A 05B-4
136Y102540 10-4 146S0029A 03D-11 315S0050 03L-13 319N101485 03K-5 322SB057 08E-4 327N0218A 05B-2
136Y102541 10-5 146S0029A 03D-17 315S0050 03L-34 319N4084B 05B-23 322SB058 03C-11 327N0219B 05B-1
136Y102542 10-6 146S0029A 03E-2 315S0050 03N-11 319N4114B 09C-4 322SB058 03E-21 327N0219B 05B-26
136Y102543 10-7 146S0029A 03E-3 315S0050 04A-11 319N4146D 03A-8 322SB059 05G-26 327N0232B 05G-29
136Y102544 10-8 146S0029A 03E-4 315S0050 05B-18 319N4168D 03A-6 322SB060 08B-2 327N0233 05G-22
136Y102545 10-9 146S0029A 03E-24 315S0050 05D-15 319N4177C 04B-5 322SB060 08C-13 327N0234B 05G-21
136Y102547 10-10 146S0029A 03I-2 315S0050 05G-15 319N4263B 08E-18 322SB061 05B-21 327N0236D 05F-3
136Y102609 10-11 146S0029A 03I-4 315S0050 08B-5 319N4293D 05G-27 322SB061 05C-11 327N0237B 05H-2
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-55
SP-56
12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
327N100247 03E-23 334N100162C 08A-8 341N100277 03B-3 347N1939 05C-3 356N10200A 08F-11 356N9680B 03E-1
327N100285 08E-3 334N100191 03F-18 341N100277 03D-3 347N1939 05C-24 356N10201C 05C-16 356N9685A 03D-8
327N100288 04B-4 334N100192 03F-14 341N100278A 03N-3 347N1944A 08D-8 356N10208A 02B-13 356N9731C 04C-3
327N100289 03B-7 334N100193 03F-19 341N100279 03D-12 347N1944A 08F-6 356N10253B 02A-4 356N9731C 04C-16
327N100289 03C-8 334N100195C 04A-7 341N100323A 03K-7 347N1950E 08A-2 356N10254B 02A-6 356N9808A 03D-19
327N100290 03B-6 334N2392 03K-8 341N100324 03K-9 347N2034 05B-10 356N10261B 05E-5 356N9809F 03L-8
327N100290 03C-9 334N3614C 08D-11 341N1054C 03B-9 347N2034 05C-7 356N10305 05E-3 356N9810D 03I-5
327N100292 03E-14 334N3614C 08F-14 341N1124C 08C-7 347N2067B 05G-30 356N103356A 08A-12 356N9811B 03D-16
327N100292 03F-3 334N3616C/D 03N-21 341N1131C 03D-7 347N2068A 05G-28 356N103357B 08A-7 356N9812C 03I-6
327N100293 03E-13 334N3617B/C 03N-18 341N1132C 03F-7 347N2082B 05G-16 356N103370C 03J-7 356N9813C 09C-7
327N100293 05B-19 334N3619 05A-6 341N1134C 03B-1 350N101279 04A-3 356N103410A 03M-9 356N9814B 03C-13
327N100294A 03C-7 334N3621A 05D-21 341N1134C 03D-2 350N101280 03J-4 356N103587A 08D-5 356N9815A 03E-8
327N100294A 03E-19 334N3622B 05D-20 341N1136D 03I-12 350N101672B 09B-1 356N103587A 08E-12 356N9816C 03C-1
327N100298 03E-22 334N3623A 05D-19 341N1167 03E-11 350N101782 09B-4 356N103587A 08F-15 356N9819D 02B-19
327N100301 05B-3 334N3624B 05D-18 341N1203B 05G-33 350N101784A 09B-3 356N103590 08D-13 356N9820E 02B-17
327N1101607B 03A-2 334N3625C 05D-17 341Y0334A 05C-21 350N101786 09B-8 356N103590 08F-8 356N9851B 04C-6
327N1102410C 05B-16 334N3625C 05D-38 341Y0343 03G-13 350N2642A 09C-13 356N103591B 08E-9 356N9874B 03G-21
327N1102410C 05C-12 334N3677A 03N-25 341Y0352A 08B-6 350N2924C 08B-7 356N103592 05A-4 356N9875B 03G-20
327N1103008A 05F-4 334Y100081 03F-12 341Y0412 08C-4 350N2998C 09A-1 356N103608 03G-15 356N9877B 03I-17
327N1121605C 03N-13 334Y100125 03A-16 341Y0412 08C-20 350N3133B 02B-12 356N103609 03G-14 356Y0356D 03N-24
327N1121608A 03N-14 334Y100152 05A-7 341Y0414 03L-4 350N3134B 02B-9 356N103613 03G-10 356Y0368C 04C-7
327N1121608A 04A-4 334Y3207B 03N-20 342N100050A 03J-2 350N3238C 04C-12 356N104544 04B-6 356Y0405C 04C-10
327N1121608A 05D-2 334Y3208B 03N-17 342Y0035A 05B-14 350N3329B 08B-17 356N104563A 09B-2 356Y0406B 03A-7
327N1121801B 03N-5 334Y3228D 08E-11 342Y100003D 03L-31 350Y100765 03A-13 356N104677A 03E-31 356Y0407A 03A-4
327N6101401D 03A-1 334Y3229B 08D-10 343N0048 01A-2 350Y100766 03A-9 356N104865B 09B-24 356Y0409F 05G-34
327Y0017 05G-25 334Y3229B 08F-13 343N0068A 08D-3 350Y101444 03A-15 356N10492D 05E-6 356Y0415C 08B-9
328N100017 03K-11 334Y5010G 04A-2 343N0068A 08F-3 350Y1761D 04B-2 356N10493A 05E-7 356Y0416B 05F-6
329N0171D 08C-12 335N0095B 03E-10 343N0069A 08D-14 353N100056 03K-4 356N10495C 05F-10 356Y0454 05G-20
329N0176D 05G-31 335N100045 07-5 343N0069A 08F-16 353Y0073G 03A-21 356N10505B 05F-8 356Y0457A 03A-14
329N0177C 05F-5 337N0070A 08B-12 345N100527 07-6 353Y100010H 03L-22 356N10562 08E-14 356Y0458A 03A-10
329N0178C 05B-20 337N0070A 08B-18 345N100713 07-4 355N0752H 05G-18 356N10567B 05E-8 356Y0459 02A-1
329N0178C 05C-9 337N0071B 08B-10 345N1757B 02B-8 356N100842B 05G-5 356N10569B 09B-7 356Y0460 02A-5
329N100039 03D-5 338N100018 03F-20 345N1799A 02B-21 356N10089A 07-9 356N10570C 02A-9 356Y0604 05E-11
329N100048 03H-4 338N100026B 03L-24 345N1925 08F-21 356N100903C 03L-2 356N10761A 01B-18 356Y0605C 05E-12
329N100049 03B-5 340D775280A 03N-12 345Y0320C 01B-12 356N10105A 03I-1 356N10768A 01A-6 356Y0607 05E-15
330S0013 05G-24 341N0937B 03C-6 345Y100041 07-1 356N10106B 03E-17 356N10769A 01B-15 356Y0608A 08G-3
332N0620 04A-8 341N0937B 03E-18 345Y100151 01A-5 356N10107A 03E-29 356N10786A 08A-9 356Y0609 08G-10
332N0640 03C-16 341N100059 05G-8 345Y100152 01B-3 356N10108A 03D-15 356N10787A 09C-17 356Y0610A 01B-20
332N100175B 03K-13 341N100060 05G-38 346N1254E 03A-20 356N10111 03A-23 356N10790A 03A-22 356Y0612 08G-8
332N100175B 03L-27 341N100061 05G-39 346N1405B 05D-22 356N10112A 09C-16 356N10835 02B-24 356Y0613A 08G-1
332N100175B 03M-13 341N100062 05G-7 346Y0083D 03I-15 356N10123B 09B-20 356N9191 05E-19 356Y0615 08C-16
332N100176B 03M-7 341N100068F 03L-14 347N100491 05B-12 356N101345A 03L-21 356N9651F 05E-1 356Y0616A 01A-8
334N0068B 08B-3 341N100076A 05G-3 347N1624A 05C-5 356N10156A 04C-17 356N9658D 05B-5 356Y0617A 01B-17
334N100072D 03F-21 341N100271 03J-9 347N1624A 05C-26 356N10196B 05F-2 356N9661B 08C-14 356Y0622A 08G-6
334N100159 03A-18 341N100275 03F-10 347N1624A 05D-16 356N10199B 05C-14 356N9665C 08E-15 356Y0623 05E-16
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-56
SP-57
12 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No Part No. INDEX No.-Drawing No
356Y100761D 03H-12 363N100699 03J-6 382N100530A 09B-14 386N1372 01A-7 388N2575B 05D-32 898Y100311 14-7
356Y100762C 03H-11 363N10555A 05D-24 382N100531A 09B-12 386N1373 01B-16 388N2576B 05D-5 898Y100312 14-8
356Y100764 03D-14 363N2505B 03L-7 382N100532A 09B-11 386N1377 08B-16 388N2576B 05D-31 898Y100313 14-9
356Y100938 03K-2 363N2507A 03N-16 382N100533A 09B-15 386N1380 08G-5 388N2594B 03N-1 898Y1311 08A-1
356Y100939 03K-10 363N2614C 02B-4 382N100534A 09B-9 386N1388 03L-6 388N2594B 03N-27 898Y1401 09C-19
357N100096B 03L-18 363N2620E/F 08F-17 382N100535A 09B-10 387N0138C 03A-24 388N2610 05G-11
357N100097C 03L-29 363N2664B 08D-15 382N100540 09B-5 387N0187A 02B-2 388N2613 05C-17
357Y100062 03H-10 363N2724E 05F-15 382N1665 01B-13 387N0189A 08E-6 388N2614A 05D-14
358Y0083G 09C-8 363N2725E 05F-12 382N1666A 01B-14 387N0197B 07-12 388N2615A 05D-10
358Y0086B 09A-5 363N2728F 05A-3 382N1667 01A-3 387N100002 08E-19 388N2616 05D-13
358Y0088D 09B-21 363N2825B 05H-4 382N1667 01B-5 387N100023 03J-8 388N2621C 05H-3
360N0475A 03N-6 363N2826A 05H-1 382N1668 01B-4 387N100023 03M-8 388N3106C 03I-3
360N0508A 08C-1 363N2849 08A-10 382N1670 01A-4 387Y0017A 05A-8 388N5421 05B-22
360N0508A 08C-19 363Y0623 05A-1 382N1745B 02A-2 387Y0018A 05A-2 388N5421 05C-10
360N0521E 05D-7 363Y100232 02B-3 382N1746A 02A-7 387Y0019A 05A-9 388Y100002 05G-32
360N0521E 05D-33 364N100102 04A-15 382N1819 02B-18 387Y0020 08F-18 392N0009A 03G-22
360N0537B 05G-12 365N0114A 08A-3 382N1820 02A-8 388N100154 03L-25 392N0009A 03G-32
360N0542D 05D-3 365N100009D 03L-30 382N1839 01B-6 388N100173C 03L-12 405N0186 03H-1
360N0542D 05D-25 368Y0027B 05G-17 382N1844 09C-18 388N100174A 03L-10 405N0186 05E-2
360N0543A 05D-8 369N0275B 03G-2 382N1864 02B-16 388N100176B 05G-1 405N101248 02A-11
360N0543A 05D-34 369N0288A 03G-6 383Y0075A 03N-2 388N100526 08E-8 405N101248 08A-4
360N0547C 05F-16 369N100121C 04A-1 383Y0075A 03N-28 388N100527 08D-1 405N102095 02A-10
360N0548C 05F-14 369Y0027B 04A-14 384N0104 08B-15 388N100527 08D-16 405N2505A 09B-29
360N0553A 05G-14 370N100063A 03G-16 384N0104 08D-17 388N100527 08F-1 405N3178D 01A-1
360N100236 08D-6 370N100063A 03G-26 384N0104 08F-19 388N100527 08F-20 405N3178D 01B-2
360N100236 08F-5 372S0049A 03G-12 384N0105A 02B-23 388N100529 05A-5 405N3178D 01B-22
360Y0137C 04C-5 372S0049A 03G-24 386N100268 03N-23 388N100530A 05D-1 405N3392 04B-3
362N0836F 02B-15 372S0049A 03G-29 386N100269 03G-18 388N100531A 05D-11 405N3485 07-11
362N100237 02B-6 372S0050A 03G-8 386N1266 03A-11 388N100532 03D-13 405N3486 07-2
362N100240A 03M-12 372S0053A 03G-11 386N1292B 02B-14 388N100533 03H-9 407Y0031E 04B-7
362N100288 02B-7 372S0053A 03G-23 386N1292B 08F-12 388N100533 03J-1 602Y100002 08E-17
362N100289 02B-5 372S0053A 03G-28 386N1307A 03B-10 388N100536 03J-5 603Y0070C 04C-8
362N100293B 04A-6 372S0280 03G-7 386N1307A 03C-14 388N100537 03F-8 808Y100083 08A-6
362N100294A 03M-6 375N0099 02C-1 386N1307A 03E-27 388N100538 03F-11 815Y100035B 07-7
362N100297 03J-10 375N0103B 02B-10 386N1322A 03I-7 388N100539 03N-9 839Y100029 06-1
362N100298 03J-3 375N0104B 02B-11 386N1322A 09C-9 388N100540 03N-15 840Y100255 04B-1
362N100299 03H-13 375S0040 03G-9 386N1362 05E-13 388N100546 03K-6 845Y100113A 09A-6
362N100337 03K-12 375S0040 03G-25 386N1363 08G-4 388N100629 03K-1 852Y0074B 05E-18
362S0681 09C-2 375S0040 03G-30 386N1365 05E-17 388N100630 03K-15 898Y0981 13-1
362S0682 09C-3 376N0241B 01A-9 386N1365 08C-17 388N1234 08B-4 898Y100305 14-1
363N100240D 03L-26 382N100266 02A-3 386N1366 08G-2 388N1243 05G-13 898Y100306 14-2
363N100562A 05D-23 382N100266 03A-12 386N1367 01B-19 388N2563A 03E-9 898Y100307 14-3
363N100680C 08A-5 382N100527A 09B-16 386N1369 08G-7 388N2563A 03I-14 898Y100308 14-4
363N100681 08A-11 382N100528A 09B-17 386N1370 05E-14 388N2570 08B-1 898Y100309 14-5
363N100689 08E-7 382N100529A 09B-13 386N1370 08G-11 388N2575B 05D-12 898Y100310 14-6
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-57
SP-58
13 JIG JIG 13
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
E 1 898Y0981 ループケーブル Loop cable 1 {MC:20.}
E 2 136Y9620 ケーブル Cable 1 {MC:20.}
E 3 136Y102751 ケーブル Cable 1 {MC:20.}
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-58
SP-59
14 Other Service Parts
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
1A
E 1 898Y100305 ヒューズキット Fuse Kit 1
20pcs
1.6A
E 2 898Y100306 ヒューズキット Fuse Kit 1
20pcs
2A
E 3 898Y100307 ヒューズキット Fuse Kit 1
20pcs
3.2A
E 4 898Y100308 ヒューズキット Fuse Kit 1
20pcs
5A
E 5 898Y100309 ヒューズキット Fuse Kit 1
20pcs
TP3x6
E 6 898Y100310 ねじキット Screw Kit 1
100pcs
BR4x8
E 7 898Y100311 ねじキット Screw Kit 1
100pcs
DT3x6
E 8 898Y100312 ねじキット Screw Kit 1
100pcs
KL4
E 9 898Y100313 KL リングキット K-CL Ring Kit 1
20pcs
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-59
SP-60
15 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. 1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
● 発注の際は部品コードと発注数量を明記すること。発注数量は 100 個単位とする。 l Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service parts.
Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
● サービス部品の納入時、部品コードをサービスマニュアルで使用されている記号に読
替えるための表が「5.［部品コード］→［記号］読替表」に用意されている。 l The table in“5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table”is provided for converting
{SP:15_5. } the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used in the service manual.
{SP:15_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table}
2. 2. Screws
● サービス部品一覧表の中のねじの記載方法の例を以下に示す。この記載方法はサービ l The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are described. This
スマニュアル内の記載方法と同じである。 description method is the same as that in this Service Manual.
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-60
SP-61
15 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
Reference information Reference information
Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
Special 十字穴付なべ小ね ステンレス
308S0073 SCS-M4X10-F *N2x6 301S2000206
4x10 じ 不動態化処理
鋼 Cross recessed Stainless steel
*N4x8 301S2000408
亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク pan head screw Passive state treatment
ロメート ステンレス
ばね座金組込み 六角ボルト
色：うすい白色 不動態化処理
B2x6 308S2780206 十字穴付なべ小ね *R8x20 304S1000820 Hexagon head
Steel Stainless steel
じ screw
Zinc plating/White trivalent Passive state treatment
（ダブルセムスね
chromating 鋼
じ） TP3x6 308S0414
Color: Light white 亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク
Cross recessed
B2x6 308S3420206 pan head screw ロメート
B3x6 308S3380306 鋼 色：うすい白色
with spring and TP4x8 308S0424
クロメート 六角頭 TP ネジ Steel
B3x8 308S3380308 plain washers
Steel Cross recessed Zinc plating/White trivalent
B3x12 308S3380312
Chromating TP4x12 308S0426 hexagon head TP chromating
B3x16 308S3380316 screw Color: Light white
BR3x6 308S0401 鋼 鋼
ばね座金 + みがき丸座金 色：黒色
BR3x10 308S0403 亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク TP3x6 308S0561
Steel
BR3x12 308S0404 ロメート Color: Black
座金組込み
色：うすい白色 ステンレス
BR3x22 308S0431 十字穴付六角ボル
Steel バインド小ねじ 不動態化処理
ト V3x4 301S4990304
BR4x8 308S0406 Zinc plating/White trivalent Bind screw Stainless steel
Cross recessed
chromating Passive state treatment
BR4x25 308S0411 hexagon head
Color: Light white
screw with spring 六角穴付き止めネ 鋼
鋼 ジ 亜鉛メッキ + リン酸塩処
and plain washers
ばね座金 + みがき丸座金 （W ポイント） 理
BR5x12 308S9420512 クロメート WP3x4 303S0102
Hexagon socket Steel
Steel head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
Chromating (double -point) treatment
鋼
亜鉛メッキ + 白色 3 価ク
六角頭デルタイト ロメート
ネジ 色：うすい白色
DT3x6 306S0101
Hexagon head Steel
deltight screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
chromating
Color: Light white
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-61
SP-62
15 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
3.
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
Reference information Reference information
Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
ステンレス
Special
309S0025 WW-16 六角ナット 不動態化処理
Washer *Na8 305S1110008
Hexagon nut Stainless steel
Passive state treatment
Special
309S0077 STW-FT60-025
Washer
Special
315S0052 1480201-48040
Washer
*E3 315S3360030
ステンレス
E 形止め輪 不動態化処理
*E4 315S3360040
E ring Stainless steel
Passive state treatment
*E6 315S3360060
KL3 315S0053
KL リング
KL4 315S0050
K-CL ring
KL6 315S0051
*SW4 309S0220004 ステンレス
ばね座金 不動態化処理
Spring washer Stainless steel
*SW8 309S0220008 Passive state treatment
*W4 309S0120004 ステンレス
平座金 不動態化処理
Plain washer Stainless steel
*W8 309S0110008 Passive state treatment
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-62
SP-63
15 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
4.
4. Wiring Parts
Reference information Reference information
Symbol Parts code mm Symbol Parts code mm
Approx. external Approx. external
Shape Parts name Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. dimensions (mm), etc.
コードクランプ コードクランプ
EDS-0607U 316S2027 14x9x4 (WxHxD) LAMS-05 318S1164 9x23x5 (WxHxD)
Code clamp Code clamp
EDS-1 316S1121 20x10x4 (WxHxD) PCB-3S 316S0268 15x13x7 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ
Code clamp コードクランプ
Code clamp
EDS-2 316S1122 20x10x5 (WxHxD)
PCB-6S 316S0464 15x18x7 (WxHxD)
コードクランプ
EDS-17L 318S1037 55x26x5 (WxHxD)
Code clamp コードクランプ
SB-4025 316S0029 48x33x6 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
T-18R 316S1001 束線部品 100x2.5 (LxW)
T-30R 316S1002 Cable tie 152x3.5 (LxW)
コードクランプ
KGES6 316S0456 11x22x10 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
WPC-21SP 316S1263 23x11x11 (WxHxD)
LWS-3S 316S1037
コードクランプ
13x10x29 (WxHxD)
Code clamp
LWS-3S V0 316S1242
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-63
SP-64
15 List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
5.
この表は、サービス部品納入時、サービス部品の部品コードをサービスマニュアル記載
の記号に読替えるときに使用すること。
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table
Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used
in this Service Manual.
Screws Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts Wiring Parts
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
301S2000206 *N2x6 308S3420206 B2x6 315S3360030 *E3 316S0029 SB-4025
301S2000408 *N4x8 308S9420512 BR5x12 315S3360040 *E4 316S0093 4EP-11
301S4990304 V3x4 309S0025 WW-16 315S3360060 *E6 316S0146 BS-04
303S0102 WP3x4 309S0077 STW-FT60-025 305S1110008 *Na8 316S0268 PCB-3S
304S1000820 *R8x20 315S0052 1480201-4804 309S0220004 *SW4 316S0456 KGES-6
306S0101 DT3x6 309S0220008 *SW8 316S0464 PCB-6S
308S0073 SCS-M4x10-F 309S0120004 *W4 316S1001 T-18R
308S0401 BR3x6 309S0110008 *W8 316S1002 T-30R
308S0403 BR3x10 315S0053 KL3 316S1037 LWS-3S
308S0404 BR3x12 315S0050 KL4 316S1121 EDS-1
308S0406 BR4x8 315S0051 KL6 316S1122 EDS-2
308S0411 BR4x25 316S1242 LWS-3S V0
308S0414 TP3x6 316S1263 WPC-21SP
308S0424 TP4x8 316S2027 EDS-0607U
308S0426 TP4x12 318S1037 EDS-17L
308S0431 BR3x22 318S1164 LAMS-05
308S2780206 B2x6
308S3380306 B3x6
308S3380308 B3x8
308S3380312 B3x12
308S3380316 B3x16
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-64
SP-65
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-65
SP-66
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-66
SP-67
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01C
08.10.2010 FM5646
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual SP-67
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Preventive Maintenance (PM)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
PM-1
1. Preventive Maintenance Program 1.2 Notations of Intervals
In this volume, either of the following symbols is indicated for each maintenance program.
Before initiating any maintenance operation, you should become familiar with the following
1.1 How To Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume symbols.
- Perform the relevant procedures in accordance with the interval notations ( : Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed when the
). machine has been used for one year or when a process count of about 8,000 is
reached.
- "Preventive Maintenance Program List" is comprised of programs classified by intervals of
one year (1Y), two years (2Y), three years (3Y), four years (4Y), and five years (5Y). Since : Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed when the
the maintenance programs differ depending upon the respective intervals, they should be machine has been used for two years or when a process count of about 16,000 is
performed according to the Program List. reached.
: Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed when the
machine has been used for three years or when a process count of about 24,000 is
reached.
: Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed when the
machine has been used for four years or when a process count of about 32,000 is
reached.
: Indicates a preventive maintenance program that must be performed when the
machine has been used for five years or when a process count of about 40,000 is
reached.
REFERENCE
The above process counts are based on a maximum daily process count of 40.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.3 Preventive Maintenance Program List 1.3.1 Maintenance Programs for the First Year
l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed when the machine has
u INSTRUCTION u been used for one year or when a process count of about 8,000 is reached
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and additional
( )
protective ground wire connections and securing the parts with retaining screws. To maintain Reference Time Periodic
safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are Maintenance program Remarks
section requirements replacement parts
restored to states existing upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures
to the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. 2.1 Backing Up the Log
2.2 Checking the Error Log
Perform the specified preventive maintenance programs at the predefined intervals or when 2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting
the predefined process count is reached. Time
The preventive maintenance programs to be performed at various intervals are listed below. 3. Checking the Image/Conveyance
3.1 Check Before Procedures
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance
3.3 Checking the Output Characters
4. Pulling Out the Machine
7. Cassette Set Unit
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
8. Erasure Unit
8.1 Removing the Filter
8.2 Cleaning the Filter
8.4 Reinstalling the Filter
8.5 Cleaning the Brush Roller
8.6 Reinstalling the Brush Roller Assembly
8.8 Reinstalling the Reflection Plate
8.9 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
14. Securing the Machine
15. Cleaning the Mechanical Filter
16. Checking the Image/Conveyance
17. Confirming the S Value
18. Checking the Error Log
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-2
PM-3
1.3.2 Maintenance Programs for the Second Year Reference
Maintenance program
Time Periodic
Remarks
section requirements replacement parts
l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed when the machine has
been used for two years or when a process count of about 16,000 is reached 8. Erasure Unit
( ) 8.1 Removing the Filter
8.3 Replacing the Filter Filter
Reference Time Periodic
Maintenance program Remarks 8.4 Reinstalling the Filter
section requirements replacement parts
8.5 Cleaning the Brush Roller
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures
8.6 Reinstalling the Brush Roller Assembly
2.1 Backing Up the Log
8.7 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
2.2 Checking the Error Log
8.8 Reinstalling the Reflection Plate
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting
Time 8.9 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning
3.1 Check Before Procedures
Conveyor Unit
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance 9.2 Cleaning the Guide
3.3 Checking the Output Characters 9.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers
4. Pulling Out the Machine 9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Rollers,
5. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch Antistatic Members, and Guide
10. Subscanning Unit
6. Removing the Covers
10.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor
6.1 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Year)
Guide Assembly
7. Cassette Set Unit 10.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Guide
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit 10.3 Removing the Scanning Optics Unit
7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit 10.4 Removing the Subscanning Unit
7.3 Preparation for Cleaning of Suction 10.5 Cleaning the Guides, Center Rollers,
Cups and Rubber Rollers
7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Left-Hand) 10.6 Cleaning the Flywheel (Large) and
Kapton® Belt
7.5 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Right-
Hand) 10.7 Cleaning the Flywheel (Small) and
Rubber Belt
7.6 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers (Small)
10.8 Cleaning Inside the Machine
7.7 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers
10.9 Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit
7.8 Installing the Components 10.10 Reinstalling the Scanning Optics Unit
7.9 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and 11. Light-Collecting Guide
Shutter
11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Light-
7.10 Cleaning inside the Machine and the Collecting Guide
Antistatic Member 11.2 Cleaning the Post-Reading Conveyor
7.11 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit Guide Assembly
7.12 Cleaning the Dust-Tight Cover 11.3 Reinstalling the Post-Reading
Assembly Conveyor Guide Assembly
11.4 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning
Conveyor Unit
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-3
PM-4
Reference Time Periodic l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for two years or when
Maintenance program Remarks
section requirements replacement parts a process count of about 16,000 is reached
12. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers
Reference section Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
12.1 Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and
Louvers (2nd/4th Year) 8.3 Filter 603Y0070* 1
13. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch
14. Securing the Machine
15. Cleaning the Mechanical Filter
16. Checking the Image/Conveyance
17. Confirming the S Value
18. Checking the Error Log
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-4
PM-5
1.3.3 Maintenance Programs for the Third Year l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for three years or
l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed when the machine when a process count of about 24,000 is reached
has been used for three years or when a process count of about 24,000 is Reference section Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
reached ( )
7.15 IP suction pump 133Y2034* 1
Reference Time Periodic
Maintenance program Remarks
section requirements replacement parts
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures
2.1 Backing Up the Log
2.2 Checking the Error Log
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting
Time
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance
3.1 Check Before Procedures
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance
3.3 Checking the Output Characters
4. Pulling Out the Machine
7. Cassette Set Unit
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
7.13 Replacing the IP Suction Pump IP suction pump
8. Erasure Unit
8.1 Removing the Filter
8.2 Cleaning the Filter
8.4 Reinstalling the Filter
8.5 Cleaning the Brush Roller
8.6 Reinstalling the Brush Roller Assembly
8.8 Reinstalling the Reflection Plate
8.9 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
14. Securing the Machine
15. Cleaning the Mechanical Filter
16. Checking the Image/Conveyance
17. Confirming the S Value
18. Checking the Error Log
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-5
PM-6
1.3.4 Maintenance Programs for the Fourth Year Reference
Maintenance program
Time Periodic
Remarks
section requirements replacement parts
l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed when the machine has
been used for four years or when a process count of about 32,000 is reached 8. Erasure Unit
( ) 8.1 Removing the Filter
8.3 Replacing the Filter Filter
Reference Time Periodic
Maintenance program Remarks 8.4 Reinstalling the Filter
section requirements replacement parts
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 8.5 Cleaning the Brush Roller
2.1 Backing Up the Log 8.6 Reinstalling the Brush Roller Assembly
2.2 Checking the Error Log 8.7 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting 8.8 Reinstalling the Reflection Plate
Time 8.9 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit
3.1 Check Before Procedures
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance Conveyor Unit
3.3 Checking the Output Characters 9.2 Cleaning the Guide
4. Pulling Out the Machine 9.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers
5. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch 9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Rollers,
6. Removing the Covers Antistatic Members, and Guide
6.1 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Year) 10. Subscanning Unit
10.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor
7. Cassette Set Unit
Guide Assembly
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
10.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Guide
7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit
10.3 Removing the Scanning Optics Unit
7.3 Preparation for Cleaning of Suction
Cups 10.4 Removing the Subscanning Unit
7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Left-Hand) 10.5 Cleaning the Guides, Center Rollers,
and Rubber Rollers
7.5 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Right-
Hand) 10.6 Cleaning the Flywheel (Large) and
Kapton® Belt
7.6 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers (Small)
10.7 Cleaning the Flywheel (Small) and
7.7 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers
Rubber Belt
7.8 Installing the Components
10.8 Cleaning Inside the Machine
7.9 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and
10.9 Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit
Shutter
10.10 Reinstalling the Scanning Optics Unit
7.10 Cleaning inside the Machine and the
Antistatic Member 11. Light-Collecting Guide
7.11 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit 11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Light-
7.12 Cleaning the Dust-Tight Cover Collecting Guide
Assembly 11.2 Cleaning the Post-Reading Conveyor
Guide Assembly
11.3 Reinstalling the Post-Reading
Conveyor Guide Assembly
11.4 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning
Conveyor Unit
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-6
PM-7
Reference Time Periodic l Parts to be replaced when the machine has been used for four years or when
Maintenance program Remarks
section requirements replacement parts a process count of about 32,000 is reached
12. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers Reference section Parts Name Parts No. Qty. Remarks
12.1 Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and
8.3 Filter 603Y0070* 1
Louvers (2nd/4th Year)
13. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch
14. Securing the Machine
15. Cleaning the Mechanical Filter
16. Checking the Image/Conveyance
17. Confirming the S Value
18. Checking the Error Log
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-7
PM-8
1.3.5 Maintenance Programs for the Fifth Year
l Preventive maintenance programs to be performed when the machine has
been used for five years or when a process count of about 40,000 is reached
( )
Reference Time Periodic
Maintenance program Remarks
section requirements replacement parts
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures
2.1 Backing Up the Log
2.2 Checking the Error Log
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting
Time
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance
3.1 Check Before Procedures
3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance
3.3 Checking the Output Characters
4. Pulling Out the Machine
7. Cassette Set Unit
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
8. Erasure Unit
8.1 Removing the Filter
8.2 Cleaning the Filter
8.4 Reinstalling the Filter
8.5 Cleaning the Brush Roller
8.6 Reinstalling the Brush Roller Assembly
8.8 Reinstalling the Reflection Plate
8.9 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit
14. Securing the Machine
15. Cleaning the Mechanical Filter
16. Checking the Image/Conveyance
17. Confirming the S Value
18. Checking the Error Log
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-8
PM-9
2. Details of Maintenance Procedures 3. Select “LOG-ALL” from the BACKUP items, and click on [EXECUTE].
2.1 Backing Up the Log
1. Power ON the FCR-MB 201.
2. Open the Windows start menu window, designate "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\
TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" in the "Start Search" column, and press the [Enter]
key.
→ The RU PC-TOOL window opens.
→ The window for selecting the location for backing up the data appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-9
PM-10
4. Click on and select the location (drive and directory) where the data is to be 5. Click on [OK].
backed up. After making the selection, click on [OK]. Confirm the location for
backing up the data, and then click on [OK].
→ The display returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.
→ The Completed window appears after backup is completed.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-10
PM-11
2.2 Checking the Error Log 3. Select the log, and check to make sure that the error log is not abnormal.
1. Click on [ERROR DB].
→ The ERROR-DB window opens.
2. Click on [UPDATE].
4. Click on .
→ The display returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-11
PM-12
2.3 Checking the Erasure Lamp Lighting Time 2. Click on the [LAMP] tab, and confirm the total count for the erasure lamp lighting.
After the confirmation, click on [CANCEL].
1. Click on [EDIT HISTORY].
→ The EDIT HISTORY window opens.
→ The display returns to the RU PC-TOOL window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-12
PM-13
3. Checking the Image/Conveyance 3.2 Checking the Image/Conveyance
The following checks are made in this section. 1. Read the IP prepared in “3.1 Check before procedures” by the CL menus “QC/
- Conveyance checks TEST” and “Image Format” or “Image Format-2” and “SINGLE”, and output an im-
- Image checks age.
- Check for output characters
3.1 Check Before Procedures
u NOTES u
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in the
user’s site should be employed.
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data exposed.
1. Shut down the CL.
2. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power, and then turn it ON.
3. Make sure that the RU normally starts up, and the operation panel turns to the
“READY” window.
4. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and images accumu-
lated on the IP to be used.
{Instruction Manual}
5. Perform IP exposures.
u INSTRUCTIONS u
- Expose two IPs of maximum sizes to be used at the user’s site to the following doses.
- With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and the sec-
ond in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
- X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
- Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 14"x14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
Voltage 80 kVp
Amperage 50 mA
Time 0.013 sec
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-13
PM-14
2 Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output film or on the 3 Check the image format.
image displayed on the image monitor. Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP,
from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u
There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction. u CHECK u
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the two IPs If anything abnormal is found:
of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused by the machine {Troubleshooting}
or X-ray tube.
l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
u NOTE u
→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending
{Troubleshooting} on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using
the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the
l If positions of uneven density difference are different actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-14
PM-15
3.3 Checking the Output Characters
Make sure that the film character format information that was set in “Outputting the Film for
Image Check” is displayed on the output film. Also verify that none of the characters look
blurred or broken.
1 Check the output characters.
u INSTRUCTION u
Check the following.
- The character format information that has been set is correct.
- There is nothing abnormal, such as blurred or broken characters.
If anything abnormal is found:
{Troubleshooting}
REFERENCE
The details of output characters and the character display locations are as follows.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-15
PM-16
4. Pulling Out the Machine
1. Pull out RU from FCR-MB 201. Refer to FCR-MB 201 Service Manual for detailed
procedures.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-16
PM-17
5. Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch
1. Turn OFF the high-voltage
switch (S1) on the SCN board.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-17
PM-18
6. Removing the Covers 3. Remove the screws to remove
the fan assembly.
6.1 Removing the Covers (2nd/4th Year)
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3 4. Take the procedures from 5 to 9
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
2. Unclamp the clamp, and 5. Remove the screws to remove
disconnect the connectors. the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-18
PM-19
6. Unclamp the clamps. 9. Slightly raise the bracket and
remove it.
7. Unclamp the clamps. 10. Take the procedures from 11 to
13 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
8. Loosen the top and bottom 11. Remove the screws to remove
screws, and remove the middle the bracket.
screw.
u NOTE u
Just loosen the top and bottom
screws, but do not remove them.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-19
PM-20
12. Unclamp the clamps. 14. Take the procedures from 15 to
22 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
13. Remove the screws to remove 15. Remove the screw, and remove
the bracket. the board box cover.
u NOTE u
Remove the bracket straight in the
direction indicated by the arrow.
Otherwise, the connector and the
bracket might come into contact,
and the connector get damaged.
16. Disconnect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-20
PM-21
17. Disconnect the connector. 20. Push the hook of the
connectors and disconnect
them.
18. Remove the connector (CN4) 21. Disconnect the connectors.
straight, holding the shaded
portion in the figure.
u NOTE u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to disconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Be sure to remove the connector
straight. If it is removed slantly, a
failure in connection may occur,
causing an error.
19. Disconnect the connectors. 22. Disconnect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-21
PM-22
23. Remove the screws to remove 26. Remove the retaining screws of
the front cover plate. the dust-tight cover assembly
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL A.
24. Remove the screws to remove 27. Remove the retaining screws of
the rear cover plate. the dust-tight cover assembly
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL B.
25. Take the procedure 26 and 27
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-22
PM-23
28. Hold the dust-tight cover
assembly on the position
indicated in the figure, and lift
it straight up to remove, while
exercising care not to tilt the
assembly.
u NOTE u
Be sure to lift the dust-tight cover
assembly straight without tilting
it, to remove it. Otherwise, the
sensor or the gear might get
damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-23
PM-24
7. Cassette Set Unit 3. Disconnect the connectors.
7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit
u NOTE u
When removing the erasure unit, exercise care in handling as the unit is hot.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5 4. Remove the retaining screws of
from the direction indicated by the erasure unit.
the arrow in the figure.
2. Remove the screw and unclamp 5. Holding the erasure unit on the
the clamp. position indicated in the figure,
pull it out.
u NOTE u
When removing the erasure unit,
exercise care in handling as the
unit is hot.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-24
PM-25
7.2 Removing the Cassette Set Unit 2. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
u NOTE u
Since the cassette set unit is a heavy object, be careful about the following points when
removing, reinstalling and moving.
- Secure a sufficient working space before the operation.
- Be sure to follow the procedures of “7.1 Removing the Erasure Unit” before removing the
cassette set unit.
{PM:7.1_Removing the Erasure Unit}
- Hold the position where the “Hold here” label is applied.
- Lift the unit in a natural posture.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 4
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-25
PM-26
3. Disconnect the connector. 4. Unclamp the clamp, and
Put the cable aside out of the disconnect the connector
housing for the protection of while pushing the hook of
the cable. the connector. Put the cable
aside out of the housing for the
u NOTE u protection of the cable.
Be sure to put the cable aside out
of the housing. Otherwise, the u NOTES u
cable and the connector might get - As the working space is small,
caught when removing/reinstalling exercise care not to get injured
the cassette set unit. by peripheral components when
disconnecting the connector.
- Be sure to put the cable
aside out of the housing.
Otherwise, the cable and the
connector might get caught
when removing/reinstalling the
cassette set unit.
5. Remove the retaining screws of
the cassette set unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-26
PM-27
6. Take the procedure 7 from the 8. Take the procedure 9 from the
direction indicated by the arrow direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. in the figure.
u NOTE u
The heavy object is to be handled
in the following procedure. Be
sure to work from the direction as
instructed.
7. Remove the retaining screws of
the cassette set unit.
CAUTION
Never remove red painted screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-27
PM-28
9. Hold the cassette set unit on
the positions indicated in the
figure. Lift the cassette set unit
above the housing frame and
remove it.
u NOTES u
- Since the cassette set unit is a
heavy object, be sure to secure
a sufficient working space
before the operation, and work
in a natural posture.
- Be sure to lift the cassette set
unit above the housing frame
before removing. If the cassette
set unit has not been lifted high
enough, the unit might come
into contact with the housing,
causing the damage.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-28
PM-29
7.3 Preparation for Cleaning of Suction Cups 2. Lift the board box and remove
the safety bar from the retainer
by means of a screwdriver or
the like. Lift the safety bar and
hook it on the bracket of the
board box.
u NOTE u
Be sure to hook the safety bar on
the bracket of the board box to
prevent the board box from falling
down. Otherwise, the board
box might fall down, hurting the
operator.
1. Remove the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-29
PM-30
3. Manually rotate the gear of the 4. Take the procedures from 5 to 9
motor, and check to make sure from the direction indicated by
that the debris fall prevention the arrow in the figure.
shutter assembly has moved to
its closed position.
CAUTION
Do not work with your head put
under the board box. The safety
bar supporting the board box might
come off, causing you to get injured.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the
debris fall prevention shutter 5. Unclamp the clamp, and
assembly has moved to its closed disconnect the connector.
position. Otherwise, the tip of
the IP removal arm comes into
contact, preventing the arm from
moving.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-30
PM-31
6. Remove the screws to remove 8. Pull out the bracket, and
the bracket. unclamp the clamp.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
The removed bracket has the Since the working space is small,
cable left attached. Exercise care exercise care not to get injured
not to damage the cable. on your hands by the edge of the
bracket.
9. Disconnect the connector.
7. Remove the retaining screws of
the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-31
PM-32
7.4 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Left-Hand) 2. Move the IP removal arm while
holding the arm (white) to a
position where the driver can
access the screws of the IP
removal arm.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-32
PM-33
3. Remove the retaining screws 4. Clean the suction cup (left-
of the suction cup assembly hand) with a moistened cloth.
(left-hand). Hold the assembly Check the mounted orientation
on the position indicated in of the KL clip.
the figure, and pull out the
assembly (left-hand) from u NOTES u
below the IP removal link shaft. - Exercise care not to excessively
pull out the suction cup
u NOTE u assembly, causing the hose to
Exercise care not to damage the be damaged.
hose when pulling out the suction - Check to make sure that the KL
cup assembly. clip is attached in the orientation
indicated in the figure.
Otherwise, the suction cup
assembly cannot be correctly
mounted on the IP removal arm.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-33
PM-34
5. Reinstall the suction cup 6. Pull the hose in the direction
assembly (left-hand) on the IP indicated by the arrow, and
removal arm from below the IP make sure that there is no
removal link shaft. Make sure excessive slack of the hose in
that the suction cup assembly the region surrounded by the
(left-hand) is correctly mounted dotted line in the figure.
on the half punches, before
retaining with the screws. u NOTE u
If the hose has an excessive
u NOTES u slack, the hose might get
- Exercise care not to damage damaged as it is pulled when the
the hose when reinstalling the IP removal arm is moved.
suction cup assembly on the IP
removal arm.
- Be sure to verify that the suction
cup assembly has been correctly
mounted on the half punches,
before retaining with the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-34
PM-35
7.5 Cleaning the Suction Cups (Right-Hand) 2. Remove the retaining screws
of the suction cup assembly
(right-hand). Hold the assembly
on the position indicated in
the figure, and pull out the
assembly (right-hand) from
below the IP removal link shaft.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
hose when pulling out the suction
cup assembly.
1. Remove the screws, to remove
the guide.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-35
PM-36
3. Clean the suction cup (right-
hand) with a moistened cloth.
Check the mounted orientation
of the KL clip.
u NOTES u
- Exercise care not to excessively
pull out the suction cup
assembly, causing the hose to
be damaged.
- Check to make sure that the KL
clip is attached in the orientation
indicated in the figure.
Otherwise, the suction cup
assembly cannot be correctly
mounted on the IP removal arm.
4. Reinstall the suction cup 5. Pull the hose in the direction
assembly (right-hand) on the indicated by the arrow, and
IP removal arm from below make sure that there is no
the IP removal link shaft. excessive slack of the hose in
Make sure that the suction the region surrounded by the
cup assembly (right-hand) is dotted line in the figure.
correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with u NOTE u
the screws. If the hose has an excessive
slack, the hose might get
u NOTES u damaged as it is pulled when the
- Exercise care not to damage IP removal arm is moved.
the hose when reinstalling the
suction cup assembly on the IP
removal arm.
- Be sure to verify that the suction
cup assembly has been correctly
mounted on the half punches,
before retaining with the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-36
PM-37
6. Insert the tip of the guide into
an aperture of the bracket
before mounting the guide. Be
sure to verify that the guide is
correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with
the screws.
u NOTE u
Be sure to verify that the guide
is correctly mounted on the half
punches, before retaining with the
screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-37
PM-38
7.6 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers (Small) 2. Clean the rubber roller (small)
with a moistened cloth.
1. Hold the arm (white) to lift
the IP removal arm to the
uppermost position.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-38
PM-39
7.7 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers 2. Hold the arm (white) to move
the IP removal arm to the
lowermost position.
1. Push the moistened cloth
against the rubber roller. Clean
the roller while rotating it by
the handle.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage
or pull the hose when pushing
the moistened cloth against the
rubber roller.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-39
PM-40
7.8 Installing the Components 3. Check to make sure that the
bracket is correctly mounted
on the half punches, before
retaining with the screws.
u NOTE u
Always make sure that the
bracket is correctly mounted on
the half punches, before retaining
with the screws.
1. Connect the connector. 4. Reinstall the bracket, and retain
with the screws.
2. Check to make sure that the 5. Connect the connector, and
cable tie is positioned as retain the cable with the clamp.
indicated in the figure. Then,
retain the cable with the
clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-40
PM-41
6. While holding the position
indicated in the figure and
supporting the board box,
remove the safety bar. Lower
the safety bar and fix to the
retainer. Then lower the board
box.
7. Reinstall the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-41
PM-42
7.9 Cleaning the Antistatic Member and Shutter
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
2. Clean the antistatic member
and the shutter with a vacuum
cleaner.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-42
PM-43
7.10 Cleaning inside the Machine and the Antistatic Member
1. Clean the inside of the machine
and the antistatic member with
a vacuum cleaner to remove
dust entering from the outside
of the machine.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-43
PM-44
7.11 Reinstalling the Cassette Set Unit
u NOTE u
Since the cassette set unit is a heavy object, be careful about the following points when
removing, reinstalling and moving.
- Secure a sufficient working space before the operation.
- Hold the position where the “Hold here” label is applied.
- Lift the unit in a natural posture.
1. Hold the cassette set unit on
the positions indicated in the
figure. Lift the cassette set
unit above the housing frame,
and lower it halfway with the
edge of the frame as a guide.
Push the unit against the left-
hand and then inner sides of
the housing in this order, and
vertically lower the unit for
reinstallation.
u NOTES u
- Always lift the cassette set unit
above the housing frame before
reinstalling. If the cassette set
unit has not been lifted high
enough, the unit might come
into contact with the housing,
causing the damage.
- Be sure to push the unit against
the left-hand and then inner
side of the housing in this order.
Otherwise, the cassette set unit
cannot be reinstalled in place,
and the housing cable might get
damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-44
PM-45
2. Reinstall the retaining screws 3. Take the procedure 4 from the
of the cassette set unit. direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
4. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the cassette set unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-45
PM-46
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 7. Connect the connector, and
from the direction indicated by retain the cable with the clamp.
the arrow in the figure.
6. Connect the connector, and
retain the cable with the clamp.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-46
PM-47
7.12 Cleaning the Dust-Tight Cover Assembly 3. Hold the dust-tight cover
assembly on the positions
indicated in the figure, and
push the assembly against the
housing. Lower the assembly
straight down not to tilt it and
reinstall.
u NOTE u
Be sure to lower the dust-tight
cover assembly straight down
without tilting it, and reinstall.
Otherwise, the sensor or the gear
might get damaged.
1. Clean the dust-tight cover
assembly with a moistened
cloth.
2. Take the procedure 3 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-47
PM-48
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Take the procedures 8 and 9
from the direction indicated by from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure. the arrow in the figure.
5. Check to make sure that 8. Reinstall the retaining screws
there is no difference in level of the dust-tight cover
between the dust-tight cover assembly from the direction
assembly and the side plate of instructed in DETAIL A.
the cassette set unit from the
direction instructed in DETAIL
A.
6. Check to make sure that 9. Reinstall the retaining screws
there is no difference in level of the dust-tight cover
between the dust-tight cover assembly from the direction
assembly and the side plate of instructed in DETAIL B.
the cassette set unit from the
direction instructed in DETAIL
B.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-48
PM-49
7.13 Replacing the IP Suction Pump 2. Disconnect the connector.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5 3. Disconnect the connector
from the direction indicated by while pushing the hook of the
the arrow in the figure. connector.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
disconnecting the connector.
4. Remove the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-49
PM-50
5. Lift the board box and remove 6. Take the procedures from 7 to
the safety bar from the retainer. 15 from the direction indicated
Lift the safety bar and hook by the arrow in the figure.
it on the bracket of the board
box.
u NOTE u
Be sure to hook the safety bar on
the bracket of the board box to
prevent the board box from falling
down. Otherwise, the board
box might fall down, hurting the
operator.
7. Remove the hose.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
hose when removing it.
8. Disconnect the connector, and
unclamp the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-50
PM-51
9. While pushing the hook of 12. Install the IP suction pump
the connector with the long- so that the IP suction cable
nose pliers, disconnect the pump is located behind the IP
connector from the bracket. leak valve assembly. Put on
the retaining screw of the IP
suction pump.
10. Remove the retaining screw of
the IP suction pump.
11. Remove the IP suction pump 13. Attach the connector to the
and replace. bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-51
PM-52
14. Retain the cable with the clamp,
and connect the connector.
15. Attach the hose.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to attach the hose to
the suction side of the IP suction
pump.
- Insert the hose to the innermost
region.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-52
PM-53
16. Take the procedures from 17 to
20 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
17. While holding the position
indicated in the figure and
supporting the board box,
remove the safety bar. Lower
the safety bar and fix to the
retainer. Then lower the board
box.
18. Reinstall the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-53
PM-54
19. Connect the connector.
u NOTE u
As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
20. Connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-54
PM-55
8. Erasure Unit 3. Remove the reflection plate.
u NOTES u
- Do not strongly grasp the
8.1 Removing the Filter reflection plate and the filter,
when removing the reflection
u NOTE u plate. Otherwise, the lamp
Refer to “7.1 Removing the erasure unit” for the removal procedures of the erasure unit. located inside the filter might get
{PM:7.1_Removing the Erasure Unit} damaged.
- Do not damage the reflection
face of the reflection plate that
has been removed. If it gets
damaged, IP erasure might not
be performed normally.
1. Place the erasure unit in the 4. Remove the screws to remove
orientation indicated in the the bracket.
figure.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage
the lamp by the bracket when
removing the bracket.
2. Remove the bracket. 5. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation indicated in the
u NOTE u figure.
Do not raise nor move the erasure
unit, holding the reflection plate.
If the reflection plate deforms,
correct its warp referring to
the Check, Replacements and
Adjustment of Parts “6.5.3 Check/
Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:6.5.3_Check/Adjustment
Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-55
PM-56
6. Remove the screws. 8. Lift the filter with a jeweler’s
screwdriver, and remove it from
the half punch.
7. Remove the brush roller
assembly.
9. Place the erasure unit in the
orientation indicated in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-56
PM-57
10. Lift to remove the filter while
watching the lamp.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage
the lamp with your fingers when
removing the filter.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-57
PM-58
8.2 Cleaning the Filter 8.3 Replacing the Filter
1. Clean the guide with a vacuum 1. Replace the filter.
cleaner.
2. Clean the front and the rear
of the filter with a moistened
cloth.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to clean both the front
and the rear of the filter with the
moistened cloth.
- Exercise care not to wipe the
guide with the moistened cloth.
Otherwise, the guide might peel.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-58
PM-59
8.4 Reinstalling the Filter 2. Insert the end of the filter into
the aperture of the bracket,
move it in the direction of the
arrow, and reinstall the filter.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
lamp when reinstalling the filter.
1. Check the orientation of
mounting the filter.
REFERENCE
Determine the orientation of
mounting the filter by a yellow
portion of the filter.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-59
PM-60
3. Push the filter into the right and
left half punches.
4. Reinstall the bracket.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage
the lamp when reinstalling the
bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-60
PM-61
8.5 Cleaning the Brush Roller 3. Remove the KL clip and the half
clutch spur gear.
1. While expanding the latches of 4. While pushing the latches
the spur gear, remove the spur at both ends of the stopper,
gears. remove the stopper.
2. While pushing the latches 5. Clean the inside of the bracket
at both ends of the stopper, with a vacuum cleaner, and
remove the stopper. then remove the bearings from
the brush rollers. Clean the
brush rollers.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-61
PM-62
6. Reinstall the brush roller, 7. Install the other brush roller
watching the orientations of the similarly to the procedure 6.
brush roller and the bracket.
u NOTE u
Install the brush roller in the
correct orientation referring to the
figure.
- Insert the shorter shaft end of
the brush roller to a region of the
bracket with a latch.
- Insert the longer shaft end of the
brush roller to a region of the
bracket with a hole.
8. While pushing the latches
at both ends of the stopper,
mount the stopper. Check to
make sure that the stopper will
not disengage.
u NOTE u
Check to make sure that the
stopper latch hooks the inside
of the bracket and does not
disengage.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-62
PM-63
9. Mount the half clutch spur gear 10. While pushing the latches
and the KL clip on the longer at both ends of the stopper,
shaft end. mount the stopper. Check to
make sure that the stopper will
u NOTE u not disengage.
Place the half clutch spur gear
in the orientation indicated in the u NOTE u
figure. If reversely placed, the Check to make sure that the
brush roller assembly will not stopper latch hooks the inside
work normally. of the bracket and does not
disengage.
11. Reinstall the spur gears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-63
PM-64
8.6 Reinstalling the Brush Roller Assembly 2. Insert the brush roller assembly
latches into the bracket holes,
before reinstalling.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Check to make sure that both
brush roller assembly latches
are inserted into the bracket
holes.
u NOTE u
Improper insertion of the brush
roller assembly latch may cause
an IP jam.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-64
PM-65
4. Put on the retaining screw of 8.7 Cleaning the Reflection Plate
the brush roller assembly.
5. Place the erasure unit in the 1. Clean the reflection plate with a
orientation indicated in the moistened cloth.
figure.
6. Check to make sure that the
brush roller assembly latches
and the protrusions are
correctly mounted.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-65
PM-66
8.8 Reinstalling the Reflection Plate 3. Check to make sure that the
clearance is 6 ± 1 mm between
the reflection plate and the
filter around the center of the
reflection plate.
u NOTE u
If the clearance between the
reflection plate and the filter is
smaller than 5 mm or larger than
7 mm, the warp of the reflection
plate need be corrected. Correct
the warp of the reflection
plate, referring to the Check,
Replacements and Adjustment
1. Place the reflection plate with of Parts “6.5.3 Check/Adjustment
its notches facing downward Procedures”.
on the erasure unit. {MC:6.5.3_Check/Adjustment
Procedures}
u NOTE u
Exercise care in the orientation of
mounting the reflection plate.
2. Reinstall the retaining screws 4. Reinstall the bracket.
of the reflection plate.
u NOTE u
u NOTE u Do not raise nor move the erasure
Do not strongly grasp the unit, holding the reflection plate.
reflection plate and the filter, when If the reflection plate deforms,
reinstalling the reflection plate. correct its warp referring to
The lamp located inside the filter the Check, Replacements and
might get damaged. Adjustment of Parts “6.5.3 Check/
Adjustment Procedures”.
{MC:6.5.3_Check/Adjustment
Procedures}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-66
PM-67
8.9 Reinstalling the Erasure Unit 2. While pushing the erasure
unit in the direction of the
arrow, push it halfway into
the housing. Push into the
innermost while exercising care
not to have the cable caught.
u NOTES u
- If the erasure unit cannot be
pushed to the innermost in the
housing, do not push it forcibly.
The spur gear of the erasure
unit might get damaged.
- If the erasure unit can be
pushed into the innermost
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 6 without the cassette set unit and
from the direction indicated by the spur gear of the erasure
the arrow in the figure. unit interfering with each other,
the procedure 4 need not be
performed. Proceed to the
procedure 5.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-67
PM-68
3. Pull out the erasure unit. 5. Connect the connectors.
Slightly rotate the spur gear,
and then push the erasure unit
slowly into the housing.
u NOTE u
If the erasure unit cannot be
pushed to the innermost in the
housing, do not push it forcibly.
The spur gear of the erasure unit
might get damaged.
6. Retain the cable with the clamp.
4. Reinstall the retaining screws 0
of the erasure unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-68
PM-69
9. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 2. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
Move the cable toward the side
face for the protection of the
9.1 Removing the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit cable, and hook it on the clamp.
Close the clamp.
1. Take the procedure 2 from the
direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-69
PM-70
3. Take the procedures 4 and 5 5. Remove the retaining screw of
from the direction indicated by the side-positioning conveyor
the arrow in the figure. unit.
4. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
Set aside the cable out of the
housing for the protection of
the cable.
u NOTE u
Be sure to put the cable aside out
of the housing. Otherwise, the
cable and the connector might get
caught when removing/reinstalling
the side-positioning conveyor unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-70
PM-71
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8 8. Supporting the side-positioning
from the direction indicated by conveyor unit on the positions
the arrow in the figure. indicated in the figure, pull the
unit straight toward you.
u NOTE u
Always support the unit on the
positions indicated in the figure
for this operation. If the unit is
pulled out with other positions
supported, components of the
side-positioning conveyor unit
might get damaged.
7. Remove the retaining screw of
the side-positioning conveyor
unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-71
PM-72
9.2 Cleaning the Guide 3. Remove the shock absorbing
roller assembly.
1. Remove the bracket. 4. Clean the guide with a vacuum
cleaner.
u NOTE u
Always use a vacuum cleaner for
cleaning the guide. Do not use a
moistened cloth.
2. Remove the bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-72
PM-73
9.3 Cleaning the Rubber Rollers 2. Clean the rubber rollers with a
moistened cloth.
1. Rotate the shaft with a thin- 3. Push the moistened cloth
blade screwdriver, and move against the rubber rollers.
the grip arm to the position Clean the rubber rollers while
indicated in the figure. rotating the rollers via the
timing belt.
REFERENCE
When the shaft is kept rotated
by the screwdriver, the gear and
the grip arm disengage, and a
touching sound occurs when they
re-engage. Note that this is not a
failure of the machine.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-73
PM-74
9.4 Cleaning the Shock-Absorbing Rollers, Antistatic 3. Align the shock-absorbing
roller assembly with the mount
Members, and Guide position while facing the
antistatic member downward.
Retain the assembly with the
screws.
1. Place the side-positioning 4. Clean the bracket and the
conveyor unit in the orientation antistatic member with a
indicated in the figure. vacuum cleaner.
2. Clean the shock-absorbing 5. Reinstall the bracket.
rollers and the antistatic
member with a vacuum cleaner.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-74
PM-75
6. Clean the antistatic member
with a vacuum cleaner.
7. Align one of sides of the
bracket with the mount
position, and retain it with a
screw. Then align the other
side with the mount position
and retain it with a screw, to
have the bracket retained.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-75
PM-76
10. Subscanning Unit 3. Supporting the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly on
the position indicated in the
figure, fall it down slantingly
10.1 Removing the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly and remove.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
2. Remove the retaining screws
of the post-reading conveyor
guide assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-76
PM-77
10.2 Removing the Light-Collecting Guide 2. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
CAUTION
Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are
wearing gloves.
u INSTRUCTION u
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 5
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-77
PM-78
3. Disconnect the connector while 4. Disconnect the connector.
holding the shaded portion in
the figure.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to disconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Disconnect the connector
vertically. If it is disconnected
slantingly, the connector on the
board may get damaged.
- As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when 5. Retain the three cables
disconnecting the connector. removed in the procedures
2 to 4 with the clamp for the
protection of the cables.
u NOTE u
Be sure to retain the cables with
the clamp. Otherwise, the cable
and the connector might get
caught when removing/reinstalling
the light-collecting guide.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-78
PM-79
6. Take the procedures 7 and 8
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
7. Remove the retaining screws
of the light-collecting guide
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL A.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
acrylic part of the light-collecting
guide when removing the screws.
8. Remove the retaining screws
of the light-collecting guide
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL B.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
acrylic part of the light-collecting
guide when removing the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-79
PM-80
9. Supporting the light-collecting
guide on the positions
indicated in the figure, lift the
guide. Check to make sure
that the light-collecting guide
bracket is disengaged from
the hook on the side plate of
the subscanning unit, and then
pull out to remove the light-
collecting guide toward you.
u NOTE u
Always check to make sure that
the light-collecting guide bracket
is disengaged from the hook on
the side plate of the subscanning
unit before removing the light-
collecting guide. Otherwise, the
tip of the light-collecting guide
might get damaged.
10. Place the light-collecting guide
in the orientation indicated in
the figure.
u NOTE u
Be sure to place the light-
collecting guide in the orientation
indicated in the figure. If placed
reversely, load may be applied
to the adhesive part of the
photomultiplier, causing the light-
collecting guide to get damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-80
PM-81
10.3 Removing the Scanning Optics Unit 1. Unclamp the clamp, and
disconnect the connector.
Retain the cables with the
CAUTION clamp for the protection of the
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to cable.
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body u NOTE u
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
Be sure to retain the cables with
the clamp. Otherwise, the cable
and the connector might get
CAUTION caught when removing/reinstalling
Never touch the window of the the scanning optics unit.
scanning optics unit. If fingerprints
or the like are left on the window,
the scanning optics unit must be
replaced.
u NOTE u
Place the scanning optics unit
in the orientation as shown
in the figure, according to the
label indicating how to place the
scanning optics unit.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-81
PM-82
2. Unclamp the clamp, and 3. Loosen the retaining screws of
disconnect the connector. the scanning optics unit.
Retain the cable with the clamp
for its protection. u NOTE u
Just loosen the screws which
u NOTE u retain the scanning optics unit,
Be sure to retain the cables with but do not remove them.
the clamp. Otherwise, the cable
and the connector might get
caught when removing/reinstalling
the scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-82
PM-83
4. Hold the green labels and raise
the scanning optics unit. Make
sure that holes on the scanning
optics unit and screw heads
are located where they do not
interfere with each other. Then,
pull out the scanning optics
unit parallel to the guides.
CAUTION
Never touch the window of the
scanning optics unit. If fingerprints
or the like are left on the window,
the scanning optics unit must be
replaced.
u NOTES u
- Hold the green labels to remove/
reinstall the scanning optics unit.
- Pull out the scanning optics unit
parallel to the guides. If the unit
is tilted, it may drop from the
guides and result in damage
of peripheral components or
sensors.
5. Place the scanning optics unit
in the orientation as shown in
the figure.
u NOTE u
Place the scanning optics unit
in the orientation as shown
in the figure, according to the
label indicating how to place the
scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-83
PM-84
10.4 Removing the Subscanning Unit 2. Remove the retaining screw of
the bracket.
1. Take the procedures 2 and 3
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-84
PM-85
3. Unclamp the clamp, and 5. Loosen the screws and then
disconnect the connector. remove the jig.
Retain the cables with the
REFERENCE
clamp and the tape for the
protection of the cables. After subscanning unit removal,
mount the removed jig on the
u NOTE u vibration-proof rubber assembly.
Be sure to retain the cables
with the clamp and the tape.
Otherwise, the cable and the
connector might get caught when
removing/reinstalling the sub-
scanning unit.
6. Remove the retaining screws of
the subscanning unit.
CAUTION
Never remove red painted screws.
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-85
PM-86
7. Take the procedure 8 from the 9. Take the procedure 10 from the
direction indicated by the arrow direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. in the figure.
8. Remove the screws. With 10. Remove the screws. With
long-nose pliers, remove the long-nose pliers, remove the
bracket. bracket.
u NOTE u u NOTE u
Exercise care not to drop the Exercise care not to drop the
bracket. If the bracket drops, it bracket. If the bracket drops, it
may damage nearby parts. may damage nearby parts.
u INSTRUCTION u u INSTRUCTION u
The removed bracket need be The removed bracket need be
reinstalled when installing the reinstalled when installing the
subscanning unit. Exercise care subscanning unit. Exercise care
not to miss it. not to miss it.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-86
PM-87
11. Take the procedure 12 from the 13. Holding the green labels,
direction indicated by the arrow pull out the subscanning unit
in the figure. slightly forward. Shift the
held positions, pull out the
subscanning unit straight, and
remove the subscanning unit
while holding its upper part.
u NOTE u
Be sure to hold the specified
positions to pull out straight the
subscanning unit. Otherwise,
part of the subscanning unit
might come into contact with the
housing, causing damage.
12. Remove the retaining screws of
the subscanning unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-87
PM-88
14. Have on hand the jig that was
removed in step 5. Mount it
on the vibration-proof rubber
assembly.
u NOTE u
After subscanning unit removal,
be sure to mount the jig. If you
perform the procedure without
mounting the jig, the vibration-
proof rubber assembly may fail to
properly function.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-88
PM-89
10.5 Cleaning the Guides, Center Rollers, and Rubber Rollers 3. Remove the screws.
1. Place the subscanning unit in 4. Rotate the bracket and pull it
the orientation indicated in the out of the subscanning unit.
figure.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 5 5. Reinstall the screws.
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-89
PM-90
6. Take the procedures from 7 to 9 8. Push the moistened cloth
from the direction indicated by against the rubber rollers.
the arrow in the figure. Clean the rubber rollers while
rotating them via the flywheel.
7. Clean the guide with a vacuum
cleaner.
9. Clean the rubber rollers with a
moistened cloth.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-90
PM-91
10. Place the subscanning unit in 13. Push the moistened cloth
the orientation indicated in the against the rubber rollers.
figure. Clean the rubber rollers while
rotating them via the flywheel.
11. Take the procedures from 12 to
14 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
12. Clean the guide with a vacuum 14. Clean the rubber rollers with a
cleaner. moistened cloth.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
light-receiving face of the light-
collecting mirror when cleaning
the guide with the vacuum
cleaner.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-91
PM-92
15. Place the subscanning unit in 18. Clean the center roller with a
the orientation indicated in the moistened cloth.
figure.
16. Take the procedures from 17 to 19. Install the bracket.
19 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
17. Remove the bracket. 20. Place the subscanning unit in
the orientation indicated in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-92
PM-93
21. Take the procedures from 22 to 24. Reinstall the screws.
24 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
22. Remove the screws. 25. Place the subscanning unit in
the orientation indicated in the
figure.
23. Rotate the bracket, and return it
into the subscanning unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-93
PM-94
10.6 Cleaning the Flywheel (Large) and Kapton® Belt 3. Clean the flywheel (large) with
a cloth dampened with ethanol.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not damage the contact face
of the Kapton® belt.
1. Remove the tension coil spring. 4. Clean the Kapton® belt with a
moistened cloth.
2. Support the Kapton® belt on
the positions indicated in the
figure, and remove it.
u NOTE u
When removing the Kapton® belt,
exercise care not to turn the belt
inside out. The machine might
not work normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-94
PM-95
5. Hitch the lower part of the
Kapton® belt on the flywheel,
and hitch the upper part on
the shaft. While pressing the
tensioner from upward, put the
end of the Kapton® belt on the
tensioner. While rotating the
flywheel, mount the Kapton®
belt.
u NOTE u
When reinstalling the Kapton ®
belt, exercise care not to turn
the belt inside out. The machine
might not work normally.
6. Reinstall the tension coil
spring.
7. Rotate the flywheel, and check
to make sure that the Kapton®
belt does not come off.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-95
PM-96
10.7 Cleaning the Flywheel (Small) and Rubber Belt 2. While rotating the flywheel,
gradually move the rubber belt
toward you and remove it.
CAUTION
Do not pull only the rubber belt
to remove it without rotating the
flywheel. If the rubber belt goes
slack, the machine may not work
normally.
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
3. Clean the flywheel (small) with
a moistened cloth.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-96
PM-97
4. Clean the rubber belt with a 5. Hitch the rubber belt on the
moistened cloth. lower flywheel, and then hitch
on the upper flywheel. Put on
the rubber belt while rotating
the flywheel, and check to
make sure that the rubber belt
does not come off.
CAUTION
Do not pull only the rubber belt
to reinstall it without rotating the
flywheel. If the rubber belt goes
slack, the machine may not work
normally.
u NOTE u
Reinstall the rubber belt with its
glossy face facing outward. If
the rubber belt is placed inside
out, the machine might not work
normally.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-97
PM-98
10.8 Cleaning Inside the Machine
1. Clean the inside of the machine
and the antistatic member with
a vacuum cleaner to remove
dust entering from the outside
of the machine.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-98
PM-99
10.9 Reinstalling the Subscanning Unit 3. Supporting the subscanning
unit on the positions indicated
in the figure, put the unit on the
housing rails. Push the unit
straight halfway.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to have your
hands caught in the housing when
pushing in the subscanning unit.
1. Remove the two jigs as
indicated in the figure.
u NOTE u
Remove only the two jigs shown.
If you remove all the jigs, you
may not be able to mount the
subscanning unit in the housing.
2. Take the procedures from 3 to 6
from the direction indicated by
the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-99
PM-100
4. Remove the jig. 6. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the subscanning unit.
5. Putting your hands on the
positions indicated in the
figure, push in the subscanning
unit straight into the housing.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to put your hands
on the specified positions to
push in the subscanning unit
straight. Otherwise, part of the
subscanning unit might come
into contact with the housing,
causing damage.
- Exercise care not to have
your hands caught in the
housing when pushing in the
subscanning unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-100
PM-101
7. Take the procedure 8 from the 9. Take the procedure 10 from the
direction indicated by the arrow direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure. in the figure.
8. Reinstall the retaining screws 10. Put on the bracket and retain it
of the subscanning unit. with a screw.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to drop the
bracket. If the bracket drops, it
may damage nearby parts.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-101
PM-102
11. Take the procedure 12 from the 13. Take the procedures from
direction indicated by the arrow 14 and 15 from the direction
in the figure. indicated by the arrow in the
figure.
12. Put on the bracket and retain it 14. Connect the connectors.
with a screw.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to drop the
bracket. If the bracket drops, it
may damage nearby parts.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-102
PM-103
15. Tighten the retaining screw for 16. Take the procedure 17 from the
the bracket. direction indicated by the arrow
in the figure.
17. Mount the jig and then tighten
the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-103
PM-104
10.10 Reinstalling the Scanning Optics Unit
CAUTION
When servicing the scanning optics unit, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to
ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body
may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
CAUTION
Never touch the window of the
scanning optics unit. If fingerprints
or the like are left on the window,
the scanning optics unit must be
replaced.
u NOTE u
Place the scanning optics unit
in the orientation as shown
in the figure, according to the
label indicating how to place the
scanning optics unit.
u INSTRUCTION u
Do not remove the top cover of the scanning optics unit.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-104
PM-105
1. Hold the scanning optics unit 2. Mount the notches on both
on parts with the attached sides of the scanning optics
green labels. unit on the guides. Push
straight completely while
CAUTION exercising care not to tilt the
scanning optics unit.
Never touch the window of the
scanning optics unit. If fingerprints u NOTE u
or the like are left on the window,
Push in the scanning optics unit
the scanning optics unit must be
straight along the guides not to
replaced.
permit it to tilt. If the unit is tilted,
it may drop from the guides and
result in damage of peripheral
components or sensors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-105
PM-106
3. Be sure to check that the 4. Secure the retaining screws
scanning optics unit is correctly while pushing the scanning
placed on the retaining screws. optics unit against the
positioning pin.
u NOTE u
Make sure that the scanning u NOTE u
optics unit is correctly placed on Be sure to retain the retaining
the retaining screws. If the screw screw while pushing the scanning
head is not in the correct position optics unit against the positioning
in the hole of the scanning optics pin. By pushing the scanning
unit, the unit cannot be installed optics unit tightly against the
correctly. positioning pin, the unit is located
If the screw head is not in the in the correct position.
correct position, reinstall the unit
again and recheck.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-106
PM-107
5. Unclamp the clamp and 6. Unclamp the clamp and
connect the connectors. connect the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-107
PM-108
11. Light-Collecting Guide 1. Clean the light-collecting face
of the light-collecting guide by
use of ethanol.
11.1 Cleaning and Reinstalling the Light-Collecting Guide REFERENCE
To clean the light-collecting guide,
two sheets of lens cleaning paper
CAUTIONS should be folded in four and then
- Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you are moistened with ethanol.
wearing gloves.
- Do not wipe the light-collecting guide with a dry cloth. If so, the light-collecting guide
may be scratched or otherwise damaged.
- If the lens cleaning paper becomes soiled, replace it with a new one.
- Wipe the light-collecting surface of the light-collecting guide until the lens cleaning
paper becomes no longer soiled.
- Wipe the light-collecting guide assembly in one direction at a constant speed.
- Do not wipe the photomultiplier attachment face.
2. Hold the light-collecting guide
as indicated in the figure.
u INSTRUCTIONu
When servicing the light-collecting unit, wear gloves.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-108
PM-109
3. Mount the light-collecting 4. Push in the light-collecting
guide on the guides of the guide while slightly raising it.
subscanning unit. Insert the Check to make sure that the
light-collecting guide along the guide is correctly engaged with
guides into the subscanning the hooks of the subscanning
unit. unit side plate.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-109
PM-110
5. Take the procedures 6 and 7 8. Take the procedures from 9 to
from the direction indicated by 12 from the direction indicated
the arrow in the figure. by the arrow in the figure.
6. Reinstall the retaining screws 9. Unclamp the clamps.
of the light-collecting guide
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL A.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
acrylic part of the light-collecting
guide with a screwdriver when
reinstalling the screws.
7. Reinstall the retaining screws 10. Connect the connector.
of the light-collecting guide
from the direction instructed in
DETAIL B.
u NOTE u
Exercise care not to damage the
acrylic part of the light-collecting
guide with a screwdriver when
reinstalling the screws.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-110
PM-111
11. Reconnect the connector 12. Connect the connector.
vertically, holding the shaded
portion in the figure. Check
that the connector is fully
inserted into its position as
shown.
CAUTION
Be sure to check that the connector
is fully inserted into its position
as shown. If the connector is not
properly connected, an error occurs
during image reading.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to reconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Connect the connector vertically
to the board. If it is connected
in a rotated state, the connector
might get damaged.
- As the working space is small,
exercise care not to get injured
by peripheral components when
connecting the connector.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-111
PM-112
11.2 Cleaning the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly 3. Remove the guide.
1. Remove the bracket. 4. Clean the guide with a vacuum
cleaner.
2. Remove the bracket. 5. Clean the shock absorbing
roller with a vacuum cleaner.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-112
PM-113
6. Check to make sure that the 9. Install the screws while
guide is correctly fitted onto the pressing down on the bracket.
protrusions, before reinstalling
the screws.
u NOTES u
- Exercise care in the orientation
of installing the guide.
- Be sure to check that the guide
is correctly fitted on to the
protrusions of the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly,
before reinstalling the screws.
7. Check to make sure that the
bracket is correctly fitted
onto the protrusions, before
reinstalling the screws.
u NOTE u
Be sure to check that the bracket
is correctly fitted onto the
protrusions of the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly, before
reinstalling the screws.
8. Install the screws to secure the
bracket.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-113
PM-114
11.3 Reinstalling the Post-Reading Conveyor Guide Assembly
1. Hold the post-reading conveyor
guide assembly as indicated
in the figure, and mount it on
the guide of the subscanning
unit. Raise the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly until
it hooks on the bracket of the
subscanning unit.
u NOTES u
- Do not strongly grasp the
upper part of the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly. The
guide might deform, causing an
IP jam.
- Mount the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly on the
guide of the subscanning unit,
before raising the post-reading
conveyor guide assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-114
PM-115
2. Reinstall the retaining screws
of the post-reading conveyor
guide assembly.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-115
PM-116
11.4 Reinstalling the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 3. Push in the side-positioning
conveyor unit straight halfway
into the housing. Push in
the lower part of the side-
positioning conveyor unit
horizontally into the housing,
and then push in the upper
part.
u NOTE u
Always support the unit on the
positions indicated in the figure
for this operation. If the unit is
pulled out with other positions
supported, components of the
1. Take the procedures from 2 to 3 side-positioning conveyor unit
from the direction indicated by might get damaged.
the arrow in the figure.
2. Hold the side-positioning
conveyor unit as indicated in
the figure, and mount it on the
housing.
u NOTE u
Always support the unit on the
positions indicated in the figure
for this operation. If the unit is
pulled out with other positions
supported, components of the
side-positioning conveyor unit
might get damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-116
PM-117
4. Take the procedures 5 and 6 7. Take the procedure 8 from the
from the direction indicated by direction indicated by the arrow
the arrow in the figure. in the figure.
5. Reinstall the retaining screw of 8. Reinstall the retaining screws
the side-positioning conveyor of the side-positioning
unit. conveyor unit.
6. Connect the connector, and
retain the cable with the clamp.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-117
PM-118
9. Take the procedure 10 from the 10. Disconnect the cable from the
direction indicated by the arrow clamp, and move it toward the
in the figure. rear of the housing. Connect
the connector, and retain the
cable with the clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-118
PM-119
12. Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and 4. Take the procedures from 5 to
12 from the direction indicated
Louvers by the arrow in the figure.
12.1 Cleaning/Reinstalling the Covers and Louvers
(2nd/4th Year)
1. Clean the covers and louvers.
2. Reinstall the rear cover plate. 5. Connect the connectors.
3. Reinstall the front cover plate. 6. Connect the connectors.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-119
PM-120
7. Connect the connectors. 10. Connect the connector.
8. Connect the connectors. 11. Connect the connector.
9. Reinstall the connector straight, 12. Reinstall the board box cover,
holding the shaded portion in and tighten with the screws.
the figure.
u NOTES u
- Be sure to hold the specified
portion to reconnect the
connector. Otherwise, the cable
may get damaged.
- Be sure to reinstall the connector
straight. If it is reinstalled slantly,
the connector on the board
might get damaged.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-120
PM-121
13. Take the procedures from 14 to 15. Retain the cable with the
16 from the direction indicated clamps.
by the arrow in the figure.
14. Reinstall the bracket, and 16. Reinstall the bracket, and
tighten with the screws. tighten with the screws.
u NOTE u
Reinstall the bracket straight in
the direction indicated by the
arrow. Otherwise, the connector
and the bracket might come into
contact, and the connector get
damaged.
17. Take the procedures from 18 to
22 from the direction indicated
by the arrow in the figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-121
PM-122
18. Reinstall the bracket, and 21. Retain the cable with the
slightly lower the bracket. clamps.
19. Reinstall the middle screw, and 22. Reinstall the bracket, and
reinstall the top and bottom tighten with the screws.
screws.
20. Retain the cable with the 23. Take the procedures from
clamps. 24 and 25 from the direction
indicated by the arrow in the
figure.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-122
PM-123
24. Reinstall the fan assembly, and
reinstall the screws.
25. Connect the connector, and
retain the cable with the
clamps.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-123
PM-124
13. Turning ON the High-Voltage Switch
1. Turn ON the high-voltage
switch (S1) on the SCN board.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-124
PM-125
14. Securing the Machine
1. Secure RU to FCR-MB 201. Refer to FCR-MB 201 Service Manual for detailed
procedures.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-125
PM-126
15. Cleaning the Mechanical Filter 3. Reinstall the louver.
1. Remove the louver.
2. Clean the mechanical filter.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-126
PM-127
16. Checking the Image/Conveyance
1. Check the image/conveyance.
{PM:3._Checking the Image/Conveyance}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-127
PM-128
17. Confirming the S Value 2. Set the tube voltage to 80 kVp. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the
radiation dose is 1 mR.
The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 1 mR of u NOTE u
radiation, during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 1 mR, leave the tube voltage at
output the read image, and check that the S value for 1 mR of radiation, which is determined 80 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a radiation dose of 1
from the displayed S value and average dose value, is within the control limits. mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
REFERENCE - Distance: ___cm
- Tube voltage: ___kVp
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below:
- Tube current: ___mA
- S value control limits for user adjustments
- Time: ___sec
Upper limit: 200 x 1.5 = 300
Lower limit: 200/1.5 = 133
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments REFERENCE
Upper limit: 200 x 1.3 = 260 If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
Lower limit: 200/1.3 = 154 values and make fine adjustments:
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time after
service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service technician
adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
1. Position a cassette so that the cassette center coincides with the X-ray
radiation field center. Perform setup so that the X-ray radiation field outline is
approximately 3 cm outside the cassette outer frame. Temporarily remove the
cassette and then position a dosimeter at the radiation field center.
3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, measure the radiation dose
five times and average the measured values.
--- Example ---
First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value
0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.04
4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in step
3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table."
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-128
PM-129
5. Subject the natural radiation and image stored on the employed IP to secondary 8. Determine the "S value for 1 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the S
erasure. value printed on the film or displayed on the CL screen) and the average radiation
{Instruction Manual} dose value obtained in step 3.
--- Example ---
u NOTE u Displayed S value: 200
Before secondary erasure, confirm that no important image data is recorded on the Average radiation dose value obtained in step 3: 1.04
employed IP.
6. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x
35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) IP to X-ray radiation.
u NOTE u
Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution.
7. Read the IP exposed in step 6 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Format - 2," and "SINGLE" CL menus, and then output the read image.
S value for 1 mR of radiation = Displayed S value x average radiation dose value
= 200 x 1.04
= 208
9. Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is
within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit value Upper control limit value
154 < 208 < 260
Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which
was determined in step 8, is between the upper and
lower control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is not between
the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction as directed in "15.3
Sensitivity Correction" and then confirm the S value again.
{MC:15.3_Sensitivity Correction}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-129
PM-130
18. Checking the Error Log
1. Check the error log.
{PM:2.2_Checking the Error Log}
2. Close the RU PC-TOOL window.
3. Shut down the CL.
4. Turn OFF the FCR-MB 201 power.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-130
PM-131
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PM-131
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Installation (IN)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
IN-1
1. Installation Work Flowchart
n Workflow for First-Time Installation
START A
2. Preparation for Installation 7. Confirming the S Value
2.2 Checking the Items Supplied 8. Powering OFF the FCR-MB 201
3. Installation Procedures
9. Cleaning the FCR-MB 201
3.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member
10. Lead Precaution Label
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual}
4. Console Installation Procedures END
{FCR-MB 201 Console Service Manual}
5. Installing RU Software
5.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU
5.2 Setting the RU IP Address
5.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address
5.4 Checking the Connection with the Console
5.5 Installing RU Software
6. Image/Conveyance Checks
6.1 Check Before Procedures
6.2 Image/Conveyance Checks
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
2. Preparation for Installation 2.2 Checking the Items Supplied
Check whether all the items are supplied in accordance with the PACKING LIST that is
contained in each carton.
2.1 Precautions Regarding Installation
n Accessories
The place where the machine is to be installed needs to meet the criteria set forth in
Check Item Qty. Remarks
"Getting Started" Preinstallation procedures should be performed beforehand for necessary
CD (machine-specific data) 1 Machine-specific data CD
construction work, electrical work, and air-conditioning system installation.
CD (application) 1 For installation
1 1.0A (137S1178)
2.1.1 Definition of Patient Environment or the Like
1 1.6A (137S1276)
Fuse set 1 2.0A (137S1277)
l Patient Environment 1 3.2A (137S1278)
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
1 5.0A (137S1280)
tests, diagnosis, monitoring).It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and 2.5 m
Label 1 Exposure markers precaution label
in height from the area of the patient's body. It excludes the space traveled by the patient to
Operation Manual 1
reach the medically-used room.
l Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use grounding
terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective grounding inside
the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective grounding of this medically-
used room is equipotential to that in the other medicallyused room. Generally, a portion of the
medically-used room is the patient environment.
l Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
2.1.2 Handling Precautions for Printed Circuit Boards and Optical
Unit
When servicing a board or optical unit, use a wristband to ground your body.
If you body is not grounded, the electrostatic buildup on your body may damage the
electronic parts.
2.1.3 Precautions for System Connection
"Accessory equipment connected to be the analog and digital interfaces must be certified
according to the respective IEC Standards. Furthermore all configurations shall comply with
the medical system standard, IEC60601-1-1. Everyone who connects additional equipment
configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with
the requirements of IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt consult with the your local technical service
representative."
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-2
IN-3
3. Installation Procedures 4. Console Installation Procedures
1. Perform the Console installation procedures.
3.1 Removing the Transportation Protective Member
u NOTE u
Complete "4. Console Installation Procedures" before performing the procedures
1. Refer to pages in chapter "1. Installation" of the FCR-MB 201 Service Manual for
described in "5. Installing RU Software."
removing the tapes and the protective member.
{FCR-MB 201 Service Manual} {FCR-MB 201 Console Service Manual}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-3
IN-4
5. Installing RU Software 5.1 Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU
Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU and set the "RU IP Address" and "FTP 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
Server IP Address." Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left
The procedure described here assumes that the following addresses are to be set: on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
RU IP address: 172.16.1.11 “Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
FTP server IP address: 172.16.1.21
u NOTE u
Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the CL and FCR-MB 201
power sequentially and repeat from the procedure 1.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-4
IN-5
5.2 Setting the RU IP Address 2. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once.
u NOTE u
1. Make sure that “Reader Unit IP Address” is selected, and then press the [Select]
button. Set the IP address of the RU specified on the Console.
3. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button.
→ The address setting window appears.
→ In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified
address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-5
IN-6
5.3 Setting the FTP Server IP Address 2. Press the [Select] button.
1. Press the button twice, and select “FTP Server IP Address”.
→ The address setting window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-6
IN-7
3. Press the button 11 times, and press the button once. 5. Confirm the network specifications of the user’s site, and set the following
addresses when needed.
u NOTE u
Specify the IP address of the Console. u NOTE u
Set the addresses by performing the individual setup procedures set forth in the
Maintenance Utility volume.
- For Subnet Mask setup
{MU:3.3_Subnet Mask}
- For Default Gateway setup
{MU:3.5_Default Gateway}
- For Secure Host setup
{MU:3.6_Secure Host}
- For Secure Net setup
{MU:3.7_Secure Net}
4. Press the button once to select “OK”. Then press the [Confirm] button.
→ In 1 to 2 seconds after the [Confirm] button is pressed, an alarm beeps. The specified
address becomes effective, and the menu selection window restores.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-7
IN-8
5.4 Checking the Connection with the Console 3. Press the [Check] button.
1. Press the button, and select “Network Check”.
4. Confirm the display on the operation panel.
2. Press the [Select] button.
u NOTES u
- “OK” is displayed in the GOOD indication when “Default Gateway” is specified.
- Take the troubleshooting procedures when the NO GOOD indication appears.
{Troubleshooting}
→ The “Network Check” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-8
IN-9
5.5 Installing RU Software 4. Enter Install "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR".
u NOTE u
REFERENCE
If the "Reader Unit IP Address" setting was changed from the RU operation panel before
This section describes the procedures, by way of example, where settings are made as RU software installation, enter the changed address.
follows:
INSTALL VERSION: 1.0
LANGUAGE: English
BRAND TYPE: OTHER
SCREEN TYPE: HOSPITAL
LINAC CASSETTE: NOT USE
1. Set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit. 5. Click on [PING].
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
u NOTE u
If the version of RU PC-TOOL is old and not compatible with RU software, the message
displayed. If the message displayed, uninstall RU PC-TOOL from Set Up PC-TOOL
and then reinstall it.
For details on the installation procedure, see "IN: Appendix 4-2_Installing the RU PC- 6. Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window.
TOOL"
{IN: Appendix 4-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
2. Click on [START].
l [GOOD indication]
If the following message appears, the result is normal.
| Ping statistics for 172.16.1.11: |
3. Click on [NEW]. | Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss), |
l [NO GOOD indication]
Other than above is all abnormal. (The selected IP address of the RU is displayed.)
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication
{Troubleshooting}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-9
IN-10
7. Click on [INSTALL]. 11. Select "BRAND TYPE".
REFERENCE
When clicking on [INSTALL], “Under maintenance” appears on the operation panel of
12. Select an operation panel screen type (SCREEN TYPE), and then click [OK].
the RU.
u NOTE u
8. Click on [OK]. The proper selection varies with a network connection between the RU and Console.
Make a proper selection in accordance with the employed network connection. If
an improper selection is made, the connection between the RU and Console is not
guaranteed.
- When a "1:1 connection" is established between the RU and Console, choose "CLINIC."
- When an "N:N connection" is established between the RU and Console, choose
9. Select "INSTALL VERSION". "HOSPITAL."
10. Select "LANGUAGE".
REFERENCE
The following languages can be selected during the installation.
Japanese, English, Germany, French, Spanish, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Danish, 13. If a LINAC CASSETTE is to be used at the user’s site, select “USE”. If the LINAC
CASSETTE is not to be used, select “NOT USE”, and click on [SET].
Norwegian, Korean, ChineseSimplified, ChineseTraditional, Dutch, Portuguese, Greek,
Hebrew, Russian, Turkish, Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Thai, Indonesian
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-10
IN-11
14. If, for instance, the institution wishes to use nondefault CONFIGURATION 16. Set "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME".
information, edit the CONFIGURATION information by performing the procedure
set forth under "4.13 EDIT CONFIGURATION" in the Maintenance Utility volume. u INSTRUCTION u
Enter IP ADDRESS of the Console to be connected with the RU.
{MU:4.13_EDIT CONFIGURATION}
15. Click on [SET]. REFERENCE
Up to 32 Console's may be registered as image transfer destinations. Of the Console's
registered, up to four Console's are switchable as master CL's.
For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME" screen, see
"4.14 EDIT CL NAME" of the Maintenance Utility volume.
{MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-11
IN-12
17. Confirm the installation precautions. 19. Verify that the flash ROM write process is completed, and then press the [Enter]
key twice.
CAUTION
While the flash ROM is being written into, never turn OFF the RU or Console. If you
turn OFF the power, the program stored in the memory becomes damaged and cannot
restart.
18. Click on [SET].
When you click on [SET], the installation screen appears on the Console display. While
the flash ROM is being written into, the RU's LED glows.
u NOTE u
Do not close the installation screen until the flash ROM write process is completed.
If you inadvertently close the installation screen, return to step 7 and perform the
installation procedure again. The flash ROM write process takes about 8 minutes.
20. Click on [OK].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-12
IN-13
21. Check the version of the RU software, and close RU PC-TOOL. 22. Shut down the CL.
23. Verify that the RU's LED is extinguished, and then turn OFF the FCR-MB 201.
REFERENCE
The message "Under maintenance" is displayed on the operation panel. However,
turning OFF the FCR-MB 201 power does not affect the RU's functionality.
24. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
u NOTE u
In the case of "NO GOOD" indication, return to step 1 and perform install procedures all
over again.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-13
IN-14
6. Image/Conveyance Checks 3. Perform IP exposures.
u NOTE u
In this section, the following checks are made as last-time verification for final placement.
Expose the IP at X-ray tube voltage of 80 kVp. Otherwise, the image check cannot be
- Conveyance checks
done normally.
- Image checks
u INSTRUCTION u
6.1 Check Before Procedures
- Expose two IPs of the largest size to be used at the user’s site to the following dose.
- With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and the
u NOTES u second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
- For the IP used for image/conveyance checks, an IP of the maximum size used in the
hospital should be employed. - X-ray tube: Tungsten X-ray tube
- Make sure that the IP to be used does not contain any important image data exposed. - Exposure X-ray dose: 1 mR
- Maximum size: IP of 14" x 14" (35 cm x 35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) size
- Reference conditions: Distance 1.8 m
1. Check to ensure that the "READY" screen appears.
Voltage 80 kVp
REFERENCE Amperage 50 mA
The screen contents of the RU's operation panel vary with the LANGUAGE and Time 0.013 sec
SCREEN TYPE selections made during installation. For details on the screen contents
of the RU's operation panel, see "1.3.3 Operation Panel Display Screen Contents" in
the "Machine Description" volume.
{MD:1.3.3_Operation Panel Display Screen Contents}
2. Perform "Secondary Erasure" on the spontaneous radiation and image
accumulated on the IP to be used.
{Instruction Manual}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-14
IN-15
6.2 Image/Conveyance Checks 2. Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output film or on the
image displayed on the image monitor.
u NOTE u u CHECK u
Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks should be There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction.
performed with the "MENU" specified below.
If there is any uneven density difference, compare the films outputted from the two IPs
1. Read the IP prepared in “6.1 Check before procedures” by the Console menus “QC/ of the same size, and determine whether such nonuniformity is caused by the machine
TEST” and “Image Format” or “Image Format-2” and “SINGLE”, and output an or X-ray tube.
image.
l If there is uneven density difference in the same direction on two films
→ The machine may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
{Troubleshooting}
l If positions of uneven density difference are different
→ The X-ray tube may be the cause of such nonuniformity.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-15
IN-16
3. Check the image format.
Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP,
from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted.
u CHECK u
The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
If anything abnormal is found:
{Troubleshooting}
u NOTE u
The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size on the IP, depending
on the reading size and film size. The actual size on the IP should be calculated using
the distance measured on the film and the reduction factor for the film. Compute the
actual size on the IP according to the following equation.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-16
IN-17
7. Confirming the S Value 2. Set the tube voltage to 80 kVp. Confirm the exposure conditions under which the
radiation dose is 1 mR.
The procedure set forth below is used to read an IP, which has been exposed to 1 mR of u NOTE u
radiation, during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11 minutes after an X-ray exposure, If the radiation dose measured by the dosimeter is not 1 mR, leave the tube voltage at
output the read image, and check that the S value for 1 mR of radiation, which is determined 80 kVp and adjust the distance, tube current, and time to obtain a radiation dose of 1
from the displayed S value and average dose value, is within the control limits. mR. Record the adjusted exposure conditions.
REFERENCE - Distance: ___cm
- Tube voltage: ___kVp
The method for calculating the S value control limits is outlined below:
- Tube current: ___mA
- S value control limits for user adjustments
- Time: ___sec
Upper limit: 200 x 1.5 = 300
Lower limit: 200/1.5 = 133
- S value control limits for service technician adjustments REFERENCE
Upper limit: 200 x 1.3 = 260 If the exposure conditions are unknown, use the following values as the reference
Lower limit: 200/1.3 = 154 values and make fine adjustments:
To eliminate the necessity for adjusting the machine within a short period of time after
service technician inspection/adjustment, the S value control range for service technician
adjustments is narrower than that for user adjustments.
1. Position a cassette so that the cassette center coincides with the X-ray
radiation field center. Perform setup so that the X-ray radiation field outline is
approximately 3 cm outside the cassette outer frame. Temporarily remove the
cassette and then position a dosimeter at the radiation field center.
3. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, measure the radiation dose
five times and average the measured values.
--- Example ---
First Second Third Fourth Fifth Average
measurement measurement measurement measurement measurement value
0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.04
4. Enter the exposure conditions and the average radiation dose determined in step
3 in the "FCR S Value Control Table."
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-17
IN-18
5. Subject the natural radiation and image stored on the employed IP to secondary 8. Determine the "S value for 1 mR of radiation" from the displayed S value (the S
erasure. value printed on the film or displayed on the Console screen) and the average
{Instruction Manual} radiation dose value obtained in step 3.
--- Example ---
u NOTE u Displayed S value: 200
Before secondary erasure, confirm that no important image data is recorded on the Average radiation dose value obtained in step 3: 1.04
employed IP.
6. Under the exposure conditions confirmed in step 2, expose a 14" x 14" (35 cm x
35 cm) or 14" x 17" (35 cm x 43 cm) IP to X-ray radiation.
u NOTE u
Use the largest size IP of all the IPs used at the institution.
7. Read the IP exposed in step 6 during a 1-minute period between 10 and 11
minutes after the exposure by using the "QC/TEST," "Image Format" or "Image
Format - 2," and "SINGLE" Console menus, and then output the read image.
S value for 1 mR of radiation = Displayed S value x average radiation dose value
= 200 x 1.04
= 208
9. Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is
within the control limits.
--- Example ---
Lower control limit value Upper control limit value
154 < 208 < 260
Check that the "S value for 1 mR of radiation,"
which was determined in step 8, is between the
upper and lower control limit values.
u NOTE u
If the "S value for 1 mR of radiation," which was determined in step 8, is not between
the upper and lower control limit values, make sensitivity correction as directed in "15.3
Sensitivity Correction" and then confirm the S value again.
{MC:15.3_Sensitivity Correction}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-18
IN-19
8. Powering OFF the FCR-MB 201 10. Lead Precaution Label
1. Shut down the CL. 1. Apply the lead precaution label suitable for the local language.
2. Turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
9. Cleaning the FCR-MB 201
1. Clean the monitor of the CL with a dry cloth.
2. Clean the covers with a moistened cloth.
3. Peel the seal off the operation panel of the RU.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual IN-19
Appx IN-1
Appendix 1. Setting the Master CL 1. Additionally Registering the Master CL (Procedures on
the CL1)
This section describes the procedures for additionally register the CL2 (172.16.1.22) into the
system that consists of the RU (ru0: 172.16.1.11) and CL1 (master CL: 172.16.1.21), and for 1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU.
switching the master CL from CL1 to CL2.
Turn ON the FCR-MB 201 power while pressing the first and third buttons from the left
on the operation panel. Keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the
“Maintenance Utility” window appears on the operation panel.
u NOTE u
Be sure to keep pressing the first and third buttons from the left until the “Maintenance
Utility” window appears on the operation panel. If the “Maintenance Utility” window
does not appear and the RU starts to boot up, once turn OFF the CL and FCR-MB 201
power sequentially and repeat from the procedure 1.
REFERENCE
Up to 32 Console's may be registered as image transfer destinations. Of the Console's
registered, up to four Console's are switchable as master CL's.
For more detail about the function that may be set on the "EDIT CL NAME" screen, see "4.14
EDIT CL NAME" of the Maintenance Utility volume.
{MU:4.14_EDIT CL NAME}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-1
Appx IN-2
4. Open the Windows start menu window, designate "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\ 5. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the master CL is to be added,
TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" in the "Start Search" column, and press the [Enter] and enter the "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the master CL to be added.
key.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-2
Appx IN-3
6. Register the master CL (CL2) created at procedure 5 into the master CL.
REFERENCE
It takes about three minutes to register the master CL (CL2) after you click [SET].
7. Close the RU PC-TOOL window.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-3
Appx IN-4
2. Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2) 5. Enter the host name (ru0) of the RU in and its IP address
(172.16.1.11) in .
1. Start the Service Utility.
{FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual/Maintenance Utility (MU)/1. Starting and
Exiting the Service Utility} 6. Select in the "Add Node" field, and click on .
2. Click on [Setup Configuration Item].
→ The "FRUP Setup" screen appears.
3. Click on [ALL OTHER NODES] of [NETWORK CONFIG].
7. Check in the "Attribute" field ( → ).
8. Type "ru0" in .
REFERENCE
The name should not necessarily be the same as the host name.
9. Click on .
→ Registering the network information is now completed.
4. Click on .
→ The "New Node" dialog box appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-4
Appx IN-5
3. Registering the Machine Information (CONNECTING 4. Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility
EQUIPMENT)
1. From the "Config (F)" menu in the "Setup Configuration Item" window, select
"Save (V)".
1. Click on [CONNECTING EQUIPMENT] in the "Setup Configuration Item" window.
→ The save confirmation window appears.
2. Click on .
→ The "Connecting Equipment" dialog box appears. 2. Click on .
3. Register the machine information as shown below.
→ The setup is saved.
3. From the "Config (F)" menu, select "Close (C)".
→ The "Service Utility" window appears back on screen.
4. Exit the Service Utility.
I. Select "Reader".
II. Select the host name (e.g., ru0).
III. If several RU's are connected, select the second and subsequent host name(s) in
"Equipment #2" and so on.
4. Click on .
→ Registering the machine information is now completed.
The "Setup Configuration Item" window appears back on screen.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-5
Appx IN-6
5. Verifying Switching of Master CL 5. Press the button, and select “Set master CL”.
1. Shut down the CL.
2. Turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
3. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
4. Press the [Utility] button on the operation panel.
→ The “Utility” window appears.
6. Press the [Select] button.
→ The “Select master Console” window appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-6
Appx IN-7
7. Press the button, and select “CL2”. 9. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
10. Perform reading, and make sure that the image is transferred to the master CL.
8. Press the [Select] button.
REFERENCE
The power of the FCR-MB 201 automatically turns OFF about 1 minute after the master
CL is set.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-7
Appx IN-8
Appendix 2. Changing the RU's IP Address
This appendix describes the procedure for using the machine with the RU's IP address
changed.
1. Starting the machine Maintenance Utility of the RU
1. Start up the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU as directed under "5.1 Starting
the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU."
{IN:5.1_Starting the Machine Maintenance Utility of the RU}
2. Setting the RU's IP address
1. Change the RU's IP address as directed under "5.2 Setting the IP Address of the
RU."
{IN:5.2_Setting the RU IP Address}
3. Setting the FTP server IP address
1. Change the RU's FTP server IP address as directed under "5.3 Setting the IP
Address of the FTP Server."
{IN:5.3_Setting the FTP Server IP Aaddress}
2. Reinstall the RU software as directed under "Appendix 3. Reinstalling the RU
Software."
u INSTRUCTION u
After the RU's IP address is changed, be sure to reinstall the RU software.
{IN: Appendix 3._Reinstalling the RU Software}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-8
Appx IN-9
Appendix 3. Reinstalling the RU Software 4. Click on [DELETE].
This appendix describes the RU software reinstallation procedure that is performed when,
for instance, the machine is to be used with the RU's IP address changed or the RU to be
installed is improperly set up.
To reinstall the RU software, first delete the RU registered in the RU PC-TOOL, and then
install the RU software. u NOTE u
If you click [DELETE] without inserting the RU-APL CD into the Console, the following
error message appears. If the error message appears, insert the RU-APL CD into the
1. Deleting an Installed RU Console and then repeat steps 2 and beyond.
1. Insert the RU-APL CD into the Console.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens.
2. Click on [START].
5. Click on [OK].
6. Verify that the RU selected in step 3 is deleted from "LIST OF EXISTING RU."
→ The "RU PC-TOOL" window opens.
3. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU," select an RU.
2. Reinstalling the RU Software
Reinstall the RU software.
For the RU software reinstallation procedure, see "Appendix 4. Installing the RU Software."
{IN: Appendix 4._Installing the RU Software}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-9
Appx IN-10
Appendix 4. Installing the RU Software 3. Select “For FTP-Server”, and click on [SET].
u NOTE u
This appendix describes the procedure for installing the RU software.
Always select “For FTP-Server”. If “For Client PC” is selected, the installation cannot be
Before installing the RU software, you have to run a network check from the RU's machine
done properly.
Maintenance Utility to verify the connection to the Console.
If you inadvertently click [SET] with "For Client PC" chosen, perform installation again
as directed under "Appendix 5. Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper
1. Verifying the connection to the Console RU PC-TOOL Installation."
{IN: Appendix 5._Corrective Procedure to be Performed after Improper RU PC-
1. Run a network check as directed under "5.4 Checking the Connection with the TOOL Installation.}
Console."
{IN:5.4_Checking the Connection with the Console}
2. Installing the RU PC-TOOL
u NOTE u
If the RU PC-TOOL is already installed on the Console, the step below need not be
performed. In such an instance, skip to "Appendix 4-3 Installing the RU software."
{IN: Appendix 4-3_Installing the RU Software}
1. Set the RU-APL CD into the CD drive connected to the Mobil X-ray Unit.
→ The “Set Up PC-TOOL” window automatically appears.
2. Click on [INSTALL].
4. Click on [NEXT].
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-10
Appx IN-11
5. Click on [INSTALL]. 8. Check that the following message appears, and press the [Enter] key.
u NOTE u
The following message appears a total of three times. Press the [Enter] key each time
the message appears.
6. Click on [Finish] when the installation is completed.
→ Return to the “Set Up PC-TOOL” window.
7. Check that the following message appears, and press the [Enter] key. 3. Installing the RU Software
REFERENCE
The following window appears to register a user on the PC. When the RU PC-TOOL
1. Install the RU software as directed under "5.6 Installing RU Software."
{IN:5.5_Installing RU Software}
has been already installed, the window indicating that the registration is completed
appears.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-11
Appx IN-12
Appendix 5. Corrective Procedure to be 1. Corrective Procedure 1
Performed after Improper RU PC- This section describes the procedure for aborting the installation process and installing the
RU PC-TOOL.
TOOL Installation 1. If you clicked [SET] with "For Client PC" chosen, click [Cancel] in a window that
opens next.
If "For Client PC" is inadvertently chosen when the RU PC-TOOL is to be installed, install the
RU PC-TOOL as directed below.
When the RU PC-TOOL installation procedure is improperly performed, use either of the
following corrective procedures:
l Abort the installation process and then perform the installation
procedure again.
If you find in the middle of the RU PC-TOOL installation process that "For Client PC" is
inadvertently chosen, you can abort the installation process.
In this instance, abort the installation process and install the RU PC-TOOL. For details
on the procedure, see "Appendix 5-1 Corrective Procedure 1."
{IN: Appendix 5-1_Corrective Procedure 1}
l Delete the CLIENT PC-TOOL and then perform the installation procedure
again.
If you complete the RU PC-TOOL installation process with "For Client PC" inadvertently
chosen, the CLIENT PC-TOOL is installed.
In this instance, delete the CLIENT PC-TOOL with the RU-APL CD and then install the 2. When a message appears to ask whether you want to cancel the installation
RU PC-TOOL. For details on the procedure, see "Appendix 5-2 Corrective Procedure 2." process, click [Yes].
{IN: Appendix 5-2_Corrective Procedure 2}
3. Click on [Finish].
4. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "Appendix 4-2 Installing the RU PC-
TOOL."
{IN: Appendix 4-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-12
Appx IN-13
2. Corrective Procedure 2 5. Click on [Remove].
This section describes the procedure for deleting the CLIENT PC-TOOL with the RU-APL CD
and installing the RU PC-TOOL.
1. If the CLIENT PC-TOOL is running, exit it.
2. Insert the RU-APL CD into the Console.
→ The "Set Up PC-TOOL" window automatically opens.
3. Click on [UNINSTALL].
6. When the uninstallation process is completed, click [Finish].
4. Click on [NEXT].
7. Install the RU PC-TOOL as directed under "Appendix 4-2 Installing the RU PC-
TOOL."
{IN: Appendix 4-2_Installing the RU PC-TOOL}
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-13
Appx IN-14
Appendix 6. Installing the Protective Member 3. Select an RU from "LIST OF EXISTING RU", and click [MUTL].
Described below are the procedures for installing the protective member when packing the
RU for transportation.
1. Turn ON the power of the FCR-MB 201.
2. Open the Windows start menu window, designate "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\
TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTool.exe" in the "Start Search" column, and press the [Enter]
key.
4. Select “Shutter Close”.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-14
Appx IN-15
5. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears. 9. Insert the protective member into the cassette inlet.
u NOTE u
Insert the protective member in the direction as shown in the figure below.
6. Click on the upper right on the MUTL window, and exit from the MUTL.
7. Shut down the CL.
8. Turn OFF the power of the FCR-MB 201.
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-15
Appx IN-16
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual Appx IN-16
Control Sheet
Issue date Revision number Reason Pages affected
08.20.2010 01 New release (FM5647) All pages
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit
Service Manual
Performance Check (PC)
014-237-01E FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual
08.20.2010 FM5647
PC-1
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit 3. Image/Conveyance Checks
{IN:6._Image/Conveyance Checks}
Performance Check List - X-ray exposure information with a dose of ST IP OK NG
X-ray dose: mR Voltage: kV Tube current: mA
The purpose of this performance check list is used at the time of FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Time: msec Distance: cm Exposure chamber:
installation to record the steps performed, measured values, and settings, which are based Bulb No.:
on the instructions set forth in the Service Manual. This checklist is not supposed to replace Additional filter: Yes (AL: mm, Cu: mm) No
the installation steps set forth in the FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual but is to be
IP size: × IP barcode No.:
followed concurrently.
S value:
Verify the proper equipment operations at installation and after servicing by checking the
system connection and output image quality (section 4 or later), and then pass the equipment - Image/Conveyance Checks OK NG
over to the customer. - Image format check: white blank portion, ____ mm max. (specified value: 2 mm max.)
OK NG
Installation Information
4. IP type and setup checks
- IP type used at the institution VN VI
Serial Number: Software Ver.:
- CONFIGURATION setup for the RU VN VI
Site Name: Installed by:
Site Number: Signature: - Check that the IP used at the institution agrees with the CONFIGURATION setup for
the RU. OK NG
Room Name: Installation Date/Servicing Date:
5. Summary test OK NG
Checklist Includes checks for normal bootup and termination.
1. Preparation for Installation 6. Output films or image data are stored as records for performance check.
OK NG
{IN:2._Preparation for Installation}
- Checking the Items Supplied OK NG 7. Test equipment used for the check
Machine main body Test equipment: Model: S/N:
Accessories Test equipment: Model: S/N:
Test equipment: Model: S/N:
2. Installing RU Software
{IN:5._Installing RU Software}
- RU IP address: Default (172.16.1.10) Modify (__________)
- FTP server IP address: Default (172.16.1.20) Modify (__________)
- Identification code of the machine (RU):
- Software Version:
- Backup of set file (machine-specific data) OK NG
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PC-2
PC-3
BLANK PAGE
014-237-01E
08.20.2010 FM5647
FCR-MB 201 Reader Unit Service Manual PC-3
You might also like
- FCRGo2 - Mobile Unit ServiceManual - 014-236-01E75% (4)FCRGo2 - Mobile Unit ServiceManual - 014-236-01E146 pages
- 014-226-01E - FCRGo FCR-MB101 (System) - SMNo ratings yet014-226-01E - FCRGo FCR-MB101 (System) - SM42 pages
- CR-IR344 - 03E-FCR 5501D & 5501DPlus PDFNo ratings yetCR-IR344 - 03E-FCR 5501D & 5501DPlus PDF948 pages
- Fujifilm FCR Capsula X CR-IR-357 Digitizer - Service Manual100% (5)Fujifilm FCR Capsula X CR-IR-357 Digitizer - Service Manual420 pages
- FCR-MB101 Service Manual Update ECN 2008-E-0257No ratings yetFCR-MB101 Service Manual Update ECN 2008-E-02577 pages
- Fujifilm-FCR Profect CS Clearview-Service Manual100% (1)Fujifilm-FCR Profect CS Clearview-Service Manual1,364 pages
- Samsung Ultrasound SONOACE R3: Quality and Value in Portable Color UltrasoundNo ratings yetSamsung Ultrasound SONOACE R3: Quality and Value in Portable Color Ultrasound2 pages
- Samsung Ultrasound H60 Samsung Ultrasound Mysono U6: The Smart ChoiceNo ratings yetSamsung Ultrasound H60 Samsung Ultrasound Mysono U6: The Smart Choice4 pages
- Thermoelectric Power Generation ExplainedNo ratings yetThermoelectric Power Generation Explained7 pages
- Danfoss Sonometer 40 - Installation GuideNo ratings yetDanfoss Sonometer 40 - Installation Guide16 pages
- Tamil Nadu Vehicle Registration CertificateNo ratings yetTamil Nadu Vehicle Registration Certificate1 page
- LH2 Infrastructure for H2 Aviation DevelopmentNo ratings yetLH2 Infrastructure for H2 Aviation Development20 pages
- Triple Well Cmos Process - Google SearchNo ratings yetTriple Well Cmos Process - Google Search1 page
- Continuous Probability Distributions OverviewNo ratings yetContinuous Probability Distributions Overview8 pages
- Discovering Knowledge Through Learning VideosNo ratings yetDiscovering Knowledge Through Learning Videos6 pages
- Ucce - B - Scripting and Media Routing Guide - 1262No ratings yetUcce - B - Scripting and Media Routing Guide - 1262262 pages
- Annual Review: Objective Scoring SystemNo ratings yetAnnual Review: Objective Scoring System27 pages
